An Australian language as spoken by the Awabakal, the people of Awaba, or lake Macquarie (near Newcastle, New South Wales) being an account of their language, traditions, and customs:

■>-5l»>'""^

B-^ i^l Commission, ?dlovlb's (Columbiau (!:vposition,

CHICAGO, 1893.

Offices of ihc ixecutivo Commissioner j

Chicago, ..^.f^.yZ>^= ^^^

forwarded tvith tJio C07nplim&nts of th&
Won. 4rthicr 0lcmvich^ JIM., &'.0l.G.S.,
idifiy , 11.^. i'y and (QX&cutiv& Gotnmission&r
for Jf&iv Soioth tOales.

Vlh 103—92

"'0

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

W

^?I7T7Xt5S

AN

AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE

AS SPOKEN BY THE

A^TV^^B^KA^L

THE PEOPLE OF

AWABA OR LAKE MACQUARIE

(NEAR NEWCASTLE, NEW SOUTH WALES)

BEING AN ACCOUNT OF

THEIR LANGUAGE, TRADITIONS, AND CUSTOMS

BY

L. E. THEELKELD.

Re-arranged, condensed, and edited,

WITH AN APPENDIX,
BY

JOHN ERASEE, BA., LL.D.,

Fellow of the Royal Sucietij of New South Wales;

Axsoeiate of the Victoria Institute of Great Britain ;

Deligue General Cpour I Oceanic J de V Alliance Scientijique de Paris;

Hon, Con. Member of the Celtic Socittij of Montreal ;

Author of

THE ETRUSCANS : WERE TIIEY CELTS ?
THE ABORIQISES OF ACSTRALIA : TUEIR ETHNIC POSITION AND RELATIONS.

CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER.
1892.

AN"

AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE

AS SPOKEX BY THE

AJ\\rj^:BJ^j^js^Tj

THE PEOPLE OF

AWABA OE LAKE MAC QUAE IE

(NEAE NEWCASTLE, NEW SOUTH WALES)

BEING AN ACCOUNT OF

THEIR LANGUAGE, TRADITIONS, AND CUSTOMS

BY

L. E. THEELKELD.

Be-arranged, condensed, and edited,

WITH AN APPENDIX,
BY

JOHN ERASER, BA., LL.D.,

Fellow of the Royal Society of New South Vales;

Assoriate of the Victoria Institute of Great Britain;

Selegtie General (pour I'Oceanie) de V Alliance Scientijtque tie Paris;

Hon, Con. Member of the Celtic Society of Montreal ;

Author of

THE ETRUSCANS : WERE THEY CELTS ?
THE ABORIGINES OF AUSTRALIA : TUEIR ETHNIC POSITION AND RELATIONS.

CHAELES POTTEE, GOVEENMENT PEINTEE.

IVBRSIT

s:^ 3/

?Lllol
i\'7 I&

THE EDITOR'S PREFACE.

This volume is issued by the Grovernment of New South Wales,
as a record of the language of native tribes that are rapidly dis-
appearing from the coasts of Eastern Australia. Presentation
copies will be sent to the chief learned societies at home and
abroad. The indigenes of the Sydney district are gone long ago,
and some of the inland tribes are represented now only by a few
families of wanderers. In all New South Wales, there are only
five thousand full-blood blacks ; only four or five hundred in
Victoria ; and in Tasmania the native race became extinct m
1S76. They have decayed and are decaying in spite of the
fostering care of our Colonial Governments.

A considerable portion of this volume consists of Mr. Threl-
keld's acquisitions in the dialect which I have called the Awabakal,
from Awaba, the native name for Lake Macquarie — his sphere of
labour. But we have now come to know that this dialect was
essentially the same as that spoken by the sub-tribes occupying
the land where Sydney now stands, and that they all formed
parts of one great tribe, the Kuriggai.

In an Appendix I have collected several Grammars and
Vocabularies as a contribution to a comparative knowledge of
the dialects. The map and other illustrations are new, and were
prepared for this work.

The Gospel by St. Luke herein is now of no practical value,
except to a linguist ; but it is unique, and it shows the structural
system of the language.

JOHN FEASEE.

Sydney,

May, 1892.

CONTENTS.

PAGES.

Introduction ... ... xi — Ixiv

Part I. — The Grammar and the Key ... ... 1-120

Grammar of the Awabakal Dialect ... i — 46

Vocabulary of the Awabakal Dialect ... 47 — 82

The Key to the Structure of the Awabakal

Dialect ... ... ... ... ... go-120

Part II. — Translation of the Gospel by St. Luke 128-196

Part III. — The Lexicon to the Gospel by St.

Luke ... ... ... ... ... ... 201-227

Part IV. — The Appendix

(A.) Grammar and Vocabulary of the

jMinyung Dialect ... ... ... 3 — 27

(B.) Grammar of the Narrinyeri and other

Dialects of South Australia ... ... 28 — 47

(C.) Grammar of a Dialect in Western

Australia ... ... ... ... 48 — 56

(D.) Grammar and Vocabulary of the

Wiradhari Dialect in New South Wales 56-1 20

(E.) Prayers in the Awabakal Dialect ... 120-127

(F.) Sentences in the Kamalarai Dialect 1 27-1 31

(G.) The Earliest Specimen of an Aus-
tralian Language ... ... ... 131-148

EEEATA.

rage G, line 28.
11,
17,

18,
19,

37,
137,

4.

26.

IG.
29.

Fo}' ' sine ' read ' shine.'

For gatoa read Bag.

Lei Norn. 1 and Nom. 2 cliange places, so that
bag and its line shall be Nom. 1.

JOet Nom. 1 and Nom. 2 change places, so that
bag and its line shall be Nom. 1.

Zet Nom. 1 and Nom. 2 change places, so that
unni and its line shall be Nom. 1.

For bag (his) read bag ^(hts).

The icord gatun seems to have dropped out
of the manuscript at * * *

Page 4, adfinem, T/n'sf recurs in the same sense on pp. 13, 14, IG.
„ 30, „ For apioendis read volume.

THE ILLUSTRATIONS.

->=<3-£l3-«e=i —

1. Map of Xew Soutk Wales as occupied by the t^atite
TRIBES Frontispiece

This map is the issue of ten years' thought and inquiry on the location
of our native triues ; nothing of the kind has ])een attempted before. The
basis of the wliole is the boundaries of the Kamalarai tribe, which were
marked out for me by a friend who knew the tribe Avell fifty years ago ; his
information I have tested and extended by answers I got from others, who
also knew tlie tribe about that time. The Walarai dialect differs only a
little from tlie Kamalarai proper ; so also the Waihvun, spoken by the
Kgaiamba blacks ; for this reason, and because they have the classification
of the Kamalarai, these are regarded as cndy subdivisions of the great Ka-
malarai trilje. The Walarai dialect extends into Queensland.

The next great tribe is the Kuringgai on the sea coast. Their 'taurai'
(hunting ground or territory) is known to extend north to the Macleay
Eiver, and I found that southwards it reached the Hawkesbury. Then,
by examining the remains of the language of the natives about Sydney and
southwards, and I>y other tests, I assured myself that the country there-
about was occui^ied by sub-tribes of the Kurringgai.

In a similar manner, I determined the territory of the Murrinjari on the
south-east coast.

The boundaries of the Wiradhari tribe have long been known. Probably
they did not extend quite to the ]\Iurray, but that river is their natural
limit on the south.

From Moulamein westwards, as shown on the map, or from a line drawn
from the Murruiiibidgee to the Murray somewhat farther east than that,
and on both side's of the Murray, there is a patch of associated tribes whose
dialects are called Yerry-yerry, Marrawarra, Yuyu, Tataty, Watty-watty,
&c. , all from the local words for ' no.' Their position in fragments there is
curious, and may be the result of some displacement from above by the in-
coming of stronger tribes, such as the Wiradhari.

The Bakanji is another strong tribe whose locality is well defined on the
east by the \Viradhari. A sub-tribe of it is the Berriait, bordering on the
Lachlan River and the Wiradhari frontier. A small portion of the north-
west of New South Wales and much more of the adjoining territory in
Queensland and South Australia has a tribe which some call the Kornu,
but I am not sure that that is the correct name for it.

The boundaries of the Paikalyung tribe were given me by the Rev. H.
Livingstone, who knows it well. Its territory runs along the coast up
nearly to Brisbane.

The next tribe (I have called it Wachigari) has its ' taurai ' limited by
the Paikalyung on the north and the Kuringgai on the south.

The Yakkajari speak the Pikambal dialect, and extend across our border
some distance into Queensland.

X THE ILLUSTRATIONS.

The New England tribe, the Yunggai, has caused me much perplexity.
There are scarcely any blacks of that territory now surviving ; but the
tribal language is quite different in its words from those around it ; I also
know for certain that the table-land of New England did not belong either
to the Kamalarai or the \Yalarai. I have, therefore, called this tribe the
Yung-gai, from Y''ung — the name which the coast tribes give to New
England.

The Ngarego tribe belongs rather to Victoria than to New South Wales.

Of these tribes, the Kamalarai, Walarai, Ngaiamba, Bakanji, Wiradhari,
the Associated Tribes, the Ngarego, the Kuringgai, are names already estab-
lished and in use ; and most of them are formed from the local word for
' no,' and thus describe more the speech than the people. The names,
Murrinjari, Wachigari, Paikalynng, Yakkajari, I have made ; for these
tribes have no general name for themselves. Wachi-gari and Yakka-jari
are legitimate formations from the local words for 'no'; Murrin-jari and
Paikal-yung mean the 'men,' which also is the meaning of the native
tribe-name Kuringgai — all from their distinctive tribal-Avords for ' man.
Tribes of aborigines, in many parts of the world, call themselves ' the men.

2. PoETEAiT or BiBABAN ... ... ... ... Page 88

This is the intelligent aboriginal who was so useful to Mr. Threlkcld.
The illustration is reproduced from the pencil sketch which was made by
Mr. Agate.

3. Portrait of " Old Margaret " — an ' Awabakalin,' or

woman of the Lake Macquarie sub-tribe ... Page 196

' Old Margaret ' is the last survivor of the Awabakal. She is now living
in her slab-hat on a piece of land near Lake Macquarie Heads, and supports
herself by her own industry. Slio had the advantage of early training in
an English home in the district ; she is respectable and respected.

Her features, as compared with those of other natives, show how much
the type varies ; and yet she is an Australian of pure origin. She was born
at Waiong, near the Hawkesbury River, and is now about 65 years of age.

4. BuNTiMAi — 'A Messenger' Page 212

This blackfellow is evidently on an errand which requires despatch.
The 'possum cloak, the hair, and the general cast of the figure are true to
nature, but the calves of the legs are stouter than usual.

OP thr"^^
EESIT7]

INTRODUCTION.

I. The Gbammahs.

No large effort lias yet been made to master the difBculties that
present themselves in the study of the comparative grammar of
the Australian languages. The only thing in this direction, that
is known to me, is a paper on the "Position of the Australian Lan-
guages, by W. H. J. Bleek, Esq., Ph.D.," published in L871. Dr.
Bleek was a philologist who, in 1858, assisted in cataloguing the
Library of His Excellency Sir Geo. Grey, K.C.B.,theu Governor
of Cape Colony. Twenty years previously, Sir George (then
Captain Grey), as leader of an expedition into the interior of our
continent, had excellent opj^ortunities of seeing the native tribes
in their original condition ; and the knowledge thus gained was
enlarged by him and matured, while he was Governor of South
Australia. The records of the knowledge of so intelligent an
observer as Sir George Grey are sure to be valuable. These
records are now in the South African Public Library, Cape Town,
having been presented to that Library by him, along with his col-
lection of books and other manuscripts.

The catalogue of Sir George Grey's Library was published hj
Triibner & Co., London, and Dr. Bleek devotes a portion of the
second volume to the philology of the Australian languages.*

The earliest of individual efforts to deal with any single lan-
guage of the Australian group was made by the Eev. L. E.
Threlkeld, who, for many years, was engaged as a missionary
among the blacks of the Lake Macquarie district, near Newcastle,
New South Wales. His Grammar of their language was printed
in Sydney in 1834, at the " Herald O^ce, Lower George Street."
A few years previously, Mr. Threlkeld had translated the Gospel
by St. Luke into the same language. This translation remained
in manuscript and had disappeared ; recently I discovered that
it still exists, and is now in the Public Library of Auckland. This
" Grammar " and the " Key " and the " Gospel," and some smaller
fruits of Mr. Threlkeld's labours on that language, are now pub-
lished in a collected form in the present volume. But Threlkeld's
Grammar deals with only one dialect, and, for the purposes of
comparative grammar, more languages than one are required.

* Throughout this Introduction I say "languages," although, in fact, there
is but one Australian language with many dialects ; I also use the word
" language " instead of dialect, wherever the meaning is clear.

SU IXTEODUCTIOy.

In lonliing about for anofher Grammar, I remembered that Mr.
Horatio Hale, the philologist of the United States' Exploring Ex-
pedition, had, in his A'olume on the Ethnography and Philology
of the Expedition-*, made a short synopsis af two of our dialects.
"When in this colony, he got access to the Eev. William AVatson,
then missionary to the aborigines at "Wellington Valley," who
drew up for him "nn account of the most important peculiarities
of the Wiraduri language, modelled as nearly as possible on
the Grammar of Mr. Threlkeld, for the purpose of comparison."
Purther search disclosed the fact that, as early as 1835, a
Dictionary and a Grammar had been prepared there, and the
Gospel by St. Luke had been translated. How valuable these
materials would now be, to illustrate the Awabakal of Lake
Macquarie ! but Mr. Watson had no relatives in this colony, and
on his death his manuscripts were sold as waste paper; so I am
told. Fortunately, the late Archdeacon Giinther, of Mudgee,
wrote a Grammar of the Wiradhari and collected a copious
A^ocabulary about the year 1838. The Vocabulary I found to be
in the hands of his son, the present Archdeacon of Camden, and
it is here published, along with a short introductory Grammar
wdiich forms part of the manuscript Vocabulary. A longer
Grammar was, many years ago, sent to the home country, and
I fear that it cannot now be recovered.

The next labourers in the field of Australian grammar were the
Liitheran Missionaries, Messrs. Teichelmann (E, G.) and Schiir-
mann (C. W.) In 1840 they published a " Grammar, Vocabulary,
and Phrase-book" of the aboriginal language of the Adelaide tribe.
Then, in 185G, appeared the primer, " Gurre Kamilaroi," by the
Eev. W. Eidley. Mr. Ridley, who was a man of rare devotedness
and self-denial, went among the aborigines of Liverpool Plains and
shared the privations of their wandering life, in order that he
might learn their language, and so be able to teil them the message
of the Gospel. In 1866 (2nd edition, 1875), our Government
Printing Olflce issued his book on the " Kamilaroi, Dippil, and
Turrubul languages."

A Grammar of some of the dialects spoken in South Australia
is contained in Taplin's " Folk Lore," which was published in
1879. This Grammar is given here in a condensed form.

II. Mr. Threlkeld.
Lancelot Edward Threlkeld, the pioneer in the field of Aus-
tralian language, died in Sydney on the morning of the lOtli
October, 1859, having on the previous day preached twice in his
own church — the church of the Bethel Union there.

* See pp. 479-531 of " United States' Exploring E.xpedition during the
years 1838-42, under the command of Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. — Vol. VI.,
Ethnography and Ethnology : By Horatio Hale, philologist of the Expedi-
tion. /-"AiYatZe/p/i/a .• Lea and Blanchard. 1846."

I>'TEODUCTIO>". XIU

Mr. Tlirelkeld's birthplace was Hatlierleigh, iii Devon, but the
family belonged originally to the county of Cumberland, and there
to the village of Threlkeld, which either had its name from them
or gave its name to them. In " Burke's Peerage," we read of
Threlkeld of Threlkeld in the time of Edward I. That family
became extinct in the male line in the reign of Edward IV, but
the name was continued through a younger branch, Threlkeld* of
Melmerly, in the same county.

A romantic story from the Wars of the Roses connects itself
with a Sir Lancelot Threlkeld by his marriage with the widow of
Lord Clifibrd. Clifford had much power in Yorkshire, wliere
his estates were, but, although related to the House of York, he
was a keen supporter of the Lancastrians, and with his own hand
be killed the youngest son of the Duke of York in cold blood after
the battle of Sandal, in revenge for an injury he had received
The sanguinary conduct of Lord Clifford on this occasion is com-
memorated by our poet, Drayton, in his ' Polyolbion,' in the lines
beginning : — -

" ^Vhere York himself before his castle gate,

Mangled with wounds, on his own earth lay dead,
Upon whose body Clifi'ord down him sate,
Stabbing the corpse, and, cutting off' his head,
Crowned it with paper, and, to wreak his teene.
Presents it so to his victorious Queene."

Three months after this, Clifford was himself shot through with
an arrow in the battle of Towton, and the Yorkists, being now
victoi'lous, stripped the Clifford family of all their estates and
possessions; this happened in the year 1470. The heir to Lord
Clifford's name and fame was a little boy then six years old. His
mother feared that the House of York would seek to avenge on
him the murder of their own boy, the young Earl of Rutland ;
she had now no powerful friends to protect her and her son, and
she knew that her movements were watched ; in these circum-
stances she resolved, for safety, to commit her boy to the care of
her faithful retainers, and have him brought up as a shepherd on
his own estates. Meanwhile, the report was spread that he had
been sent to Holland and had died there. When he had reached
the age of twelve years, his widowed mother married Sir Lancelot
Threlkeld. This was a fortunate thing for the lad, for it led
to his removal from the neighbourhood of his own home to places
of greater security among the mountains of Cumberland ; and his
new father, being entrusted with the secret, faithfully assisted in
watching over the life of the orphan heir. To avert suspicion, it
was still found necessary to continue his disguise ; but, although
he was thus left without education, and could neither read nor
wi'ite till happier days had come, yet the culture of his race showed

XIV IITTEODUCTIOX.

itself in his natural intelligence and his jjersonal demeanour. He
grew u}) a tall and handsome youth, with the features and com-
manding mien of his grandfather, who had been much loved
and regretted. While still living in obscurity as a shepherd, he
gained such a knowledge of astronomy as made him a wonder to
many in later years, and his gentle manners so shone through
rustic attire that he secured the affection of a lady of rank, well
known at that time as the " nut-brown maid "■ — the daughter of
Sir John St. John; her he married. When the "Wars of the
Roses " were ended by the accession of Henry VII., and peace was
again come, the young Lord Clifford, now 32 years of age, asserted
his right to the Londesborough estates, and, on petition to the
King, was restored to his title and his lands. The men of the time
called him the " Shepherd Earl." In addition to Londesborough,
the place of his birth, he was owner of Brougham and Skipton,
but he usually resided near Bolton, and there, after many years,
he died, and was buried in the choir of the Abbey. His son was
created Earl of Cumberland ; and a grandson was a naval com-
mander in Elizabeth's reign. In 1742 the heiress of the Cliffords
married an ancestor of the present Duke of Devonshire, and with
her the estates in Yorkshire passed over to that family.

This incident has only a remote connection with the Threlkeld
family, but I have given it here as an interesting glimpse into the
private history of noble families in those troublous times.

Our author was born in 1788 at the village of Hatherleigh,
and, while still a boy, he experienced deep religious convictions
under the ministry of the vicar of the parish. This ultimately led
to his offering himself to the London Missionary Society for work
in the foreign field, and so, after sevei'al years of instruction and
training at Gosport under Mr. Bogue, he was ordained, along wdth
Mr. Ellis, on the 8th November, 1815, and appointed to labour at
Rai-atea, in the ' Society ' group of the South Seas. Towards the
end of that month he embarked in a government vessel, the
" Atlas," which was aboiit to proceed to Sydney. At Eio de
Janeiro, his wife fell ill, and for nearly a year he had to remain there,
all the while acting as the first Protestant minister whom the
English residents at Eio ever had. On 22nd January, 1817, he
sailed again, along with Messrs. John Williams, Darling, Bourne,
and Piatt, all bound for missionary work in the islands of the
South Seas.

After a short stay at Hobart, they reached Sydney on the 11th
May, 1817, and Mr. Threlkeld proceeded to Eaiatea soon after.
The death of his wife led him to return to Sydney in 1824.
Next yeai', the London Missionary Society established a mission
to our native blacks at Lake Macquarie under the care of
Threlkeld, and there, with assistance subsequently from the

lyTRODUCTION. XV

Government of the Colony of New South Wales, the mission
was maintained till December 31, 1841, when the number
of the natives there had so declined that it had to be
abandoned. It was during those seventeen years of labour that
Mr. Threlkeld acquired so much experience in the use of the
native dialect of the tribe, that he was enabled to prepare the
works which form the bulk of this volume. The year 1842 and
the surrounding years were a time of terrible commercial distress
in the colony, and, when the mission station was abandoned, Mr,
Threlkeld lost all his property there. But, in 1845, he was
appointed minister of the Mariners' Church, Sydney, and in that
otfice he continued till his death. By his first wife he had one
son and three daughters ; by his second wife — a daughter of Dr.
Arndell, the Colonial surgeon of the time — he had two sons and
three daughters. Those of his children who still survive occupy
honourable positions in this colony.

The following is believed to be a complete list of Mr. Threlkeld's
labours in the dialect which I have called the ' Awabakal ' : —

1827.- — "Specimens of the Aboiiginal Language"; printed then.

1829. — First draft of the Translation of the Gospel by St. Luke.

1832. — Translation of Prayers for Morning and Evening Service
from the Bitual of the Church of England ; these were selected
by Archdeacon Broughton.

1834.— "The Australian Grammar" published. Mr. Threlkeld's
memoranda show that at the beginning of this year the follow-
ing subjects were occupying his attention : — •

1. Specimens of the Language.

2. The Australian Grammar.

3. The Gospel by St. Luke, under revisal.

5. The Gospel by St. Mark, in preparation. The first rough

translation was completed in 1837.

.5. The Gospel by St. Matthew, just commenced.

6. The instruction of two native youths in writing and read-

ing their own language.

7. Beading lessons selected from the Old Testament.

8. An Australian Spelling Book.
1836.— "The Spelling Book" printed.

1850. — " The Key to the Aboriginal Language" published.

1859. — At the time of his death he was engaged in completing
the translation of the four Gospels ; and was proceeding with
the " Lexicon to the Gospel by St. Luke." Thus our author's
life closed in the midst of 'labours many,'

XVI INTEODUCTIOK.

III. Ikfluexces affecting the Laxgvage.

The position of our Australian dialects in their relation to the
great families of langua^re has not yet been determined. That
task demands leisure, labour, and skill. A collection of carefully
prepared Grammars and Vocabularies would make the task much
easier ; but where are these to be had ? With the exception of
those that I have named, I know of none. Australian Vocabu-
laries have been collected in abundance, but, for the most part,
these are quite useless to the philologist ; they consist of dialect-
names for native customs and weapons, for the birds of the air,
the beasts of the field, and the trees of the forest. All this is
mistaken labour which yields no fruit. "What we want is to get
from each dialect a sufficient number of words expressing the
ideas essential to a language, in the form of substantive, adjec-
tive or verb, and a sufficient number of simple sentences ; this
would enable the philologist to ascertain what is the structure of
its grammar and its vocables.

The Australian languages are subject to a principle of change
which it is worth our pains to consider here. The native tribes
name their children from any ordinary occurrence, which may
have taken place at the birth or soon after it. Por instance, if
a kangaroo-rat were seen to run into a hollow log at that time,
the child would be named by some modification of the word for
kangaroo-rat. At a later period of the boy's life, that name might
be changed for another, taken from some trivial circumstance in his
experience ; just as our own boys get by-names at school. "When
a man or woman dies, his family and the other members of the
tribe, as far as possible, never mention his name again, and dis-
continue the use of those ordinary words which formed part of
his name ; other words are substituted for those common ones,
and become permanently established in the daily language of the
clan or sub-tribe to which the deceased belonged.* In this way
new words arise to designate those familiar objects, the previous
names for which have been cast aside ; and these new words are
formed regularly from other root-words, that describe probably
another quality inherent in the thing in question. Let me illus-
trate this matter by examples. A man or a woman may get a
name from some peculiar physical feature, such as a large mouth,
or chin, or head ; or a name taken from an animal or tree, or
.any similar object, animate or inanimate, which iiad some relation
to his birth. A Tasmanian woman was called Eamanalu, ' little
gull,' because a gull fiew by at the time of the child's birth.
After her death, the word ram a would never be used again for
'a gull '; a new name for ' gull ' would be invented, forrfied, it

* It is possible that the discaixled word resumes its place in the language
after a while ; this point I have not ascertained ; at all events, the adopted
word remains.

INTRODUCTION. XVll

may be, from a root-word meaning ' white,' Lecause of the white-
ness of the bird. This new word would be used by all the
kindred and acquaintances of the deceased, and would ere long
establish itself in the language of that portion of the tribe as the
right name for ' gull.' Again, a boy of the Dungog tribe of
blacks, in our own colony, was receiving instruction from the old
men of the tribe ; he was required to make a spear, and was sent
into the bush to select a suitable piece of wood ; he cut off and
brought to them a piece of the ' cockspur ' tree ; this choice was
so absurd, that forthwith his instructors dubbed him Bobin-
kat, and that was his name ever after. When he died, the
word bo bin would disappear, and some other name be found
for the cockspur tree. A}id the operation of this principle is not
confined to Australia ; it is found also in Polynesia ; but there
it has respect to the living, not the dead. High chiefs there
are regarded as so exalted personages, that common people must
not make use of any portion of their names in ordinary talk,
for fear of giving offence. If, for example, a chiefs name con-
tains the word pe'a, ' bat,' the tribe calls the 'bat,' not pe'a, but
manu-o-le-lagi, ' bird of the sky.' In languages which are
not subject to these influences, the derivation of such a word is
usually very plain; the Latin vespertilio, ' bat,' for instance,
bears its origin on its very face ; but if a philologist, not knowing
the history of the word manu-o-le-lagi, were to find it to mean
a ' bat ' in a Polynesian tongue, he would be puzzled to explain
how it is that a creature so peculiar as the ' bat,' should have
been named by a w^ord having so indefinite a meaning as the ' bird
of the sky.' Any one who may have had the curiosity to look
into lists of names for common things in Australian vocabularies,
must have been surprised to see how diverse are these names
in the various tribes, but your wonder ceases to be wonder when
the cause is known. In fact, we do find that amono: conter-
minous tribes, and even in the sub-sections of the same tribe, these
words vary greatly; for the presence of death from time to time
in the encampments kept up a frequent lapse of words.

To show how much a native language may be effected by this
cause of change, I quote here a few sentences from Taplin, who,
for many years, was in daily contact with the black natives of
>South Australia. In his Vocabulary he says : —

"Therto, 'head'; obsolete on account of death. Koninto, 'stomach';
obsolete on account of death. Muna, ' hand '; not used on account of
the death of a native of that name. When any one dies, named after
anything, the name of t'^at thing is at once changed. For instance, the
name for ' water ' was changed ninr f lines in about five years on accoant of
the death of eight men who bore the name of ' water.' The reason of this
is that the name of the departed is never mentioned because of a super-
stitious notion tliat his spirit would immediately appear, if mentioned in
any wav."

[IB]

XVlll UTTEODFCTIOX.

It may possibly be asked why our blackfellou-s bad so strong a
disiuclinatiou to mention the name of a friend who had died.
We ourselves have a feeling of the same kind. "We speak of cur
friend as ' the deceased,' ' the departed,' 'him who has gone ' ; and
if we must mention his name, we apologise for it by saying ' poor '
Mr. So-and-so, and seem afraid to use the simple word ' dead.'
But our indigenes have a stronger reason than that. They believe
tliat the spirit of a man, especially if he is killed by violence, is
excessively uncomfortable after death, and malicious, and in its
fretfulness ready to take offence at anything, and so pour out its
Avrath on the living. Even the mention of the dead man's name
would offend, and bring vengeance on them in the night time.
Our blacks seem also to have the idea that the deceased, for a
certain number of days after death, has not 3'et got his spiritual
body, which slowly grows upon him, and that, while in this un-
developed state, he is like a child, and is specially querulous and
vengeful.

lY. Tests in ExAMiKiNa Languages.

I now proceed to show some results which may be obtained
even from our Australian words, by comparing them with others
elsewhere. It is agreed among philologists, that there is no surer
test of the afBuity of different languages than that which comes
through the identification of their pronouns, numerals*, and, to a
less extent, their prepositions. To this I would add, in our present
inquiry, the identity of such common words as 'eye, foot, hand,
tire, sun, moon,' and the like ; for these words cannot have
been \ised much in the names of individuals, and are therefore
not likely to have suffered from the fluctuations which I have
already explained. It is true that, in all languages, the pronouns
and the numerals are sul)ject to abrasion and decay, from the
frequency and rapidity with which they are pronounced, and from
a natural tendency everywhere to shorten the words which are
most in use. But it is the function of the philologist, not only to
understand these causes of decay, but to show the process by
which the words fell away, and to restore them to their original
forms for the purpose of identification.

It is agreed, then, that the numerals, the pronouns, and, to
some extent, the prepositions, are a strong test of the affinity of
languages. On this principle, such languages as the Sanskrit, the
Greek, the Latin, the German and Gothic, the Lithuanian, the
Keltic, have been tested and proved to be so much akin that they
are grouped as a well-defined family of languages — the Aryan.
Some anthropologists, especially when they are not linguists them-
selves, sneer at the labours of philology as deceptive and liable to

* Bopp says that the lowest numerals can never be introduced into any
country by foreigners.

INTRODrCTIOy. XIX

serious error; so are all sciences, If not managed with care and
ability. A student in chemical analysis and synthesis may get
results which are clearly erroneous ; instead of declaring the pre-
scribed methods to be faulty or his materials to be bad, he ought
to blame only his own want of skill in manipulation. As to the
utility of philology, I would only remark that it was by the study
of languages that the place o£ Sanskrit (and consequently of the
Hindu race) was determined in its relation to the other members
of the family I have named, and it was philology alone that
settled the claim of the Keltic, and consequently of the Kelts, to be
regarded as one of the most ancient members of the Aryan family.
In the case of the cuneiform inscriptions, the services which
philology has rendered are inestimable. And It is quite possible
that, amid the conflicting opinions as to the origin of our
Australian race, the via prima salutis, the first dawn of a sure
daylight, may in the future arise from a careful examination of
their language.

As is well known, the Australian numeral system Is very limited
in its range ; our natives say ' one,' ' two ' ; sometimes ' three ' ;
occasionally 'hand' for 'five'; all else is 'many,' 'a great number.'
It was alleged by Sir John Lubbock, and has since been repeated
by everybody, that their having separate words only for 'one' and
' two ' is a proof that Australians possess very limited mental
powers, since they cannot count higher than 'two.' Every colonist,
who has been much in contact with the blacks, can addtice proofs
to show that their mental powers are not so limited, and that,
when our indigenes are taken out of their adverse environment
and encouraged to cultivate their intellectual faculties, they
readily develope a decided capacity for improvement. A friend
of mine, fifty years ago, taught two young black boys to play
chess ; they soon acquired a liking for the game, and learned
to play with caution and skill, and even with success. If it
were possible to surround the blacks with favourable influences
continued from generation to generation, I have no doubt that
their whole position would be altered ; but any final separation
from their ancestral habits would lead to their S2:)cedy extinction
as a race ; this was the issue that was rapidly approaching after
the last remnants of the Tasmanians were removed to Flinders'
Island. But, for many hundreds of years, no one can tell how
many, i\\e Australian race has lived in the midst of adverse
surroundings, tribe warring against tribe, each, tribe restricted
to its own boundaries, the supply of food in our precarious
climate often scanty, the paralysing terror produced by their
strong belief in the supernatural power of demons and of their
own wizards, the ravages of Avaves of disease and death sweeping
over them from time to time ; all these and other causes com-
pelled them to think only of their daily subsistence and the

XX INTRODUCTION.

preservation o£ their lives, fixed and deepened their degradation,
and prevented even the possibility of amelioration and elevation.
The natives of the 8outh Sea islands, whose lot has been a fairer
one, have had many yams and. cocoa-nuts and bananas and other
things to count, and so have developed a wide system of
numbers ; but our poor blackfellows, whose only personal
property is a few spears or so, have not felt it necessary to speak
of more than ' one,' ' two,' or ' three ' objects at once. Then, as
to the linguistic question on which Sir John Lubbock builds his
charge, I think it could be shown that even the Aryan system of
numbers — the most highly developed system of any — is founded
on the words for ' one,' ' two,' ' three,' and no more, all the rest
being combinations of these by addition or by multiplication.
Further, the Aryans have singular and dual forms for nouns and
pronouns, that is, they have number-forms for ' one ' and ' two,'
but all the rest beyond that is included in the general name of
plural, that is 'more'; indeed the Sanskrit uses its word for
' four ' in a general way to mean a considerable number, exactly
as to our blackfellows all else beyond two or three is bula,
' many.' For these reasons I think that this charge against our
blackfellows ought to be laid on better ground than that afforded
by their numerals.

Y. The Australian Numerals.

If Bopp's dictum is well founded, the numerals 'one,' ' two,'
' three,' Avhen tested, may tell us something about the origin of
our Australian blacks. I, therefore, now proceed to examine
these numerals. And here I may be permitted to say that I alone
am responsible for the arguments drawn from the evidence pro-
duced in this inquiry. So far as I know, these arguments have
never been advanced previously ; indeed, I am convinced that
no one has ever discussed these numerals before, for it is com-
monly alleged that it is impossible to give any account of them.

1. The Numeral 'One.'

(a.) Of the words for ' one,' T take up first that which is least
common, pir, ' one.' It is used in the Walarai country (see map).
It must be an old and genuine word, for I know that, in another
dialect, the word piriwal means 'chief,' and pir seems to me to
bear the same relation to piriwal that the Latin primus,
' first,' bears to princeps, ' chief,' ' first,' or the Latin preposi-
tion pro, ' before,' to proceres, ' chiefs,' or our English word
'first' to the German fiirst, 'aprince.' In fact, I regard pro
and pir as the same word originally.

Now, do not mistake me here ; I'or I do not assert that the
languages spoken by our Australians are uterine brothers to the
Latin and the Greek ; but I do assert that all languages have

INTRODUCTION". XXI

one common, althougli ancient, origin, and t^^at, in the essential
Avords of these languages, there are proofs of that common origin.
Pir, then, as allied to pro, means the number which comes
' before ' all others in the row, the one that comes ' first.' The
Latin primus is for pri-imus {cf. Sk. pra-thamas, 'first'), in
which the root pri, not unlike pir, is the same as the Latin pro
andprae. In the Aryan family, the nearest approach to the
Australian pir is the Lithuanian pir-mas, 'first,' and pir-m (a
preposition), 'before'; other remote kinsmen are the Greek
pro-tos, ' first,' pru-tanis, 'aprince,' 'a president' {cf. piriwal),
prin, ' before'; the Gothic fru-ma, 'first'; the Aryan prefixes
pra, fra, pro, pru, prae, pre, and fore as in our English
'fore-ordain.' The Keltic languages drop the initial p ov f,
and say ro, ru, air, ari, to mean ' before.' In the Malay region
ar-uug is a 'chief,' and in Polynesia ari-ki is 'a chief,' which
the Samoans change into ali'i ; these words, I would say, come
from eastern forms corresponding to the Keltic ro, air, 'before.'
In Samoau i lu-ma means ' in front,' and in Malay de-ahi-wan ;
these are like ru ; in Aneityum, a Papuan island of the New
Hebrides, a ' chief is called natimi arid, where natimi means
'man,' and arid is 'high,' 'exalted,' doubtless from the same
root asariki; and arid is to ariki as the Latin procerus,
' tall,' to proceres, ' chief's.' Prom the abraded from ru I take
the New Britain* word lua (Samoan lua'i;, ' first.'

In the Dravidian languages of India, from which quarter, as I
suppose, our Australian languages have come, there is a close
parallel to our word pir, for pir a means 'before,' and pir an
is ' a lord.' Dravidian scholars themselves acknowledge that
pir an comes from the Sanskrit preposition pra, ' before'; this
corroborates my derivation of the Australian word piriwal and
the Maori ariki. The Aroma dialect of New Guinea says pira-
na, ' face'; and in my opinion this pirana bears the same rela-
tion to the Dravidian pira that the Latin frons has to the pre-
position pro, the Samoan mua-ulu to mua, 'first,' and the
English fore-head, to be-fore. The Motu dialect says vaira
for ' face, front'; I take this to be a metathesis of pira, for the
Motu also says vaira-nai, 'before'; another dialect says vari ;
with this compare pro, para, and frons. The negroes, to the
west of Khartoum, also say ber, bera, for ' one.'

The Australian postposition bir-ung, ' away from,' seem.s to be
connected with this root in the same way as the Greek para.
The dictionary meanings of the Sanskrit preposition pra are
"■ before,' ' away,' 'beginning'; now, if these three meanings were

* New Britain and New Ireland are two tolerably large islands lying to the
east of New Guinea, aiid Duke of York Island — a name corrupted by the
natives into Tukiok — is a small island in the straits between these two.
The natives of all these are Papuans.

XXU INTRODrCTION.

carried to Australia throu<j;h the Dravidian form pira, they
abundantly justify my arguments as to tlic origin of the Austra-
lian word pir, 'one,' and birung, 'away from.' In New Britain
pirai means ' odd,' 'not a "round" number' {rf. the game of
'odds and evens '), and this sense must be from a numeral meaning
'one.' In the Ebudan* language of Efate, 'a voice came from
heaven' is nafisan sikei i milu elagi mai, in which milu
elagi signifies ' away from (direction from) the sky.' Here milu
is identical in form and meaning with the AAvabakal birung.
^Further, in New Britain and in the Duke of York Is. (Melanes-
ian), ka, kan mean ' from,' kapi, with verbs of motion, implies
'motion from,' and kabira means 'on account of.' These cor-
resi)oud very well with the forms and uses of the Awabakal post-
positions kai, ka-birung, kiu-birung. The simple form biru
is therefore cognate to the Sanskrit para, Gr., para, 'from.'

Scm3 further light on this lioint may be got from another
quarter. The Hebrew preposition corresponding to birung is
min, or, •without the ??, mi, mii ; in form this is not far removed
from the bi of birung. Min, originally, is a noun meaning a
' part,' and, in its use as a preposition, it answers first to the
partitive genitive or the preposition ex in the classic languages ;
then, from this primary notion, it is used to signify a ' departing
from' anyplace, 'distance from,' 'proceeding or 'receding from';
in these respects it corresponds exactly with the Australian
birung. Now, miin, (minj, ' a part,' comes from the Heh. root
manah, 'to divide.' But, in Dravidian, the verb 'to divide' is
per, piri, and that also is a close approximation to our Australiau
birung. In the chief Dravidian dialects, 'a part', 'a jjortion' is
pal; this again brings us to the Shemitic pala, parash, and
many other forms of that verb, meaning 'to share,' ' to separate,'
&c., and to the Sanskrit phal, 'to divide,' Gr. meiromai, 'I
share,' mer OS, 'apart,' Lat. pars, and a host of Avords from
these. Now, if birung be the Dravidian piri, per, and if piri,
per be the same word as the Sanskrit pal and the Jleb. pala, and
if these are all original root-words belonging to a common stock,
I cannot see how it is possible for anyone to avoid the force of
the argument from this that our Australian indigenes have a
share in a common ancestry, and that, in language, their imme-
diate ancestors are the Dravidians of India.

Results in this Section are : — Preposition forms to mean 'before'
are, in the primitive languages, pro^ pri^pro, prae,pru; other
forms are j9«r-«, par-os, pur-as ; modes of all these a.re,fra, fru,
vor, Jbre, and, without the initial letter, ro, ru, air ; the Lithu-

* I have made the word ' Ebudan ' (Lat. Ehndes insidae), and use it as
more convenient to handle than 'New Hebridean. ' The languages spoken
on New Britain, New Ireland, Duke of York Island, Solomon Islands,
JSanta Cruz, and Banks Islands I call ' Albanuic ' {cf. Lat. Albion), and any
root-words which arc found in the JNlalay, Melanesian, and Pulyuesian
languages I call ' Sporadic. '

lyTRODUCTIOX. XXIU

anian lias plr, and with this correspond the Dravidian pir-a,
' before,' the Australian pir, ' one,' and the Turkic, bir, ' one.' In
Sanskrit, tlie old ablative form purd means ' formerly,' ' first ';
cognates are the Gr. j^aros, ' before,' and the Zen^jyara, 'before.'

(J). But the most common word for 'one' in New South
"Wales is wakul. In fact, it is our Sydney word for ' one,' and
there can be no doubt of its genuineness, for it is noted by
Lieut. -Colonel Collins as a Port Jackson word in his book on the
Colony, published 1802; he spells it wogul. At Newcastle it
waswakol; in the Williams Eiver district, wakul-bo, and on
the Manning, wakul. From my manuscript notes I write
down the various forms which this word assumes, beginning
with Tasmania and passing northwards to the Timor Sea : —
Tasmania, mara-i, mara-wa ; in Victoria, bur ; on the Murray
Eiver near Wentworth and Euston, mo, mata, mada, meta-ta;
on the middle course of the Darling, waichola ; on the Upper
Murray, mala; on Monero Plains, yalla; at Moruya, med-
endaf; in the Murrumbidgee district, mit-ong ; at Jervis Bay,
met-ann; on Groulburn Plains, met-ong ; in the lUawarra
district, mit-ung; at Appin, wogul; at Sydney and north-
wards to the Manning River and the Hastings, wakul; on
Liverpool Plains, mal; at Wellington, mal-and a ; in southern
Queensland, byada, muray, baja, b3^aya; in the Northern
Territory of South Australia, mo-tu, wa-rat, wa-dat.

Besides these, some other words for the number 'one' are used
in various parts of Australia, but those that I have given all pro-
ceed from the original root, which it will be our duty now to
discover. And I notice, first of all, that one word in the list
stretches along the whole extent of seaboard from the Illawarra
district to the Hastings — the word wakul — and this fact affords
the presumption that all that coast line was occupied by the
same tribe, or by tribes closely akin; for the tribes a little
inland say mal and mal-anda for ' one.' Wakul, then, was
the word used by the Sydney blacks, as Collins testifies. If a
chemist has a compound substance handed to him for analysis,
he experiments on it, and tests it in order to discover its elements.
Let us do so with wakul ; it is a compound, for simple roots are
usually monosyllables ; but are its parts wa + kul orwak + ul?
Here I remember that, in the same region where wakul exists,
there is a word kara-kal, ' a wizard,' 'a doctor or medicine-man,'
but inland he is called kara-ji. This satisfies me as proof that
the -kul is merely a formative syllable, and that the root is wa.
And this conviction is strengthened when I cast my eye over the
above list of words ; for they all begin with the sjdlable ma or
some modification of it, the rest of each word consisting of
various formative syllables. As I have now got hold of a clue
to a solution, I reflect that the initial labial of a root-word may

XXIV IXTKODTJCTION.

assume various forms ; thus, />, h, m may interchansje, and may
easily become/, ivh, v, xc. There can be no doubt, for instance,
that the Latin pater, the German vater, aud the English
father are the same word ; there ^;=/=v; and in one district
in Scotland the people always say fat for what and far for
where ; so also the Maori whatu is the Samoau f atu ; that is
f:=ivh ; h and m also are interchangeable, in Oriental languages
especially, for m is only the sound of the letter b modified by the
emission of a breathing through the nose ; m is therefore re-
garded as a h nasalized. I note also that the words under con-
sideration all begin with the cognate sound of m, b, or w, except
yalla; and this example 1 think must have been at onetime
walla, that is, uala, of which the u has obtained the sound of
^ (y); or wa-la may come from the same root as wa-kul, the
difference lying only in the termination. The other vowels of
root word are o, u, e, i, ai, all of which in Australian are modi-
fications of the original sound «.

Having now discovered the root-germ from which our Sydney
friend Avakul proceeded, and having noted the various guises
which he has assumed in these colonies, we must next ask where
he came from, and see if he has any kinsmen in other lands ; for,
when by searching we find that out, we may perhaps be justified
in saying that the Australians brought the root-word with them
from those lands. Before setting out on this quest, I observe
that when a number of men are arranged in a row, he who is
number one is (1) 'before' all the others, and 'in front' of them ;
he is thereby (2) 'first or foremost'; he has (3) the 'pre-eminence'
in honour or authority, and (4) he may be regarded as the ' begin-
ning or origin' of all the others.* We may therefore reasonably
expect that words for 'one' will be akin to other words, bearing
some one or other of these four meanings. I have already shown
that the Kamalarai numeral pir, 'one,' is related to Aryan pre-
positions meaning 'before,' and to the Maori word ariki (Samoan
ali'i), 'a chief,' as one having authority and eminencet ; I shall
now show that the kindred of wakul have the other meanings as
well. And, first, I note that the word bokol is used for 'one' in
the island of Santo, one of the New Hebrides. Bokol is so like
wogul, the Port Jackson word, that I cannot doubt their identity;
and yet it is impossible to suppose that the one word can be
borrowed from the other. The islanders of Santo can never have
had any intercourse with the blacks of Sydney ; nor, if they had
in any past time, can we believe that either language was so

* Cf. the H eh. .Ihadh, kedam, rosh, aftl or yaal, for these meanings.

t The Insular-Keltic words for 'chief,' 'principal,' are prionih, ard,
araid; and roimh is 'before.' It is evident that these are only cor-
ruptions of the root pri, pro, prae, pra, 'hefore.' In Ku, a Dravidian
dialect, 'one' or 'first' is ra (rf. Sk. pra) and in Duke of York Island
(New Britain Group), 'one' is ra, re.

INTEODUCTION. XXV

miserably poor as to be without a word of its own for ' one.' The
blacks of Santo are a frizzly-haired negroid race ; I therefore argne,
from the evidence of this word, that these blacks and our blacks
have, in some way, one common origin.

I next take you to another Papuan region having a negroid
population — a group of islands off the east end of New Guinea
and consisting of New Britain, New Ireland, and some others.
In the Duke of York Island there, I find the following words, all
akin to wakul, viz., makala, 'for the 'first' time' mara, ma-
ra-kam, 'forthe 'first' time,' marua, 'tobear fruit for the 'first'
time, to enter on a new course, to begin,' mara, 100 (= the
'beginning' of a new reckoning), muka, 'first,' muka-na, 'first-'
born son,' muka-tai, 'first,' mun, 'to go first.'* In all these, the
rootis ma, mu, asin Australia, and the abundance of these derived
forms in this Tukiok language proves that the root is indigenous,
not borrowed. Among them I observe mara, 'for the ' first ' time,'
and mara, 100, and this is exactly the Tasmanian word (mara-
wa) for 'one'; another of them is muka, 'first,' and this word, by
dropping the k, which is neverf sounded in Samoan, becomes the
Samoan niua, 'first,' and mua-ulu, 'thefore-head.':j: Mua also is
very common in Samoan (as in f oe-mua, 'the 'first' or stroke oar,'
a-fiia, 'to begin'), and thus proves itself to be native to the
language. Further, you may have observed that some of the
Australian words for 'one' are mo, mata. AVith mo compare the
Santo word mo-ig,'to begin,' — another proof that the Santoans
and the Australians are kinsmen; with mata compare the Motu
word mata-ma, 'abeginning,' and mata-mata, 'new,' 'fresh';
theFijiau matai, 'first,' and tau-mada 'before-hand'; the Maori
ti-mata, 'to begin'; the Samoan a-mata, 'to begin'; the New
Britain a-ma-na, 'before, in front,' mata-na, 'the front,' biti-na
'the commencement'; the Motu badi-na, 'origin,' andthe Aneit-
yumese ni-mti-din, 'the front'; with mu compare the Fijian
vuna, 'to begin,' and the New Britain wa-vuua, 'to begin,' and
the Santo mul, 'a chief,' as being the 'first' man. All these I

* Compare with this the Tamil postposition mun, 'before.'
t The one solitary exception is puke, 'catch you'! — a child's play- word.
+ An uncommon form of the root ba is va ; and from it the Mangaians
(Hervey Islands) say va-ri, 'a beginning'; but in the Koiari dialect of
New Guinea this same word means 'the forehead,' 'the face.' This word
thus illustrates the procession of meanings from the root pra (para),
pro, 'before'; for vari is equivalent to 'that which is before,' hence 'a
beginning,' 'the forehead' as the 'front' part of tlie human body, 'the
face ' ; it also throws some light on the derivation of frons, which has
so puzzled Latin etymologists that some of them derive it from the Greek
ophrus, 'the eyebrow'! The Motumotu dialect of New Guinea says
hali, instead of vari, for 'forehead'; sevei'al other dialects there say
i-piri-ti, paru, para-na, pira-na, for 'face'; these are all connected
with the Dravidian pira, 'before.' The Brahui of Afghanistan says mun,
' the face,' which is the same word as the Tamil, mun, ' before.'

5;XV1 IK^THOBUCTIOK.

have noticed in the course of my reading, but I believe there are
many other words in these islands which are of the same origin
as our Australian word wakul.* 1 pray you to remember that,
with the exception of Samoa and New Zealand, these words all
come from Papuan regions and afford indirect evidence that our
Australians are allied to the Papuans.

As to the Maori and Samoan congeners that I have quoted, it
is commonly alleged that these races are Malayo-Polyuesians, on
the theory that their languages are of Malay origin f; but let us
look at this theory in the light of our present inquiry. It is
said that the Polynesians are Malays. WeJl, let us see. If the
Samoans are Malays, then the Duke of York Islanders are
Malays; for the word mu a, which is essential to the Samoan
language, is the same word as the Tukiok muka ; therefore the
Papuans of that island also are jNIalays ! But the corresponding
Malay word is mu la, 'in front,' ' foremost,' 'at first,' and it is
certain that muka can never be formed from mula ; for, while
Tc may become Z, the letter Z, when once established in a word,
cannot revert to h. Thus the Malay language might be said to
have come from the Duke of York Island, as least so lar as the
evidence of this word goes ! But I acknowledge that they may
both be taken from one common source, and this, I believe, is the
true solution of the question. Where shall we find that common
source? The root-form of mula, muka, mua, and of all the
others, is ma, mu, and if we can find that root, it will be easy to
understand how all these words have been formed independently
from that original root ; and it will then be unnecessary to say
that the Samoan language is of Malay origin, or that the
Papuans of the New Britain isles are using a Malay language. I
now take you to Southern India, to a group of languages called
the Dravidian, occupying the mountains of the Dekkan, and the
coasts both to the east and the west of that. Some of these
Dravidian tribes are considered by the best authorities to be
certainly negroid, and, in England, Prof. Plower, from an exami-
nation of their crania, has classed them r.s kinsmen of the
Australians. One of the most cultivated languages of the group
is the Tamil, and the Tamilians are known to have class-marriage
laws similar to those in Fiji and Australia. Now for ' first' the
Tamil says mudal, and this mudal is a verbal noun meaning 'a
beginning,' ' priority ' in time or place. The root is mu, and dal
is a formative syllable. The m u is, without doubt, our Australian

* These anJ all other words from the New Britain ami Duke of York
Islands I quote from manuscript dictionaries of these languages, prepared
by the missionaries there.

t The name and authority of K. Wilhelm von Humboldt first gave this
theory a standing ; but we have now miach fuller materials on which to
form an independent judgment.

IXTEODrCTIOJf. ' XXVU

root ma, mo, mu. The late Bishop Caldwell says* — "Mudal is
connected with the Tamil postposition miin, 'before'; mudal is
used as the root of a new A-erb ' to begin.' Mu evidently signifies
'priority,' and may be the same as the Tamil mu, 'to be old,'
mudu, ' antiquity.' " I think there is a better derivation than
that. The Sanskrit miila means ' origin, cause, commencement,'
and is the same word as the Malay mul a already referred to,
aud both of these I take from the Sanskrit root-word bhii, 'to
begin to be, to become, to be,' with which is connected the Latin
fore (fuere), 'to be about to be,' fui, &c. From bhu come
such Sanskrit words as bhava, ' birth, origin,' bhavana, 'caus-
ing to be,' b huvauytt, 'a master or lord ' (rf. piran, &c.), and
many other words in the Aryan languages. At all events,
wakul and these other Australian words for ' one ' are assuredly
from the same root as the Dravidian mu-dal, 'first,' 'a begin-
nig.' I, for one, cannot believe that words so much alike both in
root and meaning should have sprung up by accident over so vast
an area as India, Malaya, Kew Gruinea, Fiji, Samoa, and back
again to the New Hebrides and Australia. The only rational
explanation seems to me to be that these races were all at one
time part of a common stock, that in their dispersion they carried
with them the root-words of the parent languages, and that in
their new habitations they dressed out these root-words with
j)refixes and affixes by a process of development, just as circum-
stances required.

Results. — The root in its simplest form is ha, ' to begin to be,'
* to begin'; other forms are ho, bu, hi ; ma, mo, mu ; fa,fu, vu ;
wa. The nearest approach to the Australian ?«fl^?;/, 'one,' is
the Ebudan hoJcol, 'one,' and the Tukiok maTcal-a, 'for the
first time,' but many other cognate words are found all over the
South Seas in the sense of 'first,' 'begin.' The Tasmanian
mara-wa, 'one,' is the same as the Tukiok mar a, ' for the first
time,' and mara, 100; and in New South AVales, mara-gai
means ' first ' in the Mudgee dialect.

2. Tlie Numeral Tico.

Almost the only other Australian numeral is b til a, ' two.' It is
true that several tribes have a distinct word for ' three,' and a few
have a word for ' five ' taken from the word ' hand,' but in most
parts of Australiii the number ' three ' is expressed by ' two-one,'
four ' by ' two-two,' ' five ' by ' two-two-one ' and so on. But the
wore bula is universal ; with various changes of termination, it
exists from Tasmania in the extreme south, right on to the Gulf

*A11 my knowledge of the Dravidian race and language comes from Dr.
Caldwell's "Comparative Dictionary of the Dravidian or South Indian
Family of Languages ; second edition ; London : Triibner and Co., lS7i>." In
this Introduction, I quote from the notes which I made when I read the
book some years ago, and now I cannot always tell whether I am quoting
his words or only my own statement of them.

XXVin INTEODUCTIOX.

of Carpentaria. If you ask me why there is only one word for
' two,' while the words for ' one ' are so numerous and different,
I reply that, in other languages, and especially in those of the
Turanian family, there is a similar diversity in the words for
'one'; and the reason is this, that, wherever there is a con-
siderable number of words for ' origin,' ' commencement.'
' before,' &c., there will be a similar variety in the words for
' one,' which are formed from them. But the range of ideas for
' two ' is somewhat limited ; the only ideas possible are ' repe-
tition,' or 'following,' or something similar. Let me show you
this by a few examples. The Hebrew s hen aim, ' two,' is a dual
form, and is connected with the verb shanah, ' to repeat;' the
Latins also say 'vigesimo altero anno' to mean in the
'twenty second year;' but alter is 'the other of two,' and in
^French and English it means to 'change;' and secundus in
Latin comes from sequor, 'I follo\y.' Thus we shall find that
words for 'two' are the same as words for ' follow,' ' repeat,'
' another,' ' again,' ' also,' ' and,' and the like ; and most of these
ideas are usually expressed by forms of the same root-word.

As to the form of the word bula*, we have here no friendly
karaji to tell us whether the -la is radical or not. I think that
the -la is formative. The Tasmanian bu-ali (Milligan writes
it pooalih) is probably the nearest approach to the original
form, the bu being the root and the -ali the affix. In the
Tasmanian pia-wa, the pia seems to me to be only a dialect form
of bula, for the liquid I easily drops out, and in the Aryan
languages a modified ?< approaches very nearly to the sound of *
(cf. Eng., sir) ; in the Polynesian, i often takes the place of u.
Thus bula would become bu-a, bi-a, pia. The syllable tea in
pia-wa, as in marawa, 'one,' is only a suffix, the same as ba
in our colony. All the other words for ' two ' are only lengthened
forms of bula.

As to the kindred of bula, I find that, in the Papuan island of
Aneityum (New Hebrides), the word in-mul is ' twins'; there,
in is the common prefix used to form nouns; the mul that

* In my manuscript nobes I have the following forms : — From Tasmania,
bura, pooali, piawah ; Victoria, buliim, pollit; South Australia,
bulait, purlaitye ; New South Wales, blula, buloara, bul]oara-bo;
Southern Queensland, bular, pubul, bularre, bulae; Northern Queens-
land, bularoo. It is evident that some of these words have been written
down by men who were not acquainted with the phonology of languages,
and that the spelling does not adequately represent the real sounds. This
is generally the case in vocabularies of Australian words, and is a source of
much perplexity to linguists. One of the commonest mistakes is bular for
bula. In pronouncing that word, our blackfellows let the voice dwell on
the final a, and an observer is apt to think that this is the sound of ar ;
just as a Cockney will say ' idear ' for ' idea,' ' mar ' for ' ma,' or ' pianer '
for 'piano.' In one vocabulary that I have seen almost every word
terminates with r on this principle 1

IKTBODUCTIOX. 5X1X

remains is bul, 'two'; there also um, for mu. is 'and'; in the
other islands it is ma, mo. In New Britain, bal-et is 'again,'
bul-ug, 'again,' 'also,' 'another,' mule, 'again,' biila, ' another,'
' an additional one ' (cf. ma, ' and '), bula, ka-bila, ' also' (with
-bila c/! Tasm. pia), muru, 'to follow.' In Samoan, muli is
'to follow,' f o'i is ' also,' ulu-ga (for f ulu-) is a ' couple.' The
Fijian has tau-muri, 'behind ' in the sense of ' following,' just
as tau-mada in Fijian means 'first' or 'before.' The Malay-
has ulang, 'to repeat,' and pula, 'again, too, likewise.' In
some of the Himalayan regions, to which a portion of the
aboriginal inhabitants of India was driven bj the Aryan invasion,
buli, pli, bli means ' four,' that is, as I suppose, ' two-twos,' — a
dual form of ' two.'

It seems to me that the Dravidian words maru, 'to change,'
muru, 'to turn,' muri, 'to break in two,' are from the same
root as bula, and that root is to be found in Aryan words also,
such as Lat. mu-to, mu-tu-us; for there is a Sk. root ma, ' to
change.' It is known that the Sanskrit dvi, dva, ' two,' gives
the Greek dis (for dvis), 'twice,' and the adjective diss os,
' double,' and that dvi s gives the Latin bis; but the Sk. dva
also gives the Grothic twa, 'other,' 'different,' and the Eug.
twain, 'two,' as well as words for 'two' in many languages.
Hence I think that our root bu, b a, gives the Samoan vae-g a
' a division,' vaega-lerau, ' the half,' and other words ; because
Avben people are 'at one' on any subject they are agreed, but
when they are at 'twos and threes' they are divided in opinion ;
and in the same sense sense I would connect the Lat. divide
with the Sk. root dvi. Probably the Latin varius and the
English variance are connected with the root ba in that same
sense.

I would only add a line to say that our blackfellows use the
word bula also to mean 'many.' I do not believe that this is
the same word as bula, 'two.' I consider it to come from the
same root as the Sanskrit pulu, puru, ' many,' and that root,
under the form of par, pi a, pie, plu, has ramifications all
through the Aryan languages in the sense of ' fill, full, much,
more,' &c. The eastern form of this root gives, in New Britain,
bula,' more,' mag,' many,' b u k a, ' full ' ; in Motu, b a d a is ' much,'
and hutu-ma, 'many,' ' multitude '; in Aneityum, a-lup-as
(lup=plu), 'much'; in Fiji, vu-ga, ' many'; in Duke of York
Island, bu-nui, 'to increase.' In Dravidian, pal is 'many,'
pal-gu, ' to become many, to multiply, to increase.' It thus ap-
pears that the Australian bula, 'many,' has kindred, not only in
Melanesia and the Dekkan, but also all through the Aryan region.

Results. — The root is hu, which denotes ' repetition,' ' change,'
and this is the idea which resides in the Hebrew numeral ' two,'
and in the Latin alter, ' second '; another, but cognate, idea for

XXX INTRODUCTION.

'two' or 'second' is 'that which /b7Zoi<'.?'; of the root hu other
forms are hu, hi, j)i, ma, ono, mn, fu, fo, and it ; from via, mu,
come Dravidian words meaning ' to turn,' ' to change '; and from
the same root-forms there are, in the JSew Hebrides, New Britain,
and Polynesia, numerous words in the sense of 'follow,' 'again,'
' another,' "^a couple,' 'also.' The Melanesian word mu-le, 'again,'
and the Malay ^;?f-Zrr, 'again,' connect themselves, not only with
the Dravidian via-ru, mu-ru, but also with the Sanskrit word
2)u-nar, 'back,' 'again,' and also with the Greek ^ja-Z/w, 'again.'

YI. Other Test-words.
Words for ' Water; 'Blind; 'Eye:

(a). lu dealing with the Australian words for 'water,' 'fire,'
'sun,' 'eye,' &e., I must use brevity. All these can be proved to
have their roots in India, and to have stems and branclies from
these roots in Aryan Europe, in Malay lands, and in the islands
of the South Seas. ¥irst, let US'* take uj) the word for ' water.'

Collins quotes bado as the Port Jackson word for 'water';
others write it badu ; it is found in various parts of our colony
and in AYestern Australia. The root is ba, ma, and the du is a
suffix; du is also in Dravidian a formative to neuter nouns. The
root ma means 'to be liquid,' 'to flow.' It is a very old word;
for the Assyrian cuneiform inscriptions have mami, 'waters,'
and this is a plural by reduplication; the Hebrew has mo, ma(i),
'water,' mo a, 'to flow'; the ancient Egyptian has mo, 'water,'
Avhence, according to some, the name Moses ; the Sanskrit has
ambu (am ^or ma, by metathesis), 'water;' the Keltic has
amhainn, abhuinn, 'a river,' whence comes the river-name,
'Avon.' From ma come the words wai and vai which are so
common for 'water' in the J>J^ew Hebrides and in the Polynesian
islands, and from the same root, in a sense known to the Arabs,
by an appropriate euphemism, as 'the water of the feet,' come the
Melanesian and Polynesian words mi, mim, mi mi, miaga, &c.,
the Sanskrit mih and the Keltic mun. From am (=rab = ap)
comes tlie Sanskrit plural form tip as, 'water,' while from ma
may come the Latin mad-idiis, 'wet.' We found that wa-kul,
'one,' comes from root ba, ma; so, from the root of ba-du, comes
the Australian word wa-la, which means 'rain,' and in some
places, ' water.'

As to the kindred of our Sydney badu, I would remind you
that ' water,' ' rain,' ' sea,' and ' wave,' are cognate ideas ; hence
the Samangs, who are the jS'egritos of the peninsula of Malacca,
say bat-eao for 'water'; the Motu of New Gruinea say medu,
'rain,' batu-gu, 'shower'; the Aneityumese in-cau-pda,* 'rain';

* Call is the Fijian tan, 'to fall as rain,' and -pda is the same as the
New Britain word Lata, 'rain'; au in Samoan is 'a current.'

rS'TEODirCTIOX. XXXI

Ne^v Britain says bata, 'to rain,' ta-va, 'sea,' and the Maori say
awa, 'water.' As a coincidence, it is remarkable that the old
high Grerman word awa {cf. the Ger. wasser, Eug. water)
means 'water,' and bedu is quoted as an old Phrygio-Macedoniau
word meaning ' water.'

Some observers have remarked that our blacks soon master the
dialects spoken b7other tribes, and have ascribed this to a natural
readiness in learning languages. But the present inquiry shows
that there is another cause for this. A man or woman of the
Sydney tribe, which said ba-du for 'water,' would easily recognize
ba-na in an adjacent tribe as the same word, the termination
only being different, just as it is not hard for Englishmen to re-
member that the German wasser is water, and that brennen
means burn. 80 also, a Ivamalarai black, who says mu-ga, would
soon know the Wiradhari mu-pai; and elsewhere mat a, 'one,' is
not much different from meta and matata for 'one,' or even
from the Tasmanian mar a.

Results. — Ba, ma, mo, am, ap are forms of an original root
meaning 'water,' 'that wdiich is liquid and flows'; derived forms
are mi, me, tea; from ba comes the Sydney word ha-clu, 'water';
the du here is a suffix in Dravidian also, and exists in the New
Guinea word ba-tu, elsewhere ba-ta; the Samang Negritos say bat-
eao ; the old language of Java has banii, 'water,' where the n has
the liquid sound of (jn, and takes the place of d in the suffix du.
Erom all this it is clear that our Australian badu is of good and
ancient lineage.

(i.) In the Maitland district of New Soutb Wales a ' blind '
man is called boko; in Polynesia poko is 'blind,' or, more
fully, mata-poko, mata-po, 'eyes-blind.' As there can be no
suspicion of borrowing here, how is so striking a resemblance
to be accounted for? Do you say that it is a mere coincidence?
AVell, if so, let us examine the matter. In the Ivamalarai region,
(see map) mu-ga means 'blind,' and in the Mudgee district,
mu-pai is 'dumb'; in Santo (New Hebrides), mog-moga is
'deaf; in Erromanga, another island of that group, busa is
'dumb' ; in Eiji, bo-bo is 'blind'; in Duke of York Island, ba-ba
is 'deaf; in Sanskrit, mu-k a is 'dumb'; in Greek, mu-dos, mu-tis
is 'dumb,' Lat. mut-us. In Keltic, bann is 'to bind, tie,'
balbh is 'dumb,' and bodhar is 'deaf.' Now, there can be little
doubt that in all these words the root is the same (mu, mo ; ba,
bo, bu; po), and yet these words extend over a very wide area
indeed, from Tahiti rii;'ht across through India to Greece, Italy,
and even to John o' Groat's. The meanings are ' blind,' ' deaf,'
' dumb,' and yet the root is the same. The general root-meaning
which suits them all is 'to close,' ' to bind' ; this meaning shows
itself in the Greek verb mu-G — from which mudos comes —
* to close the eyes or mouth,' and in the Sanskrit mu, 'to bind';

OF THR

'TJiri7BE

XXXU INTEODUCTION.

similarly the Hebrew (a) illiim, 'dumb,' comes from the verb
alam, 'to bind,' 'to be silent'; in the Gospels, the blind man's
eyes were ' opened,' and Zacharias, who had been for a time
dumb, had ' his mouth opened and his tonj^ue loosed.' The root
of our Australian words boko, muga, is therefore the same as
the Sanskrit mu, 'to bind.' Trom the same source come the
Samoan pu-puni, 'to shut,' po, 'night'; the Aneityumese
at-apn-es (apn=pan), 'to shut,' na.-poi, 'dark clouds'; the
I^ew Britain bog, 'clouded,' and the Tukiok bog, 'to cover
up'; c/! the Sanskrit bhuka, 'darkness.' In Aneityum, a-pat
is 'dark,' 'deaf,' and po-p is 'dumb.' In Malay, puk-kah
(c/!mu-ga) is 'deaf,' and bu-ta is 'blind'; ba-bat {cf. ba-ba,
bo-bo) is to ' bind '; Fiji has bu-ki-a, ' to tie,' ' to fasten '; New
Zealand has pu-pu, 'to tie in bundles,' pu, ' a tribe,' 'bunch,'
'bundle.' It is even possible that our English words bind,
bunch, bundle, come, through the Anglo-Saxon, from this
same root, ba, bu, mu.

I suppose that these examples will sufEce to prove that the
similarity between the Australian boko and the Polynesian,
poko is not a mere coincidence. AVhere have we room now for
the theory that the natives of the South Sea Islands are of Malay
origin ? I might, with equal justice, say that they came from
the Hunter Eiver district in Australia, if I were to look only at
the words boko and poko !

JResiiUs. — The ideas ' blind,' ' deaf,' ' dumb,' may be reduced
to the simple idea ' bound ' — the eyes, ears, mouth, or tongue
'closed, bound, tied.' This idea is, in the Aryan languages,
expressed mostly by mu, but, in our Eastern languages, by ha,
ho; mu, mo \ pu, po ; all these root-forms ai'e identical, and are
the basis of cognate words spreading from the region of ' ultima
ThuJe'' across the world to Tahiti. Can this be the result of
accident, or of the spontaneous creation of language in several
different centres ? Is it not rather proof of a common origin ?
Even in the development of the root, there is a singular corres-
pondence; for the Sanskrit adds -ka, and so do the Malay, the
Kamalarai, the Santoan, and the Polynesian; others use t for Jc.

(c.) The word for ' eye ' also may be useful as a sample test-word,
for it is not likely to be subject to the influences of change to
which I have already referred. In Tasmania a word for ' eye ' is
mongtena, and the common word in all Australia is mi or mil,
or some other simple derived form from the root mi. Mongtena
is in ]VIilligan's "Vocabulary of the Dialects of the Aboriginal
Tiibes of Tasmania," but I have never found that Vocabulary to
be satisfactory either as to its jdionetics or its critical sagacity. I
therefore suppose that the real form is ma-ag-ta-ua ; for mong-ta-
linna is there the word for 'eyelash,' and mong-to-ne is 'to see';
at all events, I consider ma to be its original stem, while the

INTKODrCTIOIf. XXXIU

Australian stem is mi, although there are, in varioiis parts of the
continent, words with the ma stem. The Australian words for
' eye,' then, are mi, mia, mikal, miki, rair, mil, mial, mina,
minuk, miko, mirang; maal, mail ; meur, mobara. These
words extend from Port Darwin right across to Bass's Straits.
Several Avords formed from the same root mean the ' face,' and
compound words are: — wirtin-mirnu, 'eyelid,' turna-mirnu,
'lower eyelid,' wicin-mir, 'eye-lash,' genin-mir, 'eye-brow,'
kraji-mring, 'white of the eye,' daami-mir, 'the temples,'
katen-mirnu, ' a tear.'

Now, it is evident that all these words for ' eye ' come from the
root ma, mi, me, mo, and that those formed from mi are the
most common. This ma is quite sporadic ; for, in Samoan, which
I take to be original and typical Polynesian, ma means ' clean,'
'pure,' 'bright-red,' main a is 'to shine,' said of fire ; ma-lama
means either ' the moon' or ' a light'; va-ai is ' to see,' and so on ;
the Ebudan ma is ' to see'; in New Britain me-me is 'scarlet,'
' bright-red,' and with the meaning of ' red ' the Ebudan has
me-me-a, miel, mial a; in Samoan, mu-mvi is 'to burn bi'ightly,'
aud mii-mu is 'red,' and the Aneityumese ama-mud is 'to burn '
transitively; the Maori has ma-hana, 'warm'; Papuan for 'eye'
is mata, mara, maka, mana; the Malay has mata, 'eye,' and
this is the sporadic word used everywhere for ' eye.'

From all these words, it appears that ' see,' ' clear, ' shine,'
'eye,' 'burn,' 'tire,' 'red,' are allied terms, and that the root-idea
from which they all proceed is that of ' shining brightly.' Now,
so far as the eye is concerned, that is an appropriate designation for
it ; and this appropriateness is elsewhere confirmed by language ;
for the Sanskrit akshi, 'eye,' Latin oculus, and the Latin acer,
' sharp,' are founded on the root ak, meaning ' keenly bright' or
'sharp,' and the English word 'sheen' is, in Lowland Scotch, ap-
plied to the ' bright' part of the eye. Now, I find that meaning
in the Sanskrit bha,, 'to shine,' which is just our root ma.
Sanskrit derivatives from this bha are bha, 'a star' (with which
compare the Australian mirri, 'the stars'), bhaga, 'the sun,'
and bha, 'light,' bhanu, bhfima, 'light,' 'the sun,' ' passion.'
The Greek phai-no is from the same root.

The Dra,vidian language, like the Australian, seems to prefer
the form mi ; it has min, 'to glitter,' and hence mina is ' a fish,'
so called from its phosphorescent scales.

A Samoan word 'to glisten,' 'to shine,' is ila-i la, applied to
the^ eyes, and in the Papuan of Tagula (south-east cost of New
Guinea) ira is 'bright'; at Port Essington (north coast of
Australia) ira is the 'eye,' and in some parts of New South
Wales ire, yir-oka is the 'sun.' In the Wiradhari dialect,
iradu is 'day,' and the Ebudan of Erromanga has ire, ' to-day.'
Further, a common word for 'eye' in Queensland is dilli ; and
[c]

XXXIV IXTRODrCTIOX.

I liavo no doubt that this is the same Dravidian termination
-illi which -we shall tind in ta-killi-ko and in many other Awa-
bakal words, but here added on to the same root which we find in
the Sanskrit di(p), 'to shine.'

The Ebudan of Baki has sembi to mean 'fire'; now sembu
in Dravidian means 'red.' In Australia, a very genei'al word for
'fire' is wi, win ; in the north-west of Tasmania it is win-alia ;
these I take to be from the same root as our mil, 'the eye,' and
the Dravidian min. In Tasmania also, tintya means 'red';
to which cognates are the Sanskrit damh, dah, ' to burn,' dams,
dame, 'to bite,' 'to see'; in Tamil tind-u, is 'to kindle,' tittu,
'to whet'; cf. Anglo-Saxon tendan, 'to kindle,' English tinder.

Besides mata, the Maoris have another word for 'eye,' kanohi,
which much resembles the Dravidian kan, 'the eye,' k an, 'to
see '; and the root of kan may be the same syllable as in Sanskrit
ak-shi, 'eye,' the ak being by metathesis changed into ka. At
all events, the root kan is abundantly prevalent in the sporadic
languages; for the Maori itself has kana, 'to stare wildly,' that
is, ' to look keenly'; ka, 'to burn'; ka-ka, 'red-hot'; kana-pa,
'bright,' 'shining'; kana-ku, 'fire'; and cognate Polynesian
dialects have kano-i-mata, 'the pupil (i.e., 'the sheen") of the
eye'; 'a'ano, certain ' red berries,' ' the flesh of animals,' from its
redness; ka-napa-napa, 'to glitter'; ka-n a pa, 'lightning.' The
simple root ka gives la, ra, 'the sun,' and all the Polynesian
words connected with these forms.

Nor is this root-word ka, kan confined to Polynesian dialects ;
in Ebudan, ' fire ' is in-caj), kapi, kapu, gapu, av, avi; and
the Papuan dialects have for 'fire,' kova, kai-wa ; for ' burn,'
ogabu, igabi. xVnd kai-o in Greek is ' I burn.'

It is interesting to know, also, that in the states which form
the Himalayan boimdary of India the woi-ds for ' eye ' are m i,
mik, mighi, mak, mo, mak, mo; and, farther east, in Cochin-
China and Tonkin, mot, mok, mu. It thus appears that, on the
wliole our common word mil, 'the eye,' is more akin to the non-
Aryan races of India — the representatives of its earlier population.

In closing this section of my subject, I presume I need scarcely
say that the evidence before us drawn from the words for ' water,'
' blind,' and ' eye,' fully justifies the opinion that the Australian
languages are not isolated, but that, in their essential root-words,
they have a close relation to the languages of the Southern Seas
and to similar root-words in the languages of the great peninsula of
India. I cannot conceive it to be possible that our blackfellows
should have, by chance, invented words which, when analysed,
show the underlying ideas ex])ressed by them to be the same as
those root-words spread overso vast an area elsewhere.

iNTEODrcTiON". xxxr

YII. MlSCELLAIfEOUS TeST "WoRDS.

(a.) There are just two or three other words which I would
glance at very rapidly. The Malay kutu means ' louse '; in all
Polynesia also that word means 'louse'; therefore, as some
persons say, the South 8ea Islanders inust be Malay-Polynesians.
But I find that in Aueityum also, a Papuan region, in-ket is
'louse,' and in South Australia kiita, and in other parts of
Australia, kii-lo, gullun. To complete the analogy, tliese per-
sons should now say that the Papuans of the New Hebrides and
the blacks of South Australia are Malay. This looks like a
reductio ad absurdum.

(5.) The word kutu reminds me that there are some very un-
savoury words, which are a strong proof of identity of origin
among races ; for, if these words have not come from one common
source, it is scarcely possible to imagine how they are so much
alike. For instance, gu-nung here means stercus Jiominis aut
hesfiac ; in Sanskrit the root-verb is gu. In Samoan, (k)i-no is
' excrement,' the same word as gu-nung. Among our Port
Stephens blacks, the worst of the evil spirits is called gunuug-
dh.a]iia^^'' sfercus edens.' In Hebrew, a variant for the name
Beelzebub is Beelzebiil, which means dominus stercoris.
Again, kak is an Aryan root-verb; in New Gruinea it becomes
tage {t for k, as is common) ; in New Britain, tak ; in Samoa,
ta'e ; m Aueityum, no-hok and na-heh. The Sanskrit bhaga,
which I need not translate, is in Piji maga ; and in Tasmania
maga; and pi, mi, as I have already shown, is as old as the
Assyrians.

(c.) The Tasmanian word for ' sun ' is pugganubrana or
pukkanebrena or pallanubrana or panubrana, according
to Milligan's list. Of these, the first is clearly the original form,
for the last is merely a contraction of it, and the third substitutes
liorg. The last syllable -n a is formative, and is exceedingly
common in Tasmanian Avords ; it is, I may observe in passing,
exactly the same syllable which is used as a common sufiix to
form nouns in New Guinea and in the Albannic group, and
in a slightly different way also in Aueityum. The remainder of
the Tasmanian word is pugga and nubra. Now, nubra or
nubre in Tasmanian is ' the eye,' but the vocabularies of that
language do not enlighten me as to the meaning of pugga. I
■would write it biig-a, and connect it with the New Britain word
bug (pronounced bung), which means ' day'; thus biiganubra
would mean ' the eye of day,' that is, ' the sun '; and that is
exactly the meaning of mata-ari, the Malay word for the ' sun.'
The Ebudan of Santo has bog, ' day,' and the Fijian for ' sun'
is mata-ni-senga. Bug is allied to the Dravidian pag-al,
* day.' Bug I take from the Sk. bha, ' to shine '; with this com-
pare the derivation of the English word ' day.'

5XXV1 INTRODUCTION.

((?.) In the Kamalarai dialect (N.S.W.), kagal means 'bad,'
'no good'; the -gal here, as elsewhere, is formative, and ka is
the root. Now ka is a ►Sk. prefix meaning ' bad '; in Tiji, 'bad' is
ca, and in the New Hebrides, sa ; in New Britain it is a-ka-ina,

{e.) The Awabakal word for ' good ' is murrarag ; in Wirad-
hari, it is marang ; in Kamalarai, it is murraba; the Port
Jackson tribe at Sydney called it bujari. The root is ma, mu,
bn ; Mr, Threlkeld's spelling should thus have been ma-ra-rag,
that is, ma-ra with the last syllable reduplicated and -ag added ;
and murraba should be ma-ra-ba ; in bu-jari, the -jari is a very
common formative. Analogues to these are: — Albannic, bo-ina,
'good'; Ebudan (Aneityum), up-ene (u p /or bu) ; Malay, ba-ik;
Papuan, mage, bo-en a, na-mo, na-ma. The Sanskrit bha-dra
means 'best,' ' happy,' ' well '; and the insular Keltic ma-th is
'good,' 'wholesome,' 'happy.' I believe that the Latin bonus
(of which Latin etymologists cannot trace the origin) is connected
with these ancient roots; for the Keltic ma-th, z.e., mad, would
easily give bon-us.

{/.) The Wiradhari balun, 'dead,' seems to be the same word
as the Dra vidian ma-1, 'to die,' and of the same origin as the
Polynesian ma-te, ' dead,' and the Malay ma-ti, mang-kat, 'dead.'
The old Assyrian has maatu, 'to die,' and the Sanskrit mri
(mar), the Malay mi-ta, the Hebrew miith, miitli, are all cognate
verbs. The Keltic has bath, bas, 'death.'

((/.) Korien is an Awabakal negative. If it were an Ebudan
word, its form in -en would make it a verbal noun equivalent to
' the denying.' Now, it happens that, in the Motvi dialect of New
Guinea, gorea means ' to deny,' and the Maori ha-hore or here
means 'no' (A for k), and whaka-kore-kore, 'to deny.' The
Ebudan of Efate has koro, 'to deny.' Another Awabakal nega-
tive is kya-wai, where the kya is for ka. The Maori ka-ua
(imperative or optative) also means 'not.'

(h.) Wiyalli is to 'speak.' The Sanskrit vad, va^, 'to
spei ,k,' would give the wiy a, and the -alii is the usual verbal foi-m.
The Albannic has veti, 'speak.' Fiji has va-ka, 'to say,' and
vei wall, 'to joke,' where vei is a reciprocal. The Awabakal wi-
ya means ' say,' ' tell'; New Britain has wi, ' to tell, to inform.'

{k.) The Awabakal bun means 'to strike,' 'to beat,' ' to kill.'
With this compare the Malay bunoh, 'to kill'; the Albannic
bua-tari, 'to destroy,' and we-umi, 'to fight,' 'to kill,' of which
the we is reciprocal.

(Z.) For an adult ' woman,' the Wiradhari says inar ; the Port
Jackson (Sydney) sub-tribe said din or dhin* ; other localities say
yinan, ina ; thus the J is radical. Several districts, far apart, in

*Hence comes the word jin — so commonly used in Australia to mean
the 'wife' of a black man (kuri).

INTEODTTCTIOlf. XXXVH

British ISTew Guinea say ina-gu, 'my mother,' ia ina-na, 'his
mother,' in e, 'mother,' where the ina is our Australian word;
and, in Samoa, tina is 'mother.' Are these languages not akin?
Is it possible that the Papuans, the Polynesians, and the Australians
could have bori'owed from one another so essential a woi'd as
' woman,' ' mother "? Moreover, in Tamil, inu means 'to bring
forth young' [cf. Eng. yean), and in Malay Induis a word for
'mother.' Are these, too, not akin to our Australian word 1

VIII. The Pronouns as Test Words.

There are few languages in which the pronouns of the first and
the second persons are declined throughout by the inflexion of the
same base-stem. In the Aryan family, there are at least two
bases for each of them, and these are often so disguised by the
inflexions that it is diflicult to detect them. In English, for
instance, there does not seem to be any etymological connection
between / and me and loe, and a similar diversity exists in the
Latin ego, mihi and oios, tu and vos ; in the Greek ego, viou, noi,
hemeis ; in the Sanskrit aham, mam, vayam, or tvad and yush-
mad. In Melanesian regions, the corresponding Papuan, Albannic
and Ebudan pronouns are apparently considered so volatile and
evanescent that a strong demonstrative is added as a backbone
for their support, and thus the pronoun itself almost disappears
from view. But many of these Melanesian pronouns usually have
two forms — a longer and a shorter ; the longer and stronger is used
for emphasis and can stand alone ; the shorter is suffixed to verbs
and nouns, and it commonly shows the stem of the pronoun in its
primary state. In Latin and Greek, we are already familiar with
the strengthening use of demonstratives as regards these two
personal pronouns, for we know that ego-ipse, ego-met, vos-met-
ipsi, ego-ge, and the like, are used. As examples of the shorter
Melanesian forms, I cite the Aneityumese etma-k, ' my father,'
etma-m, 'thy father,' etma-n, 'his father,' where the k, m, and
n repx-esent the three pronouns of which the longer possessives are
iinyak, unyum, o un; corresponding suffixes are seen in the
Papuan (Murua Is.) nima-gu ' my hand,' nima-mu, ' thy hand,'
nima-na, 'his hand.' In Melanesian languages generally, either
the separable possessive or its suffix form is used with nouns,
although the one and the other use convey a slightly different shade
of meaning; thus, the Tukiok dialect says either a nug ruma
or a ruma-ig, 'my house,' and the Fijian something similar; but
the Papuans say ia nima-na, 'his hand,' ina-gu, 'my mother.'

Each dialect in this volume has some peculiarity ; for the
Wiradhari has something which looks like suffixed . pronouns,*

* See girugal-dw on page 111 of this Appendix, gaddal-rf^on page 112,
,and other instances in the same section.

SXXVm INTRODUCTION.

and the Awabakal has a 'conjoined dual'; yet they all have long
forms of the first and the second ])ronouns to be used alone or
for the sake of emphasis, while other short forms always go with
a verb as its subject. I add a list of the pronouns found in
the whole of the Australian, Papuan, and Melanesian regions,
so far as they are as yet known to linguists ; for, although I shall
make only a limited use of this list at present, yet it may be
useful to students of language in Britain and elsewhere, esjtecially
as the sources fi-om which I have compiled it are not generally
accessible,

Australian Pronouns.

The Awabakal pronouns are : —

Singular. Dual. Plural.

1st. — G-atoa, bag, emmo-ug, tia Bali, gali Geen, gear-un

2nd. — G-into, bi, giro-ug Bula Nura

3rd. Masc- — Niuwoa, noa, gi- '\

ko-ug, bon (_ Buloara

3rd. Fem. — Boun-toa, boun-

1

Bara

For the purpose of comparison, I give the forms of these two
pronouns as found in other parts of Australia : —

New South Wales.

1st Pronoun.

Sing. — Gaiya, ga, gaan, gai, iya, gata, gaiagug ; gadthu, nathu,
nathuna, athu, addu, thu, athol ; mi, mina, mitua, motto; imigdu,
ganna, nanna; gera ; maiyai; iaka ; giamba; gulagi.

2nd Pronoun.

Sing. — Gind-a, (-u), yind-a, (-u), ind-a, (-e, -o, -u), nind-a, (-u); idno ;
numba; wonda; nindrua, natrua ; yindigi, indiga ; youra; beai,
biibla ; wiya, Avalbo ; gin ; imiba ; gindigug ; nagdu ; gulaga.

3rd Pro. ; Si^ig. — Genua, noa, niuoa ; Plu. — Garnia, bara.

Victoria.

1st Pronoun.

/S'm^r.— Gaddo, nadtha, gio, gain, gatiik; waan, aan, winnak; yatti,
yanga, yandog, nitte ; naik, naic, niak, ge, gen ; wokok, yer-
rowik, wolunyek, tiarmek ; biirdop.

2nd Pronoun.

Sing. — Gind-a, (-e, -i,- o, -u), ginduk; nind-i, (-e); ginna, ginya; nin,
nindo, ninan, niam, winiain; yerrowin; tiarmin; waar, waanyen;
wolanig ; nutuk, utiik; mirambina ; gulum ; yerally.

3rd Pro.; Sing. — Nunthi, munniger, kiga; Plu. Murra-milla,kinyet.

rUTEODUCTIOK. XXXIX

I'asmania.

Lst Pro.; Sing. — Mina, mana, mena. 2nd Pro.; Sing. — Nina.

Central and South Australia.

1st Pronoun.

Sing. — Gai, gann-a, (-i), ginyi, onye, yiga, yinna, ini, unnyi ;
gapp-a, (-U), gaap, appa, aupa ; gatto, attlio, attu, autu, altliu ;
guca; ti; iyie.

2ncl Pronoun.

Sing. — Grina, nia, nini, nina, yina ; giniba, imba, umpu, unga,
unni, yinyi ; nindo, yundo ; tidni, yidni, yundru, andru, gundru ;
wuru, nuru, nuni ; canna.

3rd Pro.; Sing. — Nulia, kitye, pa, panna, ninni ; Plu. — Kinna(r),
ka(r), pa(r)na, nana, ya(r)dna.

Western Australia.

1st Pronoun.

Sing. — Gatlia, gatuko, natto, gadjo, ajjo, ganya, guanga, ganga,
gana, gonya, nanya, nunna ; garmi, geit ; gi, gida, gika, gig.

2nd Pronoun.

Sing. — Ginda, ginna, yinda, yinna, nini, ninya, niya ; ginduk,
yinnuk, nonduk, nundu, nunda, nunak; janna. Plural — NuraL
3rd Pro.; Sing. — Bal ; /%(.— Balgun, bullalel.

Queejisland.

1st Pronoun.

Sing. — Gaia, gia, gio, nigo ; ganga, ongya, unoa ; nutta, uttliu,.
uda ; yundu, giba, ipa ; nia, ia, niu, iu, iuwa, yo ; biivko ;
kuronya; giingiil.

2nd Pronoun.

Shig. — Ninda, inda, imba; yinda, (-i), ind-a, (-i); yindua, yiindu,
indu ; innu, iu ; inknu, ingowa, enowa, nowa ; nino ; nay on ;
nomun ; yuniir ; tini ; Av^ologa.

3rd Pro.; Sing. — Ugda, unda ; Flu,. — Ganna.

With tliese Australian Pronouns, compare the

Dravidiax Proxouxs.
1st Pronoun.

Sing. — Tamil — Niin, yan, en, en ; Canarese — an, yan, na, nanu, en,
ene ; Tulu — -yan, yen, e ; Malayalam — alam, nan, en, en, ena, eni,
ini ; Telugu — nenu, ne, enu, e, na, nu, ni ; Tuda — an, en, eni,
ini ; Kota — ane, en, eni, ini ; Gund — anna, na, a]i, na ; Ku —
anu, na, in, e; Rajmaha,!- — en; Oraon — enan.

Plu. — Memu, amat, yam, am, amu, nam, njingal, navu, iivu.

Xl INTBODUCTION.

2nd Pronoun.

Sivfj. — Tamil — Ni, nin, nun, oi, i, ay, oy ; Canarese — nin, ni,
ninu, nin, ay, e, iye, i, i ; Tulu, i, nin, ni ; Malayjilam — ni, nin ;
Telugu — nivu, ivu, ni, nin, vu, vi ; Tuda — ni, nin, i; Kota — ni,
nin, i; Gond — imma, ni, i; Ku — inu, ni, i; Oraon — nien; Rajma-
hal — nin. The Scythic of the Behistun tables has ni ; the Brahui
of AfFghanistan has ni, na. Plu. — Miru, imat, nir, nivu, ii'u.

With these compare corresponding pronouns from several places
in British New Guinea, thus : —

Papuan Pronouns.

1st.
Sing. — Gai, nidu, da, yau, ye-gu, nau, nana, ara ; Dual — Gaba-
gaba, ni-mo-to, noni, kaditei, vagewu ; Plu. — Ga-1-pa-ga-l-pa,
'we three,' ni-mo, 'we,' no-kaki, kita, ya-kaimi, ita.

2nd.
Sing. — Gido, gi, rOu, koa, ya-kom, oa, goi, oi ; Dual — Gipel, ni-
go-to, ka-mitei ; Flu. — Gita, nigo, yana, komiu, ya-kamiyi, um-
ui, omi.

3rd.

Sing. — la, goi, ndu, au-kaki, tenem ; Plu. — lamo, tana, nei, ya-
buia, sia, idia, ila, ira, isi.

Possessive forms are : —

1st.

Sing. — Lau-apu, gau, moro, dai-ero, yo-gu, ge-gu, egu ; Plu. — Lai
emai-apumai. ga-l-pan, yo-da, la-nambo.

2nd.

Sing. — la-apuga, eke-ero, apui-ero, li-nambo, gninu, oi-amu; Plu. —
Komiai, gita-munu, yai-ero, amui, ami, gami.

Ebudan Pronouns.
Corresponding Ebudan pronouns are : —

1st.

Sing.—Ei-waM., iau, na-gku, avau, ain-yak ; short forms, na, a, ku,
ne, iya, k ; Plu. — Endra, hida, riti, kito, a-kity, a-kaija,

2nd.

Siiig. — Eg-ko, e-nico, jau, aiko, yik, aiek ; Plu. — Kamim, hamdi,
ituma, akaua, aijaua.

INTEODUCTION.

xli

Possessive forms are —

1st.

Sing. — No-ku, his-ug, kana-ku, kona-gku, rahak, tio-ku, unyak ;
Plu. — No-ra, isa-riti, kana-dro, kona-ra, otea, uja.

2nd.
Sing. — No-m, liisa-m, kana-mo, kona-rai, raha-m, o un ; Plu. —
No-iiim, isa-hamdi, kana-miu, kona-munu, ana, un-yimia.

Fijian Proxouns.
Fijian pronouns are : —

Singular. Binal,

First.

I inchi. Koi-l--e -darn
\ rxclu. Koi-keivsLV.
inclu. I-ke-darvL
exclu. /-keirau
inclu. Kedaru
exclu. Keirau

Second.
Koi-ke-mu-dvaM
/-ie-mudrau
Kemudrau

Third.
Koi-rniM
I-rau ; drau

Nom. — Kol-a-\v\

Poss. nku

Obj. — Au

Nom. — Ko-i-ko
Poss. — -mu
Obj. — Iko

Ternal.

Koi-h-e-diAou

iToJ-keitou

/-i'e-datou

/-keitou

Kedatou

Keitou

Koi-he-mu-do\\

/-Z;e-mudou

Kemudou

Plural.

Koi-ke-da.

A'oi-keimami

I-ke-da.

/-keimami

Keda

Keimami

iToi-kemuni

J-ke-ranni

Kemuni

Nom. — Ko-koya
Poss. — I-keya; -na
Obj. — Koya.

Kau

A'o-iratou Ko-i-va.

I-ratou ; dratou I-ra ; dra
I-ratou I-ra.

t Those syllables which are printed in italics maj- be dropped off in succession for various
uses of the pronouns.

Demonstratives ax^e : —

0 guo, ' this, these ' ; o koya o guo, (sing.) ' this ' ; o ira o guo,
'these.' O gori, 'that, those'; o koya o gori (sing.), 'that';
o ira o gori (plu.), 'those.'

Albannic Pronouns.
In the Albannic (Tukiok) dialect, the pronouns are : — •

Singular.

Binal.*

Ternal.

Plural.

1st — lau, io, yo

/ inclu.
\ exclu.

da-ra
mi-ra

da-tul
mi-tul

dat
me-at

2nd — U 01' ui

mvi-ru

mu-tul

mu-at

3rd — la or i

dia-ra

di-tul

di-at

This is a long list, and yet it may be useful, as showing how-
great a variety there is in the pronominal forms of the Australian
and Melanesian languages. But these forms, if subjected to
analysis and comparison, will be found to resolve themselves into
a few simple elements. In examining the Australian pronouns
now given, we must bear in mind that they are subject to some

* I lyreiev Binal and Ternal, because they signify 'two (three) each time.'

xlii INTEODUCTION.

degree of error, wliicli affects also iiiauy other lists of Australian
words. Australian vocabularies are made often by Englishmen,
■who, in wi-iting the words, follow the sounds of the vowels as used
in English, and sometimes even their own vices of pi'onunciation ;
for instance, k inner is written down for kinna, and i-ya for
ai-ya. Again, a blackfellow, when asked to give the equivalents
for English words, sometimes fails to understand, and so puts one
word for another ; thus, in some lists that I have seen, the word
for ' I ' is set down as meaning ' thou '; and even in printing mis-
takes occur ; for, in Mr. Taplin's list of South Austi-alian dialects
' we ' is gun, and ' you ' is gun also ; the former should probably
be gen ; and kambiyanna is made to mean both 'your father'
and 'his father.'

The Fh'st Pronoun. — Making all due allowance for such defects,
I pi'oceed to examine the Australian pronouns, an;l I find that,
notwithstanding the multitude of their dialect-forms, they have
only a very few bases. These are, for the first pronoun — Ga-ad,
ga-ta, ga-ad-du, ba, mi, mo; and, for the second pronoun —
(jin, gin-da, gin-du, bi, bu, gula. I leave the demonstrative
or third pronoun out of account, as it is not of so much importance
to our inquiry. Now, the existence of' the base ga-ad is proved
by the forms (given above), ga-an, ga-na ; the base ga-ta recurs
in gatha, ga-ya, ni-te ; ga-ad-du, in gad-thu, na-thu, a-thu,
ga-tu-ko, ifec. ; ba gives wa-an, a-an, and, in South Australia, ga-
pa, ga-ap, a-pa; mo and mi are merely softened forms of ba, and
are found in mo-to, wo-kok, mi-na, wi-nak, ga-mi. Even so
unpromising a form as un-ca (Queensland) connects itself with the
base ga-ta through gii-ca (South Australia); for some Melanesiaii
dialects prefer to begin words with a vowel, and so transpose
the letters of an initial dissyllable; thus, lin-ca is for ug-ca^
gu-ca:=ga-ta.* Most of the dialect fonns of this pronoun given
above arise from the interchange of ng, n, and y ; the Wiradhari
dialect, for example, has gaddu, naddu, yaddu, 'I,' and these
become more liquid still in yallu, -ladu.f Let us observe here,
also, that the Tasmanian forms ma-na, mi-na, ' I,' come from the
base ma, mi. I have above given six bases for the first pronoun in
Australian, and yet there are only two — ad or ta and ba; for mi
and mo are only ba differently vocalised, and, in the other three,
ga- is a prefix, as will be shown further on, while the -du of ga-
ad-du is an emphatic suffix.

* The Aneityumese (Ebudan) language is so fond of an initial vowel that
it constantly dislocates a consonant in favour of a vom'cI. Our Australian
Vocabularies in this volume have very few words beginning with vowels.

+ .See Appendix, page (iO. Dr. Caldwell was led into error by the form
gadlu, wliich an authority told him meant ' we ' in South Australia. Used
alone, it is only 'I,' for gaddu.

INTEODUCTION. xliii

Here comes in a most important question. Are tliese bases ta
and ba exclusively Australian 1 Emphatically I say, No ; for I
know that, in Samoan, ta is the pronoun ' I,' and ta (for ta-ua)
is 'we two,' 'itais 'me,' and ta-tou is 'we'; la'u (i.e., ta-ku, I
for d) is ' my.' I quote the Samoan as the representative of the
Polynesian dialects. And yet the Maori pronouns of the first
and second pronouns present some interesting features. They
are : —

' I,' ' me ' — Ahau, au, awau.
' We two ' — Taua, maua.
' We ' — Tatou, matou, matau.
' My '- — Taku, toku, aku, oku, ahaku.
'Thou' — Koe ; dual, korua, j;?«., koutou.
' Your ' — -Tau, tou, au, on, takorua, takoutou.
Here in 'we two,' 'we,' and 'my,' I see both of our Australian base-
forms ta and ma; in 'my' I find the Australian possessive genitive
suffix ku, gu* ; and in ' we ' I take the -tou to bo for tolu the
Polynesian for 'three,' three being used in an indefinite way to mean
any number beyond two.f Then, in Fiji, I find that 'I,' ' me ' is
au, which may be for ta-u, for the binal form of it is -da-ru (i.e.,
da-frua, 'two'), the ternal is -da-tou (i.e., da-ftolu, 'three'),
and the plural is da. In the Motu dialect of New Guinea, ' I ' is
la-u, of which the plural is {inclusive) ai (for ta-i?) &n(\. {exclusive)
i-ta. In other parts of New Guinea, ' I ' is d a, ya-u, na-u, na-na,
la-u, and, for the plural, ki-ta, i-ta {cf. Samoan). Ebudan parallels
are — ' I,' e-nau, iau, ain-ya-k ; for the plural, hi-da, ki-to, a-kity ;
possessive forms are tio-ku, otea, u-ja. The Tukiok forms iau,
io, yo ; da-ra, da-tul, dat, correspond mainly with the Fijian,
and are all from the root da, ta.

I think that I have thus pi'oved that our Australian base ta is
not local, but sporadic, and that, so far as this evidence has any
weight, the brown Polynesians have something in common with
the Melanesian race.

My next inquiry is this — Has this base, ta, da, ad, any connec-
tion with the other race-languages 1 And at once I remember
that the old Persian for ' I ' is ad-am, and this corresponds with
the Sanskrit ah-am, of which the stem is agli-, as seen in the
Grseco-Latin ego and the Germanic ich. I assume an earlier
form of this base to have been ak-, but, whether this Indian ak-
orthe Iranian ad- is the older, I cannot say. At all events, the
change of ak into at and then into ad, and conversely, is a com-
mon phonetic change, and is at this moment going on copiously in
Polynesia. The ak is now in present use in the Malay aku, ' I.'

*The possessive termination for persons in Awabakal is -umba; tliis I
take to be for gu-mba, the gu being the possessive formative in Wiradhari ;
it corresponds to the Ebudan ki, which is used in the same way.

•\Cf. Singular, Dual, and (all else) Plural.

xliv INTEODUCTIOir.

Tho other Australian base-fomi of tlie first pronoun is ba, and
this, in the forms of nia, me, mi, mo, is so common in all
languages that I need scarcely quote more than Sanskrit mad (the
base), 'I'; the Grjeco- Latin emou, mou ; mihi, me; and the
English, ' we.' This base, ba, gives us the Awabakal simple nomi-
native bag (for ba-ag), -ag being one of the most common of
Australian formatives. Then, of the possessive form, emmo-iig,
which I would write emo-ug, I take the e to be merely enuncia-
tive, the -ug being a possessive formation ; the mo that remains is
the same as in the Australian mo-to, wo-kok, ' I,' the Papuan,
mOu, 'I.' The Awaliakal ba-li, 'we two '(both being present),
is ba + li, where the -li is probably a dual form.

The Awabakal accusative of the fii'st pronoun is tia, or, as I
would write it, tya or ca ; cf. guca and unca. This tia appears
again in tlie vocative ka-tio-u, and is, I think, only a phonetic
form of the ta which I have already examined.

I think, also, that the Hebrew pronoun an-oki, ' I,' is connected
with our root ak, at, ta ; for it seems to be pretty well assured
that the an- there is merely a demonstrative particle placed before
the real root-form -ok-i ; for the Egyptian pronouns of the first
and second persons have it (-an, -ant, -ent) also. And this quite
corresponds with our Awabakal pronouns of the first and second
})ersons, ga-toa and gin-toa; for, in my view, they both begin
with a demonstrative ga, which exists also in Polynesian as a pro-
thetic nga, nge.* In Awabakal, I see it in ga-li, 'this,' ga-Ia,
' that,' and in the interrogative gan, ' who ' % for interrogatives
come from a demonstrative or indefinite base (cf. the word
minyug on page 3 of the Appendix). Here again, in the Awa-
bakal word gan, ' who ' ? we are brought into contact with Aryan
equivalents ; for, if gan is for ka-an, as seems likely, then it leads
us to the Sanskrit ka-s, ' who' % Zend, cvaht = Latin quan-tus %
Latin, quod, ubi, itc, Gothic, livan = English, 'when''? Lithua-
nian, ka-s, 'who'? Irish, can, 'whence"? Kymric, pa, 'who'?
Greek, pds, ' how '? po-then, ' whence '?

In the Australian plural forms geanni, geen, we have again the
prefix demonstrative ga, but now softened into ge (r/!the Maori pre-
fix nge) because of the short vowel that follows. The next syllable,
an, is a liquid form of ad, ta, ' I,' and the ni may be apluralising
addition — the same as in the Papuan ni-mo. It should here be
remembered, howevei-, that the Australian languages seldom have
special forms for tlie plural ; for ta may mean either ' I ' or 'we';
to indicate the plural number some pluralising word must be added
to ta ; thus in Western Australia ' we' is gala-ta, literally 'all-
I.' Some pronouns, however, seem to have absorbed these suffix

*In Maori, this nge is used as a prefix to the pronouns au and ona»
thus, nge-au is exactly equivalent to the Australian ngatoa.

IKTBODUCTION, xlV-

pluralising words, whatever they were, and thus to have acquired
plui-al terminations ; of this our geanni is an instance ; in western
Victoria, 'we' is expressed by ga-ta-en, that is, gata, ' I,' with
the suffix -en — the same as the -ni of geanni. The Awabakal
' we ' is geen. Such plurals are very old, for they are found in
the Babylonian syllabaries ; there the second pronoun is zu ; its
plural is zu enan, that is, ' thou-they' = ye ; there also, ' I ' is mu ;
with which compare ba, ma.

The Second Pronoun. — There are only two base-forms for the
second pronoun, bi o?' bu and gin. The latter is strengthened by
the addition of -da, which may also be -de, -di, -do, -du, and these
vocalic changes support my contention, that this syllable proceeds
from the demonstrative ta, for if the original is da or ta, all the
others may proceed from that, but it is not likely that, conversely,
any one of them would change into -da. The -to a in the Awa-
bakal gin-toa is the same as in gcit-toa, and the initial g is the
same as ga, ge. But what is the body of the word — the -in ? I
can only say with certainty that it is the base-form of the second
pronoun, for I can give no further account of it. Possibly, it is
for bin with the b (v) abraded ; for the other base-form, although
it now appears as bi, may have been originally bin — the same as
the accusative ; and yet, in the accusative dual, we have gali-n
and bulu-n, and in the singular bon for bo-un, where the n seems
to be a case-sign. If the -in of gintoa is for bin, then we get
back to bi as the only base-form of the second Australian pronoun,
and bi gives the forms wi-ye, we, i-mi-ba, win-in, q.v. The other
base-form of bi is bu, and this is attested in Australian by b lib la,
wuru, nuro, nuni, q.v. ; the n'yurag in South Australia shows
how the initial ?i has come in, for that plural is equivalent to
gvurag, from bu; it also shows the origin of the Awabakal plural
nu-ra. The -ra there is certainly a plural form ; for we have it
in ta-ra, 'those,' from the singular demonstrative ta, and in ba-ra,
' they,' from ba. In the genitive gear-unba, ' of us,' the -ar may
be this -ra, but it may also be simply the -an of the nominative.
This same -r a is a pluralising suffix in Melanesia. In many parts
of Melanesia, likewise, this mu — often when used as a verbal
suffix — is the pronoun ' thou.'

I may here venture the conjecture, without adding any weight
to it, that, as the Sanskrit dva, 'two,' gives the Latin bis, bi, so,
on the same principle, the Sanskrit tva, ' thou,' may be the old
form to which our bi, bu is allied.

As to the prefix ga, I know that, in New Britain, ngo is 'this,'
in Aneityum, nai, naico, i-naico is 'that.' This nga, also, as
a prefix, occurs in a considerable number of words in Samoan; for
instance, tasi is 'one,' and tusa is 'alike,' solo is 'swift'; an in-
tensive meaning of each is expressed by ga-tasi, ga-tusa, ga-solo ;

Xlvi INTEODUCTIOy.

the numeral 'ten' is ga-fulu wliicli I take to mean 'the whole'
(sc. fingers). In Teutonic, it seems to have sometimes a collective
force, as in ge-birge, ' mountains,' and sometimes an intensive, as
in Gothic, ga-bigs, from Sanskrit bliaga, the 'sun.' In Latin the
suffix c in sic is supposed to be the remains of a demonstrative.

Gratoa, then, is to me made up of ga + ad + do, the -do being
the same suffix particle of emphasis which is elsewhei'e in Australia
written -du, and the -do is extended into -to a, also for emphasis,
as in tlie Wiradhari yama, yamoa, and other Australian words.
It is quite possible that this -do also is only the demonstrative ta
— so often used in composition in Awabakal — changed into -to,
Ttlo, according to the rules on pages 10 and 11 of this volume.

From the lists of pronouns given above, it will be seen that
Fijian also prefixes a demonstrative ko, ko-i to its first and second
pronouns. This same particle, ko, o is also prefixed to nouns,
and especially to proper names. In Samoan, 'o, that is, ko, is
placed before nouns and pronouns when they are used as the sub-
ject of a proposition — this, also, for enq^hasis, to direct attention
to the agent, like the agent-nominative case in Awabakal.

In the Ebudan and Papuan pronouns, a similar prothetic demon-
sti-ative is found ; there it has the forms of na, ain, en, a, ka, ha,
ya, ye; in many of the Ebudan dialects, — the Aneityumese, for
instance — the demonstrative in, ni, elsewhere na, is prefixed to
almost every word that is used as a noun. In other parts of
Melanesia, the na is a suffix.

Finally, I placed the Dravidian pronouns in my list in order to
compare them with the Australian. And the comparison is in-
structive. They are, chiefly, nan, yan, for the first person, and
nin, ni for the second. Dr. Caldwell himself considers the
initial n in each case to be not radical, and the base forms to be
iin and in. This is a close approximation to our Australian
bases ; for we have the three forms, gud-du, nad-du, yad-du, in
which the n and the y proceed from the original nasal -guttural g,
and that g, as I have shown, is only a demonstrative prefix. The
d of nad and yad may easily pass into its liquid n, thereby
giving the Dravidian nan and yiin ; and the Australian forms
are older, for Avhile d will give n, oi, when established in a word,
will not i-evert to d. So also, the Dravidian nin will come from
the earlier gin, which we find in the Australian ginda.

IX. The Formatiox of Words.

Any one who examines the Vocabularies of the Awabakal and
the Wiratlhari dialects will see how readily the Australian
language can form derivative words from simjjle roots, and how
expressive those words may become, The language is specially

i>7rEODUCTio:s'. slvii

rich in verb-forms. As an illustration of this, let ns take from the
"Wiradhari dialect the root verb banga, of which the original
meaning is that of 'breaking,' 'dividing,' 'separating.' From
that root are formed — bang-ana, 'to break' (intrans.), bang-
lira, 'to bi'eak ' (trans.), banga-mara, 'to (make to) break,' and,
with various other adaptations of the root-meaning, banga-bira,
banga-dira, banga-nira, banga-naringa, banga-dara, banga-
gainbira, banga-dambira, banga-durmanbira, bang-al-gara.
It is true that these varying formativea resolve themselves into a
few simple elements, but they certainly convey different shades of
meaning ; else, why should they exist in the language 1 Nor is
the root banga the only one on Avhich such changes are made; for
the Wiradhari vocabulary contains numerous instances of similar
formations.

Then the modes of a verb are also usually abundant and precise.
In the Indicative mood, the Awabakal dialect has oiine different
tenses, and the Wiradhari has one more, the future perfect. Our
Australian verb thus rivals and excels the Greek and the San-
skrit, for it thus has four futures, and, for time past, it has three
forms, marking the past time as instant, proximate, and remote.
Corresponding to these tenses, there are nine participles, each of
which may be used as a finite verb. Besides an Imperative mood
and a Subjunctive mood, there are reflexive and reciprocal forms,
forms of negation, forms to express continuance, iteration, immi-
nence, and contemporary circumstances. Now, as the Australian
language is agglutinative, not inflexional, the verb acquires all
these modifications by adding on to its root-form various independ-
ent particles, which, if we could trace them to their source, would
be found to be nouns or verbs originally, and to contain the
various shades of meaning expressed by these modes of the verb.
The Fijian verb — in a Melanesian region — is also rich in forms ;
for it has verbs intransitive, transitive, passive, and, with prefixes,
intensive, causative, reciprocal, and reciprocal-causative. And
among the mountains of the Dekkan of India — also a black region
— the verb, as used by the Tudas and Gonds, is much richer than
that of the Tamil, the most cultivated dialect of the same race.

And, in A.ustralian, this copiousness of diction is not confined to
the verbs ; it shows itself also in the building up of other words.
On page 102 of this volume, a sample is given of the manner in
which common nouns may be formed by the adding on of particles.
Mr. Hale, whom I have already named, gives other instances,
doubtless derived from his converse with Mr. Tlirelkeld at Lake
Macquarie, and, although some of the words he quotes are used
for ideas quite unknown to a blackfellow in his native state, yet
they are a proof of the facility of expression which is inherent in
the language. I quote Mr. Hale's examples : —

xlviii INTEODUCTION,

fe;

>.

_i

«

©

,__l

, 1

'-0

•bC

•bC

'o

'S

t

■ta

.^

.^

•to

•£>C

e

tS

f-H

C3

cS

i—H

f— 1

«

• 1— 1

>%

a

o

• pH

^

S

li

6

pq

ij

b

C5

t>3

c3 ^

TjH S .rH ^ ^ -*-' ^ .JLi ^ r^ C3 C3 jS C5 ^^ ^J ^ ^Z^

§ looo o5^. ^^^

P . "^ :^ -J: -J: S ^ -^-Ji -A ?. p. r. o -Ji o -^ -^

^ 1 1^i:3g'^ 1^11^11 ii:^

"^ e

S

Oj

k

+J

i^

s

•2

-V

E

■i

i

"u

V)

rt

^

o

'~7

u

u

c

3

rt

'^

3

3

o

■»
S

pq

o

o

O

o

w

so

o

o

©

s:

^

3

3

®

a

p

ci

3

s

CO '^

cS

-«2

• rH

cS

c3

; — \

;j:^

•~Y

^

g

riS

3

a

o

'-3

c^

in _r^ r—l r

" £^ b: k:

?> ., fD CD ff-i ri m ® 2

n

^ CO S! ' "^ --^ 5 cS ri^ .i, .^ c3 cS p oi ITJ S ',-=3 ^

2 .„ „ .

^ -^ ;i ^ S :5 S

(i "^ 'a o c^ d =^

i « g .5i .^^3 ^

■—» c3 '-^ ;-> -J ^ u-i • ■— i • — * i/T* . ' — i__ h>. 1-^ ^ , '^

o

o

o

C3

p;

r^

3

r^

cS

^

ci

"^

^

;i^

t 1

rt

c3

6

P

P

s^

&j

o

©

©

►^

o

t^

>>

©

(^

c^

©

O

t^

•^

S

^

>-

g

"V

'T-t

r^

^
^

ri

3

o
'3

15

3

o

5

^ .^ t^

o ^

? o r. c -r Si ^-r

— '7 •'^ .A •'-< r^ ' '~r f"
£^ S 5 ^ 5£-t-..2p=:

-^HPPP^^^^

f.^

U

pj

C^i

'f

"-Y

'"7

rt

e

•-'

;j:^

r^i

V

^

3

-5

a

o

1-^

S !3

d

ci

ci

(-<

rt

^

r^

3

a

.id

'

■ Jh

ce

±3

• A

•— 1

; — 1

r^

-^. ^ 'C '^ '^ ""^ ~r

3

1-7

S

"V

1

rt

j — 1

p^

V

^

S

15

rt

^

0

ci

^

^

>

>~^

'S

mocSooW^SSPPP^f^^H

INTEODirCTIOX. xllx

If ^ve follow tlie numbers on the columns, and rememloer that
the w'ox'd in column iSTo. 1 always denotes the person who does the
action of the verb, the meanings which these words bear — all
springing from the verbal root-form and meaning — may be shown
thus : —

From
Biin-ki-lli — 2. a boxer ; 3. a cudgel ; 4. a blow ; 5. the smiting ;

6. a pugilistic ring; root-ineanhig, 'smite.'
Gakuya-Ui — 2. a liar ; 3. a ])retence ; 4. deceit ; 5. the 'deceiving ;

6. a gambling-house ; r^. »<..,' deceive.'
Goloma-lli — 2. a saviour ; 3. a safeguard ; 4. protection ; 5. the

protecting ; 6. a fortress ; rt.m., ' protect.'
Gu-ki-lli — 2. an almoner ; 3. a shop ; 4. liberality ; 5. the giving

of a thing; 6. a market ; rt.m., 'give.'
Gura-lli — 2. a listener ; 3. an ear-trumpet ; 4. attention ; 5. the

» act of hearing; 6. a news-room ; rt.m., 'hear.'

Ko-ri-lli — 2. a porter ; 3. a yoke ; 4. a carriage ; 5. the carrying ;

6. a wharf ; rt.m., ' carry.'
IMan-ki-lli — 2. a thief ; 3. a trap ; 4. a grasp ; 5. the taking ; 6. a

bank ; rt. m. , ' take. '
Pirri-ki-lli — 2. a sluggard ; 3. a couch ; 4. rest ; 5. the reclining ;

6. a bedroom ; rt.m., 'recline.'
Tiwa-lji • — 2. a searcher ; 3. a drag ; 4. search ; 5. the seeking ;

6. the woods ; rt.m., 'seek.'
Uma-lli — 2. an artisan ; 3. a tool ; 4. work ; 5. the doing ; 6. a

manufactory; rt.m., 'do.'
Upa-Ui — 2. a writer ; 3. a pen ; 4. performance ; 5. the per-
forming ; 6. a desk ; rt.m., ' perform.'
TJwa-lli — 2. a wanderer ; 3. a coach ; 4. a journey ; 5. the

walking ; 6. a parade ground; rt.m., 'walk.'
Wiroba-lli — 2. a disciple ; 3. a portmanteau ; 4. pursuit ; 5. the act

of following ; 6. the barracks ; rt.m., 'follow.'
Wiya-lli — 2. a commander; 3. a book; 4. speech; 5. the speak-
ing ; 6. a pulpit ; rt.m., 'speak.'
Wiin-ki-lli — 2. a magistrate ; 3. a watch-house ; 4. resignation ;

5. the leaving; 6. the jail ; rt.m., 'leave.'
Yallawalli — 2. an idler ; 3. a seat ; 4. a session ; 5. the act of

sitting; 6. a pew ; rt.m., 'sit.'

As to the oi'igin of these formatives, I think that kan equals
k + an, the -an being a personal suffix from the same source as
the demonstrative un-ni, 'this'; in Wiradhari it is -da in, that
is d-hain, the -ain being the same as -an. We shall find further
on that Jc, d, f, rj and other consonants are used in this language
merely to tack on the suffix. Similarly, in Fijian and Samoan,

1 INTBODUCTION.

there is a great variety of consonants in use for this purpose. The
-kanne seems to be a softer form of -kannai or -kanmai, the
-mai being a common formative. The -ta of number 5 is a de-
monstrative whicli is used al)undantly in the language as a
strengthening particle ; and the -to is the agent-nominative form
(see pp. lO, 11) of -ta. The -geil of number 6, or, as I write
it, -gel, seems to me to be of the same origin as the suffix -kill
(see page 18) ; a corresponding word in Di'avidian is kal, 'a place.'
The -ye of number 2 denotes a continued action, and may be the
same as the impei-ative form -ia, that is -iya.

In the list given above, 'a magistrate' is called wiinkiye be-
cause he ' commits' the culpi'it to jail, and 'the watch-house' or jail
is therefore wiinkilligel. The wirroballikan arc the 'light-
horse,' who act as an escort to the Governor of the colony, and the
place where they are housed is therefore wirroballigel. In the
Gospel, the disciples of Christ are called wirroballikan, and their
following of Him for instruction — their discipleship — is wirro-
balli-kanne-ta. Biinkillikanne may be a 'musket,' because
it ' strikes' with a ball, or it may be a ' hammer,' a ' mallet,' which
gives 'blows.'

The reader has observed that all the verbals in the first column
above contain the syllable -illi, and, as that table has given us
examples of synthesis, it may be j^rofitable now to examine the
formation of Australian words by employing etymological analysis.
With this view, I take up the Awabakal verb takilliko, 'to eat,'
and I take this word, because the idea expressed by it is so
essential to a language, that it is impossible that the word should
be a loan-word. Now, the verb ' to eat ' has, in Australian, many
forms, such as thalli, dalli, thaldinna, thilala, dira, chakol,
taka, tala, and, in Tasmania, tuggara, tughli, te-ganna. Of
all these, the simplest is taka, wjiich is used by the northern
portion of the Kuriggai tribe (see map) in N. S. Wales. On com-
paring taka and tala, it is evident that the simple root is ta,
and all the others come from this; chakol, for instance, is ta
palatalized intoca, with -kal added; di-ra has the sufhx -ra added
on to the root ta, vocalized into di ; and dira gives the universal
Australian word for the ' teeth,' just as the Sanskrit dant, 'a tooth '
{cf. Lat. dens), is a participial form of the verb ad, 'to eat.'
The Tasmanian words, which I have here restored to something
like a rational mode of spelling, are clearly the same as the Aus-
tralian. Nor is the root ta contined to Australia ; it is spread all
over the East as ta or ka. In Samoa (Polynesian), it is tau-te,
<aM-mafa, and 'ai, that is (k)ai; in Aneityum (Melanesian), it is
caig ; in Efate, kani ; in Duke of York Island, ani, wa-gan ; in
Motu (New Guinea), ania ; in New Britain, an, van. The Dravi-
dian is un, and the Sanskrit is ad and khad. Our English word

IXTRODrCTIO'. U

eat, Gothic ita, Latin edo, are from the same root. The Malay
is ma-kan, of which the ma is also pa, ba, and with this corres-
ponds the Melanesian (Efate) ba-mi, ' to eat.' Kow, it seems to
me likely that in primitive speech there were, alongside of each
other, three root-forms, ba, ad, and kad, of which ba and ad
passed to the West and produced the Greek pha-go, and e(s)thio,
the Latin edo, the English eat, while kad spread to the East
and is the source of all the other words ; ba in a less degree accom-
panied it, and gives bami (Efate), -ma-fa (Samoa), and the Malay
ma-kan. This root ba seems also to exist in Australia, for one
dialect has has a-balli, ' to eat.'

In the Samoan tau-tc (a chief's word), the tau is an intensive
and therefore, in this case, honorific, prefix, and the te is our root
ta ; it thus corresponds with the Tasmanian te-ganna.

In various parts of British Kew Guinea, words for ' eat ' ax'e
bai, uai, mo-ana, kani-kani, an-an, ye-kai ; and for 'food,'
kai, kan, ani-ani, ai-ai, mala-m, ala, wa-la. All these come
from the roots ba and ka, kan; with an-an (an for kan) com-
pare the Dra vidian un, 'to eat.'

Thus I dispose of the Awabakal root ta, 'to eat '; and, if the
analogies given above are well founded, then I am sure that our
Australian blacks have a share with the rest of the world in a
common heritage of language.

When the radical syllable, ta, is removed, the i*emainder of our
sample word is -killi-ko, and both of these are formative. On
comparing ta-killi-ko with other Awabakal vex'bs, such as um-
ulli-ko, wi-yelli-ko, nm-olli-ko, and with the Wiradhari verbs
and verbals da-alli, d-illi-ga, b-illi-ga, it is obvious that the
essential portion of the affix is -illi or -alii, the consonants before
it being merely euphonic. In the Dravidian languages, similar
consonants, v, y, m, oi, d, t, g, are inserted to prevent hiatus, and
in Fiji and Samoa there is also a great variety of consonants used
to introduce suffixes. Then, as to the -illi or -alii, I find exactly
the same formative in Gond — an uncultured dialect of the
Dravidian ; there the infinitive of a verb has -ale o?* -ile ; and in
Tamil, the verbal noun in -al, with the dative sign -ku added, is
used as an infinitive ; in Canarese the -al is an infinitive without
the -ku. In all this we have a close parallel to the Awabakal
infinitive in -alli-ko, -illi-ko, for some of our dialects have the
dative in -ol, -al.* Our formative, when attached to a verb-root,
makes it a verbal noun, as bun-killi, 'the act of smiting '; hence
the appropriateness of the suffix -ku, 'to,' a post-position.

The -ko in ta-killi-ko is equivalent to the English 'to' with
verbs, except that it is used as a post-position in Awabakal, where
it is the common dative sign. It also resembles, both in form and

*8ee page 49 of Appendix.

lii I51R0DUCTI0IC.

use, the Latin supine in -turn. This Sanskrit -turn is the accusa-
tive of the sufhx -tu to express agency, and may thus corres])ond
with our AustraHan suffix -to, -du, "which is used in a similar
manner. In the Diyeri dialect*, the infinitive ends in m i, which
means 'to'; in Aneityumcse imi means 'to.' Now, in all the
Dra vidian dialects, the sign of the dative case is ku, ki, ge;
in Hindi it is ko, in Bengali ke ; other forms in India are
khe, -ghai, -gai; with this -gai compare the MiiTV'ung dative
in -gai*. In the Kota dialect of the Dravidian, the dative sign
is ke, and the locative is -ol-ge; the infinitive ends in -alik,
probably a compound of ali and ke ; the Aneityumeso infinitive
in -aliek is very like that. A close parallel to our Awabakal
infinitive in -k o is the Dravidian infinitive in -gu ; as, kuru,
'short,' kuru-gu, 'to diminish.' In the Malay languages, tran-
sitive verbs are formed by prefixes and affixes ; of the latter, the
most common is kan, which may be the preposition ka, 'to.'

In the Ebudan languages, ki is a genitive and a dative sign, and
in one of them, Malekulan, bi, ' to,' makes an infinitive (cf. the
South Australian mi), and this same bi is used like the Latin ut,
' in order that '; with this compare the Awabakal koa (page 75,
et al.) — a lengthened form of -ko. In Fijian, some transitive verbs
take ki, 'to,' after them, but a common termination for the infini-
tive is -ka, and the 'i (sometimes ' o) of many verbs in Samoan
may be the same termination.

Our infinitive denotes the ' end ' or ' purpose ' for which any-
thing is done ; hence the dative sign ; so also in Sanskrit, it would
be correct to use the dative in -ana of the verbal noun. In the
"VViradhari dialect, -ana is a very common termination for in-
finitives ; but I do not know that it has any relation to the
Sanskrit -ana.

I have taken this verb takilliko as an example of the form-
ation of an infinitive in Awabakal ; all other infinitives in that
dialect are formed in the same way; the variations -ulli-ko,
olli-ko, elli-ko proceed from -alii, which I would write -alii, so as
to include the vowel changes all in one sign. In other dialects,
there are many other forms for the infinitive, but this one in -illi
is not confined to the Kuriggai tribe, but is found also in Victoria.

Another similar and very important "\'erb in the Awabakal is
kakilliko, the vei'b 'to be.' On the same principles, as shown
above, the -killiko here is terminational and the root is ka.
Here again the Dravidian dialects assist us to trace the word ;
for the Tamil has iVgu, 'to become,' the Telugu has kii, the
Canarese agal, and the Gond a3^-a,le. Our Wiradhari dialect
says ginya (for gi-ga), 'to become.' It is possible that these forms
have a parallel, but independent, relation to the Sanskiit roots
gan and ga, 'to come into being,' Greek gigno-mai, gino-mai.

*See pp. 13 and 45 of Appendix.

iNTRODUCTiox. liii

X. G-EAMMATICAL FoEMS AND SxNTAX,

The consideration of the grammatical forms and the syntax of
a language, is a very important part of comparative grammar, and
is a more potent proof of identity of origin than mere words can
be ; for, while words may be abnndantly introduced from abroad,
as the history of our English language testifies, yet the essential
structure of allied languages is as little liable to change as the
cranial character of a race, As none of the dialects spoken in
Australia has had the chance of becoming fixed by being reduced
to writing, the materials available for comparing them with
themselves and with other languages are in a state of flux and
decay, and any effort to determine their grammar will be only
provisioDal at present, and subject to errors arising from the
imperfect state of our information about them. Nevertheless,
allowance being made for this source of imperfection and error,
several of their features may be regarded as well- determined ;
and it will here be convenient to arrange these in numbered
paragraphs.

1. The Australian languages are in the agglutinative stage ;
the relations which words and ideas bear to each other in a
sentence are shown by independent words, often monosyllables,
Avhich do not lose their identity when attached to the word which
they thus qualify. Por example, 'he is the son of a good (native)
man,' in Awabakal, is noa yinal mararag ko ba kuri ko
ba, where the monosyllables ko and ba express the relation of
yinal to kiiri, and are otherwise in common use as distinct
words; they can be combined and fastened on to kiiri so that
the whole may be pronounced as one word, kurikoba, but they
do not thus become lost as case-endings. These particles ko-ba,
when thus united, may be also treated as an independent word,
even as a verb, for koba-toara is a verbal form, meaning 'a
thing that is in possession, gotten, acquired.'

Similarly, the tenses of the verb are indicated by particles added
on to the stem; as, bum-mara-bun-bill-ai-koa bag, 'that I
may permit the one to be struck by the other'; here bun is the
root-form, 'strike,' which may be almost any part of speech; ma-
ra is an independent stem meaning 'make' (ma); biin is
another verb conveying the idea of ' permission ' ; it is not used
as a separate word, but it appears to be only a derived form of
the verb ba, (ma), ' to make,' 'to let'; the rest of our sample
word is bill-ai-koa; of these, koa is a lengthened form of the
preposition ko, ' to,' and is equivalent to the Latin conjunction
ut; the -ai has a reciprocal force, andb-illi is the same forma-
tive which we found in ta-killi-ko, q.v. Thus our sample-word
is made up of three verbs, a formative (illi), which, perhaps, is
of the nature of a demonstrative, a particle, and the infinitive
post-position, which, as to its origin, may have been a verb.

Hv INTEODrCTTOX.

2. Nevertheless, several dialects haA-e forms which show the
p.gglutinative Avords on the way to become inflexional. la the
dialect of Western Australia, ' the woman's staff is yago-ak
wanna, in Avhich the -;ik has lost its independence, aud is as
much a case-ending as the <«, i, or is of the Latin genitive. So also
in Awabakal ; the -umba of kokara cmoumba, 'my house,'
may be regarded as inflexional ; for, although the -ba can be de-
tached and used as a separate word, not so the -um. I believe
the -limba to be a weathering for gu-mba, the gu being a
dialect form of the post-position ko, as in AViradhari ; yet the
-XI cannot stand alone ; the m belongs to the ba.

3. As to the Cases of nouns and pronouns, they are shown by
separable post-positions which are themselves nouns, adjectives,
or verbs. The post-position birun g, for example, meaning 'away
from,' is an adjective in the Wiradhari dialect, and means ' far
distant,' while birandi, another form from the same root, is the
post-position, 'from.' The other post-positions in the paradigm
on page 1(5 are all taken from the monosyllables ka and ko.
Of these, I take ko to be a root- verb, implying ' motion to,' and
ka another, meaning ' to be ' in a certain state or place ; but of
their origin I can give no account, unless ka be related to the
Dravidian verb agu, already noticed, and ko be a modiflcdform
of ka. These tAvo roots, variously combined, beeom.e the post-
positions kai, kin-ko, ka-ko, kin-ba, ka-ba, ka-birung, kin-
birung on page 16 ; by the influence of the final consonant of
the words to Avhich they are joined, the initial k of those becomes
t, I, or r.

A similar account of the post-positions in the ISTarrinyeri, the
Diyeri, and other distant dialects could, no doubt, be given, but
from the scantiness of our knoAvledge, that is at present im-
possible.

4. As to the Gender of nouns, that is either implied in the
meaning of the Avord or to be guessed from the context. In
Fijian, a word is added to mark the gender ; for example, gone
is ' child,' and, from it, a gone tagane is ' a boy,' but a gone
alewa is 'a girl.' The Samoans say ull po'a and ull fafine
to mean a ' male dog ' and a ' female dog,' and the Ebudans
something similar. Our Australians have no such devices, but
they iiave some Avords in which the gender is clearly distinguished
by an ending added on, or by a change of the voAvel sound of the
final syllable of the word. The most commtm feminine sufiix is -gun;
as, mobi, 'a blind man,' mobi-gun, 'a blind Avoman'; yinal, 'a
son,' yinal-kun, 'a daughter'; another suflix is -in; as, AAvaba-
kal, 'amanof AAvaba,' AAvaba-kal-in, 'a Avomanof Awaba '; ma-
koro-bau, makoro-bin, 'a fisher-man,' 'a fisher-Avoman,' showa
change in the vowel sound. I think that, in proportion to the
extent of the language, instances of this kind — the expression of

INTEODrCTlOIS". Iv

gender by change of termination — are quite as common in
Australian as they are in English. To this extent, therefore, the
Australian dialects are sex-denoting.

The -ban in makoro-ban seems to be a masculine suffix ; in
the Minyung dialect, yerrubil is ' a song,' yerrubil-gin, 'a
singer,' and yerrubil-gin-gun is a 'songstress.' The AViradhari
-dain in birbal-dain, 'a baker,' from birbara, ' to bake,' and
in many other words, is also a masculine termination.

5. As to Number of nouns and pronouns, the same word, and
the same form of it, does duty both as singular and plural ; the
context shows which is meant ; e.g., kuri is ' a (native) man,' but
kuri is also 'men'; if the speaker wishes to eay, '« man came
home,' that would be wakal kiiri, 'one man' — the numeral
being used just in the same way as our Saxon ' an,' ' ane ' — but
'the men' would be bara kuri, ' they-man,' not kuri bara,
as the Aryan arrangement of the words would be. Hence the
pronoun ngaddu, ngadlu may mean either 'I' or ' we'; to mark
the number some pluralising word must be added to nouns and
pronouns, such as iu the gala-ta, 'we,' of Western Australia,
where the gala is equivalent to 'they,' or perhaps 'all.' In
Wiradhari, galang is added on to form plurals. Nevertheless,
there are, among the pronouns, terminations which appear to be
plural forms, as, nge-an-ni, 'we,' nu-ra, 'you,' which I have
already considered iu the section on the Australian pronouns.

The declension of y ago, ' a woman ' (page 49 of Appendix), is
an example of a termination added on to form the plural uf a
uoun, and shows how much akin our Australian language
is to the Dravidian and other branches of the Turanian family.
Yago takes -man as a plural ending, and to that affixes the
signs of case which are used for the singular number. As
a parallel, I cite the Turanian of Hungary; there, ur is ' master,'
ur-am is 'my master,' ur-aim, 'my masters,' ur-am-nak,
' to my master,' ur-aim-nak, ' to my masters.' The Dravidian
has not, in general, post-fixed possessives, but our Narrinyeri
dialect has them, and they are quite common in the Papuan and
Ebudan languages. In Fijian, the possessives, with nouns of
relationship or members of the body or parts of a thing, are
always post-fixed. And in Dravidian, when a noun denotes a
rational being, the pronominal termination is suffixed.

6. The Minyung dialect (page 4, Appendix) makes a distinc-
tion between life-nouns and uon-life nouns, and varies the end-
ings of its adjectives accordingly. iSomething similar exists in
Dravidian ; for it has special forms for epicene plurals and for
rational plurals and for neuter plurals ; and, of course, in the
classic languages the a of the neuter plural is distinctive. But
in Eijian, the Minyung principle is carried out more fully, for
possessives vary their radical form according as the nouns to

Ivi I^"TEOD^CTION.

which thoy are joined denote things to be held merely in possess-
ion, or to be eaten, or to be drunk. In Samoan there is a some-
vvhat similar use of lona and lana, ' his.'

7. In the Awabakal dialect (see the Gospel ]U(.<}si}n), a main
feature is the use of the demonstrative ta us a suffix ; it is added
to nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and adverbs, and always has the
effect of strengthening the word to which it is joined ; as, unni
xa Ivuri, 'this man,' wakal-la purreang, ' one day'; its jDlural
is ta-ra; another form, apparently a plural, is tai, as in
mararang-tai, ' the good'; the singular form tarai means
'some one,' 'another.' Ta is simply a demonstrative particle,
and may be related to the Sanskrit tad, 'this,' 'that.' Ta is
always a suffix, and I consider it the same word as the demon-
strative -na, which is so common as a suffix to nouns in all
Melanesia, and sometimes in Polynesia. Some Ebudan dialects
use it as a prefix, na, ni, in. In Telugu, ni and na are attached
to certain classes of nouns before adding the case signs, as
da-ni-ki, ' to that.' This t a is probably the same as the Dra-
vidian da of inda, 'this,' anda, 'that.'

8. In Awabakal, a noun or adjective, when used as the sub-
ject cf a proposition, takes ko (to, lo) as a suffix; so also in
Fijian and Samoan, k o, ' o as a prefix. In i\-wabakal, this ko must
be attached to all the words that are leading parts of the subject;
as, tarai-to bulun kinbirug-ko, ' som.e one from among them.'

In Awabakal, there seems to be no definite arrangement of
words in a simple sentence except that required by expression
and emphasis ; but an adjective precedes its noun and a pro-
noun in the possessive may either follow its noun or go before
it. In Dravidian also, the adjective precedes its substantive ;
but the possessive pronouns are prefixed to the nouns.

These comparisons are general ; those that now follow com-
pare the Australian with the Dravidian.

9. In Grond and Tamil, the instrumental case-ending is -al.
"With this compare the IVarrinyeri ablative in -il, and the -al
of "Western Australia (pj). 29, 32, 49 of Appendix).

10. The Tuda dialect alone in the Dekkan has the sound of
y and the hard ih of the English 'thin'; in Australia the

Narrinyeri has the th of ' thin,' but there is no/" anywhere.

11. The Tamil inserts a euphonic m before b ; this is also
exceedingly common in Australia. The Canarese dialect hardens
muru, ' three,' into miindru. Some of the dialects of Australia
have a similar practice, and the Eijians do the same.

12. In Tamil, the conjunctive-ablative case has odu, dialect
toda, ' together with,' su2)posed to come from the verb to-dar,
'to join on.' The corresponding Awabakal word is katoa for
kata (page IG).

iNTEODrcTro:^". Ivii

13. In Dravidian, the 2nd singular of the Imperative is the
crude form of the verb ; so also in Australian.

14. In Tamil, the accusative case is the same as the nomina-
tive ; so also with common nouns in Australian.

15. In Dravidian, there is no case ending for the vocative ;
some sign of emphasis is used to call attention ; in Tamil, this is
e. In Awahakal, el a is used for the same purpose, and in Wira-
dhari ya. In Samoan e is used, but it usually comes after its
noun.

16. In Dravidian, there are compound case-signs. So also in
Australian (see pages 1(5, 17, and of Appendix, pages 80, 33, 58).

17. In Dravidian, comparison is expressed by using some ad-
verb v\dth the adjective ; as, ' this indeed is good,' for ' this is
very good.' There are no adjective terminations there to show
comparison, but some Australian dialects seem to have them
(see pages 45 and 51 of Appendix). Usually the Australian and
the Melanesian languages are like the Dravidian in this matter.

18. In Turanian, the ma of the first pronoun often adds an
obscure nasal making it something like mang. "With this com-
pare the Awabakal bang.

19. Eor the second pronoun, the Tamil has ay, 6y, er. "With
these compare the Papuan second pronoun on page xl. of this
Introduction.

20. In the Dravidian pronoun niu, 'thou,' the initial ii is
merely a nasalisation, for it disappears in the verbal forms. AVith
this compare my analysis of the Awabakal pronoun gintoa.

21. In Dravidian generally, the pluralising particles are added
on to the pronouns ; but in Telugu these signs are prefixed, as in
mi-ru. "With this compare the Papuan ni-mo (page xl. of this
Introduction), and the Awabakal ba-ra, nu-ra, and the like.

22. In almost all the Dravidian dialects, the first pronoun
plural has both an inclusive and an exclusive form. This is so
also in the Melaiiesian languages, especially those of the iS'ew
Hebrides and Fiji.

23. The Canarese formative of adverbs is ?,asin illi, alii, elli,
'here,' 'there,' 'where'; in Gond, ale, ile are the verb-endings.
In Awabakal, these are the f ormatives of verbal nouns, as I have
shown in another section. Now, it is an easy thing in language
for a noun to be used adverbially, and hence the Canarese and
Grond formatives may really be nouns. This would bring them,
closer to the Awabakal.

24. In the chief Dravidian dialects, the infinitive ends in -ku,
a post-preposition, ' to.' tSo also in Awabakal, as has been already
shown. I may add here that the Zulu infinitive ends -ku.

25. The Dravidian verb may be compounded with a noun, but
never with a preposition. So also the Australian vei'b.

Iviii INTHOBTJCTIOIf.

2G. The Dravidiau verb is agglutinative ; particles are added
on to the stem in order to express mood, tense, causation,
negation, &c., no change being made on the stem. Tiilu and
Gond — botli uncultured dialects — are exceptionally rich in
moods and teuses. All this applies to the Australian, the
Ebudan, and the Fijian verbs.

27. In Dravidian, there are no relative pronouns. So in
Australian ; for ' this is the book which you gave me,' a native
would say ' this is the book ; you gave it me.'

28. In Canarese, kodu, 'to give,' is used as a permissive. In
Awabakal, biin is the permissive, and appears to be formed
from ba, a root-form meaning 'to make.' In English, the
conditional conjunction 'if is for ' gif,' 'give.'

29. The Dravidian verb has no passive, nor has the Australian.
For ' it was broken,' our natives would say ' broken by me (you,
ttc.) '; a Dravida would say, 'it became broken through me.'

30. In Dravidian there are two futures — (I) a conditional
future, and (2) a sort of indeterminate aorist future. For the
latter, the Malayalam adds -um to the verbal noun which is the
base of the future. In Awabakal there are three futures ; the
third is an aorist future and adds -nun to the verbal stem in
-illi (see pages 25, 28 adjinem). Tliis -nun is probably equi-
valent to a formative -un with n interposed between the vowels
to prevent hiatus. In Tamil also n (for d') is similarly inserted
in verbs; as, padi(«)an, 'I sang.'

XL TuE Origin of the Austealiak Eace.

From these analogies and from the general scope of my argu-
ment in this Introduction, the reader perceives that I wish to
prove a kinship between the Dravidian race and the Australian.
This opinion I expressed in print more than ten years ago Avhen
it was not so generally held as it is now. Some of the very
highest authorities have formed the same opinion from evi-
dence other than that of language. But a theory and arguments
thereon must be shown to be antecedently possible or even pro-
bable before it can be accepted ; and to furnish such a basis of
acceptance, one must go to the domain of history. This I now do.

In my opinion the ultimate home of origin of the negroid
population of Australia is Babylonia. There, as history tells
us, mankind first began to congregate in great numbers, and
among them the Hamites, the progenitors of the negro races.
It seems to have been those Hamites who were the first to tiy
to break down the love-law of universal brothei'hood and equality;
for Nimrod was of their race, and wished to establish dominion
over his fellows, and to raise an everlasting memorial of his
power, like those which his kindred afterwards reared in Egypt.
This attempt was frustrated by the ' Confusion of tongues,' at

INTRODUCTIOK. lix

Baliel ; and here begins, as I tliink, the first movement of the
negro race towards India and consequently towards Australia.
Here comes in also the ' Toldoth Bene Noah' o£ Grenosis x.

Accordingly, the position of the Hamitc or black races at the
opening of history is, in Greaesis x. G, indicated ethnically by the
names Kush and Mizraim and Phut and Canaan, which geogra-
phically are the countries we call Ethiopia and Egypt and Nubia
and Palestine. The Kushites, however, were not confined to
Africa, but were spread in force along the whole northern shores
of the Arabian sea ; they were specially numerous on the lower
courses of the Euphrates and Tigris, their original seats, and
there formed the first germ whence came the great empire of
Babylonia. The Akkadians were Turanian in speech, and, it may
be, black in ' colour.' In this sense, the later Greek tradition
(Odyssey 1-23-24) speaks of both an eastern and a western nation
of Ethiopians. And Herodotus tells us (VII-70) that in the
army of Xerxes, when he invaded Greece, " the Ethiopians from
the sun-rise (for two kinds served in the expedition) were mar-
shalled with the Indians, and did not at all differ from the others
in appearance, but only in their language and their hair. Eor
the eastern Ethopians are straight-haired, but those of Libya
have hair more curly than that of any other people."

It is clear, therefore, that the black races, many centuries
before the Trojan war, had spread themselves from the banks of
the Indus on the east right across to the shores of the Mediter-
ranean, while towards the south-west they occupied the whole of
Egypt and the Abyssinian highlands. Thus they held two noble
coigns of vantage, likely to give them a commanding influence in
the making of the history of mankind — the valley cf the Nile,
which, through all these ages to the present hour, has never
lost its importance — and the luxuriant flat lands of Mesopotamia.
A mighty destiny seemed to await them, and already it had
begun to show itself; for the Kushites not only made the earliest
advances towards civilisation, but under Nimrod, ' that mighty
hunter,' smitten with the love of dominion, they threatened at
one time to establish a universal empire with Babel as its chief
seat. And not without reason ; for the Kushite tribes were
stalwart in stature and physique, in disposition vigorous and en-
ergetic, eager for war and conquest, and with a capacity and lust
for great things both in peace and war. But a time of disaster
came wdiich carried them into the remotest parts of the earth —
into Central Africa, into the mountains of Southern India,
Avhence, after a while, another impulse sent them onwards to-
wards our own island-continent ; hither they came, as I think,
many centuries before the Chris^tian era, pressed on and on from
their original seats by the waves of tribal migration which were
so commou in those early days. Similar was the experience of

Ix INTEODTJCTIOy.

the Kelts, a very ancient tribe ; soon after their first arrival in
Enrope. we find tliem occupying Thrace and tlie countries about
the moutli of the Danube ; but fresh immigration from the Cau-
casus plateau pushed them up tlie Danube, then into Belgium
and France, thence into Britain, and last of all the invading
Faxons drove them westwards into Ireland, and into the moun-
tains of Wales and Scotland. So the successive steps of the
Ivushite displacement, in my opinion, were these : — first into the
valley of the Granges, where they were tlie original inhabitants,
then into the Dekkan and into Further India, then into Ceylon,
the Andaman Islands, and the Sunda Islands, and thence into
Australia. These stages I will examine presently more in detail.
But, meanwhile, let us look at the old Babylonian kingdom.
Its ethnic basis was Kusliite ; its ruling dynasty continued to be
Ivushite probably down to the time of the birth of Abraham,
about 20U0 B.C. But before that date, the Babylonian population
had been materially changed. Nimrod had conquered Erech and
Accad and Calneh in the land of Shinar ; an /Vkkadian or Turanian
element was thus incorporated with his empire ; he had built
jSTineveh and liehoboth and Calah and Kesen (Genesis x. 11) ; a
Shemite element was thus or in some other way superadded ; other
Turanians and Shemites and Japhetian Aryans too, perhaps at-
tracted by the easy luxuriance of life on these fertile jjlains, had
all assembled in Chalda3a and Babylonia. In consequence, we
find that, about twenty centuries B.C., the Ivushite kingdom had
become a mixed conglomerate of four essentially different races —
Ilamite, Turanian, Shemite, and Japhetian — v/hich on the in-
scriptions are called Kiprat-arlat, 'the four quarters.' Then, as
the Babylonian worship of Mulitta demanded free intercourse as
a religious duty, a strange mixture of pliysical types must have
been developed among the children of these races, the Ethiopian,
Scythic, Shemitic, and Iranian all blending — a rare study to the
eye of a physiologist, who would have seen sometimes the one type
sometimes the other predominating in the child. This Chalda*an
monarchy — the first of the five great monarchies of ancient
history — was overthrown by an irruption of Arab (Shemitic)
tribes about the year 1500 B.C. And now, as I think, another
wave of population began to move towards our shores ; for t^iese
Arabs were pure mouotheists, and in their religious zeal must
have dashed to pieces the polytheistic and sensual fabric which
the Babylonian conquests had extended from the confines of
India westwards to the Mediterranean {cf. Chedorlaomer's expedi-
tion, Genesis xiv. 9). Those portions of the Chalda-o-Babylouian
people that were unable to escape from the dominion of the Arabs
were absorbed in the new empire, just as many of the Keltic
Britons were in the sixth and seventh centuries merged in the
newly-formed Saxon kingdoms. But the rupture of the Babylo-

iXTnoDUCTio:;?". Isi

Bian State and the proscription of its wor.sliip must have been so
complete as to drive forth Irom their native seats thousands of
the people of the four tongues and force them westwards into
Africa, or eastwards through the mountain passes into the table-
land of Panjab, and thence into the Gangetic Plain. Here, I
imagine, were already located the pure Hamites of the Dispersion ;
but finding these to be guilty of a skin not exactly coloured like
their own, and not understanding their language, these latter
Kushites of mixed extraction regarded them as enemies and drove
them before them into the mountains of the Dekkan, where, to this
hour, the Dravidians and Ivolarians are black-skinned and savage
races. Ere long, these Babylonian Kushites were themselves dis-
placed and ejected from the Granges valley by a fair- skinned race,
the Aryans, another and the last ethnic stream of invaders from
the north-west. These Aryans, in religion and habits irrecon-
cilably opposed to the earlier races of India, waged on them a
relentless war. Hemmed up in the triangle of southern India, the
earlier Hamites could escape only by sea ; the Babylonian
Kushites, on the other hand, could not seek safety in the moun-
tains of the Dekkan, as these were already occupied ; they must
therefore have been pushed down the Ganges into Further India
and the Malayan peninsula; thence they passed at a later time
into Borneo, and the Sunda Islands, and Papua, and afterwards
across the sea of Timor into Australia, or eastwards into Mela-
nesia, driven onwards now by the Turanian tribes, which had
come down from Central Asia into China and the Peninsula and
islands of the East Indies.

Many arguments could be advanced in favour of this view of
the origin of the Australian race, but the discussion would be a
lengthy one, and this is scarcely the place for it. I may, how-
ever, be permitted to add here a simple incident in my own
experience. A few months ago, I was staying for a while with a
friend in the bush, far from the main roads of the colony and
from towns and villages. One day, when out of doors and alone,
I saw a black man approaching ; his curly hair, his features, his
colour, and his general physique, all said that he Avas an Austra-
lian, but bis gait did not correspond. I Avas on the point of
addressing him as he drew near, but he anticipated me and spoke
first; the tones of his voice showed me that I Avas mistaken. I
at once suspected him to be a Kalinga from the Presidency of
Madras. And he was a Kalinga. This incident tells its own
tale. In short, it appears to me that the Dravidians and some
tribes among the Himalayas are the representatives of the ancient
Dasyus, Avho resisted the Aryan inA^asion of India, and Avhom the
Puranas describe as akin to beasts. The existence, also, of
Cyclopean remains in Ponape of the Caroline Islands, and else-
where onward through the Pacific Ocean, even as far as Easter

Ixii INTEODUCTION.

Island in the extreme east — all these aclvnowledged by Polyne-
sians to be the work of a previous race, which tradition, in various
parts, declares to have been black — points out one of the routes
by which the black race spread itself abroad into the eastern
isles ; while the presence of Negrillo tribes in detached portions
nearer to India — like islands left uncovered by the floods of
stronger races pouring in — the Miiicopies in the Andaman
Islands, the Samangs in the Malay Peninsula, and the Aetas in
the interior of Borneo, with the wild remnants of a black race
in the heart of many of the larger islands of the Malay Archi-
pelago— all this seems to me to show that the primitive Dasyus,
driven from India, passed into Purther India'and thence — being
still impelled by race movements — into our own continent and.
into the islands to the north and east of it. But this question
must be left for separate investigation.

Thus, in my view, our island first received its native population,
in two different streams, the one from the north, and the other
from the north-west. Many known facts favour this view : —

(1.) Ethnologists recognise two pre- Aryan races in India. The
earlier had not attained to the use of metals and used only polished
flint axes and implements of stone ; the later had no written
records, and made grave mounds over their dead. The Vedas
call them ' noseless,' ' gross feeders on flesh,' ' raw eaters,' ' not
sacrificing,' ' without gods,' ' without rites ' ; they adorned the
bodies of the dead with gifts and raiment and ornaments. All
this suits our aboriginals ; they are noseless, for they have very
flat and depressed noses, as contrasted with the straight and
prominent noses of the Vedic Aryans ; they have no gods and no
religious rites such as the Vedas demand.

(2.) The Kolarian and Dravidian languages have inclusive and
exclusive forms for the plural of the first person. So also have
many of the languages of Melanesia and Polynesia.

(3.) The native boomerang of Australia is used on the south-
east of India, and can be traced to Egypt — both of them Hamite
regions.

(4.) In the Ivamalarai dialect, the four class-names form their
feminines in -tlia ; as, Kubbi (viasc), Kubbi-tha (fern.) ; and
that is a Shemitic formative. ISo also in the Hamitic Babylo-
nian, Mul (masc.) gives Muli-tta (fern.), and Enu (masc), Enu-ta
{fern?). Although this formative is not common in the Austra-
lian languages, yet its unmistakable presence in Ivamalarai may
mean that our native population has in it the same mixed elements
as existed in the old Babylonian empire. To the same eftect is
the fact that some tribes practise circumcision, while contiguous
tribes do not ; in many places the natives, in considerable num-
bers, have distinctly fShemite features ; some have as regular
Caucasian features as any of us ; others, again, arc purely negroid.

iirTEODiiCTio>'. Ixiii

(5.) In Chalda?a, the dead were not interred ; they were laid
on mats in a brick vanlt or on a platform o£ sun-dried bricks,
and over this a huge earthenware dish-cover, or in a long earthen
jar in two pieces fitting into each other. Our blackfellows also,
even when they do inter, are careful not to let the body touch
the earth ; in some places, they erect stages for the dead — the
Parsee "towers of vsilence"; elsewhere, they place the dead body
in a hollow tree ; in South Australia, the corpse is desiccated by
fire and smoke, then carried about for a while, and finally exposed
on a stage. /Vll this corresponds with the Persian religious belief
in the sacredness of the earth, which must not be contaminated
by so foul a thing as a putrifying human body. And it shows
also how diverse are our tribal customs in important matters.

(6.) The Dravidian tribes, though homoo;eneous, have twelve
varying dialects. The Australian dialects are a parallel to that.

(7.) There is nothing improbable in the supposition that the
first inhabitants of Australia came from the north-west, that is,
from Hindostan or from Further India. Por the native tradi-
tions of the Polynesians all point to the west or north-west as
the quarter from which their ancestors first came. So also the
Indias are to the north-west of our island.

(8.) I now quote Dr. Caldwell; in diverse places, he says: —

" The Puranas speak of the Nishadas as ' beings of the com-
plexion of a charred stick, "svith flattened featui-es, and of dwarfish
tature'; 'as black as a crow'; 'having pi'ojecting chin, broad ands
flat nose, red eyes, and tawny hair, wide mouth, large ears, and
a protuberant belly.' These Nishadas are the Kolarian tribes, such
as the Kols and the Santals. But the Dravidians of the South
have always been called Kalingas and Pandyas, not Nishadas."

" The Tudasof the Dekkan are a tine, manly, athletic race, witli
European features, Roman noses, hazel eyes, and great physical
strength ; they have wavy or curly hair, while the people of the
plains are straight haired, have black eyes, and aquiline noses.
The skin of the Tudas, although they are mountaineers, is darker
than that of the natives of the Malabar coast. The physical type
of the Gondsis Mongolian, that of the other Dravidians is Aryan."

" In Shamanism, there is no regular priesthood. The father of
the family is the priest and magician ; but the office can be taken
by any one who pleases, and laid aside ; so also in Southern India.
The Shamanites acknowledge a Supreme God, but offer him no
worship, for he is too good to do them harm. So also the
Dravidian demonolators. Neither the Shamanites nor the Dra-
vidians believe in metempsychosis. The Shamanites worship
only cruel demons, with bloody sacrifices and wild dances. The
Tudas exclude women from worship, even from the temples ;
they perform their rites in the deep gloom of groves. They have
a supreme god, Usitru Swdmi ; his manifestation is ' light,' not

Ixiv IXTUODUCTIOX.

* fire.' They have no circumcision. They have no forms of prayer.
They believe in witchcraft and the work of demons. After the
death of the body, the soul still likes and requires food."

" Dr. Logan thought that the Dra vidians have a strong ]Melane-
sian or Indo-Afric element, and says that a negro race overspread
India before both the Scythians and the Aryans. De Quatrefages
agrees with him, and says that, long before the historical period,
India was inhabited by a black race resembling the Australians,
and also, before history began, a yellow race came from the north-
east. Of the Tamilians Dr. Logan says : — ' Some are exceedingly
Iranian, more are Semitico-Iranian ; some are Semitic, others
Australian ; some remind us of Egyptians, while others again
have Malayo-Polynesian and even Semang and Papuan features.'
Professor Max Miiller found in the Gonds and other non- Aryan
Dravidians traces of a race closely resembling the negro. Sir
George Campbell thinks that the race in occupation of India
before the Aryans was Negrito. Even in the seventh centuiy of
our era, a Brahman grammarian calls the Tamil and Telugu
people Mlechchas, that is, aboriginals. Dr. Muir thinks that the
Aryan wave of conquest must have been broken on the Yindhya
mountains, the northern barrier of the Dekkan."

COXCLUSIOX.

In this discussion, I have endeavoured to show the origin of
our Australian numerals, the composition and derivation of the
chief personal pi'onouns, and of a number of typical w^ords for
common tilings, and of these many more could be cited and ex-
amined in the same way. I have shown, so far as I can, that
these pronouns, and numerals, and test-words, and, incidentally,
one of the postpositions, are connected with root-words, w^hicli
must be as old as the origin of the language ; for such ideas as
'before,' 'begin,' 'first,' 'another,' 'follow,' 'change,' 'many,'
seem to be essential to the existence of any language. I think I
may safely say the same thing about the root-words for ' water,'
' dumb,' and ' eye.' It thus appears, from the present investigation,
that our Australians have a common heritage, along with the rest
of the world, in these root-words; for, if these blacks are a separate
creation and so have no kindred elsewhere, or were never in con-
tact with the other races of mankind, I cannot conceive how they
have come to possess primitive words so like those in use over a
very wide area of the globe. I therefore argue that they are an
integral portion of the human race. If so, what is their origin %
On this point, our present discussion may have thrown some light.

J.F.

PAET I.

THE GRAMMAR AND THE KEY.

J 2a 09—90 A

(A.)
THE GRAMMAE.

[THE ORIGINAL TITLE-PAGE.^

AN

AUSTRALIAIN^ GRAMMAE,

COMPREHENDING

THE PPtlNCIPLES AND NATURAL RULES

OF THE
AS

SPOKEN BY THE ABORIGINES,

IN THE VICINITY OF

HUNTER'S EIYEE, LAKE MACQUAEIE, &c.
NEW SOUTH WALES.

BY L. E. THRELKELD.

SYDNEY

FEINTED BY STEPHENS AND STOKES, " HEEALD OFFICE,'
• LOWES GEOEGE-STEEET.

K^V'^^-^-^^s. 1834.

&Lrm^i^4

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

In tlie year 1S2G, the writer printed a few copies entitled
"Specimens of a dialect of the Aborigines of New South Wales,"
in which the English sounds of the vowels were adopted. Sub-
sequently it was found that many inconveniences arose in the
orthography, which could only be overcome by adopting anotner
system. Many plans were proposed and attempted, but none
appeared so well adapted to meet the numerous difficulties which
arose, as the one in use for many years in the Islands of the
South Seas,* wherein the elementary sounds of the vowels do not
accord with the English pronunciation. This, however, does not
meet all the difficulties, because there is a material difference in
the idioms of the languages. For instance, in the Tahitian dialect.;
the vowels always retain their elementary sound, because a con-
sonant never ends a syllable or word ; in the Australian language,
a consonant often ends a syllable or a word, and therefore its
coalition with the sound of the vowels affects that sound and
consequently shortens it; while, in many instances, the elementary
sound of the vowel is retained wlien closed hy a consonant, as well
as when the syllable or word is ended by the vowel. To meet
this, an accent will be placed over the vowel when the elementary
sound is retained, but without such accent the sound is to be
shortened. For example, the Australian words hun, hiin^ tin, tin,
will be sounded as the English hun, hoon, tin, teen.

A set of characters cast expressly for the various sounds of the
vowels would be the most complete in forming speech into a
written language, but in the present instance that could not be
accomplished. The present orthography is therefore adopted,
not because it is considered perfect, but from the following
reasons, viz. : —

1. It appears, upon consideration, impossible so to express the
sounds of any language to the eye, as to enable a stranger to
pronounce it without oral instruction. The principal object,
therefore, is to aim at simplicity, so far as may be consistent
with clearness.

2. There appears to be a certain propriety in adopting uni-
versally, if possible, the same character to express the same
sounds used in countries which are adjacent, as Polynesia and
Australia, even though the languages be not akin ; especially when
those characters have been adopted upon mature consideration,
and confirmed by actual experience in the Islands of the South
Seas.

■■■' Mr. Threlkeld was, for a time, a missionary at Raiatea, in the Society
Islands. — En.

VI TnE author's peeface.

TTaving resided for many years in the island of TJaiatea, and
liavin^ been in the constant liabit of conversing with and preach-
ing to the natives in their own tongue, T am enabled to trace the
similarity of languages used in the South 8eas. one vrith another,
proving they are but different dialects, although the natives them-
selves, and we also, at the first interview, could not understand
the people of neighbouring islands, who speak radically the same
tongue !

In the Australian tongues there appears to exist a very great
similarity of idiom, as respects the dual number and the use of
the form expressive of negation ; and yet it is observed by a
writer in the article on ' Grreek language,' Rees's Cyclopaalia, that,
" The dual number is hy no means necessanj in langnage, though
it may enable the Greek to express the number ' two ' or 'pair' with
more emphasis and precision." But this assertion is not at all
borne out by facts ; because, in this part of the hemisphere, all the
languages of the South Seas, in common with New South Wales,
possess a dual number, and so essential is it to the languages that
conversation could not be carried on, if they had it not. There is,
however, a peculiarity in the dual of the Australian tongue which
does not exist in the islands, namely, a conjoined case in the dual
pronouns, by which the nominative and accusative are blended, as
shown in the pronouns*, whilst the verb sustains no change,
excepting when reflexive, or Reciprocal, or continuative. But
in the Islands there are dual verbs. The modes of interrogation
and replication are very much alike in the idiom of both languages,
and so peculiar as hardly possible to be illustrated in the English
language; for they scarcely ever give a direct answer, but in sucii
a manner as leaves much to be implied. The aborigines of this
colony are far more definite in the use of the tenses than the
Islanders, who have nothing peculiar in the use of the tenses.
The subject of tenses caused me much perplexity and diligent
examination. ISTor did the observations of eminent writers on
the theory of language tend to elucidate the matter; because the
facts existing in the language of the aborigines of New Holland
are in direct contradiction to a note to the article ' Grammar ' in the
Mncjiclopcedla JBritannica-\, where certain tenses are represented
as " peculiar to the Greek, and have nothing corresponding io
them in other ionques, we need not scruple to overlook them as
sKprrJluous.'" Now, our aborigines use the tenses of the verb and
the ])articiple variously, to denote time past in general; or time past
in particular, as, ' this morning only;' or time past remote, that is,
at some former period, as, ' when I was in England,' or, ' when I was
a boy,' The future time of the verb and of the participle is also
modified in a similar manner, specifically, either now, or to-morrow

* See page 17. — Ed. t Of that day. — Ed.

THE AUTHOE S PREFACE. VU

morning, or generally as in futnrity ; and besides this, there is
another curious fact opposed to the conclusion of the writer's
note, which reads thus : " Of the paulo-post-futurum of the
G-reeks, we have taken uo notice, because it is found only in the
passive voice ; to which if it were necessary, it is obvious that ifc
would be necessary in all voices, as a man may he ahovf to act, as
well as to suffer, immediately/.'''' Now, such is the very idiom of this
language, as will be seen in the conjugation of the participle; for
the pronoun, being used either objectively or noniinatively, will
place the phrase either in the one sense or the other, such change
in the pronoun constituting the equivalent to the passive voice
or the active voice. The most particular attention is necessary
to the tense of the participle as well as that of the verb, each
tense being confined to its own particular period, as shown in the
conjugation of the verbs. The various dialects of the blacks
may yet prove, as is already ascertained in the Islands, to be a
difficulty more apparent than real ; but wheji one dialect becomes
known, it will assist materially in obtaining a speedier knowledge
of any other that may be attempted, than if no such assistanco
had been rendered.

Although tribes within TOO miles do not, at the first interview,
understand each other, yet I have observed that after a very
short space of time they are able to converse freely, which could
not be the case were the language, as many suppose it to be,
radically distinct. The number of different names for one sub-
stantive may occasion this idea. Por instance, ' water ' has at
least five names, and ' fire ' has more ; the ' moon' has four names,
according to her phases, and the kangaroo has distinct names
for either sex, or according to size, or different places of haunt \
so that two persons would seldom obtain the same name for a
kangaroo, if met wild in the woods, unless every circumstantial
was precisely alike to both inquirers.* The quality of a thing is
another source from which a name is given, as well as its habit
or manner of operation. Thus, one man would call a musket
' a thing that strikes fire ;' a,nother would describe it as ' a thing
that strikes,' because it hits an object ; whilst a third would
name it ' a thing that makes a loud noise ;' and a fourth would
designate it 'a piercer,' if the bayonet was fixed. Hence arises
the difficulty to persons unacquainted with the language in
obtaining the correct name of that which is desired. For
instance, a visitor one day requested the name of a native cat
from M'Gill, my aboriginal, who replied minnaring; the
person was about to write down the word minnaring, 'a
native cat,' when I prevented the naturalist, observing that the
w^ord was not the name of the native cat, but a question, namely,

* There are other reasons for this diversity of language. — Ed.

Vlll THE AUTHOR S PREFACE.

' AVhat' (is it you say? being understood), the blackman not under-
standing what was asked. Thus arise mau}^ of tlie mistakes in
vocabularies published by transient visitors from foreign parts.*
In a "Description of the Natives of King George's Sound (Swan
River Colony)," which was written by Mr. Scott Nind, communi-
cated by R. Brown, Esq., P.R.S., and read before the Eoyal
Greographical Society, &c., 14th February, 1831, there is an
interesting account of the natives, and also a vocabulary, not
one word of which appears to be used or understood by the
natives in this district ; and yet, from a passage at pa<j:e 2i, the
following circumstance leads to the supposition that the language
is formed on the same principles, and is perhaps radically the same
tongue ; the writer observes : " It once occurred to me to be out
shooting, accompanied by Mawcurrie, the native spoken of, and
five or six of his tribe, when we heard the cry, coowhie,
c o 0 w h i e c a c a, upon which my companion stopped short, and
said that strange blackmen were coming." Now in this part of
the colony, under the same circumstances, a party of blacks
would halloo, k a ai, kaai, kai, kai; which, allowing for the
difference in orthography, would convey nearly, if not precisely,
the same sound ; the meaning is ' halloo, halloo, approach,
approach.' Also, at page 20, the same word, used by the natives
here in hunting and dancing, is mentioned as spoken by those
aborigines in the same sort of sports, viz., wow, which in this
work is spelt w u a ; it means ' move.' Also, at page 28, the phrase
'absent, at a distance' is rendered bocun, and 'let us go
away ' by b 6 c u n o o 1 a , or w a t o o 1 a ; here the natives would
say waita wolla; see the locomotive verb, in the conjugation
of which a similarity of use will be perceived. At Wellington
Valley, the names of the things are the same in many instances
with those of this part, although 300 miles distant ; and, in a
small vocabulary with which I wa? favoured, the very barbarisms
are maz'ked as such, whilst mistaken names are written, the
natural result of partial knowledge; for instance, kiwung is
put down as the ' moon,' whereas it means the ' new moon,'
yellenna being the 'moon.' In the higher districts of
Hunter's River, my son was lately conversing with a tribe, but
only one man could reply ; and he, it appears, had a few years
back been in this part, and thus acquii'ed the dialect. Time
and intercourse will hereafter ascertain the facts of the case.

'" Many mistakes of this kind have been made by collectors of vocabu-
laries ; even the word ' kangaroo,' which has now established itself in
Australasia, does not seem to be native ; it is not found in any of the early
lists of words. The settlers in Western Australia, when they first came
into contact with the blacks there, tried to conciliate them by otFering them
l)read, saying it was 'very good.' So, for a long time there, • very good '
was the blackmail's name for bread ! — Ed.

THE ArTHOR S PREFACE. IX

The arrangement of the grammar now adopted is formed on
the natural principles of the language, and not constrained to
accord with any known grammar of the dead or living languages,
the peculiarities of its structui-e being such as totally to prevent
the adoption of any one of these as a model. There is much of
the Hebrew form in the conjugation ; it has also the dual of the
Grreek and the deponent of the Latin. However, these terms
are not introduced, excepting tlie dual, the various modifications
of the verb and participle exemplifying the sense in which they
are used.

The peculiarity of the reciprocal dual may be illustrated by
reference to a custom of the aborigines ; when a companv meet
to dance, each lady and gentleman sit down opposite to one
another, and reciprocally paint each other's cheek with a red
pigment ; or, if there is not a sufficiency of females, the males
perform the reciprocal operation. Also, in duelling, a practice
they have in common with other barbarous nations, the challenge
is expressed in the reciprocal form. The terms I have adopted
to characterise the various modifications of the verb may not
ultimately prove the best adapted to convey the various ideas
contained in the respective forms, but at present it is presumed
they are sufficiently explicit. Many are the difficulties which
have been encountered, arising, principally, from the want of
association with the blacks, whose wandering habits, in search
of game, prevent the advantages enjoyed in the Islands of being
surrounded by the natives in daily conversation. It would be
the highest presumption to offer the present work as perfect, but,
so far as opportunity and pains could conduce to render it
complete, exertion has not been spared.

Barbarisms.

It is necessary to notice certain barbarisms which have crept
into use, introduced by sailors, stockmen, and others, who have
paid no attention to the aboriginal tongue, in the use of which
both blacks and whites labour under the mistaken idea that each
one is conversing in the other's language. The following list
contains the most common in use in these parts : — ■

Barbarism.

Meaning.

Ahoriginal proper ivord.

Boojery,*

good.

murrorong.

Bail,

no.,

keawai.

Bpg.y,

to hcdlie,

nurougkilliko.

Bimble,

earth,

purrai.

Boomiring,

a wea-pon.

turrama [the ' boomerang'.]

Budgel,

sickness,

munni.

* Captain John Hunter (1793) g\\eshidgerce, "good," and Lieut-Col,
Collins (1802) gives boodjerre "good," both at Port Jackson. Some of the
other words condemned here as barbarisms are used in local dialects. — Ed.

THE AUTHOR S PREFACE.

Cudgel,

tohacco.

kuttnl, lit.,* smoke.

Oammon,

falsehood,

nakoiyaye.

<ribber,

a stone,

tunung.

Oummy,

a spear.

warre.

Ooonyer,

a hut.

kokere.

Hillimung,

a shield,

koreil.

Jiu,

a wife.

porikunbai.

•Jerrund,

fear.

kinta.

Kangaroo, t

a 71 animal,

karai, and various names.

Carbon,

large.

kauwul.

Mije,

little.

mitti ; warea.

Mogo,

axe,

baibai.

jMurry,

many.

nmraiai ; also, kauwul-kauwul.

Pickaninnej,

child.

wounai.

Pi jailer.

to sj)eak,

wiyelliko.

Tuggerrer,

cold,

takara.

Wikby,

bread.

kuDto, vegetable provisions.

"Waddv,

a cudf/el,

kotirra.

Wommerrer,

a loeapon,

yakirri ; used to throw the spear.

* Used for literally, throughout.

t See note,

page viii. — Ed.

[UHIVBESITY]

CHAPTEE, I.

PRONUNCIATION AND ORTHOGRAPHY.

PEONUifCiATioN" is the right expression of the sounds of the>
words of a language.

Words are composed of syllables, and syllables of let'terf=t.
The letters of the language of the aborigines of New South
AVales are these : — *

ABDE&IKLMNNgOPETUWT.

JVofe. — It is very doubtful if d belongs to their alphabet ; the
natives generally use the t.

YOWELS.

A is pronounced as in the English words 'are,' 'far,' 'tart.*
E is pronounced as slender a in ' fate,' or e in ' where.' I is.
pronounced as the short i in 'thin,' 'tin,' 'virgin,' or e in
' England.' O is pronounced as in the English ' no.' U is pro-
nounced as 00 in the words ' cool,' ' cuckoo.'

When two vowels meet together they must be pronounced
distinctly; as, no a, niuwoa, the pronoun 'he'; bo unto a,
' she ;' so also when double vowels are used in the word ; as,
wiyeen, 'have spoken.'

A diphthong is the union of two vowels to form one sound ; as»

1. ««, as in kiil-ai, ' wood'; wai-tawan, ' the large mullet.*

2. rtw, as in nan- wai, ' a canoe' ; tau- wi 1, ' that... may eat.'
8. w, as in niu-woa, the pronoun 'he' ; paipiu-wil, 'that

it may appear.'

ATo/e. — ai is sounded as in the English word ' eye' ; au as in
* cow' ; iu as in ' pew.'

Consonants.

G is sounded hard, but it often has also a soft guttural sound ;
g and k are interchangeable, as also k and t.

Ng is peculiar to the language, and sounds as in 'ring,' 'bung,*
whether at the beginning, middle, or end of a word.

E, as heard in ' rogue,' ' rough ' ; whenever used, it cannot b&
pronounced too roughly; when double, each letter must be heard
distinctly.

* See PiioxoLOGY, page 3.— Ed.

2 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Tlie other consonants are sounded as in English.

Europeans often confound J with ^, because of a middle sound
which the natives use in speaking quickly ; so also they confound
t with y, from the same cause.

Accents,

The language requires but one marked accent, wdiich serves
for the prolongation of the syllable ; as, b 6 n, ' him' ; bun, the
root of ' to smite.' The primitive sound is thus retained of the
vowel, which otherwise would be affected by the closing consonant ;
as, bun, the root of the verb 'to be ' accidental, rhymes with
the English word 'bun,' bat biin, 'to smite,' rhymes with
' boon.'

OfiTHOGBAPHT.

In forming syllables, every consonant may be taken separately
and be joined to each vowel. A consonant between two vowels
must go to the latter ; and two consonants coming together must
be divided. The only exception is Ng, which is adopted for w^ant
of another character to express the peculiar nasal sound, as heard
in hanger, and, consequently, is never divided. The following
are general rules : —

1. A single consonant between two vowels must be joined to the

latter; as, ku-ri, 'man'; yu-rig, 'away'; wai-ta, 'depart.'

2. Two consonants coming together must always be divided ;

as, tet-ti, 'to be dead,' ' death' ; b u g-g ai, ' new.'

3. Two or more vowels are divided, excepting the dipthongs ; as,

gato-a, 'it is I ' ; yu-aip a, 'thrust out.' A hyphen is the
mark when the dipthong is divided ; as, ka-uw^a, 'may it
be ' (a wish) ; ka-am a, 'to collect together, to assemble.'

4. A vowel in a root-syllable must have its elementary sound ;

as, b u n k i 1 1 i, ' the action of smiting ' ; t a, the root-form
of the verb, ' to eat.'

Accentuation".

In general, dissyllables and trisyllables accent the first syllable ;
as, p u n t i m a i, ' a messenger ' ; p i r i w a 1, 'a chief or king.'

Compound derivative words, being descriptive nouns, have the
accent universally on the last syllable; as, wiyellikan, 'one
who speaks,' from wiyelli, 'the action of speaking'; so also,
from the same root, wiyelli-gel, 'a place of speaking,' such
as, ' a pulpit, the stage, a reading desk.'

Verbs in the present and the past tenses have their accent on
those parts of the verb which are significant of these tenses ; as,
tatan, 'eats'; wiyan, 'speaks'; wiya, 'hath told.' This
must be particularly attended to; else a mere affirmation will
become an imperative, and so on; as, ka-uwa, 'be it so,
(a wish) ; k a-u w a, ' so it is ' (an affirmation).

THE GRAMMAE. 3

In the future tenses, tlie accent is alwa3's on the last syllable
but one, whether the word consists of two syllables or of more
as, tanun, ' shall or will eat' ; wiyanim, ' shall or will speak'
b link i Hi nun, 'shall or will be in the action of smiting'
bunniin, 'shall or will smite.' Present participles have the
accent on the last syllable ; as, b u n k i 1 1 i n, ' now in the action
of smiting'; wiyellin, 'now in the action of talking, speak-
ing.' Past participles have their accent on the last syllable
but one ;" as, b li n k i 1 1 i a 1 a, ' smote and continued to smite,'
which, with a pronoun added, means ' they fought.' But the
participial particle, denoting the state or condition of a person or
thing, has the accent on the antepenultimate ; as, b u n t 6 a r a,
' that which is struck, smitten, beaten.' Thus, there are two
accents — one the radical accent, the other the shifting one which
belongs to the particles.

Emphasis.

The aborigines always lay particular stress upon the particles
in all their various combinations, whether added to substantives
to denote the cases, or to verbs to denote the moods or tenses.
But, when attention is particularly commanded, the emphasis is
thrown on the last syllable, often changing the termination
into -0 li ; as, w a 1 1 a - w a 1 1 a, the imperative, ' move,' or ' be
quick' ; but to urgently command would be w a 1 1 a - w a 11 - o u,
dwelling double the time on the -oii. To emphatically charge
a person with anything, the emphasis is placed on the particle
of agency ; as, g a t 6 a, ' it is I ; ' g i n 1 6 a, ' it is thou.'

[The PnoxoLOGT of the Australian Langttages.

Of late years increasing attention has been given to the con-
sideration of the Australian languages, and numerous vocabu-
laries have been collected. But it is somewhat unfortunate that
these collections of words have been made, in most instances, by
those who did not appreciate the principles of phonology ; often
the spelling of the words does not adequately represent the
sounds to be conveyed. Enough, however, is now known to
permit a general estimate to be made of the sounds in the
languages or rather dialects, for — notwithstanding many tribal
A'ariations in vocables and grammar — the Australian language is
essentially one.

General Eeatures.

Looking at the language as a whole, and examining its features,
we at once observe the prominence of the long vowels, a and u,
and the frequency of the guttural and nasal sounds ; the letter r
with a deeper trill than in English, is also a common sound.

AN ArSTRALTAN LANGrAGE.

Vowels.

The essential vowels are a, t, u, all pronounced with a full and
open voice; a as in the English word 'father' ; i as in 'seen' ; and
It as 00 in ' moon.' The Australian a long is, in fact, a guttural
sound, and is so deceptive to the ear that in many vocabularies
the syllable ba is written bah, or even bar ; this a has a sti'ong
sympathy for the letter r, which is nearly a guttural in Australia,
and when the two come together, as in mar, the sound of both is
deepened, and so ma>' is pronounced something like mah-rr.
This guttural combination of a and r has hitherto been repre-
sented by arr, as in the word bundarra ; but, as both the sounds
are normal, I prefer to write bundara, especially as the accent
in such a w^ord always falls on the penult. Our blacks also are
Orientals in this respect, that, while in English there is a ten-
dency to hurry over the open vowels in a word, they dwell on
them, and say bd-bd, where we say pa-pa, or even pa-pa.

The Australian i is ee long ; sometimes the sound of it is pro-
longed, and then resembles the sound of e in ' scene ' ; this sound
of i is represented by i in this volume.

In Australian names and words, the sound of it long is com-
monly indicated by oo. This is quite unnecessary ; for the sound
of u, as it is in 'pull,' is its natural sound. I will, therefore, make
it a rule that tt, before a single consonant, stands for that sound.

There are two more long vowels, e and d ; these come from a
combination and modification of the sounds of a, i, and u ; e
comes from the union of a and i, as in the English ' sail ' ; o from
a and u, as in the French ' faute,' or perhaps from a direct.
AVherever necessary, an accent has been placed on e and o (thus,
e, 6), to show that they are the long vowels.

Besides these, there are the short vowels, a, e, t, 6, il. As a
matter of convenience, it has been usual to indicate the short
sound of these vowels, wherever they occur in Australian words,
by doubling the consonant which follows them ; thus also, in
English, we have ' manner,' and, in French, ' bonne,' ' mienne.'
This plan seems unobjectionable, and has been followed here ;
such a word, then, as bukka will have the short sound of w; and
such words as bundara, where the u is followed by a hardened
consonant, or by two different C(msonants, will have the w short,
unless marked otherwise. If any one of those vowels which are
usually short be followed by a simjle consonant, the vowel may
then be pronounced long ; as iUa, tla ; but the short sound of
n, in such a position, will be marked by u in this volume. In
the declension of the verbs, our author writes -mulla, -kulli,
and the like ; this spelling I have allowed to stand, although I
think that it should have been -malla, -kalli.

THE GRAMMAR. 5

Besides these ten, there is in Australian a peculiar vowel sound
■which appears only iu a closed syllable, and chiefly before xhe
nasal ng ; it takes the short sound of either a, e, i, o, or u. For
instance, we have the word for ' tont^ue ' set down as t a 1 1 a n g,
talleng, tulling, talluu, and the Avord for 'hand' as
m a t a, m e t a, m i t a ; and so also with other examples. I regard
these variations as proceeding from an obscure utterance of a,
the same dulled a which appears in English in the word ' vocal,'
and is represented by other vowels in the English ' her,' ' sir,'
' son.' I have introduced a as the sign for this sound ; a, there-
fore, as iu the syllables of talag, etc., will mean a dull, volatile
sound of a, which, iu the various dialects, may have any one of
the other short vowels substituted for it. In the Malay language
similarly, the a — that is, the letter ain, not fjhain — takes the
sound of anj'- one of the short vowels.

These six paragraphs seem to contain all that is noticeable iu
the long and short sounds of the vowels a, e, i, o, u.

Then, we have the diphthongs ; «/, as in ' eye' ; oi, as in ' coin' ;
au, as in 'cow'; iu, as in 'new'; but ai is apt to become o/, and
sometimes, though rarely, ei.

The summary of the vowel sounds will thus be : —
Vowels — a, i, u ; i ; 0, 5 ; a, 8, i, u ; u ; a (volatile).
Semi- vowels — w, y.
Diphthongs — ai, oi, au, iu.

I have admitted lo and y, because they are already established
in Australian words. I consider lo, as a vowel, to be entirely
redundant in our alphabet ; y may be useful at the end of an
open syllable to represent the softened sound of i. Even when w
ov y stands as an initial letter in such words as wata, yuring,
■they are both superfluous, for wata might as well be written
uata, and yuring as luring. But in words such as wa-kal,
'one,' the w stands lor aui original h, and is therefore a consonant ;
and, similarly, in yarro, 'an eg?,' the y probably represents a
primitive Jc. In such cases, lo and y are consonants.

COXSOXAXTS.

The (jufturals are Jc, y, Ji, ny. The ^ is a much more frequent
sound in Australian than its softer brother y ; indeed, I am
iuclined to think that we could safely regard k as the native
sound of this guttural, and set down y as merely a dialect variety
of it. Eor the reasons given above, I discard the use of h at the
end of an open syllable ; as an initial, h occurs in only a few
words, such as h i 1 a m a n, 'a shield ' ; but the guttural-
nasal ny is one of the distinctive sounds of the Australian
alphabet, and is the same sound as the ny in the English word,
* sing.' It appears both as an initial and as a final ; its use at
the beginning of a syllable severs the Australian language from
the Arvan family, and gives it kinship with the African.

6 AN AUSTBALIAX LAXGUAGE.

Ill Samoan and in other Polynesian dialects, nrj is very common
as an initial, and as a final too in the whole of Melanesia. In this
respect the Polynesian and the Melanesian langnages are akin
to the Anstralian. The Malay also uses ufj both as an initial
and as a final. Some Australian dialects nasalise the A', as in the
English word ' ink '; to this there are parallels in the Melanesia!!
languages, and there the sound is represented by h or q.

In Tamil, one of the Dravidian languages of India, with which
our Australian language is supposed to be connected, one forma-
tive suffix is y?/, nasalised into ngu ; it is used as the initial sound
of a syllable, as in ni-ngu, 'to quit' ; to this extent it corresjioiids
with our ncj.

Our author, in his edition of 1831, has in some words a doubled
fjuttural-nasal, as in bungngai. As the second of these is
only a cj attracted by the nasal that precedes it, I have written
such words with g-g. In fact, the double so!ind proceeds froi!!
the one nasal, as iii our English word ' finger.' Some of the
Melanesian languages have this double sound both with cj and
with Tc.

But in both of its uses, initial and final, the Australian ncj arises
from the nasalisation of the guttural (] ; it is a simple sound, and
should therefore be represented by only one letter, not by the
digraph nrj. In Sanskrit, the symbol for it as a filial, for there
it is never used as an initial and seldom as a final, is ii- ; but, as
the Australian ng comes from y, I prefer to use g as its symbol.
If we compare the Dravidian pag-al, 'a day,' with the Melane-
sian bung, 'a day,' it is clear that the ng proceeds from a g^ for
the original root of both words is the verb bha, 'to sine.'
Eurther examination may, perhaps, show that our ng is, in some
cases, a modification of the sound oin, as in the Erench ' bon,'
'bieii,' or even of a final vowel, but at present that does not
seem to me at all likely.

Besides ng, there are the two subdued nasal sounds of n and
in — that is, n before d, and m before & ; these harden the con-
sonant that follows, and produce such sounds as nda^ mba. The
same sounds are common in Eiji — a Melanesian region — but not
in Polynesia.

Of the palataJs, the language has cli, as in the English word
'church,' and y, as in 'jam'; to these may be added the conso-
nant //. The ch and the ./ sounds are, in some vocabularies,
printed as tcli and Oj ; that is quite unnecessary. I have adopted
6 as the symbol for cZ*, because it is a simple sound.

The only cerebral that we have is r, although the sound of it
is often so asperated as to resemble the Dravidian rough and
hard r. Our r is neither the Arabic vibrating gliv, nor the
Xorthumbrian hurr, but is more like the rolled r of the Parisians.

TUE gba:mmar. 7

The dentals are t, cl, n, I. As in the case of the gutturals Jc
aud q, so with the dentals t and d; it is often difficult to decide
whether a native, in pronouncing a word, is using the one or the
other ; so also with p and h in the next paragraph. The liquids
n and I are really dentals, their sound being produced by the
movement of the tongue on the teeth. In connection with the
dentals t and d, it would be interesting to know if our natives ever
cerebralise them in pronunciation ; for, if they do, that would be
another link to connect them with the Dravidiaus; but the differ-
ence of sound is too minute to be detected by an ordinary observer.

A variant of t is th, for our blacks say both Ippatha and
Ippata; the th has the same sound as in the English words,
'thin,' ' breath.' It is possible that, in Australian, this th some-
times takes the place of the absent s. In the Melanesian region
also this sound of th is common, and is represented often by d.
Some Australian tribes have also th sonant, as in the English
words 'this,' 'that'; the Melanesians have a corresponding sound
which is represented in Eijian by c. If we could revive the
Anglo-Saxon characters for these simple sounds, such anomalies
would cease.

The labials are p, i, and m ; the m, as in other languages, is
only a b sound with the breathing allowed to escape through the
nose. Some collectors of words have set down the sounds of/"
and V as existing in Queensland, but I cannot admit them without
further evidence ; they are not found in New South "Wales ; the
natives here say Ucbiny for Waverley.

In addition to these elementary sounds, there are the conjunct
sounds obtained by adding the aspirate h to some of the con-
sonants. These are ph, bk, th, dh, kh, gh, and in each of them
the aspirate is separatc^d, in pronouncing it, from the consonant
to which it is attached, as in Sanskrit, or as in the English words,
u^-7all, doy-Z/ouse, &c. Some of these combined sounds I have
heard distinctly from the lips of a native, and I have no doubt
that the others also exist.

The sibilants have no place in Australia. One vocabulary gives
stha as an initial syllable, but that must be a mistake ; another
gives dtha ; that also must be a mistake.

It ought to be noted here that in many Australian tribes, when
a young man passes through the Bora ceremonies of initiation,
one or two of his upper front teeth are knocked out, and this is a
portion of the accustomed rites. The loss of these teeth must
have had an important influence on the utterance of the dentals
and sibilants in past time, and so on the language itself

Peculiarities.
In some dialects, there is a tendency to insert the sound of y
after t and k; as, tyala, 'to eat,' instead of tala. So also in
English we sometimes he^v gijarden for garden and kyind for kina.

5 AN AIJSTRALTAN LANGUAGE.

Some dialects say kedlu, for which the usual form would
be k ellu. But it is possible that the d here is radical, and so
maintains its j^lace.

In the Dieycrie tribe, near Cooper's Creek, South Australia,
many words have in them the peculiar sound ndr, as raun dru,
' two,' which is also the Tamil word for ' three.' The Tamil is
fond of this sound, and so is the language of Madagascar ; the
Fijian prefixes the sound of n to d, so that dua is pronounced
ndua. The sound of ndr comes by accretions from a single r,
and so the simpler forms of the Tamil mundru are muru,
mudu.

The dialect of King George's Sound, "Western Australia, has
this peculiarity, that it delights in closed syllables ; for there the
twonga of the inland tribes is pronounced twonk, and katta
is kat.

Summary.

The consonants, then, may be thus arranged : —

Gutturals — k kh g gh g h.

PalataU — 6 ... j ... ... y.

Cerebrals — ? ... ... ... ... r.

Dentals-— t th d dh n 1.

Labials — p ph b bh m

Liquids — n 1.

The vowels are Jive in number. If we reckon the guttural-
nasal^ as a separate sound (which, considering its place in the
language, we may justly do), but omit the nasalised k as un-
common, and count n and I as dentals only, the simple conso-
nant sounds ai*e fifteen in number. To these add the two
sounds of f/«, and lo and y as consonants ; but omit the six
aspirated consonants, for they are not simple sounds. The
Australian alphabet thus consists of twentij-fouY simple ele-
mentary sounds. — Ed.]

THE ailAMMAE.

CHAPTER 11.

THE PAETS OF SPEECH.

Or THE Substitute for the Article.

The general meaning of a noun is expressed by using its
simple form; as, m a k o r o, 'a fish ' or ' fishes' ; t i b b i n, a 'bird '
or ' birds,' in a general sense ; k u 1 ai, ' wood,' or ' a stick.' To
make these plural, the plural pronoun would be attached ; as,
unni makoro, tar a makoro, 'this fish,' 'these fishes,'
meaning that they are here present ; to express ' the fish' as au
active agent we must say gali m akoro, 'this fish,' sc, did some
action. And so also with respect to all nouns, as will be explained
under the head of pronouns.

Of Substantives.

Ts'ouns are the * names of persons, things, actions, and places.'
They are Proper, when used as the name of any individual person
or tiling ; Common and Collective, when denoting the names of
things singly or together; as, kiiri, 'man' oi' 'mankind'; karai,
' kangaroo ' ; makoro,' fish.' A pronoun attached shows the
number, whether singular or plural. Nouns which describe par-
ticular applications of the meaning of the verb are formed from
the roots of their verbs ; e.y., w i, the root of the verb 'speak,' gives
wiyellikan, ' one who speaks,' ' a speaker'; w iy ai y e, ' one
who always talks,' 'a talker,' 'chatterer.' When names of things
are appropriated to a person so as to be the person's name, that
name must be declined in the first declension of nouns, to show
it is the name of a person and not of the thing ; e.ff., tintig
' a crab,' belongs to the third declension, and the genitive would
be t i n t i g - k 0 b a, ' belonging to a crab ' ; but when it is the
name of a person, its genitive would be t i n t i g - li m b a, ' belong-
ing to Crab,' — Mr. or Mrs., according to the context. There
are a few terminations of gender in certain nouns, but not
generally; as, pori-b a i, 'a husband'; porikiin-bai, 'a wife';
yinal, 'a son'; yinalkun, 'a daughter'; but piriwal,
means a 'king' or 'queen,' according to the gender of the pro-
noun attached. To animals, in most instances, there are different

10 AN AI'STRALTAN^ LAIS^GTTAGE.

words used for the male and for the female ; as, w a r i k a 1,
* a he-dog'; t i n k o, 'a she-dog.' Names of places are generally
descriptive, as, puntei, the 'narrow' place ; biilwara, the
'high' place; tirabinba, the 'toothed' place; bimkilli-gel,
'the place for fighting,' the field of battle. Names of countries have
a declension peculiar to place, and in the genitive have a feminine
and a masculine termination; ejj., Englandkal, means 'English-
man,' the termination being masculine ; but Englandkalin,
means 'Englishwoman,' the termination being feminine; so also,
untikal, 'of this place,' masculine; untikalin, 'of this
place,' feminine. A noun is an adjective, a verb, or an adverb,
according to the particle used with it, or the position of the word
in the sentence ; as, p ital, 'joy'; ])it aim alii, 'to cause joy ';
p i t a 1 1 i k a n, 'a joyful being'; p i t a 1 k a t a n, 'to exist joyfully';
murrarag, 'good'; murraragtai, 'the good,' s<?., person;
m u r r a r a g u m ti, 'good done,' ' well done,' 'properly done.'

Of tue Declension of Nouns, etc.

There are seven declensions of nouns, according to which all
adjectives and participles, as well as nouns, are declined.

Nouns are declined according to their use and termination.
When used for the name of an individual person, they are de-
clined in the first declension, whatever may be the termination
of the word ; but when used as the names of places, they follow
the declension of place-names. Common nouns are declined in
the second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth declensions, according
to their respective terminations.

Of the two nominative cases, the one is simply declarative,
and in it the subject is inactive; as, 'this is a bird,' unni ta
t i b b i n ; the second nominative is used when the subject is
represented as doing something; as, tibbinto tatan, 'the
bird eats' ; in which case the particles ending in o are affixed, to
denote the agent, according to the terminations of the respective
nouns* ; hence the following general rules for the use of the
particles of agency : — -

1. Nouns or participles ending in * or n affix -to ; as,
K i k 0 i , 'a native cat,' kikoi-to, ' the cat ' f ;
Gurrulli, the active participle, or the infinitive, ' to hear,

believe, obey,' gurrulli-to, 'faith, belief ' .'

2. Nouns ending in ng, a, e, o, k, require -Jco; as,
Maiya, ' a snake,' maiya-ko. ' the snake ';
K u r i , 'a man,' k li r i - k o , ' the man ' ;
AVoiyo, 'grass,' wo iy o - ko , 'the grass .'

But when r precedes o, the noun belongs to the fifth declension.

* See ' A(je7d-7ioini)iatu'e case,' page 11.

t Supply here, and wherever the space occurs, some transitive predicate, as
' did, does, or will do, something.'

THE GRAMMAR.

if

3. Nouns ending in I require - Zo to be annexed ; as,

P u n n a 1 , ' the sun,' p u n n a 1 - 1 o , ' the sun ' ;

Y i n a 1 , 'a son,' y i n a 1 - 1 o , ' the son

4. Nouns of throe syllables ending in r o require the accent to

be shifted to the o ; as,
M a k o r o , ' fish ,' ni a k o r - o, ' the fish

5. Nouns of three s^dlables ending in r a change the a into 6 ; as,
Kokera, ' a hut, house ,' koker-6, ' the house .'

M a 1 1 a r a , ' the hand,' m a 1 1 a r - 6 , ' the hand .'

6. Xouns of four syllables ending in r require r 6 to be added ; as,
K u 1 m 0 t i u r , 'a woman's name ,' K u 1 m o t i u r - r d
Note. —The participle form of the verb in the passive voice,

when used as an agent, changes the last syllable into r 6 ; as,
B u n t o a r a , ' that which is struck ,'

b u n t 0 a r - 6 , ' that which is struck ' ;

Yellawaitoara, ' that which sits, squats,'

y e 1 1 a w a i t 0 a r - d , ' that which sits

Of the Cases or Nouxs x^d Pronouns.

It is by the particles that the whole progress of the mind
of the speaker is shown, and only by the right use of them
may we expect to render ourselves correcth'^ intelligible to the
aborigines. The following are used in the declension of nouns
and pronouns, according to the terminations and cases of these : —

L. The Simple-nominative case merely declares the person or
thing, or the quality, and has no particle added ; as, g a t o a, 'I' ;
kuri, 'man'; kiilai, 'wood'; k e k a 1, 'sweet'; m u r r ar a g,
' good.' But particles are used to form nouns ; as, b u n k i y e,
' a smiter,' from the root bun, 'to smite'; k e k al k e, 'sweet-
ness'; or, are used to transform the noun into a verb, which
merely declares the abstract action ; as, b li n k i 1 1 i, ' the action
of smiting.'

2. The Agent-nominative case denotes the person who operates,
and is always known by the addition of the particle o ; but this
particle of agency is preceded by a servile consonant, or is
accented according to the last syllable of the noun. The personal
and instrumental interrogatives, to? 'who?' ko? 'what thing?'
are unchangeable; the jjarticles of agency thus attached to the
noun are -to,-ko,-lo,-o,-ro.

3. 21ie Genitive case shows the relation of one thing con-
sidered as belonging, in some manner, to another ; in the inter-
rogative 'who,' and in the names of persons, it requires - li m b a ;
as, g a n - u m b a ? ' whose ?' T h r e 1 k e 1 d - u m b a, ' Threlkeld's' ;
piriwal-umba, 'the king's ' ; but things and persons require
-koba; as, minarig-koba? ' belonging to what thing ? '
kuri-koba, ' belonging to man.' The dual, the plural, and the
singular feminine pronouns form the genitive by affixing -ba

12 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

to the accusative; as, g^^iii"^^> 'belonginp; to us two';
gearun-ba, * belouging to us,' 'ours'; bounnoun-ba,
' belonging to her,' ' hers ' The othei* singular pronouns add the
particles to a variant form of the root-word ; as, c m m o -u m b a,
'belonging to me,' 'mine'; giro-umba, ' belonging to thee,'
'thine.' But time and place require -kal, and-kalin; as,
bugeai-kal, 'belonging to the present ' period of time now
becoming ; E n g 1 a n d -k a 1, 'a man belonging to England,' 'an
Englishman'; E ngland -kalin, 'a woman belonging to Eng-
land,' 'an Englishwoman'; untikal, 'hereof,' 'belonging to this
jjlace.'

4. The Dative case shows the ultimate object to which an action
tends; as, for a person to possess and use a thing in any way ; it
is expressed by adding - n ii g to the interrogative pronoun and to
names of persons only, but -ko to all other nouns, and to the
abstract action, which is thereby formed into a supine or a con-
struct infinitive ; as, b xi n k i 11 i k o, 'for-to smite.'* But motion
towards a person or thing, as opposed to motion from the place
where the person or thing is, requires the following particles
according to the various terminations of the nouns; viz., - t a k o,
- k a k 0, - 1 a k o, - a k o, - r a k o ; that is, the particle - k o, pre-
ceded by a syllable, the consonant of which varies according to
the termination of the noun to which it is affixed ; the personal
pronoun requires -kink o, and place takes -kako; see table
of declensions.

5. The Accusative case, which marks direct action on the person,
not merely towards the per.-^on, is the object of a transitive verb.
The personal pronouns have distinct particles ; see their declension.
But names of persons have the terminating particle - n ii g
added; so also the interrogatives of person, place, and thing ; as,
g a n - n u g ? ' whom ?' or ' who is the direct object ?' w o n - n u g?
' where ?' o?' ' where nt?' min-nug? 'what?' or 'what object?'
so also, T h r e 1 k e 1 d - n u g is the objective or accusative case.
All other common substantives, not derivatives, are placed before
the active verb without any change from the simple nominative ;
nor can error arise therefrom ; because when they are lised as
agents, the sign of that case will be attached ; as, k a r a i b u w a,
'smite the kangaroo ; butkaraito tia bunkulla, 'the kan-
garoo struck me,' equivalent to, ' I was struck by the kangaroo.'

(5. In the Vocative case, the particle a - 1 a or e - 1 a, calling for
attention, is ])refixed to the form of the nominative, not the
agent-nominative, case ; as, ala piriwal! 'Oking!' equivalent
to 'May it ])lease your majesty.'

7. Ablative case. Certain postpositions are used to indicate
this case; as, (I) k a i, meaning 'from,' 'concerning,' 'about,' 'on
account of,' used only to proper names and pronouns ; but for

* See footnote, page 24.

THE GRAM MAT?. 13

common nouns, -t in, -1 i n,-in, - r in, 'from,' 'on account of,'
the consonant varyinj; according to the termination of the word
to which it is attached ; (2) k i n - b i r u g, meaning 'from,' used
only to pronouns, is opposed to the dative of 'motion towards';
proper names, whether of persons or phices, require k a - b i r u g ;
but common nouns reqiiire, according to their terminations,
-ta-birug, -ka-birug, -la-birug, -a-birug, -ra-birug,
to mark ' motion from,' as opposed to the dative ; (3) k a t o a,
meaning to be ' with ' as an agent, is alExed to personal pronouns
and proper names of persons only ; but persons, things, and
places annex, according to their respecti^'^e terminations, -t o a,
-koa, -1 0 a, -o a, -roa, meaning 'by,' 'through,' 'with,' 'near';
no causative effects are implied in any of these particles ; (4)
ka-ba, meaning 'at' or 'on,' and kin-ba, present 'with' a
person at his place, are locative.

Por nouns, these postpositions are annexed mostly to the
form of the simple nominative ; for pronouns, commonly to the
first dative form.

Of Adjectites A^"D Pakticiples.

Adjectives have no distinctive endings ; it depends entirely on
their situation, or on the particles used, whether words are nouns,
adjectives, verbs, or adverbs. For instance, if murrarag,
'good,' yarakai, 'bad,' and konein, 'j^retty,' be declined
according to their terminations, with the particles of agency
affixed, they would then become agents, and consequently nouns;
as, mnrraragko, ' the good,' yarakaito, 'the bad or evil,'
k o n e i n t 0, ' the pretty' or ' the beauty, ' respectively, . . . . ;*
but participles in the passive voice terminate always in the com-
pound paitiele -toara; the root of the verb is prefixed either
with or without the causative particles, according to the sense
required ; as, from k i y u, the verb ' to roast with fire, to scorch,
to broil,' comes kiy ub a- 1 6 ar a, 'that which is roasted';
k i y u b a - 1 6 a r a b a g, ' I am roasted '; kiyuba-toard, ' that
which is roasted '*.

Adjectives denoting abundance are often formed by a redupli-
cation; as, murrarag, 'good'; m u r r ar a g-m ur r ara g,
'excellent, abundance of good'; kauwal, 'great, large, big';
k a u w a 1 - k a II w a 1, ' many, abundant.'

Adjectives denoting want are expressed by affixing a negative
word ; as, m u r r a r a g-k o r i e n, ' worthless,' lit., ' good-not.'

Adjectives denoting resemblance require the particle -kiloa,
'like,' to be affixed; as, w onnai-kilo a, 'child-like.' ' like a
child ' ; but, if they denote habit, the joarticle -k e i is affixed ; as,
wonnai-kei, 'childish.'

* See footnote, page 10.

14 AX AUSTRALIAN LANCiUAGE.

Adjectives denoting character, manner, or habit, are formed
from the roots of verbs, and have the particles y e or k e i added
e.y., bim, the root of the verb 'to smite,' gives bunkiye, ';
smiter'; whereas b n n k i 11 i-k an would be 'one who smites'
wogkal 'to be a fool'; wogkal-kei, 'foolish'; so also
gura-kei 'wise, skilful'; b u k k a-k e i, 'ferocious, savage'
kekal-kei, 'sweet, nice, pleasant.' Derived forms of the verb
also give nouns in -ye; as w i y - a i - y e, ' a talker.'

Of Comparatives and Superlatives.

The following are the methods used in comparison, there being
no particles to express degrees of quality : —

1. The comparative of equality is formed thus : —
Kekal-kei unni yanti unuo a-k i 1 o a, ' sweet this as that-
like,' i.e., 'this is as sweet as that.'

2. The comparative of inferiority is formed by putting the
negative particle korien after the adjective; thus: —
Kekal-korien unni yanti unno a-k i 1 o a, ' sweet-not this

as that-like,' i.e , ' this is not so sweet as that.'

3. The comparative of superiority is formed by the use of the
word k au wal-k an w al, a redu2)lication of 'great,' and the
particle of negation added to that which is inferior ; as : —
Kekal-kei unni k au w al-kau w al keawai unno a,

'sweet this great-great, not that,' i.e., 'this is most sweet.'

Of Words DExoTixti Dumber.

Numei'als are only cardinal ; they are declined as nouns, so
far as they extend ; namely, w a k a 1, ' one '; b u 1 a, b u 1 o a r a,
'two'; goro, 'three'; wariin, 'four'; beyond this there are
no further numbers, but the general term k au w al-k au w al,
' much or many' is used. The interrogative of quantity or number,
minnan? ' which present ?', means 'how many?'; the answer
Avould be given b}^ any of the above numbers ; or by kau w al-
kau wal kiiri, ' many men' ; or by ware a kuri, ' few men.'
Ordinal numbers can be expressed only by declining the noun to
which they may be attached, the ordinal adjective being also
subject to declension, according its own termination, indepen-
dently of the termination of the noun ; as : —

P u r r e a g-k a g o r o-k a, ' the third day ' ; k u 1 a i-t o a g o r o-
k o a, ' by, beside the third tree.' Bui o a r a is used in the dual,
and is of the sixth declension.

There are also two other expressions which may be noticed
here ; namely, w i n t a, equivalent to ' a part or portion of,
some of; also, yantin, equivalent to 'the whole or all'; as,
unti-bo winta kuri, 'here be part of the men,' 'some of
the men are here'; unti-bo yantin kuri, 'here be all the
men,' ' all the men are here.'

THE GEAMMAB. 15

Of PrO>'OU>'S.

The personal prououus of the first, second, and third persons
singular, have two forms, the one used with the verb as a subject
to it, the other used absolutely in answer to an interrogative, or
with the verb for the sake of emphasis. The latter form, when
used as a subject, precedes the predicate, and always calls atten-
tion to the person and not to the verb. These forms will there-
fore be designated Personal-nominative pronouns, and marked as
such ; thus, Xom. 1 means Personal-nominative ; but the personal
pronouns used as the nominative to verbs and never by them-
selves, nor in answer to interrogatives, will be marked Xom. 2,
to denote Yerbal-nominative, as the verb is then the jDrominent
feature to which attention is called, and not the person ; these
always follow the verb. The strictest attention must be given
to the use of the pronouns in all their persons, numbers, and
cases ; for by them the singular, dual, and plural numbers arc
known ; by them the active, the passive, the reciprocal, and re-
flexive states of the verb ; as will be exemplified in the conjugation
of the verbs, as well as in the declension of the pronouns. The
plural personal pronouns have only one nominative form to
each person ; so also, the singular feminine pronoun, which is only
of one description. The dual number also has but one pronoun in
the nominative ease ; but it has a case peculiar to this language
— a nominative and an accusative case conjoined in one word ;
just as if such English pronouns as I and thee, thou and him,
could become I-thee, thou-him. This will be called the Conjoined-
dual form.

DECLENSION OF THE NOUNS AND PRONOUNS.

[The declension of the nouns and pronouns is effected by
means of postpositions, as has been already explained in this
chapter. The forms of the ablative case may be indefinitely
multiplied in number by using other postpositions than those
shown in the following paradigms.* — Ed.]

[* In the paradigms of the pronouns and the nouns, Horn. 1 is the nomin-
ative case in its simple form, used absolutely ; JVom. 2 is the form used as
the nominative of the agent or instrument ; the Gen. means, as usual, ' of,'
or 'belonging to' ; Dat. 1 is the dative of ' possession' or 'use,' = ' for' (him,
her, it), to have and to use ; Daf. 2 is a sort of locative case ' towards '
(him, &c. ) ; the Ace. is the ' object ' form of the word ; the Voc. is used in
'calling'; Abl. 1 denotes 'from,' 'on account of,' as a cause; Abl. 2,
'from,' 'away from,' 'procession from' ; Abl. 3, 'with,' 'in company with' ;
Abl. 4, 'being with,' ' remamuig with,' 'at'; occasionally there is an
Abl. 5, which means merely place where, 'at.' — Ed.]

IG

AN AL'STEALIAJS" LANGUAGE.

5 •== £

^ ^ '7

^ ^i i£ ^ ^ ^

o o o o c o

a w w « w w

^ -<

o

;^

o

12;
o

I— I

r<;
w
1-^
o
w

fi

w
1=1

q

^ ^ ^

'A
o

1—1

p

pi

^ cj ,5

--.da

w w w w

'^ u

THE GEAM3IAE.

17

I

c3 c3 S rt

O.i:

2 ;? ^.5

t^ r^ ■>; -

p a

6 cc

Cl I

.S o to W it -3

"^ 1

•2 SciC

tt it if CD

c c c c

S S 3 3

o A o i
— — ri-s

'EcTc t£ ic

•si ii

^^^^
it ic it ic

c3 =55 =S5S

O 3SS =:3=!S

'*t' oco '^Sooco
.£ .£ .- .- „ "■ .5: .- .b .b

'3)._ Tc it it .5 ,3 So it it iO

it it ic iO

; C = =

(i

ooo 0=222

T-t 'M

rH C<I

tei !>s (^ ->; U

C^

"rt 'rt "ci 'd '3 "S '^ "rt
ic it iO ic it it i( iO

fe5 C5 q "^

18

AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.
DECLENSION OF PLACE-NAMES.

All Nouns, whatever may be their original signification, when
used as proper names of places, are of this declension, if they
end in a.

M u 1 u b i n b a, the site of 'Newcastle.'
Mulubinba, the name of the place, M . . . .

Mulubinba-koba, any thing belonging to M . .

2 M ulubinb a- k al, a male belonging to Ji" . . .

3 Mulubinba -kali n, a female belonging to ilf . .

Daf. 1 Mulubinba-kako, for M . . , — to remain there
2Mulubinba-kolag, tojf . ., to proceed to Jlf.

Ace. 1 Barun Mulubinb a-kal, them (ma*c.) of Jf . .
2 Barun Mulubinba-kalin, them (fern.) of M .
8 Barun yantin Mulubinba-kal, them all of M .

Voc. Tapallun Mulubinba-kal, alas ! people of M

All. 1 Mulubinba -tin, from, on account of 3/. .

2 Mulubinba-kabirug, from, away from M

3 Mulubinba-koa, by, by way of, through M

4 Mulubinba-kaba, at, on, in M

Novi
Gen.

Note 1. — To form the Ace. singular or dual here, put their
pronouns in the place of barun.

2. — The interrogative pronoun signifying place is w o n t a ?
'where is it?' and this maybe substituted for Mulubinba;
the example would then become interrogative ; as, w o n t a k a 1 ?
'belonging to what place?' wontakaba? 'where is it at?'
' at what place is it ?' &c.

DECLENSION OF THE FIRST PERSONAL PRONOUN.

The cases of the three jjersonal pronouns and the manner of
using them are similar to those of the nouns. Thus, for the first
pronoun :■ —

Nom. 1. Gato a, I. — This form is used in answer to an inter-
rogative of personal agenc}^ ; as, Ganto wiyan?
'Who speaks?' The answer would be g a to a, 'it is I
who,' the verb being understood. The next form,
bag, would simply declare what I do.

2. Bag, I, — is used in answer to an interrogative of the
act ; as, M i n n u g b a 1 1 i n b i ? ' What art thou
doing now ?' t at a n b a g, ' I eat ;' ba g must be used,
and not the personal-nominative, gato a.

3'IIE GRAMMAB. 19

Gen. E ra mo - ii m ba, Mij or mine, — is used with a noun, or
with a substantive verb ; the noun always precedes ;
as, kokera emmoumba, 'my house'; but
e m m o u m b a t a, 'it is mine.'

Dat. 1. E m m 0 - u g, For me, — personally to receive or use.

2. Emmo-ug-kin-ko, To me, — to the place where I am.

Ace. Ti-a, Me, — governed by transitive verbs. This pronoun, is
used to form the equivalent for the passive voice ; as,
b lint an bag, 'I strike;' but bun tan tia, 'I
am struck,' lit., 'strikes me.'

Vac. Ka-ti-oii, — merely an exclamation ; as, OJi me ! Ah me !

AM. 1. Emmo-u g-kai, From me, — through me, about me.

2. Emm o-u g-k in-biru g, From me, — away from me.

3. Emmo-ug-ka-toa, With me, — in company with me.

4. E m m 0 - u g - k i n - b a. With me, — at my place.

These case-endings have the same force for the second and the
third pronouns also.

Demoxstratite Pronouns.

These are so compound in their signification as to include the
demonstrative and the relative; e.ff. — 1. gali is equivalent to
' this is that who or which,' — the person or thing spoken of being
here present; 2. gala, 'that is that who or which,' — being at
hand; 3. galoa, 'that is that Avho or which,' — being beside
the person addressed, or not far off. They are thus declined : —

Instant. Proximate. Remote.

j^ (1. Ga-li Ga-la Gra-loa.

^ 2. TJn-ni Un-noa Un-toa.

Gen. Grali-ko-ba G-ala-ko-ba G-aloa-ko-ba.

1. Gali-ko Gala-ko Galoa-ko.

^ " Un-ti-ko Un-ta-ko Un-toa-ko.

Aec. TJn-ni Un-noa TJn-toa.

1. Gali-tin Un-ta-tin Galoa-tin

Ahl

^ 2. Un-ti-birug Un-ta-birug Un-toa-birug.

The pronouns attached to these demonstratives determine
their number, whether they are to be singular or plural; as,
gali-noa, 'this is he who'; gali-bara, ' these are they who' ;
gali-ta, 'it is this that'; gali-tara, 'these are they that.'
Other combinations are gali-noa, ' this is he who,' as an
agent; unni-noa, ' this is he,' tlie subject. Gali-koba bon,
'this belongs to him,' an idiom ; galoa-koba bon, ' this is that
which belongs to him'; these and the other similar genitives,
are always followed by the accusative case.

20 an australian language.

Reciprocal Pronouns.

Gatoa-bo, 'I myself; gintoa-bo, 'thou thyself ; uiu-n'oa-
bo, 'he himself; bali-bo, ' our two selves,' and so ou. The
ho here attached is merely an intensive particle.

Possessive Pronouns.

These are the genitive cases of the personal pronouns, and
are used thus : — e mmoumba ta, ' mine it is ' ; u n n i t a e m-
moumba kokera, ' this is my house' ; unnoa ta giroumba,
'that is thine'; tararan giroumba korien, ' it is not thine,'
lit., 'not thine not,' for the idiom of the language requires
two negatives here.

Indefinite Pronouns.

Titurrabul, 'some one,' ' some person or persons', is declined
like the fourth declension of nouns ; tarai, ' other,' like the second
declension.

Absolute Pronouns.

Ta, 'it is,' from the substantive verb ; tar a, 'they are,' is of
the fifth declension; unni tara, 'these are they which,' as a sub-
ject; gali taro, 'these are they wdiich,' as agents ; yantin,
'all,' 'the whole,' is of the second declension; yantin-to, 'all
who,' as agents ; wakallo, 'one only,' as an agent.

Interrogative Pronouns.

The interrogative pronouns are, — gan, 'who? '; min {neut),
'which? what?'; won, 'where?'; ya-koai, 'how? in what man-
ner? ' ; ya-kounta, ' wdien? at what time ? '

EXAMPLES OF THE PARTICLES USED AS AFFIXES TO
THE IXTEimOGATICES.

The Interrogative, Gan-? who ?

2iom. I Gan-ke? who is ?

2 G a n - 1 o ? who is the agent ?
Gen. Gan- limb a? wdiose?
Dat. 1 Gan-nug? for whom ? — to possess or use.

2 Gan-kin-ko? to whom ? — towards whom ?
Ace. G a n - n li g ? whom ? or who is the object ?

Voc.

All. 1 G a n- k a i ? from whom ? on account of whom ?

2 Gan-kin-birug? from, away from whom ?

3 G a n - k a t 0 a ? in company with whom ?

•1 Gau-kin-ba? with whom? remaining with wLom?

THE GEAMMAR,

^21

The Interrogative, M i n- ? what ? which ?,
applied to things only.

Min-arig? what? as, minarig ke unni? what is this ?

M i n-n an? Avhat are ? i.e., how many ?

M i n-a r i g -k o ? what ? — as the agent or instrument.

]M i n-a r i g - k o b a ? belonging to what ?

M i n-a rig-kolag? towards what ?

31 i n-n u g ? what ? — the object of the verb.

M i n-a rig-tin? from what cause ? why ? wherefore ?

M i n-a rig-birug? from what ? of what ? out of what ?

M i n-a rig-kiloa? like what ?

M i n-a r i g- k o a ? with what ? together with what ?

M i n-a rig- k aba? on what ?

The Interrogative of place,
"Won-? what place ? where ?

"W o n-t a ? where is the place ? what place ? — definite.

"W 0 n-n e i n ? where ? which place ? — indefinite.

Wo n-t a-k al ? viasc, belonging to what country or place?

Wo n-t a-kalin? fern., belonging to what country ?

W o n-t a - k o 1 a g ? towards what place ?

W 0 n-t a r i g ? to what place ? whither ?

W 0 n-n u g ? what place ? where ? — the object of a verb.

W 0 n-t a - 1 i n t o ? from what place ? (causative) ; where at ?

W 0 n-t a-b i r u g ? from what place ? out of what place ?

Wo n-t a-k o a ? through what place ? by what place ?

T, ,. 1 1 (Takoai? how? in what manner?

interrogatiye adverbs, i -r^ i ^ o t, o ^ i,„j- +• o

° ( Y a k o u n t a .f^ when : at what time z

All these particles are used strictly according to the meanings
shown above, and cannot be used loosely like some interrogatives
in English ; for example, y a k o a i ? ' how ? ' cannot be used to
to ask the question ' how many?' for it is an adverb of manner ;
' how many ' must be m i n n a n.

AS AUSTEALIAX LANGUAGE.

CHAPTER III.

OF THE VERB.

TiiE verbs undergo no change to indicate either number or
person, but the stem-fcn-ms vary in respect to the sort of agency-
employed, Avhether personal or instrumental, and also according
to the manner of doing or being ; a?, {a) when I do anything to
myself, or (b) to another; or (c) I do anything to another and
he reciprocally does it to me ; or (d) when I continue to be or
to do ; or (e) when the action is doing again, or (/") when per-
mitted to be done by this or that agent ; or (y) by another
agent ; or (A) when a thing acts as an agent, or (i) is used as
an instrument. Verbs are reduplicated to denote an increase of
the state or action. All verbs are declined by particles, each of
which particles contains in its root the accident attributed to the
verb in its various modifications ; as, assertion, affirmation, nega-
tion, privation, tendency, existence, cause, permission, desire,
purpose; thus are. formed moods, tenses, and participles. The
participles are formed after the manner of their respective tenses,
and are declined either as verbal nouns or as verbal adjectives.

Of the Kinds oe Yekus.
Yerbs are either Transifive or Intransitive, both of which are
subject to the following accidents, viz. : —

1. Active-transitive, or those which denote an action that
passes from the agent to some external object ; as, 'I strike him,'
bun tan bon bag. This constitutes the active ro/cr, which
states what an agent does to another, or, what another agent does
to him, in which latter case it is equivalent to the English passive
A'oice; e.y.jbuntan bon (literally, 'strikes him,') implies that
some agent now strikes him, ai\d means ' he is now struck,' the
nominative pronoun being omitted in order to call attention to
the object. But when this accusative or object is omitted, the
attention is then called to the act which the agent performs ;
as, bun tan bag, ' I strike,' expressed often by 'I do strike.'

2. Act ive-intrannitive , or those which express an action which
has no effect upon any external object except the agent or agents
themselves ; that is, the agent is also the object of his own act ;
consequently the verb is necessarily reflexive ; as, b u n k i 1 1 e li n
bag, 'I struck myself.' This constitutes the ' reflexive ' modifica-
tion of tlie verb.

TEE GEAMMAK. 23

3. Acfire-fransi'fn'f-reciprocal, or those verbs that denote an
action that passes from the agent to some external object, which
object returns the action to the agent who then becomes the
object, and thus they act reciprocally one towards the other.
Consequently the dual and plural numljers are always the subject
to this form of the verb; as, bunk ill an bali, 'thou and I
strike' each other reciprocally; biiukillan bar a, 'they
strike' each one the other reciprocally, or they fight with blows.
This constitutes the ' reciprocal ' modification of the verb.

4. Continuative ; as Avhen the state continues, or the action is,
was, or will be, continued without interruption ; as, b u n k i 1 -
lilin bag, 'I am now continuing in the action of making
blows', such as thrashing or beating. This is called the ' con-
tinuative ' modification of the verb.

5. Causative (1) by permission, or, with a negative, proliihitive ;
as, when we do or do not permit a person to do the act, or
another to do the act to him; as, biimmunbilla bon, 'let
him strike,' b u m in a r ab unb il 1 a bon, 'cause some one to
strike him,' equivalent to, ' let him be struck' ; b u m m a r a b u n-
b i y i k 0 r a bon, ' let no one strike him.'

6. Causative (2) by personal agency, denoting the exertion of
personal energy to produce the effect upon the object ; as tiir
ta unni, 'this is broken'; tiir bng-ga unni also means
' this is broken,' but then personal agency is understood, for the
phrase is equivalent to ' some person has broken this,' or ' this is
broken by some one.'

7. Causative (3) by instrumental agency, denoting an effect
produced by means of some instrument; as, tiir burrea unni,
'this is broken,' sc, by means of something.

8. 'Effective, or those which denote an immediate effect pro-
duced by the agent on the object; as, urn a bag unni, 'I
made tins'; pital bag, 'I am glad'; pitalma bon bag,
' I made him glad.'

D. Neuter verbs, or those w^hich describe the quality, state, or
existence of a thing; as, kekal lag unni, 'this is sweet';
tetti lag unni, ' this is dead '; w^onnug ke noa? ' where
is he?' unni ta, 'this is it'; moron noa katan, 'he is
alive'; unuug noa ye, 'there he is.' In these the particles,
lag, k e, t a, k a t a n, ye, are rendered into English by the
neuter verb is.

10. Reduplicate, or those which denote an increase of the state,
quality, or energy ; a^, p i t a 1 noa, 'he is glad ' ; p i t a 1-p i t a I
noa, ' he is very glad '; tetti bara, ' they are dead ' ; tetti-
tettei bara,' they are dead-dead,' or ' a great death is among
them'; kauwal, 'great'; k au w a 1-k au w a 1, ' very great ';
t a u w a, ' eat ' ; t a u w a-t a u w a, ' eat heartily.'

24 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

11. Pi'lvaiive, or those wliicli denote tlie absence of some pro-
perty. Affirmatively, u m a n bag u n n i, 'I make this,' or ' I
do this ' ; u p a u bag u n n i, ' I do this,' not directly, but with
something or by means of something else ; e.g., ' I write on this
paper with a quill' would be up an ba.g unni yirigko
wiyelliko, lit., ' I make this quill for-to speak or commuiii-
cate ' ; whereas uman bag unni yirig pen kakilliko
would mean ' I make this quill for-to* be a pen.' Negatively,
when it is implied that the act itself has not taken place, the expres-
sion would be u m a pa bag b a, ' had I made ' ; again, if the act
existed, but no effect produced by the action were implied, it
would be expressed thus, u m a i - g a b a g u n n i, 'I had almost
done this.'

12. Imminent, or those which denote a readiness to be or to
do; as piriwal katea kun koa bag, ' lest I should be
king'; buutea kun koa bon bag, 'lest I should strike
him.'

13. Inceptive, or those which describe the state as actually
about to exist, or the action as going to put forth its energy at
the time spoken of;as, kakilli kolag ball, 'we two are now
going to live reciprocally together'; biinkilli kolag bag,
'I am now going to strike.'

14. Iterative, or those which denote a repetition of the state
or action; as, mc5ron katea kanun, 'shall live again';
b u n t e a k a n li n, ' will strike again.'

15. Spontaneous, or those which denote an act done of the
agent's own accord ; as, tiir kullin unni, 'this is breaking
of its own accord ' — not by external violence {cf. No. G) ; p 6 r
k u 1 1 e ii n u o a, ' he has just been born,' lit., ' he has dropped
himself.'

Or THE Moods.
There are three moods, the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the
Imperative.

1, The Indicative, which simply declares a thing ; as, b ii n t a n
bag, 'I strike'; unni ta, 'thisisit', the subject; gali noa
'this is he/ the agent.

2. The Suljunctive, which subjoins something to the meaning
of the verb, such as a wish, a desire, a purpose ; as, b u w i 1 b a g,
' I wish to strike,' b u u w a b a g, '1 desire to strike,' or ' I
want now to strike ' ; t a u a n ba u w a b u n k i 1 1 i k o, ' had I
come hither for-to strike.'

* This form of the verb, as will afterwards be shown, denotes purpose ;
our author expresses that everywhere by for-to. I have allowed that pre-
positional form to stand. — Ed.

THE GRAMMAR. 25

3. Tlie Imperative, which expresses command ; as, b \\. w a hi,
' do thou strike' ; but in b ii m m n n b i 1 1 a, ' let strike,' the per-
son or persons addressed are desired to permit the person nan:ied
to strike; in b I'lmm a r ab u nb ill a, 'let strike,' the person
addressed is desired ti:^ permit any one to strike the person named ;
in b u n t e a- k a, ' strike again,' the person or persons addressed
are desired to repeat the action. The imperative form is often
used with the first and the third personal pronouns ; in this sense
it denotes the desire of the agent to do the act at the time spoken
of ; as, b u w a b a n u g, 'I want to strike thee' ; b u w a b i 1 o a,
' he wants to strike thee.'

Note. — The equivalent, in many instances, to the English
infinitive mood is the construct form of the verb which denotes
the purpose of the subject; as, Minarig kounni? What
is this for ? b u n k i 1 1 i k o, is the answer, ' for-to strike.'

Of the Te^^'ses.

1. The Present, which asserts the j)Tesent existence of the
action or being of the verb, at the time in which the assertion is
made. The signs of this tense are the following affixed particles,
of which the first consonant is varied by the terminations of the
respective conjugations of the verbs, viz., -an to the simple verb,
-Ian to the reciprocal verb, and -lin to the participle; as,
b u n t an , 'strikes' now; b ii n k i 1 1 a n, now 'reciprocally strike
one another'; bunkillin, now 'striking'; biinkillilin, now
'continuing in the act of striking.'

2. The Perfect-definite, which asserts the act as having been
completed in a past period of the present day ; as, biinkeun,
' has struck,' sc, this morning ; b li n k i 1 1 e u n b a g, 'I have
struck myself,' sc, this day.

3. The Perfect-past-aorist, which asserts the act as completed,
without reference to any particular period in past time ; as,
b II n k u 1 1 a, ' struck.' This is not the participle.

4. The Pluperfect, which asserts the act as completed prior to
some other past circumstance. It is formed by the affirmative
particle, t a, affixed to the past aorist. and is equivalent only to
the English pluperfect ; as, b ii n k u 1 1 a t a, ' had struck.'

5. The Pature- definite, which asserts the act as taking place
at a certain definite period, future to the time at which the act
is spoken of; as, biinkin, 'shall or will strike,' sc, to-morrow
morning.

6. The Future-aorist, which asserts the mere future existence
of the act, without reference to any other circumstance, in some
indefinite time to come; as, biinnun bag, 'I shall strike';
b II u n u n n o a, 'he will strike.'

26 AN AUSTEALIAK LxVXGUAGE.

Of the PARTICirLES.

1. The Present. This lias already been described ; but it may be
necessary to menticm, that the present [.^articiple can be used only
with reference to present time, not to the past and future, as is
the case in English; as, bunkilliu, 'striking' now.

2. The Imperfect -definite., which represents the action as being
in ]:)rogress at some definite past period ; as, bunkillikeiin,
' striking,' sc.^ this morning.

3. The Jmperfcct-past-aorist, which represents the action as
being in prot^ress at any recent time; as, biinkilliela no a,
, he was striking.'

4. The Pasf-present-aorist, which asserts the action as having
been engaged in and completed at some former period; as, b \i n-
talla bag, wouuai bag ba, 'I struck when I was a child ';
w i y a 1 1 a bag w o n n a i-k i 1 o a, w o n n a i bag b a, 'I
spoke as a child when I was a child.'

5. The Pluperfect, which indicates the action as having been
completed prior to some other past event mentioned; as, biin-
killiela t a, ' had struck,' sc, prior to something.

0. The Inceptive-future, which asserts that the action is now
about to be pursued; as, biinkilli kolag bag, 'lam going
to strike,' or 'I am going a-striking ' ; makoro kolag bug,
' I am going a-fishing.'

7. Fiiture-definil e, which asserts the action as about to be
engaged in at some future definite period ; as, b u n k i 1 1 i k i u
bag, 'I am going to strike,' &c., to-morrow morning.

8. The Future-aorist, which asserts that the action will exist at
some future undefined period ; as, b ii n k i 1 1 i n u n bag, 'I am
going to strike,' sc, at some time or other, hereafter.

[ PARADIGM OF THE TENSES AND THEIR MEANINGS.

The Tenses of the verb and their meanings, as given above,
may be concisely expressed thus : —

Indicative Mood and Participles.

Tense. Meaxixg.

1. Present tense, I am or do — now.

2. Imperfect-dejinite, I was or was doing — this morning.

3. First-aorint, I was or was doing — recently.

4. Second-aorist, I was or did — at some former period.

5. Perfect-dfflnite. I have been or done — this morning.

G. Pluperfect, I liad been or done — before some event.

7. Inceptiv'-juture, I am going to or shall, be or do — now.

JS. F at ure-df finite, I am going to or shall, be or do — to-

morrow morning.

9. Fature-aorist, I am going to or shall, be or do — at

some time hereafter.

THE GRAMjVIAH. 27

Subjunctive Mood.

Our author lias four Aorids in this Mood, namely: —
10a. Past aorusf, 1 had almost been or done.

b. Aurisfoftltepasf, Had I been or done.

c. „ ,, I wish I had been or done.

d. ,, „ net/ativeli/, I have not been or done.

The Moods have various mode-forms, thus : — •

In the Indicative.

Reciprocal mode, We [e.y., strike] one another.

liejlexice mode, I [strike] myself.

In the Subjunctive.

Iteration, mode, I [strike] again.

Imminence, Lpst I should [strike].

Contemporary circumstance, "While I or when I [strike].

Implied necjation of actual Ije-') ^ -.^

coming or of actual effect, j
Implied necjation ofheing or action. See 10 b., c., d.

In the Participles.

Continuative mode, Continuing to be or to do.

Reflexive mode, Doing to one's self.

Reciprocal mode. Doing to owe another.

It is clear that the native language recognises three varieties
of time and place. The pronouns g a 1 i, gala, galoa {q.v.)
show these variations as to place ; and so the principal tenses of
the indicative mood, as above, mark time (1) present, (2) recent,
(3) remote. English and other languages show the same dis-
tinctions in such words as liere, there, yonder. — En.]

DECLENSION of the VERBS.

[J^p^ The reader will remember that the tense-form of the
verb is always constant, and is therefore not affected by its sub-
ject. The sub] -ct shown in the declension of the verb is the
pronoun bag, 'I,' and the direct object with a transitive verb is
bon, 'him'; but any other suitable pronouns may be substituted
for these ; for the pronouns that are thus used as subjects, see
note on next page; their objective cases are shown in the paradigm
of the pronouns. Each tense may thus be declined in full, as in
English, by using in succession the pronouns of the first, second,
and third persons as the subject of the verb. The shades of
meaning conveyed by the tenses are given in the paradigm above,
and are applicable to all verbs. The numbers, affixed to the
various tenses in the declension of the verbs, correspond with the
numbers on that paradigm of tenses, and the T. stands for
Tense. — En.]

28 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.

DECLENSION OF THE SUBSTANTIVE VERB.

Kakilliko, ' to be,' ' to exist,' ' to remain.'

Exam])le of ilie Declension of a Verh in the Present Tense of tlie
Indicative Mood.

Any Tense may be declined in full in a similar manner.

T. 1. Sing. Unnibof bag* ka-tdn, I am here.

„ bi „ Thou art here.

,, noa ,, He is here.

Dual. „ bali* ,, Wetwo (wzcZzis/re) arehere.

,, balinoa ,, y^et\^o {exclusive) Vive\\evQ.

„ bula „ You two are here.

„ buloara „ They two are here.

Flu. „ geen, „ We are here.

,, nura ,, Tou are here.

„ bara „ They are here.

Reciprocal.

Dual. Unnibo hali* ta-kill-an, AVe two are, o?' live, here to-
gether.

Plu. „ geen* „ We are, or live, here to-

gether.

* Or, such other nominative cases of pronouns of the singular, dual, and
plural, as the sense may require ; e.g., for the sing., bang, /; b i, fhou ;
n o a, Jie ; b o u n t o a, she ; t a, it ; n g a 1 i, this (here) ; n g a 1 a, that (near
me) ; n g a 1 o a, that (near you) ; for the dual, bali, thou and I ; bali
noa, he and / ; b a 1 i b o u n t o a, she and I ; bula, ye two ; bulo-
ara, they two ; for the pht. , n g 6 e n, ur ; n li r a, you ; bar a, they.

'f Lit., this-self-same-place I am

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. *Bag ka-tan T. 6. *Bag ka-knila-ta

4. „ ka-kiilla 8. „ ka-kiu

5. ,, ka-keuii 9. ,, ka-nuu.

Aorist participle — kan ; as, kinta kan bag, ' afraid being I.'

[^Throughout the verb 'to be,' both in this Declarative form and in the
Permissive, a predicative advei'b, ' unnibo,' or any other suitable word,
may be inserted here in all tlie tenses. — Ed.]

Pakticiples.

T. 1. Bag ka-killin T. 6. Bag ka-killi-ela-ta

2. „ ka-killi-keuii 7. „ ka-killi-kolag

4. ,, ka-takx 8. ., ka-killi-kiu

T. 9. Bag ka-killi-nuii.'

THE GEAMMAB. 29

Continuative.
T. 1. Bag ka-killi-liu T. 3. Bag ka-killi-li-ela.

Reflexive.

T. 1. Kan bag bo.

Reciprocal,

T. 1. Bali ka-kill-c4n* T. 6. Bali ka-kill-ala-ta

4. „ ka-kill-ala 7. „ ka-kill-ai-kolag

5. „ ka-kiU-ai-keuii 8. „ ka-kill-ai-kin

T. 9. Bali ka-killa-nun.
* = 'We two are living together, the one with the other, now.'

SuBjuNCTiTE Mood.

1. The constmct verh, denoting purpose.

T. 10.

Ka-ldlli-ko, 'to be, exist, remain.'
Ka-killi-koa, ' to continue to be or live.'
Iva-kill-ai-koa, ' to live one witb another.'

2. The construct verb, denotinfj the immediate purpose of the
action in the preceding clause ; lohen no clause precedes, the form
oftlie verb denotes a wisli.

T. 10. Ka-uwil-koa bag, ' that I may or might be,' ' I wish to be.'

Iteration.

T. 1. Iva-tea-kan bag T. 9. Ka-tea-lia-niin bag

Imminence.

T. 9, Ka-tea-kun-koa bag.

Contemporary circumstance.

T. 1. Ka-tc4u bag ba* T. 3. Ka-killi-ela bag ba

T. 9. Ka-niin bag ba.

* The whole of the indicative mood may be thus declined with ha.

Implied negation of actual becoming.

T. 10a. Ka-mai ga bag
Implied negation of cntitg or being.

T. 10b. Ka-pa bag ba T. 10c. Ka-pa-ta bag ba

T. lOd. Keawaran* bag ka-pa
*ireawaran is a negative.
Imperative Mood.
Ka-nwa bi, 'be thou.'

Ka-kill-ia bi, ' continue thou to be, live, remain.'
Ka-uwa bi gintoa bo, 'be thou thyself.'
Ka-kilhi bula (dual and plural only), ' be ye two.'
Ka-tea-ka bi, ' be thou again.'

30 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

PERMISSIVE EOEM of the VERB ' KAKILLIKO:

Ka-mun-billiko * to permit to be, exist, remain.'

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. Kamiiii-bin bon ba^* T. G. Kamiia-bin-bia-tabon bag

4. „ -bin-bia „ „ 8. „ -bi-kiii „ „

5, „ -bi-keiia „ ,, 9. „ -bi-uua „ „

* = ' I permit him to be.'

Paeticiples.

T. 1. Ka-mun-bill-in T. G. Ka-mua-billi-ela-ia
3. „ -billi-ela 7. „ -kolag

•1. ,, -bi-ala 8. ,, -kiu

5. „ -billi-keiiu 9. „ -nun.

Heciproeal.

T. 1. Ka-muQ-bill-aii f T. G. Ki-mun-bill-ala-ta f

■i. „ -bill-ala ,, 7. „ -bill-ai-kolag ,,

5. „ -bill-ai-keun ,, S. ., -bill-ai-kin ,,

T. 9. Ka-mua-billa-nun billun bag.

t Here insert in eaeh tenee ' bulun bang.' or any other suitable worrls, as
subject and personal object. T. 1. is equivalent to ' I permit them to live to-
gether.'

SuBJUNCTiTE Mood.

1. To exj)ress piDyose.

T. 10. Ka-mua-bilbl-ko, 'to permit to be'.

,, -billa-koa, ' to permit to be together,
the one with the other'.

2. To express immediate purpose.

T. 10. Iva-mua-bin-uwil-koa, 'that ... may or might permit to
be together.'

Iteraf/'on.
T. 1. Ka-mua-bea-kcin bou bag T.d. Ka-muu-bea-ka-nua bon bag*
* = ' I shall again permit hun to be.'

Imminence.
T. 9. Ka-miia-bea-kua-koa biloa,t 'lest he permit thee to be.'

Contemporary circumstance.

T. 1. I\a-mu!i-bin boo bag ba T. 3. Ka-mun-billi-ehabiuugt ba
T. 9. Ka-mim-bi-niia bitiaf ba
t For banung, biloa, bitia, binung, see paradigm of Pronouns.

THE GHAMMAE. 31

Implied negation of actual hecomiiig.
T. 10 a. Ka-mai-ga bdn bag

Implied negation of entity or heing.

T. 10 b. Ka-muu-bi-pabag ba T. 10 c. Ka-mun-bi-pa-ta bag ba

T. 10 d. Iveawaniu* bag muu-bi-pa

* Keawaran is a negative.

Imperatite Mood.

Ka-mim-billa * 'permit * to '

Ka-mua-bill-a „ 'permit „ self to continue to ' • • .
Ka-miia-bea-ka „ 'permit ,, again to ' . , . ,
* Insert here the pronoun in the Ace.

DECLENSION OF TRANSITIVE VERBS.

DECLENSION OF the VERB ' TO STRIKE:

Bun-killi-ko, ' to strike '.

EXAMPLES OF TSE DECLENSION OF THE TENSES OF THE
INDICATIVE MOOD.

T. 1. Sing., Buutan bag.f Dual, Buutan bali.f

Phi., Buntan gaeu.f

Conjoined Dual, Buutan banug.f

t Or any other suitable pronoun as a subject. The personal object must bo
placed alter the verb, but the neuter object after the subject.

Indicatiye Mood.

T. 1. Buntc4n boa bag* T. 6. Bun-kulla-ta bdn bag

4. Bun-killa „ „ 8. ,, -kin bdn bag

5. „ -keua „ „ 9. „ -nun „ „

Paeticiples.

T. 1. Bun-killin bdu bag T. 6. Bun-killi-ela-ta bdn bag

2. „ -killi-keun „ „ 7. „ „ -kolag „ „

3. „ -killi-ela ,, „ 8. „ „ -kin „ „

4. „ -tala „ „ 9. „ „ -nun „ „

Gontimiatite.

T. 1. Bun-killi-linbdnbag* T. 3. Bun-killi-li-ela bdn bag

* = ' I am striking with nnany blows, now.'

Mrjlexive.
T. 5. Bun-kill-eiia bag, ' 1 have struck myself.'

32 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.

12eci])rocal.

T. 1. Bim-killan bali T. 6. Bun-kill-ala-ta bali

4. „ -kill-ala „ 7. „ -kill-ai-kolag „

5, „ -kill-ai-kt'-un ,, 8. „ -kill-ai-kin „

T. 9. Bun-killa-nun bali

SUEJUNCTITE MOOB.

1. To express imrpose.
T. 10.

Bim-killi-ko, ' to strike,' ' for the purpose of striking.'
Bim-killi-koa, 'to strike continually,' 'to beat,' 'to thrasli.'
Buri-kni-ai-koa, ' to strike eaeli one the other,' ' to fight.'

2. To express immediate purpose.

T. 10. Buu-wil or bu-wil-koa bon bag, ' that I might strike him.'

3. Iteration.

T. 1. Bun-tea-kan bdn bag T. 9. Biin-tea-ka-niin bag

4. Imminence.

T. 9. Biin-tea-kiin-koa bdn bag

5. Contemporary circumstance.

T. 1. Biin-tciu bdn bag ba T. 3. Biin-killi-ela bdn noa ba

T. 9. Bun-nun bdn bag ba

6. Implied necjation of actual effect.

T. 10a. Bum-mai ga bdn bag

7. Implied negation of action or entity.

T. 10b. Bum-pa bdn bag ba T. 10c. Bum-pa-ta bdn bag ba

T. lOd. Xeawaran bdn bag biim-pa

Impeeatite Mood.
Bii-wa bi, ' strike thou'; buwa-buwa bi, ' continue thou to stidke.
Bim-killa bula, ' strike on, ye two, the one with the other.'
Bun-kill-ia, ' strike on,' 'be striking self.'
Bun-tea-ka bi, ' strike again ' ; biin-kea, ' strike instantly.'

Note. — This imperative, if written in full, with a subject and an
object, would be : —

Bu-wa bi (or bula, or nura) tia ; instead of tia, any other
object maybe used ; such as, nnni, 'this,' unnoa, ' that,' and the
accusative cases of all the pronouns.

Continuative.
Bun-killi-lia bi (bula, nura) tia, &c., as above.
Hcflexive. Emphatic. Reciprocal.

Biin-kill-ia bi kotti, Bu-wa bi gintoa, Bun-killa bula

' strike thou thine own ' strike thou thyself.' ' strike ye two, the one the
self.' other.'

THE GKAMMAR. 33

PERMISSIVE FORM of the YERB ' TO STRIKE:

Bum-mara-bun-billiko ' to permit (some other) to strike.'

EXAMPLE OF THE DECLENSION OF THE TENSES.

1. Form to he used for the Active Voice.

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. Sing. Buin-muu-bm bif tia,t ' thou permittest me to strike,'

or ' I am permitted to
strike.'

Imperative Mood.

1. Present ; 2. Continuative ; 8. Bejlexive ; 4. Emphatic;
5. Reciprocal.

1. Bum-muii-billa bit tia,t 'permit tbou me to strike,'

or ' let me strike.'

'permit me to continue in
striking.'

' permit thyself to strike thine
own self.'

' do thou thyself permit him
to strike.'

' permit ye two, the one the
other, to strike one
another.'

2.

)5

-billi-lia bi tia

3.

!5

-bill-la bi kotti.

4.

))

-billa bi gintoa bou

5.

55

-billa bula.

2. Form to be used for the Fassive Voice.

IifDicATivE Mood.
1. Present ; 2. Continuative; ^.Reflexive ; 4i. Reciprocal.

1. Bum-mara-bua-bin bit tia,t 'thou permittest (any one)

to strike me,' or ' I am
permitted to be struck.'

2. „ bua-billi-lia, ' continue thou to permit (any

one) to be struck.'

3. „ biin-bill-ia tia 'I myself pennit myself to

gatoa bo, be struck.'

4. „ bun-billa bulun, 'permit, the one the other, to

be struck.'
t Any other suitable pronouns may be placed here.

Si AX AI'STEALIAX LANGUAGE.

Declension of this Verb,

wlien it is used so as to have t]ie meaning of a passive voice.

TxT)TCATivE Mood.

T. 1. Bum-mara-biin-ljinb(')ii bng 4. Bum-mara-bun-biabonbag
T. 9. Bum-mara-buu-bi-iiuu bdn bag

Pahticiples.

T. 1. Bum-mara-bun-bill-in T. 4. Bum-raara-buQ-bi-ala

T. 9. Bum-mara-biia-billl-nun

lieciprocal.

T. 1. Biim-mara-Tiun-billaii T. 4. Bum-Tnara-bun-bill-ala

T. 9. Bi'im-mara-bun-billa-nun

ScBjL'xcTivE Mood.

T. 10.

Bura-mara-bim-billi-ko, 'to permit (somebody) to be

.struck.'
-biiu-bill-ai-koa, 'to permit the one to be

struck by the other.'
-buu-bi-uwil-koa, ' tbat...raigbt permit... to be

struck.'
-bun-bia-ktiii-koa, 'lest (somebody) should be

permitted to be struck.'
-biia-bi-iuin bon bag ba, ' nhen I permit (any person)

to be struck.'
-biiQ-bai-gT, bou bag, ' I had almost permitted him

to be struck.'
-buu-bi-pa bun bag ba, ' had I permitted him to be

struck.'

Imper.vtite Mood.
Bum-mara-bun-billa bi tia.

DECLEXSIOX of the TEEB ' TO 2IAKE:

Umulliko, *todo,' personally, ' to make/ ' to create.'

IxDrcATiTE Mood.

T. 1. ITman bag unni T. (5. TJma-ta bag unni

4. Uma „ 8. Uma-kin „

5. Uma-keiin „ 9. Unza-niiu ,,

the grammar, 35

Paeticiple?.

T. 1. Umull-in bag lumi T. 4. Umala bag nnni

2. Uniulli-ktuii ., G. lTuiul!i-ela-ta „

3. Umulli-ela „ 7. Umulli-kolag ,,

T. 9. Umulli-nua bag unni

Continuative.
T. 1. Umulli-lla bag unni T. 3. Umulli-li-ela bag unni

Reflexive.
T. 5. Umull-eLia bag unni

Reciprocal.

T. 1. Umull-an bali unni T. G. Umull-ala-ta bali unni

4. Umull-ala „ ,, 7. Umull-ai-kolag „ „

5. Umull-ai-keun „ ,, 8. Ilmull-ai-kin „ ,,

T. 9. Umulla-nim bali unni

Su33JuxcTiTE Mood.

1. To express purpose.

T. 10.

TTmulli-ko, 'to do, make, create.'
Umulli-koa, 'to continue to do.'
TJmull-ai-koa, ' to do reciprocally.'

2. To express immediate jyurpose.
T. 10. TJma-uwil-koa bag unni, 'that I may or miglit make this.'

Iteration.
T. 1. Umea kan bag unni T. 9. Umea ka-nun bag unni

Imminence.
T. 9. Umea kiin koa bag unni

Contemporary circiim stance.
T. 1. Uman bag ba uuni T. 3. Umulli-ela bag ba unni

T. 9. Uma-nun noa bag unni

Implied negation of actual effect.
T. 10a. Umai-gi bag unni

Implied negation of action or entity.

T. 10b. Uma-pa bag unni T. 10c. Uma-pa-ta bag unni

T. lOd. Keawaran bag uma-pa unni

3g an atjstralian language.

Imperatite Mood.

TJmulla bi, ' make thou.'

Umau-umulla bi, (reduplication) ' make tliou diligently.'

Umulla bula, 'make ye two' (reciprocally).

Umull-ia bi, ' make thou thyself (reflexive).

Umea-ka, ' make again' ; uma-kea, ' make instantly.'

TTma-buu-billa bon unni, ' permit him to make this.'

Umara-bun-billa unni, 'permit this to be made.'

DECLENSIOIS' of the VERB 'TO DO; 'TO PERFORM:

UpuUiko ' to do,' ' to perform,' ' to use in action.'

Indicatiye Mood.

T. 1. Upan bag gali ko T. 4. Upa bag gali ko

T. 9. Upa-nun bag gali ko.

Participles.

T. 1. Upullin bag gali ko T. 4. Upala bag gali ko

3. Upulli-ela „ „ „ 7. Upulli-kolag „ „ „

T. 9. Upulli-nun bag gali ko

Gontinuative.
T. 1. Upulli-lin bag gali ko T. 3. Upulli-li-ela bag gali ko

Reflexive.
T. 5. Upull-eua bag gali ko

Reciprocal.

T. 1 . TJpull-an ball gali ko

Subjunctive Mood.

T. 10.
TJpulli-ko, ' to do, to use in action.'
TJpulli-koa, 'to continue to do,' as, ' to work with.'
Upan-uwil-koa bag, ' that I might do.'
Upea-kun-koa bag, 'lest I should do.'
Upa-nun bi ba, ' when thou doest,' or ' if thou do.'
Upai-ga bag, ' I had almost done.'
Upa-pa bag ba, ' had I done,' or ' if I had done.'

Imperative Mood.
Upulla, ' do,' ' use ' in action.

THE GEAMMAE.

37

DECLENSION op the VERB 'TO BREAK'
by personal agency.

Tiir-bung-giilliko, ' to break ' by personal agency,
not by instrumental means.

, Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gan bagunni T. 4. Tiir-bug-ga bag unni
T. 9. Tiu'-bug-ga-nun bagunni

Paeticipi-es.

T. 1. Tiir-bug-gullin bag t T. 4. Tiir-biig-galla bag f

3. Tiir-bug-gulli-ela „ ., 7. Tiir-bug-gulli-kolag „ „

T, 9. Tiir-bug-gulli-nuu bag unni
t Here insert ' unni ' or any other neuter object.

Continuative.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gulli-lln bag T. 3. Tiir-bug-gulli-li-ela bag f

Reflexive.
T. .5. Tiir-bug-gull-eun bag unni

Reciprocal.
T. 1. Tiir-bug-gull-an bali unni

Subjunctive Mood.

T. 10.

Tiir-bug-gulli-ko, 'to break' (something).
Tiir-bug-ga-uwil-koa, 'that ... may or might break.'
Tiir-bug-gea-l<un-koa, 'lest ... should break.'
Tiir-bug-ga-nua bag ba, ' when I break,' or 'if I break.'
Tiir-bug-gai-ga bag, 'I had almost broken.'
Tiir-biig-ga-pa bag ba, ' had I broken,' or ' if I had broken.'

DECLENSION" of the VERB ' TO BREAIC

by instrumental agency.

Tiirburrilliko, ' to break,' by instrumental, not by personal,

agency.

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. TJir-bur-rin bag unni T. 4. Tiir-bur-rea bag unni
T. 9. Tiir-bur-ri-nun bag unni

38 an austr.vliax language,

Patjticiples.

T. 1. Tiir-bur-rill-111 bag f T. 4. Tiir-bur-rala bag f

3. „ -bur-rilli-ela ,, „ 7. Tiir-bur-rilli-kolag „ „

T. 9. Tiir-bur-rilli-nua bag unni

Continuative.

T. 1. Tlir-bur-rilli-lln bag t T. 3. Tilr-biir-rilli-li-ela bag f

t Here insert ' uuni ' or any otlier neuj:er object.

Reflexive.

T. 2. Tiir-bur-ri!l-eun bag unni

Heciprocal.
T. 1. Tiir-bur-rill-rm bali unni

SuBJUXCTiYE Mood.

T. 10.

Tiir-bur-ril]i-ko, 'to break' by means of .some instrument.
Tiir-burr-uwil-koa, ' that... may or might break.'
Tiir-bur-rea-kiin-koa, 'lest ... should break.'
Tiir-bur-ri-nua bag ba, ' when I break', or 'if I break.'
Tiir-bur-ri-pabag ba, ' had I broken', or 'if I had broken.'

DECLENSION OF tue VEEB 'TO SPEAK: 'TO TELL:

Wiyelliko, * to speak, say, talk, converse, communicate.'

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. Wiyan boa bag* T. G. Wiya-ta bon bag

4. Wiya „ ,, 8. AViya-kin ,, „

5. Wiya-kcUQ „ ,, 9. "\Viya-nun „ „

*- 'I tell him.'

Participles.

T. 1. Wiyellin bon bag T. G. Wiyelli-ela-ta bon bag

2. Wivelli-kc'un „ „ 7. Wivelli-kolag „ „

3. Wiyelli-ela „ - „ 8. AViyelli-kin

4. AViyala ,, ,, 9. Wiyelli-nun „ „

Coniiiniaiivc.
T. 1. Wiyelli-lia T. 3. Wiyelli-li-ela

Reflexive.
T. 5. Wiyel-lciia bag= 'I talked to myself.'

THE GliAMMAE. 39

Heciprocal.

T. 1. AYivell-an bara* T. G. Wiyell-ala-ta bara

4. Wiyell-ala „ 7. WiVell-ai-kolag „

5. Wiyell-ai-kt'im ,, 8. AVi}ell-ai-kin „

T. 9. AViyel]a-nuii bara
* =: ' They say to one another.'

8cBJUNCTiTE Mood.

1. To express purpose.

T. 10.

Wiyelli-ko, ' to tell, say.'
Wiyelli-koa, ' to continue to tell or preach.'
AViyell-ai-koa (reciprocal), ' to talk,
the one with the other.'

2. To express immediate pui^pose.

T. 10. "Wiyan-uwil-koa bag

Iteration,
T. 1. AViyea kan bag T. 9. "Wiyea ka-niin beg

Immineitce.
T. 10. Wija-a kun-koa brg

Contemporary circumstance.

T, 1. AViyan noa ba T. 3. Wiyelll-ela noa ba

T. 9. Wiya-nua noa ba

Im])lied negation of actual effect.
T. lUa. Wiyai-ga bdn bag

Implied negation of action or entity,.

T. 10b. "\Yiya-pa bon bag ba T. 10c. Wiya-pa-ta bdn bag

T. lOd. Keawarant bdn bag wiya-pa

t Keawaran is the negative.

Imperatiye Mood.

Wiya, 'say, will you?' (interrogative).

"VYiyella, ' speak, tell.'

"Wiya-wiyella (reduplication), 'speak! be quick !'

Wiyella, 'speak' reciprocally.

Wiyell-ia, 'continue to ask.'

Wiya-wiyall-ia, ' a^k urgently.'

Wiyea-ka, ' tell ai^jaiu,' ' repeat.'

Wiya-kt'a, 'speak presently.'

Wiya-biia-billabdn, ' permit him to speak.'

40 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

DECLENSION OF INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

DECLENSION of the VEEB ' TO GO.'

UwoUiko, 'to go, come, walk, tend, move.'

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. Uwan bag T. 4. Uwa bag

T. 9. Uwa-nun bag

Participle.

T. 1. Uwoll-in bag T. 4. Uwala bag

3. Uwolli-ela bag 9. Uwolli-nun bag

Contlnuative.
T. 1. Uwolli-lln bag T. 3. Uwolli-li-ela bag

Reflexive.
T. 5. Uwoll-eun bag

Reciprocal.

T. 1. Uwoll-cin bara T. 4. UwoU-ala bara

T. 9, Uwolli-nua bara

Subjunctive Mood.
T. 10.

Uwolli-ko, ' to come,' ' to go away' (according to

the meaning of the adverb with it).
TJwa-uwil-koa, ' that I may or might come or go.'
Uwea-kun-koa, 'lest . . should come or go.'
Uwa-niin bag ba, ' when I go or come.'
Uwai-ga bag ba, 'I had almost come or gone.'
Uwa-pa bag ba, ' had I come or gone.'

Imperative Mood.

Tanan uwolla, ' come hither.'
Waita uwolla, ' go away.'
Wolla-wolla, ' come or go quickly.'
Uwolla, 'depart each.'
Uwoll-ia, 'come or go' (of self).
TJwea-ka, ' come or go.'
Uwa-bun-billa, ' permit to come or go.'
Uwa-kea, ' come or go,' sc, in the morning.

THE GEAMMAE. 41

DECLENSION of the YEEB ' TO BEIIAK:

TiirkuUiko, ' to break' spontaneously.

Paeiiciples.
Tiir ran imni, 'this is broken' spontaneously.

T. 1. Tiir-kull-in unni T. 5. Tiir-kull-eun unni

2. „ -kulli-keun unni 6. „ -kulli-ela-ta unni.

3. „ -kulli-ela unni 7. „ -kulli-kolag unni

4. „ -kull-ala unni 8. ,, -kulli-kin unni

T. 9. Tiir-kulli-niiu unni

Gontinuatlve.
T. 1. Tiir-kulli-lin unni T. 3. Tiir-kulli-li-ela unni

Subjunctive Mood.

T. 10.

Tiir-kulli-ko, ' to break of its own accord.'
Tiir-kulli-koa unni, 'that this may or might break.'
Tiir-kull-ea-ktin-koa, 'lest . . . should break.'
Tiir-kulli-niin unnibo, 'when or if this breaks.'
Tiir-ka-ga-leiin unni, 'this had almost broken.'
Tiir-kuUi-ba-pa unni, 'had this broken.'

Imperative Mood.

Tiir-kull-ia unni, ' I wish this to break of itself.'
Tiir-kull-ea-ka unni, 'I wish this to break of itself again.'
Kamunbilla unni tiir-kulli-koa, ' let this break spontaneously.

DECLENSION op the VEEB, ' TO DIE:

Tetti buUiko, ' to be in the act of dying*,' to die'.

Indicative Mood.

T. 1. Tetti ban noa T. G. Tetti ba-ta noa

4. „ ba noa 8. „ ba-kin noa

5. ,, ba-keiin noa 9. ,, ba-niin noa

Paeticiples.

T. 1. Tetti bullin noa T. 4. Tetti bala noa

2. „ bulli-keun noa 7. „ bulli-kin noa

3, „ bulli.ela noa 9. „ bulli-niin noa

Continnative.
T. 1. Tetti bulli-lin noa T. 3. Tetti buUi-li-ehajioa

(faKIVBRSITl

42 AN AUSTEA-LIAK LAyOTJAGE.

SuBJUNCTiTE Mood.

T. 10.

Tetti bulli-ko, ' to die.'

Tetti ba-uwil-koa noa, 'in order that he mii^ht die.'

Tetti bea-kiiu-koa noa, 'lest he should die.'

Tetti 1 a-niiu noa ba, 'when he dies,' 'if he should die.

Tetti bai-ga noa, ' he had almost died.'

Tetti ba-pa noa, 'had he died,' 'if he had died.'

Imperative Mood.

Tetti ba-uwa, 'proceed to die' (optatively).
Tetti buLi-billa bon, ' permitjiim to die.'
Tetti bea-ka, ' die again.'

PARTICLES used instead of the VERB *T0 BE.'

1. The verb, with a substantive attribute : t a, 'i t is' ; t a r a r a n,
*it is not.'

2. The verb, ivith an adjective attribute: lag, 'it is'; kora
lag, 'it is not.'

8. The verb, ivith a personal attribute: (1) bo, is 'self; (2)
g a I i, ' this ' is the agent who.

JElxampl.es of 1,2, and 3 : —

Unnibo bag, 'this is I' (the subject of the verb);
gatoa bo unni, 'this is I myself (the personal
agent), who' . . ; nnni ta, 'this is' (the subject);
unnibo t a, ' this is itself ' (the subject) ; gali noa
w i y a, ' this is he who spoke.'

P u 1 1 i , ' salt ' (a subsf.) ; p u 1 1 i t a, ' it is salt ' (a subsf.) ;
p u 1 1 i lag. ' it is salt ' (an adj.) ; pulli kora lag,
' it is not salt ' (an adj.) ;tarar an* pulli korien,
' it is not salt ' (a subsf.)

* There are two negatives here, as usual, but the former of them may be
omitted.

4. The verb, icith an attribute of manner : yanti, 'it is so';
yantibo ta, ' it is so itself ; imperative: yanoa, 'let be as
it is' ; y a-ai (used negatively), 'let it not be so.'

Example : —

T a a i, b u n k i y i k o r a , ' let it not be so, strike not.'

5. The verb, expressing tendency: wal, 'is,' 'shall,' 'will*
(denoting tendency of the mind or thing); imperative : wiya,
* say,' ' declare what you wish.'

Examples : —

Tiir wal unni, 'this is broken'; wiya, unni mur-
r a r ag , ^ say, is this good ? '

THE GHAMMAR. 43

6. The verb, expressinrj heinj or existence: ke, 'be,' * is.'

Example : — •

M i u a r i g k e u u n i ? ' wliat (tliiug) is this ? '

[XoTE. — I am not sure that all these particles are used as
substitutes for the verb ' to be.' — Ed.]

THE VERB used NEGATIVELY.

Ixdicjltive Mood.
Affirmatively. Negatively.

T. 1. Kauwci, bdn-tauboQ bag. Keawarau, bou bag bun korien.

' Yps, I strike him.' ' No, I striVe him not.'

5. Bun-keuQ bou bag. Keawai, bcni bag bun-ki-pa.

' I have struck him.' ' No, I have not stniok him.'

6. Biin-kulla bun bag. Keawaran, bon bag biim-pa.

' I had struck him.' ' No, I had not struck him.'

8. Bun-kin bdn bag. Keawai, bon bag bun-kin.

' I shall strike him.' ' No, I shall not strike him.'

9. Biin-nuu walbonbag. Ivea\vai,wal bon bag bun korien.

' I shall strike him.' ' No, I shall not strike him.'

Pabticiples,
T.

1. Bun-kill-in bdn bag. Keawaran, bdn bag biin-killi korien.

• I am striking him.' ' No, I am not striking him.'

3. Biin-killi-ela bdn bag. Keawaran,bdnbagbun-killikorakal.

' I was striking him.' ' No, I was not going to strike him.'

9. Bun-killi-niin bdn bag. Keawai, bdn hag biin-killi kora ke.
' I am going to strike him.' ' No, I am not going to strike him.'

Impebatite Mood.
Mandatory —

Eiiwa bdn, 'strike him.' Ma, biiwa b<)n, ' do, strike him.'
Tanoa, biin-ki 3ukora bdn, ' let be, strike him not.'
Biin-kill;!, 'strike on,' 'continue to strike.'
Tanoa, bun-killa-bau kora, ' let be, cease striking.'
Bum-mara-biin-billa bdn, 'permit him to be struck.'
Yari, bdn bi bum-mara-biin-bi yikora, 'hold! let him Jiot
be struck.'

Entreaty —

Biim-mun-billa-bdn, 'permit him to strike.'
Yanoa, biim-mun-bi yikora bdn, ' let be, permit him not to

strike.'
Interrogative —

Minarig-tin binug bun-kulla? 'why did'st thou strike him?'
Kora koa binug bum-pa ? ' why hast thou not struck him ?'

44 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAdE.

Idioms

Wivvi, ' be quiet,' 'do not what you tend to do.'

Yaai, 'refrain,' ' do not,' ' cease acting,' 'hold'! ' let not.'

Tari, yanoa, 'let be,' ' let alone,' ' do not.'

ADVERBS.

The use of the word determines whether it should be called
a noun, an adjective, or an adverb. A word used with the
particle of agency would be considered a noun ; but the same
word, if attached to a noun, would be an adjective ; used with a
verb, it would be an adverb; as, porrol, 'heavy'; pdrrdl
ta unni, ' this is heavy ' ; porrol noa wiytln, 'he speaks
heavily.' Adverbs arc classed in the following manner : —

1. Of Numler.

Wakal bo ta, ' once only.' Buloara bo ta, ' twice only.'

JS'gdro bo ta, ' thrice only.'

2. Of Order.

Bonen, 'the first to be done,' Kurri-kurri, 'the beginning, the

Grdnka, 'the first,' or 'before.' first.'

Willug, 'the last,' or 'behind.'

3. Of Place.

Unti, 'here.' Bara-kolag, 'downtvards.'

Unnug, 'there.' Muriug-kolag, 'forwards.'

Wonnug? 'where?' AVillug-koIag, 'backwards.'

Wonta-kolag, 'Avhither' ? "Wonta-birug? 'whence? from
Unti-kolag, 'hither.' what place?'

Untoa-kolag, 'thither.' TJnta-birug, 'thence.' [time.

Wokka-kolag, ' upwards.' Unti-birug, ' hence'; place or

4. Of Time.

Ba, 'when ; at the time that' ; Keawai-wal, 'never, not at any

gai-ya, 'then,' must always time'; ' no, never.'

be after it. Kum-ba, 'yesterday' (when the

Bug-gai, 'this present period, verb is in a past tense); ' to-

now, to-day' ; 'the time now niorrow' (when used with a

passing.' verb in the future tense).

Bug-gai-kal, 'of the present Ki'im-ba ken ta, ' the day after

period; fresh, new, recently.' to-morrow.'

Gai-ya, 'then, at that time' ; Mura-ai, ' sometimes.'

it is governed by the par- Murrin-murrin, 'often, repeat-
tide ba. edly, frequently.'

Kabo, 'presently.' Taga, 'before, prior to.'

Kabo ka ta, ' presently it is,' Tanoa-nug bo, 'soon.'

for 'not yet,' Toan-ta, 'afterwards.'

THE GEAMMAS. 45

Unnug bo, 'Tiitlierto.' Takoun-ta ? 'at what time?

"VVakal-wakal, ' ouce-once,' — an when ?'

idiomjfor' seldom.' Tanti-kat-ai, 'hence forward,'

Taki-ta, 'now'; at the time 'forever'; ZiV., 'thus always.'

spoken of. Yuki-ta, 'afterwards.'

Taki-ta bo, 'instantly'; at the Yuraki, 'long since, formerly,

selfsame moment spoken of. long ago.'

Note. — Iteration is expressed by a particular form of the verb ; as,
Buntt^a-kanun, ' will strike again. '

5. Of Quantity.

Butti, 'more' ; meaniDg, 'con- Minnan ? 'what quantity? how
tinue the action.' much? how many?'

Kauwal-lag, ' largely, much, Tantoa, 'enoiigh, sufficiently.'

abundantly.' Warea-lag, 'little, sparingly.'

Kirun, ' all.' Winta, ' a part, a portion.'

6. Of Q^uality or Manner.

Kara, 'slowly, deliberately.' Por-rdl, ' heavily' ; cf. por-rol.

Kurra-kai, 'quickly' ; also equi- AYir-wir, 'cheerfully, lightly' ;
valent to the phrase 'make cf. wir, as a verb, 'to fly like

haste.' the down of a bird.'

"\Yogkal-lag, 'foolishly ' ; cf. wogkal, 'deaf, stupid, foolish.'

7. Of Bovht.
Mirka, 'perhaps.' Mirka-ta,' perhaps so, possibly.'

8, Of Affirmation.

E-c, 'yes.' Yanti bo ta, 'yes, just as it is.'

Kau-wa, 'yea.' Yuna bo ta, 'verily, certainly,

Tokol bo ta, 'truly, in truth really'; Jit., 'there it is

itself ' ; cf. tokol, 'straight.' itself.'

9. Of Negation.

Kea-wai, ' nay.' Ta-raran, ' it is not,' sc, the

Kea-wa-ran, 'no.' thing affirmed.

Yikora, kora, korien, ' no, not.'

10. Of Interrofjation.

Koi'a-koa ? 'why not?' Yako-ai ? 'how?' meaning ' in

Minarig-tin ? 'why? where- what manner?' answer, yan-

fore?' ti, 'thus.'

Wouuen ? 'how? which way?' answer, gia-kai, 'this way.'

XoTE. — Other modifications will be better miderstood from the Illustra-
tive sentences.

46 AN AUSIEALIAX LAXGUACE.

PREPOSITIONS.

Ba, 'of — denoting possession, Katoa, 'with, in company

when used with the personal with,' — not instrumental.

pronouns. Ko, -lo, -o, -ro, -to, — particles

Birug, 'of, out of, from'; op- denoting agency or instru-

posed to ko-lag. mentahty.*

Ka, ' in,' or 'at' such a period; Ko-ba, 'of — the same as ' ba,'

as, tarai-ta yellanna-ka, ' in but used only with nouns.

another moon.' Ko-lag, ' to, towards, tendency

Ka-ba, 'in, on, at' — a place; as, towards,' — opposed to birug.

Sydney-ka-ba, 'at Sydaey.' Murrarig, 'into.'

Kai, — the same meaning as tin ; Murrug, 'within.'

onl}^ this is used to personal Tin, ' from, on account of, for,

pronouns, but ' tin ' goes because of, in consequence

with nouns. of.'

Kal, 'part of; as, unti-kal, AYarrai, 'outside, without,' —

'of this, part of this, hereof.' opposed to 'within.'

* Expressed by xcith, hy, for, Ijut only when instrumental.

CONJUNCTIOITS,

The idiom of the language is such, that sentences connect with
sentences without the aid of conjunctions, the subjunctive mood
answering all these purposes. The dual number also does away
with the necessity of using connectives to unite two expressions.
The following are the principal conjunctions, viz., gatun,
'and'; k nil a, 'because, for '; gali-tin, ' therefore, on account
of this.' But the particles ' lest,' ' unless,' ' that,' and the disjunc-
tives, are expressed by modifications of the verb in the subjunctive
mood, as will be shown in the Illustrative sentences.

INTEEJECTIONS.

Note. — The following are used under the circumstances mentioned.

A, ' hearken ! lo ! behold!' Ivatio-katia,of pain, anguish.

Ela-beara, of wonder, surprise, Wau, ' attention ! ' a call to

astonishment. attend.

Ginoa, of salutation at parting; Wi-wi, of aversion.

as, 'farewell.' Tapallun, of sorrow ; 'alas!'

THE VOCABrLAET. 4H

CHAPTER IV.

YOCABULAET.

(1) MYTHOLOGY.

G a 1: 6 n ; k li r i m a ; on.* bones put tlirougli tlie septum of the
nose for ornament.

Gorro; pummeri; y o n e i, m., varieties of grass-tree. To
form the native spears, pieces of the flower-stalks of this are
cemented together at the ends by a resinous substance which
exudes from the root ; they are made from eight to twelve
feet long ; a piece of hard w^ood forms the last joint, on which
is cemented a splinter of pointed bone, a*? a barb. A deadly
■weapon this is ; thrown by means of a lever nearly four feet
long, cf. ' w 0 m m a r a ', which is held in the hand, and on it
the poisoned spear.

Koin, Tippakal, Porrag are names of an imaginary male
being, who has now, and has always had, the appearance of a
black ; he resides in thick brushes or jungles ; he is seen occas-
ionally by day, but mostly at night. In general, he precedes;
the coming of the natives from distant parts, when they assemble
to celebrate certain of their ceremonies, as the knocking out of
tooth in the mystic ring, or wdien they are performing some
dance. He appears painted with pipe-clay, and carries a fire-
stick in his hand; but generally it is the doctors, a kind of
magicians, who alone perceive him, and to whom he says, ' Feai^
not; come and talk.' At other times he comes when the blacks
are asleep, and takes them up, as an eagle his prey, and carries:
them away for a time. The shout of the surrounding party often
makes him drop his burden; otherwise, he conveys them to his
fire-place in the bush, where, close to the fire, he deposits his
load. The person carried off tries to cry out, but cannot, feeling
almost choked ; at daylight Koin disappears, and the black
finds himself conveyed safely to his own fire-side.

Eoyorowen, the name of another imaginary being, whose
trill in the bush frequently alarms the blacks in the night.
AVhen he overtakes a native, he commands him to exchange
cudgels, giving his own which is extremely large, and desiring
the black to take a first blow at his head, which he holds down
for that purposef ; after this he smites and kills the person
with one blow, skewers him with the cudgel, carries him off,
roasts, and then eats him.

* The m, tliroughout, stands for meaning.
f This is a coiumoa mode of duelUng among the blacks. — Ed,

48 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Kurriwilbcln, the name of liis wife ; she has a long horn on
each shoulder, growing upwards, with which she pierces the
aborigines, and then shakes herself until they are impaled on
her shoulders, when she carries them to a deep valley, roasts,
and eats her victims. She does not kill the women, for they are
always taken by her husband for himself. Taho has, by
some means, come to be used by the blacks as a name for this
being.

M I'l r r am ai, m., the name of a round ball, about the size of a
cricket-ball, which the aborigine.? carry in a small net sus-
pended from their girdles of opossum yarn. The women are
not allowed to see the internal part of the ball. It is used
as a talisman against sickness, and it is sent from tribe to
tribe for hundreds of miles, on the sea-coast and in the interior.
One is now here from Moreton Bay, the interior of which a
black showed me privately in my study, betraying consider-
able anxiety lest any female should see the contents. After
he had unrolled many yards of woollen cord, made from the
fur of the opossum, the contents proved to be a quartz-like
substance of the size of a pigeon's egg. He allowed me to
break it and retain a part. It is transparent, like white
sugar-candy. The natives swallow any small crystalline particles
that crumble off, as a preventive of sickness. It scratches glass,
and does not effervesce with acids. From another specimen,
the stone appears to be agate, of a milky hue, semi-pellucid,
and it strikes fire. The vein from which it appears to have
been broken off is one and a quarter inch thick. A third
specimen contained a portion of carnelian pai"tially crystallised,
a fragment of chalcedony, and a fragment of a crystal of white
quartz.

M u r r 0 k u n, m., the name of a mysterious magical bone, which
is obtained by the k a r a k a 1 s, q.v. Three of these sleep on
the grave of a recently interred corpse ; in the night, during
their sleep, the dead person inserts a mysterious bone into
each thigh of the three ' doctors,' who feel the puncture not
more severe than that of the sting of an ant. The bones
remain in the flesh of the doctors, without any inconvenience
to them, until they wish to kill any person, when by magical
power, it is said and believed, they destroy their ill-fated
victim, causing the mysterious bone to enter into his body,
and so occasion death.

Nauwai, m., a canoe; }) u p a, ?»., bark, a canoe. The canoes
are made of one sheet of bark, taken whole from the tree and
softened with fire, and then tied up in a folded point at each
end. A quantity of earth forms a hearth, on which the natives'
roast their bait and fish, when fishing.

THE YOCABULAET. 49

N u g - g II n, m., a song. There are poets among tlie tribes, wlio
compose songs ; these are sung and danced to by their own
tribe in the firsft place, after which other tribes learn the song
and dance; and so the thing itinerates from tribe to tribe
throughout the country, until, from change of dialect, the very
words are not understood correctly by distant blacks.

P 6 r 0 b u g, the name of a mystic ring, in which certain cere-
monies of initiation are performed ; from p 6 r, ' to drop down,
to be born.'

Puntimai, ;«., a messenger, an ambassador. These men are
generally decorated with the down of the swan or of the
hawk on their heads, when on an embassy. They arrange the
time, place, and manner of preparations for a battle or for the
punishing of a supposed offender or real aggressor. They
bring intelligence of the movements of hostile tribes, or the
last new song and dance (cf. n u g - g u n) . When they travel at
night, a fire-stick is always carried by thera as a protection
against the powers of darkness, the evil spirits, of which they
are in continual dread.

Puttikan, another imaginary being, like a horse, having a
large mane and a tail sharp like a cutlass ; whenever he meets
the blacks, they go towards him and draw up their lips to show
that the tooth is knocked out * ; then he will not injure them ;
but should the tooth be still there, he runs after them, and kills
and eats them. He does not walk, but bounds like a kangaroo,
and the noise of his leaps on the ground is as the report of a gun ;
he calls out as he advances, 'Pirrolog, Pirrolog.'

T i 1 m u n, m., a small bird of the size of a thrush. It is supposed
by the women to be the first maker of women ; or to be
a woman transformed after death into the bird ; it runs up
trees like a woodpecker. These birds are held in veneration
by the women only. The bat, k o 1 u g - k o 1 u g, is held in
veneration on the same ground by the men, who suppose the
animal a mere transformation.

Tippakalin, Mailkun, and B i m p 6 i n, are names of the
wife of K 0 i n, q.v. She is a much more terrific being than her
husband ; him the blacks do not dread, because he does not kill
them ; but this female being not only carries off the natives in a
large bag-net and drags them beneath the earth, but she spears
the children through the temples ; she thus kill them, and no
one ever sees again those whom she obtains.

Turrama, m., an instrument of war, called by Europeans a
'boomerang.' It is of a half-moon shape ; when thrown
in the air it revolves on its own centre and returns, forming

* This is a proof that the black man has been duly initiated at the ceremonies of the
Bora. See s.v. Yarro. — Ed.

50 A^ austealia:n" LAyauAGE.

a curve in its orbit from and to the thrower; to effect this, it is
thrown against tlie wind; but in war it is thrown against the
ground ; it then rebounds apparently with double violence, and
strikes some distant object, aud wounds severely with its
sharpened extremities.

Y a r r o, m., an egg. But, used in a mystic sense, to the initiated
ones it means ' lire or water.' And by the use of this term in
asking for either element, the fraternity can discover them-
selves to each other. The men, after the tooth is knocked out
in the Bora rites, call women k u u n a i k a r a, and themselves
J i r a b a i ; previous to which the men are styled, k oro m u n.
The ceremony of initiation takes place every three or four years
as young lads arrive at the age of puberty ; mystic rings are
made in the woods, aud numerous ceremonies are gone through
before the operation of displacing a tooth from the upper
jaw ; this is effected by three steady blows with a stout piece
of hard wood, in shape like a punch, from the hand of the
k ara k al ; after that, the youth may seize a woman ; he becomes
a member of the tribe and engages in their fights.

Yulug, the name of the ring in which the tooth is knocked
out. The trees are marked near the ring with rude repre-
sentation of locusts, serpents, and other things, on the bark ;
these are chopped with an axe; aud copies of the nests of
various quadrupeds are formed on the ground near the spot.
The celebrants dance for several days every morning and
evening, continuing the whole of the night ; no women are
allowed to join in the ceremony.

(2) GEOQEAPHICAL NAMES.

Awaba, Lake Macquarie ; the word means ' a plain surface.'
B i w o g k u 1 a, the place of red ti-trees ; from b i w o g, ' red ti-tree.'
B o i k 6 n u m b a, a place of ferns ; from b o i k o n, ' fern.'
B o u n, the site of VVallis's Plains ; from a bird of that name.
B 11 1 b a, an island ; any place surrounded with water.
B u 1 k a r a, any mountain ; from b u 1 k a, ' the back ' of a man

or a beast.
B u 1 1 a b a, the name of a hiH on the margin of the Lake,
fjrarawantara, any plain, a flat.

■G-oloyauwe, a point of land on the south side of the Lake,
(xdrroinba, the female-emu place; from gdrroin, 'the

female emu ' ; ' the male emu ' is k 6 g k o r 6 g, from his cry.
^rurranba, a place of brambles; from g u r r a n, an inferior

sort of ' bramble.'
K a i a r a b a, a place of ' sea-weeds.'

Karakunba, a place of 'swamp-oaks,' which is a species of pine.
K e e 1 - k e e 1 b a, a place of ' grass-tree.'

HIE TOCABULAET. 51

Kintiirrabin, the name of a small extinct volcnno on the
sea-coast, near Ked Head, north-east of Lake Maeqiiarie.

■Ivo i k a 1 i gb a, a place ot" brambles; from koikalig, a sort
of ' bramble,' bearing a berry like a raspberry.

Koiy 6 g, the site of any native camp.

Kona-konaba, the name of the place where the stone called
kona-kona is found. There are veins in the stone, which
contain a yellow substance used for paint in warlike expedi-
tions. It is the name of a large mountain, at the uorthei'u
extremity of Lake Macquarie.

Ko purr aba, the name of the phace from which the blacks
obtain the k o p u r r a, a yellowish earth, which they wet,
mould up into balls, and then burn in a strong fire ; the fire
makes it change into a brilliant red, somethmg like red ochre ;
the men and women paint themselves with it, after mixing it
with the kidney fat of the kangaroo ; this paint they use
always at their dances.

Kurra-kurran, the name of a place in which there is almost
a forest of petrifactions of wood, of various sizes, extremely
well defined. It is in a bay at the north-western extremity of
Lake Macc[uarie. The tradition of the aborigines is, that for-
merly it was one large rock which fell from the heavens and
killed a number of blacks who were assembled there ; thev
had gathered themselves together in that spot by command
of an immense iguana, which came down from heaven for that
purpose ; the iguana was angry at their having killed lice
by roasting them in the fire ; those who had killed the vermin
by cracking them, had been previously speared to death by
him with a long reed from heaven ! At that remote period, the
moon was a man named Pontobug; and hence the moon is
called he to the present day; but ttie sun, being formerly a
woman, retains the feminine pronoun she. When the iguana
saw all the men were killed by the fall of the stone, he ascended
up into heaven, where he is supposed to be now.

K utta i, the site of Sydney Light-house ; any peninsula.

M u 1 u b i n b a, the name of the site of Newcastle, from an
indigenous ' fern ' named m u 1 u b i n.

Mullug-bula, the name of two upright rocks about nine feet
high, springing up from the side of a bluff head on the margin
of the Lake. The blacks affirm, from tradition, that they are
two women who were transformed into rocks, in consequence
of.tbeir being beaten to death by a black man. Beneath the
mountain on which the two pillars stand, a seam of common coal
is seen, many feet thick, from which Reid obtained a cargo of
coals when he mistook the entrance of this lake for Newcastle.
A portion of a wharf built by him still exists at this place,
which is still called Eeid's Mistake ; [i.e., in 1834].

52 AK AUSTRALIAN LA>"GUAGE.

M u n u g - g u r r a b a, tlie place to Avhich ' sea-snipe ' resort.

Miinukan is the name of a point, under which is a seam of
cannel coal, and beneath that is a thick seam of superior common
coal, and both jut into the sea betwixt three and four
fathoms of water. The government mineral surveyor found,
on examination, that the two veins were nearly nine feet in
thickness, and the coal of excellent quality; [i.e.. in ISSl].

jS^ikkinba, a place of coals, from n i k k i n, ' coal.' The whole
Lake, twenty-one miles long by eight broad, abounds with coal.

Niritiba, the name of the island at the entrance of the lake;
from niriti, the ' mutton bird,' which abounds there.

P i t o b a, a place of pipe clay ; from p i t o, ' pipe clay,' which is
used at a death by the deceased's relatives to paint their whole
body, in token of mourning.

P u n t e i, a ' narrow ' place ; the name of any narrow point of land.

Purribagba, the ' ant's-nest place ' ; from within these nests
a yellow dusty substance is collected, and used by the blacks
as a paint for their bodies, called p u r r i b a g. The ants gather
the substance for some unknown purpose.

Tirabeenba, a tooth-like point of land ; from t i r a, 'a tooth.'

T u 1 k a b a, the soft ti-tree place ; from t u 1 k a, ' ti-tree.'

Tulkiriba, a place of brambles ; from t u 1 k i r i, 'a bramble.'

Tumpoaba, a clayey place ; from t u m p o a, ' clay,'

W fi r a w a 1 1 u g , the name of a high mountain to the west of Lake
Macquarie. This has been partly cleared of timber, by order
of the Surveyor- General ; as a land-mark it is seen from a
considerable distance. The name is derived from w a 1 1 u g,
the ' human head,' from its appearance.

"VV a u w a r a n, the name of a hole of fresh water in the vicinity of
Lake Macquarie, betwixt it and the mountains westerly ; said
by the blacks to be bottomless, and inhabited by a monster of
a fish much larger than a shark, called w a u w a i ; it frequents
the contiguous swamp and kills the aborigines ! There is
another resort for these fish near an island in Lake Macquarie
named boroyirdg, from the cliffs of which if stones be
thrown down into the sea beneath, the ti-tree bark floats up,
and then the monster is seen gradually arising from the deep ;
if any natives are at hand, he overturns their canoe, swallows
the crew alive, and then the entire canoe, after which he
descends to his resort in the depths below !

Y i r a n n a 1 a i, the name of a place near Newcastle on the sea
beach, beneath a high cliff"; it is said that if any persons speak
there, the stones fall down from the high arched rocks above ;
for the crumbling state of these is such that the concussions of
air from the voice cause the pieces of the loose rock to come
down ; this once occurred to myself when I was in company
with some blacks here.

THE TOCABrLAET.

53

(3) coiiiiox >'orxs.

B.

Balbai, ;«.,* an axe.
Baiyag-baiyag, 7n., a butterfly.
Bate, ;«., water ; cf. gapoi
Berabukkau, m., sperm wliale;

the natives do not eat this ;

cf. torog-gaiJ.
Biggai, m., an elder brother.
Bintunkin, m., a father.
Birraba, vi., a small shell fish.
Biyug, m., 'father,' addressive.
Biyugbai, m., a father.
Boaliig, m., mangrove seed.
Boarrig, m., misty rain.
Boata, m., the cat-fish.
Boawal, m., the curlew.
Bugkin, 7)1., vermin, as fleas.
Bukkai, m., the bark of a tree ;

the ski a of animals.
Bulbug, m., a small species of

kangaroo.
Bunkuu, 711., a red sea-slug

which adheres to the rocks,

and is known to Europeans

as ' kunjewai.'
Burug, m., hair on the head.

Wiirun, m., hair on the body.

Kitug, 7H., the short hair of
animals.

Tirrig, «?., the fur of the
opossum tribe.
Buttikag, 7«., any beast.

G.

G-apal, 7n., a concubine.
Gapoi, giiyuwa, g«6g, kulbg,

m., names for fresh water ;

cf. kokoin, bato, and yarro.
Garawan,?;?., a plain flat place.
Gardg-gardg, 7n., a rough place.
Garo-geen, ;«., an old woman.
Garo-mbai, m , an old man.
Gauwo, m., a sea-gull.

Girrinbai, on., first-born female.

Wiig-gunbai, youngest „
Golokonug, })i., a large kind of

schnapper.
Gorokan, «i., the morning dawn
Guraki, ???., one initiated; hence,

a wise person.

K.

Kan ; kurriwirara ; ?«., a brown
diamond snake.
Maiyii, «?., the general name
for snakes.
Kanin, m., a fresh-water eel.
Karai, 7?i., flesh of any sort,
but chiefly of the kangaroo,
Karakal, «?., a wizard, doctor,

sorcerer.
Karoburra, ra., a large whiting.
Kardg-karog, m., a pelican.
Kearapai, m., the white cock-
atoo.

AVaiila,?».,theblack cockatoo ;
its breeding place is un-
known to the blacks.
Keilai, m., urine.
Kikoi, w., a native cat; is very

destructive to poultry.
Kinnun, ?«.,the women's nets ;

used as bags.
Kipai. 7n., fat, grease, &c.
Kira-kira; kiiueta; ?«., the male

and the female king-parrot.
Kirika and korunnag, m., two
kinds of native honey.
Mipparai,;;?., the honey-comb.
jS'ukkug, m., the small sting-
less bee of this country.
1 Mikal, 711., the honey in the
blossoms of the honey-
suckle tree.
Karaka, w., the honey in the
blossom of the grass-tree.

* T.ie m, throughout, stands for meaning ; it is inserted merely to divide the native
word fro.u its signification. — Ed.

54

AN AUSTRALIAN LANCiTTAGE.

Kirrin, m., pain.
Kogka, ?«., a reed.

Kog korog, m., an emu ; from the

noise it makes.
Koiwon, m., rain.

Ivoiyog, 711., a native camp.

Koiyug, m., fire.

Kokabai, w., a -wild yam.

Kokei; wimbi; winnug; m., na-
tive vessels made of the bark
of tree.s, and used as baskets
or bowls.

Kokera, m., a native hut.

Kokoin, m., water ; cf., gapoi

Kokug, ?«., frogs ; are so called
from the noise they make.

Komimi, ;»., a shadow.

Konug ; kintarig ; m., dung.

Kdnug-gai, m., a Eool.

Koreil, ot., a shield.

Koropun, ■;«., fug, mist, haze.

Korowa-talag, m., a cuttle fish ;
lit., ' wave-tongue.'

Korro, m., the wind-pipe.

Kotara, m., a club, a waddy.

Kotumag, m., the land tortoise.

Kulai, m., trees, wood, timber.

KuUiira, m., a fish- spear.

Kullearig, m., the throat.

KuUig, in., a shell.

Kulligtiella, m., a knife.

Kullo, m., the cheeks.

Kumara, m., blood.

Kumba, m., to-morrow.

Kumbal, m., a younger brother.

Kunbul, m., the black swan.

Kuri, m., man, mankind.

Kurratag ; murrin ; m., thebody.

Kurrabun, m., a murderer.

Kurraka, m., the mouth.

Kurrakog, m., the eldest male.
Taiyol, m., the youngest male.

Kurra-koiyog, m.. a shark.

Kurrugkun; muttaura; 7».,the
schnapper.

Kuttal, m., the smoke of a fire ;
tobacco ; cf. poito.

Koun, VI., the mangrove bush.

M.

Makoro, m.. the general name
for fish.

Malama, pirig-gun, pinkun, and
wdttol, m., lightning.

Marai, m., the soul, the spirit;
' the same a? the wind, we
cannot see him,' was the
definition given by a black.

Meini, m., sand-flies.

Minmai, m., the gigantic lily.

Miroma, m., a saviour.

Moani, m., the kangaroo.

Mokoi, m., mud oysters.

Molakan, in., the season of the
wane of the moon.

Moto, in., a black-snake.

Miila, m., a boil.

Mulo, m., thunder.

Mumuya, m., a corpse, a ghost.

Mi'mbonkfin, ;;?.,the rock oyster.

Munni, m., sickness.

Muraban,7«., blossom, flowers.

Murrakin, m., young maidens.

Muriin, m., the body.

Murri-nauwai, m., a ship, boat.

K".

Nukug, m., a woman, women.

Nulka ; anulka; ?«., iron ; this
is a kind of iron-stone, which
abounds on the sea-coast.
There is a vein of iron ore
running over coal at the sea
entrance of Lake Macquarie.

Paiyabara, m., the large ti-tree.
Pillapai, m., a valley or hollow.

THE YOCABULABT.

55

Pimpi, m., ashes.

Pippita, m., a small hawk ; so

called from its cry.
Pirama and wommarakan, m., a

wild duck and drake.
Piriwal, m., a chief or king.
Pirrita, m., au oyster which

grows on the mangrove tree.
Pittog ; talowai ; m., two kinds

of roots of the arum species ;

the taro of Tahiti.
Poito, m., the smoke of a fire.
Pdno, m., dust.
Poribai, «?., a husband.
Porikunbai, «?., a wife.
Porowi, on., an eagle.
Porun, m., a dream or vision.

Porun-witilliko, OT.,to dream.
Pukko, m., a stone axe.
Pulli, m., salt.
Pulli, VI., voice, language.
Puna, m., sea sand.
Punbug, m., sea-slug, blubber.
Puniial, m., the sun.
Piirai, m., earth, land, the world.
Purreag, m., day.
Purramai, m., a cockle.
Purramaiban, m., an animal

like a ferret, but amphibious ;

it lives on cockles.
Purrimunkan, m., a sea-salmon.

T.

Taiyol, m., the youngest male.
Tembiribeen, in., a death adder.

The aborigines, when bitten,

usually suck the wound, as a

remedy.
Tibbin, in., a bird.
Tibun, m , a bone.
Ti^ko, m., a bitch.
Tiral, m., a bough of a tree.
Tirriki, m., the flame of fire ;

the colour red.

Tirril, ni., the tick, a voTiomons
insect in this country that
enters the skin of young dogs,
pigs, lambs, cats, and is fatal,
but not to man ; it is exactly
similar in size and shape to
the English tick, but its
effects are soon discovered ;
for the animal becomes para-
lyzed in its hind quarters,
sickness comes on, and death
follows in two or three days
after the paralysis has taken
place.

Tokoi, m., night.

Topig, m., a mosquito.

Tordg-gun, m., the black whale ;
this the blacks eat, whilst the
sperm whale is not eaten.

Tukkara, m., winter.

Tullokan, m., property, riches.

Tulmun, m., a grave.

Tulun, m., a mouse.

Tuukan, m., a mother, a dam.

Tunug, m., a rock, a stone.

Tupea-tarawog and ninag, m.,
names of the flat-head fish.

Turea, m., a bream-fish.

W.

Wairai, m., the spear for battle,

or for hunting.

Motig, m., the spear for fish.
Waiydg, m., a sort of yam.
Waliun, m., a crow ; from its

cry, wak-wak-wak.
Warikal, m., a dog ; the species.
Warikal and waiyi, m., the male

and female tame dog.

Yuki and mirri, m., the male
and female native dog.

Murrogkai, m., the wild dog
species,
Waroi, m., the hornet.
Waropara, m., the honeysuckle.

56

AN AUSTBALTAN LANOITAOE.

Willai, m., an opossum.
"Wimbi, 7rt., a bowl ; generally

made from the knot of a

tree.
TVippi or wibbi, m., the wind.
Wirripag, m., the large eagle-
hawk, which devours young

kangaroos, lambs, &c.
Woiyo, m., grass.
"Wombal, m., the sea-beach.
Wommara, m., the instrument

used as a lever for throwing

the spear ; cf. gorro.
"Wonnai, w., a child, children.
Woropil, «i., a blanket, clothes.
"Worowai, w., a battle, a fight.
Worowiin, m., a kangaroo-skin

cloak.
Wattawan, tw., a large mullet.
AViiggurrapin, m., young lads.

Wuggurrabula, m., ye two lads.
Wuna], m., summer.
Wurunkan, m., flies.

Tapug, m., a path, a broad way.
Tarea, m., the evening.
Tareil and yura, m., the clouds.
Tilen, m., bait.
Tinal, m., a eon.
Tinalkun, m., a daughter.
Tirra, m., a wooden sword.
Tirrig, m., a quill, a pen.
Tulo, m., a footstep, a track.
Tunug, VI., a turtle.
Yuroin, m,, a bream-fish.

(4) PAET8 OF THE BODY.

The Read.

Kittug, m., the hair of the head.
Wallug, m., the head.
Kappara, vi., the skull.
Kumborokan, m., the brain.
Yintirri ; golo ; m., the forehead.
Tukkal, m., the temples.
Giireug ; turrakurri ; ?«., the ear.
Yulkara, «i., the eye-brows.
Woipin, m., the eye-lashes.
Graikug ; porowug ; m., the eye.
Tarkin ; goara ; on., the face.
Nukoro, m., the nose.

Kullo, m., the cheeks.
Tumbiri ; willig ; m., the lips.
Kurraka, m , the mouth.
Gunturra ; tirra ; w., the teeth.
Tallag, m., the tongue.
Wattan, m., the chin.
Yarrei, m., the beard.
Untag, m., the lower jaw.
KuUeug, m., the neck ; it is also

called ' wuroka.'
Kullearig, m., the throat.
Koro, m., the windpipe.

The Trunk.

Kurrabag, m., the body.
Murrin, m., the body.
Miimurrakun ) m., the collar-
Milka-milka, j bone.

Mirrug, m., the shoulder.
Kopa, m., the upper arm.
Turrug, m., the lower arm.
Gruna, m., the elbow.

The Hands and Feci.

Mattara, m., the hand.
Tunkanbeen, m., the thumb
lit., the mother or dam.

Niimba, m., the first finger.
Purrokulkun, m., the second ,,
Kotau, m., the third ,,

THE TOCABULAET.

57

G.irakonbi, in., the little fin<;er.
Tirri ; tirreil ; «?., the nails uf

the fingers and toes.
AVani, m., the palm of the hand;

cf. warapal, ?«., level, plain.
Tug kag keri, -w.jthe right hand.
AVuntokeri, m., the left hand.
Bulka, «?., the back; either of

the hand or of the body.
Paiyil, m., the breasts.

Gripug, VI., the nipple.

\V' ai ara, m., the chest, breasts.

Nara, m., the ribs.

Knrialag, w»., the side or body.

Turoiai, m., the right side.

G-oraon, m., the left side.
Parra or Avarra, m., the belly.
Parra, m , the bosom.
AViiinal, ?»., the loins.
Gr.ikag, m. the hips.

The Limh3.

Buloinkoro, m., the thighs.
AV'oloma o?-lara, m.,the calf of

the leg.
G.iri, m., the shins.
AN'arombug, tn., the knees.

Papin;'in, korog-gai, and mokul-

niokul, m., the knee-pan.
Wirugkag, m., theauKies.
Mnkko ; monug ; in., the heels.
Tullo, m., the sole of the foot.

, Tinna, in., the toes ; the foot.
The Intestines.

Bulbiil, m., the heart.
Purxanai, in., the kidney ; also

a cockle, from its shape.
Munng, in., the liver.
Yokol, m., the lungs.
Konarig; konug; wi., the bowels.
Purring; pnttara; m., the flesh.
Meva, in., the sinews.

Tiirrakil, m., the veins.
Tog-tog, in., the marrow.
Tibun, m., the bone.
Moika, m.,the fatty substance

betwixt the joints.
Bukkai, m., the skin.
AVurun, m., the downy hair on

the skin.

Grordg, m., the blood.

(5)

B.

BeehnuUiko, 7;?., to mock, to
deride, to make sport.

Birrikilliko, in., to lie along,
to lie down so as to sleep.

BoibuUiko, m., to know car-
nally.

Boinkulliko, w., to kiss.

Bombilliko, in., to blow with
the mouth.

Boug-biig-gulliko, VI., to cause
another to arise, to compel
to ari.>'e.

Boug-wulliko, m., to raise one's
self up, to arise.

Biig-bug, m., to salute.
Bukka, «?., to be wrathful, to be

furious.
Bulpor-bug-gulliko, m., to cause

to be lost property, to lose.
Bum-bug-gulliko, ??i.,tocause to

be loose, to opeii a door.
Biimmarabunbilliko, m., to per-
mit another to be struck.
Bummilliko, m., to find.
Bummunbilliko, ;»., to permit

another to strike.
Bunkilliko,7»., to strike, smite;

to aim a blow v:ith a weapon.
Bunbilliko, on., to permit, to

let ; this is an auxiliary verb.

58

AN AUSTEALIAIT LANGUAGE.

Bi'mmulliko, m., to rob, to take
by violence, to snatch.

Bur-bug-gulliko, m., to cause
to be light or well, to cure.

Burkulliko, in., to be light as
a bird, to fly; to be convales-
cent.

Burug-biig-gulliko, wj., to cause
to be loose, to set at liberty.

G

Gakilliko, m., to see, to look,
to observe with the eye.

Gakombilliko, m., to deceive, to
cheat.

Gakontibunbilliko, «?., to dis-
regard, not to mind.

Gakoyelliko, in., to lie, to tell a
falsehood.

Gamaigulliko, m., to see, to
look, but not to notice.

Garabo, m., to sleep.

Garawatilliko. m., to lose one's
self.

Garbug-gulliko, m., to convert
into, to cause to become.

Gari-gari, m., to pant.

Garo-garo, m., to fall down.

Garokilliko, m., to stand upon
the feet.

Garokinbilliko, m., to stand up.

Gimilliko, m., to know by the
eye, as a person or place.

GiratimuUiko, m., to feed, to
give food.

Girulliko, m., to tie.

Goitig, m., to be short.

Goloin, m., to be complete or
finished.

Gukilliko, m., to give, to pre-
sent.

Gumaigulliko, m., to offer.

Gupaiyiko, m., to give back,
to pay, to return in exchange.

Gurald, ;;?., to be wise, skilful.

Gurra-korien, m., not to bear.

Gurramag, in., to be initiated.

Gurramaigulliko, m., to hear,
but not to obey.

Gurrara, m., to pity.

Gurrawatilliko, m., for remem-
brance to pass away, to for-
get any place, or road ; cf.
woguntilliko.

Gurrayelliko, m., to hearken, to
be obedient, to believe.

Gurrulliko, m., to hear, to obey,
to understand with the ear.

Gurrunborburrilliko, m., to let
fall tears, to weep, to shed
tears.

K.

Iva-amulliko, m., to cause to
be assembled together, to
assemble.

Ivaipulliko, in., to call out, to
cry aloud.

Tvaiyu,w.,to be able, powerful,
mighty.

Kakilli-ban-kora, m., do not be.

Kakilliko, in., to be, to exist
in any state.

Kaki-yikora, m., be not.

Ivapirri, m., to be hungry.

Kapulliko, in., to do ; without
the idea of effect upon any
object.

Karabulliko, m., to spill.

Karakai, in., to be active, to be
quick, to hasten.

Karakal-imiulliko, in., to cure,
to make well ; a compoiand
of ' karakai,' a doctor, and
'umulliko,' to do, to make.

Karol, in., to be hot, to perspire
from the heat of the sun.

Kauwal, m., to be large, great.

K.ekal, in., to be sweet, plea-
sant, nice, delightful.

Kia-kia, m., to be courageous,
strong, powerful ; to conquer.

THE \OCABULVRT.

59

Kilbug-gulliko, m., to compel

to snap.
Ivilburrilliko, w., to snap at by

means of something, as a

hook is snapped at by a fish.
Kilkulliko, m., to snap asun-
der, as a cord of itself.
Killibinbin, m., to shine, to be

brijiht, to be glorious.
Kimulliko, m., to wring, to

squeeze as a sponge, to milk.
Ivimmulliko, m., to broil meat

on coals of fire.
Kinta, «?., to be afraid.
Kiutai; kintelliko; ««., to laugh.
Kiuukinari, m., to be wet.
Ivirabarawirrilliko, m., to twirl

the stem of grass-tree until

it ignites.
Kirilliko, m., to lade out waier,

to bail a canoe or boat.
Kiroapulliko, «?., to pour out

water, to empty water.
Kirrai-kirrai, m., to revolve, to

go round.
Kirrawi, m., to be lengthy, to be

long; c/!'goitig,' m., to be

short in length.
Kirrin, m., to pain.
Kitelliko, m., to chew.
Kiunurig, m., to be wet.
Ko, m., to be, to come into ex-
istence.
Koakilliko, m., to rebuke, to

scold, to quarrel.
Koinomulliko, «*., to cough.
Koipulliko, ??«., to smell.
Koitta, 7«., to stink.
Koiyubulliko, w., to burn with

fire.
Koiyun, m., to be ashamed.
Kolayelliko, m., to keep secret,

not to tell, not to disclose.
Kolbi, m., to sound, as the

Avind or sea in a storm.
Kolbuntilliko, m., to chop with

an axe or scythe, to mow.

K(illabi]liko, in., to fish with a
line. The line is held in the
hand.

Kollamulliko, m., to make se-
cret, to conceal anything told.

Konein, in., to be handsome,
pretty.

KontiuiuUiko, m., to wear as
a dress.

Ivorawalliko, m , to watch, to
stay by a thing.

Korien, m., not to be ; the nega-
tive form of ' ko.'

Korokal, m., to be worn out,
threadbare.

Korokon, m., to roar, as the
wind or sea ; cf'. kolbi.

Korun, m., to be silent, to be
quiet.

Korunpaiyelliko, in., to remain
silent.

Kotabunbinla, in., to permit to
think, to remember.

Kotelliko, VI., to think.

Kottiin, m., to be wet and chilly,
from rain.

Kugun, in., to be muddy.

Kulbilliko, in., to lean, to re-
cline.

Kulbun-kulbun, m., to be very
handsome, elegant.

Ivulwun, in., to be stiff, clay-
cold, as a corpse.

Kum-bara-paiyelliko, m., to be
troublesome, to give one a
headache by noise.

Kumbaro, m., to be giddy, to
have a headache from dizzi-
ness.

Kuubun, m., to be rotten, as a
skin or cloth.

Kunbuntilliko, in., to cut with
a knife.

Kuuna, in., to be burned.

Kurkulliko, in., to spring up,
to jump, to leap.

Kur-kur, m., to be cold.

GO

AN AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAOE.

Kurmiir, w., to be rotten, as

wood; c/!, kuubun.
Kurr.i, V2.. to be slow.
Jvurrjigkopilliko, m., to spit.
Kurral, m., to be disabled, to

be wounded.
Kurrilliko, m., to carry.
Kuttawaiko, m., to be satisfied

with food, satiated, drunk.

M.

Ma, w., to challenfi^e, to dare;
to command to do.

Miinkilliko, m., to take, to ac-
cept, to take hold of.

Manmunbilliko, ■;;?., to cause to
take, to let take, to let have.

Mardgkoiyelliko, m., to pro-
claim, to make known.

Matelliko, m., to be gluttonous.

Meapuliiko, in., to plant.

Mimulliko, m., to detain, to
compel to. wait.

Minki, m., to sorrow, to sym-
pathize.

Minkilliko, m., to remain, to
dwell.

MiromuUiko, m., to keep.

Mirial, m., to be without, to
be poor, miserable ; a desert
place.

Mirrilliko, ???., to sharpen into
a point, as a spear.

Mirrinupulliko, OT.,to cause to
be sharp.

Mitti, m., to be small.

Mittilliko, m., to wait, to stay,
to remain.

Mitug, m., to be cut, wounded,
sore.

Morilliko, m., to wind up as a
string.

Moron, ???., to be alive.

Moroun, m., to be tame, quiet,
docile, patient.

Mdttilliko, m., to pound with a
stone, like pestle and mortar.

Mulamulliko, m., to vomit.

Mumbilliko, m., to borrow, to
lend.

Munui, m., to be sick, ill, or to
be diseased.

Muntilliko, w.,to be benighted,
to be overtaken with dark-
ness.

Mupai, m., to fast; to keep the
mouth closed ; to be silent,
dumb.

Mupaikaiyelliko, «?., to remain
silent, to continue dumb.

Murralliko, m., to run.

Murrarag, ???., to be good, ex-
cellent, valuable.

X.

]S'eilpaIyelliko,77?.,to shout; the

noise of war or play.
Nigulliko, 7??., to play, to sport.
NiiJau-nillan, m., to be smashed

into pieces.
Ximulliko, m., to pinch.
Ninmilliko, in., to seize, to

snatch.
Niuwara, m., to be angry, dis-
pleased.
Nug-gurrawolliko, m., to meet.
Niigkilliko, «2., to be success-

i'ul, fortunate ; to obtain.
NummuUiko, m., to press, to

force down.
Numulliko, m., to touch with

the hand.
Nupulliko, m., to try, to learn,

to attempt.
Nurilliko, vi., to throw the

' boomerang.'

P.

Paikulliko, vu, to act of its own
power, to act of itself.

Paikulliko, w., to show one's
self spontaneously.

Paipilliko, m., to appear, to be-
come visible.

THE TOCABUL.VRY.

61

Paipillilco, «?., to act ; excluding

the idea oi: cause.
ral[al, m., to vibrate, to swing,

as in a swing.
Papai, m., to be close at hand.
Peakulliko, m., to letch w-ater.
Pillatoro, m., to set; as tlie sun,

moon, and stars.
Pillobuntilliko, m., to be sunk,

Avrecked.
Pillokulliko, m., to sink.
Pinkurkulliko.OT., to burst as a

bladder, oi" itself.
Pinnilliko, m , to dig.
Pintakilliko, m , to float.

AVatpulliko, m., to swim.
Pintilliko, m., to knock down,

as with an axe ; to shock, as

Avith electricity.
Pipabunbilliko, m., to permit

to stride, to let stride.
Pipelliko, w., to stride, straddle.
Pirra, m., to be tired.
Pirral-mulliko, m., to urge.
Pirriko, w., to be deep.
Pirriral, m.,to be hard, strong;

cf. kunbon, m., to be soft.
Pirun-kakilliko, ot., to be glad,

to be pleased.
Pital-kakilliko, m., to be glad,

to be pleased, to be happy.
Pilal-muUiko, m., to cause joy,

to make happy.
Pittabunbilliko, «;., to permit

to drink, to let drink.
Pittalliko, m., to drink.
Pittamulliko, m., to make to

drink, to cause to drink.
Poaibug-gulliko, m., to compel

to grow\
Poai-buntilliko, m., to cause to

grow.
Poai-kuUiko, m., to grow up of

itself.
Poiyeakulliko, ot., to be suspen-
ded, to hang on ; to infect.
Poiyelliko,7??.,to beg, to entreat.

Pdnkdg, m., to be short.
Pdr-bug-gulliko, in., to compel

to drop.
Pdrburrilltko, ?»., to cause to

drop by means of something.
Porei, m., to be tall.
Pc5r-kakilliko, m., to be drop-
ped, to be born.
Porobulliko, «i., to smooth.
Porogkal, m., to be globular,

to be round.
Porrdl, m., to be heavy ; to be

slow.
Pdrunwitilliko, m., to dream a

dream.
Potobuntilliko, m., to cause a

hole, to bleed a person.
Potoburrilllko, w., to burst a

hole with something.
Potopai_\anuii-wal vi , will burst.
Pulluntara, m., to shine, as with

ointment.
Puldg-kulliko, «?., to enter, to

go or come into.
Pulul-pulul, «?., to shake with

cold, to tremble.
Punta, in., to be mistaken \\\

any tiling.
Puntimulliko, in., to cause to

fall, to throw down.
Purkulliko, m., to fly.
PuromuUiko, m., to lift up.
Puto, m., to be black.
Puttiliiko, m., to bite.

Ta-killiko, m., to eat.
TaleamuUiko, m., to catch any

thing thrown.
Talig-kakilliko, OT.,tobe across.
Ta-munbilliko, ««., to permit to

eat, to let eat.
Tauan, m., to approach.
Tardgkamulliko, m., to cause to

mix, to miiigle.
Tetti, m. to be dead.

G2

AS AUSTRALIAN LAXGrAGE.

Tetti-ba-bunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to die, to let die.
Tetti-ba-bun-burrilHko, m., to
permit to be put to death bj
some means.
Tetti-bug-gulliko, in., to compel

to be dead, to kill, to murder.
Tetti-buUiko, m., to die, to be in

the act of dying.
Tetti-bunkulliko, ;;;., to smite

dead, to strike dead.
Tetti-burrilliko, m., to cause to

die by some means, as poison.
Tetti-kakilliko, m., to be dead,

to be ill that state.
Tiir-bug-ga-bunbilliko, m., to

let break.
Tiir-bug-sulliko, m., to compel

to break.
Tiirburribunbilliko, «?., to per-
mit to break by means of . . . .
Tiirburrilliko, m., to break by

means of something.
Tiirkullibunbilliko,'»?., to allow

to break of itself.
Tiirkulliko, «?., to break of its

own itself, as wood.
Tirag-kakilliko,w?., to beawake.
Tirriki, m., to be red. hot ; the

colour red.
Tittilliko, m., to pluck.
Tiwolliko, m., to seek, to search.
Tiyumbilliko, m., to send any

kind of property, cf., yukul-

liko.
Tokol, m., to be true ; the truth;

this takes 'bo ta' with it.
Toldg-tolog, m.,to separate.
Tolomulliko, m., to shake any

thing.
Torololal, m., to be slippery,

slimy.
Tottdg and tdttorig ; m., to be

naked. This word must be

carefully distinguished from

' tdtug,' news, intelligence.

Tug-gunbil]iko,w2., to show.
Tugkatnulliko, m., to find ; lit.,

to make to appear.
Tiigkilliko, m., to cry, to bewail.
Tuirkulliko, in., to drag along,

to draw.
Tukin-umulliko, m.,to preserve,

to keep, to take care of.
Tukkara, m., to be cold.
Tulbulliko, m., to run fast, to

escape.

Tullamulliko, m., to hold by the
hands.

Tulla-tullai, m., to be in a rage.

Tuloin, m., to be narrow.

Tulutilliko, m., to kick.

Tunbilliko, ;;?., to exchange.

Tiinbamabunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to string together.

Tvinbamulliko, m., to string to-
gether.

Turabunbilliko, m., to permit to

pierce.
Turakaiyelliko, m.,to convince.
Turinwiyelliko, «?., to swear the

truth, to adjure to speak the

truth.
Turdl, m., to be in a state of

healing, to be well ; as a cut

or wound.
Turdnpiri, m., to suffer hunger.
Turral, in., to split.
Turral-bug-gulliko, )n.,to cause

to split, to make to split.
Turramulliko, m., to throw a

stone.
Turrug, m., to be close together.
Turukdnbilliko, in., to punish.
Turukilliko, in., to grow up, to

shoot up.
Turulliko, in., to pierce, prick,

stab, sting, lance, spear.
Tiitdg, in., to be stunned, in-
sensible, apparently dead.

THE VOCABULARY.

(53

tr.

TJmulliko, m., to do, to make,

to create.
Unmulliko, m., to make afraid,
^ to affright, to startle.
Uutelliko, on., to dance.
Upulliko, on., to do with, to use,

to work with.
Uwolliko, m., to come oo' go ; to

walk, to pass, &c.

AV.

"Waipilliko, on., to wrestle.
Waipulliko, m., to hunt.
Waita,w.,to depart, to be away.
AYamulliko, m., to bark a tree,

to skin.
"Wamunbilliko, on., to permit to

go, to let go away.
Warakarig, on., to be full, to be

satiated.
"Warekulliko, on., to put away,

to cast away ; to forgive.
"Warin-warin, m., to be crooked.
"Wari-wari-kulliko, ot., to strew,

to scatter about, to sow seed.
Warau, on., to be flat oo- level,

to be plain.
"Waruwai, on., to battle, to en-
gage in fighting.
Watpulliko, m., to swim, to

stretch the hands to swim.
Wattawalliko, on., to tread, to

stamp with the foot or feet.
"Wauwibunbilliko, on., to i)er-

mit to float, to let float.
"Wauwilliko, on., to float ; as a

cork or feather.
Weilkorilliko, on., to flog, whip,

scourge.
"Weir-weir, on., to be lame.
"Willug, willuntin, on., to be be-
hind, to come after, to be last.

* Note. — Other verbs also take this for
walking ; as, ta-tei-illi

Willug bo, willug, in., to return.
Winelliko, m., to burn with

fire, to scorch.
Wirabakilliko, on., to heat, to be

becoming hot.
Wirakakilliko, on., to be hot.
Wirrigbakilliko, on., to close

up, to shut a door.
"Wirrilliko, on., to wind up, as

a ball of string.
W irrob ulliko, on.,io follow after.
"Witelliko, on., to smoke a pipe.
Wittilliko, on., to sing.
WittimuUiko, on., to fall, to be

thrown down.
Wiyelliko, on., to speak, to say,

to tell, to command, to ask.

Wiyabunbilliko, in., to per-
mit to speak, to let speak.

"VViya-lei-illiko,* on., to talk
and walk.

Wiyayelliko, on., to speak in
reply, to answer.

Wiyayimulliko, on., to accuse.

"Wiyea, on., to say again, to
repeat.
Woatelliko, on., to lick.
Wogkal, m., to be foolish, not

clever, stupid.
Wogimtilliko, ot., to forget any

thing told ; cf., giirrawatil

liko.
Woro-woro, on., to swell.
"Wotara, m., to be shallow.
Wunkilliko, on., to leave.
Wiinmarabunbilliko, on., to per-
mit to be left, to let be left.
Wuno, on., to stoop or bend in

walking.
Wupilliko, on., to put, to place.
Wurunbarig, on., to be hairy;

as an animal.
Wntilliko, on., to cover, to put

on clothes.

m whenever the act is conjoined with
ko, ' to eat and walk.'

Gi

AX ArSTBALIAN LANGUAGE.

T.

Tarakal. m., to be bad, evil.
Yaialkulliko, w., to move away,

as the clouds!.
Tarigkulliko, «?., to laugh.
Yellawa-bug-gulliko, on., to

compel to sit, to force to

sit.
Tellawa-bunbilliko, m., to per-
mit to sit dowu.
Tellawolliko, m., to cross legs

down on the ground ; to sit,

to remain, to rest.
Temmamulliko, «?., to lead ; as

by the hand, or as a horse

by a rope.
Tiirkulliko, w., to tear of itself,

as cloth ; to break.

Tiirkabunbilliko, w., to per-
mit to tear, to let tear.

Tiirburririlliko, w., to tear,
by means of something.

Tiirburri-bun-billiko, m., to
permit to tear, by means
of something.

Tiirbug-gulliko, on., to com-
pel to tear.

Tiirbug-ga-bunbilliko, m., to

permit compulsively to

tear.

TimuUiko, m., to make light,

as fur is caused to lie lightly

before the blacks twist it into

cord ; to encourage, to cheer

Tinbilliko, on., to kindle a fire.
Yiremba, on., to bark ; as a dog.
Yitelliko, on., to nibble or bite;

as a fish the bait.
Tuaipilliko, on., to push away,

to thrust out.
YukuUiko, on., to send, as a

messenger, to send property ;

rf., tiyumbilliko.
Yuntilliko, m., to cause pain,

to hurt.
Yurig, on., to go away.
Yurdgkilliko, on,, to dive.
Yuropulliko, on., to conceal

from view, to hide
Yurrug-gun, w., to be faint with

hunger.
Yutilliko, on., to guide, to show

the way by guiding.
Yutpilliko, on., to pulsate, to

beat, to throb.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTEXCES. G5

CHAPTER V.

ILLUSTEATIYE SEXTEXCES.

Aboriginal sentences literally rendered into English.*

1. ON THE SIMPLE-KOillXATIYE CASE.

Gran ke bi? gatoa, Bouni; w., who are you? it is I, Bonni.

Who be thou? I, ,,

Gan ke unni, unnoa, unniig? m., who is tin's, that,
Who be this? that? there? there?

Kuri uniii, uukug unnoa, wonnai unnug;
Man this, woniaii tliat, chihl there.

m., this is a man ; that is a woman ; there is a child.
Minarig ke unni? warai ta unni; «?., whatis this ? it is

What be this ? spear it is tliis. a spear.

Minarig-ko ke unnoa? turulliko; «?., what is that for?
What - for be that ? for-to-spear. to spear with.

2. O'S TirE AGE>"T-XOMiyATITE CASE.

Gr ci n - 1 o bin w i y a ? n i u w o a t i a w i y a ; m., who told you ?

Wlio thee told ? he me told. he told me.

Gali-noa, gali -bo uut oa, tia wiya; m., this man, this

This-he this-she, me told; woman, told me.

G a 1 i - n 0 a unni u m a ; m., this is the man who made this.

This-he tliis made.

Minarig-ko bonbunkulla tetti?; w., what smote him

What him struck dead ? dead ?

Nukug-ko, piriwallo, puutimaito;
Tlie woman — , the king — , the messenger — ,
m., the woman — , the king — , the messenger — , sc , smote him.
W a k u n - 1 o minarig t a t a u ? ; m. , what does the crow eat ?

Crow wliat eats ?

M i n a r i g-k o wakun tat an?; m., what eats the crow ?

What crow eats ?

Nagiin-to tia pital-mau; m., the song rejoices me.

Song me joy-does.

Kulai-to tia bunkulla wokka-tin-to;
Stick me struck up-from.

m., the stick fell from above and struck me.

•Note. — The line under the native words is a literal translation of them ;
that which follows tlie m is tlie equivalent English. — Ed.

66 AX AUSTEALIAX LANGUAGE.

3. ON THE GENITIVE CASE.

(jr j'l n - u m b a n o a ii n n i y i n a 1 ? w., whose son is this ?

Whoni-belonging-to he this son?

Emnioumbu ta ; gali-k o-ba bdn; m., it is mine ; tbis be-

Mine it is ; this-belongs him. longs to him.

Birab;in-umba, gilioumba wonnai; m., Birabau's, bis
Birab;in-belonging-to, his chikl. child.

Minari g-k O-ba unni? gali-ko-ba bdn; w., what does this

What-belongs this? this-belongs him. belono' to?

Wonta-kal bar a? En gland- kal bai*a?

What-phxce-of f'?7za.s\ j they ? England - of they.

m., what country are they of? they are Englishmen.
AVonta -kali u bara? England-kalin bara?

What-place-of C/em.j they? England - of they.

in., what country women are they ? they are Englishwomen.
Bug -ga i - k a 1 ; m., to-day ; lit., belonging to the present period.

To-day-of.
Makoro-ko-ba ta unni gdrrdg; «i., this is the blood of a

Fish-belongmg-to it is this blood. fish.

G-overnor- kai-kal bag; m., I belong to the Gover-

Governor - place-belonging-to I. nor's place.

Governor- II mba bag; on., I am the Governor's, «c., man.

Governor-belonging-to I.
Murrarag-ko-ba kuri-ko-ba; m., a good man's.
Good-belonging-to man-belonging-to

4. ON THE DATIVE.

M a k o r o bi g uw a; g a n - n u g ? give the fish; to whom?

Fish thou give ; whom-for ?

Piriwal-ko? Keawai; giroug bo; m., to the chief? no;

Chief-for ? no, for-thee self. for yourself.

Karai tia guwa emmoug takilliko; m., give me flesh to

Flesh me give for-me for-to-eat. eat.

Turig bi wo 11 a; gi kou g-kin-ko ; m., be off"; go to him.

Away thou go him- to.

Gan-kin-ko? piriwal-la-ko ; kokera-ko ;
Whom-to ? chief-to ; house-to.

m., to whom ? to the chief ; to the house.
Wontarig? untarig; untoarig;
To-what-place ? that-plaee ; that-place-there.

m., to what place ? to that place; to that place there.
Mulubinba-ka-ko ; En gland-ka-ko ; m., to Newcastle; to
To Newcastle ; England to. Eno^land.

5. ON THE ACCUSATIVE.

Gan-to bdn bunkulla tetti kulwun? w., who smote him
Who him smote dead stiff. dead ?

G-annug? B i r aba nn u g ; ot., whom ? Biraban.
Whom ? Biraban.

ILLrSTEATIA'E SENTENCES. 67

Gratoa bon tura; tura bdn bag; m., it is I who speared
I him speared ; speared him I. him ; I speared him.

Ivaibulla bounnoun; gannug? ot., caliber; which?

Call her ; which ?

U n n u g -y o g u n n o a n u g n u k u g ; m., that woman there.

■ There-there that woman.

M a n k i y i k o r a u n n o a n u g ; m., do not take that.

Take not that.

Mara b 1 u n n o a n u g ; m., take that ; take it.

Take thou that.

Mara b i u n t i-k a 1, unto a-k a 1, m., take some of this, of that.

Take thou hereof, there-of.

Makoro tia guwa; guuun banug; in., give me a fish ; I

Fish me give. give-will I-thee will give thee.

Puntiman tia baran; m., I am thrown down.

Throws me down.
Makoro bi turulla warai-to; m., spear the fish with the

Fish thou pierce spear-with. Spear.

Tibbinbibuwamusketto; m., shoot the bird with the

Bird thou smite musket-with. musket.

Wiyella bon; wiyella binug; ot., tell him ; you tell him.

Tell him ; tell thou-him.

B li n k u 1 1 a tia; w o n n e ? ; m., I am struck ; where ?

Smote me ; where ?

Wallug tia noa wirea; m., he hit me on the head.

Head me he struck..
Minarig bo bali wiyella? m., what shall you and I say ?

What self thou -I say.

G- a n-t 0 bounnoun turaniin? m., who will spear her ?
Who her pierce-will ?

G-anto unnoanug uma-niin? «?., who will make it?
Who that-there make-will ?

G. ON THE VOCATIVE.

Ela! kaai, tan an unt i-k o ; m., I say, come hither.
Hallo ! come, approach this-place-for.

Wau! kaai, kaai, karakai; ?«., I say, come, make haste.
Hallo ! come, come, be quick.

Bougkalinu n-w al bag waita biyugbai-tako
Arise-self-will I depart Father-to

e mm o u g-k a-t a-ko, gatun wiy a -nun-wal, Biyug,
my-to and say-will, Father,

yarakai bag uma mikan ta morokoka gatuu

evil I made, presence-at heaven-at and

gir ou g-k in;
thee.
m., I will arise and go to my father, and will say unto him, Pather
I have sinned against heaven, and before thee.

GS AN ArSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.

7. ON THE ABLATIVE.

K 0 ak i 11 an b ar a ; g^ni-kai? gan-kai-k an ;
Quarrelling-now they ; wliom-from ? whoin-froiu-being ?

m., the}' are now quaiTclling; about whom ?
B o u n n o u n-k a i ; T a i p a m e a r i n ; m., about her ; about T — .

Her-from, Taipaiiiear-from.

M i n a r i g - 1 i n ? m i n a r i g-t i n-k a n ; m., about what ? don't

What-from ? wliat-from-being. know.

M a k o r r i n g a t u n k li r i-t i n ; m., about the fish and the men.

Fish-from and men-froni.

Gan-kin-bir u g unni puntimai? ot., from whom came

Whom-from this messenger? this messenger ^

J e h o V a-k a-b i r u g P i r i w a 1 - 1 a-b irug , m., from .Tehovah the

Jehovah-from King-from. King.

AV o n t a-k a-b irug u o a ? m., from what place did he come ?
What-place-froni he ?

AVokka-ka-biru g moroko-ka-birug; m., from heavenabove.

Up-from heaven-froai.

Sydney-ka-birug ; JMulu-binba-ka-birug; m., fromSydnev;

Sydney-from ; Newcastle-froni. from Newcastle.

Mi n a r i g-b ir u g unnoa uma? vi., what is that made of?

What-fiom that made ?

K u 1 a i-b i r u g ; bras s-b irug; m., of wood ; of brass.
Wood-from ; brass-from.

C o p p e r-b irug garabug-ga brass; m., brass is made

Copper-fiom converted brass. of copper.

Turig bi wolla emmoug-kin-birug; ?;»., go away from me.

Away thou move me-from.

T e 1 1 a w o 1 1 a b i e m m o u g- k a t o a ; m., sit with me.

Sit thou me-with.

G;ln-katoa bouutoa? Tibbin-katoa ba;
Whom-with she ? Tib!)in-with.

m., witli whom is she? with Tibbin.
M i n a r i g-k o a n o a u w a ? m., how did he go ?

Wliat-by he go ?

M u r r i n 0 w a i-t 0 a ; p u r r a i-k o a ; m., on board a ship ; by land .

Large -canoe by ; land-by.

Wont a-k a 1-1 o a ? k o r u g-k o a ; «?., which way ? through the
What-phice-ljy ? ' bush-bj'. bush.

Iv o k e r d a bag n w a ; m., I came by the house.

House-by I came.

W 0 n n u g k e w u r u b i 1 ? B i r a b a n - k i n - b a ;

W.ere-at be skin-cloak ? Birabau-at

w., where is the blanket? at Biraban's.
"\V 0 n n o u g k e n o a ? ' S y d n e y-k a-b a n o a ;
Where-at be he ? Sydney-at » he.

•;«., where is he? he is at Syduey.
"Won ta-wonta-ka-ba kokera? m., whereabouts is the house?
Where-where-at house I

ILLtrSTEATITE SENTENCES. 69

P a p a i-t a-b a Mulubinb a-ka-ba ; m., close to Newcastle.

Close-at Newcastle-at

Broke n-b ay-tin-to* u a t a n S y d n e y-li e a d s ;
Broken-Bay-from see Sydney-heads.

m., at Broken Bay is seen Sydney Heads.
AV o n t a-t i n-t o ? n n t i-t i n-t o ; u n t a-t i n-t o ;
What-place-from ? this-place-from ; that-place-from.
m., at what jjlace ? at this place ; at that place.

8. ON THE ARTICLE.

Minna n kiiri tanan-ba? OT.,howmany men are now coming?

What men approach ?

"Wakal-bo ta noa tana n-b a ; m.^ one man only is coming.

One-self it is he approaches.
B u 1 o a r a-b ota bulatananuwa;«?., only the two came.

Two- self it is two approach came.

K 6 1 b i r a n-b o ta bar a nukug; m., only a few women.

Few-self it is they women.

T i b b i n-t o noa tatan; w., the bird eats.

Bird he eats.

Gali-noa tibbin-to pittan; «z., this is the bird wbich drinks.

This-he bird drinks.

Tibbin-to noa unuug; «?., that is a bird.

Bird he there.

Unni-tara tibbin bi bimkulla tetti; OT.,tbese are the birds

These birds thou smotest dead. you killed.

Grintoa-bo ta unnoa kuri; w., thou art the man.

Thou -self it is that man.

Maiya-ko putti-nun tetti koa kauwil kiiri;
Snake bite-will dead ut-[ may-be man.

m., the snake wdll bite in order to kill the man.
T i r a-k o gikoumb a-k o ; m., with his teetb.

Teeth his- with.

Tetti bon horse-ko witti-ma; «j., tbe horse threw him,
Dead him horse violence-made. and killed him.

9. CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERB.

"VVibbi unni kauwal katan; m., this is a high wind.

Wind this great it exists.

Kan wan, kauwal lag unni; on., yes, very powerful.

So it is, great acts this.

Kapirra bag kakilliela, katan; m., I was, I am, hungry.

Hungry I was-being, am.

Gan unti katan? m., who lives here ?
Who this-place exists ?
Bara-bo unti katan; m., they themselves dwell here.

They-self this-place exist.

* Note — Here Broken Baj- is spoken of both as the cause and the agent, so that the
meaning is — on account of Broken Bay being the au:ent, you see Sydney Heads. The
particle tin, ' from,' ' on account of,' denotes the cause, and to (ko) marks the agency.

t The English expression ' in order that ' is too long to stand under and correspond with
' koa' in the above. I have, therefore, substituted for it, throughout, the Latin 'ut.

70 A>' AUSTR.VLIAX LANGUAGE.

K i a k i a b a g k a k 6 u u u n n i g o r o k a n ; m., I was conqueror

Conqueror I was this morning this morning.

B u k k a bag k a k u 1 1 a ; m., I was very angry.

Rage I Mas.

B u u t o a r a n o a t e 1 1 i k a k u 1 1 a ;?;?., He is the man who

Tluit-wliich-is-smote he dead was. was killed.

Kakullata bag Sydney-ka taga bi ba kakiilla unta;
Was I Sydney-at before thou wast at-that-place

m., I was at Svdiiey before ever you were there.
Tv li m b a bag k a k e u n S y d n e y-k a ; m„ to-morrow I shall be
To-morrow I shall-be Sydney-iu. in Svdnev.

Ivaniin-ta unni murrarJig; ?«., it will be good, this.

Be-will this good.

Mirka noa tetti kaniin; m., perhaps he will be dead.
Perhaps he dead be-will.
G a n - k e k i a k i a k a n u n ? m., who will be the victor ?

^Vho conqueror be-will ?
Piriwal kanun-wal b i ; m., you will certainly be king.
Chief be-wilt thou.

Kabo bag kaniin Sydney-ka; w., by and by I shall be
By and by I be-will Sydney-at. at Sydney.

Kanun bag tarai ta yelienna-ka; m., in another
Be-will I another it is moon-at. month I shall.

Kaiyu kan bag; kaiyu korien bag;
Able being I ; able not I.

m., I am powerful ; I am not powerful.
"VV i r r o b u 1 1 i-k a n b a r a g i k o u m b a ; m , they are his f ol-

FoUowers they his. lowers.

Tulbulleun bag kinta kan; w., I escaped, being afraid.

Escaped I fear being.

Pirra-pirra bara kakillin iintelH-t i n ; «z., the dancing
Fatigued they becoming dance-from. js tirino' them.

Wunal unni kakillin; m., the summer is coming on.

Hot-season this becoming.
Store-ba kakillin bountoa; m., she is now living near

Store existing she. the store.

Store-ka-ba kakillin bountoa; m., she is now living at

Store at existing she. the store.

Musket tia katala Awaba-ka; in., I had a musket at

Musket me existed Awaba-at. Lake Macquarie.

Kinta bag katala, yakita keawai; w., I used to be afraid,

Afraid I existed, now not. but now I am not.

Katala bag li a i a t e a-k a ; m„ I used to live at Raiatea.

Existed I Baiatea-at.

Unta bag katala yuraki M — ka; w., I lived formerly

There I existed formerly M — at. at M — .

Piriwal bag kakilli-kolag; m., I am now going to be

Chief 1 to-be- towards kin<i'

Korien kakilli-nua yantikatai; ?»., I will not be so for
Not be-will so for ever, ever.

ILLrSTEATIVE SEXTEKCES. 71

Moronnoalcakilli-nuutettikorien;
Live he be-will dead not.

m., lie is going to live for ever and never die.
AV i b b i k a k i 11 i 1 i n w a r e a ; m., the wind is lessening.

Wind now-continuing-to-be less.
G-atoa-bo, yaki-ta-bo, unti-bo;

I myself, instantly, this self same place.

w., I myself, at thLs very place and instant.
Kakilhin bali-bountoa; m., she and I live together.
Live-together we two-she.

Gin toa-bo ka-pa piriwal kakilliko; m., you ought to

Thou-thyself oughtest chief to be. be chief.

Takoai bag tettikaiaunbin-nun bdn?;

In-what-manner I dead let-be- will him?

in., how shall I cause his death ?
Kakillai koa ball muroi; »?., I wish you and me to
To-continue-to-be ut we two quiet ; continue at peace.

Kau wil-koa- pore gore yards; m., I want it three yards long.
That-may-be long three ,, ;

Munninoa katea kan; w., he is sick again.

Sick he is-become again.

Yanoa;munni koa noa katea-kiin; wj.,do not; lest he be

Do-not ; sick lest he should-be. sick.

Munni kanim bag ba; m., if I should be sick.

Sick be-will I if.

Gan-ketetti kamai-ga? w., who had almost been dead?

Who dead like-to-have-become?
Tettibag kamai-ga; vi., I was almost dead.

Dead I had-like-to-have-been.

Piriwal bi ba-k a-p apital gaiya bag ka-pa;
Chief thou if-hadst-been joy then I had-had.

m., if you had been king, I should have been glad.
Ka-pa bi ba unta gnrokan-ta, ua pa gaiya banug;
Hadst-been thou if there this-morning, seen had then I-thee.

m., if you had been there this mornuig, 1 should have seen you.
K o r u n k a u w a, t li n k i y i k o r a ; w., be still, do not cry.

Quiet be wail not.

Kauwa, bi tetti kakilliko; m., yes, you are to die.

Yes, thou dead for-to-be.
Kakilla nura pital kakilliko; wj., be at peace one with

Be ye peace for-to-be. the other.

Moron bon ka-miinbilla; m. , let him live.

Alive him permit-to-be.

Ka-munbi-nun banug piriwal kakilliko;
Permit-will I-thee chief for-to-be.

m., I will let you be king.

Piriwal bi katea-ka; m., be king again.
Chief thou be-again.

Piriwal bdn ka-miin bi yikora;OT., prev'ent his being
Chief him permit-to-be thou not. chief.

72 AX AUSTBALIAN LANGUAGE.

10. THE COXJUGATIOX OF THE ACTIA'E VERB.

GannugbuukuUa? unni bon yc ; w., wlio was beaten?

Whom struck ? this him be. this is he.

Minarig-tin biloa gala bimkulla?; m., why did tliat
What-from he-thee that struck? person beat you ?

Unni b ulun b vi n k u 1 1 a n o a ; m., these are the two he struck.
These them-two struck he.

Tanan tia, wolla-wolla; biintcin tia butti kirrin-kirrin!
Approach me, move-move, beats me more pain pain.

m., come to me, make haste ; I am beaten more and in pain.
Gan-to bin bunknlla? wiyella bi tia; mupai yikora;
Who thee struck ? tell thou me ; secret not.

on., who beat you ? tell me ; do not conceal it.
Gali-noa tia biinkulla; m., this is he who struck me.

This-he me struck.

M i n a r i g-k o biloa biinkulla? m., with what did he strike

What- with he-thee struck ? you ?

Mattarro gikoumba-ko; m., with his hand.
Hand -with his- with.

Kotarro noa tia biinkulla; «?., he struck me with a cudgel.
Cudgel-with he me struck.

Kora koa binug biim-ba? «?., you ought to have beaten him.

Not ut thou-him struck had.
Biiwil koa bon, kaiyu korien bag;

That-might-strike ut him, able not I.

7)1., I wish to beat him, but am unable.
Kotara bi tia guwa buwil koa bon bag;
Cudgel thou me give to-strike ut him I.

m., give me a cudgel that I may beat him.
Bum-ba bo ta bon bag, wonto bag-ba kinta kan kakulla ;
Struck-had surely him I, but I fear being was.

m., I should certainly have struck him, but I was afraid.
Biinkeun bon bag; m., I have beaten him, sc, this morning.
Struck -have him I.
B II n n u n b on bag k a-b o ; m.,1 will beat him by-aud-by.

Strike-will him I by-and-by.
Bunkillaiban kora nura; m., do not be striking one

Striking-be not ye. another.

Bunkillin bon bara y aki ta ; j«., they are striking him now.

Ai'e-striking him they now.
BunkiUiela bon bag, tanan bi ba uwa;
Was-striking him I, approach thou came.
m., I was striking him when you came.
B u n t a 1 a tia bara av o n n a i b a g b a ;
Struck me tliey child I

m., they beat me when I was a child.
Waita-kolag noa b ii n kill i-ko lag; vi., he is gone a-
Depart-towards lie to-strike-towards. fighting.

B li n k i 1 1 i 1 i n noa wheat; m., he is thrashing wheat.
Is-continuing-to-strike he wheat. _

ILLUSTEATITE SENTENCES. 73

Biinkillilia binug; «?., beat liim; tlirash it.

Continue-to-strike thou-him.

G a n - b o n u r a b ii n k i 1 1 a n ? in., who are fighting with you ?

Who-self ye strike-reciprocally ?
Biiukillala bara-bo bara-bo ; m., they fought amongst

Fought they-self they-self. themselves.

Biinkillala bali-noa Bulai wonnai bali-noa ba;
Struck-reciprocally we-two-he Bulai children we-two-he when,
m., when Bulai and I were children, we fought with one another.
Biinkilla-nun bula; m., the two are going to fight.
Strike-recipi-ocally-will the-two.
Yanoa; bunkillai ban kora; cease fighting.

Let be ; striking-reciprocally be not.

Tanoa; bunki yikora; m., do not strike.

Let be; strike not.

Bi'mkillai-kin bali-noa kiimba; w., to-morrow he audi

Strike-each-will we-two-he to-morrow will fight a duel.

Takounta-ke bara biinkilla-nun? m., when will they fight?
At-what-time they fight-will ?

k VL m b a-k e n-t a ; m., the day after to-morrow.
"Wait a-ko lag bag biinkilliko musket- to;
Depart-towards I for-to-strike musket-with.

m., I am now going to shoot with a musket.
Yakoai tia buwil koa bdn bag; m., take care that I

How me may-strike ut him I. may beat him.

Wiyella bdn buwil koa bon; «?., command him to beat

Tell him strike %it him. him.

Buwil bag Pattynug; m., I wish to beat Patty.
May-beat I Patty.

Tari bi nuti-nun, b tin te a-k tin koa bin;
Do-not thou wait-will, should-sti-ike lest thee.

m., do not wait lest you be struck.
Biin-nun noa tia ba turulla gaiya binug;
Strike-will he me if pierce then thou-him.

m., when he strikes me, then spear him ; or, if he, &c.
Bvimmai-ga tia, wonto bag ba murra ;
Struck-has-nigh me, but I ran.

on., 1 should have been struck, but I ran away.
Keawaran tia bum-ba-ka-pa bag-ba unti bo;

Not me struck-had-been I-if at this self same place.

m., I should not have been struck, had I remained here.
Grali-ta tia tetti biim-ba; ««., this might have killed me.
This me dead struck-had.

Turig, binug b u nkea yakita; «?., go, strike him agaiu now.
Away thou-him strike-again now.

Wiya, bdn bag biim-ba, biim-ba gaiya bi-tia;
Say him I struck- had, struck - liad then thou-me ;

VI., if I had struck him, then you would have struck me.

Yari bdn buntea k a nu n, ot., prevent hisbeingbeatenagain.
Prevent him strike-again be-will.

74 AN AUSTBALIAN LANGUAGE.

B u m m u n b i a b i - t i a ; m., jou. permitted me to be beaten.
Permitted -to-slrike thou-me.

B vi m m u n b i 1 1 i n b o n bag; m.,1 am permitting him to strike.
To-strike-permitting liim I.

Bii in m u n b i y i k o r a b o n ; m., do not permit him to strike.
To-strike-permit not him.

B u m m li 11 b i 1 1 a b i -t i a b d n ; m., let me strike him.
To-strike-permit tliou-me him.

K a m u 1 1 a b i-t i a b li m m a r a b u n b ia- k u n k o a t i a ;
To-be-cause thou-me some-one-shoukl-strike lest me ;

;«., protect me, lest anyone should beat me.
Bunk ilia nura; ?«., light on.
Continue-to-strike ye.

W a k a 1 1 o b i n u g b u w a, ma b li n t e a - k a t i a ;
Once thou-hiiu strike, do strike-again me.

m., smite him once, smite me again.
B XI m m u n b i 1 1 a b i n u g, b u w i 1 k o a n o a t i a,
Permit-to-strike thou-him, may-strike vt he me.

m., permit him to strike, that I may be beaten by him.
Yakoai, biiwil koa barun bag; ?«., take care that I beat

Mind, may-strike ut them I. them.

Kinta kora bi; keawaran bin bun -nun;
Fear not thou ; not thee strike-will.

m., fear not ; thou shalt not be beaten.
Kora koa bi-tia bun tan? m., why do not you beat me ?

Not lit thou-me strike ?
M a, b u w a bi-tia, b i n u g (a challenge) ; m., do strike me, him.

Do, strike thou-me, thou-him.
B u n k i a b i n u g ; m., strike him, sc, to-morrow morning.

Strike thou-him.
B u n k i 1 1 i - 1 i n n o a m u r r a ; m., he ran away because o£ the

Striking-from he ran. fifhtintr.

*^ ^ ^ .

Bunkillai bara yanti katai; ;«., they are always fighting

Striking they then for ever. amongst themselves.

K a u w a 1 u n n o a b li n k i 1 1 i - k a n-n e ; m., that is a great thing

Great that striking-thing. to strike with.

IT n n o a - 1 a n o a b x'l n k i 1 1 i - k a n ; ot., that is the striker.

That he striking-being.

Gali-noa bunkilli-kan-to tia biinkulla;
This - he striking-being me struck.

m., this is the striker who struck me.
B u n k i - y e bara u n n o a k u r i ; m., they are the fighters.

Fighter they those men.

"W a i t a - k 0 1 a g bag b I'l n k i 1 1 a i - g e 1 - k o 1 a g ;
Depart about I striking-phme-towards.

m., I am going to the field of battle.
Biintoara bag gali-birug bdn; m.,1 was struck by

That-which-is-struck I this - from him. him.

Bun kill i-t in bag katan unti; «?, I remain here because
Striking-from I remain here, of the fif'ht.

ILLUSTEATIVE SENTEKCES. '75

M u n n i g e e ii k a p a i y i n b u n ]v i 1 1 i - b i r u g ;
Sick we siifFeriiig striking-from.

m., we are ill tliTout!;li tightinj?.

G a 1 i t i a n o a b u n t o a r o b li n k u 1 1 a ; m., this is tbe wounded

This me lie the-woumled struck. man who struck me.

AVonnug-ke bar a biintoara? m., where are those who

Where they that-be-struck. were struck ?

Buntoarin bara tetti kakulla; m., they died of their
Wouncled-from they dead were. wounds.

11. CONJUGATION OP SOME OTHER VERBS.

Minarig bi uman? warai? w., what thing do you make?

Wliat thou makest? spear. a spear?

Gran- to unni uma? gali; /;«., who made this? this person

Who this made ? this. did

G a n - 1 o t i a moron u m a - n li n ? on., who will save me alive ?

Wlio me alive make-will ?

G a n - 1 o u n n 0 a p u n n a 1 uma? J e h o v a - k o ;
Who that sun made ? Jehovah,

w., who made the sun ? Jehovah did.
M u m i n w i n t a kakulla, uma n o a b a r u n n a k i 1 1 i-ka n ;
Blind some were, made he them seers ;

m., some were blind, he made them to see.

Umabunbi yikora, tetti koa noa katea-kiin;
Permit-to-do not, dead lest he become ;

711., do not let him do it, lest he die.

TJ m a i - g a - 1 a bag unni y a r a k a i ; m., T had almost spoiled
Like-to-have-done I this bad. this.

Wiyella bou uma-uwilkoa u n noa; w?., tell him to makeit.
Tell him may-do ^d that.

"Wi yella bon upa-uwil koa unnoa;
Tell him to-do ut that ;

on., tell him to u?e it; or, to make it act.

Soap u m a t 0 a r a k i p a i-b i r u g ; on., soap is made of fat.
Soap made fat-from.

Upulli-gel k u lai-t a-b iru g ; m., the acting place of wood ;
Doing-place wood-from. a wooden table.

Warai bag umullin; m., I am making a spear.
Spear I am-now-making.

Mirrin bag upullin; on., I am sharpening or putting a
Point I am-now-doing. point.

Wonnug-ke mirrin wirritoara? on., where is that which
Where be pomt that-which-is-done ? jg pointed.

TJmatoara kiimba-birug; on., that which was made
That-which-is-done yesterday-from. yesterday.

76 AIT AUSTEALIA.X LAXGUAGE.

12. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ' TO GO.'

Wonta-kolag bi uwan? Syclney-kolag.

Whitlier-towards thou movest? Sydney-towards.

»«., where are you going? to Sydney.
"VV o n t a r i g b i u \v a n ? u n t a r i g ; 8 y d n e y - k a - k o.
To-what-place thou movest ? to that place ; Sydney-for

m., to what place do you go ? to that place ; to Sydney.
Wontabirugbi uwa? m., from what place did you come ?
What-plaee from thou movedst ?
Koiyog-tin bag uwa; m., I started from the camp.

Camp-fi-om I moved.

Kaiyog-birug bag uwa, m., I came out from the camp.

Camp-from I moved.

W i y a, bag u w a - n ii n ? m., may I go ?

Say, I move-will ?

Keawaran wal bi uwa-nun; w., you shall not go.
Not shalt thou move-wilt.

Tanoa, uwayikora; «?., do not go.

Let be, move not.
Wiya, bi tan an uwa-nun? m., will you come ?

Say, thou approach move-will?
Wiya, bi wait a uwa-nun? m., will you go ?

Say, thou depart move-will ?
Wiya, b i w a i t a u w o 1 1 a ? m., do you wish to go ?

Say, thou depart move ?
Wiya, b i t a n a n u w o 11 a ? m., do you wish to come ?

Say, thou approach move ?
Wiya, ball uwolla; ?«., let us, you and me, go.

Say, thou-I move ?
W a i t a g c e n uwolla w i 1 1 i m u 1 1 i - k o 1 a g ; m., let us go a
Depart we move to-hunt-about. hunting.

W o n n e n g e e n uwolla? g i a k a i •, in., which way shall we
Which-way we move ? this M'ay. go ? this way.

W 0 n n e n k a n ? m., don't know ; or, which way can it be ?

Which-way being ?
Wa-uwil bali Pakai kabo; m., I want you to go Avith

Move-may I-thou Pakai by-and-by. me to Pakai by-and-by.

Tanoa; uwa-niin bo-ta bag; m., no ; I will go by myself.

Let be ; move-will self I

Wiya, b a 1 i-b a g w a-u w i 1 ; m., I wish you to go with me.

Say, we-two-I move-may.

E-e, wait a bali; waitti-ljig bar a;
Yes, depart we-two-I ; departed they.

m., yes, I will go with you ; they are gone.

Yurig bula uwolla, garabo ka-ko bag wait a;

Away ye-two move, sleep for-to-be I depart;

in., go away you two ; I am going to sleep.

Waitc4 ka-ba bountoa parkai; m., she is gone to the
Departed is she southward. southward.

ILLUSTRATIVE SENTENCES. 77

Waita-wal bag uwa-nun; m., I am determined I will go .

Depart-shall I move-will.

Waita koa bag; mimai yikora; on., I must go ; do not

Depart ut I ; detain not. detain me.

"Winta bara waita uwa-niin; «?., some of them will go.

Part they depart move-will.

"Waita * w a-n lin noa ba, waita gaiya geen;
Depart move-will he if, depart then we.

OT., when he gooH, we will go.
Wonta puunal kakulla, uwa gaiya nura ba?
Where sun was come then ye ?

m., what time was it when you came ?

Uwolliela noa b a, nugurrurwa gaiya bdnuoa;

Moving-was he met then him he.

m., while he was w^alking, he met him.

Wiya, bi uwa-keiin k o iy (5 g-ko 1 ag? m., have you been

Say, thou moved-hast canip-towards ? to the camp ?

Keawai, kiimba bag Avaita wokkin; ?»., I have not, but

Xo, to-morrow I depart move. to-morrow I shall.

Kabo, waita w a-n u n bag; «?., by-and-by I shall go.
By-and-by, depart move-will I.

Kurrikai-kurrikai-ta katan uwolliko gaol-
Quick it is for-to-move gaol -
k 0 1 a g , k e a w a r ci n w i 1 1 u g - k o ;
towards not for-to-return.
m., it is very easy to go to goal, but not so easy to get out again.

AV a i t a bag u w a-n tin tottog gurrulliko.
To-depart I move-will news for-to-hear.

on., I will go and hear the news.

Pital ma- pa bi-tia ba, keawai gaiya bag wa-pa;

Joy done-had thou-me, not then I moved-had.

m., if you had loved me, I would not have gone.

Wa-munbilla tia Sydiiey-kol ag; in , permit me to goto
Permit-to-move me Sydney-towards. Sydney.

"W a- m li n b i - n u n b a n u g ; m., I will let you go.
Permit-to-move-will I-thee.

Yari bi wa-nun, turea-kiin-koa bin kiiri-ko bara;
Do-not thou move-wilt, pierce-should-lest thee men they.

m., do not go, lest you should be speared by the men.

Keawai banug wa - munbi-niin ; ?«., I will not permit
Not I-thee permit-to-move-will. you to o'O.

U w a - t a noa y a n t i - 1 a p u n n a 1 b a polo g-k a 1 1 e u n ;
Came he at-the-time sun sinking-was.

m., he came just as the sun was setting.

' Note. — The u is often omitted when another verb takes the yo\crnnient, forming it
into an auxiliary ; tut as a principal verb the u is general!)' retained.

1

3. COXJUGATIOX

OF OTilKR

tee;

K

u r r a w u u

unn i

y i ir

]v u 1 1 i n ;

m.,

Clear

this

breaking (i

as the clouds),

P.

6 r -kail e ii n

I t i .a

w o n n a i

e in mourn

ba:

Droijped-has

nie

child

mine.

78 AN ArSTRALTAN LANGUAGE.

K e a w ii r a n n 0 a w a-p a y a n t i-t a p u n ii a 1 - b a p <) 1 o g -
Not he moved-had at-the-tiiue siiii sinking-

k a 1 1 e ti n ;
was.
«?.., Tie had not come, when the sun was setting.
T a n a n b i w o 1 1 a y a n t i - 1 a p u n n a 1 - b a p o 1 (i g-k a 1 1 i n ii n ;
Approach thou move at-the-time sun sinking will-be.

m., come at sunset.

the weather is
clearing up.
7)1., unto me my
child is born.
Tiirran unni; minnug? 711., that is broken; what is?

Broken this ; M'hat.

T i i r - b u g - g a unni; g a n t o unni t i i r - b u g - g a ?
Broken this ; who this broken ?

771., this is broken by some person ; who broke it?
T i i r b u r r e a unni; y a k o a i ? w i b b i - k 0 ;
Broken this ; how ? wind-for.

«?., this is broken ; how? by the wind.
W i b b i - k 0 t i a p 6 r b ii r r e a hat e m m o u m b a ;
Wind me dropped hat my.

;»., the wind has blown off my hat.

"W" i w i , t i i r k u 1 1 e a - k ii n - k 0 a spade; w., mind, lest the

Mind, break-should-lest spade. spade break.

AViwi, t i i r-b u g- ge a-ktin-koa bi unnoa spade;

Mind, break-shouldst-lest thou that spade.

711., mind, lest you break that spade.

W i w i , t i i r b u r r c a - k u n - k 0 a b i unnoa spade g a 1 i

Mind, break-shouldst-lest thou that spade that

kulai-to; })i., mind, lest you break the spade with that stick,
stick -with.
Tiir-bng-ga-pa bag ba, minnugbanun gaiya bara-tia?
Broken-had I, what act-will then they-nie '!

7)1., had I broken it, what would they have done to me ?
Minnug ballinbi? wiyelllu bag;

What about-doing thou ? talking I.

7)1., what are you doing? I am talking.
Minnug b a b i n ? m., what is the matter with you ?

What do-to thee ?
Minnug b a n ii n g a i y a b i 1 o a ? m., what will he do to you ?

What do-will then he-thee?

Minnug b a n li n b i b u g-g a i ? m., wliat will you do to-day ?

What do-will thou to-day ?

Minnug baniin? gatdg; w., I don't know; nothing (an idiom).

What do-will ? nuthing.

P i t a I b a 1 i k a k i 1 1 a n ; ?;?., we two rejoice together.
Joy we-two are-being.

ILLL'STRATITE SEXTEJTCES. 79

Minnug balli-ka-Ice? m., of what use is it ? o£ wliat profit r^

What do-foi--to-be ?

Minnug balli-kolag noa uwa-iiun? m., what is h&

What to-be-about-to-do she move-will ? goin"' about ?

Na-nun bountoa biyugbai bounnouuba; w., to see

See-will she father her. her father.

Kati! katiii! t ett i-ba-b unbea tia ;?«., alas ! alas ! lam

Alas ! alas ! to-die-permitted me. left to die.

Tetti ba biinbilla bou; w., let him die; (/vans. verb).

Dead permit him.

Tetti b-ug-gulla bon; gan-to? m., kill him ; who shall?

Dead force him ; Avho ?

Tetti ba bunbi-nun banug; m. I will let you die.

Dead permit-will I-thee.

Tetti burri-niin banug m., 1 will cause you to die, as by

Dead cause-will I-thee. poisou, &c.

Tetti bug-gauiiu banug; m.,1 will compel you to die;

Dead force-will I-thee. murder vou.

Minnug b a- uwilkoa ball b(5n? m., what shall you

What may-do lit thou-I him ? and I do to him ?

Tanoa, te tti-b ea-kiin-k o a n o a, w?., let alone, lest he die.

Let be, die-should lest he.

Birrikillia noa untoa tetti bauwil koa noa;
Lie he at-that-place dead may-be i{t he.

m., he may (I wish him to) lie there until he dies.
Tetti burrilleiin bag; ju., I have destroyed myself; I have

Dead cause-self I. killed m^'self.

W. coxJuaATioN or the tebb ' to speak.'

Ganto wiyan? galiko, gali-tard; «z., who speaks ? this
Who speaks ? this, these. man does ; these.

Wiyan gali clock-ko; ?«., the clock strikes.

Speaks this clock.

Wiyan k u r i-k o ; w i y a n t i b b i n-t o ; m., the man speaks ;
Speaks man ; speaks bird. the bird sink's.

AV i y a n b u 1 1 o c k-k o ; m., the bullock roars.

Speaks bullock.

Wiya-uwilbitia yakoai bara-ba wiya bin;
Tell-may thou-me how they told thee.

m., I wish you to tell me how they spoke to you.
Wiya gaiya gearun bara yanti; ma; w., they spoke to
Told then them they so; do. us ill bravado.

Ga binug wiya? wiya b(5n b a g; m., did you tell him?
Is it thou-him told ? told him I. X told him.

Ganto bin wiya? yitarabullo tia wiya;
Who thee told ? such-a-one me told.

/«., who told you? that man did.

80 AN ATJSTRALIAN LAKGITAGE.

Gan unnug Aviyellin yc5g? m., who is talking out there ?

Wlio there talking there ?

G ;i nil u g hi w i y j'l n ? m., whom do you tell ? to whom do you

Whom thou speakest ? speak ?

Emmoug? galin? baruii? m.,me? us two? them?

Me ? US-two ? them ?

K li r i-k o-b a wiyellabitia; m., speak to me in the black's
Man-l)elonging-to speak thou-me. lano^uage.

"Wiyea-ka bitia; kara tia wiyella; m., tell me again ;
Speak-again thou-me ; slowly me tell. speak distinctly.

"Wonnug borin ball wiyella? m., what shall we two

Where first thou-I speak ? first talk about ?

Kabo-kabo, wiya-wiyelli koa ba g; «?., stay, stay, that I
Presentljs talk-talk-may vt I. may have some talk.

Wonnen bagwiyanun unni yitara? m., how am I to
Which-way I speak-will this name ? call this?

T a k 0 u n t a b i 1 o a w i y a ? m., when did he tell you ?
At-what-time he-thee told '?
W i y a n b a n u g g a r o k i 1 1 i-k o ; m.,1 command thee to arise.

Tell I-thee for-to-arise.

Unta bali-bi w iy ellala y ur aki ; m., this is where Ave
There thou-I conversed formerly. conversed to'i'ctlier.

Kaiyalleiin gali clock wiy elli-biru g; «?., theclockhas
Ceased-has this clock talking-from. done striking.

Takouii-ta ke binug wiya-nun; when will you tell
At-what-time be thou-him tell-will ? him ?

Wiya-nun binug b a, wiya-nun g a i y a t i a ;
Tell-will thou-him when, tell-will then me.

m., when you tell him, let me know.

15. PROMISCUOUS SELECTIONS.

Patin gali koiwon-to; ;«., it is raining.
Urop this rain.

Kabo-ka-ta tura-niin gaiya bin; m., by-and-by you will

By-and-by pierce-will then thee be speared.

Bulka-ka ba noa b utti k an-ka-ba; OT.,he is on horseback.

Back he beast - at.

K e a w a i k o 1 a g bag g u t a n ; m., 1 am not going to give.

Not towards I give.

G u k i 1 1 a ball u n n o a ; m., let you and me give one

Give-reciprocally thou-I that another, i.e., exchange.

Kora koa napal uwaii kuri-katoa? 7»., why do not women

Not vt women move men - with ? go with the men ?

Yanoa, yirriyirri ka-ke; m., because it is a sacred concern.

Let-be, sacred is.

Pita] k 0 r i e n bag s h o e - 1 i n ; ?«., I am displeased with the

Joy not I shoe-from. shoe.

P u 1 1 i g 0 w i - k o - b a ; vi.,a strange language ; a foreign tongue.
Voice strange-belonging-to.

ILLUSTEATITE SEJfTENCES. 81

Minarig-tin bi kottan untoa-tin? m., what think you

What-from thou thinkest tliat-from ? of that ?

Kottalliela bag tokoi-ta tetti bag ba ka-pa;
Thinking-was I kist-night dead I should-have-been.

m., I thought I should have died last night.
Tirag bag katan; m., I am awake.
Awake I remain.

Tiriig bug-gulla bon bougkulli koa no a;
Awake compel him to-arise tit he.

m., make him awake and get up.
K onein-t a unni nakilli-ko, m., this is pretty to look at.

Pretty this for-to-see.

Turi wiyelli-ko; «?., to swear the truth; to speak convincingly.
Truth for-to-speak.
Yuna bo ta bag wiyanun tuloa; ot.,I will certainly speak

Certain I speak-will straight. the truth.

Minarig-tin nura tia bukka buggan? m., why do ye
What-from ye me to-rage compel ? enrage me ?

Minarig-tin nura tia bukka katan? w., whyareyeen-
What-from ye me to-rage remain ? raged at me ?
Kamullala noa yantin-birug umulli-birug;
Ceased he all-from doing-from
m., he rested from all his work.
Kauwa, wiyalleiin bag gat o a-b o ;?«., yes, I was talking

Yes, talked -reflexively I I-self. to myself.

Gintoa-bo ba ;?/;., do as you like ; (an idiom).

Thou-thyself act.
Nauwa wirroban boiintoa-tia ba; /«., look while she fol

Look follows she-me. lows me.

N a k i 1 1 a n b a 1 i ; ;«., we two are looking one at the other.

Look-reciprocally thou-I.

Nakillcun bag gatoa-bo nak alii- gel-la;
Saw-recijjrocally I my-self looking-place-at.'

m., I saw myself in the looking-glass.
Minarig-tin bon bunkulla? kulla noa bukka barig;
What-from him struck ? because he angiy always.

m., why was he beaten? because he is always angry.
Tanti, ban kora; «?., do not do so.
Just so, act not.

Miimbilla tia galea; miimbitoara unni;
Lend me that ; that-which-is-lent this.

771., lend me that ; it is lent.
Mumbea bag tarai-kan; w«., I have lent it to another.

Lent-have I another-being.

Grumai-ga bin unni won to bi ba keawai man-ba*;
Given-had thee this where thou not taken-hadst.

m., it would have been given you, but you would not have it.

*NoTE. — It is extremely difficult to ascertain whether this particle should be spelt Pa or
Ba ; in the conjugations of the verb it is spelled Pa. But raan3' natives saj' it should be
Ba, whilst others affirm that it ouj'ht to be Pa.

^2 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Tunug iinni Turke v-ko-ba ; ?«., this is a Turkey stone.

Stone this Turkey-belongiiig-to.

Kiiri unni Turkey- kai; m., this is a Turkish man, a Turk.

Man this Turkey-of.

Tirriki-ko tia wiiina; w., the flame burns me.

Red me burns.

Makoro guwa, gatun karai, gatun tibbin, gatun
Fish give and flesh, and fowl, and

kokoiu, ta-uwil koa bag pitta-uwil koa bag;
water cat-may vt I drink-may ut I.

m., give fish, flesh, fowl, and water, that I may eat and drink.

(B.)

THE KEY.

[THE ORIGINAL TITLE-PAGjl..,

A KEY

TO THE STRUCTUEE OF THE

ABORIGINAL LANGUAGE;

BEING AN ANALYSIS OP THE
PARTICLES USED AS AFFIXES, TO EOEAI

THE YAEIOUS MODIFICATIONS OE THE UTERES ;

SHEWING THE

ESSENTIAL POWEES, ABSTRACT EOOTS, AND OTHER PECULIARITIES
OF THE LANGUAGE

SPOKEN BY THE ABORIGINES

IX THE YICINITT OF HUNTER EIVEE, LAKE MACQUAEIE, ETC.,
NEW SOUTH WALES :

TOGETHER WITH COMPAEISONS OF POLYNESIAN AND OTHER DIALECTS.

By L. E. THEELKELD.

SYDNEY:

THE BOOK FOE PRESENTATION AT THE ROYAL NATIONAL EXHIBITION, LONDON, 1S51,
UNDER THE AUSPICES OF HIS ROYAL HIGHNESS PRINCE ALBERT.

PRINTED WITH COLONIAL TYPE CAST BY A. THOMPSON, AND BOUND WITH
COLONIAL MATERIAL.

PRINTED BY KEMP AND FAIRFAX,

LOWER GEORGE-STREET.

1850.

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

This work was intended to be a paper for the Ethnological
Society of London, to accompany some very interesting researches
and observations made by a friend, relative to the customs and
language of the aborigines of this colony. Through his making
an inquiry respecting the meaning and difference of the words
ba and ka, either of which can only be rendered into our
language by the verb to he in some one or other of its modifica-
tions, I was led to the tracing out of the various meanings of
many particles of a similar description, so that the work swelled
to a size much larger than was) anticipated. It was, therefore,
thought advisable to print the work in its present form, especi-
ally as a public announcement asks for " A book, printed with
colonial type, filled with colonial matter, and bound and orna-
mented with colonial materials," for presentation at the lioyal
National Exhibition, London, 1851.

The subject is purely colonial matter, namely, the language of
the aborigines, now all but extinct ; and the other conditions
have been strictly attended to, as far as the circumstances of the
colony would allow, the paper alone being of English manufac-
ture. The author was the first to trace out the language of the
aborigines, and to ascertain its natural rules ; his " Australian
Grammar" was published here in the year 1834, under the aus-
pices of his late Majesty's Government, by the Society for Pro-
moting Christian Knowledge, which generously carried the work
through the press free of expense. His late Majesty King William
IV. was graciously pleased to accept a copy of the book, and direct
it to be placed in his library. Copies were likewise forwarded to
several public institutions in England and elsewhere, where, it
is presumed, they may still be found, — a testimony against the
contemptible notion entertained by too many, who flatter them-
selves that they are of a higher order of created beings than the
aborigines of this land, whom they represent as " mere baboons,
having no language but that in common with the brutes !"; and
who say, further, that the blacks have " an innate deficiency of
intellect, and consequently are incapable of instruction." But if
the glorious light of the blessed Gospel of God our Saviour had
never shed its divine lustre around the British Crown, or never
penetrated the hearts of the people with its vivifying power, the
aborigines of Albion's shores might still have remained in the
state described by the eloquent Cicero, in one of his epistles to his
friend Atticus, the Roman orator ; for he says, " Do not obtain
your slaves from Britain, because they are so stupid and utterly
incapable of being taught that they are not Jit to form a part of
the household of Atticus ! "

88 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Reminiscences of liiraban.

An aboriginal of this part of the colony was my almost daily companion for
many years, and to his intelligence I am principally indebted for mnch of
my knowledge i-especting the structure of the language. Biraban was his
native name, meaning 'an eagle-hawk,' l)ut the English called him M'Gill.
His likeness was taken at my residence, Lake Macquarie, in 1839, by Mr.
Agate, and will be found in the "Nari-ativeof the United States' Exploring
Expedition," commanded by Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. The "Narrative,"
vol. II, page 2.5.3, says : — " At Mr. Threlkeld's, Mr. Hale saw M'Gill, who
was reputed to be one of the most intelligent natives ; and his portrait was
taken by Mr. Agate. His physiognomy was more agreeable than that of
the other blacks, being less strongly marked with tlie peculiarities of his
race ; he was about the middle size, of a dark-chocolate colour, with fine
glossy black hair and whiskers, a good forehead, eyes not deeply set, a
nose that might be described as aquiline, although depressed and broad at
the base. It was very evident that M'Gill was accustomed to teacli his
native language, for when he was asked the name of anything he pro-
nounced the word very distinctly, syllable by syllable, so that it was
impossible to mistake it. Tiiough he is acquainted with the doctrines of
Christianity and all the comforts and advantages of civilization, it was
impossible for him to overcome his attachment to the customs of his peopjle,
and he is always a leader in the corrobborees and other assemblies."

Both himself and Patty, his wife, were living evidences that there Avas
no " innate deficiency of intellect " in either of them. He had been brought
up from his childhood in the Military Barracks, Sj'dney, and he under-
Stood and spoke the English language well. He was much attached to us,
and faithful to a chivalrous extreme. We never were under apprehensions
of liostile attacks when M'Gill and his tribe encamj>ed nigh our dwelling.
A murderous black, named 'Bumble-foot,' from his infirmitj', and ' Devil-
devil,' from his propensities, had attempted to murder a European by
chopping off the man's head with a tomahawk, and had nearly effected this;
but the man recovered, and I had to appear at a Court of Justice as a
witness ; this dis^jleased ' Bumble-foot, ' and he avowed openly, in the
usual manner, that he would slay me in the bush at the first opportunity ;
this came to the ears of M'Gill, who immediately applied to me for the loan
of a fowling-piece 'to go and shoot that fellow for his +hi'eat'; this was,
of course, refused. M'Gill was once present with me at the Criminal
Court, Sydney, assisting as interpreter, when he was closely examined by
Judges Burton and Willis, in open Court, on the trial of an aboriginal
for murder, 1834, in order that M'Gill might be sworn as interpreter in the
case ; but, though his answers were satisfactory to the general questions
proposed to hina by the Judges, yet, not understanding the nature of our
oath in a Court of Justice, he could not be sworn. Patty, his wife, was
pleasing in her person, "black but comely, " kind and affectionate in her
disposition, and evidenced as strong a faculty of shrewdness in the exercise
of her intellectual powers over M'Gill as many of the fairer daughters of
Eve, who, without appearing to trespass on the high prerogative of their
acknowledged lords, manage their husbands according to their own
sovereign will ; this might perhaps have arisen from the circumstance that
M'Gill, once, when intoxicated, had shot at his wife, although he deeply
deplored this when he became sober ; the injury sustained was not much, but
ever afterwards he treated her with much affection, which appeared to be
reciprocal. It was a romantic scene to behold the haiapy pair, together

B I R A B A N

(McGI LL).

OF McGlLl. WAS TAKEN IN PeNCIL BY Mr. AgaTE OF

U. S. Exploring Expedition in 1839.

REPRODUCED BY HEUOTYPE.

TUE KEY. 89

with many others, on ti moonlight night, under the hhie canopy of heaven,
preparing for the midnight ball to be held on the green sward, with no
other covert than a growing bush, with none other blaze than that from the
numerous fires kindle<l around the mystic ring in which to trip the light
fantastic toe. Then they might be seen reciprocally rouging each other's
cheek with pigment of their o^^^l preparing, and imparting fairness to their
sable skin on the neck and forehead with the purest pipeclay, until their
countenances beamed with rapturous delight at each other's charms. The
cumbrous garments of the daj- were laid aside, and in all the majesty of
nature they danced as Britons did in days of old.

Orf points of aboriginal honor M'Gill was exceedingly sensitive. "I
must go," said he one da^^, " to stand my punishment as a man of honor,
though I have done no wrong." The hostile message had been duly sent,
and faithfully delivered bj- the seconds ; one of these was an elderly female,
who made her verbal communication with all the accustomed vituperation
of daring challenge to the offended party ; it was duly accepted ; the
weapons named, the cudgel, shield, and spear ; the time was appointed,
a certain day when the sun was one quarter high ; the place, a plain in
a certain well-kno-mi vicinity attached to our dwelling. Messengers were
despatched to gather in the distant tribes, and on the mountain-tops were
seen the signal-fires announcing their approach to witness the affair of
honor. When the tribes had assembled, a mutual explanation ensued
betwixt the parties, and the evening dance and supper of game peacefully
tei-minated the business of the day. The course usually pursued when
matters take a hostile form is this : the offending party is the first to stoop
and offer his head for his antagonist to strike with his weapon ; and, if not
disabled or killed by the blow, he rises from his bending posture, shaking
the streaming blood from his bushy hair, and then his opponent fairly and
honorably bends forward his head, and presents it in return to receive his
blow ; and so this reciprocally continues until the assembled parties and the
combatants themselves are satisfied. But should either strike dishonorably
on the temple, thus showing an intention to kill, or in anj' other way than
on the fairly offered cranium of his antagonist, a shower of well-directed
spears would instantly be sent against the cowardly assailant, who should
dare to be guilty of such a breach of the laws of honor. M'Gill informed
me that formerly it was a custom amongst certain of the northern tribes
that, when the first blow actually killed the person, the spectators would
roast and eat the body of hun who so noblj^ fell in the cause of honor, if he
were a young man in good condition of body ; as a matter of taste, M'Gill
expressed himself dissatisfied mth the custom, and stated that he thought
it had fallen into desuetude, as it tended to no good purpose but to check
the spirit of duelling.

Picturesque or alarming as in many instances these scenes were, all have
for ever passed away, and the once numerous actors, who used to cause the
woods to echo with their din, now lie mingled with the dust, save some few
solitary beings who here and there still stalk abroad, soon, like their
ancestors, to become as " a tale that is told."

90 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

THE KEY:

BEING

An Analysis of the Particles used as Affixes.

At tlic time when my " Australian Grammar " was published in
Sydney, in the year 1834, circumstances did not allow me a
sufficient opportunity to test the accuracy of the supposition
that every soutid forms a root, and, consequently, that every
character which represents those sounds becomes, likewise, a
visible root, so that every letter of the alphabet of the language is
in reality a root, conveying an abstract idea of certain prominent
powers which are essential to it.*

My present object is, therefore, to demonstrate the correctness
of this supjDOsition by explanation and illustration, and to place
on record, along with the first attempt to form the aboriginal
tongue into a written language, my last remarks on the speech
of tribes, which, in this portion of Australia, will soon become
extinct ! Death has triumphed over these aborigines ; for no
rising generation remains to succeed them in their place, save
that generation of whom it is written, " Grod shall enlarge
Japheth, and he shall dwell in the tents of Shem."

In attempting to show the natural structure and peculiarities
of the language, I hope that the philologist may here find some
assistance in his researches, as well as any others who may be
endeavouring to acquire a knowledge of barbarous languages,
in which there are difiiculties unsuspected, because they are not
commonly found in the languages of Europe.

I cannot too strongly recommend to those who are en-
deavouring to attain a knowledge of the language of savage
nations, the necessity of dismissing from the mind the trammels
of European schools, and simply to follow out the natural rules
of languages which have not been sophisticated by art. The
almost sovereign contempt with which the aboriginal language
of New South Wales has been treated in this colony, and the
indifference shown toward the attempts to gain information on
the subject, are not highly indicative of the love of science in
this part of the globe; for this it is difficult to account, except
on the ground of that universal engagement in so many various
employments incidental to a new colony, w^here every individual
must be dependent on his own exertions for the necessaries and
the comforts of life.

* I hope that, in reprinting " The Key," I shall not be held as supporting
this theory. — Ed.

THE KEY. 91

In tracing analogies with this aboriginal language, I find that
the Indians of North America have a ' transitive conjugation,'
which expresses the conjoined idea both of the persons acting
and acted upon ; ' the form has excited much astonishment and
attracted the attention of the learned in different parts of the
Avorld.' The aborigines of this colony have a similar form of
expression, as is explained fully in my " Australian Grrammar" ;*
this I have denominated therein ' active-transitive-reciprocal ';
with the dual and the plural number, it constitutes ' the reciprocal
modification'; as, bun-kil-lau bali, 'thou and I strike one
another' reciprocally, or 'we-two fight'; which phrase would be
thus analysed : — bun, the root, ' to strike '; -k i 1, the sign of the
infinitive, ' to be, to exist '; -Ian denotes the present time and
that the action is reciprocal ; bali is the dual pi'onoun ' we-two.'
' I fight with him' would be expressed by biin-kil-lan bali-
noa, in which the noa means 'he '; v. page 17 ; but to say 'he
and I fight another' would be bun -tan bali-noa.

The Cherokees use no distinct word for the articles a and tlie ;
but, when required, they use a word equivalent to the numeral
one^ and the demonstrative pronouns tliis and tliai, agreeably to
the original use and nature of the words which we call articles ;
so likewise the aborigines of this colony ; they too use wakal for
o, and for tlie the pronoun demonstrative both of thing and of
place; as, unni, 'thishere'; unnug. 'thatthere.' The Delaware
dialect, according to Mr. Du Ponceau's notes in Elliot's Grammar,
possesses an article wo or m', which is used for a and ilie, but
not frequently, because these words are sufiiciently understood
without it. The Tahitians possess a definite article te, used for
our tlie\ but they express a by tehoe, 'one.' The American
Indians have, in common with the Tahitians, an extra plural denot-
ing we, including the party addressed. But this peculiarity the
aborigines of New South Wales have not in their language,
though they have, in common with the American Indians and
the Tahitians, a dual of that kind ; beside which, they have an
extra dual denoting the object and the agent conjoined.

Tlie Use of the Personal JPronouns.

The following are examples of the way in which these pronouns
are used in our aboriginal dialect: —

MTa?nples : — 1. Pital balinoa kakillan, 'we-two love one
another '; lit., 'he and I are joyful (?.f .,live peaceably) with one an-
other.' 2.Biinnun binug, ' thou wilt beat him'; bunuun bino-
un, 'thou wilt beat her'; bunnun banug, 'I shall beat thee.'

* See pages 23 and 32 of this volume. — Ed.

92 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Analysis. — 1. Pilal* is 'joy, peace, delight'; ball is the dual

pronoun, ' we two'; kakillan, which is the verb 'to be' in state

of continuation, consists of three parts — ka, the root of the verb

. ' to be, to exist'; -ki, the sign of the infinitive, -Ian, the sign of

continuation at the present time.

The negative form of this example would be keawaran bal*
pital korien, 'we do not love one another,' or ' we do not agree
the one with the other.' Here keawaran is the denial in the
present tense, from keawai, the negative infinitive; the impera-
tive negative is kora; as, pital ban kora, ' do not be peace-
able', where ban is the present tense of the verb 'to be doing' ;
the last word, korien, in the aboriginal sentence, is the negative
adverb ' not' ; thus, in this sentence there are hco negatives, both
of which are essential to express the negation.

2. The aboriginal phrase biinnunbanug, 'I shall smite thee,'
shows at once the similarity of construction of this Australian
language with that of the Indians of America; for, though I
may write it separately, as bunnun banug, because I know the
words to be the verb and the conjoined dual pronoun, yet it is
pronounced as one word, and would be so considered by a
stranger. If 'determination' is to be expressed, the particle wal
must be inserted; as, bunnun wal banug, ' 1 shall and will
smite thee'; this would be thus analysed : — biin, the root of the
verb 'to smite'; -nun, the particle denoting futurity; wal denotes
determination ; ba, is part of the verbal pronoun bag, 'I', while
the i^ersonal pronoun is gatoa, 'I'; bi is the verbal pronoun
' thou'; -nug is the pronoun ' him' in the objective case; and the
termination -noun in the next example is part of bounnoun,
the feminine pronoun 'her,' in the objective case. Thus, our
blacks carry out the dual beyond any known language in the
world, whether ancient or modern ; and they also complete their
dual by carrying it out to the feminine in the conjoined dual
case, which the American Indians do not in the " second personal
form."

Nug is pronounced ni'ig when applied to a j^erson, but nug
when applied to a thing. So likewise, bun, 'to smite,' is accented,
and is pronounced like the English word boon, 'a gift'; but biin,
'to permit to be,' is unaccented, and rhymes with the English
word bun, ' a little cake.'

Our blacks say waita bali for ' I go with thee,' or 'we two
go now together'; but waita bag would mean ' I go by myself ';
waita bali no a, 'he and I go together'; waita bali bountoa,
'she and I go together'; to say ' I go,' emphatically, meaning no
other but myself, would be gatoa waita u\v aniin; which would
be construed thus: — gatoa is the personal pronoun 'I' ; waita

* Pital in this language is the nearest word to express love.

THE KEY. 93

is 'to go or depart'; uwanun is the future teuse of the verb of
motion, 'to come' or 'to go,' accordiug as the word waita, 'to go,'
or tanan, 'to come,' is attached to it. The Tahitians have a
similarity of form in the expression haere, 'to come ' or 'to go,'
according as the particle mai or atu is attached; thus, haere
mai, 'come,' haere atu, 'go.'

Mr. Elliot, inhis Grammar, shows that the Massachusetts dialect
has numerous conjugations of its verbs ; and Mr. Eeisberger has
divided the Delaware language into eight conjugations of verbs.
In my Grammar, also, 1 have traced out eight modifications of
the Australian verb as spoken at Lake Macquarie ; and its tenses
are not confined simply to the past, present, and future, but have
various modifications of each time; for instance, they have a
present with the termination -a n f or the verb, and -1 i n for the par-
ticiple; as, wiy-anbag, 'I speak' now; wiyel-lin, 'speaking'
now; a definite past tense has the particle -keiin; as, wiya-keun,
'have spoken' this morning; wiy -ell i-keiin, 'have been speak-
ing ' this morning ; and an indefinite past is wiy a, 'told or spoke',
and wiyelli-ela, 'spake,' both terminatingin a. There are three
varieties of the future ; as, w i y e 1 1 i k o 1 a g, 'to be about to speak ';
where wiyelli is the bare form of the infinitive wiyelliko,
' to speak,' and kolag is 'towards '; then there is also a definite
future ; as, viya-kin, 'shall or will speak' to-morrow morning ;
and besides, an indefinite future, wiy a nii n, ' shall or will speak '
some time or other. These peculiar tenses are not noticed in the
Indian Grammars, and, therefore, it is presumed that they are
pecixliar to the languages of the aborigines of this land.

The South Sea Islanders make no change in the endings of the
verb; neither do the aborigines of Australia; for each tense-form
of the verb may be made available to any person, according to the
pronoun substituted. The change of person is seen only in the
English translation, and not in the Australian word ; thus, from
wiyelliko, 'to speak,' ' to communicate by speech or sound' —
applied to the speech of man, the crowing of a cock, or the
striking of a clock — come wiyan bag, 'I speak'; wiyan bi, ' thou
speakest'; wiyannoa, 'he speaks'; wiyan bountoa, 'she
speaks'; wiyan gali, ' this speaks'; wiyan ge en, 'we speak';
wiyan banug, ' I speak to thee'; wiyan bali bulun, 'we two
speak to you two '; wiyellin bag, 'I am speaking '; wiyellin
banug, 'I am speaking to thee'; wiyellan bag, 'I speak
and continue to speak,' 'I tell'; wiyellan banug, 'I tell
thee'; wiyellan bali, ' we two tell one another,' 'we converse';
wiyellilin bag, 'I am speaking and continue to speak,' 'I
am talkmor'; -wiyan gali-ko clock-ko, 'the clock strikes.'
Muk-ka-ka tibbin-to wiyan, 'the cockcrows'; here muk-
kaka is the nearest sound to express the cackling of fowls;
literally the sentence is, 'the bird says mukkaka.'

91' AK AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

The affixes used in the language of the aborigines of this
colony show the nature of the verb, whether causative, declarative,
or active; whether personal, instrumental, self-active, or loco-
niotive ; and whether negative, aflirmative, privative, apparent,
or actual. It is only by a strict attention to the root-meaning
of the affixes, that they can be properly applied to express the
modiiied uses of the principal word to which they are joined,
whether that principal be a verb, a proper name of a person or
place, or a common substantive.

Illustrative Sentences,^

to show the force of the variations of the conso-
nants in the suffix-forms of the verb.

Suffixes.

1. -'\).\lJi-'ko ; m., for the purpose of — the root-meaning
of the verb.

Examples: — 1. Gratun tunbilliela- noa barun talokan,
and he divided unto them the property.' 2. Tiigun-billia
nura, 'show yourselves.' 3. Kapirro wirri ban-billin, 'I
am perishing with hunger.'

Analysis : — 1. Gratun, ' and'; tun, tlie root of the verb ' to ap-
portion, divide, separate, count'; -billiela, the past participle
of billiko ; noa, 'he,' the verbal-nominative form of the pro-
noun; barun, 'them'; talokan, ' property, goods.'

2. Tiigun, as a verb, 'to show'; as anoun, 'a mark for a sign,'
'a chop on a tree to show the road.' .

3. Kapirri, 'hunger'; the a makes the word an instrumental
case; wirri is the root of the verb wirrilliko, 'for motion to
act,' as an instrument ; ban, 'doing, acting'; -billin is the form
of the present participle of that verb.

2. ~\i-\\lli-Jco ; m., to he doing effectively ichat the verb
imjjlies.

Ex.: — Minnug ballin bi? ' what object art thou effecting ?
what are you doing ? what are you about' ? Tetti ballin bag,
' I am dying.'

* I liave here omitted twelve pajes of " The Key "; in them our author
sets forth his theory that the vowels and consonants of the sufBx-forms of
verbs and pronouns have each of them a determinate and essential meaning ;
a portion of this theory appear* in tlie headings of the twenty sections of
" Illustrative Sentences" which now follow. These Illustrative Sentences I
print for the sake of the examples of analysis which they contain ; and yet
I do not think that that analysis is in every instance correct. — Ed.

THE KEY. 95

-^.ulll-ho ; m., fo be doing ivhat the verh implies,
loithout the idea of effect.

Ex.: — IJp-ullin bag yirrigko wijelliko, 'I am writing';
lit., ' I am using the quill for-to * communicate, speak, say.'

Anal.: — Tirrig, 'a quill'; yirrigko, 'the quill as an agent' ;
um-ullin bag yirrigko pen kakilliko, 'I am making a pen';
lit., ' I am causing the quill to become a pen.'

3. -^-illi-ko ; m., to become, to come to he in some state.

Ex.: — 1. Tetti kakulla noa, wonto ba yakita moron
noa katea kan, ' he was dead, whereas now he is alive again.'

2. AYunal unni kakillin, ' this is summer season,' or ' this is-
becoming (now) warm.'

Anal.: — 1. Tetti, 'dead, or death'; kakulla, 'was' in that
state; noa, the inseparable A'erbal pronoun 'he'; wontoba,
'whereas it is'; yakita, 'at this time'; moron, 'alive';
katea-kan, 'one who exists again'; tetti kaba noa, 'he is
actually dead'; lit., ' he (died and so he) is in a state of death.'

2. Wunal means 'warm'; the aborigines have no word for time
in the abstract; unni, 'this'; kakillin, ' a state of being,' the
present participle form of the verb kakilliko, q^.v. Wunal
unni kakullin, 'the summer is now coming '; lit., 'the warmth
is of its own power becoming to be in the present state'; a re-
duplicate form of the participle kakullin, 'becoming,' is kakul-
lilin, 'becoming and continuing to become'; cf. next paragraph
for the difference in meaning between kakillan and kakullin.

4. -\-u.lU-7co ; m., to hrinrj into heincj any act done by
one's own poiver.

Ex.: — 1. Boug-kulleiin yuna bo ta Piriwal to, gatun
pai-kulleun Thimon-kin, 'the Lord hath risen indeed, and
hath appeared unto Simon.' Each of these acts is of the Lord's
own power. 2, Punnal ba pol o g-kulli-gel, is 'the west'.

3. Por-kuUitoara means 'that which is born '; lit., 'that which
has droj)ped itself of its own power,' ' that which has fallen of
itself.' 4. Poai-kulleiin ba, ' as soon as it sprung up.' 5. Pai-
kul-linun bara ba, ' when they will shoot forth.'

Anal. : — 2. Punnal, 'the sun'; ba, 'is being', a verbal particle ;
polog, 'to sink'; -kulli, ' of his own power '; -gel, 'the place
of the action.' This phrase then means ' the place of the sun's
sinking of his own power.'

4. Poai, 'to shoot up, to grow up, to spring up as grass';
-kulleun, ' has... of its own power '; ba, equivalent to 'when.*

5. Pai, 'appear'; -kullinun, 'will of theirown power'; bara,
'they'; ba, equivalent to ' when.'

• Occasionally I still allow this phrase to stand. — See note, page 24. — Ed.

96 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

5. -1-i^p ; va.jfor the pin-pose of initiating the action of

the verb.

JSx : — Tetti kolag bog, 'I am about to die '; waita kolag
bag, ' I am about to depart'; piriAval kolag noa, 'lie is
about to be king'; worowai kolag bara, ' they are about to
fight'; tanan bag wiyelliko, ' I come to speak,' 'lam come
for the purpose of speaking'; tanan bag wiya-uwil koa
banug, 'I am come in order to speak to thee,' ' I am come that
Imay speak to thee'; wiya-uwil koa banug, 'I wish to speak
to thee '; gurrulli ta, 'it is the act of hearing'; gurrulliko,
* for the purpose of the act of hearing'; ' to hear, to hearken.'

6. -YCL-iUi-ko ; m., for the purpose of the initiation of

the act of causation.
Ex. : — K a i. u m i 1 1 i a t i a, ' come and help me '; lit.., ' come
exercise causative power on me '; umillia bi tia, 'help thou
me, assist me'; i.e., ' cause the exercise of power to me.'

7. -TXi-vdli-ko ; ra., for causation and effective power.

Ex.: — Tarig ka-mul.liko, 'to mix'; lit., ' for-to cause to be
across and across'; gurra-mulla bon, 'cause him to hear
or know'; ka-muUala noa yan t in-birug umulli-birug,
'he rested from all the work'; lit., 'he caused himself to be
from all, from the act of causation and effective power.'

Uma noa yantin tara, 'he made all things'; uman bag
unni, ' I make this'; nu-mulliko, ' to make a personal effort,
to try, to attempt'; pirral-mulla bon, 'urge him, constrain
him'; lit., ' be hard at him'; pirral umulla bon, 'make him
hard, cause him to be hard'; pirriral-mullin bon, 'strengthen-
ing him'; na-munbilliko tia umulla, ' cause me to be per-
mitted to see'; kamimbilla bin nakilliko, 'let it be per-
mitted to cause thee to see'; equivalent to, ' receive thy sight.'

8. -n; in., present time.
Ex. — Unni, 'this' present; unnoa, 'that' present; untoa,
*that other' present; unnug, 'that,' as an object, present there;
unti, 'this present place ' here; unta, 'tliat place' spoken of;
pital kauun bi, 'thou wilt be joyful'; pital banuu bi,
' thou wilt rejoice.'

9. -rr-ulli-Tco ; m.,fdr one to act loith effective power.
Ex. — Bug-bug-gulla, 'kiss,' that is, ' effect a kiss'; bug-
bug-kamunbilla bon, 'let him kiss'; bug-bug gatoa,' it
is I who kiss'; bug-bug-gan bng, 'I kiss'; bu g-bug-gat oara,
'that which is kissed'; tetti bug-gulliko, 'to effect death by
personal power'; 'to kill'; tetti bug-ga bon, 'he is killed'; lit.,
'some person hath killed him'; tetti bug-ga bon bag, 'Ihave
killed him.'

THE KEY. 97

10. .-n-ini-Tco ; m., to act, excludinrj tlie idea of causation.

Ex. — Up-illiko, ' to exercise personal power,' withoutcausa-
tion ; up-ai-ga, ' to exercise personal power,' without comple-
tion ; pai-pilliko, 'to seem,' 'to appear'; pai-pilliko marai-
to, ' for the spirit to appear'; pai-pea noa Eliath, ' Elias
he appeared'; pai-pea bon a gel o, ' an angel appeared to him.'

11. -p-uZ7/-^o ; m., to exercise poiver, hut excluding the

idea of effect.

Ex. — 1. Up-ulliko, 'to exercise personal power,' exclusive
oP effect; upan bag unni, 'I do this'; upan bag gali-ko, 'I
use this' ; upullin bag gali-ko broom-ko, '1 am sweeping
with the broom'; lit.., '1 am exercising personal power with the
broom,' exclusive of effect ; in gali-ko broom-ko upullin
murrarag, 'the broom is sweeping well,' the broom is the
instrumental agent; upullin bag gatoa-bo kipai-to, 'I
am anointing myself with ointment'; lit.,'l am doing myself
with gi'ease,' or 'lam greasing myself.' 2. TJpuUa binoun
kopurrd kouein kakilliko, ' paint her with red to be pretty.'
8. Konein ta upatoara bountoa, 'she is prettily done'; lit.,
'she is pretty that which isdone.' 4. Kabo-kabo galitinupa-
toarin kopurrin, ' stay, stay, on account of the painting red.'

Anal. : — 2. TJpulla, the imperative, ' do ' ; binoun, the con-
joined dual pronoun, 'thou-her'; kopurrd, 'red,' Tvith the
instrumental sign o affixed; konein, 'pretty'; kakilliko, the
verb ' to be,' ' for the purpose of being.' The sentence then
means, ' do thou her with red, that she may be pretty.'

3. Konein t a, 'it is pretty'; upatoara is a compound of the
verb, and means ' that which is done ' ;. bouutoa, the emphatic
personal pronoun, 'she it is who,' 'she who' is emphatically so.

4. Kabo-kabo, equivalent to 'stay'; gali-tiu and the two
words following it are all ia the ablative case and mean, ' on ac-
count of this, on account of the doing, on account of the red.'

12. -r J m., negation.

Ex. — Murrarag ta unni, ' this is good '; keawai, murra-
rag korien, 'no, it is not good'; kipai ta unni, 'this is
actually fat'; tararan, ' it is not'; this is used as the negation
of a thing, but not of a quality. Keawaran bag murrarag
korien, 'I am not comfortable.'

Anal.: — Keawaran, the present tense of the verb 'to be,' in
the state of negation ; bag, the verbal pronoun 'I '; murrarag
'good'; korien, the aorist of negation of the verb 'to be
not.' The sentence thus means, ' I am not in a state of being
good.' The two negatives here are essential and govern one
another; they do not destroy each other, as in English;
this arises from the very nature of the language, which can ex-
press actuality, negation of actuality, and negation absolutely;

98 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAOE.

hence the variety o£ the forms of verbs ' to be ' ; for instance,
natiin bag means 'I see'; na korien bag, 'I see not';
nakulla bag, 'I saw'; na pa korien bag, '1 saw not.' This*
last cannot be written n a k u 1 1 a k o r i e n bag, 'I saw not,'
because the -k u 1 1 a would afRrm that the agent actually of his
own power did whatsoever the root affirms ; and the root-form n a
implies that the thing is actually seen, while the -k ull a added
makes the meaning to be that it presents itself before you, and
you must see it, unless you are blind or do not exercise the
faculty of sight ; hence the privative affix, p a, must be used
instead, to show that, although the object spoken of was there,
I could not see it, because it was not presented to my sight.

Ex. — Tanoa, na-mai-ga yikora. This is a peculiar but
common phi'aseology throughout all verbs, and is hardly translate-
able into English; the nearest phrase would be ' do not be seeing
and yet perceive not,' or ' do not in your manner be looking with-
out causing yourself to exercise your faculty of sight.' In this
there is an affirmation of the abstract action performed by the
agent, but a suspension of effect ; the whole is something similar
to the phrase ' you look but you will not see', that is, 'you are
determined not to see.' But, on the other hand, yanoa, naki
yikora means 'do not look'; yanoa, nakilli-ban yikora,
' do not thou be looking'; and yari bi nanun, 'thou must not
look'; -niin is the sign of the future tense, for prohibition re-
quires the future.

G-an ke unnoa kuri? 'who is that man'? to this, gannug?
is the answer, if you do not know the person; lit., 'whom'? a
question in reply. To express 'I do not know,' would be gurra
korien bag; but this would really mean 'I do not know what
is said,' or ' I do not perceive by the ear what is spoken.' To
know personally anyone is gimilli; thus, gimilli bon bag,
'I know him personally'; keawaran bag nurun gimilli
korien, 'I personally know you not.' To deny that you have
the knowledge of a person whom you really do know is expressed
by the peculiar form gan? 'who'? thus gan-bulliko means
'to be who-ing' interrogatively, that is, asking who the person
is when he is already known, with the intention of denying a
knowledge of the person. Wonto ba niuwoa gan-bullinun
tia emmoug mikan-ta kuri-ka, gan-bullinun wal bon
mikan-ta agelo-ka Eloi-koba-ka ; 'whereas he who will
be 'who-ing' of me in the presence of men, certainly I will be
'who-ing' of him in the ])resence of angels belonging to Eloi,'
i.e.., God ; this is an aboriginal translation of the words " But he
that denieth me before men, shall be denied before the angels
of God." Emmoug means 'concerning me,' whilst tia means
'me,' the object; the passive form of the English verb is always
expressed by the active form of the Australian.

THE KET. 99

13. -Y-ilU-^o; m.., for instrmnentallty to he in some act.

^x. — Gratun welkorinun wal bara bon, gatun tetti wal
bon wirrinun, 'and they shall scourge bim and put him to
death.'

Anal. — Gratun, 'and'; welkorinun, 'will instrumentally wale'
him. The wel is from the English, word wale, 'a mark in the
flesh'; -ko is the usual affix of agency ; -ri-nun is the future tense
of instrumental action ; wal is the certainty thereof ; bara,
'they'; bon, 'him'; tetti, 'death'; wirrinun, the future tense
of instrumental violence; cf. wirrin wibbi-ko, the ' Avind
moves/ sc, it.

1-i. -x-vdli-Tco ; m.,for instrumentality to act of itself.

Ex. — 1. Turullin tia topig-ko, ' the mosquito is stinging,
piercing me'; tura bon warai-to, 'the spear speared, pierced,
him'; turanun banug lancet-o, 'I will pierce thee with the
lancet'; turanun, 'will pierce'; banug, conjoined dual case,
'I-thee'; lancet-o, the English word 'lancet' with o the
affix of agency. 2. Niuwoa ba gurreug-kan gurrulliko,
gurrabunbilla bon, 'he who hath ears to hear, let him hear.'
Here the ear is the instrument that perceives of its own power.

Anal. — 2. Niuwoa, the emphatic personal pronoun, 'he' ; ba,
a particle; gurreug, 'the ear'; -kan, a personal particle;
gurreugkan therefore means 'a person who is eared, who has
ears' ; gurrabunbilla, the imperative, 'permit to hear' ; bon,
'him'; gurrulliko, ' to hear'.

15. -\,-\lli-lco ; va..,for the thing to act, as a verlal noun. -

Ex. — Poai-buntiniin koiwon to, 'the rain will cause it to
grow'.

Anal. — Poai, the bare form of the verb 'to grow'; biin, is the
active permissive form of the verb ' to suffer or permit the act,'
*to let actively'; -tiniin, the future-tense form of the verb;
koiwon, 'rain'; -to, an affix, to show that the word to which it
is affixed is the agent that purposes to act. In the sentence
koiwon -to ba tin, 'it rains,' the ba is the aorist of the verb
'to be doing' some act ; tin, is the present tense of tilliko, and
when used as a preposition means ' from, on account of it'; e.g.,
tetti-tin, 'on account of death'; gali-tin, ' on account of
this'; but ' from, i.e., out of,' isbirug; as, Thydney-birug,
'from Sydney' ; London-birug, ' from London'.

1(3. -\,~elli-ko ; m., to indicate itself, as a verbal noun.

Ex.: — 1. Tantin bara piriwal buntelliko, 'for all who
exalt themselves.' 2. Moron ta katea-kanun tetti kabirug,
' the resurrection from the dead.'

Anal.: — 1. Tantin, 'all'; bara, 'they'; piriwal, 'chief; bun,
'topermit' actively; telliko, 'for it to be' as indicated. Moron,

100 Al^ AUSTRALIAN' LANGUAOE.

'life'; ta, 'it is'; ka, 'is'; -tea, the past tense of telliko, 'it
actually was' as indicated ; ka-nun, 'will be' in the state men-
tioned; tetti, 'death'; ka, 'is'; birug, 'from, out of.' The
sentence thus meaus 'the future becoming alive again from the
dead'; cf. yanoa, tetti katea kiin, 'let be, lest it become
dead'; yanoa, tetti burrea k u n, 'let be, lest it die.' Yanoa
is prohibitory of the manner of being.

17. -w-i^^i-^'o; m., to he in motion to; to tend towards ;

to incline toicards.

Ex. : — Uwil koa bag, 'I wish to move, I tend towards, I in-
cline towards' ; ta-uwil koa bag, 'I wish to eat'; t a is from
t a-killiko, 'for- to eat'; wait a wa-uwil koa bag, 'I now wish
to depart'; 'I intend to depart'; tanan bi wolla waita, koa
bag u wa-uwil, 'I wish to go'; lit., 'approach thou or come, in
order that I may depart '; wiya-uwil koa bon bag, 'I wish to
tell him'; wiya is from wiyelliko, 'to speak, to utter a
sound,' &c.

18. -T^iY-rUb'-ko ; m., to act with instrumental motion;

as, to knock with anything ; to xohip or flog with any-
thincj ; to smite ivith the flst ; to stir with a stick ;
to do any act of motion hy any instrumental means.

Ex. : — W irrilleun bara w a par a, ' they smote their
breasts'; wirrillianun wirrillikanne-to, 'will sweep with
the sweeper', ' will swab with a swab'; Z«Y., 'will knock away with
that which knocks away'; because, when the blacks sweep, they
knock the ground with boughs, and so remove the rubbish.

19. -w-oUi-ko ; m., to act and move of purpose.

Ex. : — Uwolliko, 'to come, to go, to move away'; lit., 'to be
in a state of motion and action,' with power of purpose to effect
change of place; waita wa-niin bag England kolag, ' I will
depart and will go to England'; tanan noa uwollin Eng-
land kabirug, 'he approaches coming from England'; 'he is
coming from England'; uwea kaniin bag, 'I will come again'
(tanan, understood); uwea kaniin bag, 'I will go again'
(waita, understood); yanoa, uwa y ikora, ' do not go'; uwolli
ban kora, ' do not be moving away,' sc, hither or tliither.

20. -y-Qlli-ko; m., to he in a certain manner of action.

Ex. : — 1. Grakoiyelliko, 'to act in a certain manner of per-
sonification'; 'to feign to be another person'; gakoiyellikan,
'one who feigns to be another'; 'a spy, a deceiver'; wonta
noa ba gurra gakoiya barunba, 'but he perceived their
craftiness'; lit., ' whereas he knew their deception,' their feigning
to be just men ; yanti bi wiyella, 'thou shalt say thus', in

THE KEY. 101

this manner; yanti bag wiya, 'I said so'; yakoai bin
"wiyan, 'how, i.e., in what manner, is it told to thee'? giakai
bag wiya bon yanti, 'this is that which I actually told him';
lit., 'thus I told him thus'; mupai kaiyelliko, ' to be silent';
lit., 'for-to be in manner dumb'; ' to be really dumb ' would be
mupai-kan, ' one who is dumb.'

Ex.: — 2. Kaiyelleun clock-ko wiyelli-birug, 'theclock
has ceased to strike'; lit., 'the clock has' been and continues in the
state and manner of being now ' ceased' from a certain manner of
motion, i.e., 'from talking'; wiyelli-kan, 'one who speaks';
wiyai-ye, 'a talker,' one in tlie habit of talking, one whose
manner is to continue to speak; wiyelliko, 'to utter a sound';
'to speak'; wiya-bunbilliko, 'to permit to speak'; wiyai-
yelliko, 'to say on, to reply, to answer'; wiya-yimulliko,
'to make accusation, to accuse'; wiya-pai-yelliko, 'to de-
mand'; wiyella bon, 'speak to him'; wiyellin noa, 'he is
talking'; wiyellan bali, 'we two are conversing'; wiyan bag,
'I speak'; wiyan clock-ko, 'theclock strikes '; wiya, 'say';
this is used to ask a person if he will be or do ; e.g., wiya,
bali wiyellinun? 'say, shall we two converse?

The Formation of Words.

Tarr is a word which the aborigines now use in imitation of
the sound made by a saw in sawing ; with the verbal formative-
affix -bulliko, it becomes yarr-bulliko, ' to be in the act of
causing by its own act the sound of yarr'; or, in English, 'to
saw.' Yag is another introduced word, formed from the
imitation of the sound of the sharpening of a saw.

From these roots come the following derivatives: — Tarr-
buUiko, 'to saw'; yarr-bulli kolag, 'to be. about to saw';
yarr-bulli korien, 'not to saw'; yarr-bulli yikora, 'saw
not'; yarr-bulli ban kora, ' be not sawing'; yarr-bulli-kan,
'one who does sawing'; 'a sawyer'; yarr-bulli-kanne, 'that
which saws'; 'a saw '; yarr-bulli-gel, ' the sawing-place '; 'a
saw-pit'; yarr-ba-toara, ' that which is sawn'; 'a plank'; yarr-
ba-uwa, 'saw' (optative), 'dosaw '; yarr-bulla, 'saw (manda-
tory), 'do saw'; yarr-bulli-bug-gulla, ' compel to saw';
yarr-bulli-bug-gulliko, 'to compel to saw'; this last form
may undergo all the chaiiges given above for yarr-bulliko;
and so of every verb in the infinitive form.

Tag-ko-bulliko, 'tosharpeua saw'; yag-ko-bulli-ta, 'the
sharpening of the saw'; yag-ko-buUi-kan, 'one who shar-
pens the saw'; yag-ko-bulli-kanne, 'that which sharpens
the saw '; ' a file '; and so on.

iTjaiYEESIT

102

AN ATJSTRALIA.X LAXOrAGE.

[The common root- words of the language also give forth verbal
derivatives in a similar way. If we take the verb ' to strike ' as
an example, the formatives and their meanings may be arranged
thus, a verbal suffix always intervening between the root and
the formative : —

Meanivfj.

a continual striker.

the person or thing that is struck.

the person who strikes.

the thing which strikes.

the action, as an agent.

the action, as a subject.

the place where the action is done.

Moot + Sitff. + Formatice.

1- „ „ ye

2. „ „ to-ara

3. „ „ kan

4. „ ,, kan-ne

5. „ „ to

6. ,, ,, ta

7. „ „ gel

EXAIIPLES.

Hoof. — Biin, ' strike. '

1. Bun-ki-ye, ' a fighting man.'

2. Bun-to-ara, ' a wounded man.'

3. Bun-killi-kan, 'a striker.'

4. Bun-killi-kan-ne, 'a cudgel,'

5. Biin-killi-to, ' the stroke.'

6. Bim-killi-ta, 'the striking.'

7. Bun-killi-gel, ' a pugilistic ring.'

Hoot. — Um-a, ' malie.'

1. TJm-ai-ye, ' a tradesman.'

2. Um-ulli-to-ara, ' anything made.'

3. Um-ulli-kan, 'a worker.'

4. Um-ulli-kan-ne, ' a tool.'

5. Um-ulli-to, 'the work.'

6. Um-ulli-ta, ' the working.'

7. Um-ulli-gel, ' a workshop.'

Moot — Up-'i, ' do, use in action.'

1. Up-ai-ye, ' a cobbler, a mason,' &c.

2. Up-ulli-to-ara, ' a piece of work.'

3. Up-ulli-kan, 'a worker.'

4. Up-ulli -kan-ne, 'a spade, an awl.'

5. Up-ulli- to, ' the operation.'

6. Up-ulli-ta, ' the operating.'

7. Up-ulli-gel, ' a operating-room.'

The difference in the use of the fifth and sixth forms may
be illustrated by such sentences in English, as, — The stroke
killed him ; the striking of the iron heats it ; the toork was done,
but the icorkivg of the machine went on ; the operation did no
harm, for the operating was in skilful hands.]

THE KEY. 103

Analysis of the name Birahan.

1. Declension of ' Biraian,^ as a common noun.

The word is formed from bira, the cry of the bird which we
call the 'eagle-hawk.' The -ban po^tfixed denotes the one who
does the action. As applied to M'G-ill, the name may have been
given to him from some circumstance in his infancy, perhaps his
infantile cry.*
Nam. 1. Konein ta biraban ta, 'the hawk is pretty.'

2. Biraban to wiyan, 'the hawk cries,' lit., speaks.
Oen. Tarro unni biraban koba, ' this egs is the hawk's.'
Dat, 1. Unni ta biraban ko takilliko, ' this is for the hawk

to eat.'
2. Waita bag biraban tako, ' I depart to the hawk,'

i.e., to where the hawk is.
Jcc. Tura bon biraban uniiug, 'spear him, the hawk there.'
Vac. Ala or ela biraban! ' 0 hawk '!
Ahl. 1. Minarig tin tetti noa? biraban tin; 'from what

cause is he dead ' ? ' from the hawk,' as a cause.

2. Tul-bulleun noa tibbin biraban ka tabirug,
'he, the bird, hath escaped from the hawk.'

3. Buloara bula biraban toa, 'the two are in company
with the hawk.'

4. Tibbin ta biraban taba, 'the bird is with the hawk.'

5. "Wonnug ke noa katan? biraban kinba, 'where
does he exist '? 'at the hawk's place.'

Minarig unnoa tibbin? 'what is that bird'? tibbin ta
unnoa bukka-kau, ' it is a savage bird that.'

Yakoai unnoa ta yitara wiya? 'how is that such-a-one
spoken'? equivalent to 'what is its name'? giakai unnoa
yitara biraban wiya, 'this way, that such-a-one is spoken
or called biraban.'

Minarig tin yitara biraban wiya? ' from-what-canse is
such-a-one spoken or called biraban'? gali tin wiyelli tin
bira-bira tin, 'from this, from speaking, from bira-bira ';
i.e., because he says 'bira.'

2. Declension of ^ Biraban,'' as a proper name.

Nom. 1. Gan ke bi? gatoa Biraban, ' who art thou'? 'it is I,
Biraban'; yakoai bi yitara wiya? giakai bag
yitara Birp^ban, 'in what manner art thou such-a-
one spoken'? 'thus am I such-a-one, Biraban,' sc, called.

* ' Eagle-hawk ' may have been his totem or family name ; or, as our
blackfellovvs name their children from some trivial incident at the time
of birth, he may have been called Biraban, because an ' eagle-hawk ' waa
seen or heard then. —Ed.

104 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

2. Ganto bon tura ? Biraban toboutui*a, * who did
sjiear him'? ' Birabau speared him.'
Gen. Gau-iimba unni wounai ? Biraban-iimba unni won-

nai, ' whose child is this'? ' Biraban's, this child.'
Dat. 1. Gannug unni? Birabannug, 'for whom this'? {i.e.,
who is to have this?) 'for Biraban' to have personally
or to use.
2. Kurrilla unni Biraban kinko, ' carrythis to Bira-
ban,' locally.
Ace. Gannug tura? Birabannug, 'whom speared '? (mean-
ing, who is speared ?) ' Biraban.'
Voc. Ala Biraban gurrulla! ' O Biraban, hearken.'
Ahl. 1. Gan kai kaokillai bara? Biraban kai, 'concern-
ing whom are they quarrelling '? ' about Biraban.'

2. Wonta birug bi ? Biraban kabiriig, 'whence dost
thou come '? ' from Biraban.'

3. Gan katoa bountoa? Biraban katoa, 'with whom
is she '? ' with Biraban'; that is, in company with him.

4. Gan kinba? Biraban kinba, ' with whom is she'?
' with Biraban '; that is, living with him.

"Wontakal noa Biraban? Mulubinbakal, ' of what place

is he, Biraban '? ' Of Newcastle.'*
Wontakalin bountoa Patty ? Mulubinbakalin, 'of what

place is she, Patty '? ' Of Newcastle.'

Selections from the Scriptures.t

WINTA 1.

1. Tautin kokera wittima tarai to kuri ko ; wonto ba noa yan-
tin wittima, Eloi ta noa. — Heb., iii. 4.

2. Wakal noa Eloi ta.— Gal., iii. 20.

3. Eloita pital noa. — 1 John, iv. 8. Eloi ta marai noa. — John,
iv. 24.

4. Gearunba Eloi ta winullikan koiyugkan. — Heb., xii. 29.

5. Unnug ta noa wakal bo ta Eloi ta. — Mark, xii. 32.

* See page 18 of this volume.

+ As the sufBx-forms of the nouns, vei'bs, and other parts of speech have
been fully shown in the previous part of this volume by the use of hyphens,
I do not think it so necessary now to continue that aid. All postpositions
will now be detached from their nouns and pronouns, and every compound
postposition will be printed as one word. Those sufBx particles which are
used as enclitics, and the inseparable case-endings, will be attached to their
words. The tense-forms of the verbs will be printed as shown on pages 2S
to 41, but without the use of the hyphens. In the Analysis of the selections
which now follow, the hyphens are sometimes retained to show the compo-
sition of the words. — Ed,

SELECTIONS rilOM THE SCRIPTUEEg. 105

6. Keawai wal wakal tarai ta, murrarag ta wal<al bo ta Eloi
ta. — Luke, xviii. 19.

7. Gatun gearunba wakal bo ta Eloi ta, Biyugbai ta, gikoug
kai yantin ta, gatun geen gikoug kinba ; gatun wakal bo ta
Piriwal, letliu Kritlit, gikoug kinbirug yantin ta, gatun geen
gikoug kinbirug. — 1 Cor., viii. (3.

WINTA 2.

8. Eloi ta kaibug noa ; gatun keawai wal gikoug kinba tokoi
korien. — 1 John, i. 5.

9. Tuna bo ta, keawai wal taraito kiiriko na pa korien bon,
Eloinug. — 1 John, iv. 12.

10. Tugunbilleiin noa Eloi puttarakan. — 1 Tim., iii. 16.

11. Niuwara noa Eloi ta katan yantin ta purreag ka yarakai
ko. — Psalm, vii. 11.

12. Kauwalkan noa Eloi ta, warea ta gearunba bulbiil, gatun
gurran noa yantin minnugbo minnugbo. — 1 John, iii. 20.

13. Kaiyukau noa Eloito yantin ko minnugbo minnugbo ko. —
Matt., six. 20.

WINTA 3.

1. Eloi ta Piriwal ta noa. — Psalm, cxviii. 27.

2. lethu Kritbt Piriwal ta noa yantin koba. — Acts, x. 3G.

3. Piriwalto Eloi ta gearunba wakal bo ta Piriwal ta. — Mark,
xii. 29.

4. Grurrulla nura yanti Piriwal ta noa Eloi ta noa ; niuwoa
ta gearun uma, keawai wal geenbo umulli pa ; geen ta gikoumba
kuri, gatun cipu takilligel koba gikoumba. — Psalm, c. 3.

5. Piriwal gintoa ta Eloi ta, gintoa ta moroko uma, gatun
purrai, gatun wombul, gatun yantin gali koba. — Acts, iv. 24.

6. Piriwal ta noa Eloi kauwalkan ta. — Psalm, xcv. 3.

7. Piriwal ta noa murrarag ta. — Psalm, c. 5.

8. Guraki noa Eloi ta Piriwal ta, upin noa umulli tin gearun-
ba tin. — 1 Sam. ii., 3.

WINTA 4.

9. Piriwal ta noa Eloi tuloakan ta, niuwoa ta Eloi moron ka-
killikan ta, gatun Piriwal kauwal yanti ]vatai kakilliko ; pulul-
pulul wal purrai kaniin bukka tin gikoumba tin, gatun yantin
bara konara kaiyu korien wal bara katan niuwarin gikoumba
tin. — Jerem. x. 10.

10. Bapai ta ba noa Piriwal katan barun yantin ko wiyan bon
ba. — Psalm, cxlv. 18.

11. Kalog ka ba noa Piriwal kakillin barun kai yarakai tin.
— Prov., XV. 29.

12. Piriwal ta noa wirrillikan ta emmoumba ; keawai wal bag
mirral kauun. — Psalm, xxiii. 1.

13. G-urrarakan noa Piriwal kauwal katan, gatun gurraramulli
kan noa. — James, v. 11,

106 AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.

WINTA 5.

1. Unmig g )ro ta kakilli wokka kaba mnroko kaba, Biyug-
bai ta, W'ijellikan ta, gatun Marai ta yiriiyirri lag; gatuu uuui
ta goro ta wakal bo ta. — 1 John, v. 7.

2. Biyugliaito yuka bon yinal miromullikan noa kakilliko, yan-
tin purrai ko.— 1 John, iv. 14.

3. Eloito noa pital ma kauv.al yautin kuri, gakulla ta noa
wakal bo ta yinal gikoumba, gali ko yantinto ba gurran gikoug
kin, keawai wal bara tetti kauun, kulla wal yanti katai barunba
kakillinua moron. — John, iii. 1(5.

4. Pulli ta noa Eloito upea barun Itharaelumba, -wiyelliliko pi-
talmuUiko lethu ko Kritht to ; niuwoa bo Piriwal katan yantin
ko. — Acts, X, 36.

5. lethu Kritht yinal noa Biyugbai koba. — 2 John, 3.

6. G-jarunba katan Wiyellikan, lethu Kritht, Biyugbai toaba
katan. — 1 John, ii. 1.

WINTA 6.

7. Eloi ta Marai noa. — John, iv. 24.

8. Piri\Yal ta unnoa ta Marai. — 2 Cor., iii. 17.

9. Maraito yirriyirri lag ko wiyaniin wal nurun. — Luke, xii. 12.

10. Murrin nurunba kokera yirriyirri ta Marai yirriyirri lag
koba. — 1 Cor., vi. 19.

11. Wakaila murrin, gatun wakalla Marai, yanti riurun wiya
wakalla kotulli ta nurunba wiyatoara ; wakalla Piriwal, wakalla
gUrrulli ko, wakalla kurrimulli ko ; wakalla Eloi ta Biyugbai ta
yantin koba ; wokka kaba noa yantin ko, gatun noa yantin koa,
gitun murrug kaba nurun kinba. — Ephes., iv. 4, 5. 6.

12. Yautin barun yemmaman Marai to Eloi koba ko, wonnai ta
bara Eloi koba. — Eom., viii. 14.

13. Niuwara bug-ga kora bon Marai yirriyirri lag Eloi ko-
ba.— Ephes., iv. 30.

14. Ganto ba yarakai wiyamin gikoug yinal kiiri koba, ka-
muabinuu wal bon; wonto noa ba yarakai vviyanun gikoug Marai
yirriyirri lug, keawai wal bon kamuabiuun. — Luke, xii, 10.

WINTA 7.
Luke, ii. 9-14.

9. Gatun noa agelo Tehoa-umba tanan uwa barun kin, gatun
killaburra Tehoa-umba kakulla barun katoa ; kinta gaiya bara
\akulla.

10. Gatun noa ageloko wiya barun, Kinta kora ; kulla nurun
bag wiyan totog murraragkakilhko pital ko, kakilliko yantin ko
kuri ko.

SELECTIONS FEOM THE SCEIPTURES. 107

11. Kulla nurunba porkulleun unni purreag kokera Dabid-
limba ka, Golomullikan ta, noa Kritbt ta Piriwal ta.

12. Gratun unui tuga kanun uuruuba ; iianua nura bobogaug
gimatoara kirrikin taba, kakillin ba takilligel laba.

13. Gratun tanoa-kal-bo paipea konara inorokokal gikoug katoa
agelo katoa, mun^arag wiyellin bon Eloinug, giakai,

14. Wiyabutibilla bon murrarag Eloinug wokka kaba moroko
kaba, gitun kamuubilla pital purrai tako, murrarag umatoara.

WINTA 8.

1. Eloito noa gurrara ma korien barun agelo yarakai umulli-
kan, wonto ba wareka noa barun baran koiyug kako, tartaro ka-
ko. — 2 Peter, ii. 4.

2. Wiyatoara ta yantin kuri ko waka'.la tetti bulliko, gatun yu-
kita gaiya gurrulli ko. — Heb., ix. 27.

3. Takoaikan bag moron kaniia ? Gurrulla bon Piriwalnug le-
thunug Kritlitnug, moron gaiya bi kanun. — Acts, xvi. 30, 3i.

4. Gratun kirrikin ta temple kako, yiir-kulleun bulwa koa wak-
ka kabirug unta ko baran tako. — Mark, xv. 38.

The preceding eight Wintas or ' Portions,' are taken from an
" Australian Spelling^ Book, in the Language spoken by the
Aborigines," published by the author in J 826. In the following
translation, the Section figures are those of the paragraphs in the
"Wintas, and the words, as they become translated and explained,,
are not asain referred to.

Analysis of the foreg^oing^ Wintas.

"WINTA 1.— Paet 1.

Section 1.

"Winta, ' a part, a portion.'

Eloi, 'Grod,' a word taken from Elohim, is introduced into

the language of the aborigines, because Koin, the name of the

being whom they dread, is a word of an equivocal character.*
Yantin, 'all, every,' is singular or plural, according to the

number of the noun or pronoun used with it.
Kokera, 'a covert, shelter, habitation, hut, house, palace,

temple.'
"Wittima, 'built'; hence wittimulliko, 'to build' in anyway;

to prepare a place for habitation by removing obstacles; to put

up a shelter of bushes or bark.

* See page 47. — Ed.

108 AN AL'STKALIAN LANGUAGE.

Tarai, 'some one, auotlier, other', is singular; but tara, 'others,'
is plural.

Taraito is tarai, with the particle of agency postfixed.

Kuri, 'man, men,' according to the singular or plural idea
expressed or understood in the context.

Kuriko is kuri, with the particle of agency postfixed.

Wonto ba, 'whereas,' a compound phrase; from won, 'where'?
the interrogative adverb of place.

Wonto ba-ba, 'is as '; the ba is a particle which verbalizes the
word to which it is affixed.

No a, the inseparable verbal pronoun, 'he'; the separable em-
phatic pronoun 'he' is niuwoa.

Eloita; for Eloi, see above; ta is the substantive verb, 'it
is actually'; this phrase affirms that it is Grod who is the agent.

Section 2.

Wakal, 'one'; buloara, 'two'; goro, 'three'; wara, 'four';
beyond which the aborigines have no word to express higher
numbers. For ' five ' the)^ hold up one hand and say y an tin,
'all,' i.e., all the five fingers; or both hands with a part of the
fingers up to describe the numbers 6, 7, 8, 9 ; for 10 they hold
all the fingers up and say yantin ; or they double both hands
and say kauwal-lcauwal, a 'greatmany,' andrepeat the same
as often as required, to give some idea of the greatness of the
number.

Section 3.

Pital, 'joy, peace, gladness, happiness, love.'

Marai, ' spirit '; not the ' ghost ' of a departed person, which is
mamuya.

Section 4.

Gearun, 'us'; geen, 'we'; gearunba, 'our,' 'belonging to us';
see pronouns.

Winulli, ' to burn,' to consume by fire only, and not in any
other way ; hence winulli ko, 'to consume,' ' to burn.'

Winullikan means ' one who consumes or burns.' The particle
-kan means ' the person who,' and is equivalent to the English
particle -er, affixed to verbs to form the substantive person, as
lovf7% consumer. To express the thing, the particle -ne is
postfixed ; as, wiuullikanne, 'the burning thing wdiich con-
sumes.'

Koiyug, 'fire'; the particle -kan, in the text, is affixed to show
that the 'fire' is to be construed with the preceding word,
by which it is thus connected and governed.

Section 5.
TJnnug, 'there.' Bo ta, 'only,' a compound of bo, 'self,' and
ta, ' it is '; meaning it is ' that selfsame thing only' to Avhich it
is affixed; as, wakol bo ta, 'one only, one by itself, one alone.'

SELECTIONS EEOM THE SCEIPTURES. 109

Section 6.

Keawai is the verb 'to be' in the negative form, with korien,
understood ; it is equivalent to ' there be not,' a universal
denial; wal positively affirms the assertion whether negative
or affirmative; keawai wal wakal, ' there be certainly not
one.'

Murrarag, 'good, well.'

Section 7.

Gatun, 'and.'

Biyug-bai, ' father.' The address to a father or elderly person
is biyug; to a brother or equal, big-gai.

Gikoug, 'him,' the separable emphatic pronoun; the objective
pronoun is bon, 'him.'

Gikoug kai, 'on account of him, for him.'

Geen, 'we,' v. page 17. There is only this one form in the
nominative case plural; gearun, 'us,' is the objective case,
from which all the oblique cases are formed by the addition of
particles; as, gearun-ba, 'ours'; gearun kai, 'on account
of us'; geen-bois'we ourselves.'

Gikoug-kinba, ' with him'; ' remaining with him.'

Piriwal, 'chief, lord, king.'

Birug, 'from, out of; tin, 'from, on account of.'

WINTA 2.— Paet 2.

Section 8.

Kaibug, 'light,' as opposed to darkness.
Tokoi, 'darkness, night,' as opposed to day.

Sectio7i 9.

Na, 'see'; hence na-killiko, 'to see,' 'to perceive by the eye.'
The negative of this is formed by affixing the negative particle,
korien, to the principal verb, divested of the verbal affix
-killiko; as, na-korien, ' see not.'

Bon,' him,' is the verbal pronoun in the objective case ; gikoug
is the emphatic form, ' him,' when governed by particles ; -n u g
is the suffixed particle that denotes the object, as, Eloi-nug.
Eloi is here the object spoken of, and so is in the objective
case along Avith the pronoun, to show that both are under the
same government of the verb na-korien.

Section 10.

Tugun-billeun, 'was manifested, shown'; from tiigun-billi-
ko, 'to show as a mark shows'; 'to manifest of itself or of
oneself.'

Puttilra-kan, ' a flesh-being,' one who is flesh ; from puttara,
'flesh.'

110 AN AUSTHALTAN LANGUAGE.

Section 11.

Niliwara, 'anger'; cf. bukka, ' wrath, rage, fury.'

Katan, 'is,' the present teuse of kakilliko, 'to be' in a state.

Purreag, 'day.'

Tarakai, 'evil, bad'; opposed to murrarag, 'good.'

Tarakai kinko, 'on account of the wicked.'

Section 12.

Kauwal, 'great'; kauwal-kauwal, 'very great.' The com-
parison is drawn always by what the one is and the other is
not; hence, kauwal kan noa, 'he is great'; Eloi ta, 'God
is'; warea ta gearunba bulbul, 'little it is our hearts.'

"Warea, 'little,' in size.

Bulbul, ' heart' of animals and man ; not ' heart ' of oak or the
like.

Crurran, 'knows'; the present tense of gurrulliko, 'to know,
to perceive by the ear, to understand,' but not in any other
sense; to know a person by sight is gi-milliko; to know
a thing by sight, na-killiko ; to know carnally, boi-bulliko;
and to know by the touch, nu-mulliko.

Minnug, as a question, means 'what thing' is the object? The
reduplication, with the jjarticle bo affixed, means ' everything
itself' as an object.

Section 13.

Kaiyu, 'able, powerful, mighty'; kaiyu-kan, 'one who is
able'; noa, 'he'; Eloi ta, ' Grod is ' ; yanti-ko, 'for all';
minnug-bo minnug-bo-ko, 'for every thing.'

WINTA 3.— Part 3.

Section 2.

Yantin koba, ' of all'; koba is the genitive particle used with
things, while -limba is used with person; as, gan-umba?
'whose'? 'belonging to what person'? minarig koba? 'belong-
ing to what thing '? makoro koba, ' belonging to the fish';
emmo-vimba, 'mine', 'belonging to me '; Thr elkeld-umba;
' belonging to Threlkeld.'

Section 4.

Gurrulla, imperative, ' know, hearken, listen.'

Nura, the personal plural nominative pronoun, 'ye '; the objec-
tive case is nurun, 'you'; nurunba, ' belonging to you.'

Tanti, ' thus, in this manner.'

Kiuwoa, the emphatic separable personal pronoun, 'he,' 'it is he';
the inseparable verbal pronoun is noa, 'he '; the inseparable
verbal pronoun in the objective is bon, ' him ', and the separable
oblique case is gikoug, ' him '; gi koug ko means 'for him';
gikoug kai, ' on account of him.'

SELECTIONS FEOM THE SCRIPTUEES. Ill

Grearun, ' us,' the objective case of geen, ' we.'

Uma, 'made,' the aorist of the verb 'to make'; hence umulliko,
'to make, create, do '; 'to cause power, to effect.' In this sentence
the use of the two forms of the pronoun, 'he,' is seen ; niu-
woa ta, 'it is he,' emphatically ; noa, he,' verbally; gearun,
' us '; uma, ' made '; the whole means, ' it is he, he us made.'

Keawai-wal, a universal, absolute denial.

Geen-bo, 'we ourselves.' I

UmuUi-pa, 'made,' excluding reality of effect; this is expressed
by the particle, pa, posthxed, along with the negative kea-
wai-wal.

Griko-umba, ' his,' ' belonging to him.'

Kuri, 'man,' individually or collectively, or 'people,' according
as the pronoun with it is singular, dual, or plural ; gali kuri,
'this man,' as an agent; unni kiiri, 'this man,' as a subject;
bara kiiri, 'they the men,' 'they the people'; buloara kiiri,

, ' the two men.'

Cipu, an adopted word, from the English, 'sheep.'

Takilli, the act of 'eating '; hence takilliko, ' to be in the act
of eating'; 'to eat.'

Grel, the inseparable verbal particle denoting place, 'the placeof ';
takilli gel, 'the pasture, the eating-place, the feeding-place ';
gikoumba, ' belonging to him,' 'his.'

Section 5.

Grin to a, the emphatic separable personal nominative pronoun,

' thou.' ' it is thou who '; ta, ' it is.'
Gintoa ta, ' it is thou who dost, didst, wilt do,' according to

the tense of the verb, which in this case is uma, and that,

being a past aorist, renders it 'didst make,' without reference

to any particular past time.
Moroko, 'heaven,' the visible Heavens, the sky, the space above

our heads.
Purrai, 'the earth, the land, the ground.'
"Wombul. 'the sea.'
Tantin gali koba, 'all belonging to these'; yantin, 'all,*

pluralizes the emphatic demonstrative pronoun gali, 'this';

yantin gali, 'all these'; yantin gala, 'all those.'

Section 8.

Guraki, 'skilful, wise.'

Upin, the present tense of upilliko, 'to exert power,' exclusive
of the idea of effect upon the object ; as, to put a thing any-
where.

Tin, 'from, on account of; 'therefore' as a cause, 'because of;
umulli tin, 'on account of doing'; gearunba tin, 'on ac-
count of our.'

112 AN AUSTRALIAN" LANGUAGE.

WINTA 4.— Part 4.

Section 9.

Tuloa, 'straight,' opposed tocrooked'; 'upright' as to character ;

'truth' as to expression, opposed to falsehood ; tuloa kan ta,

' one who is straight, upright, true.'
Moron, 'life,' opposed to death ; animal, not vegetable, life.
Kakilli-kan ta, 'it is one who remains, who is, who exists';

kakilli from kakilliko, 'to be' in some state.
Kauwal, 'great'; piriwal kauwal, 'lord or king,' Jit., 'great

chief; kauwal-kauwal, 'great-great,' ' very great.'
Tanti katai kakilliko, ' thus to be always,' 'to be for ever.'
Pulul-pulul, 'trembling, shaking.' Kanun, 'willbe.'
Bukka, 'wrath, rage, fury '; bukka tin, 'on account of wrath'-

gikoumbatin, 'on account of his.'
Konara, 'a flock, herd, an assembly, a mob, a nation'; yantin

b ara konara, ' all they, the assemblies or nations.'
Niuwarin, the causative case of niuwara, 'anger'; niuwarin,

'because of anger'; 'from or on account of anger,' as a cause.

Section 10.
Bapai, ' nigh at hand, close to '; bapai ta ba, ' it is nigh to.'

Section 11.

AYiyan, the present tense of wiyelliko, 'to communicate by
sound, to speak, tell, say, call out '; yanti nko wiyanbon ba,
' all w^hen they call on him.' The verbalizing particle, ba, is
equivalent to ' when,' or ' at the time when ' the verbal act or
state shall be or was, according to the tense of the verb.

Kalog, 'afar off, distant.'

Kakillin, ' continues to be,' 'is now being'; the present participle
of the verb kakilliko, ' to be ' in some state.

Barun kai, ' from, on account of them,' sc, persons.

Tarakai tin, 'from, on account of the evil,' sc, thing.

Section 12.

Wirrilli ; hence wirrilliko, ' to wind up as a ball of string.'
The blacks do this to their long fishing-lines, and opossum-fur
cords, to take care of tbem, to preserve them ; hence the verb
means ' to take care of, to preserve, to keep together, to guide,'
as a flock of sheep ; wirrilli- kan, ' one who takes care of by
some act of locomotion, as a watchman going his round.

Mirral, ' desert, desolate, miserable '; ' a state of want '; mirral
taunni, 'this is a desert place'; mirral-lag unni, ' this is
desolate or miserable,' because in a desert there is nothing to
eatordrink; mirral katan, 'is now at present in a miserable
or desolate state, in a state of want '; keawai, 'not to be.'

Keawai wal, 'certainly shall not be '; equivalent therefore to
' shall not' ; mirral kanun, ' shall be in want.'

SELECTIONS FEOM THE SCEIPTUEES. 113

Section 13.

Gurrara-kan, ' one wlio personally attends to'; gurrarakan

kauwal, ' one who is very pitiful.'
Gurrara-mulli-kan, 'one wlio causes or exercises attention,'

' one who does attend to '; the phrase means ' he is a merciful

Being.'

WINTA 5.— Part 5.
Section 1.

Goro, 'three'; see page 108.

Kakilli, 'state of being'; hence kakilliko, ' to be, to exist ' in
some state; we cannot express 'is dead' by tetti katan,
because katan implies existence, though we may say moron
katan, ' is alive,' because existence is implied ; ' is dead ' must
be tetti ka ba, which means 'is in the state of the dead ';
generally the blacks say kulwon, 'stiff, rigid' for 'dead';
thus tetti ka ba kulwon is equivalent to 'dead and stiff,'
in opposition to ' a swoon,' which might be the meaning,
unless circumstances led to another conclusion.

Wokka, an adverb, 'up,' opposed to bara, 'down'; wokka
kaba moroko kaba, ' are up in heaven.'

Eiyugbai ta, 'the father it is.'

AViyelli-kan ta, 'the one who speaks it is'; this is the form
of the word when applied to a person ; to a thing, it would
be wiyellikanne.

Marai ta, ' the spirit it is,' in opposition to corporeal substance;
but kurrabag is 'the body,' and mamuya is 'a ghost"
murrin is another word for ' the body.'

Yirriyirri, 'sacred, reverend, holy'; not to be regarded but
with awe, as is the place marked out for mystic rites; a separate
place not to be profaned by common use, hence holy ; a person
reverend, to be held in reverence, sacred. Native heralds and
messengers pass as sacred persons ; they are held in reverence,
and are unmolested by hostile parties, when on embassies of
war or peace ; yirriyirri-lag means ' one who acts sacredly,'
one who is holy, separate by privilege of being held sacred or
in reverence. In the South Sea Islands, a pig devoted to the
god Oro, in former times, was made sacred by having a red
feather thrust through and fastened to its ear, and thus the
reverend pig was privileged to feed anywhere unmolested, as
being sacred ; nor Avas he confined to a tithe of the produce if
he broke through into any plantation, but was permitted to eat
his fill, not, however, without a murmur at the sacred intru-
sion.

Unni, 'this,' as subject or object ; gali, 'this,' as agent; unni
ta goro ta, ' this it is, the three it is'; wakal bo ta, 'one it is,
one-self only it is.'

114 AX AUSTHALTAN LANGTJAGE.

Section 2.

Tuka, 'sent'; hence yuknlliko, 'to send ' a person; but to
send property is tiyumbilliko. Tinal, 'son.'

Kakilliko, 'for-tobe'; here the infinitive form, as usual, denotes
the purpose.

Miromulli-kan means 'one who keeps or takes care of; from
miromuUiko, 'to keep with care'; miromullikan noa
kakilliko means ' he is for-to-be one who keeps with care,'
hence a 'Saviour.' From the same root, miroma also is a
'Saviour.' 'Adeliverer' would be mankilli-kan, 'one who
takes hold of ' ; but then the evil must be expressed out of
which the person is taken or to be taken.

Tan tin purrai ko, 'for all lands'; 'for all the earth'; ' for the
whole world.'

Section 3.

Eloi-to noa, 'God he,' as a personal agent; pital ma kauwal,
' causes great joy,' sc, towards.

Tantin kiiri, 'all men.'

Gukulla ta noa, 'it is he gave'; from gukilliko, ' to give';
the ta, 'it is,' affirms the act.

"Wakal bo ta, ' only one '; /^V., 'one-self only.'

G-ali ko, 'for this purpose'; gali, the emphatic pronoun, 'this';
gala, 'that'; galea, 'the other'; the demonstrative pronouns
are unni, ' this '; un noa, ' that ' ; untoa, ' the other.'

Tantin-to ba, 'that all who' ; the particle, to, denotes agency,
and ba verbalizes.

Gurran, 'believe,' the present tense of gurrilliko, 'to hear,
to believe.'

Gikoug kin, 'on account of him,' as a cause; for, if he speaks,
you hear ; he is therefore the cause of your hearing, and if you
assent to that which he says, you continue to hear; if not, you
do not hearken to him, or else you only pretend to hear him ;
the verbal objective pronoun 'him' is bon; gurran bon is
the present tense, 'hear him,' but has no reference to the effect
of that hearing, whereas the use of the other pronoun gikoug
kin implies that they hear him so as to attend to what he says
and believe.

Keawai wal bara tetti kanun, ' they certainly shall not be
in a state of death.'

Kulla wal, 'but certainly' shall, or 'because certainly' they
shall.

Tanti katai, 'in this manner always.'

Barunba, ' belonging to them,' 'theirs.'

Kakilliniin, 'will be and continue to be '; from kakilliko, 'to
be, to exist' in some state.

Moron, 'life'; kakilliniin moron means 'a future state of
being, and continuing to be, alive.'

SELECTIO>''S FROM THE SCRIPTURES. 115

Section 4.
Pulli, 'voice.'

TJpea, 'put forth'; from upilliko, 'to exert power.'
Itharael-uinba ; Israel is the proper name, introduced ; -umba,

the particle denoting 'belonging to ' a person onlj'; 'belonging

to' a thing is koba; ' belonging to a place' is -kal (vianc.'),

-kalin (fern.).
Wiyelliko, 'to speak.'

Pital-mulliko, 'to cause peace, joy, gladness.'
lethu-ko Kritht-ko, 'Jesus Christ,' as the agent; the particle

ko, denoting agency, must be added to each word, to show

that both are in the same relation to the verb.
Niuwoa-bo, 'himself it is who is,' emphatic.

Section 6.

G-earunba katan, 'is belonging to us' and remains so; equi-
valent to, ' for we have.'
"Wiyelli-kan, 'one who speaks'; 'an advocate.'
Biyugbai toa ba katan, 'it remains with the Father,'

WINTA 6.— Part 6.

Section 10.

Murrin, 'body ' of a person; murrin nurunba, 'your body.'
Kokera yirriyirri ta, ' it is a sacred house,' 'a temple.'
Marai yirriyirri koba, 'belonging to the sacred Sjpirit.'
AVakalla murrin, ' one body is.'

Section 11.

Tanti nurun wiya, 'in the manner as called you'; equivalent
to, 'you are called'; nurun is in the objective case.

Kotelli ta, 'in the thinking.'

Nuruub a, 'belonging to you,' 'your'; 'of you.'

Wiyatoara, 'that which is said.'

"Wakalla Piriwal, 'one Lord is'; wakalla Marai, 'one
' Spirit is.'

Wakalla gurrulliko, ' one is for-to hear or obey.'

Wakalla kurrimulliko, ' one is for-to cleanse' with water,

Wakalla Eloi ta, 'one is Grod it is.'

Biyugbai ta yantin koba, 'father it is of all,'

Wokka-kaba noa yantin ko, ' up above he is for all.'

Gratun noa yantin koa, 'and he all with.'

G-atun murrug kaba nurun kinba, 'and within you,' *c., all;
murrug, 'within, inside.'

Section 12.

Yantin barun yemmaman marai-to Eloi koba ko, 'all
them lead the spirit does, belonging-to-Grod does,' equivalent
to the passive ; the to and ko are only signs of agency and not

IIG AX AUSTRALIAN LAIfGUAGE,

the verb 'to do'; in the transhition the verb 'does' is only used
to show the effect of the particles; no reason can be assigned
why the particles may not be used indiscriminately the one for
the other, excepting euphony, because the agency is in the o,
which denotes purpose.

Temmamulliko, 'to lead as by the hand '; the to in the text is
added to Marai, because that is the subject of the verb, and
the ko (=to) is added to Eloi koba, because that, too, is an.
essential jjortion of the subject.

Wonnai ta bara Eloi koba, 'children it is they of Grod.'

Section 13.

Niuwarabug-gakorabon, ' angry purposely cause not him.'
Marai yirriyirri-lag Eloi koba, 'Spirit sacred of God.'

Section 14,

Gan-to ba yarakai wiyanun gikoug, ' whosoever-there-be

evil will-speak concerning him.'
Tinal kuri koba, 'the son belonging-to man'; 'the son of man.'
Kamunbiniin wal bon, 'suffered-to-be shall-certainly-be he.'*
Wonta noa ba yarakai wiyanun gikoug marai yirri-
yirri-lag, 'whereas he evil will-speak concerniug-him, the
spirit sacred.'
Keawai wal bon kamiinbinun, 'not certainly he shall-be-
suffered-to-be,' or remain, or exist; according to the idea of
punishment which the speaker wishes to convey.*

WINTA 7.— Part 7.

Luke, ii. 9-14.

Verse 9.

Gatun noa agelo Tehda-iimba, 'and he the angel belong-

ing-to-Jehovah.'
Tanan uwanoa barun-kin, 'approached them'; 'came to them.'
Gatun killiburra Tehda-iimba, 'and shining belonging-

to-Jehovah'; from killibinbiu, ' to be bright ; for the verbal

form burra, see page 37.
Ivakulla barun katoa, ' was them with.'
Kinta gaiya bara kakuUa, 'fear then they were-in-a-state-of .'

Verse 10.
Gatun ageloko noa wiya barun, ' and he the angel told them.'
Kinta kora, 'fear not.'

Kulla nurun bag wiyan, 'because you I tell.'
Totog murrarag kakilliko pitalko, 'news good, for-to-be

joy-for.'
Kakilliko yantin ko kiiri ko, *to-be all-for men-for.'

*£on is here in the objective ; for the reason why, see pages 22 and 30.

SELECTIONS EEOM THE SCEIPTTJEES. 117

Verse 11.

Kulla nurunba porkulleiin unni purreag, 'because belong-

ing-to-you bom-of-itself-is this day.'
Kokera Dabid-umba ka, 'house-at belonging-to-David-at ';

the -ra of kokera is an ablative form ; see page 16.
G-olomuUikan ta noa, Kritht ta Piriwal ta, ' one-wbo-

saves (by personal causation) it-is he, Christ it-is, the Chief

or Lord it-is.'

Verse 12.

Gatun unni tugakaniin nurunba, 'and this mark will-be
yours.'

Naniin nura b'obognug, 'see-will ye the-babe.'

Gamatoara kirrikin taba, ' that-which-is-wrapped in-the gar-
ment,' i.e., * soft raiment.'

Kakillinbatakilligellaba, 'remaining-atthe-eating-place-at.'

Verse 13.
Gatun tanoa-kal-bo, ' and at-that-self-same-instant.'
Paipea konara moroko-kal gikoug katoa agelo katoa,

' appeared host Heaven-of him- with angel-with.'
Murrarag wiyellin bon Eloinug giakai, 'good, telling him,

God (the object), thus'; equivalent to, 'praising God, and

saying.'

Verse 14.
"Wiyabunbilla bon murrarag Eloinug, ' let him speak well

God' (the object); i.e., ' let persons speak good or weU of

God.' This is the native way of expressing our passive voice,

' let God be praised '.
Wokka kaba moroko kaba, 'up-in Ileaven-in.
Gatun kamiinbilla pital purrai tako, 'and let-there-be-

caused-to-be peace earth for.'
Murrarag umatoara kiiri ko, * good what-is-done men-for.'

WINTA 8.— Paet 8.
Section 1.
Eloi-to noa gurrara-ma korien barun agelo yarakai
umullikan, ' God he regarded not them angels evil who-do.'
"Wonto ba wareka noa barun bara koiyug kako tarta-
ro kako, ' whereas cast-away he them down fire for tartarus
for ' ; ' tartarus ' is a word introduced.

Section 2.
Wiyatoara ta yantin kuri-ko wakalla tetti buUiko,

'that-which-is-said it-is all men- for once dead to become.'
Gatun yukita gaiya gurrulliko, ' and afterwards then to-per-

ceive-by-the ear,' sc, the sentence.

118 AN AUSTEALIAX LAXGLAGE.

Section 3.
Yakoai-kan bag moron kaiiuii? ' in-what-mannner-of-beiiig

I life will-be-in-a-state-of ? i.e., ' how can I be alive.'
Giirrulla bon Piriwalnug, lethunug Krithtnug, 'hear

him, the Lord Jesus Christ.'
Moron gaiya bi kanun, ' life then thou wilt-be-iu-a-state-of.'
Gratun kirrikin ta tempel kako, 'and thc-veil it-is the

temple-at.'
Tiir-kulleun bulwa koa, 'rcnt-o£-its-own-power in-the-midst,

in-order-to-be.'
AVokka-kabirug unta-ko baran-tako, ' from the top thence

to the bottom'; Jit., 'up-from there-to down-to.'

^g^The peculiarity of tbe verbal form of yiir, 'a rent,' — so
called from the noise of a piece of cloth when tearing, — is shewn
in the following specimen: —

Yiir-kulleini, ' rent,' 'has rent' of itself, of its own power.
Yiir-bng-ga, 'rent,' some person has.
Yiir-burrea, 'rent,' some instrument has.
Yiir-lag, 'rent,' is declaratively.
Yiir-wirrea, 'rent,' some motion has rent ; as when a flag, or

a sail of a ship flapping in the wind, is rent.

Thus, without a clear idea of the nature of the roots of the
affixes, no one could understand the difference of the five kinds
of 'rending.'

Compound TFords.

Like the North American Indians, although to a less extent,
our aborigines have long composite words in their language.
Tor instance, to express the abstract idea contained in the English
word 'lust,' they would say kotilliyarakaigeariinba, 'our
evil thinking '; and for the contrary idea, kotillimurrarag-
gearunba, 'our good thinking.' Now, either of these words,
when pronounced, appears to be but one word, whereas each con-
tains three words combined, namely: —

(1.) Kotilli (from simple root kot), ' the act of thinking ' ;
(2.) geari'mb a, ' belonging to us '; (3.) yarakai, ' evil '; mur-
rarag, 'good.' From the root kot come the forms, kotilliko,
injin., 'to think,' kotsiU, pres. i}idic.,]\.otinun,fuf. indie, kotta,
jnist indie, kotillin, pres. part., kotilliela, past pfirticiple.

Again, such a word as tiirburreabunbilliko, ' to pei'mit to

be torn,' is made up of tiir, a root which expresses the idea of

tearing, -burrea, the verbal particle of instrumental agency,

-bun, 'permit,' -illi, the formative of a verbal noun, and -ko,

for the purpose of.' And so also with other examples.

DIALECTS. 119

TUKEE AUSTRALIAN ABOBIOINAL DIALECTS,

SHOWING THEIR AFFINITY WITH EACH OTHER.

1. Eastern Australia (Y\iV&\ke\dL) ; 2. South Western Australia
(Captain Grey's Yocabulary) ; 3. South Australia (Teichclraann).

I (emphatic) — 1. Gratoa; 2. Granya ; Nad jo ; Graii.

Thou — 1. Griutoa ; 2. Griunei ; 3. Ninna.

We— 1. G-eeu; 2. aancel; 3. &adlii.

Ye— 1. Nura; 2. Nurag ; 3. Na.

They — 1. Bara ; 2. Balgua ; 3. Barna.

"We two (dual)— 1. Bali; 2. ; 3. G-adlukurla.

Te two — 1. Bula; 2. Bulala; 3. Niwadlukurla.

This (emphatic)—!. G-ali; 2. G-ali ; 3. G-adlu.

That (emphatic)—!. G-ala ; 2. Gala; 3. Parla.

Who ?— 1. Gail ? ; 2. Gan ? ; 3. Ganiia?

Who (is the agent) — !. Ganto ?; 2. Gando ?; 3. Gauto ?

Whose? — 1. Ganuug?; 2. Gannog ? ; 3. Gaityurlo ?

To strike (imperative) — !. Buwa; 2. Buma; 3. Bumandi.

To be wroth—!. Bukka; 2. Bukkau ; 3. Tagkarro.

Yes (assent)— 1. E-e ; 2. E-ee ; 3. Ne.

On account of? — !. -tinke?; 2. -gin ge ? ; 3. birra.

Cold — !. Kurkur; 2. Gurgal ; 3. Manyapaianna.

Heat — !. Karrol ; 2. Kallarruk ; 3. Wottita.

Where?— 1. Woiiti?; 2. Winji ? ; 3. Wanti?

To tear (pres.) — !. Yiiran ; 2. Jiran; 3. Yarurendi.

Presently — ^!. Kabo; 2. Ivaabo ; 3. Gaiinni ; Yagadti.

To take (imperative) — !. Mara; 2. Mara; 3. Marrar.

More—!. Bati; 2. Mate; 3. Muinmo.

Go quickly — !. Wollawollag ; 2. Welawellag ; 3. Warruanna.

To see— 1. Nakilli; 2. Nago ; 3. Nakkondi.

To blow (/.e.,puff)— !. Bombilli; 2. Bobon ; 3. Buntondi.

To fly— 1. Burkilli; 2. Burdag ; 3.

To speak — 1. Wiyelli; 2. AVagon ; 3. Wagondi.

Water (fi-esh) — 1. Kokoin;Bato; 2. Kowin ; Badto; 3. Ivowi.

Dung (excrement) — !. Koniig; 2. Ivonug; 3. Kudna.

The tongue— i. Tullun ; 2. Tallug; 3. Tadlaga.

The throwing stick — !. Wommara ; 2. Meera ; 3. Meedla,

Smoke — !. Poito ; 2. Buyu ; 3. Poiyu.

Wood— 1. Kulai; 2. Kalla ; 3. Karla.

The hand— 1. Matlara; 2. Mara; 3. Murra.

The ribs — !. Narra ; 2. Narra ; 3. Tinninya.

The toes — !. Tinna ; 2. Tjenna; 3. Tidna.

A crow (from its cry) — 1. Wakuii , 2. Quaggun ; 3. Kui.

The wind—!. Wibbi ; Wippi; 2. 3. Waitpi.

120 a2t austealian language.

The Loed's Peatee,
In the language of the Aborigines of Lake Macquarie.

Biyugbai gearunba wokka kaba moroko kaba katan;

Father our up in heaven in art ;

kamunbilla yitirra giroumba yirriyirri kakilliko;
let-caused-to-be name thy sacred for-to-be ;

paipibunbilla Piriwal koba giroumba; gurrabunbilla

let-to-appear King-belonging-to thy ; let-to-obey

wiyellikanne giroumba; yanti purrai taba, yanti ta

word thy ; as earth in as

moroko kaba, guwa gearun purreag ka yanti katai
heaven in ; give to-us day at as always

takilliko ; gatun warekulla gearunba yarakai

for-to-eat ; and cast-way our evil

umatoara yanti ta geen warekayantin ta wiyapaiyeen
that-is-done as we cast-away all spoken-but not-done

gearunba; gatun yuti yikora gearun yarakai
belonging-to-us ; and guide not us evil

umulli-kan kolag ; miromulla gearun yarakai

one-who-causes-to-do towards ; cause-to-deliver us evil

tabirug; kulla ta giroumba ta Piriwal koba gatun
from ; because thine King-belonging-to and

killibinbin yanti katai. Amen.

bright-shining thus always. Amen.

The Author trusts that he has now placed on permanent record
the language of the aborigines of this part of the colony, before
the speakers themselves become totally extinct ; and if, in his
endeavour to aid the purpose of scientific enquiry, his work may
seem to fall short, and so disappoint the expectations of those
"who take an interest in ethnological pursuits, he can only state
that, in the midst of attention to manifold engagements in other
paramount duties, no pains have been spared on the subject,
and therefore his only apology is, that with slender means he
has done his best.

L. E. THEELKELD.

Sydney, New South "Wales,

November 26, 1850.

PART IT.

THE GOSPEL BY St. LUKE.

THE

GOSPEL BY St. LTJKE

TRANSLATED INTO

THE LA^&UAGE

A^^^^BAKA.!.

BY

L. E. THRELKELD.

NOW FOR THE FIRST TIME PRINTED.

FROM THE ORIGINAL MANUSCRIPT,

IN THE 'sir GEORGE GREY COLLECTION' OF THE PUBLIC LIBRARY,

AUCKLAND, N.Z.

CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER,
1891.

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

It is a matter of fact that tlie aborigines of these colonies and
of the numerous islands of the Pacific Ocean are rapidly becoming
extinct. The cause of their extinction is mysterious. Does it
arise from the iniquity of this portion of the human race having
become full ■? — or, that the times of these Gentiles are fulfilled 1 —
or, is it but the natural efi'ects of iniquity producing its conse-
quent ruin to the workers thereof in accordance with the natural
order of God's government of the universe 1 Whatever may be
the result of speculative theories in answer to these queries,
there remains one grand question incontrovertible, " Shall not the
Judge of all the Earth do right f

The providence of God has permitted ancient nations, together
with their languages, and numerous tribes, with their various
tongues, to pass away and others to take possession of and dwell
in their tents, just as we in New South Wales and the neigh-
bouring colonies now do, in the place of the original inhabitants
of the land.

The numbers of the aborigines, both in Australia and the South
Sea Islands, have always been overrated, and the efforts that have
been made, on Christian principles, to ameliorate their condition,
have been more abundant in proportion to the number of these
aborigines, than have ever been any similar efforts towards the
hundreds of millions of heathens in other parts of the world.

My own attempt in favour of the aborigines of New South
Wales was commenced in the year 1824, under the auspices of
the London Missionary Society, at the request of the deputation
from that Institution sent out for the purpose of establishing
Missions in the East, and urged likewise by the solicitations of
the local Government of this colony. The British Government
sanctioned the project by authorizing a grant of 10,000 acres of
land, at Lake Macquarie, in trust for the said purpose, at the
recommendation of Sir Thomas Brisbane, the then Governor of
the Australian Colonies.

In 1839, the London Missionary Society abandoned the mission,
broke faith with me, and left me to seek such resources as the
providence of God might provide, after fifteen years' service in
their employ. The Colonial Government, being perfectly acquainted
with all the circumstances of the case, stepped in and enabled me
to continue in my attempt to obtain a knowledge of the aboriginal
language, and the British Government subsequently confirmed
the new ari'angement.

126 THE Auniou's pkefa:'E.

Circumstances, -wliicli no huuiau power could control, brought
tlie mission to a final termination on December 31, 1841, when the
mission ceased, not from any want of support from the Govern-
ment, nor from any inclination on my own part to retire from the
work, but solely from the sad fact that the aborigines themselves
had then become almost extinct, for I had actually outlived a very
large majority of the blacks, more especially of those with whom
I had been associated for seventeen years. The extinction of the
aborigines is still progressing throughout these colonies. The
last man of the tribe which formerly occupied the site of Sydney
may now be seen sitting by the way side, a paralytic, soliciting
alms from passers by, and this he does from choice, rather than
enter the Benevolent Asylum. Those who drive by in their
carriages along the South Head Road often throw him a sixpence
or so, and thus he is bountifully provided for in his native and
beloved stale of freedom.

Under such circumstances, the translation of the Gospel by St.
Luke can only be now a work of curiosity,* — a record of the
language of a tribe that once existed, and would have, otherwise,
been numbered with those nations and their forgotten languages,
and peoples with their unknown tongues, who have passed away
from this globe and are buried in oblivion.

Elliot, the missionary to the North American Indians, made a
translation of the Scriptures into their language, which has recently
been published ; but only one Indian now remains who knows
that dialect.

This translation of the Gospel of Luke into the language of the
aborigines, was made by me with the assistance of the intelligen.t
aboriginal, M'Gill, whose history is attached. f Thrice I wrote it,
and he and I went through it sentence by sentence, and word
for word, while I explained to him carefully the meaning as we
proceeded. M'Gill spoke the English language fluently. The
third revisal was completed in 1831. I then proceeded with the
Gospel of Mark, a selection of prayers from the Book of Common
Prayer, with which to commence public worship with the few sur-
viving blacks ; I prepared a Spelling book ; I had also commenced
the Gospel of Matthew, when the mission was brought to its final
close.

Not long ago, I accidentally found at a book-stall a copy of the
first specimens of an Australian language, which I published some

* Our author did not know that his Awabakal blacks were only a sub-
tribe, and that their brethren, for some hundreds of miles along the coast
to the north and south of Lake Macquarie, spoke a language which is
essentially the same. Northwards from the Hunter River to the Macleay,
tliis language is still spoken. — Ed.

t See page 88.— Ed,

IHE author's PHITACE. 127

time in 1826 ; this was done to satisfy my friends of tlie impro-
priety of introducing the English sound of the vowels instead of
those of the Continent, which are also in use in the South Sea
Islands.

This present copy of the Gospel by Luke is the fourth re-written
revisal of the work, and yet it is not offered as a perfect transla-
tion ; it can only be regarded by posterity as a specimen of the
language of the aborigines of Noav Holland, or, as a simple monu-
mental tablet, on which might be truthfully inscribed, as regards
the unprofitable servant who attempted to ameliorate the pitiable
condition of the aborigines and attain a knowledge of their lan-
guage : — " He has done what he could."

L. E. THRELKELD,

Ministei'.
Sydney, New South Wales,

loth August, 1857.

[Note. — The original manuscript was illuminated for Sir George Grey
by Annie Layard, daughter of Sir A. H. Layard, the explorer of Nineveh.

The original title page is this : —

EVANGELION

UNNI TA

JESU-IJM-BA CHRIST-KO-BA.

UPATOARA

LOUKA-UMBA.

Translated into the language of the aborigines, located in the
vicinity of Hunter's Eiver, Lake Macquarie, &c., New South
Wales, in the year 1831, and further revised by the translator,
L. E. Threlkeld, Minister, 1857.— Ed.]

EUANGELION upatoara LUKA-UMBA.

WINTA I.

WoNTO ba kauwallo mankulla unnoa tara tugunbilliko gurrdnto
geen kinba,

2. Yanti bo gearun kin bara gukulla, unnoa tara nakillikan
kurri-kiirri kabirug gatun mankillikan wiyellikanne koba.

3. Murrarag tia katan yantibo, koito bag ba tuig ko giroug,
Teopolo munaiag ta,

4. Grurra-uwil koa bi tuloa, unnoa tara wiyatoara banug ba.

5. Yanti-kalai ta Herod noa kakulla, Piriwal noa kakuUa lu-
daia ka, kakulla noa tarai f hiereu Dhakaria yitirra, Abia-timba ko-
nara : gatun nukug gikoumba yinalkun koba Aaron-umba, giakai
bountoa yitirra Elidhabet.

6. Buloara bula kakulla murrarag Eloi kin, mikan ta gurrai-
yell^un bula Yeli6a-ko noa ba wiyellikanne yarakai ma korien.

7. Keawaran bula wonnai korien kulla, bountoa Elidhabet gur-
rauwai ; gatun bula ba gurrogbai kakulla.

8. Gratun yakita kakulla, umulliela noa ba Eloi kin makan ta,
yirrug ka gikoug kin fhiereu koba,

9. Yanti kiloa f liiereu koba uman, yirrug ka gikoumba ta upulli-
ko bon porapora koiyug ko uwa noaba fnao koba Yehoa kai koba.

10. Gatun yanti bo yantinto konara kiiri wiyelliela warai ta
yakita winelliela ba porapora. "

11. Gatun paipea noa fagelo Yehoa-umba gikoug kin, garokil-
liela noa tugkagkirri ka koiyug kon ta porapora ka.

12. Gatun nakulla bon noa ba Dhakaria ko, unma bon noa ba,
kinta gaiya noa ba kakulla.

13. Wonto ba agelo wiya noa, Kinta kora bi kauwa, Dhakaria j
kulla gurra ta wiyellikanne giroiiniba, gatun nukug ko giroumba
ko wonnai kaniin giroumba, gatun wiyanun bi giakai yitirra loanne.

14. Gatun pital bi kantin, pital kauwalkan kaniin porkullin'in
gikoug kinbirug.

15. Kauwal wal noa kaniin, mikan ta Yehoa kin, gatun keawai
wal noa fwain pitaniin, keawai tarere, gatun warakag wal noa wit-
elliniin Marai yirriyirri kan birug ko, waraka birug tunkan ta birug.

16. Gatun noa wiyanun wal barunkauwal-kauwal wonnai Itha-
rael-umba Yehoa-kin ko Eloi ta barunba.

+ This maik is placed before all common nouns which are adapted from
Greek, Latin, or English ; whichever equivalent word in these languages
suits the aboriginal tongue best, that word I have introduced into the text.
In the original text, many of the borrowed words, and especially the proper
names, could not be pronounced by a native black. — Ed.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 1. 129

17. Gratun wal noa uwanim gikong kin mikan ta kaiyu ka
Marai ta Elia-umba, warbuggulliko bulbul biyugbai tara koba
wounai kolag, gatun barun kiako tuloa kako; iima-uwil koa baruu
kiiri kurrikurri Yehoa kinko.

18. Gratun noa Dhakariako wiya bon agelonug, Yakoai kan bag
gurraniin unni 1 kulla bag gurrogbai, gatun nukug emmouinba
gurrog geen.

19. Gatun noa ageloto wiya bon, Gatoa Gabriel, gakillin Eloi
kin mikan ta ; gatun yuka tia wiyelliko giroug, gatun tugun-
billiko gali tara ko pitaluiuUikanne ko.

20. A ! gurrulla bi, gog ko wal bi kaniin, gatun kaiyu korien
wal bi kauun wiyelli ta, yaki-kalai tako purreag kako unni tara
kanun ba, kulla bi ba gurra korien wiyellikanne emmoiiniba, kabo
kanun wal unni tara.

21. Gatun bara kiiri ko mittia Dhakarianug, gatun kotelliela
minnug-bulliela noa tunkea noa fnao ka.

22. Gatun noa ba paikulleiin warrai ta, kaiyu korien noa wiyelli
ko barun ; gatun bara gurra Marai noa nakulla fnao ba; kulla noa
wauwal-wauwal uma barun gatun, garokilliela noa gog ko.

23. Gatun kirun kabulla purreag gikoumba umullikanne, waita
gaiya noa uwa kokera ko gikoug ka tako.

24. Gatun yukita purreag ka Elidhabet gikoumba nukug wara-
kag bountoa, gatun yuropulleimbountoa wai-iin yellenna ka, wiyel-
liela bountoa,

2-5. Yanti noa tia Yehdako umd nakulla noa tia ba purreag
ka, mankilliko barun ba beelmulli tin kiiri tin.

26. Tarai ta yellenna ka fliek ka, Gabi^iel ta agelo ta puntimai
ta wiyabunbia bon Eloi kinbirug uwolliko, purrai kolag Galilaia
koba, giakai Nadbaret,

27. Mirial lako wiyatoaia ko, kiiri kako Yotliep kinko yitirra
ko, wonnai taro noa Dabidiimba ; gatun mirral giakai yitiri'a Mari,

28. Gatun noa agelo uwa bounnoun kin, gatun wiyelliela, A !
murrarag umatoara bi Yehoa katan giroug katoa ba ; murrai'ag
umatoara bi nukug ka.

29. Gatun bountoa ba nakulla bon, kinta bountoa kakulla wi-
yellita gikoug kin, gatun kotelliela bountoa minarig unni totog
katan.

30. Gatun ageloko wiya bounnoun, Kinta kora bi, Mari : kulla
bin pitalmatoara Eloito noa.

31. A, gurralia bi, warakfig bi kaniin, wonnai kan giroug kin
pika ka, gatun yinal p6rkullinun, gatun bi giakai yitirra lETHU.

32. Gatun wal noa kauwal kaniin, gatun wal bon wiyamin gia
kai Yinal ta wokka ka ko ; gatun noa Yelioako Eloito giintin wa.
bon yellawollikanne biyugbai koba Dabidumba gikoumba :

33. Gatun noa wiyanun wal yanti-katai barun Yakobiimba; ga-
tun gikoumba piriwalkanne keawai wal kaniin wirdn.

130 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

34. Wiya gaiya bountoa bon agelonug Mariko, Yakoai ke unni
kamin, kulla bag kiiri korien 1

35. G-atiin noa ageloko wiya bounnouu, Taiian wal noa uwanua
Maraikan murraragkan giroug kinko, gatun kaiyuko wokka tinto
wutinun wal giroug, koito ba unnoa ta murranig porkullinuii gir-
oug kin ; wiyaniin giakai yinal ta Eloi koba.

36. A, gurralia, giroumba wuggunbai Elidhabel, warakag l)Oiin-
toa yinal gurrogeen koba bounnoun ba ; gatun unni ta yellenna
fhek ta bounnoun-kai-kan wiyatoara gurra-uwai.

37. Kulla gurakito ke noa Eloito kaiyukanto ke.

38. Gratun bountoa Mariko wiya, Kauwc'i yanti kamunbilla tia
wiya bi ba ; gatoa mankillikan Yehoa-iimba. G-atun noa agelo pun-
tirkulleiin bounnoun kinbirug.

39. Gratun bountoa Mari bugkulleun unti-tara purreag ka, gatun
uwa bountoa karakai bulkara kolag, kokera ko Yuda kako ;

40. Gratun bountoa uwa kokera ko Dhakaria-umba kako, gatun
bugbiig ka bounnoun Elidliabetnug.

41. Gatun yakita gaiya gurra bountoa ba Elidliabetto pulli Mari-
umba, tulutilleun gaiya wonnai bounnoun kin pika ka ; gatun
Avai'apal bounnoun ba Elidhabet kin Maraikanto murraragko :

42. Gratun bountoa wiyelleun pulli wokka wiyelliela, murrarag
umatoara bi nukug ba; gatun murrarag umatoara peil giroumba
pika koba.

43. Gatun minarig tin tia unni, tanan uwa tunkan piriwal koba
emmoiimba 1

44. Kulla bag ba gurra pulli giroumba gurreug ka emmoug
kin, wonnai gaiya tia tulutilleun emmoug kin pika ka pital ko.

45. Gatun murrarag umatoara bountoa gurra; kulla unnoa
tara kanuii umatoara, wiyatoara bounnoun kin Yehoa kinbirug.

46. Gatun Mariko bountoa wiya, " Maraito eramoumba ko wi-
yan murrai bon Yehoanug,

47. Gatun maraito emmoumba ko pital umulleun Eloi kin Miro-
ma emmoumba.

48. Kulla noa nakulla mirial bountoa ba umullikan glkoumba:
A, unti birug yantinto tia wiyanun murrarag upatoara.

49. Kulla noa tia kaiyukanto unnoa tara kauwal uma; gatun
yitirroa gikoumba murrarag upatoara katan.

50. Gatun murrai gikoumba barun kiuba kintakan bon katan
willuggel kiu-i kabirug tarai kuri kabirug.

51. Tugunbilleuu noa kaiyukan turrug gikoumba ; wupea noa
barun garug gara yaroyaro bulbiil ban kotellikanne.

52. Upea noa baran parran kaiyukan yellawolligel labirug bar-
iinba, gatun wupea noa barun mirral wokka lag.

53. Gukulla noa kapirrikan ko murrarag ta ; gatun noa barun
pai'olkau yuka mii'ral ko.

54. Umulleun noa gikoumba umullikan Itharaelnug, guiTulli bi-
rug gikoug kinbirug murrai ta gikoumba;

THE GOSPEL BV LUKt;, C.

1. 131

55. Yanti wiya noa ba baruu Liyugbai to gearuuba, Abarani-
nug, gatun bavuii wonnai tara gikoumba yanti katai."

56. G-atun Mai-i bountoa kakulla bounnoun katoa goro ka yellen-
na ka, gatuu wiling ba gaiya bountoa bounnoun ka tako kokera ko.

57. Yakita gaiya Elidbabetiimba kakulla Avonnai iDorkullinun ;
gatun yinal bounnoun ba porkulleun.

58. G-atun gurra bara k6tita ko bounnoun bako, yanti Yelioa-
ko noa ba muriarag uma bounnoun kin; gatun bara pital kakulla
gatun bountoa.

59. G-atun yakita gaiya purreag ka, uwa gaiya bara kulla-
bulliko wonnai ko; gatun bara wiya bon giakai Dhakaria, biyugbai
tin yitirra tin.

60. G-atun tunkanto wiya bountoa, Yanoa ; kulla bon wiyanuu
giakai loanne.

61. G-atun bara bounnoun wiya, Keawaran giroumba kotita wi-
ya ba giakai unni yitirra.

62. G-atun bara tuga umulleuu bon biyugbai ko gikovimba ko,
wonnen noa bon yitirra wiyanun 1

63. G-atun noa wiya upulligel ko, gxtun noa upa wiyelliela,
Yitirra noa giakai loanne. G-atun bara yantinto kota.

64. G-atun tanoa-kal-bo kurraka bugkulleiin gikoumba, gatun
bon gikoumba tallag balbal kakulla, gatun noa wiya, gatun noa
wiya mui'rai Eloinug.

65. G-atun bara kiuta kakulla yantin ta untakal; gatun unni tara
wiyellikanne totog kakulla yantin ta kalog koa bulkaroa Yuda ka.

66. G-atun bara yantinto unnoa tara gurra wunkulla barun kin
biilbiil la, wiyelliela, Yakoai unni ta wonnai kaniin ! G-atun mattara
Yehoa-umba gikoug kin katan.

67. G-atun noa Dhakaria ko biyugbai gikoumba, warapal bon
wiipea Marai to yirriyirri to, gatun noa wiyelliela giakai,

6"^. " Kamunbilla bon Yelioanug Eloinug Itbarael koba pital-
liko ; kulla noa uwa barun nakilliko, gatun wirrilliko kuri ko
gikoug kaiko.

69. G-atun bougbugga noa nulka-nulka golomullikan gearun,
kokera Dabid-umba ka gikoumba mankillikan ;

70. Yanti noa ba wiya kurraka ko fpropet koba ko yirriyirri-
kan to yantin to, ])urrai yantin kurrikurri kabirug :

71. G-oloma-iiwil koa gearun geai'unba bukka tukulla biiiig,
gatun mattara birug barun kinbirug yantin tabirug yarakai wil-
ing kabirug,

72. Umulliko murrai ko wiyatoara barun kin biyugbai ko
geari'inba, gatun gurrulliko gikoumba wiyatoai'a yirriyirri ta ;

73. Pirral-man noa gali wiyelliela bon Abai'amnug biyugbai ge-
ariinba,

74. G-iiwil koa gearun noa, mankilliko gearun mattara biriig
bukkakan tabirug geariinba, gurra-uwil koa geen bon kinta kc-
riea ko,

132 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

75. Yirriyirrikan gatun murraragkan mikan ta gikoug kin, yan-
tin ta puireag ka moron geariinba.

76. Gratun gintoa, wonnai ta, wiyanun Lin yitirra fpropet ta
wokka kako ; kullabi iiwauiia ganka mikan ta Yelioakin, upulliko
yajTug ko gikoumba ;

77. Grakilliko gurrulliko moron ko gikoug kaiko kiiri ko, ware-
wavekan yarakai barunba,

78. INIurrai tin kauwollin Eloi koba tin gearunba, gurrakan
wokka kaVjirug tanan uwa gearun kinko,

79. G-ukilliko purreag barun ko yellawolli ta ba ko gorogord
ba ko, gatun komirra kaba tetti koba, yutilliko tinna ko gearunba
ko yapug koa pitdl koba koa.

80. G-atun wonnai poaikulleun, gatun guraki noa maraikan ko,
kulla noa korug koa yakita ko purreag kako paip^a noa ba Itbarael
kinko.

WINTA 11.

Yakita purreag ka, wiya noa Kaitbariko Augutoko, upa-uwil koa
bara yantin kuri murrapulliko.

2. G-atun unni mui'rapullikanne una yakita Kurinio noa ba f ko-
bana kakulla Thuria ka.

3. G-atun yantin bara uwa murrapulliko bari;n ka tako.

4. Gatun noa Yothep uwa wokka-lag Galilaia kabirug, kokera
birug Nadharet tabirug, ludaia kolag, kokera kolag Dabidumba
kolag, giakai yitirra Bethlehem ; (kulla noa kokera koba gatun
kotita koba Dabidumba;)

5. Murrapulliko bon gatun Marl bounnoun katoa, wiyatoara
nukiig gikoumba, wonnai kau bountoa warakag.

6. Gatun yakita kakulla, kakulla bara ba unta, purreag ka
katan p6rkulli'koa bountoa ba wonnai.

7. Gatun bountoa porbuggulleun kurri-kurri yinal, gatun boun-
toa muggama bon kirikin to, gatun bon wunkuUa takilligella butti-
kag koba ka ; kulla wal tantuUan kokera takilligel.

8. Gatun bara fcipu-kal untoa kakulleiin, tumimillin wirral ba-
run ba tokoi ta.

9. Gatun noa agelo Yeh6a-uraba tanan uwa barun kin, gatun
kullaburra Yehoa-umba kakulla barun katoa; kinta gaiya bara ka-
kulla.

10. Gatun noa ageloko wiya barun, Kinta kora ; kulla nurun
bag wiyan murrarag totog kakilliko pital ko, kakilliko yantin ko
ktiri ko.

11. Kulla nurunba p6rkulleun unni purreag, kokera Dabid-
umba ka, GolomuUikan ta, noa Kritht ta Piriwal ta.

12. Gatun unni tiiga kanun nurunba; nanun nura bobognug
gamatoara kirikin taba, kakillin ba takilligel laba.

13. Gatun tanoa k;il bo paipea konara morokokal gikoug katoa
agelo katoa, muriarag wiyellin bon Eloinug, giakai.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 2. 133

14. Wiyaliiuibilla bon mumirag Eloinug wokka kaba inoroko
kaba, gatun kainunbilla pital purrai tako, murrarag umatoara ba-
run kiiri ko.

15. Gratun kakiilla ba, waita uwa bara ba, agelo barun kinbirug
moroko kolag, wi3'ellan bara fcipu-kal taraikan-taraikan, Waita
geen yakita Bethlehem kolag, na-uwil koa imnug tara kakulla ba,
gala Yehoako noa wiya gearun.

16. G-atun bara uwa kurrakai, gatun nakvilla Marinug, gatun
bobog pirikilliehx takilligel laba.

17. G-atun nakulla bara ba, wiyabunbea bara yantin ta purrai
ta unnoa wiyellikanne wiyatoanx barun wonnai tin.

18. G-atun bara yantinto gurra, kotelliela vxnnug tara, wiya ba-
run bara f 6ipu-kal-lo.

19. Wonto ba bountoa Mariko miroma unni tara, gatun kota
bountoa minki ka billbul-la bounnoun kin.

20. Gatun bara f cipu-kal willug ba kakxTlhx, murrarag wiyellin
gatun pitalmullin bon Eloinug gala birug natoara birug gurra-
toara birug bara yantita wiyatoara ba barun kai.

21. Gatun purreag fet ta kakulla ba, kuUintiela ko iuga-witia
wonnai, giakai bon wiya lethu, gala ba wiya noa ageloko kurri-
kurri noa ba pika ka kakulla kunto ka.

22. G-atun purreag ka goloin ta killibinbin bounnoun ba, yanti
Mothe-ko noa ba wiya, mankulla bara bon fHierothalem kolag, gu-
killiko bon Yehoa kin ;

23. (Yanti Avupa ba wiyellikanne ta Yehoa-iimba giakai, Yantin
kiiri tara ganka-ganka pika kabirug yirri-yirri wal kaniin yitirroa
Yehoa koba ;)

24. Gatun gukilliko gutoara, gala wupa ba wiyellikanne taba
Yeh6a-umba, giakai, Buloara purrougkan ga keawai wurogbuloara
poppolameri.

25. A ! gatun kakulla noa tarai kuri fHierothalem kaba, giakai
noa yitirra Thimeon; gatun unnoa kiiri wiyellikan tuloakan, gatun
gurrullikan, mittillin pital ko Itharael-iimba ko ; gatun Marai yir-
ri-yirri-kan kakulla gikoug kin.

26. Gatun bon wiyatoara Maraito yirri-yirri-kan-to, keawai noa
naniin tettibullikanne, na-uwil koa noa Krithtnug Yehoa-iimba.

27. Gatun noa uwa Marai toa f hieron kako : gatun bula ba pori-
kullaito ]iuruma wonnai lethu kin, umulliko bon yanti ko upato-
ara ko wiyellikanne tako,

28. Mankulla gaiya bon noa gikoug kin turrug ka, gatun pital-
ma noa bon Eloinug, gatun wiyelliela,

29. "Wamunbilla bi tia Yehoa yakita pitalkan, yanti wiya bi
ba:

30. Kulla bag nakulla gaikug ko golomullikan glroiimba,

31. Gali ko kakilliko gintoa yantin ko kiiri ko mikan tako ;

32. Kaibug kakilliko barun fethanekal ko, gatun pital kakilliko
kuri ko Itharael giroiimba ko."

134 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

33. Gratun bula Yotliep gatuu Maii kotelliela unnoa wiyatoara
gikoiig kai.

34. G-atun Tliimeon ta noa pit alma barun, gatun wiyelliela Ma-
rinug tuiikan gikoi'imba, "Alkataunoa unni wonnai kakilliko
puntimulliko, gatun bougkuUiko kauw al-kauwal baruuba Itl arael
kuba ; gatun tuga ko wiyea kanun ;

35. (Kauwa, yirrako bin turanun wal marai giroumba k6ti,)
paipi-uwil koa kotatoara biilbul labirug kauual-kauwal labirug."

36. Gratun kakulla wakal Anna, fpropetkun, yinalkun Panuel
koba, konara koba Ather koba; bountoa ta gurrogeen gagkakalin,
gatun kakulla bountoa poribai ta wunalla fhepta ta, murrakinta-
birug bountoa katalla;

37. Gratun bountoa mabnguu kukulla wunal la f ety-wara yanti-
kalai tabirug, waita uwa korien bountoa fliieron kabirug, wonto
ba gurrulliela Eloinug bon pum ag ka gatun tokoi ta ta-korien.

38. Gratun bountoa uwolliela tauoa-kal-bo, wiyapaiye'm bon Ye-
hoanug, gatun wiyelliela yantin barun gikoug kin barun^ nakilli-
kan gupaiyiko fHierothalem kako.

39. Gratun upa bara ba unni tara yanti wiyatoara Yelioa koba,
willugbo gaiya bara kakulla Galilaia kako, barun ka tako koti kako
NadLaret tako.

40. Gratun w^onnai poaikulleiin guraki noa maraikan katan ; ga-
tun pilalmatoara bon Eloi koba.

41. Waita uwa bula gikoumba tunkan gatun biyugbai Hierotha-
lem kolag yanti-katai wunal la takilligel lako kaiwitoara wokka
koa.

42. Gratun noa ba wural la fdodeka ka, waita gaiya uwa bara
fHiprothalem kolag wirikai ko takilli ko.

43. Gratun kirun kakulla purn ag, willugbo bara ba, wonnai
lutliu noa niinka willug ka fPlierothalem ka ; gatun noa Yotliep-
ko gatun tunkanto gurra korien bula.

44. Wonto bara ba punta bon barun kin konara, uwa purreag
ka wakal la ; gatun bara bon tiwa k6ti ta ka.

45. Gratun bara na korien bon ba, willugbo gaiya bara kateakiin
fHierothalem kolag tiwolliko bon.

46. Gratun purrtag ka goro kulla, nakulla gaiya bara bon mui'-
rug ka fhieron ka, yellawoUiela willi ka barun kin fdidathkaloi
ka, gurrulliela barun, gatun wiyelliela barun wiyellikanne pulli.

47. Gratun yantinto bara bon gurra, kotelliela bara bon guraki
gatun wiyatoara gikoiiniba.

48. Gratun nakulla bara bon ba, unma gaiya barun ; gatun tunkan-
to grkouniba-ko wiya bon, Nai, rainarig tin bi kakulla gearun kai 1
a ! biyug ta uw^a ball, tiwolliela ball bin, niinki-kan-to.

49. Gratun noa wiya barun, Minarig tin nura tia tiwolliela?
keawai nura ba gurran-upa-uwil koa bag pintuniimba-kan wiya
'noa tia ba 1

50. Gatun bara gurra korien unnoa wiyelli ta wiya noa ba barun.

THE OOSTEL GY LUKE, C. 2. 135

51. Gratun iioa uwa barun katoa baran Nadharet take, gatun
gurrullikan noa kakulla barun kin : wonto boiintoa ba tunkan
to gikoiimba raii-oma unni tara wiyellikanne murrug ka bulbul
la bounnoun kin.

5l\ Gratun noa lethuko poaikuJleun gurakikakilliko, gatun kau-
wal kakilliko, gatun pitahnuUiko bon iiloito gatun kiiriko.

WINTA III.

Yakita kakulla wum'il la fpipatinta piriwal koba Tiberio Kaitliar
koba, fkobana noa Pontio Pilato ludaia ka, gatun tetrak noa Herod
Galilaia ka, gatun gikoihnba kuti Pilip tetrak noa Iturea ka, gatun
yantin tako Trakoniti ka, gatun Luthanio tetrak noa Abilene ka,

2. Annath gatun Kaiapath fhiereu piriwal bula kakulla, wiyel-
likanne Eloi koba uwa loanne kinko bon, yinal Dhakaria kola,
korug kaba.

3. Gratun noa uwa yantin toa purrai toa loi adan toa, wiyelliela
korimulliko kanumaiko, warekuUiko yarakai ;

4. Yanti wupaitoara ybiblion ka wiyellikanne Ethaia koba fpro-
pet koba, glakai, Pulli wakal koba wiyelleun korug kaba, Yapug
Yehuakobamurrarag umulla nura, tuloa kakillikoyapuggikouniba.

5. Yantin ta pilabai warapal upiniin, gatun yantin ta bulkara
unianun puntig ; gatun warin-warin ta unjaniin tuloa, gatun yapug
yarakai wollugbiara umanun poitog ;

6. Gratun yantinto nanun wal golomullikanne Eloi koba.

7. Wiya gaiya noa barun konara uwa bara korimulliko gikong
kinko, Ela beara ! konara maiya kiloa nura ! ganto nurun wiya
niurralliko bukka tin tanan ba uwanun?

8. Koito nura ba umullia raurrarag minki kabirug; gatun ko-
,ta yikora nura koti ka minki ka nurun kin wiyelliko, Abaram
gearun noa gearunba biyugbai • kulla bag wiyan nurun, Eloi noa
kaiyukan katan umulliko unti tara birug tuniig kabirug wonnai
kakilliko Abaram kinko.

9. Gatun yakita baiV)ai wunkuUa kulai ta wirra ka ; koito ba
yantin kulai keawai katan murrai'ag k61buntil!anun wal baran,
warekulliko koiyug kako.

10. Gratun kiiriko bon wiya, wiyelliela, Minnug banun gaiya geen?

11. Wiya noa barun, wiyelliela, Niuwoa fkot-kan buloai'akan
gikoumba, gumunbilla bon keawai ko; gatun niuwoa kimtokan gu-
miinbilla bon yanti kiloa.

12. Uwa gaiya bara ftelone korimulliko, gatun wiya bon, Piri-
wal, minnug baniin geen ?

13. Gratun noa wiya barun, Manki yikora untoa-kal unnoabo
mara wiyatoara nurunba.

14. Gratun bara farmy-kanko wiya bon wiyelliela, Minnug baniin
geen? gatun noa wiya barun, Bukkamai yikora yantin kiiri, gatun
wiy(ia-yemmai yikora gakoyellaikan yantin kiiri ; gatun murrai
kauwa nura galoakan gutourakan nurunba.

13G AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

15. Gratun bara ba kiiri kotelliela, gatun yantinto kuriko ko-
telliela niurrug ka ba ko, bulbul la ba ko barun kin ba ko gik6-
ug loanneiiug, miiiarig noa Kritht ta, mirka keawaran.

16. loauneto noa wiya barun yantin ta, wiyelliela, Korimulliko
bag katan nurun bato ko ; wonto ba wakal kaiyukan kaiiwal-kau-
walkan gatoa kiloa uwaniin, niuvrarag korien bag porugbuggulli-
ko tugganug ko glkouniba ko; niuwoa ta korimanun nurun Marai
to yirri-yirri ko gatun koiyugko :

17. fPituon gikoumba mankillin mattara ba, gatun murkun noa
umanun bunkilligel laba gikoumba, gatun noa ka-umaniin fwiet
gikoumba tako kokera ko ; wonto ba tirri koiyug-banun wal noa
koiyug ka talokulli korien ta.

18. Tarai ta yantin kauwal-kauwal wiya noa: gatun wiyelli ta
ba ko barun kiiri.

19. Wonto noa ba Herodnug ftetraknug pirahna bon, noa boun
noun kin Herodia kin nukug ka Pilip-iimba gikoumba koti koba,
gatun yantin yarakai noa ba uma Herodto,

20. Yanti unni uma, Avirrigbakulki bon noa loannenug tjail ka.

21. Yakita barunbo karima yantin kuri, kakulla gaiya kori-
mulliela bon letliunug, gatun wiyelliela, moroko gaiya warugkal-
leun,

22. Gratun uwa baran Maraikan yirri-yirrikan murrin kiloa pur-
rougkan kiloa, gikoug kin; gatun wakal pulli kakulla moroko
tin, wiyelliela, Grintoa ta emmoumba yinal pitalmullikanne ; pital-
man bag giroug.

23. Gratun niuwoa bo I6thu kakilliliela wunal la f triakontaka gi-
ko-iimba, puntelliela bon yinal Yothepumba, wonto yinal Eli-umba;

ikc, (fee,
38. Wonto yinal Enoth-iimba, wonto yinal Thet-umba, wonto
yinal Adam-umba, wonto yinal Eloi-iimba.

WINTA IV.

GrATUN noa lethu warapalkan Maraikan yirri-yirri-kan, willugbo
kakulla loradan tabirug, gatun bon yutea Maraito korug kolag,

2. Nupitoara bon purreag ka f tettarakonta ka fdiabollo. Gratun
unta tai'a purreag ka keawai noa ta ba : gatun goloin ba unta
tara kakulla, kapirri gaiya noa kakulla.

3. Gratun noa fdiabollo wiya bon, Wiya, bi ba yinal Eloi koba,
wiyellia unni tunug ka-uwil koa kunto.

4. Gatun noa lethuko bon wiya, wiyelliela, Wupatoara ta, Kea-
wai kuri kanun moron kunto kabirug, wonto ba Eloi koba pulli
tabirug.

.5. Gratun noa fdiabollo yutea bon waita bulkarii ko, nanunbea
bou yantin piriwal koba purrai ta ba tanoa-kal-bo kurrakai.

G. Gratun noa fdiabollo wiya bon, yantin kaiyu kako gunun bag
giroug, gatun pitalmulliko gali tara ko ; koito ba gukuUa tia em-
moug ; gatun bag gutan ganiimbo pital bag ba katan.

THK GOSPEL liY LUKE, C. 4. 137

7. Grintoa ba wiyanun tia, kaniin bin yantin giroumba.

8. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Kauwa bi, Thatan, willug ka
emmougkin ; koito ba wupatoara, Wiyanun wal bi Yeh(3amig giro-
umba Eloinug, gatun gikoug bo gurranim wal bi.

9. Gatun noa bon yutea fHierothalem kolag, gatun wiinkulla bon
bulwarra ka fhieron ka, gatun wiya bon, Yinalla bi ba unni Eloi-
koba, warekulla bi unti birug bardn :

10. KuUa ba wupatoava ta, Wiyanun noa bax'un agelo ko nakilli-
ko giroug, golomulliko girorig;

11. Gatun bara bin nianiin matturro wokka lag, tinna koa gi-
roug pultea-kiin tunug ko yantin ta.

12. Gatun lethuko, \Niyelliela, wiya bon, Wiyatoara ta, Yanoa
wal bi numa yikora bon Yeli6anug Eloinug giroumba.

13. Gatun noa fdiabollo goloin kakulla unni tara nupatoara,
waita gaiya noa uwa gikoug kinbirug yakita ko.

14. Gatun noa lethuko willug ko kakulla, kaiyukan Maraikan,
Galilaia kako: gatun totog bon kakulla yantin ta purrai karig ka.

15. Gatun noa wiyelliela fthunagcig ka barun ka ta, pilal wiya-
toara bon yantinto.

16. Gatun noa uwa Nadharet tako, kakulla noa poaikulleim unta;
gatun, yanti katai noa ba, uwa noa fthunagog kako purreiig ka
thabbat, gatun garokea wokka lag wiyelliko.

17. Gatun gukulla bon fbiblion ta fpropet koba Ethaia koba :
gatun bugbugga noa ba fbiblion, nakulla gaiya noa giakai upatoara,

18. Marai ta unni Yeh6a koba emmoug kinba, kulla noa tia putia
wiyelliko Euagelion barun kin mirral la; yuka noa tia turon umulli-
ko niinkikan ko, wiyelliko barun wiintoara ko wamunbilliko, gatun
na-uwil koa bara munmin to, burug-buggulliko barun buntoara,

19. Wiyelliko * * * gurrabunbilliko wunal la pitalmullikanne
Yeh6a koba.

20. Gatun noa wirrig-bugga fbiblion, gatun noa gutea kan bon
umullikan ko, gatun yellawa baran, Gatun bara bon pimilliela
gaikug ko, yantin fthunagog ka ba ko.

21. Gatun noa barun tanoa bo wiya, Turin-pai-bea unni wiya
upatoara nurun kin gurreug ka unti purreag ka.

22. Gatun yantinto baiu gurrulliela bon, gatun kota bara pulli
murrai kurraka kabirug gikoug kinbirug. Gatun bara wiya, Wiya,
unni ta Yothepumba yinal 1

23. Gatun noa barun wiya, Nura ta wiyanun tia unni wiyelli-
kanne, Karj'ikal, turon bi umulla gintoa bo; gurra geen ba umatoara
Kapernaum ka, umulla bi unti yantin ta purrai ta giroumba ka.

24. Gatun noa wiya, Tuloa nurun bag wiyan, keawai fpropet
garrk korien gikoug ka ta purrai ta koti ka.

25. Wonto bag ba nurun wiyan tuloa, kauwal-kauwal ta mabo-
gun Itharael kuUeun purreag ka Elia-umba ka, yakita wirrigba-
kulla moroko ta wunal ta goro gatun yellenna f hek ta, tara-wara
kakulla yantin ta purrai karig ka ;

]38 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

26. Keawai Eliamig ynka ha barun kinko, wonto ba TLare})ta
kako Tliidoui kako iiukug kako niaboguu tako.

27. G itun kauMa'-kau%va'.kaii fleprokan Itliai-ael ka, yaki-kalai
Elicu koba fpropet koba ; keawaraii wakal baruu kinbirug turon
umatoara, wonto ba noa Naaruan Tliiu'iakal.

28. Gratuii yantin bara kakulla ftliuiiagog ka, gurra bara uiiui
tara, biikka kauwal kakulla,

29. Cratun bougkulltiia, gatun yipa bon kokei'a birug, gatun boii
yutea pita kako bulkara ko kokera ko wittitoara ko, wareka uwil
koa bara bon walkiggon baran.

30. Wonto noa ba uwolliela willi koa barun katoa, waita uwa.

31. G.itun noa uwa banin Ka]:»ernaiim kako, kokera ko Gali-
laia kako, gatun wiyelliela barun purrtag ka thabbat ka.

32. Q- itun bara kota wiyellikanne tin gikovimba tin ; kulla giko-
Umba pnlli kaiyukan.

33. Gr.itun kakulla wakal kiiri fthunagog ka, gikoug kin minki
ka marai kakulla fdiabol koba yarakai koba, gatun noa kaipulleiiri
wokka,

3-1. Wiyelliela, Ka uunbilla gearun; minnng baniia geen l»in gin-
toa letlni Nadharetkal? uwa bi gearun tetti-umulli koiag ? gimillin
bamig giutoa ta ; wakal bo ta yirri-yiri'i-kan Eloi koba.

35. G-itun bon lethuko koakuUa, wiyelliela, Kaiyellia bi, gatun
paikullea gikoug kinbirug. Gatun bon ba wareka willi ka fdiabol-
lo, paikullean noa gikoug kinbirug, gatun keawai bon tetti bun-
tima ba.

36. Gatun bara yantinto kota, gatun wiyelliela barabo-barabo,
Minarig unni wiyellikanne ! kulla noa wiya kaiyu-kan-to barun
tdiabolinig yarakaikan, gatun barun paikulleun warrai tako.

37. Gatun toti'ig gikoumba kakulla yantin toa purrai karig koa.

38. Gatun noa uwa fthunagog kabirug, gatun polugkulleuu Thi-
mon kinko kokera ko. Gatun tunkan Tlumonumlia nukug koba
luunni kakulla karinkan; g itun bon bara wiya bounnoun kai kolag.

39. Gatun noa garokea bounnoun kin tui'rugka, gatun noa koa-
kuUa karin; gatun wareka gaiya bounnoun karinto; gatun bountoa
bougkullean tanoa-kal-ljo, gatun umuUiela barun kaiko.

40. (jratun puniial ba pulug-kullile an, yantin bara niankulla niun-
ni-munni-kan gikoug kinko ; gitun noa wupilleJin barun kin mat-
tara yantin ta, gatun turon uma barun.

41. Gatun fdiabol kauwal-kauwal ]jaikulleun kauwal-kauwal la-
birug, kaibulliela, Gintoa ta Kritht ta, yinal ta Eloi-koba. Gatun
noa barun koakulla wiya korien ; kulla wal bara gimilltun bon
Kritht ta noa unnoa.

42. Gatun purr( ag ba kakulla, waita noa uwa korarig ; gatun
bara kiiriko tiwa bon, gatun uwa gikoug kin, gatun numa bara
bon, keawai noa waita wapa barun kinbirug.

43. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyanun bo ta wal bag piriwa^gel
la Eloi koba taraikan ta kokera ; kulla wal tia giliko yuka.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 5. 139

WINTA Y.

Gatun yakita kakulla, warapa bon ba bara kuriko, garrulliko wiyel-
likanne Eloi koba, garokea noa pitta ka waraka Gennetliaret ta,

2. Gratun nakulla buloara murrinauwai kakilliela wara ka; won-
to ba bara niakorobau waita uwa murrinauwai tabirug. gatun bai'a
umulliela pika uiirkun.

3. Gatuii noa uwa wakal la murrinauwai ta Thimon koba ka,
gatun wiya bon yogyog umullia purrai tabirug. Gatun noa yell-
awa banin, gatun wiyelliella barun kiid murrinauwai kabirug.

4. Gatun goloin noa ba wiya, wiya noa Tliimonnug bon, Tuir-
kullia pirriko kako, gatun wura pika nurunba mankilliko.

5. Gatun Thimonto, wiyelliela, wiya bon, Piriwal, uma geen to-
koi ta yanti-katai, gatun man koi'ien; kulla bi wiyan wupiniin wal
bag baran pika.

6. Gatun uma bara ba unni, kokoi-kokoi bara uma makoro katai
kal ; gatun pika kilpaiya.

7. Gatun bara wokkaimulle jn bardnba tarai taba murrinauwai
taba ; wa-uwil koa barun wintamulliko. Gatun bara uwa, gatun
"warapal bara wupea buloara murrinauwai, pillukuUiela gaiya bara.

8. Nakulla noa ba Thimonto Peterko, puntimulle'm noa letliu
kin wai'ombug ka, wiyelliela, Ela Pii'iwal ! yurig bi wolla emmo-
ug kinbirug ; kulla bag yarakairan kuri katan.

9. Kulla noa kota, gatun yantin bara gikoug katoa ba, kaiiwal-
lin makorrin mankulla bara ba.

10. Gatun yantibo bara Yakobo gatun loanne, yinal ta Lebedaio
koba, mankillai bula ba Thimon katoa. Gatun lethuko noa wiya
bon Tliimonnug, Kinta kora bi; yakita birug maniui wal bi barun
kuri.

11. Gatun mankulla bara ba murrinauwai baiVm purrai tako,
wdnkulla bara yantin, wirroba bon bara.

12. Gatun yakita kakulla, kakulla noa ba tarai ta kokeni, a !
wakal kuri kauwal fleprokan ; nakilliela noa lethunug puntimul-
lean g)arra ko, gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Piriwal, wiya, bi ba
kaiyukan kanun, umaniin bi tia turon.

13. Gatun noa bon wupillejn mattara gikoug kin, wiyelliela,
Kauwa ; turon bi kauwa. G^tun tanoa-kal-bo fleprotawareka gi-
koug kinbirug ko.

14. Gatun noa bon wiya, wiy^akun koa noa barun k 'iri ; wonto
ba yirug uwa tugunV)illiko gintoa bo fhiereu kinko, gatun guwa
kulla bi turon umatoara. yanti to Mothe ka noa ba wiya, gur-
rulliko kakilliko barun.

15. "VYonta ba yantin kakulla totog gikoug yantin toa purrai
tea : gatun kauwalko naro uwa giirrulliko, gatun turon kakilliko
barun munni-munni gikoug kinbirug ko.

16. Gatun noa uwa korug kako, gatun wiyelliela.

17. Yakita kakulla tarai ta purrcag ka, wiyelliela noa ba,
yellawa ba Parithaioi gatun fdidathkaloi wiyellikanne koba, yantin.

140 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

tabirug kokera birug Galilaia kabirug, gatun ludaia kabirug,
gatun fHierothaleui kabirug; gatun kaiyuto Yeli6a-umV)a kakulla
turon iiinulliko barun.

18. A ! gatun bara kiiii wakal kuri kurrea pirrikilligel la luunni-
kan karal; gatun nuina bara bon kurrilliko kokera kolag, gatun
wuukiUiko bon gikoug kinko niikan tako.

19. Gratun keawai bara napa wonnen kurrilliko murrug kolag
konara tin, uwa liara wokka lag kokera bulwarra ka, gatun wupea
bon baran kulla koa willi-willi kako pirrikilligelkan lethu kin mi-
kan ta.

20. Gatun nakulla noa ba kotellikanne barunba, wiya noa bon,
Ela kiiri, yarakai giroumba wareka giroug kinbirug.

21. Gatun bara fgarammateu gatun Paritliaioi kota, wiyelliela,
Gan-ke unni wiyan ba yarakai ? Ganto kaiyu-kan-to warekulliko
yarakai, wonto ba wakallo Eloito ?

22. Wonto noa ba lethuko gurra kotatoara barunba, niuwoa
"sviya wiyelliela barun, Minarig tin nura kotelliela bulbiil lako
nurun kin ba ko.

2-3. Wonnen murrarag wiyelliko, Giroiiniba ko yarakaito ware-
ka giroug kinbirug ; ga wiyelliko, Bougkullia gatun uwolliko?

24. Wonto ba gurra-uwil koa nura kaiyukan noa yinal kuri
koba purrai taba yarakai warekulliko (wiya noa munni karal),
Wiyan banug, bougkullia gatun niara giroumba pirrikilligel, gatun
waita unwolla giroug ka tako kokera ko.

25. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo bougulleun noa barun kin mikan ta,
gatvni mankulla unnug gikoumba pirrikeanoa ba, gatun waita uwa
gikoug ka tako kokera ko koti kako, pitalmulliela bon Eloinug.

26. Gatun yantin bara kotelliela, gatun bara gaiya pitalma bon
Eloinug, gatun kinta lag bara kauwal, katan wiyelliela, Nakulla
geen minarig konein buggai.

27. Gatun yakitayukita waita uwa noa, gatun nakulla wakal
ftelonenug, giakai yitirra Lebi, yellawollin wunkilligel la ; gatun
noa wiya bon, YettiwoUa tia.

28. Gatun noa wiinkulla yanti bo bougkulleun, gatun noa bon
yettiwa.

29. Gatun Lebiko bon noa upea kauwal takillikanne gikoug
ka ta kuti ka kokera : gatun kauwal kakulla konara telonai ko
gatun tarai to yellawa barun katoa.

30. Wonto ba barunba fgarammateu gatun Paritliaioi koakillan
bara barun wirrobullikan gikoumba, wiyelliela, Minarig tin nura
tatan gatun pittan barun katoa ftflonai koa gatun yarakai toa ?

31. Gatun noa letliuko wiya barun, wiyelliela, Bara ba moron
tai katan keawai bara wiyan karakal ; wonto ba bara munni
katan.

32. Uwa bag wiya korien ko niurrog taiko, wonto ba yarakai
willug ko minki kakilliko.

33. Gatun wiya bon bara, Minarig tin bara mupai katan mur-

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 5. 141

rinmurrln wirrobullikan loaune-uraba, gatun wiyan wiyellikaiine,
gatun yantibo bara Parithaioi koba ; wonto ba giroiimba ko tatan
gatun pittan 1

34. Q-atun noa wiya barun, Wiya, nura kaiyukan mupai umul-
liko barun wonnai kakillaikanne, yakita-kalai poribai ba katan
barun katoa ba 1

35. "VVonto ba purreag kanun wal, manun wal bon ba poribai
barun kinbirug, gatun yakita gaiya bara mupai-kakillinun pur-
reag ka unta tai'a.

36. Gratun wiya noa barun wakal f parabol giakai : Iveawai kuri
ko wupillinun buggaikal korokiil la ; ga ba, yanti buggaikal yiir-
bugganiin gaiya wal, gatun pontol buggaikal labii'ug keawai koro-
kal kiloa katan.

37. Gatun keawai kuri ko wupiniin buggaikal f wain pika ka ko-
rokal la; kulla buggaikiillo potopai-yaniin wal pika ka, gatun kiroa-
bullinun, gatun pika kimun yarakai.

38. Wonto ba buggaikal fwain wunun wal buggaikal la pika ka;
gatun buloara murrarag katan.

39. Gatun keawai kuri koba pittanun korokal fwain keawai
noa manun buggaikal fwain, kulla noa wiyan korokal ta muiTarag.

WINTA VI.

Gatun yakita thabbat ka buloara, yukita thabbat ka kurri-kurri,
uwa gaiya noa murrug koayeaigel loa ; gatun bara wirrobulli-kan-
to gikoug ka to tittia woUug yeai, gatun takulla mirro-mirroma
mattara barun kin.

2. Gatun taraikanto Parithaioi koba wiya barun, Minarig tin nu-
I'a uman unnoa keawaran murrarag umulliko unti tara purreag ka
thabbat ka 1

3. Gatun noa lethuko wiya, wiyelliela, Wiya nura, wiya nura,
wiya ba unni, Dabid-to noa ba upa, niuwoabo ba kapirri kakilla
gatun bara gikoug katoa ;

4. Uwa noa ba kokera kai Eloi koba, gatun niankulla takulla
nulai nakillikanne, gatun gukulla barun gikoug katoa ba ko, kea-
waran murrarag takilliko, wonto ba barunba ko f liiereu koba 1

5. Gatun noa barun wiya, Tinal ta kiiri koba, piriwal noa ka-
tan yantin ko thabbat ko.

6. Gatun yakita kakulla tarai ta thabbat ta, uwa gaiya noa
f thunagog ka gatun wiyelliela : gatun wakal kiiri unta kakulla,
mattai'a gikoumba tiigkagkeri tirrai kakulla.

7. Gatun bara f garammateuko gatun Parithaioiko tumimea bon,
wiya bon noa ba turon umulla purreag ka thabbat ta ; wiyayem-
ma-uwil koa bara bon.

8. Wonto noa ba kota barunba gurrulliela, wiya bon noa mat-
tarakan tirraikan, Bougkullia, gatun garokilla willi ka. Gatun
noa bougkulleun, gatun garokea.

9. Wiya gaiya noa lethuko barun, Wiyaniin wal bag nurun

142 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

iinni ; wiya tuloa ta uniulliko, inuiTarag ga yarakai umulliko pur-
rea^J: ka tliabbat ta 1 nioion uniulliko, ga wai-ekulliko?

10. Gatun nakilliela kari-kaii yaiitiu baruii, wiya bon noa, Tu-
tullia bi mattara girouniba. Gatun u])ulleun gaiya noa, gatuu mat-
tira gaiya bon turon unia yanti tarai ba.

11. Gatun bara warapalkan bukkakan kakulla; gatun niurrarag
■wiyellan barabo-baiabo, niinnug baniin bara bon ba letliunug.

12. Yakita unta purreag ka, uwa noa bulkara kolag wiyelliko,
yanti-katai noa tokui ta wiyelliela bon Eloi-nug.

13. Gatun yakita purreag ta, kaai ba noa barun wirrobullikan
gikouuiba; girimuUeun noa barun kinbirug fuodeka niuwoa, barun
wiya giakai yitirra fapothol ;

14. Tliinionnug (wiya noa giakai yitirra Peternug), gatun giko-
uuiba kurrak6g Andrea, gatun Yakobo gatun Joanne, gatun Pilip
gatun Biltolomai,

15. Mattaio gatun Thoma, gatun Yakobo Alpai-umba, gatun
Thimon giakai wiya yitirra Dhelote,

IG. Gatun ludatli kurrakog ta Yakobo-umba, gatun ludath
Itbakariot, niuwoa gakoiyaye noa.

17. Gatun noa uwa baran barun katoa, gatun garawan tako
garokea noa, gatun konaro wirrobullikan gikoiunba, gatun kauwal
konara kuri ludaiakal, gatun fHierotlialemkal, gatun korowatari
Turokal gatun Tliidonikal, uwa bara gurrulliko bon, gatun turon
uniulliko barun ba munni ;

18. Gatun bai'a wonkalman yarakai to marai to : gatun barun
uma turon.

19. Gatun yantinto konaro numuUa bon bara ; kulla murrarag
paibea gikoug kinbirug, gatun noa turon uma yantin barun.

20. Gatun noa wokkalan nakuUa gaikug ko gikoumba wirro-
bullikan, gatun wiya, Murrarag uniatoara niirralko ; kulla nurun
ba piriwalgel la Eloi koba.

21. Munarag umatoara nura kapirrikan yakita : kulla nura wa-
rapan wal kakilliko. Murrarag umatoara nura tunkillin yakita,
kulla nui'a kintellinun wal.

22. Murrarag umatoara nura, yarakai umaniin gaiya nurun
kiiri ko, gatun warekanun nurun, gatun yarakai wiyamin nurun,
gatun warekanun yitirra nuruuba yanti yai-akai ba, gikoug kin
birug yinal k 'iri koba kabirug.

23. Pital nura kauwa gatun uutellia unta purreag ka ; kulla
nuriinba gukillikanne kauwal katan moroko kaba; yanti uma bara
biyugbai tako barun ka to barun fpropetnug.

24. Ya]>al nura porulkan kitan ! kulla nura mankulla ta pital
nurunl)a.

25. Yapal nura warakau ! kulla nura kapiriikanun. Yapal nura
kintellan yakita ! kulla nura girellinun gatun tunkillin I'ln.

26. Yapal nura, murrarag wiyan:in ba yantinto kuriko nurun !
yantibo barunba biyugbai ta ko barun gakoyaye fpropetnug.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 6. 143

27. Griakai bag wiyan nurun gurrullikan, Pitalumulla barun ya-
rakai willug nuriinba ; murrarag umulla barun yarakai nurunba
uinan,

28. Murrarag barun wiyella koatan nurunba ; gatiin wiyella bon
Eloinug wiyella barun yarakai nurunba uuian.

29. (jratun bunnun ba wakal gan kullo tarai to, tarai gukillia ;
gatun niuwoa manim wurabil giroumba, wiya yikora wiwi man-
ki yikora unni doan.

30. Guwa barun yantin ko wiyellinun ba giroug kin ; gatun
niuwoa ba mankulla tullokan giroumba wiya yikora kari bon.

31. Gratun unnoa la kotan nura la murrarag umulliko barun
kuri nurun, umulla nura yantibo ta barun.

32. KuJla nura pitalman barun pitalman nurun, minarigko-ke
unnoa 1 kulla bara yarakai-kan-to yantibo unian.

33 Gatun murrarag nura umanun ba barun gali murrarag nurun
uman, minarigko-ke unnoa'? kulla bara yarakai-kan-to yantibo
uman.

34. Gatun mumbiuun nura ba barun kotan nura willugbo upil-
liko barun, minarigko-ke unnoa '? kulla bara yarakai willug mum-
billan barun willugbo upilliko yantibo.

35. Wonto ba nura pitalumulla barun yarakai willug nurunba ;
gatun murrarag umulla, gatun mumbilla kotan keawai willugbo
iipulliko ; gatun gutoara kauwal kanun nurunba, gatun nura won-
nai kanun wokka koba ; kulla noa murrarag uman barun wiyapaiye
korien gatun barun yarakai.

36. Kauwa nura minkikan, yantibo Biyugbai nurunba minki ka-
tan.

37. Kota yikora yarakai, gatun keawai nurun kotaniin yarakai :
pirriralmai yikora nura, gatun keawai nurun pirriralmanun : ware-
killa nura, gatun nurunba warekanun.

38. Guwa, gatun gunun wal nurun ; warapal, upulla baran, ga-
tun toloniuUa kaumulliko, gatun kiroabullin banin, gunun wal
kiiri nurun gielkag ka nurun kin. Kulla yantibo upitoara nura
upuUin, upea kaniin nurun.

39. Gatun noa wiya barun wakal fparabol; wiya, munminto yu-
tinijn tarai munmin? wiya, wal bula-buloarabo warakullinun baran
kirun tako 1

40. Wirrobullikan ta keawaran noa kauwal korien gikoug kin
piriwal la ; wonto ba tuloa katan, kanun noa yanti piriwal ba gi-
koug ba.

41. Gatun minarig tin bi natan morig giroug ka ta ba gaikug
kaba kurrikog kaba, wonto ba na korien bi tulkirri gaikug kaba
giroug kinba koti kaba 1

42. Ga, yakoai bi wiyan bon kurrik6g giroug ba, Biggai, ya-
koai tia porugbuggabunbilla morig giroug kinba gaikug kaba,
keawai bi ba nakillin tulkirri giroug kaba? Gintoa gakoiyaye !
burugbug gala kurri-kurri tulkirri gaikug kaba giroug kinba koti

Hi AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

kaba, gatun nanun gaiya bi nuirra-murrarag umulliko morig gai-
kug kaba kurrikug kaba giroiig ka ta ba.

43. Kulla ba kiilai murrarag ta katan, keawai yeai yarakai
upin ; ga keawai kiilai yarakai ta katan, yeai luurrarag upin.

44. Wonto ba yantin kiilai gimilliko koti tin yeai tin ; kulla
bara kiiri man korien kokug tulkirri-tulkirri tin, ga titi korien
bara fbotru niaro tin.

45. Muvraragko noa kuriko wnpillin noa murrarag wunkilligel
labirug minki kabirugbulbul labirug gikoug kinbirug ; gatun noa
yarakai wupullin noa yarakai wunkilligel labirug yarakai ta birug
minki kabirug bi'ilbiil labirug gikoug kinbirug ; kulla gikoiimba
ko kurraka ko wiyan kauwal labirug ko biilbul labirug ko.

40. Gatun minarig tin nura tia wiyan, Piriwal, Piriwal, gatun
uwa korien nura unnoa tara wiyan nurun bag ba,

47. Gan tia ba uwanun emmoug kin, ^atun gurran wiyellita em-
nioiimba, gatun galoa unian, tiigunbinun bag nurun gan kiloa noa :

48. Niuwoa ba wakal yanti kiiri kiloa, wittia noa kokera gatun
pinnia pirriko, gatun w'upea tugga tunug ka ; gatun poaikulleun ba
tunta-tunta, w^aiumbul murra koribibi kokeroa, gatun geawai tolo-
ma pa ; kulla wal wittia tunug ka.

49. Wonto ba gurran gatun uma korien, kiiri kiloa noa wittia
kokera tugga korien purrai ta : waiumbul murra koribibi gali, gatun
warakulleim tanoa-kal-bo; kauwalla unnoa warakullin kokera koba.

WINTA YII.
WiYA noa ba goloin gikoumba wiyellikanne, mikan ta yantin ta
kiiri ka, uwa noa Kapernaun kako.

2. Gatun tai'ai koba fkapiitin koba umullikan munni Icakilliela,
mulugkilliliela tetti, pitiil umatoara noa gikoumba.

3. Gatun, gurrii noa ba lethunug, wiyabunbea noa barun garo-
kiil Hebtiraioi koba, wiyelliela Ijon uwa-uwil koa noa pirbuggulliko
gikoumba ko umullikan ko.

4. Gatun uwa bara ba letliu kin, wiya gaiya bon bara tanoa-kal-
bo, wiyelliela, Murrarag noa uma-uwil koa noa bon yanti :

5. Kulla noa pitalman geai'i'mba kiiri, gatun noa wittia gearun
fthunagog.

6. Uwa gaiya noa letliu barun katoa. Gatun kalog korien ta
noa ba kakulla kokera kolag, yuka noa barun fkapatinto koti ta
gikoug kin, wiyelliela bon, Piriwal, yanoa bi ; kulla bag keawaran
murrarag korien uwa-uwil koa bi emmoug kin kokera :

7. Yaki tin bag kota murrarag korien bag uwolliko giroug kin-
ko ; wonto ba wiyella wakal wiyellikanne, gatun emmoiimba umul-
likan pirkullinim wal.

8. Kulla bag ba kaiyukan wiyelliko, emmoug kinba bara ka-
killin farmy-kan ; gatun bag wiya wakal, Yurig, gatun waita gai-
ya noa uwa ; gatun tarai, Kaai, gatun noa uwa tanan ; gatun em-
moiimba umullikan, T^mulla unni, gatun uma gaiya noa.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 7. 145

9. lethuko iioa ba gurra unni tara, kotelliela noa gikoug, gatuii
waiTakulleun noa, wiya gaiya noa barun wirroba bon ba, Wiyan
bag nurun, keawaran bag na pa yanti gurrnllikanne kauwal, kea-
wai yanti Itliarael la katan.

10. Gatun bara yukatoara, willugbo uwolliela kokera kolag,
nakuUa bon umullikan munni birug pirbuggatoara.

11. Gratun yakita purreag ka yukita, uwa noa kokeroa, giakai
yitirra Nain ; gatun kauwal uwa gikouniba wirrobullikan gatun
taraikan kiiri gikoug katoa.

12. Gratun uwa noa ba papai pulogkulligel la kokera kolag, ga,
tetti kulwon kurrilliela kiiri warai kolag, wakal bo ta yinal tunkan
koba bounnoun ba, gatun mabogun bountoa, gatun kauwal-kau-
Aval kiiri kokera birug uwa bounnovm katoa.

13. Gatun nakulla bounnoun noa ba Piriwullo, gurrirra boun-
noun noa kakulla, gatun wiya gaiya noa bounnoun, Tiigki yikora.

14. Gatun uwa gaiya noa, numa kurrilligel ; gatun bara kurria
bon ba gakea korun. Gatun noa wiya, Wuggurra, wiyan banug,
BougkuUia.

15. Gatun niuwoa tetti kabirug yellawa, gatun tanoa-kal-bo wi-
ya. Gatun willugbo bon noa gukulla bounnoun kin gikoumba ka
tunkan ta.

16. Gatun bara kakulla kinta yantin ; gatun bara bon pittilman
Eloinug, wiyelliela, Kauwal fpropet ta paipea gearun kin, gatun
noa Eloito nakulla gikoumba kiiri.

17. Gatun unni totog gikoumba kakulla yantin to ludaia koa,
gatun yantin toa purrai karig koa.

18. Gatun loanne-umba-ko wirrobullikanto wiya bon unni tara.

19. Gatun noa loanneto wiya bulun wirrobullikan gikoumba,
yuka bulun letliu kinko, wiyelliko, Gintoa ta uwanun 1 ga, na-tea
kanun geen taraikan ?

20. Uwa bara ba kiiri gikoug kinko wiya bara, loanneto kori-
muUikanto gearun yuka giroug kinko, wiyelliko, Gintoa ta uwa-
nun 1 ^a, na-tea kaniin taraikan ?

21. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo fhora ka pirbugga noa kauwal-kauwul
munni-munni, gatun marai yarakaikan; gatun kauwal-kauwal mun-
min uma noa barun nakilliko,

22. Wiya gaiya noa barun lethu, wiyelliela, Waita lag nura,
gatun wiyella bon loannenug unni tara nakulla nura ba gatun
gurra ; munmin-tabirug-ko natan, wiirwiir-birug-ko uwan, wamun-
wamun-tabirug turon kakulla, wogkal-labirug gurran, tetti-kabirug
bougkulleun, barun mirral ko wiyan ta Euagelion.

23. Gatun pital-umatoara yantinto niuwara korien kaniin em-
moug kin.

24. Gatun waita ka ba bara ba puntimai loanne-umba, wiya
gaiya noa barun kiiri loannenug bon, Minarig tin nura korug
kolag nakilliko ? kogka toloman wibbi ko 1

146 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

25. Minarig ko nura uwa korug kolag nakilliko ? wakal upul-
leun kiui poitog korikin to? A! bara upuUeun konein to ^atun,
bara murrarag katan takilliko, yellawa bara ])iri\valg6l la.

26. Minarig ko nura uwa korug kolag nakilliko? wakal fpropet?
Kauwa, wiyan nuruu bag kauwallan noa ba fpi'opet kiloa.

27. (jrali noa wiyatoara upa unni, A! yukan bag puntimai ein-
moumba giroug kin mikan ta, umanun wal noa yapug giroug.

28. Kulla bag wiyan nurun, Keawai fpropet kauwal katan yanti
loanne noa ba koriiiiullikan porkullitoara nukug labirug : niu-
woa warea ta katan })iriwalgel la Eloi koba ka, kauwal noa katan
niuwoa kiloa.

29. Gatun yantinto kiiriko gurra bon, gatun bara ftelonai, pital-
ma bon Eloi-nug, korimatoara katan bara loanne kaibirug kari-
niulli birug.

30. Wonto ba bara Parithaioi gatun bara fnomikoi gurramaiga
wiyellikanne Eloi kola barun kin, keawai korimatoara korien.
loanne kai.

31. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Yakoai kiloa bara kuri untikal
willuggel 1 gatun minarig kiloa bara?

32. Bara yanti wonnai kiloa yellawollin gukilligel la, gatun
kaipullin taraikan, gatun wiyellin, Tirkima geen nurun, gatun
keawai nura untelli korien ; minki geen kakuUa nurun, gatun
keawai nura tugkilli korien.

33. Kulla noa loanne korimuUikan uwa, keawai kunto ta pa
ga twain keawai pitta pa ; gatun nura wiyan, tclial)ol noa gikoug
katoa ba.

34. Yinal ta kirikoba uwa takilliko gatun pittelliko, jlatun
nura wiyan, A ! mataye kiiri unni, gatun twain pittaye, koti ta
ttelonai koba gatun yarakai willug koba !

3.5. Wonto ba yantinto wonnaito guraki koba ko piralman bon
guraki.

36. Gatun wakallo Parithaioi koba ko wiya bon ta-uwil koa noa
gikoug katoa. Gatun uwa noa kokera Parithaio koba, gatun yella-
wa noa baran takilliko.

37. Gatun, a ! gapal wakal yarakaikun bountoa gurra bountoa ba
Tethunug bon yellawai takilli taba kokera Parithaio koba ka, man-
•kuUa bountoa wiinkilligel alabathro putillikanne,

38. Gatun garokea bountoa tinna ka bulka ka gikoung kin,
tuilkillin, gatun bountoa puntia bounnoun ka to gurrun to tinna
gikoumba, ^atun pirripa bounnoun ka to kittug ko wollug koba
ko bounnoun ka to, gatun biigbugka bon tinna gikoumba, gatun
putia bon putilligel lo.

39. Yakita nakulla noa ba unni gali Parithaio, wiya bon ba,
wiyelleiin gaiya noa niuwoabo minki ka, wiyelliela, Unni kiiri tpro-
pet ba noa gurra pa noa wonta-kan-to ka gapallo numa bon ; kulla
bountoa yaraikan.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 7. 147

40. Gratun lethuko noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela bon, Thimon,
wiya-uwil koa banug. Gatun noa wiya, Piriwal, wiyellia.

41. Tarai ta kakulla gukillikan wakal buloara mumbitoara giko-
limba ; wakallo noa mumbille 'in f pentakothioi fclenari, gatun tarai
ta f pentekonta mumbilleun.

4'2. Gratun keawai bula gupaiye pa ba yarug ka bon, wareka gaiya
noa bulun ba. Wonta kin bulun kinbirug pitalmaniin kauwal bon !

43. Thimonto noa wiya, wiyelliella, Mirka gikoug wareka noa
ba kauwal. Gatun noa wiya bon, Kota bi tuloa.

44. (latun noa warrakulleun gapal ko, gatun wiya Thim')nnug
Natan bi unni gapal 1 uwa bag kokera ko giroug ka ta ko, keawai
bi tia gupa bato tinna ko ; wonto bountoa ba puntia tia tinna
bounnoun ka to gurrun to, gatun watia bounnoun ka to wollug
kabirug ko kittug ko.

45. Keawai bi tia bugbiig ka pa : wonto ba unni gapal, biig-
biig-kulliela tia tinna yakita birug uwa bag ba.

46. Keawai bi puti pa emmoumba wollug kipai to, wonto ba
unni gapal putia emmoumba tinna kipai to.

47. Giakai tin banug Aviyan, Yarakai umatoara bounnoun ba
kauwal ta warekatoara bounnoun ba ; kulla bounnoun pital-ma
kauwal: kulla bariinba warekatoara warea, pital-ma bara warea.

48. (jat'.ui noa bounnoun wiya, Wareka umatoara giroiiinba yara-
kai.

49. Gatun bara yellawan gikoug kinba takilli taba, bara bo
wiyatan minki ka, Gan-ke unni warekan noa yarakai.

50. Gatun noa bounnoun wiya, Gurrulli ta birug giroiimLa
moron bi kiitan; yurug bi pital kakilliko.

WIXTA YIII.

Gatun yakita yukita uwa noa yantin toa purrai toa kokera, wiyel-
liela gatun tugunbilliela totog pitalmullikanne fbatliileia koba
Eloi koba : gatun bara fdodeka ta gikoug katoa ba.

2. Gatun bara nukug taraikan, turon umatoara marai yarakai
tabirug gatun munni kabirug, Mari yitirra giakai Magdalakalin,
bounnoun kinbirug paipea fdiabol fbepta ta,

3. (jatun loanna porikunbai Kutlia-iimba, Herod-iimba umuUi-
kan, gatun Thuhanna, gatun taraikan kauwal, gala bax'a gukulla
bon untakal tuUokan ba birug barun kai.

4. Gatun uwittillin bara ba kiiri kauwal-kauwal, gatun uwa gi-
koug kinko, yantin tabirug kokera birug, wiya noa unni fparabol :

5. Upillikan noa uwa yeai ko upulliko gikoumba ko ; gatun
upulliela noa ba, winta porkuUeiin k.iiyinkon ta yapug ka ; gatun
waita-wa baran, gatun tibbinto takulla moroko tinto.

6. Gatun winta porkullein tunug ka ; gatun poaikullejn ba
wokka lag tetti gaiya kakulla, koito ba bato korien ta.

7. Gatun winta porkulletin tulkirri-tulkirra; gatun poaikullean
tulkirri-tulkirri matti, gatun murrugkama.

148 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

8. Gatun tarai ta porkulk'un puriai murrarag purrai ta, gatun
poaikulleiin wokka lag, gatun yeai kurria fhekaton ta. Gratun
noa ba wiya mini tara, kaaijjulleun gaiya noa, Niuwoa ba gurreug
kan katan gurrulliko gurrunbunbilla bon.

y. (xatun wirrobulli-kan-to gikoumba ko wiya bon, wiyelliela,
Minarig ke unni fparabol ?

10. (jiatun noa wiya, Gutan gurrulliko nurun pirriral fbathileia
koba Eloi-umba ; wonto barun tarai ta fparabol la ; natan bara
keawai bai-a na pa, gatun gurran bara keawai bara gimilli pa.

11. Giakai ta unni fparabol : Yeai ta wiyellikaune ta Eloi koba.

12. Bai-a kaiyinkon taba yapug kaba gurrullikan bara; uwa
gaiya noa f diabol, gatun mankuUa wiyellikainie barun ba minki
kabirug bulbul labirug, gurrea-kun koa bara gatun moron koa bara
katea-kun.

1 3. Baia tunug kaba gurra bara ba wiyellikanne pitalkan to ;
gatun unni tara wirra korien katan, kota bara warea ba, gatun
yakita nuniullikanne ta waraka gaiya bara.

li. Gatun unnoa tara porkuUeun tulkirri-tulkirra, bara ba
gurra, waita uwa gaiya, gatun niurrugkania umullikanneto gatun
porollo gatun pirunto moron koba, gatun yeai kurri korien mui'-
rarag kakilliko.

15. Wonto ba unnoa murrarag kaba purrai taba, bara ba gurra
wiyellikanne, tuloakan gatun muiTaragkan bulbulkan, tuman bara,
gatun yeai kurrin murroi to.

16. Keawai kiiriko wirrogbanun kaibug, A^iitinian gaiya tenti
ko, ga wutiniin bara ka pinkilligella ; wonto ba wupiniin kaibug-
gel la, na-uwil koa bara uwollita ba ko kaibug.

17. Kulla yantin ta getti birug gurraniin wal kakilliko ; gatun
yantin ta yuropatoara birug gurraniin wal kakilliko, gatun paipi-
nun wal.

18. Yakoai nura gurrulla ; kulla gikoug kinba guniin wal giko-
ug kin ; gatun keawai noa ka korien, mantillinun Aval bon gikoug
kinbirug unnoa ta paipitoara gikoug kinba.

19. Gatun tunkan gikoug kinko gatun bara koti ta gikoumba
uwa, gatun keawai bara wa pa gikoug kinko konarrin, kulla
kauwal waitawollan.

20. Wintako bon wiya giakai, Garokillin bara wai'rai taba giko-
umba tunkan gatun k6ti ta, na-uwil koa bara giroug.

21. Gatun noa wiyayelleiin barun, wiyelliela, Unni tara tia ka-
tan emmoumba tunkan gatun koti ta, gurrullikan wiyellikanne
Eloi koba gatun umullikan.

22. Gatun yakita tarai ta purreag ka, uwa noa murrinauwai ta
ko gikoug katoa wirrobullikan toa gikoumba ; gatun noa barun
wiya, Waita geen waiga-uwil kaiyin kolag Avara kolag. Gatun bara
tolka mureug kolag.

23. Wonto ba bara UAVolliela, pirrikea noa kogog ; gatun wibbi ka-
uwal kakulla w-ara ka; gatun bara warapal, gatun kinta kakilliela.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 8, 149

24. Gatuii bara uwa gikoug kin, boiigbu^ga gaiya bon, wiyel-
lielia, Pii-iwal, piriwal, tetti kolag geen ! BoiigkuUein gaiya noa,
gatun wij-a noa wibbi, gatun tulkun wombul koba ; gatun korun
kakulla, gatun yurag gaiya kakulla.

25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wonnug-ke nurun kotellita "? Gatun
bara kinta kakulla, kotelliela, wiyalan taraikan-taraikan, Wonta-
kan unni kiiri I kulla noa -sviyan wibbi gatun bato, gatun guxTa
gaiya bon.

26. Gatun bara uwa purrai tako Gadaren tako, kaiyin taba Gali-
laia kaba.

27. Gatun noa ba yankulleiin purrai tako, nuggurrawa bon
wakallo kiiriko kokera birug ko, fdiabolkan noa katalla yuraki,
gatun keawai noa upillijia kirrikin to, keawai noa katan kokera,
nikki ka noa kakulla.

28. Nakulla noa ba letliunug, kaaibullein gaiya noa, gatun
puntimulleun gikoug kin mikan ta, gatun wokka wiyell^iin wiyel-
liela, Minnug banun ke bi tia, lethu, Yinal ta Eloi koba wokka
kaba koba 1 Yanoa bi tia piralmai yikora.

29. (Kulla noa wiya marai yarakaikan paikulliko kiiri kabirug.
Kulla bon mankulla murrin-murrin ; gatun wirria bon tibon ko ;
gatun noa tiirbugga tibon, gatun yuaipea bon fdiabollo korug
kolagV

30. Gatun lethuko noa wij'a bon, wiyelliela, Wonnen bi yitirra ?
Gatun noa wiya, fLejun bag ; kulla kauwal-kauwal fdiabol uwa
murrarig gikoug kinko minki kako.

31. Gatun bara bon wiya, Yanoa, wiya yikora gearun bi pirriko
kolag kakilliko.

32. Gatun kakulla untakal wirrul takilliela bulkara ba ko; gatun
bara wiya bon pulogkulliko barun minki kako fporak kako. Gatun
noa wamunbea barun.

33. Uwa gaiya bara waita fdiabol minki tabirug kuri kabirug,
gatun pulogkulleiin fporak ka koiro ka; gatun wirrul murra baran
karakai pirriko koba wara kako, kurrin to gaiya bara.

34. Nakulla bara ba tamunbea unnoa tara umatoara, murra
gaiya bara, gatun waita uwa kokera kolag, gatun gorug kolag ;
wiya gaiya galoa.

35. Uwa gaiya bara nakilliko umatoara ko ; gatun uwa lethu
kin, gatun nakulla bara bon unnoa kuri, paipitoai-a birug bara
waita uwa, yellawoUiela lethu ka ta tinna ka, kirrikinkan gatun
tuloa gurrullikan ; gatun kinta bara kakulla.

36. Yantinto nakulla unnoa wiya barun, yanti bon ba turon
uma fdiabolkan kauwalkan.

37. Gatun yantinto konaro purrai tako Gadaren tako wiya
gaiya bon waita uwolliko barun kinbirug ; kulla bara kintakan
kauwal kakulla. Gatun noa uwa murrinauwai tako, gatun wul-
luicbo kakulla.

150 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

38. Gatun unnoa kiiri kabii'ug t<^iabol bai-a waita uwa, wiya
bon ka-uwil koa noa gikoug katoa : wonto noa lethuko yuka bou
waita, wiyelliela,

39. Willugbo bi wolla giroug ka tako kokei-a ko, gatun gurra-
l)unbilliko unnoa tai'a uina noa ba Eloito giroug. Gatun noa
waita uwa, gatun wiya yantin toa kokeroa, yanti letliuko noa
uma bon.

40. Gatun yakita kakulla, willugbo noa ba lethu kakulla, pital
tara kakilliela kuri, kulla bara bon mittilliela yanti nto.

41. Gatun yakita uwa wakal kuri tanan, giakai yitirra Yaei)'o,
wiyellikan noa fthunagog kako ; gatun noa puntiniulleun letlui
kin tinna ka, gatun wiya uwolliko gikoug kinko kokera ko ;

42. KiiUa bon wakal yinalkun kakulla, fdodeka wunal ta boun-
noun ba, gatun bountoa ])irrikilliela tetti kakilliela. Gatun uwa
gaiya noa, kuriko bon murrugkania.

■rt43. Gatun wakal nukug, kumarakan tdodeka wunal ta boun-
noun ba, gukilleun bountoa kirun tullokan bounnoiinba karakal ko,
keawai bara bounnoun turon uma pa,

44. Uwa bountoa bulka kako, gatun numa pita gikoiimba kir-
rikin : gatun tanoa-kal-bo kumara gaiya kakulla korun.

45. Gatun noa lethuko wiya gaiya, Ganto tia numa 1 Yantin-
to wiya keawai, wiya gaiya noa Peterko gatun bava gikoug katoa,
Piriwal, konaro bin murrugkania gatun waita wa, gatun bi wi-
yan, Ganto tia numa ?

46. Gatun noa letbuko wiya, Wakallo ta tia numa : kulla bag
gurran waita ka ba kaiyu emmoug kinbirug.

47. Gatun bountoa ba nukugko nakulla yuropa korien boun-
toa, uwa bountoa pulul-pulul, gatun puntimulleun gikoug kin
mikan ta, wiya bon bountoa mikan ta yantin ta kuri ka, minarig
tin })ountoa numa bon, gatun tanoa-kal-bo bountoa kakulla turon.

48. (jatun noa bounnoun wiya, Yinalkun, kauwa bi pital ;
gurrullito giroumba-ko turon bin uma ; yurig waita pital kakilliko.

49. Gatun wiyelliela noa ba, tanan uwa wakallo wiyellikan ta
Jbirug kokera birug, wiyelliela bon, Giroumba yinalkun tetti kakul-
la ; yanoa, Piriwal pirriralmai yikora bon.

50. Wonto noa ba lethuko gurra, wiyayelleun noa bon wiyel-
iiela, Kinta kora bi ; gurrulla wal bi, gatun turon gaiya wal boun-
toa kanun.

51. Gatun noa ba uwa kokera ko ba murrarig, keawai noa tarai
kan wommumbi pa gikoug kin, wonto ba Peternug gatun Yako-
bonug, gatun loanniniug, gatun biyugbai gatun tunkan murrakin
koba.

52. Gatun yantin tugkilleiin gatun minki kakulla bounnoun kai :
wonto noa ba wiya, Tugki yikora ; keawaran bountoa tetti korien,
wonto ba garabo kakillin.

53. Gatun bara bon beelma, nakilliela tetti bountoa kakulla.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 8. 151

i)i. Gatuu noa kirun baruu yipa warai tako, gatun noa man-
kulla bounnoun muttarrin, gatun wiya, Murrakin, bougkullia.

55. Gatun bounnoun ba marai kateakan, gatun bountoa boug-
kuUeiin tanoa-kal-bo : gatun noa wiya bounnoun takilliko.

56. Gatun kintakan biyugbai gatun tunkan bounnoun ba :
wonto noa ba wiya barun, yanoa wiya yikora taraikan kuri unni
umatoara.

WINTA IX.

Wiya gaiya noa barun fdodeka ta gikoumba kaumuUiko, gatun
gukulla barun kaiyu kakilliko gatun wiyellikan kakilliko yantin
ko fdiabol ko, gatun turon vimulliko yantin munnikan ko.

2. Gatun noa barun yuka wiyelliko fbathileia Eloi koba, gatun
turon umulliko niunni ko.

3. Gatun noa wiya barun, Manki yikora waita kolag, keawai
tupa-tupa manun, keawai yinug, keawai kunto, keawai fnioney,
keawai buloara manun kirrikin taraiko-taraiko.

4. G-atun uwanun nura ba tarai ta kokera, tanoa kauwa, gatun
waita uwolla untoa birug.

5. Gatun bara keawai nurun wommunbi korien, waita nura ba
uwanun untoa birug kokera birug, tirri-tirrillia yullo kabirug
morig tinna kabirug nurim kinbirug, tiiga kakilliko barun kinko.

6. Gatun waita bara uwa, gatun uwa kokeroa willi koa, wiyel-
liela Euagelion, gatun turon umulliela yantin ta purrai ta.

7. Gatun noa Herodto tetrakko gurra unni tara uma noa ba ;
gatun kotelliela niuwoa bo, kulla wiyatoara tarai-kan-to loanne
noa bougkullea tetti kabirug ;

8. Gatun winta ka, paipea noa Elia ; gatun tarai-kan-to, wakal
gagka-kal fpropet tabirug bougkalleun.

9. Gatun noa Herod wiya, Kolbuntia bag bon laonnenug wol-
lug ; gan-ke unni gurran bag unni tara 1 gatun noa iia-uwil koa
bon.

10. Gatun bara fapotliollo willugbo bara ba kakulla, wiya gaiya
bon yantin unni tara uma bara ba. Gatun noa barun yutea, gatun
kara uwa mirrulla ko, kokera ko yitirra Betathaida kako.

11. Gatun bara kuri gurra bara ba, wirropa bara bon ; garokea
noa wiyelliko barun fbathileia Eloi koba, gatun uma barun turon
kakilliko munnikan.

12. Gatun pun-eag kakilliela yareakal, uwa gaiya bara fdodeka
ta, gatun wiya bon, Yukulla barun konara waita lag, uwa-uwil
koa bara yantin toa purrai karig koa, yellawolliko, gatun takil-
liko ; kulla geen katan unti mirrul la.

13. Wonto noa ba barun wiya, Guwa barun galoa ko takilliko.
Gatun bara wiya, Keawai gearunba kulla unni f pente kunto ga-
tun buloara makoro ; wiya geen wirrilla barun gali ko takilliko
yantin ko kiiri ko.

152 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

14. Kulla wal kuri kauwal fpentakikilioi ta. O^atun noa wiya
barun winobnllikaii, Yellawabunbilla baruii konara kakilliko tpen-
tekonta tarai taba kakilliko.

15. Gratuii uma gaiya bara yanti, gatun yellawabunbea barun
yantin baran.

16. Mankulla gaiya noa unnoa tara kunto fpente gatun makoro
buloara ; gatun iiakilliela wokka lag moroko koba, uinrroi wiyel-
liela unni tai'a, gatun yiirbugga, gatun gukulla barun wirrobul-
likan ko wunkilliko barun kin mikan ta konara.

17. Gatun takulla bara, gatun warakan gaiya bara kuttawan
yantin ; gatun mankulla bara wanan fdodeka ka wimbi ka wunta-
wai birug barun kai.

18. Gatun yakita wiyelliela noa ba niuwoa-bo punbai, gikoiimba
wiiTobullikan gikoug katoa ; gatun noa wiya barun, wiyelliela,
Gannug wiyan ki'iri ko gan bag ba.

19. Wiyayelleun bara, wiyelliela, loanne ta bi koriraullikan ;
wonto ba taraito wiyan Elia ta ba ; gatun taraito wiyan wakal
gagka-kal tpropet koba, bougkulliakan katea-kiin.

20. Wiya noa barun, Canto tia nura wiyan gan bag ba?
Peterko noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela, Kritht ta bi Eloi-umba.

21. Gatun noa barun piralma, wiyea-kan koa bara unnoa tara
tarai ko kuri ko ;

22. Wiyelliela, Yinal ta k/iri koba yarakai kauwal wal bon
umanijn, gatun warekanun wal bon havsi gagkakal gatun bara
fhiereukan piriwal, gatun l^ara tgaraniniateukan, gatun biinnun
wal tetti, gatun bougganun gaiya bon tarai ta purreag goro ka.

23. Gatun wiya noa barun yantin, Wanun tia ba taraikan
kiiri uwamin, gurrullia noa niuwoa-bo, gatun mara-uwil koa noa
taligkabillikanne gikouinba yantin ta purreag ka, gatun wirro-
bulla tia.

24. Ganto ba miromanan moron gikoiimba, warekanun wal noa ?
kulla noa warekanun moron gikoumba eimnoug kin, galoa noa
moron umanun.

25. Wonnug-ke murrarug kuri ko, mankilliko purrai karig ko,
gatun noa tetti wal gaiya kanun niuwoa-bo, ga warekanun wal ?

26. (nm tia ba koiyun kanun emmoug kai, gatun wiyellikarnie
emraoumba, Yinal kuri koba koiyun gikoug kai, uwanun noa ba
killibinbinkan koti gikoug kinba, gatun Biyugbai koba, gatun
agelo yirri-yirri-kan koba barunba.

27. Kulla bag wiyan nurun tuloa, unni winta garokeiin ba,
keawai bara tetti kdnun, kabo na-uwil koa bara f batliileia-nug Eloi
koba.

28. Gatun yakita kakuUa purreag ka fet ta yurika-ta unni taiu
wiyellikanne, yutea noa barun Peternug, gatun loannenug, gatun
Yakobonug, gatun uwa wokka lag bulkara kolag wiyelliko.

29. Gatun noa ba wiyelliela, takin bon tarai warrakuUeun, ga-
tun gikoumba kirrikin purriil kakulla, gatun killibinbin kakulla.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 9. 153

30. Gatiin wiyelliela bon ki'iriko Motheko ^atun Eliako :

31. Paipea bula killibinbin, gatun wiya bula gikoumba ttvii
tin ka-nwil koa fHierothalem ko.

32. Wonto ba Peter noa gatun bara gikoug katoa porrollcau
bara birikea kogog ; gatun bara kakulla tirag, nakuUa bara giko-
limba killibinbin, gatun buloara bula k 'iri garokea gikoug katoa.

33. Gratun kakulla yakita bula ba waita uwolliela gikoug kin-
birug, Peterko noa wiya bon lethunug. A! Piriwal, murrariig gea-
run unti ko kakilliko ; gatun umabunbilla goro kokera ; wakal
bin, gatun wakal Mothenug, gatun wakal Elianug, gurra korien
minarig noa wiya.

34. Wiyelliela noa ba, yareil kakulla, gatun wutea barun ;
gatun bara kinta kakulla, waita bara ba woUiela murrarig yareil la.

35. Gatun puUi kakulla yareil labirug, wiyelliela, Unni ta
emmoumba k6ti yinal pitalmuUikan ; gurrulla bon.

36. Gratun pulli ba kakulla korun, letliu noa kakilliela punbai.
Keawai bara unni tara wiya pa untatoara, natoara purreag ka ta-
raikan ta.

37. Gratrm yakita kakulla purreag ka tarai ta unta, uwa bara
ba baran bulkara birug, kauwallo kuriko nuggurra wa bon.

38. A ! gatun wakal kuri konara koba kaaibulleun, wiyelliela,
Piriwal, kai bi, na-uwillia yinal emmoumba; kulla noa emmoumba
wakal wonnai.

39. A! gatun maraito bon mankulla, gatun gaiya noa kaaibul-
leiin wokka ; gatun yiirbugga bon, gatun kurragtoanbugga ; gatun
biintoara noa, waita gaiya gikoug kinbirug uwa.

40. Gratun bag wiya barun wirrobullikan giroiimba warekulliko
bon ; keawai bara kaiyu korien.

41. Gratun noa lethuko wiya, wiyelliela. A! gurra korien gatun
pirriral unni willug-gel ! Yakounta-lag bag kanun nurun kin,
gatun wal bag kamuiibinun nurun 1 Mara bon tanan girouniba
yinal unti ko.

42. Gratun uwolliela noa ba tanan fdiabollo bon puntima baran
gatun yiiryiir uma. Gatun noa lethuko koakuUa bon marai yara-
kai ka, gatun bon wonnai turon inna, gatun guteakan gaiya bon
biyugbai ta gikoumba tin.

43. Gatun yantin bara kinta kakulla kaiyu tin kauwal lin Eloi
koba tin ; gatun kotelliela bara ba yantin unni tara lethuko noa
ba uma, wiya gaiya noa barun wirrobullikan gikoumba,

44. Kamunbilla unni tara wiyellikanne murrarig gurreug kako
nurun kin ; kulla noa Yinal kiiri koba wupinim wal bon mattara
kiiri ka.

45. Keawai bara gurra pa unni wiyellikanne, gatun yuropa
gali barun kinbirug, keawai bara gimilli korien ; gatun bara kinta
kakulla wiyelliko bon gali tin wiyellikanne tin.

46. Yakita gaiya bara wiyellan barabo-barabo, gan-ke kan "in
kauwal piriwal barun kinbirug.

154 AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE,

47. Gatun lethuto noa gimilleun kotatoara bulbul labirug barun
kinbirug raankulla noa wonnai, gatuu yellawabunbea boii gikoug
kin tariig ka,

48. Gatun noa barun wiya, Ganto ba unni wonnai pitalmanun
kinba, pital mani'in gaiya tia ; gatun ganto ba tia pitalmanun,
pitalmanun bon gala yuka tia ba ; gatun niuwoa katan warea
nurun kinba yautin taba, yantibo ta wal noa kauwal kanun.

49. Gatun noa loanneto wiya, wiyelliela, Piriwal, nakuUa geen
wakallo paibuggulliela barun fdiabol gii'oug katoa liirug yitirra
birug ; wiya geen bon yanoa, koito ba keawai noa wa jia gearun
katoa.

50. Gatun noa letliuko bon wiya, Wiwi yikora ; koito noa ba
keawai bukka korien gearun, niuwoa gearun katoa ba.

51. Gatun yakita kakulla purreag maniin bon ba wokka kolag,
pirral noa kakilliela waita fHierotlialem kolag,

52. Gatun noa yuka barun puntiinai gikoumba ganka ; gatun
bara uwa kokera kolag Thamaria kako, umulliko gikoug.

53. Gatun bara bon keawai pitalma pa, kulla noa j^irral kakulla
wa pa fHierothalem kolag.

54. Gatun bula wirrobullikan gikoumba, Yakobo gatun loanne,
nakulla bula unni, wiya bula, Piriwal, wiya bi, wiya-uwil koa geen
koiyug koa kauwal banin moroko kabirug wina-uwil koa barun,
yanti Elia noa ba unnoa 1

55. Wonto noa ba wakulleun, koakulla gaiya barun noa, gatun
wiya, Keawaran nura giniilli korien nurunba koti biilbul.

56. Koito ba noa yinal kuri koba keawaran noa tanan wa pa,
bunkilliko kuri ko barun, wonto ba murrin umulliko. Gatun bara
uwa tarai tako kokera ko.

57. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela bara ba yurig yapug koa,
taraito bon wiya, Piriwal, wirrobugbinim banug, wontarig bi ba
uwanun.

58. Gatun noa letliuko bon wiya, Murrog-kai-ko kumiri bariin-
ba, gatun tibbin moroko ka koba kunta bariinba, Avonto ba yinal
kuri koba keawaran bon gikoumba birrikilli-gel wallug ko giko-
umba ko.

59. Gatun noa tarai wiya, Wirrobulla tia. Wonta noa ba wiya,
Piriwal, wamunbilla tia ganka bapa-uwil koa bag emmoiimba bi-
yugbai.

GO. Wiya bon noa letliuko, Bapabunbilla barun tetti-tetti bariin-
ba ; giiitoa yurig bi wolla wiyelliko piriwal koba Eloi koba.

61. Gatun taraito wiya, Piriwal, wirrobanun banug; wamunbilla
tia ganka wiyellikoa barun bag unni emmoug kinba kokera ba.

62. Gatun noa lethuko bon wiya, Keawai tarai-kan-to upilli-
nun mattara purrai-gel lo, gatun willug-wuminun, keawaran noa
murrarag korien kakilliko piriwal ko Eloi koba ko.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 10. 155

WINTA X.

Yakita gaiya kakulla unni tara, Piriwallo noa geaiimulleun fthe
benty taraikan ta, gatun yuka barun buloara-buloara gikoug kiq.
mikan ta, yautin tako kokera ko uwanun noa ba niuwoa-bo.

2. Gatun noa bai-un wiya, Kauwal-lan unni nulai katan, keawai
bo katillikan kiiri kauwalkal ; gali tin wiyella nura bon, Piriwal
nulai-gel koba yuka-uwii koa noa barun katillikan nulai ko katil-
liko gikoug kaiko.

3. Waita nura yurig wolla : A ! yukan nurun bag waita kolag
yanti kiloa warea ta cipu barun kin murrog ka ta.

4. Kurri yikora yanoa raunnigel, gatun yinug, keawai tug-
ganug ; gatun yanoa wiya yikora yapug koa taraikan kiiri.

5. Gratun uwanun nura ba kokera ko taraikan tako, wiyella
kurri giakai, Pital kauwa unni kokera ba.

6. Gatun ba yinal koba pital koba kanun unta, nurunba })ital
kaniin gaiya unta ; keawai ba nurun kin katea kanun willugbo.

7. Gatun yellawanun nura unta kokera, takilliko gatun pittel-
liko, guniin bara ba nurun ; kulla noa umulli-kan-to man ba gu-
toara gikotimba. Uwai yikora kokera kolag kokera kolag.

8. Gatun uwanun nura ba yantin ta kokeroa, gatun bara nurun
pitalmanun, ta-uwa untoa tara wunun ba mikan ta nurun kin.

9. Gatun turon barun umulla unta tara ; gatun wiyella barun,
Piriwal koba Eloi koba papai uwa nurun kinba.

10. Uwanun nura ba tarai ta kokeroa, gatun bara keawai pital-
ma korien nurun, uwea ka nura warai tako yapug kako, gatun
wiyella,

11. Umulleun geen punul untikal gearun kinba nurun kin ; A!
kotellia nura unni ta uwan ta papai katan nurun kin piriwal koba
Eloi koba.

12. Wiyan nurun bag, murrarag kanun unta ta tarai ta purreag,
ka Thodom kako, keawaran gala ko kokera ko.

13. Yapallun bi Koradhin ! yapallun bi Betathaida ! kulla uma-
toara ba kauwal-kauwal kaiyu birugka pa Tviro ka gatun Thidoni
ka uma giroug kin, minki bara ka pa yuraki, yellawa pa bara
pirral la kirrikin ta gatun bonog ka.

14. Murrarag buloara kanun Turo gatun Thidoni unta purreag
wiyellaikanne ta keawaran bi.

15. Gatun gintoa, Kapernaum, wunkulla wokka lag moroko ka,
yuaipiniin wal baran pirri kako.

16. Niuwoa gurran nurun ba, gurran ta noa tia ; gatun niuwoa
waitiman nurun ba, waitiman noa tia ; gatun niuwoa tia waitim an,
waitiman noa bon yuka noa tia ba.

17. Gatun bara ftliebenty ta willugbo kakulla pitalkan, wiyel-
liela, A Piriwal ! gurrullikan bara f diabollo gearun giroug katoa
yitirroa.

156 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

18. Gatun noa barun wiya, NakuUa bon bag Tliatannug punti-
mulleun baran moroko tin yanti niahiia kiloa.

19. A ! gutan bag nui-nn kaiyu -svaitawolliko maiya ko gatun
ti^uarai ko, gatun yantin ko kaiyu bukkakan ko ; gatun keawai
wal nurun yarakai umulliko.

20. Pital-mai yikora nura-nura, gali tin gurullikan tin bara
marai nurun ba ; unti birug pitalnia nura, kulla yitirra nurunba
upatoara moroko ka ba.

21. Yakita ta noa pital-lan kakulla marai ta, gatun wiyelliela,
Kauwa tia yanti, Biyug, Piriwal ta moroko koba gatun purrai
koba, kulla bi ba unnoa tara yuropa gali unti birug guraki ta
birug, gatun bi tugkaiya unnog, tara barun bobog ko ; kauwa
yanti, Biyug, koito ba murrarag ta giroug kin katan mikan ta.

22. Yantin ta tia wupea emmoug kinko Biyugbaito ; gatun
keawai kiiriko bon yinal gimilli pa, wonto ba Biyugbaito ; gatun
Biyugbai yinallo gimilleun, gatun niuwoa yinallo tugunbinun bon
Biyughai.

23. Gatun noa willarig kakulla gikoug kai koba wirrobullikan
koba, gatun wiyelliela kara, Kauwa yanti murrarag ta natan gai-
kug ko unni tara natan nui-a ba :

24. Kulla bag nurun wiyan, kauwallo fpropetto gatun piriwallo
na pa unni tara natan nura ba, gatun bara keawai na korien ; ga-
tun gurra pa unni tara gurran nura ba, gatun keawai gurra korien.

25. A ! tarai wakal fnomiko garokea wokka lag, gatun wiya
bon, wiyelliela, Piriwal, minnug ban ''in bag moron kakilliko yanti-
katai 1

26. Wiya bon noa, Minarig u})a wiyellikanne 1 yakoai bi wiyan ?

27. Gatun noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela, Pital kakilliko bi Piri-
wal ko Eloi ko giroumha ko yantin to biilbiil lo giroumba ko,
gatun yantin to marai to giroumba ko, gatun yantin to kaiyu ko
giroumba ko, gatun yantin to kotellito gii'oiimba ko ; gatun k6ti
ta giroumba yanti gintoa bo ba.

28. Gatun noa wiya bon, Gintoa wiyayelleun tuloa ; unni ta
umulla gatun moron koa bi kauwal

29. Wonto noa ba kotelliela tuloa ko niuwoa bo, wiya bon noa
letliunug, Gan-ke tia k6ti ta emmoiimba 1

30. Gatun noa lethuko wiya, Taraikan waita uwa bar4n fHi-
erothalem kabirug Jeriko kako, gatun nuggurrawa mankiye, man-
tille 'm bon kirrikin, gatun bunkulla, gatun bara waita uwa wareka
gaiya bon biintoara.

31. Yakita gati uwa wakal fliiereu baran ya pug koa ; gatun na-
kulla bon noa ba, uwa noa tarug koa kaiyin ta koa.

32. Ganti yanti kiloa wakiil Lebikan kakulla noa ba unta,
uwa nakulla gaiya bon, gatun noa uwa tarug koa kaiyin ta koa.

33. Wonto ba wakal kiiri Thamariakal uwoUiela ba, uwa yapa-
rig kakilliela noa ba ; gatun nakulla bon noa l)a, minki bon noa
kakulla gikoug kai,

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 10. 157

34. Gratnn uwa gikoug kai koba, gatun gira bon buntoara
gikoumba, kiroabulliela kipai gatun fwain, gatun yellawabunbea
bon gikoug ka ta koti ka buttikag, gatun yutea bon takillig^l lako,
gatun miroma bon.

35. G-atun tarai ta purreag ka wakal la waita noa ba uwa, nian-
kulla gaiya noa buloara fdenari, gatun gukuUa kokeratin ko,
gatun bon wiya, Grolomulla bon ; kirun hi ba upinun, uwea kaniin
bag ba willugbo, gutea kanun gaiya banug.

36. Wonnug-ke k6ti ta gikoumba nuggiirrawa mankiye unti
birug goro kabirug kuri kabirug, kotella bi 1

37. (xatun noa wiya, Niuwoa goloma bon. "Wiya noa bon Tetlui
ko, Yurig, yanti kiloa uniulla bi.

38. Gatun yakita kakuUa, uwa bara ba, uwa noa murrug koa
kokeroa ; gatun taraito nukugko, Marathako yitirra, waniunbea
bon bounnoun kin kokera.

39. Wiiggunbai bounnoun ba gaiya kai, yitiri^a Mari, yellawa
bountoa lethu kin yullo ka, gatun guri'a bon wiyellita

40. Wonto ba INIaratha kamullan bimtoa marai-marai umullita,
gatun uwa bountoa gikoug kin, gatun wiya, Piriwiil, kora bi
natan tia wareka tia wiiggunbai emmoumba umulliko wakallo 1
wiyella bounnoun umiilli koa bountoa tia.

41. Gatun noa letliuko wiyelleun, gatun wiya bounnoun, Ela!
Maratha, Maratlia, gintoa kamullan marai-marai minnambo-min-
nambo ka ;

42. Wonto ba wakal murrarag katan : gatun Mariko bountoa
geremullejn unnoa murraragbo, keawai wal mantillinun boun-
noun kinbirug.

WINTA XI.

Gatun yakita kakulla, wiyelliela noa ba tarai ta purrai ta, kaiul-
leun noa ba wiyelli ta, wakallo bon wiya gikoug-ka-to wirrobulli-
kanto, Piriwal, wiyella gearun bi wiyelliko, yanti kiloa loanne-
to noa wiya barun gikoumba wirrobullikan.

2. Gatun noa wiya barun, wiyamin nura ba, giakai nura wiya-
niin nura, Biyugbai geariimba wokka ka ba moroko ka ba katan,
Kamunbilla yitirra giroumba yirri-yirri kakilliko. Paipibunbilla
Piriwal koba giroumba. Gurrabunbilla wiyellikanne giroumba,
yanti moroko ka ba, yanti ta purrai ta ba.

3. Guwoa gearun purreag ka takilliko.

4. Gatun warekilla geariinba yarakai umatoara, kulla geen
yanti ta wareka yanti ta wiyapaiyeiin geariinba. Gatun yuti
yikora gearun yarakai iimullikan kolag ; mii'omulla gearun yara-
kai tabirug.

5. Gatun noa barun wiya, Gan nurun kinbirug k6ti gikoumba,
gatun uwamin gikoug kin tokoi ta, gatun bon wiyanun, Ela ! k6ti,
mumbilla tia wokkai to goro ko ;

158 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

6. Kulla noa einmoumba koti uwa kalog tin emmoug kinko, ga-
tun keawai bag wiin korien gikoug kin mikan ta takilliko 1

7. Niuwoa inurrug ka ba ko wiyaniin, Wai tia wiyellan ; kulla
nnni kurraka wirrigbakulla, kulla wonnai tara emmouinba em-
moug katoa ba birrikilligel laba ; keawaran bag bougkulli korien
gukilliko giroug.

8. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai uoa bougkulli korien gulliko bon,
kulla noa ba gikoiimba koti ; kulla wal noa bon pirriral-mulli tin
bougkullinun gaiya noa gulliko bon wiyellinun noa ba.

9. G-atun nurun bag Aviyan, Wiyella, gatun gunim gaiya nurun ;
gatun tiwolla, gatun karawollinun gaiya nura; Avirrillia, gatun uma-
niin gaiya nurun.

10. Yantin ba wiyellinvm, manun wal ; gatun noa tiwoUinun,
karawollinun gaiya noa ; gatun gikoug wirrillinun noa ba, uma-
nun gaiya wal.

11. Yinallo ba wiyanun nulai yantin ta nurun kin, biyugbai ta
ba, wiya, noa gunun tunug 1 ga makoro, wiya, noa maiya gunun
makoi'6 ?

12. Gra ba wiyellan noa ba yarro, wiya, noa bon gupaiyinun wu-
arai 1

13. Nura ba yarakaikan katan, gukilliko gutoara murrarag
wonnai ko nurunba ko ; kauwa yanti gunun noa Biyugbaito mo-
roko ka ba ko Marai murrarag barun wiya bon ba ?

14. Gatun noa ba paibuggulliela wakal fdiabol, gatun noa gogo.
Gratun yakita gaiya kakulla, waita ba uwa fdiabol, wiya gaiya noa
gogo kabirug ko ; gatun bara kuri kotelliela.

15. Wonto ba tarai-kan-to wiya, Paibugga noa barun fdiabol
Beeldhebul katan birug, piriwalloa birug fdiabol koba ko.

16. Gatun tarai-kan-to wiyelliela, wiya bon tuga ruoroko tin.

17. Wonto noa ba gimilleun barimba kotellikanne, wiya barun,
Yantin piriwiil koba garuggara umulla barabo tetti bara kaniin ;
gatun kokera koba barabo warakullia bara.

18. Thatan noa ba garuggara kaniin niuwoa-bo, yakoai giko-
umba piriwal koba kanun 1 kulla nura wiyan paibugga bag ba
barun fdiabol Beeldhebul katoa birug.

1 9. Gatun gatoaba paibugganiin barun fdiabol Beeldhebul birug,
gan katoa birug nuriinba-ko yinal-lo paibugga ?

20. Gatoa paibugganun mattarroa birug Eloi koba ko barun
fdiabol, kauwa tuloa uwa gaiya piriwal koba Eloi koba nurun
kin ba.

21. Golomanun no a ba tarai ki'iri mokal porrol gikoug kin ko-
kera, gikoiimba tullokan murroi katan.

22. Wonto ba tanan uwanun tarai mokal porrolkan kauwal
kan gikoug kin, gatun keakea-ma noa bon, mantilliniin gaiya wal
bon kirun mokal gikoumba pirriral-matoara ; gatun gutilliniin noa
mokal gikoumba.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 11. 159

23. Niuwoa keawai emmoug katoa, niuwoa katan koti korien ;
gatun noa keawai boa-ma korien emmoug katoa, ware-ware-kan.

24. Paikullimui ba marai yarakai kuri kabirug, iiwan noa yu-
rig purroi toa tai'awaroa, nakilliko korilliko ; gatun noa keawai
na korien, wiyan noa, Willugbanun wal bag willugbo kokera ko
emmoug ka ta ko, unta birug uwa bag ba.

25. Gratun uwanun noa ba, nakuUa gaiya noa ba wirea kiriiri
gatun konein.

26. XJwan gaiya noa gatun yutea taraikan ftheben ta marai ya-
rakai kauwal yanti niuwoa ba ; gatun bara uwa murrarig gatun
kakulla gaiya bara unta ; gatun yarakai kauwal noa unnoa katan
yakita, kakulla noa ba kurri-kurri.

27. Gratun yakita kakulla, Aviyelliela noa ba, kaaibulleiin tarai
nukug gali koba konara koba, gatun wiya bou bountoa, Murrai"ag
kauwa yanti pika kurrea bon ba, gatun paiyil pitta bi ba.

28. Wonto noa bo wiya, Kauwa yanti, murrarag kauwal katan
bara gurrullikan wiyellikanne Eloi koba, gatun mirromulli-ko.

29. Gratun yakita kakulla, wittillan bara ba kuri, wiya noa
kurri-kuiTi, Unni ta yarakai katan willuggel ; nakillin bara tilga ;
keawai wal barun gunun, unni bo ta wal tiiga lona-umba fpropet
koba.

30. Yanti kiloa lona ti'iga kakulla noa bai'un kuri Ninebi ka,
yanti bo ta wal kaniin noa yinal kiiri koba barun gali ko willuggel
ko.

31. Bougkullinun wal piriwal kirin pakai birug purreag ka
wiyelligel lakurikoa untikal loa willuggel loa, gatun pirralmaniin
barun ; kulla bountoa uwa kalog kabirug purrai tabirug wiran
tabirug gun-ulli bon guraki ko Tholomon ko ; A! kauwal katan
Tholomon kiloa unnibo.

32. Bougkullinun wal bara kiiri Ninebikal purreag ka wiyelli-
gel la kuri koa untikal loawillugg61 loa, gatun pirral-manun barun;
kulla bara minki kakulla wiyelli ta lona-iimba ka ; A! kauwal ka-
tan lona kiloa unnibo.

33. Keawai kuriko tarai-kan-to wirroug bugganiin kaibug wu-
nun gaiya gati ta, keawai bara ka wimbi ka, wonto ba kaibuggel
la, bara ba uwanun na-uwil koa bara kaibug.

34. Kaibug ta murrin koba gaikug ; wonto ba giroumba gaikug
tuloa katan, yantin bin katan murrin kaibugkan ; wonto bin ba
gaikug yarakai, kaniin murrin bin warapa tokoi to.

35. Yakoai bi, mirka unnoanug kaibug giroug kinba tokoi ta ba
katan.

36. Kulla ba yantin ta giroumba murrin ta ba warapan kaibug
ko, keawai taraikan tokoi, kanun yantinbo ta wal warapan kaibug
ko, yanti kaibug koba wupin gatun binkirreun.

37. Gratun wiyelliela noa ba, taraito Parithaioko wiya bon ta-
uwil koa noa gikoug katoa ; gatun noa uwa murrarig gatun yel-
lawa takilliko.

160 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

38. Gratun noa 1ia Parithaioko nakulla, umulli korien noa bato
ka kurri-kurri takilli kola^', kotellicla noa.

39. Gatun bon noa Piriwallo wiya, Yakita nura Parithaioiko
umullia inirkun karai-gon tunti gatun pikirri ; wonto ba nuriin-
ba murrin warapan williro gatun yarakai to.

40. Wogkal nura! yan ta noa uma unnoa yanti unnoa ba warrai
ta ba, yantibo uma noa murrug ka ba?

41. Guwa nura untoakal nurun kinbirug, gatun yantin nurun
ba tuloa ka katan.

42. Yapal nura Paritliaioi ! kulla nura gukillan wintakal fnien-
tha tabirug, gatun f ruta tabirug, gatun yaki tara, gatun gurra-
maigan tuloa gatun [)italumullikanne Eloi koba : unni tara nura
uma pa, gatun keawai taraikan wareka pa uma korien.

43. Yapal nura Pai'ithaioi! kulla nura pitalman yellawollikanne
wokka kaba ftliunagog kaba, gatun umuUikanne gukilligel lake.

44. Yapal nura fgarammateu gatun Parithaioi, gakoiyaye ! kulla
nura yanti tulmun kiloa paipi korien, gatun bara kiiri uwan
wokka lag tulmun toa, keawai-an bara na korien.

45. Wiyayelleun gaiya wakallo f nomiko-ko wiyelliela bon, Piri-
wiil, giakai bi wiyan, pirvalman bi gearun.

46. Gratun noa wiya, Y^apal nura fnomikoi yantinbo ! kulla nura
wuntan kiiri ka porrol ta lo kauwal porrol kurrilliko, gatun kea-
wai nura unnoa porrol numa korien nurun ka to mattarr6.

47. Yapal nura ! kulla nura ba wittiman tulmun bariinba fpro-
pet koba, gatun biyugbaito nuriinba-ko bunkulla barun tetti kul-
won.

48. Kauwa tuloa ta pirralman nura umatoara biyugbai koba
nurunba ; kulla bara yuna bo ta barun biinkulla tetti, gatun nura
wittillin tulmun barunba.

49. Yaki tin wiya gurakita Eloi koba ko, Yukanin wal bag
barun fpropet gatun fapothol barun kin, gatun winta barun kin-
bii'ug biinnin wal bara gatun yarakai umanim ;

50. Wiya-uwil koa gorog yantin koba fpropet koba kiroaba-
toara yaki tabirug kurri-kurri tabirug purrai tabirug, unni barun
willuggel;

51. Grorog kabirug Abeliimba kabirug, gorog kako Dliakaria-
umba kako buntoara willi ka tt>omo ta gatun fhieron ; kauwa
tuloa to wiyan nurun bag, wiya-uwil koa unni barun willuggel.

52. Yapal nura fnomikoi ! kulla nura mankuUa wirrigbakilli-
gel gurakita koba ; keawai nura wa pa, gatun nura miya barun
uwa bara ba.

53. Gatun wiya noa ba unni tara barun, pirriralma bon bara
garammateuto gatun Parithaioiko, wiya-uwil koa noa minnambo
wiyelliko ;

54. Mittillin bara bon, gatun nakillin gurrulliko gikoug kin ba
ko kurraka ba ko, wiyayean koa bara bon.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 12. 161

WINTA XII.

Yakita kakulla, wittillan bara ba yantibo konara kuri, wata-wata-
wollan barabo, wiya noa kurri-kuiTi barim wirrobullikan gikoumba,
Yakoai nura flebben barunba Paiitbaioi koba, gakoiyaye ta unnoa.

2. Yantin ba wutea ta tugunbinun gaiya wal ; gatun yantin
yuropa ta namunbinrm gaiya wal.

3. Yaki tiii, wiyellan nura tokoi ta gurrabunbinun wal kaibug
ka ; gatun unni ta wiya nura ba gurreug ka waiyakan ta, wiyel-
liniin wal wokka ka kokera.

4. Gatun bag nurun wiyan k6ti ta emmoumba, Kinta kora nura
barun kin biinkillikan tin murrin tin, gatun yukita tantoa bo ta
wal bara kaiyukanto bannn.

5. Tugunbiniin wal bag nurun gan-kai nura kinta wal kaniin :
Kinta bon kauwa gikoug kai, yukita noa ba biinkulla kaiyukan
noa warekulliko koiyug kako pirriko kako ; kauwa wiyan bag
nurun, Kinta bon kauwa gikoug kai.

6. Wiya, fpente tibbin warea ta gupaiye ko buloara fassari, ga-
tun keawai wakal unti birug woggunti korien gikoug kin Eloi kin ?

7. Kulla yantin wollug kaba kittug murrapatoara katan. Kinta
kora nura gali tin ; kulla nura murrarag kauwalkan katan, kea-
waran gali tarako tibbinko warea-ta-ko kauwal-kauwal-ko.

8. Unni ta nurun bag wiyan, Yantinto enimoug wiyaniin mikan
ta kiiri ka, gikoug wiyaniin noa Yinal kiiri kolja mikan ta agelo
ka Eloi koba ko.

9. Wonto ba niuwoa ganbullin'm tia emmoug mikan ta kui'i
ka, ganbullinun wal bon mikan ta agelo ka Eloi koba ka.

10. Cratuu ganto ba yarakai wiyan un gikoug Yinal kiiri koba,
kamunbinun wal bon ; wonto bon ba yarakai wiyellikan Maraikan
yirri-yirri-kan, keawai bon kamunbiniin.

11. Gratun man Lin nurun bara fthunagog kako gatun wiyelli-
kan tako, gatun kaiyukan tako, kota yikora nura wonnug nura ba
wiyayellin'in, ga minnug nura wiyanun.

12. Kulla nurun Marai-kan-to yirri-yirri-kan-to wiyaniin Aval
yakita bo gaiya minnug wal nura wiyan fm.

13. Gatun wiya bon wakallo konara birug ko, Piriwal, wiyella
emmoumba biggainug, gukulli koa noa purrai emmoug kai.

14 Gatun noa bon wiya, Kiiri, ganto tia uma wiyellikan, ga
gukillikan giroug kin 1

15. Gatun noa barun wiya, Yakoai gatun murroi kauwa williri
koba ; kulla moron kiiri koba ka korien ta kauwal-kauwal la tul
lokan ka gikoug ka ta.

16. Gatun noa wiya barun unni fparabol, wiyeiliela, Purrai ta
porr61kan koba poaikulleun kauwal :

17. Gatun noa kotelleun niuwoabo, wiyeiliela, Minnug banun
bag, kulla wal unni tuntan uwa, wiya wal bag wonta wura-uwil
unni tara emmoumba ?

162 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

18. Gatuii noa wiya, TJnni bag uinanun ; umanun wal bag bardn
Avunkilligel emmoumba, gatun wittia kaiiiin kauwal ; gatun unta
bag wuniin yantin emmoumba iiulai gatun tullokan.

19. Gatun bag wiyanun emmoiimba marai, A marai! kauwal
tullokan giroumba wimkulla kauwal lako wunal lako; yellawolla
murroi bi, tauwa, pittella, gatun pital kauwa.

20. Wonto ba Eloito bon wiya, Wogkal-lan bi ! unti tokoi ta
giroumba marai mantillinun wal giroug kinbirug ; ganto gaiya
unnoa tara tullokan manun tuigko bi ba uma 1

21. Yanti niuwoa ba wupeakan tullokan gikoumba ko, gatun
keawai porrol korien Eloi kai koba.

22. Gatun noa wiya barun wirrobullikan, Yaki tin wiyan bag
nurun, Yanoa, kota yikora nurunba moron takilliko ; ga keawai
murrin ko wupulliko.

23. Moron ta kauwal katan murrarag takillikanne keawaran,
gatun murrin ta kauwal katan murrarag kirrikin keawaran.

24. Kotella wakun barun ; koito bara ba keawai wupa korien,
gatun keawai kol bunti korien ; keawai bari'mba tuigko wupilli-
gal, keawai baninba kokei-a ; gatun noa Eloito giratiman barun ;
kauwal-kauwal nura katan murrarag tibbin bara keawaran.

25. Gatun gan nurun kinbirug kotellita kanun, umea kaniin
moron gikoumba warea ka kakilliko fkubit kako 1

2G. Wiya nura ba kaiyu korien to umulliko unni warea, min-
arig tin nura kotellin unnoa tara 1

27. Kotella nura kenukun turukin bara ba ; keawai bara uma
korien, wupi korien bara ; gatun bag wiyan nurun, Tholomon noa
ba, koneinkan, keawai bon wupa korien yanti kiloa wakal unti
tara birug.

28. Upanun noa ba Eloito woiyo yanti, yakita purreag ka unta
ba purrai ta katan, gatun kumba warekakin murrug ka wollo ka ;
wiya, nurun noa upanun. A! nura gurrullikan wareakan ?

29. Gatun na-ki yikora nura minarig nurunba takilliko gatun
pittelliko, ga kota yikora nura minki ko.

30. Koito ba bara yantinto purrai ta ba ko natan yantin unni
tara ; gatun nurunba-to Biyugbai-to gurx-an unni tara gukillikanne
nurun ba murrarag kakilliko.

31. Wonto ba nura nauwa piriwal koba Eloi koba, gatun yantin
unni rara gunun nurun kin.

32. Kinta kora, wirrul warea ; kulla pitalman bon Biyugbai nu-
runba gukilliko piriwal-gel ta nurun kin.

33. Gukillea nurunba, gatun guwa gukillikanne : umulla nura
yinug nurunba, keawai koa korokal katea-kun, porrolkan ta moroko
ka ba kakilliko ka korien kakilliko, keawai ba unta ko uwa korien
mankiye, gatun keawai ba yarakai puntaye.

34. Wonnun ta nurunba tullokan, untabo kanun nurunba bi'il-
bul yantibo.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 12. 163

35. Grirullia nura winnal nui'iinba, gatuii uuriaiba kaibug wina-
bunbilla ;

36. Gatun nurabo yanti kiloa kuri ba mittillin bariinba ko Piri-
wal ko, willug-baniin noa ba mankilligel labirug ; uwaniui noa ba
ba tanan gatun wirrillinun, umauiin gaiya bon tanoa-kal-bo.

37. Pitalmatoara kauiiu bara unnoa tara mankillikan, yakita
Piriwal noa ba uwanun, noa ba barun kin naniin noa ba barun
nakilli ta ; wiyan bag tuloa nurun, girullinun noa kotibo, gatun
yellawabumbea barun takilli kolag, gatun uwanun noa gukilliko
barun.

38. Gratun tanan uwanun noa ba, yakita buloara nakillikan ta,
yakita goro ka nakillikan ta, gatun naniin barun yantibo nakilli
ta, pitiilmatoai-a bara unnoa tara mankillikan.

39. (jratun gurrulla unni, wiya noa ba kokera-tin-to gurra pa,
yakounta ba uwa pa mankiye na pa noa, keawai gaiya kokera
gikoiimba potobunti pa,

40. Yanti tin kauwa nura nakilliko ; kulla noa Yinal kiiri koba
uwanun yakita kota korien nura ba.

41. Wiya gaiya noa bon Peterko, Piriwal, wiyan bi unni fpara-
bol gearunbo, ga gearun yantin 1

42. Gratun noa Piriwallo wiya, G-an-ke noa mankillikan murra-
rag gatun guraki, piriwallo noa umanun bon -wiyellikan kakilliko
kokera ko gikoug ka ta ko, gu-uwil koa noa takilliko yakita gukil-
ligel la 1

43. Pitalmatoai'a katan unnoa mankillikan, umanun noa ba gi-
koiimba piriwal nanun gaiya noa bon umulli ta yanti.

44. Wiyan bag tuloa, umanun bon noa wiyellikan kakilliko
yantin tako.

45. Wonto noa ba wiyanun gala mankilli-kan-to, bulbiil la, Em-
moiimba piriwal minkin uwa korien ; gatun gaiya noa biinkilli
kolag barun kiiri mankillikan gatun gapal, gatun takilli kolag,
gatun pittelli kolag, gatun kuttawai kolag ;

46. Piriwal gala koba mankillikan koba uwanun wal noa pur-
reag ka na korien ta, gatun yakita gaiya kota korien ta bon,
gatun bunniin bon buloarakan, gatun gunun bon winta gikoug
kai barun kin gurra korien ta,

47. Gratun unnoa mankillikan gurran noa kotelli ta piriwal
koba gikoiimba, gatun keawai uma korien, keawai noa uma pa
yanti kotelli ta gikoumba, biinnun wal gaiya bon kauwal-kauwal.

48. Wonto noa ba niuwoa gurra korien, gatun yarakai umatoara
yaki tin bun ba bon, biinnun wal warea. Kulla bon gupa kauwal,
wiyapaiyanun wal kauwcil gikoug kinbirug ; gatun kuriko gu-
kuUa kauwal, wiyellia kanun bara gaiya kauwal-kauwal gikoug
kinbirug,

49. TJwan ta bag unni yukulliko koiyug ko purrai ta ko ; niin-
nug-bulKnun bag kauwa ba tanoa-kal-bo wirrog-kullea 1

164 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

50. Kulla tia korimullikanne cnimong kinba korimulliko; gatun
yakoai bag kutan goloin koa ka-iiwil kakilliko !

51. Kotau nura, uwa bag bapital gukillikopiuTai ta ko 1 wiyan
bag ba, keawai ; wonto l)a gurruggiiiTa kakilliko ;

52. Kulla wal unti birug kaiiuu kakilliko fpente kokera wakal
la, gurruggurra birug, goro buluu kiiibirug, gatuu buloara goro
kabirug.

53. Biyugbai gurruggurra kaiiun yinal labirug, gatun yinal
biyugbai tabirug ; gatun tunkan yinalkun tabirug, gatun yin41-
kun tunkan tabirug, tungaikun bounnoun ba kurrinanbai tabirug,
gatun kuri'inanbai bounnoun ba tungaikun tabirug.

54. Gratun noa barun kuri wiya, Nanun nura ba yareil wokka
lag punnal ha pulogkulligel lin, wiyanun gaiya nura koiwon ta-
nan ba ; gatun kauwa yanti.

55. Cratun kareawug ba kanun, wiyellinun gaiya nura, karol
kinun ; gatun yanti gaiya kanun.

56. A nura nakoiyaye ! natan nura tarkin moroko koba gatun
purrai koba ; minarig tin koa nura na korien unti yakita 1

57. Kauwa, kora koa nura kota ba nurun kinbirug tuloa 1

58. Uwimun bi ba gikoug katoa bukkakan toa gikoug kinko
wiyellikan tako, yapug koa nuiyellia bi bon, wamunbi-uwil koa
biloa murroi kakilliko gikoug kinbirug : yutea-kun koa biloa wi-
yellikan kauwal lako, gatun wiyellikanto kauwallo wamunbinan
biloa yarakan tako, gatun yarakanto vvupiniin biloa fjail kako.

59. Wiyan banug, keawai bi waita uwa korien unta birug, gu-
killinun bi ba flepton ta kirun warea ta.

WINTA XTII.

Kakulla bara unta yakita taraikan, wiya bon barun Galilaiakal,
gorog bariinba tarogkama Pilato-to fthubia barun barunba.

2. Gratun noa letliuko wiyayelleun, wiyelliela noa barun, Wiya,
nura kotellin unnoa tara Galilaiakal yarakai bara kakulla kau-
wal barun kinbirug Galilaiakal labirug, kulla barun ba mankulla
unnoa taral

3. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai ; kulla nura keawai minki katan,
yantin gaiya nura tetti tetti kanun.

4. Gra barun fetin ta wunkulleiin kokera baran, gatun tetti-tetti
barun wirria, wiya, nura kotellin barun yarakai bara ba kakulla
kauwal barun kuri kabirug kakillin fHierotbalem ka 1

5. Wiyan nurun bag, Keawai ; kulla nura keawai minki katan,
yantin gaiya nura tetti-tetti kanun.

6. Wiya noa unni yanti tp^i-i'abol : Taraikan ta kiiriko wup^a
yirriwilbin purrai ta gikoug ka ta ; gatun noa uwa yeai ko nakil-
liko, gatun noa keawai gaiya na pa.

7. Wiya gaiya noa bon upuUikan, Ela! goro ka wunal la unti,
Hwa bag nakilliko yeai ko unti birug ko yirriwiltabin tako, gatun

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 13, 165

keawai gaiya bag iia pa ; kolbuntiila inmoa uaruu ', minavig tiu
unnoa katan purrai ta ]

S. Gratuu noa wiyayelleun, wiyelliela Ijon, Piriwal, kaiuuubiUa
unnoa unti wunal la, pinni-uwil koa bag untoakal ko, gatun konug
koa bag wupi-uwil ;

9. Gatun yeai l)a kanun, mun-ai-ag gaiya kaniin ; gatun ka
korien ba, gatun yukita gaiya kolbuntinun wal bi uuni barau.

10. Gratun noa wij^elliela wakiU la ttkunagog ka purreig ka
thabbat ka.

11. Gratun, a! kakuUa unta wakul nukug launni-lan bouutoa ba
kauwal-kauNval wunal fetin ta, gatun woinu bountoa, gatun kea-
wai bountoa kaiyu korien wokka-lan kakilliko.

12. Gratun nakulla noa ba lethuko bounnoun, kaaipa bounno-
un noa, gatun wiyelliela bounnoun, Nukug, gintoa burug-kulleun
woinu kabirug giroug kinbirug.

13. Gatun noa upilleiui miittara bounnoun kin ; gatun tanoa-
kal-bo bounnoun tuloa uma, gatun bountoa pitaluia bon Eloinug.

li. Gatun piriwtillo ftliunagjg kako wiyayelleun bukka-kan-to,
kulla noa lethuko tui-on uma purreag ka thabbat ka, gatun wiya
barun kuri, jHek ta })uri'eag ka umilliko kuri ko ; unti tara pur-
reag ka tanan uwolla turon uniulliko, gatun koawai tliabbat ta
purreag ka.

15. Pii'iwallo noa bon wiyayelleun gatun wi^'elliela, Gintoa
gakoiyaye ! wiya, yantinto nura burugbuggan gikoumba jhoo ga-
tun fatliino, purreag ka tliabbat ka, unta birug kokera birug,
yemmama-uwil koa kokoin kolag pittelliko?

16. Gatun keawai wal unui gapal, yinulkun ta Abaramiimba,
giratoara bounnoun Tliatanto noa unni tara jetin ta wunal la,
burugbuggulliko yanti birug, unti tliabbat ta purreag ka 1

17. Gatun wiya noa ba unni tara, koiyun bara gaiya ki'itan
yantin bukkamaiye gikoug kai ; gatun yantin kuri pital kakulla
yantin tin umatoarrin kauvsal lin gikoug birug.

18. Wiya gaiya noa, Minarig kiloa Piriwal koba Eloi koba I ga-
tun yakoai kiloa paggunbinun ?

19. Yanti kiloa ta yeai ba fniutard kolia, mankulla kuriko, ga-
tun meapa puri-ai ta gikoug kai ta ; gatun boaikuUeun Avokka lag,
gatun kakulla kauwal kulai ; gatun tibbin moroko tin yellawa wi-
ran ta.

20. Gatun noa wiyea-kun, Yakoai kiloa bag tugunbiiu'in piriwal
koba Eloi koba 1

21. Yanti flebben kiloa, mankulla gapallo gatun yuropa goro
ka gukilligel la nulai ta, kakulla wal yantibo flebben kiloa.

22. Gatun noa uwa kokeroa gatun kauwal loa kokeroa, wiyatin,
gatun uwollin tHierotlialem kolag.

23. Wiya gaiya bon wakallo, Piriwal, v/iya, warai moron ka-
killiko 1 Gatun noa wiya barun,

M

IGG AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

24. Nuwolla pulogkulli kolaj> tuloa tin yapug tin : kuUa bag
nui'un wiyan, kaiiwal-kauwallo nuwam'iu murrarig [)ul6gkulli ko-
lag gatun keawai wal kaiyu korieii.

25. Bougkulliuuu iioa ba kokeratin wokka lag, gatun wirrig-
l)akulia pulogkulligel, gatun nura garokea warrai ta, gatun wirril-
lei'in toto pulogkulligel, wiyellin, Piriwal, Piriwal, umulla gearun ;
gatun noa wiyayellinun gatun wiyanun, Keawaran bag nui'un gi-
milli korien wonta birug wal nura :

26. Wiyanun gaiya wal nura, Takeun geen gatun pittakeun gi-
roug kin mikan ta, gatun gintoa wiyakeun gearun kin yapug ka.

27. Wonto wal noa ba wiyanun, Wiyan l)ag nurun, keawaran
bag nurun gimilli korien, wonta Itirug wal nura ; yurig tia uwolla
emmoug kinbirug, yantin nura yarakai umullikan.

28. IJnta ta wal tugkilliniin gatun tirra-gatpuntullinun, nanun
gaiya nui'a ba barun, Alx'iramnug, gatun Ithaknug, gatun Yacub-
nug, gatun yantin fpi'opetnug, kakillin bara ba piriwal koba ka
Eloi koba, gatun nurunbo yuaipea wari'ai tako.

29. Gratun bara uwanun niui'iug tin, gatun krai tin, gatun kuni-
mari tin, gatun pakai tin, gatun yellawaniin wal piriwal koba ka
Eloi koba ka.

30. Gratun, a ! bara willug katan, kabo wal bara ganka kaniin
gatun bara ganka katan, kabo wal bara willug kanun.

31. Unta purreag ka winta uwa Parithaioi kabirug wiyellin bon,
Yurig ba waita wolla unta birug, kuUa noa Herodto biloa bunnuu
tetti.

32. Gratun noa barun wiy<i, Y'urig nura wolla, wiya-uwil koa bon
ininoa falopek, A ! paibuggan bag barun fdiabol, gatun turon bag
nnian buggai gatun kumba, gatun kiiniba-ken-ta wal goloin tia ka-
niin.

33. Yantin tin uwanun wal bag buggai gatun kiimba, gatun
kiimba-ken-ta ; kulla wal keawaran wal wakal fpropet ka kox'ien
tetti fHiei'otlialem kabirug.

34. Yapallun fHierothaleni, Hierothalem ! bunkiye tetti wirri-
ye barun fpropet, gatun pintia barun tunug ko yupitoara giroug
kinko; murrin-murrin bag kauma pa bag barun wonnai tara giro-
umba, yanti kiloa tibbinto ba kauma-uwil yirrig ka bai'a ka boun-
noun ba warea tara, gatun keawai-an nura kauma korien.

35. A ! nuriinba kokera kakillin mirral kakilliko : gatun bag
Aviyan tuloa nurun, Keawai nui-a tia nanun, yakita ko kanun ba
wiyanun wal nura ba, Pitalkamunlnlla bon uwan noa ba yitirroa
Piriwal koba koa.

WINTA XIV.

GrATUN yakita kakuUa, uwa noa ba murrarig kokera piriwal koba
ka Parithaioi koba takilliko nulai ko purreag ka thabbat ka, tumi-
mea gaiya bon bara.

2. Gratun, a! garoka ba kakuUa wakal kiiri kokoin-kan warakag.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 14. 167

o. Gratun lethuko noa wiyayelleun wiyabaruu fuoinikoiaug g;i-
tuu Pai'ithaioinug, wiyelliela, Wiya, inurrarag turon unmlliko pux--
reag ka tliabbat ka 1

4. Gatuu bara tullama pulH. G-atun noa boii tiii'on uma, gatun
wamunbea bon ;

T). Gratun wiyayelleun noa barun, wiyelliela, Ganto nurun kin-
birug-ko puntiraanun buttikag ba fathino ba ga fboo ba nurunba
kirai ta, gatun keawai gaiya bon manim wokka lag purreag ka
tliabbat ka ?

G. Gatun keawai bara bon wiyayelli pa unni tara.

7. Gatun noa wiya wakal fparabol barun gala ko wiyatora ko,
nakulla noa ba girimea bara murrarag waiyakan ; wiyelliela barun,

8. Wiyanun bin ba taraito kuriko uwa-uwil koa bi mankilli ko-
lag nukug kolag, yellawa yikora wokka waiyakanto, mirka ta tarai
kiu'i piriwal wiyatoara ta ;

9. Gatun noa niuwoa wiya biloa gatun gikoug tanan uwolliko
gatun wiyelliko bin, Guwa bon gali ko ; gatun giutoa koiyun bi ba
kanun waita uwanun waiyakan kolag bara ka bo.

10. Wonto ba bin wiyanun ba, yurig bi yellawolli ta ka bara
kako waiyakan kako ; gatun uwanun noa ba Aviya biloa ba wiya-
nun biloa, Koti, yurig wokka lag uwol la: yakita gaiya pitalmanim
bin mikan ta barun kin taniin ba kunto giroug katoa.

11. Gan umuUinun niuwoa bo wokka kako, umanun wal bon
bara kako ; gatun niuwoa umullinun niuwoa ba bara kako, uniul-
linun wal wokka kako.

12. Wiya gaiya noa gala wiya bon noa ba, Gunun bi ba takil-
liko bulwcira ka ga yarea ka, wiya yikora bi giroiimba koti, ga
kotita, ga porrolkan; wiyea kanim bin ba bara, gatun gupaiyea ka-
nun bin yarug ka.

13. Wonto bi ba umanun takilliko, wiyella barun mirral-niirral-
kan, gatun niunni-munni-kan, gatun wiir-wiirkan, gatun munniin-
kan :

14. Gatun bin pitalmanim; kulla bara keawai gupaiye korien
yarug ka ; kulla bin gupaiyea kaniin yarug ka, yakita ba moron
kanun murrarag-tai tetti-tetti kabirug.

15. Gatun wakal barun kinbirug yellawa gikoug kin takilliela,
gurra noa ba unni tara, wiya bon noa, Pitalmatoai'a noa tanun wal
kunto piriwal lako Eloi koba ka.

16. Wiya gaiya noa bon, Taraito kuriko wupea kauwal takil-
liko yarea ka, gatun wiya barun kauwal-kauwal kiiri :

17. Gatun yar^a ka yuka noa bon gikoumba mankillikan, wiyel-
liko barun wiyatoara ko, Tanan ; kulla yantin unnug tara wupea
yakita.

18. Gatun bara yantin wiyellan wakal-wakal gakoiyellan. Kur-
ri-kun'ito wakallo wiya gikoug, Gukilleun bag winta purrai, gatun
waita wal bag uwanun nakilliko gala ko ; wiyan l)iloa wamunbil-
liko tia.

1G8 A\ AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

19. Gatuu taraito wiyj'i, Gukillciui bag fpente tumba fboo butti-
kag, gatun bag waita uwau numulliko barun ; wiyan l»iloa wamun-
liilliko tia.

20. Gatun taraito \\iy;i, Mankulla bag nukug emmoumba, yaki
tin keawai bag iiwa korieii.

21. Uwa gaiya noa uniii iiiaukillikan, gatuu wiya bon piiiwal
gikouuiba uuni tara. Wiya bon gaiya noa kokcratinto bukka-kan-
to gikomnba niankillikan, Yvirig AvoUa kurrakai yapug koa kokc-
roa, gatun yutilla barun tanan untiko mirral-mirral-kai, gatun
munni-munni-kai, gatun wiir-Aviir-kai, gatun munmin-kai.

22. Gatun noa mankillikanto wiya, Piriwal, u[)atoara ta yanti
bi ba wiya, gatun kauwal-kauwal lako ka untiko.

23. Gatun noa bon piriwallo wiya niankillikan, Yurig uwoUa
yapug koa gatun korug koa, gatun pirrirahnulla Itarun tanan
uwolliko, cmnioiimba koa kokera wara])a-u\vik

24. Ivulla bag Aviyan nurun, Keawai wal bara untoakallo wiya-
toara nutunun ennnoinnba kunto.

25. Gatun kiiri kauwal-kauwal uwa gikoug katoa : gatun noa
willarig warkuUeun, gatun wiya gaiya barun,

26. Uwanun tia ba taraikan kuri emmoug kin, gatun warcka
korien gikoiimba biyugbai gatun tunkan, gatun nukug, gatuif
wonnai tara, gatun koti tara, gatun Avuggunbai, kauAva, gikounib:;
kata moron, keaAvai noa kaniui emmoumba Avin-obullikan.

27. Ganto-bo ba kurri korien gikoiimba talig-kabillikanne, gatuu
uAvolla cmmoui' katoa, keaAvai noa kanun emmoumba Aviri'obuUi-
kan.

28. Ganto nui'un kinbirug-ko, kotollin Avittimulliko kokei'a, Avi-
ya, noa yellawanun kurri-kurri, gatun tuigko umulliko, mirka kca-
Avai goloin Avitti korien ?

29. jNIirroma, yukita Avupea noa ba tugga, gatun keawai noa
kaiyu korien goloin wittilliko, yantinto l)a nauiui beelmanun gaiya
bon,

.30. AViyellinun, Gali kuriko ]iutea wittimulliko, gatun kaiyu
korien noa goloin Avittimulliko.

.31. Ga, gan piriAval UAviinun noa ba AvuruAA^ai kolag tarai ko
jiiriAval ko, yellaAva noa kurri-kurri, gatun kotelliela, Aviya, noa ba
kaiyukan \iwa-UAvil koa tdekem-millia to uugguiTaAva-UAA-il koa bon
taimin to ke tbith-dokem-millia to ?

32. Ga ba, kalog ka ba noa piriwal taraito, yiika noa Avnkal
])untimai Aviyelliko pital koa kakillai.

.33. Yanti kiloa, yantinto nurun kinbirug-ko Avareka korien noa
yantin gikoumba, IcoaAvai noakanim emmoumba Aviri'obullikan.

34. Pulli ta uuni murrarag ; Avonto ba pulli ka korien, yakoai
kanun upilliko !

.15. KeaAvai murrarag koi'ien ta }au'rai ko, ga ba konuggel ko :
Avareka gaiya kuriko. iNiuwoabo gurrcugkan gurrulliko, gun-altilla
l)on.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 15. ' 160

WINTA XV.

Papai ga'iya l)ara mva gikoug kin yantin fteloiiai gatun yarakai-
wiling gui'i'ulliko bon.

2. Gratun koiya bara Paritliaioiko gatun fgaramniateuko, wiyel-
liela, Unni kuri muvrarag korien, noa uman l)arun yarakai-vv'illug
gattm tatan noa barun katoa.

3. Gratun noa wiya barun unni fparabol, wiyelliela,

4. Gan kiiri nurun kinbirug, fhekaton ta fcipu gikoumba, Ava-
kal noa ba yurea unianun barun kinbirug, wiya, noa wuniin barun
fnainty-nain ta korug ka, gatun waita noa uwanun na-uwil koa
noa yui'ea-matoara, kara-uwilli koa noa ?

•'"'. Gratun karawolleun noa ba, wunkilleim gaiya noa ba niirrug
ka gikovig kin, pitallo ba.

G. Gatun uwa noa ba gura kako, wiya noa barun kotita gatun
taraikan, wiyellin barun, Pitallia kauwa emmoug katoa ; kulla bag
karawolleun ft^ipu ta emmoumba unni, y.urea ba kakulla.

7. Wiyan bag nurun, yanti kiloa pital kaniin kauwallan moroko
ka ba minki noa ba wakal yarakaikan, kcawai l)arun kai uiurranig-
tai tin "h^'Wi^ty-nain ta tin, minki korien.

8. Ga wonnug-ke nukug pundol farguro ften ta bounnoun kin-
1 la, y ui'ea bountoa ba umaniin wakal j)undol, wiya, bountoa wirrog-
lianun kaipug, gatun win-illinun wirrillikanneto kirra-kirra-uwilli
koa bountoa 1

9. Gatun karawolleun bountoa ba, wiya gaiya bountoa ba koti-
ta gatun taraikan tuigko, wiyellin, Pitallia kaiiwa emmoug katoa ;
kulla liag karawolleun yurea bag ba uraa.

10. Yanti kiloa, wiyan bag nurun, unnug ta })ital katan mikan
ta agelo ka Eloi koba wakal lin ba yarakai-willug minki kanun.

11. Gatun noa wiya, Taraito kuriko yinal bula-buloara giko-
umlia :

12. Gatun mittiko ])ulun kinbirug-ko wiya bon biyugbai giko-
umba, Biyug, guwa tia winta tullokan ka-uwil koa emmoumba. Ga-
tun tunbilliela noa bulun tullokan.

13. Gatun keawai kaixwal-kauAval korien ta purreag ka yukita,
kau-ma noa mittiko yinallo, gatun waita noa uwa kalog koba, ga-
tun unta noa wari-wareka tullokan gikoumba pittelligel la.

14. Gatun wax"i-wareka noa ba kirun, kauwal kakulla vmta kun-
to korien ; gatun tanoa-kal-])0 kakulla gaiya noa kapirrikan.

15. Gatun uwa gaiya noa umulliko kiiri kako unta ko purrai
ta ko ; gatun noa bon yuka gikoug ka tako purrai tako girati-
niulliko buttikag ko fporak ko.

16. Pital gaiya noa kakulla takilliko, ta-uwil ba liuttikagko: ga-
tun keawai kuriko bon gupa.

17. Gatun noa kakilliela ba niuwoabo, wiyelliela gaiya noa, Ka-
uw;\l-kauvv"alla umullikan biyugbai koba eramoiimba koba kuu-

170 A\ AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE,

to kaiiwal barunba tukilliko giituii gukilliko, gatiiu gatoa kapirro
wirribaubillin !

18. Bougkullinuu wal bag, waita biyugbai tako, gatun wiyanuii
wal bon, Biyug, yai-akai bag uina. inikan ta moroko ka, gatun gi-
roug kin,

19. Gatuu keawai liag muirarag korien wiya-uwil koa tia giro-
umba yinal yitirra : iiniulla tia "wakal yanti umullikan giroumba.

20. Gatun noa bougkulleun, uwa gaiya noa biyugbai tako.
AVonto noa Ija kalog ka kauwal kakulla, nakulla noa bon biyugbai-
to gikoiinaba-ko, minki gaiya noa kakulla, murra gaiya noa, pun-
timulleun gaiya noa gikoug kin wuroka, gatun bumbiimbea-kan
gaiya bon.

21. Gatun noa l)on yinallo wiya, Biyug, yarakai bag umulleun
niikan ta moroko ka gatun giroug kin, keawai bag mui-rarag
korien wiya-uwil koa tia giroiiniba yinal yitirra.

22. Wonto noa ba liiyugljaito wiya barun niankillikan giro-
iimba, Mara unnoa-unnug upilligel, gatun ixpilla bon konein kako,
gatun upilla frig gikoug kin Jinittara, gatun upilla lion tugganog
yulo ka gikoug kin :

23. Gatun niara tanan untiko buttikag fitalo giratimatoara
kipai, gatun turuUa ; taniunbilla uearun, gatun pital koa geen kau-
NN-il :

24. Koito Ija unni ennnouniba yinal tetti kakulla, yakita gaiya
noa moron katan : garawatilleun noa, gatun yakita bvnnmilleun gai-
ya bon. Gatun pital bara kakilli kolag.

25. Unta ta garro gikoumba kakilliela upulligel la i)urrai ta ;
gatun nwollicla noa ]>a papai kokera koba, gurra noa tekki gatun
uutelli ta.

26. Gatun noa kaai])a wakal uiankillikan, gatun wiya minnug-
ban gali tai-a minarig tin.

27. Gatun wiya bon noa, Unni ta uwan giroumba biggai ; gatun
giroumba-ko biyugbaito tura giratimatoara buttikag fitalo kipai
ta, kuUa wal piti'il noa gikoug kai moron tin katan.

28. Gatun noa niuwara kakulla, keawai noa murrug kolag uw a
pa; yaki tin noa biyugbai gikoumba nwa gatun pirriralma bon.

29. Gatun noa bon wiyayelliela gikoumba biyugbai, Ela ! kau-
wal-kauwalla wunalla umala bag gii'oug ; keawai bag giroumba
Aviyellikanne unia korien ; gatun keawai bi tia gupa warea butti-
kag f kid, pital koa tia ka-uwil bara emmoumba kotita :

30. Wonto ba tanoa-bo giroumba yinal uwa gali, wari-wareka
giroiimba tullokan yarakai-willvig koa ko gapal loa, tura gaiya bi
gikoug buttikag fitalo giratimatoara.

31. Gatun noa wiya bon, Yinal, yellaw'an biemmougkin yanti-
katai, gatun yantiu imni tara emmoumba giroug kin kanun.

32. Murrarag ta kakulla takilliko gatun pittelliko ; koito l>a
unni giroumba umbeara-kog tetti kakulla, gatun moron kateakan :
gatun garaAvatilleim, gatun bummilleim bon yakita^

THK GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 16. 171

WINTA XVI.

Gatux noa wiya baruu gikoumba wii-robullikan, Untoa ta tarai ta
wakal kuri tuUokan porrolkan, mankillau piriwal gikoiimba ; gatuii
wiyayema bon gikoug wareka noa gikouniba tullokan.

2. Gatun noa wiya bon, wiyelliela, Yakoabag gurra giroug kin-
ba ? "sviyella bi tia minarig bi ba nmulliela ; keawai bi kara kunuu
umullikan.

3. Wiyelleiin gaiya noa mankillikan niuwoal)0, Minnug baniui
bag ? kulla wal lia piriwallo enimoumba ko mantilleun keawai
bag mankillikan kanun ; keawai bag pinninun ; koiyun bag poi-
yelliko.

4. Gali wal bag mnulliko, yipanim tia ha emmoiimba mankil-
ligel labii'ug, waniunbi-uwil koa tia bara koti ko kokera ko.

5. Yanti lia wiya noa liai-un wiyatoara piriwal koba gikoumba,
gatun noa wiya wakal kurri-kurri ka, Minnan ba wiyapaiyeun em-
nioumba piriwal koba'?

6. Gatun noa wiya, fHekatou ta wimbi ka karauwa. Gatun
noa wiya bon, Mara bi unni, yellawa kurrakai, upulla fpentekonta
koa ka-uwil.

7. Wiya gaiya noa tarai, Minnan bi wiya])aiyeun piriwal koba?
Gatun noa wiya, fHekaton ta winibi fwiet. Gatun bon noa wiya,
Mara bi unni, npuUa fety koa ka-uwil.

8. Gatun noa piriwallo mui-rarag bon wiya unnoa mankillikan
yarakai ka, kulla noa uma gurakito ; kulla bara wonnai tara unti
ko purrai tako bariinba willuggel koba guraki bara, keawai bara
wonnai kaibug koba.

9. Gatun gatoa nurun wiyan, Umulla nura bo kutita kakilliko
tullo-yarakai tabirug ; tetti nura ba kanun, waraunbilla gaiya nu-
run kokera yuraki ba katan yanti-katai.

10. Niuwoa miroman gali warea ta, yanti miroman noa kauwal
gali ta ; gatun niuwoa yarakai-maye gali warea ta, yanti yai'akai-
maye gali kauwal ta.

11. Yaki tin keawai nura l)a miroma pa tuUo yarakai ta, ganto
wal nurun guniin tullo tuloa ta miromuUiko 1

1 2. Gatun keawai nui'a ba mii'oma pa tarai koba, ganto wal gu-
nun nuriinba koti tako 1

13. Keawai wal mankillikanto umanun buloara-bulun piriwal
bula ; kulla noa yarakai umanun wakal bon, gatun mun-arag uma-
nun tarai ; ga ba kanun noa wakalla, gatun beelmanun bon tarai.
Keawai nura kaiyu korien uraulliko Eloi ko gatun tullokan ko
yarakai ko.

14. Gatun unni tara bara gurra Parithaioiko, willirrikan bara
katan, gatun bon bara beelma.

15. .Gatun noa barun wiya, Kauwa murrarag koa nura ka-uwil
inikan ta barun kin kuri ka ; wonto noa ba Eloito gurran nuriin-
ba biilbul la ba ; kulla unni tara murrarag ta katan baruii kinba
kiii'i ko, yakaran ta katan mikan ta Eloi kin.

172 AX AUSTRALIAN LAN-GUAfJE.

16. Wiycllikanno-ta gatuu Inira fpropct kakulla loaune noa La
paipea : yaki tabirug jnriwAl koba Eloi koba wiyabunbea, gatuu
yantin kiiri Avaita-waitawoUeiiu inurrug kolag.

17. Gatuu moroko ta gatuu purrai ta kaiyukau kauun waita
kolag, keawai warea ta wiyellikauue koba ka korieu kakilliko.

18. Gauto ba warekulliuuu porikuubai gikoumba gatuu tarai
bi'imbea ka, yarakai buinbea uoa: gatuu ganto ba bumbiuuu ware-
katoara ])oribai taliirug, yarakai bi'uubea uoa.

19. Kakulla ta noa wakal porrolkau, upulleiiu uoa gorog-gorbg
ko gatuu uiurrurag ko karigkareug ko, gatuu bou kakulla uiiu-
nugbo-uiinuugbo kauwal takilliko gatuu pittfUiko yautiu ta pur-
eag ka:

20. Gatuu kakulla ta wakal ]ioiyaye giakai yitirra Ladharo,
wuukulla bou ba yapuggel gikoug ka ta, warapal mita-mitag,

21. Gatuu wiya bou ba nmtug ko takilliko gikoug kai porrolbiu
tin takilligel labivug ; gatuu warikal uwa bara, woata gaiya l>ou
uiita-iaitag.

22. Yakita-kalai tetti kakulla poiyaye, gatun kurriu Ijava bou
agelo-ko Abaram kiuko jtarrag kako : tetti gaiya noa porrolkau
kakulla, gatuu bou uiilka.

23. Gatuu uoa uuta koiyug ka jlu'll ka bougkulleiiu gikoiiuiba
gaikug, kakilliela tirriki ka, gatuu nakilliela bou Abaramuug ka-
log ka, gatuu uoa Ladharo parrag ka kakilliela Abaram kin.

21:. Gatun uoa kaaibulleiui, wiyelliela, Biyug Abaram, gurrara
tia kauwa, gatuu yukulla bou Ladliaronug, kurrimulli' koa noa
kokoin to, gatuu moiya koa tia tallag wupi-uwil ; kulla wal liag
Idrrin kiitan iinti tirriki ka koiyug ka.

25. Wonto noa ba Abaramko wiya, Yiual, gurrulla giutoa ya-
kita moron ta inautala murrarag-tai giroiimba, wonto noa ba
Ladharo yakaran mantala ; gatun noa yakita pital katan, wonto
bi ba kirrin katau.

2G. Gatuu yanti uuui l)a, geaiaiu kiuba willika ba pirriko wiiu'
kulla ; keawai uwanun untikal luitoa kolag : koawai bara unta
birug nwaniin untiko gearun kiuko.

27. Wiya gaiya uoa, Wiyan bauug, Biyug, yuka-uwil koa boii
l)iutun kiuko kokera kolag :

28. Kulla wal lia emmoumba kotita fpente; wiya-uwil koa noa
barun, yanoa bara ba tanau uwanun unti kolag tirriki-tii'riki kako.

29. Abaramko noa wiya bou, Mothe uoa gatuu bara fpropet ba-
run katoa ba ; gurral)uubilla baniu,

30. Gatuu noa wiya, Keawaran, ])iyug Abaram ; wakal l)a uwol-
la barun kin unta birug tetti kabirug, gurraniui gaiya wal bara.

31. Gatuu noa bon wiyj'i, Keawai bara ba gurranun bou iVlothe-
ung gatuu barun fpropetnug, keawai wal bara gurranun wakal ba
^laikullinun moron tetti kabirug.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 17. 173

WIXTA XVIT

^^'IYA !J:aiva noa barun wivi-obullikan jldkoiiiuba, Kauwa yanti ka-
niin bo ta yval yarakai -, yapalla iioa gikoiig kiubirug yarakai ta-
birug !

-. 3Iurrai ka ba noa gira-uwil koa kulleug koa l:)Ou tuuug, gatun
"wareka-uwil koa bon korowa ka, mini noa yanoa yarakai umabunlji
yikora unti tara birug wakal wonnai tara birug.

•3. Yakoai nura kauwa : Kotiko ba giroug yarakai iimanun gi-
roug ka to, wiyella bon ; gatun minki noa ba k-anun, kamunbilla
bon.

4. Gatun kauwul-kauwal-la Inloa ba yarakai umanun wakal la
purreag ka, gatun kauwal-kauwal-la biloa willarig noa kanun wa-
kal la puiTeag ka, wiyellinun biloa, Minki bag katan ; kamun-
binun Aval binug.

5. Gatun bon bara fapothol wiya, Piriwal, kauwal koa geaninba
gurrulli-ta ka-uwil kakilliko.

6. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Ka ba nun'mba gurrulli-ta yanti
kiloa mitti yeai fmutard koba, wiyella wal nura ba unni kiilai
ftbukamin, Wokka lag l)i kauwa wirrakan-bo, gatun meapuUia bi
korowa ka ; gatun gala nurun gurraniin gaiya wal.

7. Gan nurun kinbirug-ko upullin i)urrai nurun ka to mankilli-
kan-to, ga taraunbin buttikag, wiyaniin bon kabo, uwanun noa ba
upulliggel labirug, Yurig bi wolla, yellawolliko ta-uwil koa 1

8. Gatun wiya bon noa A\"iyanun, Kurrakai uniulla ta-uwil koa
bag, gatun girullia bi gintoabo, gatun mara-uwil koa bi tia ta-uwil
koa bag gatun pitta-uwil ; gatun willug gaiya bi tanim gatun pit-
tanun ]

9. Wiya noa, wiyapaiyeun I)on mankillikan, koito noa ba uma
unni tara' wiya bon ba 1 Kotan bag kearan.

10. Yanti nura wiyella, umanim nura Ija yantin unni tara
wiyatoara nurun, Umullikan geen murrarag korien katan ; uma ta
geen unni wiyatoara umulliko gearun.

11. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela noa ba fHierotlialem kolag,
uwa willi koa noa Tliamaria koa gatun Galilaia koa,

12. Gatun noa uwolliela ba tarai toa kokeroa, nuggarawa bon
bara kuri ften ta puiTul-wommun-wommun, garokea kalog ka :

13. Gatun bara paibugga pulli, gatun wiya Ictlm, Piriwal, gui'-
raraiuulla gearun.

14. Gatun nakulla noa barun, wiya barun noa, Yurig nura wolla,
tugunbillia nura barun kin fhiereu ko. Gatun yakita kakulla,
uwolliela bara ba, turon bara kakulla tanoa-kal-bo.

15. Gatun wakallo bai'un kinbirug-ko, nakilleiin noa ba turon
noa kakulla, willugbo noa uwa, gatun kaaipulleim noa wokka, pi-
talmulliela bon Eloinug,

16. Gatun puntimulleun noa baran goara ko gikoug kin tinna
ka, murrarag noa bon wivelleun ; eatun noa Thamaria-kal.

174 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

17. Gatun noa lethuko wiyayelleiin, wiyclliela, Wiya, ften ta
turon kakulla 1 ga wonnug-ke bara taraikan fnain ta 1

18. Keawai bara willug ])a ba ]iitaliniilliko bon Eloinug, wakal
ba }ioa mini gowikan ko.

19. Gatun noa wiya bon, Jjougkullia, yurig bi woUa ; girougka
ba ko guiTulli biriig ko turon bi katan.

20. Gatun wiya bon ba Paritliaioiko, yakounta-ke paipinun piri-
wal koba Eloi koba, wiyayelleun noa barun, wiyelliela, Tanaii
uwan piriwal koba Eloi koba keawai na koiieji.

21. Keawai bara wiyanun wal, A unni ta ! ga unta ta ! kuUa, a !
piriwal koba Eloi koba murrug kaba katan nurun kinba.

22. Gatun noa wiya barun wirrobullikan, A! puri'eag ta wal
kanini, na-uwil koa nura wakal purreag Yinal koba kuri koba,
gatun keawai wal nura nanun.

23. Gatun bara nurun wiyanun wal, Xa-uwa unni ; ga, na-uwa
unnug : yanoa l)arun uwa yikora, wirroba yikoi'a.

24. Yanti kiloa jnrruggun-to uwan tarai tabirug ko moroko
birug ko, tarai ta kako moroko kako ; kauwa yanti kiloa wal ka-
nun Yinal kiiri koba purreag ka gikoug ka ta.

25. Gatun kui-ri-kurri ta bon umanun ininnugbo-minuugbo,
gatun warekatea wal bon gali koba willuggel koba.

26. Gatun yakita ba kakulla j)urreag ka Noe-iimlja ka, yanti
bo ta wal kaniin purreag ka Yinal koba kuri koba.

27. Takillala bara, pittellala bar.a, bumbillala bara nukug, gukil-
lala bumbilli ka, yakita purreag ka kakulla noa ba Noe uwa niur-
rarig murrinauwai ka, gatun tunta-tunta kakulla, gatun kirun gai-
pa barun nuropa.

28. Gatun yanti yakita ba kn.kulla purreag ka Lot-iiniba, ta-
killala bara, pittellala bara, wirrilliala bara, gukillala bara, meapala
bara, wittiala bara ;

29. Wonto ba yakita uuta purreag ka Lot noa uwa Thodum ka-
Ijirug, patea gaiya koiyug-ko gatun f biimton-ko wokka tin nioi'oko
tin, gatun kiyupa barun yantin kirun tetti-tetti.

30. Yanti kiloa kaniin yakita piu'reag ka paipinun noa ba
Yinal kuri koba.

31. Unta yakita purreag ka katan noa lia wokka kokera, gatun
gikoiimba tullokan murrug kaba kokera ba, keawai bon uwabunbi
yikora baraii mankilliko tullokan ko ; gatun katan noa ba upulli-
gel laba, keawai bon uwaljunbi yikora willug kolag.

32. Kotella bounnoun kai nukug Lot-iunba tin.

33. Ganto ba gikouniba moron miromanun moron kakilliko, wo-
giintinun wal noa ; gatun ganto ba wogiintinun gikoiimba moron,
kanun wal moron kakilliko.

34. Wiya nurun bag, yakita unta-unta tokoi ta buloara ta ka-
niin birrikilligel la wakal la ; maiiun wal wakal, gatun tarai gaiya
wuniin.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 17. 175

35. Buloara umullinun bula; manun wal wakal, gatun tarai gai-
ya wunun.

36. Baloai-a katea-kaiiun upulligel la; manun wal wakal, gatun
tarai gaiya wunun.

37. Gatun wiyelleun bon Ijara, wiyelliela, Piriwal, wonnug-ke ?
Gatun noa wiya barun, Unta wonto ba katea-kiinun muriin ta,
unta kolag ba kautilliniin bara porowi.

WINTA XVIII.

Gatun noa wiya barun wakal tpf>'i'«ibol, wiya-uwil koa bon bara
kuriko Eloinug, gatun yari koa bara kaiyalea-kiin ;

2. Wiyelliela, Unta ta kokera tarai ta wakal wiyellikan piriwal
kakuUa, kinta korien kakuUa noa bon Eloi kai, gatun keawai noa
tuma korien barun kiiri :

3. Gatun kakulla wakal niabogun unta kokera ; gatun bountoa
uwa gikoug kin, wiyelliela, Timbai kakillia tia emmoumba bukka-
kaye.

4. Gatun keawai wal noa gurra pa kabo kakullai tako ; wonto
noa ba yukita wiya gikoug kinko minki ka, Keawai bag kinta
korien bon Eloi kai katan, ga keawai kiiri tuman korien ;

5. Kulla bountoa tia unni mabogunto pirralman, gatoa timbai
ki'inun bounnoun kin, murrin-muiTin koa bountoa tia uwa-uwil
kumburi'obawan bountoa tia.

6. Gatun noa Piriwallo wiya, Gurrulla bon unni yarakai wiyel-
likan piriwal wiyan ba.

7. Gatun wiya noa Eloito timbai katillinun barun gikoiimba
girimatoara, bara wiyan bon purreag ka gatun tokoi ta, gurralin
noa barun wiyelli ta kalog tinto ?

8. Wiyan nurun bag, timbai wal noa katillinun barun kurrakai.
Wonto noa ba uwanun wal Yinal kuri koba tanan, wiya, noa na-
nun gurrullikanne purrai taba?

9. Gatun noa wiya barun unni fparabol tarai tako kotelleim
bara ba murrarag-tai barabo, gatun yarakai bara kotellin taraikan :

10. Buloara-bula kuri uwa fliieron kolag wiyelliko : wakal la
noa Paritliaio gatun tarai ta ftelone ;

11. Garokea noa Paritliaio gatun noa yanti wiyelliela niuwoabo
giakai : A Eloi ! pitalraan bag gii'oug, kulla bag ka korien yanti
tarai ba katan, bara kau-maye, tuloa uma korien mankiye nukug
ka, ga ka korien bag yanti unni noa ba ftelone :

12. Ta korien bag buloarakal katan wakal la thabbat birug
ka, gutan bag winta untikal emmoug kai yantin tabirug.

13. Gatun noa ftelone garokilliela ba kalog ka, keawai noa
gaikug ka wokka lag na pa moroko koba, wonto noa ba minki
motilliela wiyelliela ba, A Eloi! miromulla bi tia, yarakai bag ba
katan.

14. Wiyan nurun bag, unni noa kuri uwa baran kokera koba
gikoug ka tako gurraraatoara, keawai tarai ta : kulla yantin bara

176 AN AUSTUALIAX LAXGUAGE.

})iriwal-buntelIiko, kanun wal bai-a koiyuii-baratoaro ; siatun niu-
woa bo koai-koai korien bon, uinaiiiin kauwal bou kakilliko.

15. Gatun mankulla bara gikoug kiiiko wonnai tara numa-uwil
koa barun noa : Avonto l)a nakulla bava l)a wirrobnllikanto, yipa
bara barun.

1 6. Wonto ba noa lethuko wiya barun, Aviyelliela, Wamunbilla
barun wonnai tara ennnoug kinko, gatun yanoa barun yipai yiko-
ra ; kulla barun-kai-kal katea-kanun ])iriwal koba Eloi koba,

17. Wiyan bag tuloa nurun, Ganto ba gurra korien piriwal koba
Eloi koba yanti wonnai warea ba, kfawai wal noa pulogkiillinun
unta kolag.

IS. Gatun taraito umullikanto piriwallo wiya bon, Aviyelliela,
Piriwal murrarag-tai, minnug-bulliuun bag moron kakilliko yanti-
katai ?

19. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Minarigtin bi tia wiyan mur-
Tarag-tai emmoug '? keawai wal wakal murrai'ag-tai, wonto noa ba

wakalbo, Eloi ta.

20. Gurran bi yantin wiyellikanue, Yanoa manki yikoranukug
taraikan koba, Yanoa biinki yikora tetti, Yanoa manki yikora,
Yanoa nakoiya yikora, Gurulla bon biyugbai gatun tunkan giro-
limba.

21. Gafcun noa wiya, Gurra bag unni tara wiyellikanne yaki-
kalai tabirug, wonnai bag ba kakulla.

22. Gatun yakita gurra noa ba lethuko unnoa tara, wiya bon
noa, Wakal unnoa-unnug uma korien bi ba; gukillia j^antin tullo-
kan giroiimba, gu-uwil koa barun mirral ko, gatun tullokan giro-
umba kanun wal wokka ka moroko ka ; gatun kaai, Avirroba-uwil
koa bi tia.

23. Gatun gurra noa ba unni, minki noa kakulla kauwal ; kulla
noa porrol kakulla kauwalkan.

24. Gatun noa ba lethuko nakulla bon minki noa ba kakulla
kauwal-lan, wiya gaiya 2ioa,Pirral ta pulogkulliko bara tullokan
ta ba piriwal koba kako Eloi koba kako !

25. fKamel noa kaiyukan katan pulogkakilliko tigkugkoa ko
taku lako, keawai porrolkan pulogkakilliko piriwal koba kako
Eloi koba kako.

26. Gatun bai-a ba gurra, wiya bara, Gan-lce wal moron kanim
kakilliko 1

27. Gatun noa wiya, Unni tara kaiyu korien kiiri ko umulliko,
kaiyu-kan-to Eloito noa umulliko.

28. Gatun Peterko noa wiya, Ela ! wunkulla geen yantin ta,
gatun wirroba geen bin.

29. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyanim liag tuloa, Niuwoa wareka
kokera gikoiimba, ga biyugbai, ga tunkan, ga gapal, ga wonnai,
gikoug kinko piriwal koba tin Eloi koba tin,

30. Manun wal noa kauwal unti yakita, gatun untoa tarai ta
purrai ta tanan kakilliko, moron noa kanun yanti-katai.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 18. 177

31. Maukulla gaiya noa barun fdodeka ta wirrobullikan, gatuu
wiya bavuu, A! waita geeu wokka kolag tHiei'othalem kolag, ga-
tun yantiu tara wiyatoara fpropet to gikoug kai Yinal liii kiiri
koba tin kimun wal uuiatoani kakilliko.

32. Gatuii boil guuuu wal barun kin fetlianekul kinko, gatun
bon bukka-maniin wal, gatun karagkobiuun :

33. Gatun welkoriniui Aval bara bon, gatuu wal bon wirriuini ;
gatun kuaiba-ken-ta bougkuUinun gaiya noa willugbo.

34. Gatun keawai l)ava gurrapa unni tara wiyatoara : gatun
unni wiyellikanne yuropa barun kai, keawai bara gurrapa uuui
tara wiyatoara.

35. Gatun yakita kakulla, uwolliela noa ba papai Yeriko ka,
wakal muumin kuri yellawolliela yapug ka bitta ka, poiyelliela :

36. Gatuu guri'ulliela noa liarun konara yapug koa, wiya noa
iuinarig unni ?

37. Gatun bara bon \viy;i, Uwan noa lethu Nadharet-kul.

38. Gatun noa kaaipulleim, wiyelliela, Ela letliu! yinal Dabicl-
>'unba, gurrara-mulla bi tia.

39. Gatun bara uwa ganka, wiya bon koiyelli koa noa: wonto
noa ba butti paiN^elleun, Yi'.ial Dabidumba gintoa, gurrara-mulla
bi tia.

40. Gatun garokea noa lethu, gatun wiya bon yutllliko l)on
gikoug kinko ; gatun uwa noa ba ])apai, wiya bon noa,

41. Wiyellielx, Minnug-buUiko bi tia wiyan 1 Gatun noa wi^-an,
Piriwal, namunbilliko tia umulla.

42. Gatun noa lethuko wiya bon, Kamunbilia bin nakilliko ;
giroumba tin gurrulli tin moron unia.

43. Gatun noa tanoa-kal-lio nakuUa, gatun bon noa wirropa,
pitalmulliela bon Eloinug ; gatun yantin unni kuri nakulla bara
ba, pitalma bon Eloinug.

WINTA XIX.

1. Gatun noa lethu UAva willi koa Yeriko koa.

2. Gatun kakulla untakal wakal kuri giakai Dhakke yitirra,
piriwal ttelunekal noa kakulla, gatun noa porrolkan.

3. Gatun noa numea nakilliko lethunug, gan noa Ija; gatun
noa keawai, kulla konaro niintiraa, kulla noa warea goiyog.

4. Gatun noa murra ganka, gatun noa kuUiwa wokka-lag kulai
tin nakilliko bon, kulla noa unta kolag uwolli kolag.

•l. Gatun lethu noa ba uwa untako, nakulla noa wokka-lag,
gatun bon nakulla, gatun bon wiya, Ela Dhakke! tanan kurrakai
tirabuUa, kulla buggai koa bag yellawaniin giroug ka ta koker/i.

6. Gatun tiraba noa kurrakai baran, gatun pital ma-uwa bon.

7. Gatun nakulla baj-a ba, wiyellan niuwai-akan bara yantinto,
wiyelliela, Waita noa uwa yarakai toa koti kakilliko.

8. Gatun noa Dhakke garokea, gatun wiya bon Piriwalnug,
Ela Piriwal! wiuta bag gutan emmoiunba tullokan kabirug niiri'al

178 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGK.

kai ko ; gatun niankiilla bag ba tullokan taraikan taliirug yaki tin
gakoiyaye tin, wupinun gaiya l)on Ijag willugbo Avaran tako.

9. Gatuu noa letliuko bon wiyu, Tanan uwa moron unti buggai
[)urreag ka initi ko kokera ko, kulla noa katan yinal ta Al);irani-
umba.

10. Kulla Yinal kuri koba uwa tiwolliko gatun tumulliko wo-
guntitoara ko.

11. Gratun gurra bara ba unni tara, wiyoakan butti noa gatun
wiya wakal fparabol, kulla noa papai ta ba fHierothalem ka, gatun
kulla bara kota paipilliniin piriwal koba Eloi koba tanoa-kal-bo.

12. Yaki tin noa wiya, Tarai ta pii'iwal uwa tarai tako purrai
tako kalog kako, mankilliko gikougbo ])iriwalkanne-ta, gatun wil-
lugbulliko.

13. Gatun wiya noa barun gikoumba niankillikan ften ta, gatun
gukulla noa barun kin fmina ta ften ta, gatun wiya barun, Mivo-
mnlla uwanun bag ba willugbo.

14. Wonto ba gikoumba-ko konara niuwama bon, gatun yuka
bon puntimai gikoug, wiyelliela, Keawai wal noa unni piriwal ka-
tillinim gearun.

15. G-atun kakulla yakita, willug ba noa ba. mantoara piriwal-
koba, wiya gaiya noa barun unnoa niankillikan gan kin noa ba
gukulla tmoney, tanan gikoug kin, gurra-uwil koa noa minnan
barun kinba gutoara gukilli tabirug.

16. Tanan gaiya uwa kurri-kurri wakal, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal !
giroumba ta fniina unni wittia kauwal ften fmina ta.

17. Gatun bon noa wiyu, Kauwa yanti, gintoa niankillikan
murrarag; kulla bi miroma unnoa warea ta, kaiyukan bi kauwa
ften ta kokera.

18. Gatun tarai uwa, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal! giroumba ta fini-
na unni wittia kauwal fpente fmina ta.

19. Gatun noa wiya gaiya bon, Kauwa bi kaiyukan fpente ta
kokera.

20. Gatun tarai uwa, wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal ! na-uwa unni ta
fmina giroumba, wunkulla bag ba koroka wurobilla :

21. Kulla bag kinta kakulla giroug kai, kulla bi bukka kauwal ;
mantan bi wokka-lag keawai bi ba wunpa baraii, gatun kolbuntia
bi unnoa keawai bi ba meapa ba.

22. Gatun noa bon wiya, Giroug kinbirug koti ko kurraka ko
wiyan pirriral-manun banug, gintoa ta niankillikan yai-akai.
Gurra bi tia bvikka kauwal bag ; mantillin wokka-lag keawai bag
wunpa bar.'m, gatun kolbuntillin unnoa keawai bag ba meapa ba:

23. Kora koa bi gupa enimoumba f money gukilligel lako, mara-
uwil koa ])ag enimoumba koti gatun kopatoara ta, emmoug ka ta
uwolli ta 1

24. Gatun noa wiya barun garokilliela bara ba tarug ka, Man-
tillia unnoa fmina unti birug bon, gatun guwa bon gala ko f ten-
kan ko eikoui;.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 19. 179

25. (Gratun bara wiya bou, Piriwal, ften ta fmina mantan noa).

26. Wiyan nurun bag, Yantinko barun mantan bava ba gunun
wal butti ; gatun keawaran noa ba, unnoa ta mantan noa ba man-
tillinun wal bon gikoug kinbirug.

27. Kulla bara uniioa emmoumba nitiwa-maye, keawai bara
emmoug kanim bi ba piriwal barun, mara barun, bu-uwil koa barun
eramoug kin mikan ta.

28. Gatun wiya noa ba unnoa, waita gaiya noa ganka uwa
wokka-lag fHierothalem kolag.

29. Gatun kakulla yakita, uwa noa ba papai Bethabage tako
gatun Bethany tako, bulkara ta giakai yitirra tElai6n ka la,
yakunbea noa buloara-bulun gikoiimba wirrobullikan,

30. Wiyelliela, Yurig nura wolla kokera ko kaiyin tako ; uwol-
linun nura ba untarig, nanun gaiya nura wirritoara warea butti-
kag; keawai yellawa pa kuri bulka ka : burugbuggulla unnoa,
gatun yemmamulla untiko.

31. Gatun tarai-kan-to ba wiyanun, Minarig tin nura unnoa ta
burugbuggan t giakai nura wiyella bon, Kulla noa Piriwallu wiya.

32. Gatun bara ba yukatoara, Avaita uwa, gatun nakulla gaiya
bara yanti noa ba wiya barun ba.

33. Gatun burugbugguUiela bara ba unnoa warea buttikag, gi-
koiimba-ko wiya barun, Minarig tin nura burugbuggan mnii warea
buttikag ]

34. Gatun bara wiya, Piriwallo noa wiya gala.

3.5. Gatun bara yemmama bon kinko : gatun bara wupea barun
ba kirrikin bulka ka buttikag ka, gatun wupea bon bai-a letliunug
wokka ka.

36. Gatun uwolliela noa ba, wupea bara yapug ka kirrikinkan
nuriinba.

37. Gatun uwa noa ba papai, bara ka fElaion ka ba koba bul-
kara koba, yantin konara wirrobullikan pital gaiya kakulla, gatun
pitalmulliela bon Eloinug kauwal lo pu.lli to, yantin tin kauwal
lin uma ba nakulla bara ba ;

38. Wiyelliela, Pitalmabunbilla bon Piriwal ta uwan noa ba
Yeli6a-umba koa yitirroa : pital-kamunbilla moroko ka, gatun kil-
libinbin kamunbilla wokka ka.

39. Gatun winta-ko Paritliaioi kabirug konara birug wiya bon,
Piriwal, koawa bi barun giroumba wirrobullikan.

40. Gatun noa wiyayelleun barun, wiyelliela, Wiyan nurun bag,
wiya, bara ba kaiyelliniin mupai, kaibullinim wal gaiya unni tara
tunug tanoa-kal-bo.

41. Gatun uwa noa ba papai, nakulla noa kokera karig, gatun
noa tugkillimilleun galoa rin,

42. Wiyelliela, Gurrapa bi ba, gintoa ta, unti purreag ka gi-
roug ka ta unni tara pital-kakilliko giroumba ko ! wonto ba yaki-
ta yuropa ta giroug kai nakilli tin gaikug tin.

43. Kulla purreag ta kaniin giroug kin, biikka-kan-to giroug

180 AN ArSTRALIAN" LANGUAGE.

wirriiiun wal bara kinai karai-kai-ai ^aroujj:, gatun karai-karai
wirriiiiiii giroug, gatun mimunauun l)iii willi ka yantin ta kai-
yinkaiyin ta,

44. Gratun pirikibunpiuuu bin puirai ta, gatun giroumba wonnai
tara muiTug kaba giroug kinba ; gatun keawai bara wupinun
tunug tarai ta wokka ka ; kulla keawai bi ba gurra pa yakita
nataki ba giroi'nnlja.

4.5. Gatun noa uwa niurrarig kolag, gatun yipa gaiya noa Ijarun
gukillikan, gatun barun niankillikan unta birug;

46. Wiyelliela barun, Upatoara unni, Emmoumba kokera ta
wiyelligel kokera ; wonto ba nura uma unni wollo kakilliko barun
mankiye-ko.

47. Gatun wiyelliela noa ))urre;'ig ka yantin ta niurrug ka
fhieron ka. Wonto ba piriwui fhiercu, gatun bara garanunateu,
gatun bara piriwal kiiri koba, nunia bara bon bunkilli kolag ;

48. Yakoai bara ba umulliko gatun kt'awai bara, kulla vantin
ta kiiri pital kakilliola gurruUiko bon.

WINTA XX.

Gatun yakita kakulla, wakal la tarai ta purreag ka, wiyelliela
noa ba barun kuri ka, gatun wiyelliela euagelion, uwa gaiya bon
bara piriwal gatun bara tg;»i"aminateu gatun bara fparethbuteroi,

2. Gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Wiyella gearun, minarig tin kaiyu
tin umullia bi unni tara ? ga ganto-ke noa bin unni ta kaiyu gu-
kulla giroug 'i

o. Gatun noa wiyayelleiin, gatun wiyelliela barun, Gatoa wiya-
nun nurun unni ta wakal ; gatun wiyaycllea tia ;

4. Korimullikanne-ta loanne-uniba, wiya, ta moroko kabirug,
ga kiiri koba ?

5. Gatun bara Aviyatan barabo, wiyelliela, Wiyanun geen ba,
Morok(') kalnrug ta ; wiyanun gaiya noa, Kora koa nura gurrapa
bon?

6. Kulla geen wiyaniin ba, Kuri koba ta; yantinto gaiya gearun
kuriko pintinun tunug ko : kulla bara kotan bon loannenug
t})ropet ta kakulla.

7. Gatun bara wiy;i, keawai bara gurra])a wonta birug ta.

S. Gatun noa barun letliuko wiya, Keawai bag wiyanun nuruu
minarig tin kaiyu tin uinan bag unni tara.

9. Gatun potopaivi'i gaiya noa barun kiiri wiyelliko unni-ta
tparabol : Taraito kuriko nieapa fwain-gel la, gatun wunkulla ba-
I'un kin iipullikan ta, gatun uwa gaiya noa kalog kolag, yuraki.

10. Gatun yakita j)oaikulleun ba, yuka noa bon wakal uniul-
likan barun kin u])ullikan ta, gu-uwil koa bara bon yeai fwaingel
labirug ; wonto bara ba ])rmkulla bon, gatun yuka bara bon waita
yeai korleii.

11. Gatun noa toanta yukea-kan tarai umullikan : gatun bara
bon biintea-kaji yantibo, gatun yarakai uma bara bon, gatun bon
b'ara vuka waita voai koricn.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 20. ISl

12. Gatuii uoa toauta yukea-kau goro-ta, gatuu bara boii inu-
la rea-ka:i, gatuix wareka bai'a boa warrai tako.

13. Wiya gaiya noa pil•i^vallo fwain-gel koba, Miunug banuii
kan bag? Yiikaniin -vval bag emmoumba yiual pitalmatoara : niir-
ka bara bou guri\'iiiun, naniin boii bara l)a,

14. Wonto bara ba upulli-kan-to nakulla Ijon ba, barabo gaiya
wiyellan, wiyelliela, Uiini ta wuggnrra piriwal : kaai geen Ijt'nvil
bon, purrai koa ka-uwil gearunba.

15. Yanti bon bara wareka f^vain-gel labirug, gatun buiikiilla
gaiya bon tetti. Minnug bainm noa bariin piriwallo fwain-gel kobo
ko?

16. Uwanun wal noa tauan l>unkilliko barun upillikan-ko, ga-
tiin guniin wal fwain-gel taraikan ko. Gatun gurra bara ba unni,
wiya gaiya bara, Kamunl>i yikora Eloito.

17. Gatun noa barun nakilliela, gatun wivci, Minarig-ke unni
upatoara yanti, Tunug ta wareka wittilli-kan-to, unnoa ta katea-
kanun wokka ka waiyakan ta vrollug ?

18. Gan-ba puntimullinun untoa tunug ka tiiiijuntimiillinun,
wal ; gan kinba puntimullinun, uiinbinun wal bon niuta-mutan.

19. Gatun tanoa-kal-bo kota bara piriwallo fhiereuko gatun fga-
rammateuko mankilliko bon ; gatun bara kinta kakulla kouara
tin ; kulla bara gurra, wiya noa ba unni f parabol barun kin.

20. Gatun bara bon tumimea, gatun yuka barun gakoiyellikan,
gakogkilliko barunbo kuri murrarag-tai, gui-ra-uwil koa bara gi-
koumba v.iyellikanne, yaki tin niai-a-uwil koa bara bon kaiyu
kabo f kobana kinko.

21. Gatun wiya bon bara, wiyelliela, Piriwal, gurran geen wi-
yan bi ba tuloa, kinta koi'a l)i kauwa tai'aikan tin kuri kurrig tin,
wonto bi ba wiyan tuloa wiyellikanne Eloi koba :

22. Wiya tuloa ta gukilliko gearun tullokan gikoug kin f Kai-
thari kin, ga keawai 1

23. Wonto noa ba gurra gakoiya 1)ari'iuba, gatun v.iya barun,
Yakoai nura tia numan ]

2-1. Tvigunbilla tia wakal f denari. Gan kiloa unnoa goara ga-
tun u]jatoara unni ta? Wiyayelleim lion bara gatun wiyelliela,
f Kaithaiinnba ta.

25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Koito f Kaithari kinko guwa f Kai-
thariimba ta, gatun Eloi kinko uinioa tara Eloi-iimba ta.

26. Gatun keawai bara man pa gikoumba Aviyelli-ta niikan ta
barun kin kuri ka : gatun mupai kakulla bara.

27. Uwa gaiya tai'aikan barun kinbirug Tliadukaioi kabirug,
bara gurramaigaye moron ta katea-kanim tetti kabirug; gatun ba-
I'a bon wiya,

28. Wiyelliela, Ela Piriwal! Motheto noa upa gearun, Tarai-
kan koba ba koti tetti kanun ba porikunbai gikoumba ta, gatun
tetti noa ba kanun, wonnai korien, mara-uwil koa gikfluniba ktiti

182 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

l)Ounnouu gikoumba pon"kuiil»;ti ka-uwil koa wounai gikoumba
kuti koba.

29. Yakita gaiya wart'in kakulla kotita ftlieben ta: gatun kurri
birug ko bumbea porikuiil)ai kakilliko, gatnii tetti kakulla, wou-
nai koi'ien.

30. Gatun willi-kaba-ko fdeutero-to biuubea bounnoun porikun-
bai kakilliko, gatun tetti noa kakulla, wonnai korien.

31. Gatun willi-kaba-ko ftrito-to bumbea bounnoun porikunbai
kakilliko; gatun yaki-bo ftliebento; gatun bara keawai wimba won-
nai, gatun tetti bara kakulla.

32. Willug ta tetti ba bountoa nukug.

33. Ganiimba baiun kinba unnoa porikunbai kunun kakilliko
moron ba katea-kanun tetti kabirug '? kulla liai'a ftliebento boun-
noun bumbea porikunbai kakilliko.

34. Gatun noa lethuko wiyayelleim, wiyelliela barun, Wonnai
ta untikal bumbillan })orikunbai gatun gukillaiko bumbilliko :

35. Wonto ba bara miirrarag-tai kanun uwolliko unta kolag
tanai tako i)urrai tako, gatun moron kakilliko tetti kabirug, kea-
wai bara bumbumbillan, keawai gukitan bumbilliko :

36. Keawai wal bara tetti banun yukita ; kulla bara yanti ka-
tan fagelo kiloa ; gatun wonnai tara katan Eloi-umba, katan bara
wonnai tara gali koba moi'on kanini tetti kabirug.

37. Gatun Motheko noa ba tugaiya wakal la kulai ta, boug-
bugga barun tetti-tetti kabirug, wiya noa ba bon Yelioanug, Eloi
ta Abaramumba, gatun Eloi ta Itlu'ikumba, gatun Eloi ta Yacol)-
umba.

38. Keawai noa Eloi ta barunba tetti-tetti koba, wonto ba ba-
ri'niba moron koba ; kulla yantin moron katan gikoug kin.

39. Taraito bara fgarammateukallo wiya gaiya, Piriwal, murra
rag bi wiyan.

40. Gatun yukita keawai bara bon wiya pa kinta-kan-to.

41. Gatun noa barun wiya, Yakoai bara wiya Kritht ta yinal ta
Dabiclumba 1

42. Gatun Dabidto noa niuwoabo wiya, fbiblion kaba ftehillim
koba, Yehoako noa wiya bon Piriwal emmoumba, Yellawolla bi
tugkagkei'i ka emmoug kin,

43. Uma-uwil koa bag barun bukkakan gikoi'imba yulogel ko
kakilliko gikoug.

44. Dabidto noa ba wiya bon Piriwal yitirra, yakoai gaiya noa
yinal ta gikoumba 1

45. Wiya gaiya noa barun gikoumba wirrobullikan mikan ta
yantin ta kiiri ka,

46. Yakoai nura barun kai fgarammateu tin, pital koa bara
uwa-uwil kurrawitaikan, gatun umulliko gukilligel laba ko, gatun
yellawolligel la wokka ka fthunagog ka, gatun piriwal-g^l takil-
lig61 laba ;

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 20. 183

47. Mantan bara kokera ba mabogun koba, gatuu umanun
wiyellikanne-ta kurra-uwai tugunbilliko : yaki tin bara kauuu kau-
wal tetti kakilliko.

WINTA XXI.
Gatux noa nakulla wokka-lag, gatun nakulla barun poirolkan
wiinkilliela gutoara bariinba wiinkilligel la.

2. Gatun noa nakulla tarai mabogun mirralkan wiinkilliela
bountoa flepto buloara unta ko tarog kako.

3. Gatun noa wiya barun, Wiyan bag nurun tuloa, gali mabo-
gunto mirrallo wiinkulla kauwal ta bara yantin kearan.

4. Kulla yantin gali vvimkulla bara tullokan barunba kauwal
labirug gutoara Eloi koba ko : wonto bountoa ba bounnoun kin-
birug mirral koba wiinkulla yantin tullokan bounnoiinba.

5. Gatun winta koba wiyelliela fhieron tin, umatoara unni ko-
rien tunug ko murrarag ko gatun gutoara, wdya noa,

6. Unni tara natan nura ba, uwanun ta purreag karig ka,
korien gaiya ba wakal tunug wokka-ka-wokka-ka, yantin wal ware-
kullinun bardn.

7. Gatun bara bon wiya, wiyelliela, Piriwal, yakounta-ke unni
tara kanim? gatun minarig tiiga kanun unni taraba gaiya kanun?

8. Gatun noa wiya, Yakoai nura, gakoiya kora koa nura ka-uwil;
kulla kauwal-kaiuvallo tanan uwanun emmoug kin yitirra, wiyel-
linun, Gatoa ta (Kritlit ta) ; gatun papai ta kakillin ; yanoa uwa
yikora nura barun.

9. Gurranun gaiya nura ba wuruwai kauwal gatun koakillai
ta ba, kinta kora nura : kulla unni tax"a kanim wal kurri-kurri ,
kulla wiran keawai kanun kabo.

10. Wiya gaiya noa barun, Bara kui'iko wuruwai wal kanun
barun kuriko, gatun bara piriwal koba barun piriw^al koba ko :

11. Gatun purrai tako pulululu kakilliko Avinta kabo, gatun
kunto korien ta ko, gatun munni kauwalkan ; gatun kinta nakilli
tara gatun kauwal kanun tiiga moroko kabirug.

12. Wonto ba kurri-kurri ka unni tara ba kaniin, mauun wal
bara mattarro nurun, gatun yarakai nurun umanun, gumuliinun
nurun ftliunagog kako, gatun tjail ko, mantoai'o nurun mikan ta
ko piriwal lako, gatun wiyellikan tako emmoug kinko yitirra ko.

13. Gatun unni ta kanun nurun tiiga kakilliko.

14. Yanoa nura kota yikora minki ko, minai'ig nura wiyayel-
linun.

15. Kulla bag gunun nurun kurraka gatun guraki kakilliko,
keawai wal yantin bara nuriinba bukka-kan-to kaiyu kanim wiya-
yelliko ga pirriral umuUiko.

16. Gatun nura gakoiyellinun w-al nurun biyugbaito gatun koti
tako karig ko, gatun winta nurun kinbirug bunnun wal tetti
barun kai.

17. Gatun nurun yarakai umanun yantinto, emmoiimba tin
yitirra tin.

'184 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

18. Wonto Ija koawai wal wakal kittug gikoug kinbirug wollug
kabirug tetti kuiu'in.

19. Murrai kakillikaiiiu' nun'uilia ka, iniromuUa nuramai-ai uu-
riinba ?

20. Gatun iianiin uura ba fHicrothaleni kirrai-kiiTai ta ha ko-
nai'a ba, gurniHa papai ta ba gaiya wari-warekulli ta ba unuug.

21. IMurrabunbilla gaiya l)arun ludaia kaba waita bulkara ko-
lag; gatun iiwabunbilla baruu willi kaba waita warai tako : gatun
uwabuubi yikora barun tanau korug kaba untako.

22. Kulla yakita unti tara purreag ka bukka kakillikanuc, ka-
wwil koa yantin upatoaia kanun "vval kakilliko.

23. Yapallun l)ara wonnaikun gatuu bara pittallikun, yakita gai-
ya purreag ka ! kulla wal kaniin kauwal yarakai purrai ta, gatun
bukka unti yantin ta kiiri ka.

24. Gatun bara tetti kapaiyinuu yirra birug, gatun liarun yuti-
nun wal mantoara kakilliko yantin tako purrai karig kako : gatun
fHierotluileni wattawanun bai'an bara fethimekal-lo, yakita kalai
tako barunba koba goloin kunun tetlianekal.

2-5. Gatun gaiya kanun wal tuga punnal la, gatun yellana ka,
gatun mirri ka ; gatun purrai tal)a yarakai ta barun kin kiiri
ka, gatun kinta kauwal ; korowa ta gatun bokkalog k(ilbilag-
bullin ;

26. Kuri koba bulbullo kotan kinta-kan-to, gatun nakilli ta-
birug galoa tai'a kotanan l^a uwani.in purrai kolag ; kulla wal
barun tolomaniin wal kaiyukan ta moroko koba.

27. G;itun yakita gaiya wal nanun Yinal ta kuri koba tanan
nwollinim yareil loa kaiyu koa, gatun killibinbin koa kauwal loa.

28. Gatun kaniin ba unni tara paipinim, na-uwa Avokka-lag,
gatun wokka-lag kauwa kia-kia nuriinba woUug ; kulla tanan
uwanim paipai nuriniba womniunbillikaune-ta.

29. Gatun noa wiya ))arun wakal fparabol ; Na-u\Ya kokug ta,
gatun yantin kiilai ta ;

30. Paikullinun bara ba, naniui nura gatun gurraniiu nura nu-
run kinbirug wunal katan paipai taba.

31. Yaki kiloa nura, nanim nura ba unni tara paikulliko, gur-
rulla gaiya nura piriwal koba Eloi koba katan papai taba.

32. Wiyan tuloa nurun bag, Keawai unni willuggel tetti-tetti
kaniin, yakita-ko goloin ba kaniin.

33. Moroko ta gatun purrai ta kanim wal waita uwanim, won-
to ba keavrai wal eniniouuiba ^\•iy('llikanne unui tara keawai wal
waita uwanim.

31. Gatun yakoai nura nurabo, kauwa ba yantin ta uurimba
l)ulbul matayei koa katoa-kim gatun kuttawaiban koa katea-kim,
gatun uniillikeim koa katea-kim gali koba moi'on koba, gatun
yantita purreag ka imipinim gati nurun kin.

35. Kulla pika kiloa yanti uwimun iintoa puri-eag ka barun
kin yellawan yiuitin ta yaki tin purrai ta,

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 21. 185

36. Tuminiilla nura, gatuii wiyellia yaiiti-katui to, k;i-uwil koa
iiura murrarag kakilliko moron ko unti tara birug paikullinun
wal, gatiin garokilliko mikan tako yinal lako kuri koba ko.

37. Gatun purreag ka wiyelliela noa miuTug ka f hieron la ;
gatun noa uwa waita tokoi ta, gatun yellawa noa bulkara giakai
yitirra fElaion ka la.

38. Gatun yantin bara kiiri uwa gorokan ta gikoug kinko fliie-
ron lako, gurrulliko bon.

WINTA XXII.

Vakita kakuUa pa,pai takillikanne nulai tlt'b1.)en korien koba,
giakai yittira f Patbak.

2. Gatun bara piriwiil fhiereuko gatun garammateuko nukilliela
bunkilli kolag bon tetti wirrilliko ; kulla bara kinta kakulla kiiri
tin.

3. PulogkuHeim noa Thatanto murrug ka bon ludatlikin, tarai
yitirra giakai Itliakariot, wakal noa fdodeka kabirug.

4. Gatun noa vraita uwa, gatun Avi3"elliela l)arun piriwal fhiereu-
nug gatun barun fkapatin, yakoai noa ba gakoyanun bon barun
kin.

5. Gatun }iital kakulla, gatun bara wi^-a gukilliko bon farguro.

6. Gatun noa AV'iyai, gatun mittilliela noa gakouiulliko bon
barun kin, yakita bara ba konara waita gaiya UAva.

7. Kakulla gaiya purreag nulai flebben koi-icn ta, yakita fPa-
thak bunniui wal ba tetti.

8. Gatun noa yuka Peternug gatun loanncnug, wiyelliela, Yurig
uwolla umulliko fPatliak ta, ta-uwil koa geen.

9. Gatun bara bon wiya, Wonta-ke geen umaniin i

10. Gatun noa baiim wiyti, A! nauwa nura, yakita uwanun
nura ba kokera karig ka, unta gaiya nurun wakallo kiiriko wim-
bi-kaba-kan-to kokoin-kan-to nuggurra uvanim nurun ; Avirrobulla
bula bon murrug kolas; kokera kolas unta-ko pul()!i.kullinun noa
ba.

il. Gatun wiyaniin nura bon kokeratin, Piriwallo wiyan bin,
Wonnug waiyakan takilligel, untoa bag ba taniin fPatbak ta em-
moumba katoa wirrobullikan toa 1

12. Gatun nurun tugkaiyaniin wal noa kauwal ta waiyakan
wpkka kaba "wupitoara : unnug umulla.

13. Gatan bara waita uwa, gatixn nakullabara unni tara yantin
ba wiya barun : gatun bara upea fPatliak ta.

14. Gatun yakita kakulla fliora ba, yellawa noa baran, gatun
fdodeka ta fapotliol ta gikoug katoa.

15. Gatun noa barun wiya, Kauwal ta cmmounilja kotatoara
takilliko unni fPatliak ta nurun katoa, ta-uwil koa kurri-kurri
tetti kolag ke bag :

16. Kulla bag wiyan nurun, Keawai wal bag tanun unta-kal
kabo ba kiinun piriwal koba ka Eloi koba.

186 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

17. Gatun iioa maiikulla wimbi, gatun pitalma gaiyanoa, wiyel-
liela, Mara unni gukillai koa nurabo :

18. Kulla bag wiyaii iiurun, Keawai wal bag pittuiiuu yeai
tabinig tain})elo tabiiug, kabo koa uwa-uwil piriwal koba Eloi
koba tanan.

19. Gatuii noa luaukulla farto ta, gatun pitalma gaiya noa, ga-
tun yiirbugga, gatun gukulla barun, wiyelliela, Unni ta emmo-
liniba inurrin gutoara nurun kin : uniulla unni yanti gurrulliko tia.

20. Yantibo wimbi takilli birug yarea ka, wiyelliela, Unni wim-
bi ta wiyatoara ta Iniggaikal emmoug kinbirug gorog kiroapa nu-
run kai.

21. A! na-uwa, unni ta raattara gikoumba gakoyclli-kan-to tia,
emmoiig katoa ba takilligel laba.

22. Yuna bo ta wal noa uwaniui Yinal kiiri koba, yanti wiya-
toara ; yapallun unnoa kuri gakoyelli-kan-to bon ba !

23. Gatun bava wiyellan barabo, gan-to barun kinbirug-ko uma-
nun ta unni.

'2i. Gatun koakillau Ijara barabo, gan-ke kanun piriwal barun
kinbirug.

25. Gatun noa wiya barun, Bara ta piriwal ethanekal koba ka-
tilleun bara ; gatun bara ta katillikan giakai yitirra nmrrog-tai.

26. Wonto nura ba keawai yanti kanun ; wonto noa kurrikog
nurun kinba, kamunbilla bon yanti mitti ; gatun noa piriwal ka-
tan, yanti umullikan ta.

27. Wonnug-ke kauwal unnug, niuwoa yellawan noa ba takilli
ta, niuwoa umanun noa ba ? wiya, unni ta noa yellawollin ba ta-
killi taba 1 wonto bag ba katan nurun kinba yanti niuwoa ba
umullikan ta.

28. Nura ta emmoug kin minkea emmoug ka ta numatoara :

29. Gatun gutan nurun bag kakilliko i)iriw;ilgel lako, yanti tia
emmoumba Biyugbaito gukulla tia ;

30. Ta-uwil koa nura gatun pitta-uwil ennnoug ka ta takilligel la
emmoug ka ta j^iriwalgel la, gatun yellawa-uwil yellawolligel la
piriwal koba ka, wiyellin barun konai'a fdodeka ta Itliarael koba.

31. Gatun noa piriwallo wiya, Ela Thimon, Thimon! gurrulla,
Thantanto noa wiyan bin mankilliko kirrai-kirrai koa biloa uma-
uwil yanti fwiet kiloa :

32. Wonto bag ])ix wiyelleun giroug kai gurra-uwil koa br;
gatun minki bi ba kanim, pirralmulla gaiya barun bi koti ta giro-
umba.

33. Gatun noa wiya bon, Piriwal, kiitan bag unni mirigil uwol-
li kolag gikoug katoa ko tjail kolag gatun tetti kakilli kolag.

34. Gatun noa wiya, Wiyan banug, Peter, keawai wal mukkaka
ko tibbinto wiyanun unti purreag ka, kurri-kurri ka bi ba gako-
yanun tia goro-ka gimillin bi tia ba.

35. Gatun noa wiya l)arun, Yuka nurun bag ba yinug korien,

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 22. 187

gatun pika korien, gatun tuggaiiog kovien, "wiya, uura miiiavig lo?
gatun bara wiya, Keawai.

36. Wiya gaiya iioa bariin, Woiito ba yakita uuti, niiiwoa ba
yhuigkau, niamuiibilla bon unnoa, gatun yanti pika; gatun niu-
woa yirra korien, guniunbilla kirrikin gikoumba, wakal koa noa
gukilli ko.

37. Wonto bag ba wiyan nurun, unni ta upatoara ka-u\vil koa
ennnoug kin kakilliko giakai, Tumbitoara noa barun kin yarakai
willug ka : kulla unni tara emmoug kin ba kakillinim goloin ko.

38. Gratun bara wiya, Piriwal, na-u\va unni tuloa buloara yirra.
Gratun noa wiya barun, Tantoa-bo-ta.

39. Gatun noa uwa warrai koba, gatun waita uwa uwolli kolag
Ijulkara kolag fElaiou ko la kako ; gatun gikoumba wirrobulli-
kan wirroba bon.

4'). Gatun uwa noa ba unta, wiya gaiya noa barun, Wiyella,
keawai koa nura pulogkulli korien yarakai kolag.

41. Gatun noa waita uwa barun kinbirug yanti kiloa tunug
koba pintia, gatun wai'ogbugko upullin Ijaran, gatun wiya,

42. Wiyelliela, Biyug, wiya bi unni wimbi manun emmoug kin-
birug : yanoa eramoiimba kotellikanne giroumba ta kamnnbilla
kakilliko.

43. Gatun paipea wakal agclo moroko kabirug pirriralurallin
1 )on.

44. Gatun kirrinkan noa kauwalkan, wiyelliela noa pirriral
butti ; gatun gikovunba kurrol upulleun baran purrai kolag yanti
kiloa komonba kauwal gorog koba.

4.5. Gatun bougkulleun noa ba wiyelli tabirug, gatun uwa gi-
koumba tako wirrobullikan tako, nakulla gaiya noa barun birriki
birriki minkikan,

46. Gatun noa wiya barun, Minaiig tin nura birrikin I Boug-
kullia gatun wiyella, uwea-kiin koa nura yarakai kolag.

47. Gatun yakita wiyelliela noa ba, a! konara, gatun noa yi-
tirra giakai ludatb, wakal ta fdodeka kabirug, uwa ganka barun
kin, gatun uwa gaiya noa papai lethu kin, bumbumkakilliko.

48. Wonto noa ba lethuko bon wiyii, Ela ludath! gakoman bi-
nug Yinal kuri koba liumbuggullito 1

49. Nakulla bara ba gikoug kinba minnug-bulli kolag, wiya-
1)011 bara, Ela piriwal! wiya, geen buntan yirra ko ?

50. Gatun wakal barun kinbii'ug kunbuntea wakal umullikan
fhiereu koba piriwal koba, gatun kunl)untea bon tugkag-keri
gurreug.

51. Gatun lethuko noa wiyayelleun, gatun wiyelliela, Kamun-
billa nura unni. Gatun bon noa iiuma gurreug gatun turon bon
umea-kan.

52. Wiya gaiya lethuko barun piriwal fhiereu koba, gatun ba-
rvni fkapatin fhieT'on koba, gatun barun garrokal, uwa bara gi-

liS5 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

koujl' l.iii, ^Viya, nura tia uwau yauti mankiye ko yavakaikau ta,
yirrakan gatuii kotarakan ?

53. Kakulla Lag ba nurun ki)i yauti-katai purreag ka fliierou
ka, keawai nuva tia iiiaupa mattarro: wonto ba \umiyakita ta ka-
tan nurunba gatun kaiyukau tokoi tako.

54. j\Jaukuna gaiya bava l)Oii, gatun yutea bon, niaiikuUa gaiya
bon kokera ko piriwal koba kako tbiercu koba kako. Gatuu Pe-
tcrko noa wirroba kalog kokig.

55. Gatun npilleun bara ba koiyug ko willi ka kokera, gatun
yellawa yantin, Peter gaiya noa yeHawa barun kin.

56. Gatun taraito niurrakinto nakulla bon, yellawa noa ba koi-
yug ka, gatun pimrailliela bon pirrallo, gatun wiya, Unni noa kiiri
kakulla gikoug katoa.

57. Gatun noa gakoiya bon, wiyelliela, Ela murrakin! keawai
bon bag gimilli korien.

58. Gatun toanta taraito bon nakulla, gatun wiyelliela, Gintoa
ta yanti bo baninba. Gatun noa Pcterko wiya, Kuri, kcawaran
bag.

59. Gatun, yakita toanta, wakal fliora ta yukita, taraito wiya
pirralma wiyelliela, Yuna bo ta unni kuri kakulla gikoug katoa ;
kulla noa Galilaiakal.

60. Gatun noa Peterko wiya, Ela kiiril keawai l>ag gurran
)-akoai bi ba wiyan. Gatun wiyelliela noa ba, tanoa-kal-bo niuk-
kaka-ko gaiya wiya tibbinto.

61. Gatun noa Piriwal warkulleun, gatun ntikilleun bou Peter-
nug. Gatun Peterko noa gurra wiyellita Piriwiil koba, wiya bon
noa ba giakai, Gikoyanim wal l)i tia kurri-kurri tibbinto mukkaka
ko wiyanun goro-ka.

62. Gatun Peter noa uwa \\arrai koba, gatiui tugkilleiin gaiya
noa kauwal.

63. Gatun bara kuriko mankuUa bon letliunug beelma bon,
gatun bunkulla bon.

64. Gatun munniin 1iai"a ba upea bon, bunkulla gaiya bon bara
u'oara, gatun wiya bon, wiyelliela, Wiyella bi, ianto-ke bin bun-
kulla]

G-}. Gatun kauwal-kauwal taraikau yai-akai wiya bara ijikoui
kin.

60. Gatun purreag ba kakulla, kau-umullan gaiya bara garrotai
kuri koba, gatun bara piriwal fliiereu koba, gatun bara garani-
inateu, gatun yutea gaiya bon kau-uniulligel lako barunba tako,

67. Wiyelliela, Kritht ta bi unni ? wiyella gearun. Gatun noa
wiya l>arun, "NViyani'in niu'un bag l.ia, keawai gaiya wal nura gui"-
rauuu:

68. Gatun wiyanun nurun l)ag ba, keawai wal nura wiyaiyelli-
nim tia, keawai wal nura tia waniunbinun.

09. Kabo noa Yiual kuri koba yellawanuu tugkag ka kaiyukan
ta Eloi koba ka.

THE GOSPEL liV LLKE, C. 22. 189

70. AViya ^aiya bai'a yantinto, Yinal ta bi unni Eloi koba ? Ga-
tun uoa wiya baruii, Wiyaii iiiiva gatoa ta uiini.

71. Gatun bai"a wiya tantoa ta, Y^anoa gearun kin gurrullikanto
taraito ? kulla geeu giivra geenbo kurraka kabirug gikoug kin-
birug koti kabirug.

WIXTA XXIII.

Gatux bara yautin konai'a bougkuUeun, gatun yutea bou Pilato kin.

2. Gatun bou bara pirrahiia, wiyelliela, Gurra geen bou unni ga-
koyelliekx noa l)a barun kuri "willuggel, gatun wiyelliela, yanoa
guki yikora tullokan Kaitliarinug, Aviyelliela, niu^voa-bo-ta Kritht
ta wakal ta Piriwak

3. Gatun Pik\to-to wiya bon, wiyelliola, Ga gintoa ta Piriwal ka-
tan barunba ludaioi koba ? Gatun uoa wiyayelleun bon, gatun
wiya, Gintoa ta wiyan.

4. "NViya gaiya noa Pilatoto barun piriwal fhiereu gatun banui
kiiri, Keawai bag gurra pa yarakai unti kiiri ka.

5. Gatun bara bukka-buttibugkea, vriyelliela, Pirralinan noa ba-
run kuri, wiyellin, yantin ta ludaia ka, Galilaia tinto unti kolag.

6. Gurra noa ba Pilato-to Galilaia ka, wiya noa, Unni kiiri Gali-
laiakal ?

7. Gatun gurra noa ba Herodumba-kan noa wottaikan, yuka bon
noa Herod kinko, yakita gaiya niuwoabo kakulla fHii rothalem ka.

8. Gatun nakulla bon noa ba Herodto lethunug, pital gaiya
noa katan kauwal, kulla noa natelli ba bon yuraki tabirug, kulla
noa gurra kauwallan gikoug kinba ; gatun nakilliko tarai uma-
toara gikoug kai.

9. Wiya gaiya bon noa \^ iyellikanne kauwal-kauwal ; wonto
noa ba keawai wiyelli pa bon.

10. Gatun bara piriwal fliiereu gatun bara garannnateu garo-
killiela, gatun pirrahnulliela bon kauv>-al.

11. Gatun Herod katoa ba bara wuruwai koba gurraniaiga bon
bara, gatun beeliaa bon, gatun ■\\-uda bou kouein to kirrikin to,
gatun yukea-kan bon Pilato kinko.

12. Gatun unta purreag ka wakal la, Pilato gatun Herod koti
bula umuUan : yakita unta kakillan bula l>ukkakan bula-bo.

1-3. Gatun Pilato-to noa kau-wiya noa ba barun piriwal fliiereu,
gatun barun piriwal, gatun barun kuri,

14. Wiya gaiya barun, Mankulla nura bon unni kuri emmoug
kinko. yanti wakal noa gakoya-uwil l)a kuri ; gatun, a I gurulla,
nuiya ta bon bag unni niikan ta nurun kin keawai bag gurrapa
yarakai gikoug kin, ginoa-tara tin pirralma l.ion nura :

1-5, Iveawaran, keawai Herodto : kulla bag yuka nurun gikoug
kin; gatun, nauwa, keawai gali tin tetti korien noa kanun.

16. Welkorinun wal bon bag, gatun wamunbinun gaiya bou.

17. (Kulla noa lairugbugganun wal wukal yakita ta takillikaii-
ne ta.)

190 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE,

18. Gatun bara kaaibulleun wakalla purawai, wiyelliela, Yurig
uiini kuri; gatun burugbuggulla bon Barabbanug gcai'im kinko:

19. (Gali noa wakal wuruwai tin kokera gatun Ijunkilli tin tet-
ti tin, Avunkulla bon tjail ka.)

20. Koito noa ba Pilato-to kotelliela burugbuggulliko bon lethu-
nug, wiyea ka barun.

21. AVonto bara ha wiya, wiyelliela, Buwa bon tetti, buwa bon
t(^,tti.

22. Gatun noa barun wiya yukita goro-ka, Miuarig tin? mina-
rig noa yarakai uma ? keawai bag gurrapa taraikan gikoug kin
galoa kolag bunkilli kolag tetti wirrilliko ; welkorinini wal bon
bag, gatun wamunbinim bon.

23. Gatun bara tanoa-kal-bo pulli kakuUa kauwal, wiyelliela,
biiwil koa bon tetti. Gatun pulli bariinba gatun bariinba piriwal
fhiereu pirral kakulla.

24. Gatun Pilato-to noa wiya, ka-uwil koa yanti wiya bara ba.

25. Gatun noa bon burugbugga barun kin unni bon wuruwai
tin gatun Ininkilli tin tetti tin wunkulla bon fjail ka wiyatoara
barunba ; gatun noa bon letliunug wamunbea barun kin.

26. Gatun yutea bon bara ba yurig, mankulla gaiya bara wakal
Thimunnug Kureniakal ta, tanan uwolliela korug tin, gatun wu-
p6a bara gikoug kin taligkabillikanne, knrri-uwil koa noa willug
tin lethu katoa.

27. Gatun wirroba bon bara kauwallo konaro, gatun bara nu-
kug-ko, tdgkilliela gatun minki kakilliela gikoug kai.

28. Wonto noa ba lethu warkulleun barun kai koba, wiya, Yi-
nalkun fHierothalemkalin, tiigki yikora cnnnoug kai, wonto ba
tiigkillia nura nurunbo, gatun nurun kaiko wonnai tara ko.

29. A! na-uwa, purreag karig tanan uwollinini, yakita unta wi-
yanun bara ba, Murrarag bara wonnai korien, gatun unnug tara
pika keawai porkulli korien, gatun paiyil keawai pittelliko.

30. Yakita gaiya l)ara wiyellan bulkara karig, Puntimullia
gearun kin, gatun yilnko ko, Wutilla gearun.

31. Gatun uwullinuu bara ba unni tara kulai ta kirug ka, min-
nug banim wal kulai ta turral la ?

32. Gatun unnug bula taraikan yarakai wilhig, yutea gikoug
katoa wunkilliko tetti wirrilliko.

33. Gatun uwa bara ba unta ko, giakai yitirra Kalabary, unta
gaiya bara biinkulla bon gatun bulun yarakai bula, wakal ta tiig-
kag-keri ka gatun tarai ta wunto-keri ka.

34. Wiya gaiya noa lethuko, Biyug, kamunbilkx barun, kuUa
bara keawai gurra korien uniuUi ta. Gatun toinbillan bara kirri-
kin gikoiimba, gatun wupillan woiyo.

'.ib. Gatun bara nakilliela garokito. Gatun l)ara piriwal yantibo
barun katoa b6elmulliela, wiyelliela, Mironi;i noa taraikan; miro-
mabunbillia bon gikoug koti, wiya ]ioa ba Kritht ta, girimatoara
Eloi-uinba.

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 23. 191

30. Gatun bara fmilitiko beelma bon, uwolliela gikoug kin, ga-
tun nupilliela bon faket,

37. Gatun wiyelliela, Wiya bi ba piriwal ludaioi koba, mii'o-
inullia bi gintoabo koti.

38. Gatun upulleun wakal upatoara wokka ka gikoug kin pul-
li fHellenik koba, gatun Latin koba, gatun Hebaraio koba, gia-
kai, Unni ta Piriwal ludaioi koba.

39. Gatun wakallo yarakai bulun kinbirug-ko, kakilliela ba ku-
lai ta, beelmulliela bon, wiyelliela, Wiya bi ba Kritht ta, mivo-
mullia bi gintoabo gatun geavun.

iO. Wonto ba taraito wiyayelleun, koakilliela bon, wiyelliela,
Keawai bi kinta korien Eloi kai, gatun gintoa ta katan wakal la
umatoara 1

41. Gatun galin yakita niurrarjig uma ; yaki tin galin kai uma-
toara tin : wonto noa ba gali kuriko, keawai noa yarakai uma pa.

42. Gatun noa wiya letliunug, Piriwal, gurrulla bi tia, uwanun
gaiya bi ba piriwalgel lako giroug ka tako.

43. Gatun noa letliuko wiya bon, Yuna bo ta wal bag wiyan
giroug, XJnti buggai purroag ka kaniui bi tia emmoug katoa Pa-
radeith ka tako.

44. Gatun yakita kakulla fhora ka fbekto ta, tokoi ta kakuila
yautin ta purrai ta katea ka fliora kako fnain tako.

4-5. Gatun punnal ta tokoi kakulla, gatun kirrikin ta fliieron
kako yiirkulleim bulwa koa.

46. Gatun noa ba Tethuko kaaibulleun wokka wiya noa, Biyug,
wunun bag emmoiimba marai giroug kin miittara ; gatun wiyel-
leun noa ba unni, wunkulla gaiya noa marai.

47. Yakita gaiya noa ba kenturionko nakulla unni umatoara,
pitalma noa Eloinug, wiyelliela, Yuna bo ta wal murrarag unni
kuri.

48. Gatun bara yantin kiiri uwa nakilliko gala ko umatoara ko,
wirrilleun bara wapara, gatun willugbo bara uwa.

49. Gatun yantin gikoiimba k6ti ta, gatun bai'a nukug wirroba
bon Galilaia kabirug, garokea kalog ka, nakilliela unni tara.

.50. Gatun kakulla wakal kuri, giakai yitirra Yotlieji, wiyellikan
katan; murriirag kakillikan, gatun tuloa kakillikan :

ol. Gali keawai noa pital korien barunba ko wiyellikanne ko
gatun bariinba umatoara ko ; Arimatheakal noa, wakal ta kokera
ludaioi koba ; niuwoa ba mittilliela piriwal lako Eloi koba kako.

.52. Unni noa uwa Pilato kin, bon wiyelliko murrin ko letliu
koba ko.

53. Gatun noa mankulla baran, gatun muggama kirrikin ta, ga-
tun wunkulla tulmun ta umatoara tunug ta; keawai ba unta kiiri
wuntelli ta.

54. Gatun unta purreag ka tupoi-tupoi-kanne-ta, gatun ]iapai
kakulla thabbat ta.

19'2 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

55. Gatun bara nukug- uwa gikoug katoa Galilaia kabirug wir-
roba yukita, gatun nakuUa tulinun, yakoai ba v.-iiukulla murrin.

56. Gatun bara willugbo, gatun mankulla faromata gatun fmu-
ra; gatun korea purreag ka thabbat ta, yaki tin Aviyatoara tin.

WINTA XXIY.

YAKUfA kakulJa purreag ka yukita tliabbat birug ka, goiokan ta,
uwa bai'a unti ko tulmun tako, niankillin faromata uma bara ba,
gatun taraikan uwa barun katoa.

2. Gatun bara nakulla tunug umatoara kurrai-kuri'ai birug kur-
laka ko tulmun tabirug.

3. Gatun bara uwa murrarig, gatun kcawai bara na korien
murrin ta Piriwal koba letliu koba.

4. Gatun yakita kakuUa, kotelliela Ijara ba ge tin, a ! buloai'a
kiiri bula garokea barun kin killibinbin kaba kirrikin taba ,

5. Gatun bara ba kinta kakilliela, gatun wunkulliela bariinba
goara baran purrai tako, wiya bula barun, INIinarig tin nura nakil-
lin moron-kan ta unti tetti-tetti ka ?

G. Keawai noa unti, kulla noa waita ka ba bougkulleun: gur-
rulla nura yauti wiya nurun noa l)a, yakita noa ba kakulla Gali-
laia ka,

7. Wiyelliela, Yinal ta kiiri koba wunun wal bon mattara yara-
kai-willug koba ka, gatun biinnun wal tetti, gatun purreag ka
tarai ka kumba-ken bougkullia kanun noa.

8. Gatun gaiya bara kotelliela gikoumba wiyelli tara,

9. Gatun willugl)o bara uwa tulmun tabirug, gatun wiya unni
tara l^arun kin fdodeka ta, gatun barun yantin ta.

10. Galabountoa Mari-ko Magdalakalm-to, gatun bountoa loan-
ua-ko, gatun bountoa Mari-ko tunkan-to Yacobo-umba-ko, gatun
taraikan-to bara nukug-ko barun katoa, wiya unni tara barun fap-
otliolnug.

11. Gatun bara ba wiyelli tara kakulla barun kin yanti kiloa
gakoyelli tara, gatun bara keawai gurraiyelli pa barun.

1 2. Peter gaiya noa garokea, gatun murra tulmun tako ; gatun
woinkulliela baran, nakulla noa kirrikin wuntoara pitaka, gatun
waita noa uwa, kotelliela unni tara katan ba.

13. Gatun yakita purreag ka yantibo, buloara-bula barun kin-
birug iiwa kokera kolag, giakai yitirra Emmaou, yakita kalog
fHierotlialem kabirug purlog fhekekonta ta.

14. Gatun bara wiyellan unni tara kakulla ba.

15. Gatun yakita kakulla, wiyelliela ba, gatun kotelliela bara
lia, letlni noa niuwoabo uwa papai barun kin, gatun uwa barun
katoa.

IG. Wonto ba gaikug bariinba tullama, girailli korien koa bara
))on.

17. Gatun noa wiya barun, Minarig nura unni tara wiyellan,
uwollin nura ba, gatun minki katan ?

THE GOSPEL BY LUKE, C. 24. 193

18. Gatuu Wiikal bulun kinbirug, giakai noa yitirra Kleopa,
wiyayelleiui, ■wiyelliela boii, Griutoa bo ta wakal gowikaii fHiero-
thalemkal, gatuu keawai unni tara gurrapa kakulla ba uuti tara
purreag ka 1

19. Gratun noa wiya barun, Miiiarig-ke unni wonnug ? Gatuu
bou bara wiya, Gikoug kin letliu kin Nadliaretkal unni kakuHa
tpropet ta kaiyukan uuiulliko gatun wiyelliko niikan ta Eloi koba
Icin, gatun yantin ta barun kin kiiri ka :

20. Gatun yakoai bai'a ba piriwal fhiereu, gatun geavunba piri-
wal karig wiinkulla bon wiyayelliko tetti kolag, gatun bava bon
Ijunkulla tetti.

21. Wonto geen ba kota niuwoa niivomulliko Itharaelnug ; ga-
tun yantin unni tara ba, unni buggai kiimba-ken-ta katan unnoa
tara umatoara birug.

22. Kauwa, tarai bara nukug geavunba konara bimig kota bini-
bea bara gearun, bara goiokeen kiitan tuhnun ta :

23. Gatun keawai bara ba na pa gikoumba muriin, uwa gaiya
bara, wiyelliela, nakeun bara natoara fagelo karig koba wiya mo-
ron noa kakulla.

21:. Gatun taraikan bariinba gearun kinba uwa tulmun kolag,
gatun nakulla yanti l)ara nukugko wiya ; keawai Ijon bara na
korien.

2.5. Wiya gaiya noii barun, A I wogkal nura, gatun piiTiral Ijii-
bul gurrulliko yantin ta wiyatoara Ijara ba fpropet to!

26. Keawai noa Kritlit kaniimginbia ta umatoara ba innii tara,
gatun uwolliko kirrikin kolag gikoug ka tako 1

27. Gatun kurri-kurri Mothe ko noa ba wiya, gatun yantin to
tpi'opet karig ko, gurrabunbea gaiya noa barun unnoa tara upato-
ara birug gikoug kai.

28. Gatun bava papai uwa unta kolag kokera kolag, unta kolag
liara : gatun noa pinitelliela kalog kolag.

29. Wonto bara ba pirralma bon, wiyelliela, Kauwa gearun ka-
toa ; kulla wal yarea kakillilin, gatun purreag ta waita uwollilin.
Gatun noa uwa murrarig kakilliko bai'un katoa.

30. Gatun yakita kakulla, yellawa noa ba barun katoa takilliko,
niankuUa noa farto, gatun pitalma noa, gatun yiirbugga, gatuu
gukulla gaiya barun.

31. Gatun gaikug l)arunba bugkuUeun, gatun gimilleiin gaiya
bara bon; noa gati kakulla barun kinbirug.

32. Gatun bara wiyellan barabo, Wiya, geaninba biilbiil winna
ba gearun kinba ko murrug kaba ko, wiyellileun noa ba gearun
katoa, gatun gurrabunbeun noa ba gearun upatoara ta ?

33. Gatun bougkulleun tanoa-kal-bo gatun willug ba kakulla
fHierothalem kolag, gatun nakulla Itarun fhendeka ta, gatun ba-
run taraikan barun katoa,

31-. AViyelliela, Bougkulleun bo ta yuna Piriwal ta. ^atun pai-
kulleun Tliimon kip.

194: AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

35. Gratun bara wiya unni tai'a upatoara yajiig koa, gatun gi-
inilleiin bara boa yiirbuggulliela noa ba tarto.

36. Gatun bai'a ba wiyelliela, lethuko noa niiiwoabo gai'ok^a
willi ka barun kin, gatun wiya barun noa, Pital nura kauwa.

37. ^Vonto bara ba pulul-pulul kakulla gatun kinta-kan, gatun
kotelliela bai-a marai ta bara nakuUa.

38. Gratun noa wiya barun, Minarig tin nura kinta katan ? ga-
tun niinarig tin nurunba bulbullo kotan '!■

39. Nauwa tia niattara emmoumba, gatun yulo emmomnba, Gra-
toa bo : numulla tia, gatun nauwa ; kulla keawai marai koba
purriug korien gatun tibun korien, yanti nakulla nura tia ba em-
moumba.

40. Gratun wiya noa ba unni, tilgumbea liarun noa gikoumba
mattara gatun yulo.

41. Gratun keawai bara ba gurra jtital ko, gatun kotelliko, wiya
noa barun, Wiya, nurunba kunto unti 1

42. Gratun bara bon gukulla pundol koiyubatoara makoi'o birug,
gatun pundol nuparai kabirug.

43. Gatun noa maukulla, gatun takulla barun kin mikan ta.

44. Gatun noa wiya barun, Unni tara wiyellikanne-ta wiya nu-
run bag ba, kakulla bag ba nurun katoa, yantin koa ka-iiwil kakil-
liko upatoara wiyellikanne-ta Mothe-umba, gatun banni ba fpro-
pet koba, gatun ftehillim kaba, emmoug kai.

45. Gurrabunbea gaiya noa barun, gurra-uwil koa bara upa-
toara ta ;

46. Gatun wiya noa barun, Yaki upatoara, gatun yaki murn'i-
rag ta Kritlit ko gikoug kakilliko tetti ko, gatun bougkulliko kiim-
ba-ken-ta purreag ka tetti kabirug :

47. Gatun wiyabunbi-uwil koa minkikanne-ta gatun warekuUi-
kanne-ta yarakai umullikan ko gikoug katoa birug yitirra birug
yantin ta konara, kurri-kurri kabirug fHierotlialem kabirug.

48. Gatun nura nakillikan katan gali tara ko.

49. Gatun, gurrulla, wupin bag nurun kin wiyatoara emmoum-
ba koba Biyugbai koba : wonto nura ba minkea kokera fHiero-
thalem ka, kaiyu koa nurun kauwal biilwara tin.

50. Gatun yutea noa barun kalog kolag Bethany ka bo, gatun noa
wupilleun mattara gikoumba wokka-lag, gatun pitalma noa barun.

51. Gatun yakita kakulla, yaki pitalmulliela noa ba barun, man-
tilleim gaiya bon barun kinbirug, gatun kuri'ea bon wokka-lag
moroko kako.

52. Gatun bara bon murrarag koiyelliela, gatun willug ba ka-
kulla fHierotlialem kolag kauwal-kan pital-kan :

53. Gatun kakilliela murrug fbieron ka, murrarag wiyelliela
gatun pitalmulliela bon Eloinug.

AMEN.

PART III.

THE LEXICON

[FllDM THE ORIGINAL MANUSCRIPT.]

AK

AWAEAKAL- ENGLISH

LEXICON

GOSPEL ACCORDING TO SAINT LUKE

L. E. THPvELKELD

^•0W FOR THE FIRST TIME PRINTED.

CHARLES POTTER, GOVERNMENT PRINTER.

It592.

THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

It was during the year 1827, being the third year after the com-
mencement of my mission to the aborigines, that the first work of
this kind was produced — the result of my researches, assisted by
M'Gill. The work was entitled " Specimens of the Language of
the Aborigines of New South Wales," and was printed in Sydney,
the only attempt that had then been made by anyone to obtain a
thorough grammatical knowledge of the aboriginal language of
Australia, in any of its various dialects, and to render it into a
written form.

In 1834, on the recommendation of the Rev. W. G. Broughton,
the then Arch-Deacon of Xew South Wales, the Colonial Govern-
ment, and the Society for the Promotion of Christian Knowledge,
London, conjointly advanced sufficient funds to enable me to
to publish a small edition, now out of print, of "An Australian
Grammar of the Language as spoken by the Aborigines in the
Vicinity of Lake Macquarie, New South Wales." In 1850, I
published, on my own account, " A Key to the Structure of the
Aboriginal Language, being an Analysis of the Particles used as
Affixes, to form the various modifications of the Verbs, showing
the essential powers, abstract roots, and other peculiarities of the
language." Both of these works were presented to, and exhibited
at, the Royal National Exhibition, London, 1851.

This Lexicon will contain only those words which are used in
the Gospel by Saint Luke. For the exemplification of such tenses
and cases as may not be used therein, reference must be made to
the " Australian Grammar," and to the " Key to the Structure
of the Aboriofinal Language."

A few illustrative sentences will be found at the end of the
Lexicon, showing the mode in which certain forms of English
phraseology are expressed in the aboriginal language.

As a tribute of respect to the departed worth of M'Gill, the
intelligent aboriginal, whose valuable assistance enabled me to
overcome very many difficulties in the language much sooner
than otherwise could have been accomplished, his likeness is also
attached to this work.

L. E. THRELKELD.

Sydney,

New South Wales,
1859.

ABBREVIATIONS.

ahl. for

ace. ,,

adv. „

aor. „

cf-

conj. „

dat. ,,

def. „

emjyh. ,,

Eng. „

exclam. ,,

fern. „

flit. „

Gr. „
Eeh.

imper. or imp. ,,

indef. ,,

i.q. „

intens. „

c/.* This is a reference to the foot-note on par/e 204

ablative

interr. for interrogative

accusative

Lat. .

, Latin.

adverb.

lit. ,

, literaUy.

ccorist.

mand. ,

. mandatory.

refer to.

masc. ,

, inasculine

conjoined.

neg. ,

, negative.

dative.

opt. ,

, optative

definite.

part. ,

, participle

emphatic.

perf

, perfect.

English.

plu. ,

, 2}lurah

exclamation.

2)rep. ,

, 2^('^^POsition

feminine

pres. ,

, present

future.

2)riv. ,

, j)7-ivative

Greek.

j)r.n. ,

, proper noun

Hebrew.

proh. ,

, ^>7*o/ii6zto/'y.

imperative.

pron. ,

, p)ronouu.

indefinite.

sing. ,

, singular

the same as.

subj. ,

, sidrjunctive.

intensive.

subst. ,

, substantive

AX

AWABAKAL-ENGLISH LEXICON

TO THE

GOSPEL ACCORDING TO SAINT LUKE,.

The letters in ilie English alphabet, with some modifications, are
here useel to convey the sounds of letters and words in the ab-
original language. The meaning of the verb is given in the third
person singular only, but it should be remembered that the verb,
when rendered into English, must be made to agree with its
subject, whether singular, plural, or dual — first, second, or third
person, as the case may require; for example, — buntan, ' smites,'
may have to be translated ' I smite,' ' thou smitest,' ' he, she, or it
smites,' ' avc, ye, or they {dual and j^horcd) smite '; cf, Grammar,
p. 31. So likewise with respect to nouns ; for they are singular,
dual, or plural, according to the particle attached to shov/ the
number; as, kuri, 'man'; kiiri ta, 'the man'; kuri tara, 'the
men'; yantin kuri, 'all manner of men '; ' all men '; 'all people';
' all mankind.'
[Hyphens are used to sliovv- the composition of some of the words. — Ed.]

A — the sound of this letter is
the same as heard in Unr/. ah !

A — retains the long sound, es-
pecially when accented as in
ban ; a sounds shorter than a.
See ' Phonology,' page 5.

A ! — a call of attention ; hark !

Aaron — 2tr.7i., Aaron.

Aaroniimba — belonging to A.

Abaram — -^jr. n., Abraham .

Abaramiimba — belonging to A.

Abaram kinko— to be with A.;
dat. 2.

Abaramnug — for A. to have or
possess ; dat. 1.

Abaramnug — A. as the object.

Abel — pr.n., Abel.

Abeliimba — belonging to A.

Abelnug — Abel ; the ace. case.

Abia — pr.n., Abia.
Abia-umba — belonging to A.
Abilene — ^j?'.?!., Abilene.
Agelo — -Gr., an angel.
Ai — sounds as i in £n{/. 'nigh.'
Aketo — Lat., vinegar.
Aku — Lett., a needle.
Alabathro — Gr., alabaster.
Alpai — Gr. pr.n., Alpheus.
Altar — see bonio.
Andrea — pr.n., Andrew.
Apothol — Gr., an apostle.
Arguro^G-V., silver.
Army — Eng., army.
Army-kan — Eng., a soldier.
Arto — Gr., bread, a loaf.
Atthari — Gr., a farthing.
Ather — pr.n., Asher.
Athino — Lat., an ass.

202

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

B

B — is sounded as in En<j. ' be.'
In many instances it is diffi-
cult to ascertain whether the
sound be h or ]), or a com-
pound sound of botli letters.

Ba — sounds as Eng. ' bah ' !
Ba — when, as if ; posttixed to
pronouns, it forms the jyoss. *
Bag — the verbal pron., I.
Bai — is sounded as Eng. ' l)y.'
Baibai — -a stone-axe ; an axe.
Bal, ban — are sounded as Eng.

'marl, barn,' omitting the r.
Ban — a suffix to certain nouns ;
as, makoro, ' fish'; makoroban,
' one who fishes,' ' a fisher-
man '; makorobin, ' a fisher-
woman.'
Banug— the conj. dual, I-thee ;
the first person nom., and the
second person ace.
Bapai — nigh, near, close at hand.
Bapabunbilliko — inf., tolethnry.
Bapabunbilla — imp., permit to

bury. _
Bapa-uwil — opt., (a wish) that

...may bury.
Bapa-uwii koa — subj., (a pur-
pose) in order to bury : that
may... bury.
Bapilliko — to bury, to inter.
Bar A — down ; below.
Barabba — jyr.n., Barabbas.
Barabbanug — B. ; in the ace.
Bara kako — actually down.
Bara kolag — tending down.
Bara — they.

Barabo — they themselves.
Bai'abo-barabo — recip., they { do
it) themselves, one to another.
Bariin — down ; now is down.
Barun — them ; ace. case.

Barunba — belonging to them ;

their ; theirs ; gen. case.
Barun kai, barun kaiko — from

them, as a cause ; on account

of them ; abl. 1.
Barun kinbirug — loeally away

from them; out of them ;

from amongs them.
Barun kako — with them locally.
Barun katoa — in company with

them ; with them.
Bathileia — Gr., kingdom.
Bathileu— (7r., a king.
Batolomai — i)r.n., Bartholomew.
Bato — fresh-water ; cf. kokoin.
Batoto — with water, as agent.
Bato kabirug — out of the water ;

from the water, locally.
Bau — sounded as Eng. ' bough.'
Ba-uwil — 02^1., a wish as to the

action of the verb to which it

is joined.
Ba-uwil koa — sub., in order that

...may...
Be — is sounded as Eng. ' bay.'
Beelidhebul — jir. n. , Beelzebub.
Beelma — mocked ; did mock.
Beelmaniin — -will mock.
Beelmulliko —to mock, deride,

despise ; to make game of.
Beelmulli tin — because of the*

mocking.
Beelmulliela — mocked and con-
tinued to mock ; was mocking.
Beelmullinun — will be mocking.
Bethany — pr.n., Bethany.
Bethany kolag — towards B.
Bethlehem — pr.n., Bethlehem.
Bethapage — pi'.n. , Bethphage.
Bethahaida — pr.n. , Bethsaida.
Bi — is sounded as Eng. ' bee.'
Bi — thou ; the verbal nom.
Biblion — Gr., book, c/., book.

*For all personal pronouns, and for the case-endings of nouns, see pp. 16,
17 of the Grammar. — Ed.

THE LEXICON.

203

Biggai — the affectionate address

to a brother ; brother !
Biloa — he-thee ; conj. dual.
Bin — thee ; ace. case.
Bintuu — a male parent; a father.
Binug — thou-him ; conj. dual.
Bir — sounds as in Eng. 'bird.'
Birrikca — slept ; was asleep.
Birriki-birriki — sound asleep.
Birrikilligel — the lying (resting,

sleeping) place: a bedroom, &c.
Birrikilliko — to lie along ; to

take rest, as by lying down

to sleep.
Birrikin — pres. part., sleeping;

being asleep.
Birug — from; apart from ; out of.
Bith-dekem-millia-Zff«., 20,000.
Bitta — the edge or sides.
Bin — rhymes with Eng. 'pew.'
Bi-uwil — auxiliary sign of the

optative mood.
Bi-uwil koa — auxiliary sign of

the subjunctive mood.
Biyug — the affectionate address

to a male parent ; father !
Biyugbai — a father ; the male

parent.
Biyugbai-nug — ace, the father,

as the oVjject.
Biyngbai-ta — the father, as the

subject; it is the father.
Biyug-ta-uwa bali — dual ; both

father and I have

Biyugbai-to — the father, acting

as an agent or as the subject

to an active verb.
Bo — the self-same ; as, gatoa-bo,

' I myself; unti-bo, 'this self-
same place.'
Boaikulleiin — grew, of itself.
Boaikulliko — to grow or shoot

up, of itself.
Boa-ma— gathered together, col-
lected.
BoamJi korien — did not gather

together.

Boamulliko — to gather together,

to collect.
Bobog — a babe ; an infant.
Bokatog — the surf of the sea ;

a wave.
Bomo — 6'r., an altar.
Bon — ace, the pronoun 'him.'
Bonig — ashes.
Boo — Gr., an ox.
Book (fbiblion, Gr.)— Eng., hook.
Book kaba — in (on) the book.
Bo-ta — itself ; it itself.
Botru — Gr., grapes.
Bougbugga — hascaused to arise;

did cause to arise ; arose.
Bougbuggamin — will cause to

arise by personal agency ; will

be made to rise ; shall l)e

raised up.
Bougbuggulliko — to cause to

arise by personal agency ; to

raise up.
Bougkatea-kanun — will be raised

again by command ; will again

stand up.
Bougkulleun — arose, got up.
Bougkullia — inq')., arise, get up.
Bougkullia kan — one who has

arisen by command.
Bou gkuUia-kan-katea-kan — one

who has arisen again by com-
mand.
Bougkulliko — to arise, to get

up, to stand up.
Bougkulli korien — not to arise.
Bougkullinun — will rise.
Bougkullinun-wal — shall arise ;

will certainly rise.
BougkuUia-kanun — will arise by

command.
Bounnoun — ace, her.
Bounnoiinba — belonging to her.
Bounnoun kai— because of her.
Bounnoun kinbirug — from her ;

away from (apart from) her.
Bountoa — she.
Bredd (farto, Gr.) — Eng., Dread.

204

AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Lredd ta — tlie bread, as a sub-
ject; it is bread.
Bredd-to — the bread, as agent.
Brimton — l^ng. , brimstone.
Bu — sounds as Eng. ' bull '; r/!*"
-bug — sounds as J^'ng. ' bung.'
-bug — as an auxiliary particle,

posttixed to the verb, denotes

personal and causative agency,
-buggulliko — to act effectually by

]iersonal agency ; to cause to.
Bug — sounds as in Ung. 'l^oon,'

l)ut with the strong nasal ng

instead of the n ; cf*.
Bugbug — to salute.
Bugbugga — vinloosed; did open.
BugbugguUiko — to act upon so

as to unloose ; to open a book.
Biigbug-ka — saluted, did salute

vv-ith a kiss.
Bugbiigkulliko — to salute with

a kiss.
Buggai — now; to-da}' ; present

time.
Buggaikal — of to-day; belonging

to the present period ; of this

time ; new ; fresh.
BugkuUeun — did become.
Bugkulliko — to cause to be, by

its own power ; to become.
Bukk — sounds as Eng. 'buck.'
Bukka — anger ; ferociousnes-s.
Bukka-butti-bugkea — the more

wrathful (angry, enraged).
Bukka-ka-ke — to be in an angry,

wrathful, savage state ; to be

an avenger.
Bukka-kakilli-kanne — anything

which is in a state of anger ;

wrath ; enmity.

Bukka-kakilliko — to l)e in a

state of anger (wrath, rage,

enmity).
Bukka-kan — one who is angry ;

l)eing angry ; an enemy.
Bukka-kan-to— one who is angry

{or an enemy) acting as agent.
Bukka-kan-toa — the angry one,

as an agent ; the adversary- ;

the enemy.
Bukka kauwal — great anger.
Bukka -raai-ye — one who is liabit-

ually angry.
Bukka-mai yikora — imi'). npg.,^)^

not angry.
Bukka manun — will do angrily.
Bukka-ta-kal — in a state of rage.
Bula — dual, ye two.
Bill — for its sound c/.*.
Bui — sounds as Eng. 'bull.'
Biilbiil — the heart.
Bulbiil la — in the heart.
Bulbiil-lo — the heart, as agent.
Biilbul labirug — -out of the heart
Bulka — the back of the hand or

body ; any hill or mountain ;

a protuberance.
Bulka kako — at or on the back.
Bulkara — to (unto) the back, &c.
Bulkiira karig — all the moun-
tains or hills.
Bulkaru kolag — towards the hill.
Bulkura-ta — it is the mountain ;

the mountain.
Bulkaroa — throughout the back

(or hill, mountain).
Buloai'a — two.
Buloara-bula — dual, they two ;

the two ; both.
Buloara-buloara — two and two.

*NoTE. — li always, and u before a single consonant, are sounded
like u in Eng. ' bull.'

ii always, and u before tico consonants, are sounded as u in
Eng. ' hull.' See page 4.

Throughout the Lexicon, i-eference to this Note is made by c/.*
—Ed.

THE LEXICON.

205

Bulun — daal arc, tliem two.
Bulun liinbirug — from (apart

from) them two.
Buluu-kinbirng-ko — from tliom

tv.'o, as an agent.
Buhvara — liigli, lofty.
Buhvara ka — at the height ; on

liigh ; noon ; high noon.
Biilwarai tin— on account of the

height ; on high.
Bum — for its sound cf^\
Bum — is sounded as Eiuj. ' boom. '
Bumbea — Avas and is married.
Bumbea-ka — is in the married

state.
Bumbillala — did marry at some

definite time past.
Bumbillan — do or does marry.
Biimbilli-ka — was in tlie act of

marrying at some indefinite

time past.
Bdmbilliko — to marry ; to take

a wife ; to kiss I'cciprocally.
Bumbinim — fv^t-, will marry.
Bumbuggulliko — to take a kiss

by force.
Bumbuggulliko — to cause to be

loose ; to open a door.
Bumbuggulli-to — the kiss given,

as agent ; with or by a kiss.
Bum-bum — kisses ; kissing.
Bdml)um-ka — -was kissed.
B'.'unbiim kakilliko— to be in a

state of kissing ; to kiss.
Biimbum-ka-pa — did not kiss.
Biimbum-kulliela — did continue

to kiss.
Bumbum-kullielliko — to con-
tinue to kiss,
Bummilleim — found ; did find.
Bummilliko — to find.
Bun — is sounded as^5?y. 'boon.'
Bun — for its sound c/."'^.
Biin — jMrmissive, let ; permit.
Biinba — smitten ; smote.
Bunbea — did permit ; did let.
Bunbilla — imj?., permit ; let.

Biinbilliko — to permit ; to let.

Bunljin — -pres., permits.

Bunbinun— ;/'!■«/., will permit.

Bdn-bi-uwil — ojjt., wish to let.

Biin-bi-uwil koa — siibj., in order
to ] )er m i t ; that . . . might let.

Biinkilligel — the place of smit-
ing ; the threshing floor ; the
pugilistic ring ; the field of
])attle.

Bunkilli-kan — one who smites.

Bunkilli-kan tin— from (on ac-
count of) him wlio smites.

Bunkilliko — to smite or strike ;
to make a blow ; c/.*.

Biinkilli kolag — towards smit-
ing ; abo'.it to smite.

Bunkilliko tetti — to smite dead ;
to kill with a blow.

Biinkilli tin — from (on account
of) the smiting.

Bunkiye tetti wirriye — one wlio
habitually smites to death ;
one who kills with blows ; a
murderer.

Biinki yikora — proh., smite not ;
strike not ; must not strike.

Bunkulla — smote ; did beat.

Bunnim wal — shall smite ; will
certainly smite.

Bunnun-wal-lja — when . . .sliould
smite; if... should smite.

Buntan — pr-es., strikes.

Buntimai — a messenger; an am-
bassador ; a herald ; h=^i>.

Biintoara — that Avliich is smit-
ten or struck.

Burrilliko — to do a thing spoken
of by some violent instrumen-
tal means ; cf. tetti-burrilliko.

Burroug — a dove.

Burugbuggii — did set at liberty;
unloosed, released, unbound.

Burugbuggan — does set at liber-
ty (release, unbind).

Burugbugganim — will set loose.

206

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Burugbuggulla — maud., sot at
liberty ; set loose.

Buru gbuggulliela — was cau.sing
to be set at liberty ; was un-
loosing or releasing.

Burn gbuggulliela ba — while (as,
when). . .was setting at liberty.

Burugbuggulliko — to cause to
be set at liberty ; to unloose ;
to release ; to unbind.

Burugkulleun — did set at liberty,
unloosed (of itself).

Burugkulliko — to set itself at
liberty of its own })ower ; to
unloose itself ; to unbind it-
self ; to go off spontaneously.

Butti — more ; to do more ; to
continue the action.

Butti-butti — mand., more more ;
go on, go on.

Buttikag — any animal ; ass, ox.

Buttikag ba — when (if) an ani-
mal . . . , as an ox.

Bu-nwil — opt., wish to smite.

Bu-uwil koa — subj., in order to
smite ; that . . . might smite ; on
purpose to strike.

Buwa — mand., smite ; strike.

There is no sibilant sound in
the language, consequently there
is no c soft, or s, or z in the
native alj^liabet. These letters,
therefore, occur only in words of
foreign origin introduced into
the aboriginal tongue. The hard
sound of c, as in Uny. ' cubit,'
would 1)6 represented l^y the
letter k The letter 6 (0) repre-
sents the sound of ch. , as in Entj.
' church.'

Cipu — Eng., sheep.
Kc'if(titalo, Gr.)—Foiff., calf.

Kalabary — j^''-^^-) Calvary.

Kenturion — a centurion.

Kentui"ion-ko — the centurion, as
an agent.

Kubit — Eng., a cubit.

Kurenia— pr. n. , Cyrenia.

Kurenia-kal — belonging to Cy-
renia ; a Cyrenian ( niasc.J.

Kurenia-kulin — T)elonging to Cy-
renia ; a Cyrenian (fern.).

D.

D has a middle sound betwixt
t and d ; it often confounds the
sounds of d and t. I) is used in
foreign words, while t belongs
to the language. The aborigines
do not pronounce the Eng. v or
f, generally substituting h for
V, and j) tor f.

Dabid — David.

Dabid-to — David, as the agent.

Dabidumba — belonging to D.

Debbil (fdiabol, 6'/-'.) —devil.

Debbil-debbil — intensive; a term
used for an evil being of whom
the aborigines are much afraid.

Dekem-millia— Z«<. , 1 0,000.

Denari— Zffl^., a penny.

Deutero — Gr., second.

Dhakaria — pr.n., Zacliarias.

Dhakke — pr.7i., Zaccliaeus.

Dhelot — Gr., a zealot.

Diabol-lo or diabol-to — the devil,
as an agent.

Diabol-kan — one having a de^-il.

Didathkalo (-oi) — Gr., teachei-.

Dodeka — Gr., twelve.

E.

E — sounds as a in Eng. ' may.'
Ela or ala! — exdam., ho! hallo!

THE LEXICON.

207

Ela-beara ! — emphatic exclam. of
astonishment oi- surprise ; oh,
dear ! dear me ! well !

Elai6n — Gr., Mount of Olives.

Elebben — see hendeka.

Elebben-ta — eleven it is ; eleven.

Elia — i^w.n., Elias.

Elia-umba — belonging to Elias.

Elidhabet — pr. n. , Elizabeth.

Elithcu — pr.n , Eliseus.

Eloi — Hebrew Elohim, God.

Eloi kai — on account of Eloi.

Eloi kai koba — on account of
and belonging to God.

Eloi kin — in place before Eloi ;
before (in presence of) God.

Eloi kinko — for or to Eloi.

Eloi koba — belonging to Eloi ;
belonging to God, as property.

Eloi-ta — Eloi it is, as the sub-
ject.

Eloi-to — Eloi, as the agent : God.

Eloi-iimba — belonging to Eloi,
personally ; God's.

Eloi-iimba-ta — belonging to Eloi
it is ; it is of God ; it is God's.

Emmaou — pr.n., Emmaus.

Emmaou kolag — towards E.

Emmoug — ace, me.

Emmoug kai — from me ; on ac-
count of me ; about me.

Emmoug katoa — with (in com-
pany with, together with) me.

Emmoug kin — -at me ; with me.

Emmoug kinbirug — from me ;
away from me.

Emmoug-ta — it is mine ; mine.

Emmoumba — my, mine, belong-
ing to me. Also, Emmoemba.

Emmoumba katoa — with (in
company with) my.

Emmoumba koba — belonging to
my ; of my.

Emmoumba tin — from mine ; on
account of mine, as a cause.

Et (et) — Eng., eight.

Ethaia — -pr.n.., Esaias.

Ethane — Gr., nations.
Ethane-kal — Gr. and aboriginal,

the Gentiles. See Gentail.
Etin (etin) — Eng., eighteen.
Etin-ta — the eighteen it is, as a

subject.
Ety-wara — Eng. and aboriginal,

eighty-four.
Ety koa — in order to be eighty.
Euagelion — Gr., the gospeL

F.

The sound of /is not found in the
native language ; when it is in-
troduced by foreign words, the
aborigines pronounce it p.

Parthig — Eng., farthing.

Pente — Gr., five.

Pente-ta — five it is ; the five.

Pentaki-kilioi— 6V., 5,000.

Pentakothioi— (Jr., 500.

Pentekonta — Gr., fifty.

Pipatin — Eng., fifteen.

Pipaty — see pentekonta.

Pipaty koa — in order that it
may be fifty.

Pipaty koa ka-uwil — in order
that there may be fifty.

Pok (falopek, Gr.) — Eng., fox.

Purlog — Eng., furlong.

Purlog hikty — Eng., sixty fur-
longs.

Purlog hikty-ta — sixty furlongs
it is ; three-score furlongs.

G.

G is always the English g hard.
Gabriel — pr.n., Gabriel.
Gabriel-ta — Gabriel it is.
Gabrielumba — belonging to G.
Gadara — ^pj'.w., Gadara.
Gadara-kal — a woman of G.
Gadaren — p)r.n., Gadarene.

208

AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Galiliiia — jir.n., Galilee.
Galihiia kaba — at Gnlilee.
Galilaia kabirug — out of G.
Galilaia-kul — {masc. ) belonging

to Galilee ; a Galilean.
Galiiaia-kah'u — (fcDi.) belong-
ing to Galilee ; a Galilean.
Galilaia tin — from (on account

of) Galilee.
Galilaia tin-to — on account of

Galilee, as an o.gent.
Garamuiateu — Gr., scribes.
Gii ram mateu -kal- — bel onging to

the scribes.
Garammateu-kal-lo — belonging

to the scribes, acting as agents.
G;\rammateu-kan — he who is a

scribe.
Garammateu ko — for the scribes.
Ga ram mateu nug— the scril^es, as

the object.
Garammateu tin — on account of

the scribes; from the scribes,

as a cause.
Gararaiaiateu-to — the scribes, as

agents.
Garep (fbotru, Gr.) — Z'?!^/. , grape.
Gennetharet — ■pr.7i.,Gennesaret.
Gentail (fethane-kal) — Gentiles.
Gentail kinko — for (unto) the G.
Gentail koba — belonging to G.
Gentail-to — G., as the awnts.

Gr.

G sounds as ng in Enff. * bung ';
it has the nasal sound of 7i(/
in the English alphabet. Tlie
sound is invariably the same
whether at the beginning, the
middle, or the end of a word,
and cannot bo too strongly
nasalised.

Ga — or ; or it is.
Ga 1— is it 1

Ga !— lo ! behold !

Ga ba — or as ; it is as ; while as.

Ga wiya ? — or say? or is it not ?

Gagga, gagka — see ganka.

Gai — rhymes with IJnc/. ' nigh.'

Gaikug — the eye; the eyes.

Gaikug birug — from (awa3"from,
out of) the eye.

Gaikug tin — because of the eye.

Gaiya — then ; at that time or
period spoken of. It is used
as a correlative to yakounta?
' when '? in the reply, ' gaij-a '
follows the word that indi-
cates the time v/hen ; as, kiim-
ba gaiya, 'to-morrow then.'

Gakea — .stood ; did stand.

Gakilliko — to stand upright.

Gakillilm — nov/ standing and
continuing to stand.

Gakiilin — standing upright.

Gakogkilliko — to feign ; to sham
or pretend.

Gakoiman — deceives ; betrays.

i^p^This and the word-forms Ije-
low may be written either
gakoi- or gako-.

Gakoimulliko — to cause decep-
tion ; to deceive ; to betray.

Gakoiya — deceived ; denied ; he-
trayed ; perverted.

Gakoiya — deception ; hypocrhsy ;
deceit ; betrayal.

Gakoiyanun — Avill make believe
or sham; v.-ill deceive or deny.

Gakoiya-uwil — opt., v\'ish to de-
ceive or betray.

Gakoiya-uwil ba — as . . . might de-
ceive.

Gakoiya-uwil koa — suhj., that...
might deceive or betray.

Gakoiya-uwilliko — to wish to de-
ceive.

Gakoiyaye — habitual deception,
f^aye tin — on account of
liabitual deception ; from
hypocrisy or deceit.

THE LEXICO>^.

209

Grnkoiya yikora — mamL, beware
of deception.

Gakoiyellan — does now deceive.

Grakoiyellieia — was deceiving or
pervci'ting.

G-akoiyclli-kan — one who lies or
deceives or acts the traitoi'.

Gakoiyelli-kau-to — one who de-
ceives, actins; as the accent.

Grakoiyelliko — ^to act in such a
way as to deceive ; to betray;
to feign ; to lie ; to act the

Gakoiyellilin — now deceiving.

Grakoiyeliinun — will betray.

Gakoiyelli-ta — (sin;/.) the decep-
tion ; the deceiving.

Gakoiyelli-tara — (plu.) the de-
ceptions ; the dcceivings.

Grala — that (demonstrative).

Gala ko — for that ; to that.

Gali — this (demonstrative).

Gali birug — from (out of) this.

Gali koba — belonging to this.

Gali noa— this is he who.

Gali-ta — this is it that ; this is
tliat which.

Gali-tara — these arc they which.

Gali tin — from (on account of)
this, as a cause.

Galoa — that (there at hand.)

Galoa-ko — that there, spoken of
as an agent.

Galoa kolag — towards that.

Ga!oa-riu — from (on account of)
that, as a cause.

Gan 1 — interr. who ?

Gan-ba — who as ; whoever.

Gan...ba? — who is (he)?

Ganbulliko — (a peculiar idiom,
Jit., to be ' whoing ' a person
when you know who he is ;
hence,) to deny all knowledge
of a person when at the same
time you know him ; to deny
a person ; to deny personal
knowledge.

Ganbullin.'m — v,dll l)e 'whoing';

will deny.
Ganbullinun wal — will certainly

be ' whoing '; shall deny.
Ganka — first ; before ; foremost ;

prior ; elder ; 1.(7. gag-ga or -ka.
Ganka — before ; in presence of.
Ganka-ganka — the very first.
Ganka kakilliko— to be Ijefore ;

to be the first.
Ganka-kal — relating to the first

or the elder.
Ganka-kalleun — having been be-
before or first.
Ganka kanun — will be first.
Ganke? — personal interr., who

is the person 1 who ? who is 1
Gan kiloa 1 — whom like 1
Gan kiloa unnoa — like whom is

that 1
Gan kin 1 — upon whom 1 locally.
Gan kinba — upon whomsoever,

locally.
Gannug 1 — ace, who is the per-
sonal object 1 v/hom 1
Gan-to? — who did or does % who

is the personal agent %
Gan-to ba — whosoever sliall act

as a personal agent ; wdioso-

ever does or will do.
Ganto-bo ba — whosoever may be

the selfsame personal agent ;

whosoever v.dll.
Ganto-ko 1 — -who is the personal

agent 1 who is he thit does ?
Gamim ? — to whom (to have or

to possess) 1
Ganumba 1 — whose 1 to whom

belongeth...'?
Ganum-bo — whosoever hath.
Gapal — a woman, a concubine.
Gapal toa — with (in company

with) a woman or women.
Gar — rhymes with the Eng.

' far,' pronouncing the r very

rough.
Garabo — sleep ; repose.

!10

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGK.

Grarabo-kakilliko — to 1)C in a
state of re])ose ; to sleep.

Gavabo kakillin — present j>arf.,
sleeping ; reposing.

Garaka — the entrance or mouth
of anything ; i.q. kurraka.

Graraka-ko — the entrance, as the
subject.

Grarawalliko — to lose one self.

G-arawallilleiin — lost ; did lose.

Garawan — a plain ; a flat place;
a level ; i.q. garai'awan.

Garo — -the eldest son ; the first
born son ; cf. kurri and koro.

Garogeen — an elderly woman ;
an old woman.

Garokal — aged ; elder ; old.

Garokea — stood up ; arose.

Garokeiin — stood up, at some
definite time past.

Garokilla — mancl., stand wp.

Garokill^a — mand., stand up and
continue to stand.

Garokilliela — ^9fflsi. part.^ con-
tinued to stand ; stood.

Garokilliko — to stand upright
on the feet ; to be in a stand-
ing position.

Garokilli korien — neg., not to
be standing upright ; not to
stand.

Garokillin — ^jj'e*'. 2>«'"^-) stand-
ing ; now standing upright.

Garombai — an elderly man; an
old man.

Garkulleun — turned round.

Garkulliko — to revolve of itself;
to turn one's self round.

Garug — rough ; rugged.

Garuggai'a — rugged ; proud.

Gati — happened of itself ; acci-
dental ; perchance ; unawares ;
without cause ; secret ; unre-
vealed.

Gati — nothing ; nought ; not.

Gati kakilliko — to be nothing.

Gati kakulla — was not ; evan-
ished ; disappeared.

Gati-ta — the secret place.

Gatoa — ein^^hatic, I who ; it is I.

Gatoa-ta — emphatic, it is I who.

Gatoa-bo — empli., it was (is) I
myself who.

Gatun — conj., and.

Ge — rhymes with the Eng. 'nay,'
sounding strongly the nasal
ng at the beginning.

Gearimulleun — choose ; elected.

Gearimulliko — to pick out ; to
choose ; to cull ; to elect.

Gearun — pron., we.

\Incomplete : see note at tJie

end of the Lexicon. — Ed.]

H.

The aborigines seldom sound h as
an initial aspirate; consequently
the letter h is not much used in
the language, save in words of
foreign extraction.

Hebiiraio — pr.n., a Hebrew.
Hebaraioi-umba — belonging to

the Hebrews.
Hek — 6'r., six.
Hekaton — Gr., a hundred.
Hekekonta — Gr. , sixty.
Hellenik — Gr., Greek.
Hendeka — Gr., eleven.
Hepta — Gr., seven.
Herod — jrr.n., Hei'od.
Herodiath — pr.n., Herodias.
Herod katoa — with (in company

with) Herod.
Herodnug — H., as the object.
Herod-to — Herod, as the agent.
Herodumba — belonging to H.
Herodiimba-kan — being H's.
Hiereu— (?/•., a priest ; priests.
Hiereu-kan — one who is a priest.
Hiereu-ko — the priest, as agent.

THE LEXICON.

211

Hiereu-nug— the priest 0?- priests,

as the object.
Hieron — Gr., temple.
Hieron ka — at the temple.
Hieron tin — from (on account of)

the temple.
Hierothalem — Gr. , Jerusalem.
Hierothalem ka — at or in J.
Hierothalem kabirug — out of J.;

from (away from) J.
Hierothalem-kal — belonging to

Jerusalem (masc.) ; a man of

Jerusalem.
Hierothalem-kalin — belonging

to Jerusalem (fern.); a woman

of Jerusalem.
Hour (fhora, Gr.) — ^«</., hour.
Hour ba — when (at) the hour.
Hour ka — was at the hour.
Hour-ka-ta — it was at the hour.
Hundared — see hekaton.
Hundared-ta — hundred it is; the

hundred.

I (i) — sounds as e in Eng. 'eat.'
I (i) — sounds as ee in 3ng. 'e'en.'
laeiro (Yaeiro) — Gr., Jairus.
lakob (Yakob) — pr.n., Jacob,
lakobnug — Jacob, as the object,
lakobumba — belonging to Jacob
Iak6bo (Yak6bo) — Gr., James.
Iak6bo-umba — of or belonging to

James ; James's.
lak6bo-umba-ko — belonging to

J., as the agent.
Yehua — Heh. pr.n., Jehovah.
Yehoanug — J., as the object.
Yehoa kin — to Jehovah.
Yehoa-ko — J., as the agent.
Yehoa-umba — belonging to J.
I6thu — Gr. pr.n., Jesus,
lethu katoa — with (in company

with) Jesus,
lethu kin — to Jesus, locally, [is.

lethu kinko — to Jesus, where he
lethu-ko — Jesus, as the agent,
lethunug — Jesus, as the object,
loanna — jtr.n., Joanna,
loanna-ko — Joanna, as an agent.
Joanne — Gr. jjr.n., John,
loannenug — J., as the object,
loanne-umba — of or belonging to

John ; John's,
lona — Gr., Jonas,
loradan — pr. n. , Jordan,
lothep (Yothep) — fr.n., Joseph.
Yothep kinko — to Joseph.
Yothepumba — belonging to J.
Italo — Gr., a calf.
Ithiik — pr.n., Isaac.
Ithaknug — Isaac, as the object.
Ithakumba — belonging to I.
Ithakariot — pr.n., Iscariot.
Itharael — pr.n., Israel.
Itharaelnug — Is., as the object.
Ithiirael koba — belongino; to Is.
Iturea — pr.n., Iturea.
ludaia — Gr. pr.n., Judea.
ludaio (-oi) — Gr.pjr.n., a Jew.
ludaio koba — of or belonging to

a Jew or Jews,
ludath — pr.n., Judas,
ludath kin — to Judas,
ludath kinko — to Judas (for him

to have).

[Other tribal dialects have the
palatals j and 6, but this Awaba-
kal has not ; in it j occurs only
in imported words. — Ed.]

Jail — Eng., jail.
Jeriko — pr.n., Jericho.
Jerusalem — see Hierothalem.

K.

K is sounded as in Eng. 'Kate.'

212

AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAGE.

Ka is .sou:ule.l as in Enj. 'cart.'

K'l korieii — n'ig., not; am not.

Kaai — % call, here ! conio hither !

Kiaibulliko — to cry out ; to call
aloud ; to ' kaai '; because the
blacks use that word as we do
hallo ! hoy !

Kaaibulliuun — will cry out.

Ka ba — to h?, in such a state or
condition (as mentioned).

Ka ba (at the beginning of a
sentence) — if it is (as stated).

Kabirug — from ; out of ; away
from; apart from.

Kabo — presently ; by-and-by.

Kabo koa — incomj^any with by-
and-by ; in order to be by-
and-by ; until.

Kai — rhymes Avith Eng. ' eye.'

Kai — inip.^ be (an entreaty).

Kaiapath— ;?/'.«., Caiaphas.

Kai-ba — cried out ; called. The
word ' kai ' is used, as well as
' kaai,' to call attention.

Kaibug — a light (of any kind) ;
a lamp or candle.

Kaib'jg-gel — the place of a light,
as the candlestick.

Kaibulla — -imp., call; cry aloud.

Kaibidle in — ci'ied out ; did cry
out ; did shout aloud.

Kaibullia — imp., call out and
continue to call.

Kaibulliela — was lifting up the
voice ; was shouting.

Kaibulliko — to cry out ; to lift
up the voice; to call aloud; to
shout. Also, Kaii^ulliko.

Kaibullinjn — will call; will cry
out ; will shout aloud.

KaibuUinun wal — certainly will
call or shout; sliall call.

Kain — sounds as Eng. ' kinc.'

Kain— in possession of ; having.

Kaithar — Lrit. pr.n., Cresar.

Kaithar kinko— for (to) Creaar.

Ka,ithari-ko — C, as the agent.

Kaitharnug — Ctesar, as the ob-
joct, ace. ; to Cjesar, dat.

Kaithariimba — Csesar'.s.

Kaithariimba-ta, — it is what be-
longs to Cciesar ; that which is
Caesar's.

Kaiullaun — ceased ; ended.

Kaiulliko — -to cease ; to finish.

Kaiwitoara (fPathak) — passed
over ; the Passover.

Kaiyallea — imp., be silent ; be
mute ; cease ; leave off.

Kaiyalleakun — again to cease or
leave off.

Kaiyellia — imper., be silent or
mute ; cease.

Kaiyelliko — to be silent or mute ;
to cease.

Kaiyellinan — will cease.

Kaiyin — an edge ; the other side.

Kaiyin-kaiyin — (plu-) rJl sides ;
every side.

Kaiyin kolag — over towards the
other side.

Kaiyinkon — the side or edge.

Kaiyinkon taba— at or on the
other side or edge.

Kaiyin tako — to be over against
en the other side.

Kaiyu — power, ability; power-
ful, able.

Kaiyu kako — unto the power.

Kaiyu-kan — being powerful ; be-
ing able ; one having power;
one having ability.

Kaijii-kan kaniin — will be able.

Kaiyu-kan-to — a person having
pov/er, as agent.

Kaiyu koa — with (in company
with) pov>'er ; accompanied by
power.

Kaiyu korien — not powerful or
able ; unable.

Kaiyu-korien-to — unable to act,
as an agent.

Kaiyu tin — from (on account of)
the power.

In,.-

BuNTiMAi— ' A Messenger. '

TilE LEXICON.

213

Ka-keun — definite tmse, it Avas
(eai'ly in the morning) this
day or of the day spoken of.

Kakillai — being and continuing
to be.

Kakillan — did remain in a state
of (whatever is spoken of).

Kakiliieliko — ^to be and to con-
timie to be.

Kakilli-kan — one who is and
continues to be.

Kakilliliela — was being and con-
tinuing to be (in such a state).

Kakilliko — to be.

Kakillin — being novv^ actually
(in such a state).

Ka korien kakilliko — not to be ;
to fail to be.

KakuUa — was (in such a state).

Kakullai — to be awhile ; to be
for a season.

Kakuliai-ta — it is for awhile ;
it endures for a season.

-kal — (masc.) belonging to a time
or place ; in a state of ; a man
of such a place.

-kalin — {fern.) belonging to a
place; a female of such a place.

Kalog — afar off ; far ; distant.

Kalog ka — at a distance.

Kalog kaba — being afar off or

at a distance.
"Kalog-kolag — towards afar off;
to a distance.

Kamel — Emj., camel. ^

Kamunbilla — im.j>., forgive; let
be ; permit to be.

Kamunbilla kakilliko — to per-
mit to be in any state or con-
dition.

Kumunbilliko — to cause to let
be ; to permit to be.

Kamunbinun — will cause to let
be; will permit to be.

Kumunbin in wal — will cer-
tainly cause to permit to be ;
shall cause to let be.

Kiinunbi yikora — imp. prohlb.,
let not be permitted to be ;
forbid permission to be ; let
not be ; foi'bid to be.

Kan — is sounded !x?i Bur/, 'can.'

Kan-kan — p7'es. tense of tiie verb
to be (in any state); subst., one
who is (whatever is stated).

Kanumaiko — to repent.

K:\nun — -fict. tm/e/!, will be; e.g.,
tetti kanun, 'will be dead," will
be in a state of death.

Kanim kakilliko — to be in sucli
a state ; v.'ill be ; will become ;
will come to pass.

Kanun wal kakilliko — shall cer-
tainly come to pass.

Ka-pa — a particle which implies
a denial ; ' if it had been.'

Kapaiyinun — will become.

Kapatin — J^ng., a captain.

Kapa tin-to — a captain, as agent.

Kapernaum — jjr. n., Capernaum.

K apirri — hunger.

Kapirri-kan — one who hungers ;
being hungry.

Kara — private; secret ; adv., pri-
vately ; secretbf.

Kara — the negat. of being in
such a state ; equivalent to
' no longer to be.'

Karag — spittl e.

Karag-kabilliko — to do spittle ;
to spit spittle ; to spit.

Karai-karai — round about ; all
round.

Karaigon — suhsf., the outside ;
adv., outside.

Karaka — the mouth ; an entrance
gate or door ; i.q. kurraka.

Karakai — quick ; imp., he quick;
make haste ; i.q. kurrakai.

Karakai — one who pretends to
cure by charms ; a medicine-
man ; a sorcerer ; a doctor.

Karal — trembling; shaking; the
palsy.

!14

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Karauwa — oil.

Kara-uwilliko — to seek care-
fully with a wish to find.

Kaia-uwilli-koa — that . . . might
find ; in order to find.

Karawolleun — aorisf, found ;
shall have found.

Karawolliko — to find.

Karawollinun — -/uL, will find.

Kareawug — the south wind.

Kari — the first ; i.q. kurri.

Kari-kari — a reduplication de-
noting intensity or plurality ;
the very first.

Karig — all through; throughout
the whole.

Karig-kareug — fine i-aiment.

Karig-kai-eug-ko — fine dress, as
the agent.

Kai-in — pain.

Karin-kan — one who is in pain.

Karol — heat of any kind ; hot.

Katai — always ; to be always ;
for ever ; ever.

Kataikal — of every sort.

Ka tako — to be with.

Katalla — liad been ; had lived ;
had existed.

Katan — {present tense of kakilli-
ko, ' to be in any state ') am ;
art ; is ; are ; it is used with
singula!', dual, and plural pro-
nouns.

Katea — to be again.

Katea ka — to be until.

Katea-kan — one Mdio is again ;
beinof again.

Katea-kanun — will be again.

Katea-kanini wokka ka — will be-
come again up; will be again.

Katea-kun — subj., may be again.

Katilli-kan — one who is the thing
spoken of and acts as such ;
one who is...

Katilliko — to be (substantively)
the thing spoken of ; to be in
any state or condition.

Katillin — (substantively) exi.st-
ing as ; if preceded l)y pii-i-
wal, 'chief, lord, king,' it means
— does exercise lordship.

Katillinun — will be (substan-
tively), as above.

Kau — sounds as Eng, 'cow.'

Kau-ka-nwil — opt., would wish
to be.

Kau-ka-uwil koa — sub., in order
to be... ; that might be...

Kau-uia — gathered together ; as-
sembled.

Kau-ma korien — did not assem-
ble together.

Kau-ma pa — priv., would ha%'e
gathered together, but

Kau-manun — will cause to come
together; will gather together.

Kau-ma-uwil — opt., wished to
gather together ; would ga-
ther together.

Kau-ma-ye — one who habitually
causes to assemble or collect
together ; a collector.

Kau-mullan — did assemble to-
ther ; did take council.

Kau-mulli-gel — the place where
the gathering together is made;
the place of assembly; the
council chamber ; the parlia-
ment house.

Kau-mulligel lako — dat., to the
place of assembly ; to the
counoil.

Kau-mulliko — to cause to gather
together; to collect; to gather
together, as quails their yojing
or a hen her chickens.

Kau-tilliko — to assemble or col-
lect together, of themselves.

Kau-tillinun — will of themselves
assemble together.

Kauwa — imp., be ; be in such a
state. Also, Ka-wa.

Kauwa ba — be it so ; let it be in
this manner.

THE LEXICON.

215

Kauwal — great ; large ; big.

Kauwal kakilliko — to be great.

Kauwal kakulla — was great.

Kauwal-kan — one who is great ;
being great.

Kauwal-kauwal — a great many ;
intensely great ; very great.

Kail wal-kau wal-la — the many,
as the subjects.

Kauwal-kauwiil-lo — very many,
as the agents.

Kauwal koa — with (in company
with) the great...

Kauwal-la — great, as the sub-
ject ; much ; abundance.

Kauwal-lag — is great, large, or
abundant ; a great deal.

Kauwallan — does greatly...

Kauwal-lo — great, as an agent.

Kauwal loa — through the many
or great.

Kauwal loa kokeroa — through
the many houses ; through the
village, town, or city.

Kauwal-lo konaro — a great mul-
titude (as agents) did, does, or
will... (according to the tense
of the verb.)

Kauwa yanti — be it so ; be it in
this manner ; be it thus.

Ka-uwil koa yanti— in order to
be thus ; that . . . might be in
this manner.

Kau-wiyelliko — to command by
word of mouth to assemble
together; to call a coimcil ; to
summon a congregation.

Ke — sounds as ca in Ung. ' care.'

-kel — an interrogative particle.

Kea-kea— courageous, victorious.
Also, Kia-kia.

Kea-kea-md, — did cause to con-
quer ; has conquered.

Kearan — pres. tense neg., no, not.

Keawai — simjjle negation, nay ;
no ; not.

Keawai wun-ba — did not leave.

Keawai wal — determinate nega-
tion^ shall not; certainly shall
not.

Keawaran — ^;res. tense of oiega.,
no, it is not ; no; not.

Keawaran bag — denial, not T ;
I am not.

Keawaran-keawai — no ; nor.

Kenukun — the large white rock
lily ; a lily.

Kerun — complete ; i.q. kirun.

Ki — sounds as Ung. ' key.'

Kia-kia — upright ; this denotes
conquest, victory; because one
left standing upright after a
combat or battle is the victor.

Kid- — Eng., a kid.

-kil — a particle used in the infi-
nitive form of the verb 'to be.'

-killi — particle used as the aux-
iliary sign of the verb 'to be.'

-killiko — 'to be,' as an auxiliary,
to indicate the initiation of
the action implied by the verb
to which it is joined; e.g.,
bunkilliko — to proceed to
smite ; from the root bun, ' a
blow.'

Kilbuggulliko — to cause to snaji
by personal agency ; to snap,
as a piece of rope ; to break,
as a cable.

Kilburrilliko — to cause to snap
by an instrument.

Kilkulliko — to snap of itself ; to
break.

Killibinbin — clear ; unspotted ;
bright; shining; pure ; glori-
ous.

Killibinbin kaba — in a state of
shining glory ; in a pure, un-
spotted, glorious condition.

Killibinbin kakilliko — to be in
a bright, glorious state.

Killibinbin kamunbilla — imper. ,
let there be brightness, splend-
our, glory ; glory be.

21G

AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Killibinbiii koa— with (in com-

])any "vvitli) glory ; accompanied

■\vitli S[)londour or glory.
Iviloa — like ; likeness ; resemble ;

resemblance.
Ivilpaiya — did snap as a cord ;

bi'oke as a rope breaks.
Kilpaiyelliko— to snap, as a cord

snaps Avlien it breaks.
Kin — pyep., to ; to a 2)e7'son.
Kin-ba — vith; at; is at ; lucally.
Kinta — fear.
Kinta kakilliela — was afraid ;

feared and did fear ; feared.
Kinta kakilliko — to be in a

state of fear ; to fear ; to be

afraid.
Kinta kakulla — was in a state

of fear ; was afraid.
Kinta-kan — being afraid ; one

who is afraid ; a coward.
Kinta-kan-to — one who fears,

as an agent.
Kinta kora — iivp., fear not.
Kinta korien — not to fear ; no

fear.
Kinta-lag — does now fear ; is

now afraid.
Kinta nakilliko-— fearful to see.
Kinta nakilli-ta — {sing.) it is

fearful seeing ; a frightful

siglit.
Kinta nakilli-tara — (phi.) fear-
ful sights.
Kintelleun — did laugh.
Kintelliko — to laugh.
Kintellinun — Jut., will laugh.
Kintellinun v.al — will certainly

laugh ; shall laugh.
Kipai — fat ; ointment ; unction,
Kirai — a ditch ; canal.
Kirin — cpieen ; c/l, }iiriw;U.
Kiroabatoara — that which is

poured out or spilled.
Kiroabulliela — did pour out.
Kiroabullielliko — to continue to

pour out; to continue si)illing.

Kiroabulliko— to pour out all ;
to spill. Also, Kiropulliko.

Kiroabullin — now spilling.

Kiroabullinun — will pour out.

Kiroa-pa — shed ; is shed or sj)ilt.

Kirra — gently, carefully.

Kirrai — see, krai.

Kirrai-klrrai — round about.

Kirrai-kirrai ta ba — surrounded.

Kirrai-kirriii-umulliko — to cause
to go round about or revolve,
as a windmill ; to sift grain,
as with a sieve ; to bring the
chaff to the top.

Kirra-uwolliko — to seek wishing
to find ; i.q. kara-uwilliko.

Kirra-uwoUi koa — in order to
seek diligently ; that... might
seek diligently.

Kirrawolliko — to move care-
fully ; to seek diligently.

Kirrikin — clothing ; a garment
of any kind ; cloak ; veil ; cur-
tain ; covering.

Kirrikin-ta — it is the garment.

Kirrikin taba— with the raiment

Kirrikin-to — clothing (raiment,
robe), as an agent.

Kirrikin-wuntoara — the raiment
or clothes which were left.

Kirrin — light ; as, daylight.

Kirrin — pain ; fever ; agony.

Kirrin kakilliko — to bein a state
of pain (fever, agony).

Kirrin-kan — one being in pain
or suffering agony.

Kirrin-kan noa— he being in an
agony.

Kirrin katan — is in pain ; is in
a state of anguish or agony.

Kirul — green, as a young tree.

Kirun — all ; the whole.

Kirunta — a creek ; a ditch.

Kittug — hair (of the head only).

Kij'ubanun — will do with tire.

Kiyuliatoara — that which is done
with fire (roasted, broiled).

THE LEXICON.

217

Kiyubulliko — to do ■with tire ; to
roast or broil.

Kiyu-}ta-ba — done o?* destroyed
by tire ; roasted ; burned.

Kleopa — j))'.n., Cleopas.

Ivo—2)article, for the purpose of.

Koa — in order to ; that. . .might.

Koai-koai-kakiliiivO — to be strut-
ting like a turkey-cock ; to be
lifted up or proud.

Koai-koai-kan — being proud ;
one who is proud.

Koai-koai korien — not proud.

Koai-koai-umuUiko — to make
proud.

Koakillai-ta — contention ; any
strife of words.

Koakillan: — strives with words ;
does quarrel o)' rebuke.

Koakilleun — did rebuke, itc.

Koakillicla — did rebuke.

Koakilliko — to scold; toquarrel;
to contend ; to rebuke.

KoakuUa — rebuked.

Koatan — swears at. [at.

Koatelliko — to curse ; to swear

Koawa — im])., chide ; rebuke.

Koba — of or belonging to any
tiling ; -umba — of or belong-
ing to any 'person.

KobAna — Eng., governor.

Kobana kinko — dat. 2, to the
governor.

Koba-toara — that v/hich is in
possession ; that which is ob-
tained.

Koiro — an herb.

Koito — therefore; for; because ;
consequently.

Koito-ba — therefore as ; because
it is so.

Koito noa ba — for as he... ; for
when he. . . ; because he

Koiwon — rain.

Koiwon tanan ba — as the rain
approaches.

Koiy:i — murmured ; repined.

Koiyelliko — to murmur ; to re-
pine ; to rebuke.

Koiyelli koa — in order to re-
buke; that... might rebuke.

Koiyug — fire.

Koi^^ug ka — in the fire ; is in
the fire.

Koiyug kako — in (into) the fire.

Koiyug-ko — fire, as an agent.

Koiyiin — shyness ; shame.

Koiyun-bara-toaro — down ash-
amed ; to be abased.

Koiyim-batoara^that which is
become ashamed.

Koiyuu kakilliko — to be in a
state of shame ; to be ashamed.

Koiyunkanun — will be a.shamed.

Kokera — habitation ; hut ; shel-
ter ; tent ; tabernacle; house;
palace ; temple.

Kokera — dat., at or in the house,
temple, itc,

Kokera birug — away from out
of) the house.

Kokera ka — dat. 1, to the house.

Kokera kolag — dat. 2, towards
the house.

Kokera karig — all the houses ;
the whole of the houses ; the
tillage, town, city.

Kokera kolag kokerd kolag — to-
wards the houses ; from house
to house.

Kokeratin — the master (ownei-,
landlord) of the house.

Kokeratin-to — the master of the
house, as an agent.

Kokeroa — through the house.

Kokerrin — from (on account of)
the house.

Kokoi-kokoi — surrounde;d; in-
closed.

Kokoin — fresh wa,ter ; cf. bato.

Kokoin-kan — one having water;
po.ssessing water ; dropsical.

Kokoin-kan-to — a dropsical per-
son, as an agent.

218

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Kokoiii-kan warakag — one filled

with water ; one having the

dropsy.
Kokoin kolag — to (towards) the

water ; going to water.
Kokug — an indigenous fig; a fig.
Kolag — towards ; now about to.
Kolbi — sound ; noise ; roar.
K61bi-lag-bulliko — to make a

sound 0?" noise ; to roar.
K')lbi-lag-bullin — now making a

noise or sounding; I'oaring as

the wind or sea.
Kolbiinti korien — not to chop.
Kolbiintia — chopped ; reaped.
Kolbiintilla — imp., cut down.
Kolbuntilliko — to chop, as with

an axe ; to hew ; to mow ; to

reap with a hook or any other

thing that cuts or chops ; to

cut with a sword.
K61buntillin — jyres. jjart., chop-
ping ; hewing ; reaping.
Kolbuntillinun — will choj), &c.
K61buntinun — will chop, etc.
Kolbuntinun-wal — sliall cut ;

will certainly cho^D.
Koli — Avater; cf. kori and hato.
Komarra — shade ; a shadow.
Kom6nba — a drop or clot.
K6g — sounds as the Eng. 'gong,'

but with the o long.
K6gka— a reed.
K6gg6g, k6g6g — the noise made

by any person sound asleep ;

hence, to be overpowered with

sleep.
K6g6g-kan — being sleepy ; one

who sleeps.
K6g6g-kan-to — one who sleeps,

being the agent.
K6n — sounds as the Eng. 'cone,'

but rather longer, laying the

accent on the o.
Konara — tribe ; host; company ;

assemblage ; family ; army ;

herd ; nation.

Konarrin — from the tribe, as a
cause ; because of the tribe,
company, assemblage, (tc.

Konein — good to look at; pretty ;
handsome ; noble in appear-
ance.

Konein kakilliko — to be in a
beautiful state ; to be pretty;
to be handsome ; to be gar-
nished.

Konein kako — to being pretty.

Konein-kan — one who is pi'etty ;
being handsome.

Konein-ta — it is pretty, etc.

Konein-tara — the pretty things.

Konein-tar6 — the ^^^^^ty (per-
sons or things), as agents.

Konein-to — pretty, as an agent.

Koin — an unknown being of
great power, of whom the ab-
origines are very much afraid.

K6n-ta — that person, as an agent.

Kun-to-ka — that person as an
agent is...

Konug — -dung ; excrement.

Konug-gel — the place of dung ;
a dunghill.

Konug- g^l ko — for the dunghill.

Kora — a inandntonj proliihition ;
e.g., kinta kora, 'fear not.'

Koradhin — j^r.n., Chorazin.

Korakal — see korokal.

Kora koa — interrogative of nega-
tion, why not?

Korarig — a lonely place.

Korea — ceased action ; rested.

Koribibi — strong, rushing, vio-
lent ; as a stream of water or
the tide of the sea.

Korien — denial, not.

Korilliko — to cease action ; to
rest ; to be still.

KorimA — did cleanse ; baptised.

Korimaniin — will use water to
cleanse ; will baptise.

Korimulliela — being cleansed
or baptised.

THE LEXICON.

219

Korimulli-kan— one who cleanses
with water ; a baptist.

KorimuUikanne — baptism.

Koriuiullikan-ta — the baptism.

Korimulliko — to use water in
any way ; cleanse with water ;
cf. kori, koli. ' water ': mulliko
means ' to do with ' ; hence
korimulliko is used to mean
' to baptize,' in any form.

Koriniulli koa — that ... might
cleanse with water ; that . . .
might baptise.

Koro-ka— concealed ; was hidden.

Korokal — old, worn out ; said of
clothes or property, not of
persons.

Koro-kakilliko — to be in a state
of concealment ; to hide one's
self ; to be concealed.

Korokal la— <:/«<., to the old.

Korokul katea-kanim — will be
again old.

Korowa — the sea ; the waves of
the sea.

Korowa tarig — the sea coast ;
the seaside ; the coast.

Korug — the inland part of the
country ; the interior ; the
bush ; the wilderness.

Korug-ka —in the wilderness ;
in the bush ; in the interior.

Korug kabirug — from (out of,
away from) the bush ; from
the country ; from the in-
terior.

Korug tin — fi'om (on account of)
the wilderness, as a cause.

Korun — still ; .silent ; calm.

K6t — Eng., coat.

K6t-kan — one having a coat.

Kota — thought ; did think.

Kota ba — when (if)... did think.

Kota-ban kora — mand. (partici-
pial form), cease thinking.

Kota-bumbilliko — to permit to
cause to think : to let think.

Kota-bunbea — allowed to cause
thought ; did astonish ; made
astonished.

Kota korien — thought not.

Kotan — thinks ; does think.

Kotanun — -fut-, will think.

Kotatoara — thought ; the thing
which is thought.

Kotayikora — mand. (the verbal
form) do not think ; think not;
take no thought.

Kotara — an aboriginal instru-
ment of war called by the
Europeans 'a waddy ''; a cud-
gel, made of iron wood, stout
in the middle but tapering to
a point.

Kotara-kan — one having a cud-
gel.

Kotaru — the cudgel, as an
agent j with or by the cudgel.

Kotella — mandatory (the verbal
form), do think : remember ;
reflect.

Kotellan — does think.

Kotelleim — aor., did, does, will
think ; thought ; thinks.

Kotellia — mand. (the participial
form), think; be thinking; re-
member ; reflect; meditate.

Kotelliela — thought ; did think ;
was thinking.

Kotellielliko — to think and con-
tinue to think ; to be thinking.

Kotellikanne — the thing which
is thought ; imagination ; idea.

Kotelliko — to think ; to be in
thought.

Kotellin — ^;xw<. ^»-es., the action
of thought ; thinking.

Kotelli-ta — the thought.

Koti — a kinsman 0?' a neighbour;
a friend ; a guest.

Koti — personally belonging to
self ; own-self ; e.g. , giroiimba
koti, 'thine own-self.'

220

AX AUSriiALIAX LANGUAGE.

Koti bula umullan — the two be-
came friends again ; lit., the
two were caused to be akin.

Koti kabirug — from (out of) the
the self-same.

K(3ti kakilliko— to be near of
kin ; a kinsman, friend, neigh-
bour.

K(3ti-ta — {'iing.) the kinsman or
neighbour; friend; guest.

Koti-tara — [phi.) the kinsfolk ;
kinsmen; neighbours; friends.

Krai — the west ; westward ; in-
land ; i.q. kirrai. [west.

Krai tin — from (because of) the

Kritht — py.n., Clu'ist.

Kritht-ta — it is the Christ ; the
Christ, emphatic.

-kill — ^?«r^2We 'jiiasc, belonging
to any locality ; i.q, -kal.

-k'llin — part, /em., belonging to
any locality ; i.q. -kalin.

Kiilai — wood ; timber ; a tree of
any kind.

Kulla — because, for.

-kuUa — postfix jMrticle, the sign
of an aorist tense ; e.r/., ka, 'to
be'; ka-kulla, ' was.'

Kullabulliko — to cut round ; to
circumcise.

Kullaburra — shining ; glorious;
bright ; resplendent ; glory.

Kulla wal — because certainly ;
surely.

Kulla-wal-lea— because certainly
...has or did.

Kulleug, kulliug — the neck.

Kulligtiela — cut ; did cut.

Kulligtielliko — to cut, as with a
knife or some such cutting
instrument.

Kullimulliko — to make use of
the toe ; hence, to climb ; be-
cause the blacks cut notches
in the bark, and, to ascend
the trunk of a tree, place the
toe therein.

Kulliwa — climbed ; did climb.

Kullo — cheek.

Kulwon — stiff", as a corpse.

Kinn — soundsas^'n^. 'come': c/.*

Kumara- — blood.

Kumara-kan — a bloody person.

K iim ba — t o-m orro w,

Kumba-ken-ta — the period of
time after to-morrow ; the day
after to-morrow ; the third day.

Kumbarapaiyelliko — to be trou-
blesome, clamorous, noisy.

Kumbarawan — does trouble, as
by some movement or bustle.

Kumbarawilliko — to trouble or
tease ; to worry.

Kumiri — a shady })lace ; a hole
in a rock ; a cave.

Kummari — northward ; north.

Kummari tin — from the north.

Kiimmulliko — to cai:se trouble,
anxiety ; to be anxious.

Ku mmullan — troubled; anxious.

Kim — for its sound cf.*.

Kunbuntea — did smite with a
knife or a sword ; cut ; smote.

Kunbuntilliko — to cut with a
knife ; to smite with a sword
or any similar edged instru-
ment, [be.

Kiui koa — lest. . .should or might

Kunta — nest ; the nest of a bird.

Kunto — food ; vegetable food, as
bread, but not animal food.

Kunto-kan — one having food ;
one possessed of food.

Kuri— man ; mankind ; men.

Kiiri koba — belonging to men ;
of mankind ; of man (si>iy. or
2}hi.).

Kiiri koba ko — dat., to man's.

Kurinio — Gr. j;r.«., Cyrenius.

Kiiri tin — from man, as a cause ;
on account of man.

Kiiri willug-gel — the men of this
place ; those of this genera-
tion.

THE LEXICOX.

221

Kurr — sounds as E)i(j. ' cur.'
Kurrag — froth ; foam.
Kurrag-to — froth, a.s an agent.
Kurragtoanbuggulliko — to cause

by personal agency to foam.
Kurragtoanl )ugg;i — was caused

to foam ; foamed.
Kurrai-kurrai — to turn round ;

to go round about ; to roll.
Kurraka — the mouth; entrance;

doorway ; gateway.
Kurraka birug — from (nut of)

the mouth, kc.
Kui'rarakai — be quick ; haste ye;

i.q. karakai.
Kurrauwai — long ; length.
Ivurrawitai-kan — being clothed

with long raiment ; robed.
Kurrea — carried ; did cany.
Kurri — hrst ; cf. kai'a.
Kurri birug ko — from (out of)

the first ; from the first.
Kurri g — any.
Kurrig tin — from (on account

of) any.
Kurrikog- — the first-born male ;

cf. karakog, the elder brother.
Kurri koricn — not to carry ;

carries not ; bears not.
Kurri-kurri — intensive, the very

first ; the beginning.
Kurri-kurri ka — is the first.
Kurri-kurri kabirug — from the

first ; from the l)eginning.
Kurri-kurri-to — the first, as an

agent.
Kirrilliela — bore ; was carrying.
Kurrilli-gel — the place of carry-
ing; the carrying places, as the

railway.
Kurrilliko — to carry ; to bear.
Kurrin — choked ; suffocated ;

stifled ; drowned.
Kurrin — carries, 1>ears, brings

forth ; cf. karin.
Kurrinanbai — dau"hter-in-hiw.

Kurri-u^\ 11 koa — in order that. ..
might carry.

Kurriwulliko — to carry away :
to bear away.

Kurri yikora — mand., carry not.

Kurrol — perspiration ; sweat.

Kuth:i — jir.n., Chusa.

Kuttawai — satiety ; intoxica-
tion ; drunkenness ; gluttony ;
giddiness.

Kuttawai-ban — one who satiates ;
a glutton ; a drunkard.

Kuttawai-kan — one who is in a
state of satiety.

Kuttawaiko — to be satiated with
food or drink : drunkenness ;
glutton}'.

Kuttawai kolag — to be about to
satiate with food or drink.

Kuttawaiye — one whose manner
is habitually that of being-
satiated ; one habitually a
drunkard or a glutton.

Kuttawan — satiated.

L — pronounced as Eng, ' ell.'
La — is sounded as ixiEnc/. 'large.'
Ladharo — pr.n., Lazarus.
Latin — pr.n., Latin.
Latiniimba — belonging to the

Latin people or language.
Le — rhymes with A'»^. ' lay.'
Lebben — Eng., leaven.
Lebben kiloa — like leaven.
Lebben korien koba — not having

leaven ; unleavened.
Lebi — 2)r.n., Levi.
Lebi-kid — a Levite.
Lebi-ko — Levi, as the agent.
Lejun — Eng., legion.
Lepro — Eng., leprosy.
Lepro-kan — one Iteing in a state

of leprosy ; leprous ; a leper.
Lepro-ta — leprosy, as a sulyect ;

the leprosy.

222

AN AUSTHALIAN LANGUAGE.

Leptoii — G'y'., a small coin : a

mite.
Lepton-ta — a mite ; it is a mite.
Lo — sounds as Eng. 'lo'!
Lot — pr.n., Lot.
Lotiimba — belonging to Lot.
Luka — Gr. pr.n., Luke.
Luka-iimba — beloniring to Luke.
Luthania- -^7-. ». , Lysanias.

]M

Ma — imjj., do (a challenge).

-ma — an auxil. particle denoting
the 2>erf. j}ost aorist, did; done

-ma korien — did not ; not done.

Mabogun — a widow.

Mabogun koba — belonging to a
widow ; a widow's.

Magdala-kalin — [fern.), a woman
of Magdala ; Magdalene.

Mai — sounds as Eng. 'my.'

Maiya — a snake ; a serpent (the
genus).

Makoro-ban — one who fishes \ a
fisherman.

Makoro — fish (the genus).

Makoro — fish, as an agent.

Makoro birug — away from fish ;
a piece of a fish.

Makorrin — from fish, as a cause ;
on account of fish.

Malma — lightning.

Mamuya — a ghost, the spirit of a
departed person ; not the spirit
of a living person, which is ma-
rai ; cf. Marai {not mamuya)
Yirri-yirri ' the Holy Ghost.'

Man — sounds as Eng., 'man.'

-man — as a particle, denotes tlte
■present tense of the verb cau-
sative.

Mankilli-gel — the place of tak-
ing or receiving, as the counter
of a shop ; the bank ; the
treasury.

Mankilli-kan — one who takes in
hand ; a doer ; a .servant.

Mankilliko — to take in hand ; to
do ; to receive.

Mankilli kolag — about to take
• in hand.

Mankillin — now taking ; hold-
ing ; doing ; receiving.

Manki-ye — one who is a habitual
taker ; a thief.

Mankiye-ko — to (againsf:) a thief.

Mankiye nukug-ka — a taker of
women ; a woman stealer ; an
adulterer.

Manki yikora — jirolnh. imp., do
not steal ; do not take.

Man korien — it<'g-, did not take.

MankuUa — have taken in hand ;
did take ; took.

Man pa — privative of effect, un-
able to take ; could not ac-
complish the taking hold of.

Mantala — did take, at some
former period.

Mantan — does take hold of.

Mantillea — imjo., take it.

Mantilliko — to take ; to receive.

M antill in — now recei ving.

Mantillinun wal — will certainly
take; it shall be taken.

Mantoara — that which is taken,
received or held ; the deposit ;
the theft.

Manumbilla — imp., permit to
take ; let take.

Manumbilliko — to allow to take ;
to let take.

Manim — fut., will take.

Manun wal — will certainly take ;
shall take.

Mara — imp., take; do take ; take
hold ; receive.

Marai — spirit; soul of a living be-
ing not a gho.st ; which is ma-
muya.

Marai-kan — one who is a spirit ;
having a spirit.

THE LEXICON.

3Iavai-kan-to — one possessing a

spirit, acting as an agent.
Marai koba — belonging to the

spirit or soul ; of the spirit.
Marai-marai — actively engaged

doing something; busy; busily

employed.
Marai nuriinba — spirits belong-
ing to you ; your spirits; your

souls.
Marai-to — the spirit, as an agent.
IMarai yirri-yirri — the spirit sa-
cred ; the Holy Spirit.
Marallia — imp. , continue to take;

receive.
Maratha — py. n. , Martha.
Mara-uwil — opt., that may

take.
Mara-uwil koa — siihj., in order

that... might take or receive.
Mari — ^jr.w., Mary.
Maro — an indigenous thorn ; a

thorny bush ; a bramble.
Mata-ye — one habitually given

to greediness ; a glutton. Also,

Matayei.
Mataye-koa-katea-kun — lest any

greediness (gluttony, surfeit-
ing) should be.
Mattara — the hand.
Mattarrin — from (on account) of

the hand ; by the hand, as an

instrument.
Mattar6 — the hand, as the agent;

with the hand.
Mattaroa — - with (accompanied

with or through) the hand, as

an instrument.
Matti — dual, acts together; did

together,
-mau — rhymes with Eng. ' cow.'
-ma-u^the causative particle in

the optative and subjunctive

form of the verb.
Meapa — recently cultivated or

planted.

Meapala — aor. def., ])lanted, at
some certain time past.

Meapulla — planted; did plant.

Meapullia — imp., plant ; do
plant.

Meapulliko — -to j)lant, set, cul-
tivate.

Me — sounds as in Eng. ' may.'

Mentha — Led., mint.

Mi — is sounded as Eng. ' me.'

Mikan — presence ; fronting ; in
the face of ; before.

Mikan -ta — the presence.

Mikan tako — in the pi^esence of ;
before.

Mimti — did cause to stay.

Mimulliko— to detain ; to urge
to stay.

Min — sounds as Eng. 'mien.'

Minn — sounds as in Eng. 'mint.'

Mina — Gr., a pound.

Minarig ? — what %

Minarig-bo 1 — what very thing 1

Minarigbo — any selfsame thing ;
anything.

Minarig-ke? — what isl what arel

Minarig tin ? — what from, as a
cause 1 wherefore 1 from wdiat
cause ? why ?

Minbilliko — to crush ; to g)-ind.

Minbinun — will grind.

Minbiniin wal — will certainly
crush or grind ; shall grind.

Minka — imi?., wait.

Minkea — remained; waited.

Minki — any mental or moi-al
feeling ; the feeling of sym-
pathy ; sorrow ; compassion ;
penitence ; patience ; repent-
ance ; pondering.

Minki kabirug — from (out of)
such a feeling.

Minki kakilliela — was sympath-
ising.

Minki kakilliliela — was and con-
tinued to sympathise or feel
penitent, &c.

22-t

AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAGE.

^liiiki kakilliko — to be in a state
of inward feeling ; to sym-
patliise; to sorrow ; to mourn;
to be penitent.

Minki kakulla — sympatliisetl ;
liave sympathised.

jMinki-kan — one who .sympath-
ises or feels sorry and repents.

Minki-kanne— sympatliy ; any
inward feeling ; repentance.

Minki-kanne-ta— sympathy it is ;
the sympathy.

Minki kanan — will sympathise
(sorrow, repent).

Minki katan — sympathises ; re-
pents.

Minki koricn — v/ithout feeling.

Minki-lag — sympathises ; feels
sorrow ; repents.

Minki lliko — to wait (.stay, dwell)

Minkin — waits ; dwells ; dehiys.

Minnan ! — what are actually pre-
sent \ how many % how much %

Minnug ? — what things, as the
object"?

Minnug-ljan ? — what thing now
about (I, wc, you, ic.)

Minnug-banun'2 — what will...
do % what will be done ?

Minnug-baniin-kan ] — vdiat now
will some one do ?

jMinnug-baniui wal ? — wliat Aviil
...certainly do ? what shall be
done ?

Minnugbo or minnambo — some-
thing ; anything ; somewhat.

Minnugbo - minnugbo — many
things; everything ; all things.

Minnug-bulliela 1 — what was go-
ing on 1 what was doing %

Mimiug-bulliko — (an interroga-
tive form of the verb) what
is doing? what is going on %

Minnug-bulli kolag — about to do
sometliing.

Minnug-lndlinun? — w]:at will be
"oinsj; on or doing.

Mipparai — honeycomb.

jNlipparai kabirug — from (out of)
honeycomb.

jNIirka — perliaps ; ''i.([. murka.

Mirka-ta — perhaps it is.

Mirkin — vii'ginity ; purity.

IMirkun — pure ; clean.

Mirobunbiiiia — imper. and per-
missive, permit to continue to
take care of or save.

Mironni — took care of ; did
keep ; did save.

Mii'oma-bunbilla — imp. , permit
to take care of or save.

Miromanim — will take care of ;
will save ; will occupy.

Miroma pa — privntive, did (not)
take cai'e of ; without care of.

Miromulla — imj)., take charge
of, if necessary.

Miromullia — imj)., continue to
take care of ; save and con-
tinue to save.

Miromulli-kan — one who takes
charge of (watches over, saves
from harm) ; a saviour.

Miromulliko — to take charge of;
to take care of; to watch over ;
to keep ; to save from harm.

Mirral — desolate; unproductive ;
barren ; poor.

Mirralla, muruUa — a maid; hav-
ing no husband ; l)arren; poor.

Mirral kaiko — for the miserable.

Mirral-lo— the poor and destitute,
as agents.

Mirral-mirral-kan— one who is in
a miserable state ; poor ; des-
titute.

Mirrigil — ready ; prepared to
remove or to go a journey.

Mirro-mirronni — rubbed and con-
continued to rub.

Mirromulliko — to rub.

Mirug — the shoulder.

Mirug ka — on the shoulder.

Mita — a sore.

THE LEXICON.

225

Mita-mitag — .soi-es ; full of sores.
INIittea — waited ; did wait.
Mitti — small; little; alittleoiie;

tlie youngest child.
j\Iitti — the youngest son.
Mitti-ko — the youngest son, as

the agent.
]Mittiiliela — waited and con-
tinued to wait ; vvas waiting ;

waited ; stayed ; remained.
]\Iittilliko — to wait or remain.
Mittillin — nov/ waiting.
Miya — hindered ; prevented.
Miyelliko — to hinder.
Moiya — cool.
jNLoiya koa — in order to cool ;

that... might cool. [fare.

jMokal — arms ; weapons of war-
IMoney — Eny., money.
Moni-gel— money -puice ; a purse ;

a bank.
Moni-ko — money, as the agent.
Morig — a particle ; a very small

bit ; a mote ; dust.
Moroko — the sky ; the visible

heavens ; heaven.
Moroko kaba — is in heaven.
Moi'oko kabirug — from (away

from) the sky ; from heaven.
]Moroko kako — in or to liea\en.
Moroko koba — belonging to the

sky or heaven.
Moroko lin — from (on account)

of heaven, as a cause ; from

heaven ; of heaven.
Moron — life.

Moron-ba — lives ; is alive.
Moron-ba-katea-kan iin — will be

alive again ; will live again.
Moron kakilliko — to be in a liv-
ing state ; to be alive ; to live.
Moron-kan ta — they (he) who

are alive ; the living.
Moron kanun — v^'ill be alive ;

will live.
Moron katan — is iix the state

of living ; is alive ; lives.

Moron ko — for life.

Moron koa katea-kiin — lest...
should be alive again ; lest
...should be saved alive.

Moron-ta katea-kaniin — life will
be again ; the life is to be
again. [life.

Moron tin — from (on account of)

Moron tin katan — from (o\\ ac-
count of) being alive.

Mot — sounds as Eng. ' mote.'

Mothe — pr.n., Moses.

Mothe-ko — Moses, as the agent.

Mothe-to — Moses, as the agent.

Mothe-to noa — Moses he, as the
agent,

Mothe-unil)a— - belonging to M

Motilliela — did smite on the
breast.

Motilliko — to smite the breast.

Mu — sounds as in Eng. 'moon.'

Mug — rhymes with Enj. 'bung.'

Mugga-ma — did wrap up.

Mugga-ma-toara — that which is
wrapped up or swaddled.

Muggamulliko--to cause to be
covered ; to wrap up in sof*
'ti'-tree bark as clothing ; to
swaddle ; to swathe.

Mukkaka — the noise which a
bird utters; to cackle; to crow.

Mukkakaka tibbinto — the crow
of a cock.

Mukkin — the form of address to
a young female ; maid ■

Mularea-kan — one wounded by
an instrument ; one caused to
become v.^ounded by an in-
strument.

Mulug — close by; nigh at hand.

Midug kakilliela — was and con-
tinned to be close by.

Mulug kakilliko — to be near.

Mum — for its sound cf. *.

Mumbilla — imp., lend ; do lend.

Mumbillan — does lend.

Mumbillein — lent ; did lend.

•226

AN AUSTRALIAN LANG U AGE.

Munibilliko — to loiul.
Munil)inun — will lend.
Mumbitoara — that which is lent;

the loan ; the deht.
Mupai — fast, shut, silent, dumb.
Mupai kakilliko — to be fast, as

the mouth ; to be silent or

dumb ; to hold your peace.
Mupai kakillinun — will be fast

or dumb; will be silent.
Mupai kakulla — was fast ; was

silent ; held their peace.
MxTpai umulliko — to cause to be

silent or dumb.
Mur — sounds as 7nur in Eng.

' murder,' but the r is rougher.
Mur — soundsas^n^. 'moor'; cf*
Marka — see mirka.
Murkun — pure ; clean ; free of

superfluity ; cf. mirkun.
Muron — ointment.
Murra — ran ; did run.
Murra~to run ; to flee away.
Murrabunbilliko — to let run.
Murrabunbilla — imj).., let run.
Murrai — good ; well ; patient ;

in a general sense ; cf. mur-

roi and murrarag.
Murrai-kakillikanne — the thing

which is in a state of well-
being; happy, if in prosperity;

patient, if in adversity.
Murrai-kakilliko — to be good ;

to be well pleased; to be happy.
Murrakin — a young female ;

maiden ; virgin ; cf. mukkin.
Murrakin-to — a young female, as

the agent.
Murrapatoara — that which is run

out ; anything numbered.
Murrapullikanne — the taxation ;

the thing that counts or num-
bers.
Murrapulliko — to run out ; to

number ; to tax each one.
Murrarag — good; right; just;

proper.

Murra-murrarag — intfns., very
good ; excellent.

Murrarag kakilli-kan — one who
is and continues to be in a good
state ; one who is righteous ;
a righteous one.

Murrarag kakillikanne — any-
thingthat is good or righteous ;
righteousness.

Murrarag kakilliko — to be in a
good state ; to be well off or
happy.

Murrai-ag koiyelliela — worship-
ped.

Murrarag koiyelliko — tobegood,
in manner ; to worship.

Murra r;\g-tai — the good, indefi-
nitely ; the just ; the righteous.

Murrarag-ta — a good thing.

Murrarog-tara — good things.

Murrarag wiyelliela — was say-
ing good; was praising.

Murrarag wiyelliko — to speak
good ; to praise.

Murrarig — within ; into ; inside.

Murriug — forward ; onward.

Murriug kolag — about to go for-
ward.

Murrin — the body ; cf mavai
— the soul ; the spirit.

Murrinauwai — a floating vessel ;
canoe ; boat ; ship ; the ark.

Murrin kiloa — like a body.

Murrin ko — for the body.

Murrin tin — from (on account
of) the body, as an instru-
mental cause.

Murrin-murrin — frequent ; very
often ; often-times.

Murrog-kai — a sort of wild dog,
like a fox.

Murroi — peaceful ; at his ease ;
in peace ; i.q. murrai ; cf.
also murrarag.

Miirrulliko — to run away ; to
flee.

Murrug — within ; in ; locally.

THE LEXICOX.

227

Murrug ka — is within; is inside.

MuiTug ka temple la — is inside
or within the temple.

Murrug-ka-ma — pressed upon.

Murrug-kamulliko — to cause to
let be overcome, as water runs
within and overcomes ; to let
be choked or drowned.

Murrug-ka-ma — was caused to
let be overcome or smothered ;
was choked.

Murrug kolag — about to £;o in.

Muta-mut;in — powder ; dust.

Mutard — E)ig., mustard.

Mutug — a crumb; a small [)iece;
a bit ; a mote.

Note. — Tliis Lexicon is incoiaiylete ; the author was inorking
on it at the time of his death. — Ed.

PART lY.

THE APPENDIX.

APPENDIX

(A.)

A SHORT
GRAMMAPt AND VOCABULARY

OP THE

DIALECT SPOKEN BY THE MINYUG PEOPLE,

on the north-east coast of New South Wales.
(By the Rev. H. Livingstone, Wimmera, Victoria.*)

I. THE GRAMMAR.

The Miny ug dialect is spoken at Byron Bay and on the Bruns-
wick River. The natives on the Richmond River have a sister
dialect called the Nyug ; those on the Tweed call their own
Q-ando or Grandowal, but the Mi nyug they call G-endo. The
words minyug and nyug mean 'what"? or 'something,' for
they are used either interrogatively or assertively. Similarly, the
words gando and gendo mean 'who'? or 'somebody.' These
three dialects are so closely related that they may be regarded as
one language ; it is understood from the Clarence River in New
South Wales northward to the Logan in Queensland. For this
language the aborigines have no general name.

It is well known that the Australian dialects are agglutinative,
everything in the nature of inflection being obtained by suffixes.
To this, the Minyug is no exception ; so that, if I give an account
of its suffixes, that is nearly equivalent to giving an exposition of
its grammar. It will, therefore, be convenient to take, first, such
suffixes as are used with the noun and its equivalents, and, after-
wards, those that may be regarded as verbal suffixes. The words
that take what may be called the noun-suffixes are (1) Nouns,
(2) Adjectives, and (3) Pronouns.

NOUNS and ADJECTIVES.
As the same general principles apply to both nouns and adjec-
tives, these may be examined together as to (1) Classification,
(2) Number, (3) Gender, (4) Suffixes.

* Written for this volume at my request. — Ed.

4 an austkalian language.

1. Classification.
Nouns in Minyug may be arranged tlius : —
Life-nouns.

(1.) Persons (y.'irtsc.) ; all proper and common names of males.
(2.) Persons {/em.) ; all proper and common names of females.
(3.) Animals ; all otlier living creatures.

Non-life nouns.
(1.) Names of things. (2.) Names of places.

I divide them into life-nouns or nouns denoting living beings,
and no7i-li/e notuis or names of things and places, because the
former often join the suffixes to lengthened forms of the nouns,
while the non-life nouns have the suttixes attached to the simple
nominative form. Again, subordinate divisions of both of these
classes is necessary, because the adjectives and pronouns often vary
in form according as they are used to qualify names of human
beings, or animals, or thing's.

A few examples will make this plainer. If a man who speaks
Minyug is asked Avhat is the native word for 'big' or 'large,' he
replies, kumai. This kumai is the plain or vocabulary form,
which may be used on all occasions to qualify any kind of word.
But if a native is speaking of a 'large spear,' he will usually say
kuminna cuan. Either kumai or kuminna will suit, but the
longer form is more common; kuminna is used only to qualify
such things as spears, canoes, and logs, and never to qualify persons
and places. If a native is speaking of a ' big man,' Avhile he
might say kumai paigal, the usual form is kumai -bin, which
is then a noun ; but since all nouns can also be used as adjectives, the
longer form kumai-bin paigal is also correct. To express, in
Minyug, 'that boy is big,' we might say either kully kumai-
bin cub bo, or cubbo kumai. The feminine form of kumai
is kumai-na-gun, which is only the suffix -g\in added to the
form in -na ; like kumai-bin, this is either a noun, when it
means ' a big woman,' or an adjective used to qualify a feminine
noun. The suffix -gun is sometimes added to the plain form ; as,
mobi, 'blind,' mobi-gun, fein. ; sometimes to the masculine
form ; as, balig-gal, 'new,' 'young,' ball g-gal -gun, feni. ; and
sometimes to the form in -na ; as, kumai-na-gun. Some adjec-
tives have only two forms, while others have three, four, and even
five. In some cases diffigrent words are used, instead of different
forms of the same word. The principal suffixes used for the mas-
culine are, -bin, -gin, -jara, -rim, -ri, -li, -gari, -gal. The
table given below, for ordinary adjectives, adjective pronouns,
and numerals, illustrates these uses. Forms rarely used have a f
after them.

THE MIXYUNG DIALECT.

3 «

*

7 to

C cJ

2:5

•^ c § • s 2 ? 2

7 SD

• "i " d 'rt 7 Ec-^ ^ i

0

d v

S ce

''^'■S

0 1 -ic ^ ^ .S ;b]oT -"^ -£

5 -^

? J

il

0

\4

0 "3

• rt

rt

C.0

to 3

•tb J '^

C o

P "i^ . 'o

'>i-§

-J '-^ -rS — c:

■^•p-ad-s^^-d-a^?!

5

^:;=po 2^ =''cs ^^

j^

"3 '3

1

^cqMw^^MwMS

\4

S W

^fq

o

fa

^

r- -^

! forn

3 llOU

=3 5:0 So - i P ^" ^ :=!

tJO

2f g

"I.I

■5^3

•:i 7 ;5 rt ^ S tfc if sf^

rt

5 .3

7 "7^

ik

-2 '-'

II

3 s

3

'S '3

cS S

fe

M

^W

c

n 0

0 a

s . . -i^ 'i^

c3

."

^ s

• "^ '3 S --^ 'cT' ~ ^

•3

^'^^-l

^'3

0 to

IS

M ;q ^ p; ;^ ^ pq t:^ S ^

w

1 3

-ti

0

"c

^

• ^

?~l

0

rt

0

0

,J2

to

^ Ph • bb

F^

-fj

03

• -1^ '^-•

.^

-• cS - . 2

9 <A 9

•^ ,

^

. S 1^ J f 0 ^

"+3

p

^ 2

ill'l ^

0*

^

■i-dii3.=;-i.:-:f 1

^i?

0 .- ^ 5

^ >, c >> s

HH

P:^o5r;:jP73so3 ?

^3

^3 - '3 J

J '^ '-'

t^pt^p;>^MmM^M f£

M

g W fe

.>^M

6 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Tlie adjective dukkai, 'dead,' takes numerous forms; thus : —
2. dukkai, dukkai-ljiuf; 3. touara-gun, dukkai-gunf, dukkai-bin-
gunf, dukkai-gun-binf; 4. dukkai, dukkai-binf.

2. Number.

Nouns and adjectives do not change tlieir form to denote number.
The word paigal may mean one 'man,' or any number of ' men.'
With regard to the pronouns, some of them are singular, some
dual, some plural, and some of them indefinite so far as number is
concerned. The number of a noun is generally known by the iise
in the same sentence, or in the context, of a singulai', dual, or
plural pronoun, or by the scope of the sentence or other surround-
ing circumstances.

3. Gender,

There ai'e two ways by which the feminine is distinguished from
the masculine — either by a difterent word or by adding the ter-
mination -gun, of which the ?f is always short ; as : —

Masculine. Ftmiuinc

Mobi, 'a blind man.' Mobi-gun, ' a blind woman.'

Y^rubilgin, 'a male singer.' Yerubilgin-gun, 'a female singer.'

Kicom, 'old man.' Merrug, ' old woman.'

Cubbo, 'boy.' Yagari, 'girl.'

Koroman, male 'kangaroo.' Imarra, female 'kangaroo.'

riWNOUA'S.

These are : — (1) Personal pronouns, (2) Demonstrative.s, (3)
Indefinite pronouns, (4) Numerals, and 5) Interrogatives.

Personal jn'onoicns.

Singular. Gai, 'I.' We, 'thou.' Nyuly, 'he'; nyan, '.she.'

Plural. Grully, ' we.' Buly, ' you.' (?annaby, 'they.'

The Minyug has no simple dual, although there are compound
terms and phrases denoting the dual number; such as, gulliwe,
gullibula, 'we two'; we gerrig, 'you two,' 'you and another.'
The personal forms of bula are sometimes used as dual pro-
nouns; as, bulaily, 'they two,' ?»asc., and buiaili-gun, 'they
two, /em. ; and even such phrases as w6 gerrig bulaily and we
gerrig bulaili-gun, ' you two,' are used.

Demonstratives.

Besides these, there is a peculiar class of words, which may be
called demonstratives. When used as predicates, they have the
general meaning of 'here,' ' there,' or 'yonder.' They are often
used as demonstrative adjectives, and then mean this,' ' that

THE MINYUNG DIALECT.

'these,' 'those.' A.s such, they usually agree iii fonn with the nouns
which they qualify, that is, they take similar suffixes. Often,
however, the noun is omitted, and then they become true personal
jironouns, retaining whatever suffix they would have if the noun
were used. For examjile, the Avord kully, used as a predicate,
means 'here'; as, paigal kully, 'a man is here'; but paigal kully
yilyul means 'this man is sick'; and, omitting paigal, kully
yilyul means 'he is .sick'; kully thus means 'here'; 'this'; 'the';
'he here'; 'she here'; and 'it here.'

Such words are real demonstratives, and must be carefully dis
distinguished from ordinary adverbs of place ; for, often an adverb
of place i.s, as it were, promoted to the rank of a demonstrative,
and in this way it may come to take the place of a personal pro-
noun. This may account for the fact that the third personal
pronouns are so numerous, and have little or no etymological con-
nection in Australian dialects. These demonstratives are kully,
mully, killy, kunde, kanyo, miin, kam, kaka, ka, and kaba.
As these are sometimes doubled or reduplicated and have some other
variations in form, the following scheme may be convenient : —

Singular. PlnraL

' I.— Kully, ku-kully, 'this'; 'the';

'he (she, it) here '; 'this here.'
II. — Kulla-na-gun, ' this '; ' she here.'
III. — Konno, ko-konno, ' this '; 'it here,
IV. — Kully, kii-kully ; kiikai ;

kuUai, ku-kullai ; 'here.'

I. — Mully nui-mully, 'that'; 'the';
' he (she, it) there.'
II. — Mulla-na-gun, 'that'; ' she there.'
III.— Monno, ' it there.'
IV. — Mully, mu-mully ;

mullai, mu-mullai ; 'there.'

I. — Killy, ki-killy, 'yon'; 'he';
' he (she, it) yonder.'
II. — Killa-na-gun, 'yon'; 'she yonder.'
Ill— Kundy, ' it there '; 'it.'

Kanyo, ka-kanyo, 'this'; 'it near.'
IV. — Kanyo, ka-kanyo, 'here.'

I. is the common masculine form used as an adjective or pro-
noun. II. is the feminine form so used. III. is the neuter form
so used. IV. is used as a predicate for masculine, feminine, and
neuter.

Demonstratives used either as singular or plural are — ka, 'it ';
2jhi., 'they in that place there'; kaba, 'it'; phr., 'they there.'

I

Munyo ;

sometimes

mim.

KAmo, ka-kdmo :

sometimes

kcim.

Kaka,

8 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Tlie Nyug dialect, instead of kully and mully, has mugga
and kugga; thus: —

Sivf/i'Iar. Plural.

Masculine. Feminine.

Mugga. Muggun. Maka.

Kugga. Kuggun. Kaka.

Kaka is thus a recent addition to the Minyug dialect. It is at
}ii-esent almost exckisively used instead of cannaby. Maka is
sometimes used for mully, but always as a singular. Kugga is
used in the sense of ' he out there.' So it is evident that ka is the
root form of all the demonstratives beginning with k, and ma
of those beginning with in. Most of the plural demonstratives
are formed from ka and ma; thus, k am a consists of ka + ma,
maka of ma + ka, and kaka of ka + ka; yet there are many
doubled forms that are singular. Ma, however, is used, but not as
a demonstrative. Ka, ma, ly, ba, and nyo are all root-forms.

Indefinite pronouns.

There are four indefinite pronouns: — Kurralbo, 'all'; kaiby,
' another'; undiiru, unduru-gun, unduru-na, 'some'; and ger-
rig, 'both'; to these maybe added the adjective kumai, which is
sometimes used in the sense of 'mvich' or 'many.'

Kurralbo has but one form, viz., kurral, but it is never used
without the addition of the ornamental particles, -bo or -jug. The
four forms of kaiby have been given already. Gerrig has but
one form.

Kimierals.

Strictly speaking, the language has only two words, yaburu and
bula, that can be called numerals. Yet, by doubling and repeat-
ing these, counting can be carried on to a limited extent ; as,
Yaburu, ' one.' Bula-bula, ' four.'

Bula, 'two.' Bula-bulai-yaburu, 'five.'

Bulai-yaburu, ' three.' Bula-bula-bula, ' six '; (to.

Yaburugin, and yaburu-gin-gun are sometimes used for the
singular personal pronouns, and bulaily and bulaili-gun for the
dual. Other uses of these numerals maybe seen in — yaburugin
yiinbully, 'go alone' (said to a male) ; yaburugingun yun-
bully, ' go alone ' (said to a female) ; yaburu-min-ba, 'at once,'
or 'with one blow,' 'with one act'; bula-nden. 'halves'; bula-n-
d a i, b u 1 a-n d a i-g u n, ' twins. '

Intcrrogatives.

In Minyug, the diflerence between an interrogative sentence
and an assertive one consists, not in any diflferent arrangement
of the words, but simply in the tone of the voice. Therefore the

THE MINYUNG DIxVLECT. 9

words which we call interrogatives liave also assertive meanings.
For example, the expression gen ku ggallen, taken as an assertive,
means ' somebody calling,' but, as an interrogation, ' who is call-
ing "? thus, gen represents 'who'? or 'somebody'; it is used like
the life-nouns and personal pronouns. In the same way, minya,
minyug, minyugbo, mean 'what'? or 'something.' There is also
inji, winjif, which means 'where'? or 'somewhere.' Another
word of the same kind is yiHy, 'in what place'? and 'in some
place.' Such words are the connecting links between the nouns
and the verbs.

4 (a). Suffixes to Kouxs.
The suffixes used w4th nouns are the following : —

1. -0.

This is usually said to be the sign of the agent-nominative case,
but it also denotes an instrumental case; e.ff., buman gaio wanyo
murrunduggo, ' I will beat you vnth-a-clab.' Here the words
for /and for the c^h^ both have this suffix. Yogum gai yuggan
bumbumbo, 'I cannot go ivitli-swollen-fect.' Here the word,
'■swollen feet^ has this form.

2. -nye, -ne, -e, -ge.

This may be called the accusative suffix. It usually follows the
use of such transitive verbs as bu ma, 'beat'; n a, 'see'; igga, 'bite';
wia, 'give to'; bur a, 'take out.' As a genei'al rule, only life-
nouns and personal pronouns take this suffix. Non-life nouns
retain their plain nominative form. Since adjectives and adjective
pronouns agree in form with the nouns they qualify, it follows
that they have a twofold declension. The accusative form of
'that man' is mullanye paigannye; of ' that tomahawk,' the
accusative is mully bundan.

Examples of its use are: — Mullaio gunye yilyulman, 'he
will make me sick.' Wanye yilyulman mullaio, 'he will make
thee sick.' Graio mullanye yilyulman, ' I will make him sick.'

Sometimes either the form in -o or in -nye is omitted.

This is used to denote the genitives; as, paiganna koggara, 'a
man's head'; taicumma jennug, 'a boy'sfoot.' This form in -na
belongs only to life-nouns and words connected with them. It is
the same that is used with adjectives qualifying things ; so that
unduruna cuan may mean either 'some spear' or 'somebody's
spear,' There are also other forms to denote possession. When
followed by this case, the interrogative minyug takes the sense
of 'how many'? as, minyugbo kittomma nogum ? 'how many
dogs has the old man '?

10 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

4. -go, -go-by, -gai.

The meaning of these is 'to, of, for.' The by maybe taken as
a variation of bo, and, like bo, very little more than an ornament
of speech. Go is suffixed to all kinds of nouns to denote 'to,' -go-
by and sometimes -go to non-life nouns, in the sense of 'for,' and
gai to life-nouns, in the same sense.

Examples of its use are: — Yilly cubbulgun killagoby kun-
dalgob}^, 'where is the paddle of that canoe "? Gaio kindan
junag bundango, 'I will make a handle for the tomahawk.'
Gaio cuan kinan cubbogai biaggai gerriggai, ' I will make
.spears for both the boy and the father.'

5. -gal, -jil, -gal-lo, -na-gal, -na jil.

The suffixes -go and -gal correspond to one another in the
sense of 'to' and 'from." Inji-go we means 'where are you going
to'? inji-gal we is ' where are you coming from'? gaikamgal,
'I come from there.' Jil is a variant-form seldom used. The
life-nouns add -gal or -jil to the form in -na; as, paiganna-gal,
'from the man.' Sometimes -gal takes the form gal-lo, and then
has the meaning, of 'in coming' or 'when coming,' This is appar-
ently the agent-nominative added to a strengthened form in -gal.

6. -ba.

Ba is simply a locative form. Probably there is some connec-
tion between it and -bo and -by. which may be regarded as
little more than ornaments. It is sometimes found as a termina-
tion to names of places. Its principal use as a noun-suffix is to
strengthen the simple forms of life-nouns, and thus form a new
base for the addition of the suffixes.

7. -ma, -bai-ma.

Ma is rarely used as a noun-suffix, l)ut, when so used, it has the
meaning of 'in'; e.g., Avalo dulbagga ballunma, 'you jump
in the river '; the longer form is used with life-nouns ; as, warre
paigal-baima konno, ' carry this with the man.'

8. -a, -bai-a.

This takes the meaning of 'from,' 'out of.' Examples of its use : —
bura junag bundanda, ' pull the handle out of the tomahawk ';
bura monno cuan pagalbaia, ' pull that spear out of the man.'
It often denotes possession ; as, gaiabaia cuan, ' I have a spear.'

9. -e, -ai, -ji, -bai

This is the converse of the particle -a ; it means 'into.' Ji is
used with nouns ending in -in ; as, umbin -ji, ' in the house.' Ba-i
has the i added to the strengthening suffix (ja ; as, pagalbai, ' in
the man.'

THE MINYUXG DIALECT. 11

10. -no, -ba-no.

This is used after certain verbs of motion; as, koroally we
bon-no, 'go round the camp'; but koroally paigal-bano, 'go
round the man.' It is also used in such sentences as kagga
kug ballunno, ' carry water from the river.' Its meaning may
be given as ' from,' ' around,' ' apart,' and the like.

11. -urrugan.
This means 'with.' It may be regarded as a kind of possessive;
e.g.^ yilly nogiim -urrugan paigal may be translated, 'where
is the dog's master '? or ' where is the man with the dog '? There
is a phrase walugara, 'you also,' which has some connection with
this ; the g is intrusive between vowels to prevent hiatus.

12. -jiim.

J um means 'without.' Yilly nogum jiim paigal? 'where
is the dog without a master "? This is one of the verbal suffixes.

13. -gerry.

The peculiarity of this suffix is that, whilst it follows the rules
of the noun-suffixes, it has a verbal meaning. For instance,
kwag-gerry gai, ' I wish it would rain'; nyan minyug-gerry
kug, 'she wants some water'; gai killa-gerry umbin-gerry,
' I would like to have that house'; yogum gai mulla-gerry
culgun-gerry, 'I do not like that woman.'

Many of these are mex'ely additions to the simple nominative
case, and are not used for inflection. To these may be added the
suffix -bil, which is used to turn some nouns into adjectives ; as,
woram, 'sleep,' woram-bil, 'sleepy.' All terms for relatives are
usually strengthened by -jara and -jar-gun; e.g.^

,,. ' ,^ .. y a 'male cousin.' ^j. ■, ^9 P. >a 'female cousin.'

Yirabug-jara j Yirabug-jar-gun J

Adjectives generally agree in termination with the nouns they
qualify ; but it should be noticed they do not follow any hard and
fast rule. The suffix may be dropped from the adjective ; more
frequently it is dropped from the noun and retained with the
adjective ; and rarely, when the sentence can be understood with-
out it, it is dropped from them both. On the other hand, this
rule is carried out to an extent that surprises us. For instance,
nubug and nu bug-gun mean 'husband' and 'wife,' but the
longer form of nubug-gun isnubug-jar-gun. Now, Kibbinbaia
means ' Kibbin has,' and to say ' Kibbin has a wife,' would
usually be Kibbinbaiagun nubugjargun. Again, bura jin
gaiabaia mia would mean 'take the speck out of my eye';
where gaiabaia and mia agree in termination, yet mia has the
shorter non-life form and gaiabaia has the longer life form.

12 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

Suffixes as Verbal Interrorjatives.

The intorrogatives seem to be the connecting link between the
nouns and the verbs. This avisos from the fact that they take
both the noun and the verbal suiiixes. For instance, while inji
*when'? takes, at times, the forms inji-go and inji-gal, it also
becomes inji-gun and inji-gun-ga, and these last terminations
are verbal suffixes. The word minyug 'what'? may also take
such forms as these: — minyugallela? 'what are you doing'?
minyngen? 'what is the matter'? minyugoro? ' what is done ' ?
In form, there is really no distinction between intciTogative and
assertive sentences ; hence any interrogative may have also an
assertive meaning; minyugallela gai, therefore, may mean 'I
am doing something.' In this dialect, there is a grammatical
distijiction between the imperative, the affirmative, and the nega-
tive forms of speech ; but all these forms may be made interrogative
by the tone of the voice.

S uffix-jjostjwsitions used with Xoitns and Pronouns.

It may be as well to ask, at this stage, if there are any pre-
positions in Minyug. There is a large number of words denoting
place ; most of them are sim})le adverbs, and some of them demon-
stratives, and some occasionally have such a relationship to the
noun that they can only be regarded as fulfilling the office of
})repositions. They are not always placed before the noun, the
Minyug having the greatest freedom with respect to the collo-
cation of words. The word kam, which is among the demon-
stratives, may also be regarded at times as a preposition. When
a native says walokamkubbal kyua, which is, literally, 'you
to scrub go,' Avhy should not kam be called a preposition? In
the same way, kagga kubbal means 'out to the scrub.'

There are a fcAv Avords of this kind that have a limited inflec-
tion; e.g., balli or ballia means 'under'; juy, jua, junno are
'down,' 'into'; bundagal, bundagally, bundagalla, 'near.' Of
these, the particular form used is that which agrees in termination
with the noun qualified.

Every word in Minyug ends either with a vowel or a liquid,
and there are certain euphonic rules to be followed in connecting
the suffixes with each kind of ending. In the following tables
examples will be given of each kind. In Table I., all the inflecting
suffixes will be joined to mully. In Table II. will be found the
singular personal pronouns, which contain some irregularities,
and a life-noun ending in I, m, n, ng, ra, or a. It will, howevei",
be unnecessary to give in full the declension of these.

In Table III., four non-life nouns are chosen, ending in -/, -n,
-in, and -?•«, and the terminations given are those numbered 1, 8, 9,
From these examples, all other forms can be understood.

THE MINYUXG DIALECT.

13

§ ?
-15 's '3

o

tiD

to

=; 3 P 3 S3

o EI.

t-,

:;±^ =0

I 2

I

^

C!

^

c3

U2

o
v2

d

6

1

•:3

c3

C3

3

r— «

^

rt

^

r^

c3

(ri

ci

."t^

=i

S

13

13

r-

s

;i

S

g

S

^

g

<^ <1 O

f^ pR <j1 l-H

rH S ^ ?^ ?^

1^

0

d

02

-iJ

'r^

.-V

1?

0

r^

0

-i-3

"^

42

'^

0

p

0

•43
0

+3

3

"-^

>

t>

c;

f^

hH

rH

p-

f-*

!>

-l-= rH j; Ti r^

^ t^

O M

o
!25

M^

c3

••—3

e

ti3

rt

:3

c3

<{

d

P

r- C ^

O

£ a

o ^•-

fcC .03

c3

S c3

d ^'2

cS c3 rS cS Te J-

pq ffl pq pq pq t^

r-l C-1 CO

14

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

I

o o

\ji. ^

o o o

tin ^

^ --

^ -S

e3

rt O a; S "S

c3 -rt -rt .03 '(S

^ ^ ^ ^ ^

•:j -jj -u -u su

W pq CQ P2. (5

pq

•S e '^

O QJ c3

IS 3 13

^ .:= -O

W '^ f5 i5

^ c5 4

Ui Ui

,a ^ ;r; 5 s .3 .S
£ -^ I:: !r^ '^ ).o io
D -^ = g ;: S g

^ g

§ "
^ H

5^

!2;

bo

^ ^ ^

-d :=! c

!z;

Cl,

o

<

M ."

c3 o3 rt c3 rt

't:; r3 '^ "^ '^

rf s s rt rf

:=i :=! 3 s :=i

pqpqpqpqpq

_J-

O

c5

s

•TJ

8

• cJ 'CS • j3 '03 -c^

ti

^

r3-o ri-^^

^

«*

tii

-

3 5 5 5 3

q ^ ^

THE MINYUNG DIALECT. 15

VERBS.

4 (h). Suffixes to Verbs.
Iinperatire and Affirmative Forms.

The imperative, in the Miiiyug dialect, is the simplest form of
the verb ; it will therefore be quoted as the stem of the verb. In
true verbs, it ends in -a or -e ; as, kulga, 'cut,' bugge, ' fall.' If
the -a or -e is cut off, there remains the root of the verb, and to it
the verbal suffixes are attached. These are very numerous, and
appear, at first sight, to be very complicated ; but the whole may
be simplified by taking them in the following order : — (1) Final
suffixes; (2) Internal strengthening particles or letters; and (3)
Separable demonstrative particles. The usual final suffixes are : —

1. -a, -e, used in giving a command or in expressing a wish.

2. -ala, -ela, denoting present action.

3. -an, denoting future action.

4. -anne, -inne, -unne, denoting unfinished past action.

5. -oro, denoting finished action.

6. -en, the historical past tense ; often an aorist participle.

7. -inna, used, but rarely, as a participle.

8. -ia7i, past time ; with passive sense, when required.

9. -ia, -e, -aia, when used with a leading verb, has a future
meaning, but it is generally the infinitive or noun form to express
verbal action.

10. -ai, may be called the subjunctive, but the verb does not
take this form in all positions where we might expect a sub-
junctive to be used.

11. -enden, -unden, -anden, is probably derived from kinda,
the sixth form of which is kinden. It adds the idea of ' made '
or ' did ' to the root idea of the verb. It is sometimes equivalent
to the passive, and at times it becomes the foundation of another
verb, so that there are such forms -endene, -endeloro, &c. It some-
times takes, between it and the root, the strengthening particles
of the next paragraph.

12. The internal strengthening particles ai'e (1) le, I, r, re, (2)
g, ng-g, ing-g, and (3) h. These are inserted between the root and
and the final suffix, and are sometimes compounded together, so
that there are such form as galle and halle. These particles add
but little to the meaning. It may be that le or re gives a sense
of continuance to the action, so that while ala is a simple present,
while alela may be a progressive present. This, however, is very
doubtful. In fact, it may be stated, once for all, that while there
is an abundance of forms, the aborigines do not seem to make
very exact distinctions in meaning between one form and another.

16

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE,

If it is doslrecl to give emphasis to the idea that the action is con-
tiuuative, a separate word is used to denote this. Thus alen,
which is the strengthened form of en, is purely a participle with-
out distinction of time. Tlie forms in r, re are simple variations of
U, find seldom used. The foi'ms in (j, ng-(j, are from ga, 'to go on,'
and those in h from ])a, ' to make,' ' cause to be.' The following
table will show the various possible forms in which a verb may
be found. The separaljle demonstrative particles inserted in the
table are: — he, ho\, yan, de,ji. Bo and be seem to add nothing
to the meaning ; yaii means 'there'; dt or ji means ' to ' or 'at.'

yVi? Saffixes as attached to the root-form of Verbs.
To the forms in italics, the spparahh demonstrative particles are added.

*1.

—Smiplc

-a, -e, -ade.

> r —

-ale

-ga.

npoiuid.

-gale.

-balle.

-ele.

-gga.

-ggale.

-erraf.

2.

-ala.

-alela.

-gala.

-galela.

-bulela.

-el a.

-elela.
-erralaf.

-g^ala.

-ggalela.

3.

-an.

-Ian.

-gan.

-anbe.

-ranf.

-ggan.

-anji.

4.

-anne.

-aliime.

-ga-uie.

-galinne.

-bulenne.

-inne.

-gcaane.

-ggalinne.

-unne.

5.

-oro.

-aloro.
-eloro.
-alorohy.

-galoro.

-ggalore.

-galorohy.

6.

-en.

-alien.

-gen.

-gallen.

-bulen.

-enynn.

-arenf.

-ggen.

-ggallen.

-bfdenji.

-allenjL

-yertji

-gaUeriji.

-hidenyun.

7. -inna ; 8. -ian ; 9. -ia, -aia, -e ; compound, -alia ; 10. -ai ;
compound, -bai ; 11. -enden ; compound, -genden, -ggenden ; -bun-
den.

■*Thc numbers indicate the Moods and Tenses ; thus, 1 is the Imperative
Mood; 2, T/te Present Tense; 3, Tlie Future Tense ; 4, T lie Past {unjimshed) ;
5, The Past {Jinished) ; 6, A Participle form {ojh-n pusf) ; 7, A Participle
form [rjeneraUy iiresent) ; 8, A Participle form {ojh-n ^vrtssh-e) ; 9, A Noun
form of Verbal action {tlie infiniUve) ; 10, Tlie Suhjunctive, i.e., the form,
I'jfiich thei'erb takes u-hen componnded tcifh Auxiliary Verbs ; 11, ^ Participle
form (gem rail If passive.) 2, 3, 4, and 5 are of the Indicative Mood.

Besides these, there are some other compound verbal suffixes
Avhich are formed from inda and ma, and from b and ha,, as shown
below. These are sometimes attached, not to the simple stem-form
of the verb, but to specially lengthened forms.

THE .MIXVU>rG DIALECT. 17

Kinda, ' make.'

This, as a principal verb, has all the forms of the simple suffixes
except Xo. 1 1, and many of the compound ones ; as, kinda-bulela,
kinda-galoroby, itc. It sometimes takes the form, though rarely,
of kigge, and, as such, enters into composition with other verbs ;
but the usual method of compounding it with verbs is to omit the
1c, and use only the terminations ; as, bo-ale, ' be great,' bo-indale,
'be made great.' In the Minyug dialect, when two words are
brought together, it is common for the second to lose its initial
consonant. Kinda itself is a derivative from da, which is in use
to turn nouns and adjectives into verbs; as, umbin, ' a house,'
umbin-da, ' make a house.'

Ba, 'cause to be.'

Ba, as a locative, is also a noun-suffix, but, like da, it helps to
convert other words into verbs ; as, kirriba, ' awake.' As already
noticed, it enters into comjiosition with verbs, lengthening their
forms, at times, without adding to or altering their meaning. As
part of a principal verb, it generally has the meaning of ' cause to
be'; as, nyarry, 'a name,' nyarri-ba, 'give a name' or 'cause to
have a name.' It is also attached to the past tense, and is often
used whena secondary verb isina sentence ; e.g., monno webaro
kunjillinneban nobo, 'that lire will be lighted' (made to burn)
to-morrow.'

Ma, 'make,' 'cause to be there,' 'cause' generally.

This is one of the most important vei-bal suffixes in the language.
As a noun-siiffix, it has the sense of 'in,' and many of its derivative
words have the idea of ' rest in a place,' and not of causation.
Maia means 'in a place,' while haia means 'go to a place.' Wai-
maia means 'it is above'; waikaia, 'go above.' It is evident
that ma originally meant both ' there ' and ' cause to be ' generally.
But, after all, there is nothing strange in this. Even now, with
all the variation of forms, a good deal of the meaning of a speaker
depends upon the tone of the voice or the gesture of the hand.
We can conceive of a demonstrative as meaning (1) 'there,' (2) 'go
there,' (3) 'be there,' (4) 'cause to he there,' according to the tone of
voice and the subject of conversation. Any adjective can take this
.■suffix; as, yilyul, 'sick,' yilyiil-ma, 'caiise to be sick'; dukkai,
'dead,' dukai-ma, 'to kill.' It enters into composition with adverbs
of place as well ; as, with wai, 'above,' and kully, kundy, q.v., it
gives waikalkullima, ' put crosswise,' waikxmdima, 'put on.'

It sometimes follows adjectives ; as, bunyarra-ma yerrubil,

'make a good song'; and sometimes pronouns; as, kaibi-ma

junag, 'make another handle.' With verbs, it is sometimes

attached to the imperative form ; as, kory, 'run,' kori-ma, 'make

h

18 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

to run'; sometimes it takes the particle liiu l^etween it and the
root form or the imperative form ; as, dugbin-ma, 'cause to lie
down.' Very often it is attached to a form in -illi ; as, dug-
gilli-ma, 'make to cry,' minjilli-ma, ' make to laugh.' Some-
times it is attached to two words ; as, bunyarra-ma warrim-ma,
' to make well by doctoring,' and each of these can take all the
forms in agreement; as, (yk<wre) bunyarraman war rim man;
(j)ost) bunyarramunne warrimmunne.

Gerry, ' wish,' ' like to.'

This was placed amongst the noun-suffixes, because, although it
has a verbal meaning, it follows the rules of the noun-suffixes.
It also has a place as a verbal-suffix. It never changes its form,
and is always the final suffix. It is generally attached to the
subjunctive; as, yunai-gerry gai, ' I should like to lie down';
often to the form in -bai; as, yiinbai-gerry gai, 'Ishould like to
go on'; and sometimes it is attached to the form in -illi ; as,
kunjilli-gerry, 'desire to burn.'

Negation. — Jum, ' without.'

Jura is another of the noun-suffixes, and is used in negative
sentences. It is often attached to the imperative form, sometimes
to the simple subjunctive form, and sometimes to the subjunctive
form in -hai. It is the negative of the })resent. Wanye kun-
lela gai means ' I know you'; but wanye kunlejum gai, 'I
do not know you,' or ' I am without knowledge of you.' Na is
' look'; naijuni gai or nabaijum gai is 'I do not see.'

Yogum is another negative. It is a word distinct from jum,
and its use turns any sentence into a negation. Yogum and
jum, when both are used, do not cancel one another; on the
contrary, they strengthen the negation. Wana is the negative
of the imperative. It means 'leave it alone'; e.g., wana yiin-
bai, ' do not go.' It has all the u.sual forms of a verb ; as, gai
wanalen, 'I left it alone.' Kingilga, 'that will do,' kingi-
lanna, 'go away, numoe, ' stop,' also help to form negations.

Some Idioms in the Minyung Dialect.
The following sentences show some of the aboriginal idioms : —
1. Jiest in a placp.

Kukully gai, 'I am here'; mumully we, ' you are there';
kukaibo, 'stay lere'; kokonno, 'it is here'; yilly nyan?
' wdiere is she '; mully nyan, 'she is there'; killy Kibbin, 'there
is Kibbin'; webena killy wai, 'the camp is above'; killy juy
webena 'the camp is below.'

These sentences illustrate the use of the demonstratives as pre-
dicates. We can either say that they are used wdthout the verb

THE MINYUNG DIALECT, 19

' to be ' as a copula, or that they themselves are used as neuter
verbs in the present tense. The latter view is more in accord-
ance with the idiom of the language. There is, however, in the
language, a general absence of connecting words ; there is no word
for ' and,' the nearest word to it being urru or urrugan, ' with,'
which is sometimes attached to words used as personal pronouns
in the sense of 'also'; as, mullagurru, 'he also.' There are no
relative pronouns, and we may almost say there is no verb 'to be,'
used as a copula.

2. Adjectives as jyredicaies.

Adjectives follow the same rules as demonstratives; for instance,
yily ul gai, ' I am sick '; killy dukkai, ' he over there is dead ';
monno bundan bunyarra, 'this tomahawk is good.'

3. The icse of yiin a.

But we can say kiikulliyen gai, for 'I was here '; and killy
dukkaien, ' he was dead.' We can also say dukkaianna, ' may
you die,' or 'may you go to death '; dukkaiyuggan gai, 'I will
kill myself,' or ' I will go to death.' These endings are from the
verb yuna, which means 'to go.' The rule may be expressed thus : —
Any word which is an adjective may be used in its plain form as a
predicate in the present tense, and may, by adding the forms of the
verb yiina, be turned into a true verb with all the tense-forms of a
verb. The y of yuna is often omitted, and the forms ungan, unna
are used ; also en or yen , as if the original root was ya. Yuna
means not only ' to go,' but ' to live,' ' to move,' and ' to be.'
The language has three verbs closely allied in form, ytina 'to go,'
yuna ' to lie down,' and yana 'to sit down.' The first of these
has the derived forms yugga, yunbale; the second, yunale; and
the third, yangale.

4. Verbs of Motion and Adverbs of Place.
Verbs of motion are very numei'ous, and so are adverbs of
place; thus, speakers of the Minyug can be very exact in direct-
ing others to go here or there. Bukkora goa, ' go past '; bunda-
gal boa, 'go near'; duloa, ' go down '; wande, 'go up'; kaie,
'go in'; wombin kwe, 'come here'; kaga, 'come down';
dukkan kyua, 'go over'; kankyua junimba, 'keep to
the right '; kankyua worrembil, 'keep to the left.'

5. Time.
The language can be very exact in the expression of time. N u m-
gerry is ' daylight'; karamba, ' mid-day '; ydn, ' sunset '; nobo,
'yesterday' or ' to-morrow.' The particles -bo and -jug are also
used to distinguish foi-mer time from latter; so that nobo -bo is
'yesterday,' and nobo-jug 'tomorrow.'

'/U^^ OP THR N^>

lUSiyERSITTj

20 AX AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

G. Manner.

There is a class of Avords that fulfil the -luty of qualifying
action as adverbs of manner, but they have the forms of verbs ;
so that they may be called qualifying verbs. They agree in final
termination with the verbs they qualify. Karaia or karoe is
'to do anything in a great manner.' In the participal form it is
used thus : — gibbuni karandallen, ' full moon '; karandallen
kwog, 'heavy rain'; karandallen wibara, 'the fire is hot';
karaggen wvirrig, 'very cold.' With verbs it is used in a
different form ; as, wemully karaielly, 'speak loudly.'

Gumoe is 'in a small way'; as, gumundallen gibbiim, 'little
moon'; wemi;lly gumoelly, 'speak gently.' Magoe means 'to
continue'; as, magoale wemully, 'continue speaking.' Boe is
'to speak by oneself; as, boelly wemully, 'speak by yourself,'
or ' speak alone.' Others are, — karaharai-elly dugga, ' cry very
loudly '; nunnoelly dugga, 'cry very gently '; nugummanna
dugga, 'cry quickly'; niganna dugga ' stop crying.'

7. Affections of the mind.

'Doubt' is exjiressed by wunye, which sometimes takes the
form of bunye. Gaio wanye human, nobo wunye, 'I will
beat you, perhaps to-morrow.' 'Hope' is expressed by jim ; as,
mullaijun kulgai wibara, 'it is hoped that he will cut wood.'
'Fear' is expressed by the word twin; as, gaio twiggalla we bar a
kulgai, 'I am afraid to cut wood.' 'Pity' and 'sympathy' arc
often expressed by idioms meaning literally, ' smelling a bad or a
good smell'; e.g., gai mullagai kunlunny bogon, 'I for him
smell a bad smell,' or ' I pity him.'

8. The tose o/bunyarra.

Bunyarra, 'good,' means not only 'good,' but anything 'gi'eat.'
It sometimes means ' very '; as bunyarra jug, ' veiy bad.'

9. The use of karahan.
Reciprocal action is expx-essed by karaban; e.g., gully kara-
ban bum ma lie, 'Jet us paint one another.'

10. Comjyarison.
Gai koren karaialen, wunnanden wanye, ' I run fast, you
slowly'; that is, 'I am faster than 3'ou '; gai wanye gulug
paigal, 'I am a man before you '; that is, ' I am older than you.
The pronoun (wanye or any other) is always in the accusative.

11. Government of Verbs.
Sometimes the infiniti\e foi-m in -ia, and sometimes the form in
-hai or -ai, which may be calletl the subjunctive, is used to show
dependence on another verb ; but often the two verbs agree in
having the same final suffix. Examples are: — Avana yiinbai,
or wana yiina, ' do not go'; wana cabbai, ' do not eat '; wan a

THE MIXYUNG DIALECT.

21

mullanye cubbinmai, 'do not feed liim '; yiina gully cullum
kaggale means 'let us go to catch fish '; lit., ' let us go, let us
catch fish '; both verbs are in the imperativ?. Kia mullanye
bumalia, 'ask him to fight'; this is the more common form ; but
walo kia mullanye webara kundia, or walo mullanye kia
webara kunjeba, 'you ask him to light a fire '; here the endings
of the verbs will agree in all the tenses ; as, (imper.) kia kunjeba;
(^)rt6^<) kianne kunjebunne; {fut.) kian kunjeban.

Examples of the Formation op the Tenses of Verbs.
The numbers here are the Tenses as on page 16 of this Appendix.

Bunia, ' to fight, beat, kill.'

1, Buma, bumale, bumga, bumgale ; 2. Bumala, bumalela, bum-
gala, bumgalela ; 3. Buman, bumgan ; 4. Bumanne, bumalinne,
bumganne, buminne ; 5. Buraaloro, bumgaloro, bumaloroby ; 6.
Bumen, bumallen, bumgallen; 7. Buminna; 8. Bumian, bumalian;
9. Bumalia; 10. Bumai; 11. Bumenden. Comj^ound forms are : —

Bumaigerry, ' wish to fight '; bumejum {imper. neg.), 'fight
not'; karaban bumale {imper. reciprocal), 'fight one another';
bumille-ma, 'cause to fight,' which also, as above, may change
ma into -mala, -malela, -man; -munne, -men; -ma-ia, &c.

Kinda, 'make.'
1. Kinda, kindabale; 2. Kindalela, kindabulela; 3. Kindan ; 4.
Kindinne; 5. Kindaloro, kindabuloro; 6. Kinden, kindabulen, »tc.
Kinda does not take the forms in -ga ; nor buma those in ba.

TABLE OF RELATIONSHIPS m MINYUa.

(1-)

A blackf calls ^ father'' s brother.
,, is called in return . . .

A blackf calls a mother'' s sister.
,, is called in return . .

Native words.

biag*. . .
moiim .

waijug .
moi'un .

Equivalents.

pater, patruns.
illius Jili-us, -a ;

liujus nepos.X
onater, matertera.
illius fli-us, -a ;

hnjus nepos. %
avunculus.

ejus nepos.
amita.
ejus nepos.

A blacky calls a mother's brother kaog . . ,

,, is called in return .... bui'rijug
A blackf calls ?^ father's sister . . narrim .

„ is called in return .... ny6gon .

* Biag also means 'father,' and waijug ' mother.'

The child of biag or of waijug is 'brother (sister)' to moium ;
and a child of kag or narrun is cousin to burrijug and nyogon.
t Male or female. J For brevity, I make wpos^ncphev.i, niece. — Ed.

22

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

(2.)

Native words. Eijuivalents.

A man calls an ddur hrotlutr . . . kagog . . . elder brother.

,, is called in return bunam . . younger brother.

A man calls a younyer hrothnr . . bunam . . ,,

,, is called in return kagog . . . elder brother.

A man calls any sisUr nunnag. . sister.

„ is called in i-etuiii Ijunam . . brother.

A woman calls any hrotJier .... bunam . . brother.

,, is called in return . . . nunnag . . sister.

A woman calls an elder sister . . . nunnag . . elder sister.

„ is called in return . . . yirgag . . . younger sister.

A woman c&\\&?i. younger sister . yirgag. . . ,,

,, is called in return . . . nunnag . . elder sister.

A blackf calls a male cousin
„ ^ „ a female „
she is called in retiirn . . .
he

yirabiig or kujarug. ^ ^

yirabug-gun or kujarug-gun. ;. 2
yirabiig-gun or kujarug-gun. g.
yirabug or kujarug. j ~

(3.)

Grand relationshijfs.

A grandchildf calls a (jrand/ather, and is called by him naijog.
,, ,, father's mother, ,, ,, her kummi.

,, „ mother's „ „ ,, ,, baibug.

t \Miether male or female.

(4.)

A man calls his wife, his wife's sister, and some others . nubuggun.

,, is called by them in return nubug.

A man calls his v:ife's father women.

,, calls his ivife's mother bogai.

,, is called by them in return Avomen.

Other terms for relations-in-law are — weog, cumbug, yamljiiru.
Such relationships are very complicated, and require to he specially
investigated.

(5.)

When there is no specific term for a relationship, the terms foi-
'brother' and 'sister' are used ; for instance — a great-grandfather
is called kagog, 'elder brother,' and in reply to a male he says
bunam, 'younger brother.'

THE MINYUNG DIALECT. 23

TI. THE VOCABULARY.

Words, Phrases, and Sentences used by the Minyung Tribe.

1. Words and Phrases.
(The verbs are given in their shortest form, the imperative.)

Berrin — the south, the south people ; e.g., berrinba — to the south;
c;/. kokin — the north, the north people; e.g., kokmgal — from
the north. The aborigines on the Richmond River call the
Clarence River ' Berrin,' and the Tweed 'Kokin'; but, to
those on the Tweed River, the Richmond is 'Berrin,' and the
Logan is 'Kokin.'

Binnug — an ear; e.g., binnugma — make to hear; tell ; answer.

Birra — to cast through.

Birre — fly away ; e.g., birryalen garrig — crossed over.

Bugge — fall ; it is sometimes equivalent to 'gone away ' or ' dis-
appeared'; as, inji buggeloro mibin kurralbo wairabo?
' where have all the blacks been this long time "I If the im-
perative ends in a (as bugga), the word means 'kick,' 'stamp,'
' leave a mark,' as a foot-print. In the Pirripai dialect, spoken
by the natives on the Hastings River, buggen means 'killed,'
for they say bunno butan buggen, 'he killed a black snake..
In Minyug, nyugga bukkoyen means 'the sun has risen,'
nyugga buggen, 'the sun has set'; but with this compare the
Brisbane dialect, which says piki bog, 'the sun is dead.'

Buggo — (1) a native shield ; (2) the tree from which it is made.

Bujabuyai — a swallow. Bujarebin — a daisy. Bujagun — a quiet
girl. Bujaro — quiet ; e.g., yiran bujaro, ' whip-snakes (are)
harmless.'

Bu i a ra, Buj arabo — morning.

Bujare, Bujaro-bujaro — this morning, just before daybreak.

Buji, biijin — a little piece; bujigan — into little pieces.

Buma or buraga — strike, beat, fight, kill by fighting.

This is probably a derivative from bugge, just as wag, the-
noun for 'work,' becomes wamma, the verb ' to work.'

Burre — the top of a tree; with this compare culle, 'the barrel' or
' trunk' of a tree ; waian, ' the root '; cerrug, ' the branches ';
kunyal, ' the leaves.' (iulle is also a general name for a 'tree.'
It often means 'logs' lying down, and 'firewood'; e.^., kulga
culle w e b a r a g a i, ' cut wood for the fire. ' (5 e r r u g, besides, is
' the open palm of the hand,' ' a bird's claw,' or 'the paw of an
animal,' and it is the name of a constellation. Kunyal, 'leaf,'
may be allied to with kuggal, 'an arm ' or ' wing.' Waian
also means ' a road.' When a tree is cut down, the stump is
called gunun.

24 AN' AUSTRALIAK LANGUAGE.

Dukkai — dead; a dead man ; 'a dead woman' is touaragnn.
The word tabuUen is often used to mean 'dead,' instead of
dukkai and t o u a i' a g u n , It is a participle from some verl ) not
at present used. In some dialects, duggai, prol>abIy the same
word, means a kind of ' hsh '; in the Turrubul dialect it means
'man.' This may have given rise to the idea that some of the
aborigines believe that, when they die, they become fishes.

Ducffcerriicai — white man ; duggerrigaigun — white woman. Per-
haps this word comes from dukkai, 'dead,' but it does not mean
'ghost' or 'spirit.' For 'spirit,' there are two terras, guru and
wagai. After a man dies, he is spoken of as guru wanden,
* a spirit wp above.' All the guru go to waijog (from wai,
'above'), where they live on murrabil, a kind of celestial
food. Murrabil is from the Kamilaroi word murraba, 'good.'
■G-uru in some dialects means 'dark' or 'night,' and a word
derived from it means 'emu.' Dawson, in his "Australian
Aborigines " (page 51), states, that, if a native " is to die from
the bite of a snake, he sees his wraith in the sun ; but, in this
case, it takes the form of an emu." Wagai means 'shadow,' and
has a more superstitious use than guru. When a person is ill,
the warrima, 'wizard,' is sent for to throAV on him a good spell,
called bunyarama warrima. The warrima takes something
like a rope out of his stomach (!), and climbs up to waijog to
have an interview with the wagai. On his return, if the man
is to recover, he says, 'Your wagai has come back and you will
soon be well'; but if he is to die, he says, 'I could not get your
wagai.' The sick man is sure to die then. The w;igai are also
the spirits consulted, when anyone dies suddenly, to discover by
whose means the death was brought about. Yiralle is another
name used by the Nyug people for 'white man'; it means, the
' one who has come.'

Garre — dance; cf., yerrube — sing.

Gulug, gulugbo — first; before; e.r/., gai minjen gulugbo, 'I
laughed first,' i.e., before you. Gulug-gerry is 'immediately ';
nyugga bukkoyen gulug-gerry, 'the sun will be up imme-
diately '; gulugga we, or we gulugga buna means ' 'go thou
first'; waire gurrugin, or waire guluggurrugin are those
men in a tribe whom the colonists call ' kings '; each of these
gets a brass plate ^vith a suitable inscription, to wear on his
breast, as an emblem of his rank.

Gumma — teat. Giimmabil — milk.

Kibbara — (1) white or yellow ; (2) a half-caste, a yellow man or
woman; whence kib])argun, a half-caste girl; kibbarim, a
half-caste male ; (3) fig., anything young, small, or light; as,
kibbara pailela, which may either mean, 'light rain falling,'
or ' young lads fighting '; (4) a stringy-bark tree ; this word, in
the Kamilaroi dialect, is kuburu, a 'black-box tree'; (5) the

THE MIXIUXG DIALECT. 25

ceremony of man-making; possibly the name bora may come
from this, by drojiping the initial syllable, as nyug is for
minyug; or, bora may be comiected with the Mi nyug word
bul or bule, 'a rmg '; (6) 'a made-man,' that is, one who
has passed the kippara; and in this sense it is used in many
of the coast dialects. The names given to a male, at ditferent
stages of his life, are — taicum, ' a baby '; balun, balungai, 'a
'a boy '; cubbo, cubboyil, 'a youth'; murrawon, ' a lad ' who
is getting whiskers and has all his berrug or prescribed ' scars
on his back'; kumban-gerry, a lad who has received his
kumban or 'scars on his breast'; kibbara, 'one who had
been made a man'; paigal or mibin, 'a man'; kicom or
mobeg, ' an old man.'

Kuji — (1) a bee ; (2) honey ; (3) red ; cf. kujin — red.

Kunle — know, hear, feel, smell; e.g., gai kunlejum, 'I don't know.'

Moiiim, (I) a child, a son or daughter ; (2) the black cockatoo
with yellow feathers in its tail. The black cockatoo with red
feathers is called garerra, and the white cockatoo, kera.

Nyugga— (1) the regent bird; (2) the sun. Nyuggal-gerry —
summer ; cf. wurrig — cold ; wurrigbil — winter.

(!'a — eat; e.^/.jwalo ci, gaiyo, ' you eat (now), I (will eat) by-and-by.'

(?ubbinma — feed. (5 ukka — drink.

Webara — (1) a fire; (2) firewood; (.3) a camp. Examples: — (1)
kunji webara, 'light a fire'; kunji, by itself, would mean
' make it burn ' (bobbinda means 'make a light''; culloma,
' make smoke/ i.e., ' make a fire '; palloma, ' put out the fire');
(2) kulga webara, 'cut firewood'; this has the same meaning
as kulga culle ; (3) gai yiinbulela webA,ra 'I am going to
the camp'; lit, ' lam going to the fire.' The gunyas or 'wind-
shelters ' are gumbin ; and a large building like a church is
called kumai gumbin, which words, however, may mean, a
collection of houses, as a ' town ' or ' village.' The blankets
which are given to the aborigines on Queen's Birthday are
called gumbin, and so is a rag tied round the foot. A sock is
gumbin, but a boot is bonumbil. In some dialects a 'sheet
of bark,' 'a gunya,' and 'a canoe' have the same name, but
in the Minyug dialect ' a sheet of bark' is bagul, and ' a canoe '
is kundal or kulgerry.

Woram — sleep; woramlal — sleepy; e.g., wo ram buna, 'go to
sleep.' A mother will say to her child, woram-woram buna,
but to herself, gai woram yunan, 'I will lie down and sleep.'

Yaraba — marry; e.g., nanna yaraba, 'marry my sister.'

Yerrube — sing; yerrubil — song ; yerrabil-gin-gun — a singer (fern.).

Youai'a (also kirrin and wogoyia) — a ' karabari.'* Youara-
gurrugin — a maker of karabari songs.

*This I take to be the correct spelliug, not ' corrobboree. ' — Ed,

26 an austkalian language.

2. Sentences.

Minyugalela we — 'what are you doing'? Yogum gai liiuluru-

mullela — 'I am doing nothing'. Minyugaloro we nobo ? —

' what did you do yesterday '? Gaio kaggaloro cuUuni Noggug-

gai — ' I caught fish for Noggug.'

Gaio v.-anye bundau wianje, kulga cully gaia — ' I to you a tonia-

hawdv will give, (if) you cut down a tree for me ; or, cut down a

tree for me, (and) I will give you a tomahawk.' Yile bundan?

— ' where (i.s) the tomahawk '? Kunde bukkora — ' over there.'

Kulga culle koranna — 'cut down that high tree.' Yile w^alo

kulgajumgei'ry, wana — " if you do not like to cut it down,

leave it alone.' Gaio kulgunne kaba culle wda baijum bibbo

— *I cut down that ti-ee before you came.' Gaio wanye naienne

kulgabulenne — ' I saw you cutting (it).

Gaio w-anye monno webara gaia kunjilligerry — ' I would like

you to light that fire for me.' Walo kia muUanye kunjeba

— 'you ask him to light (it).' Gaio mullauye nobo kianne

kunjebunne — ' I asked him to light it yesterday.' Munno

webara kunjilloroljo — ' the fire is lighted.' Munno webara

kunjillinneban nobo — 'that fire will be lighted to-morrow.'

Gen kuggalela ? — 'who is calling'? Kera kuggalela — -'a wdiite

cockatoo is calling.' Mully kera mibin kialela — 'that cockatoo

speaks like a man.' Paian-jug giin — ' it is warm to-day.'

Kubberry gai paian — ' I am hungry to-day.' Wia kunlunne

bogon gai — ' I am sorry for you.' Walo ca, bunyarra-d-unda —

'you eat, (you) will be all right.'

Gaio naienne kurrunnebo manne, kenne; gaio buminne undui'-

runebyu ; undurr ben-anne. — 'I saw a number pf ducks and

white cockatoos ; I killed some ; some flew away.'

Loganda, cannaljigy gaio naienne webarabo. Cannaby yer-

I'ubilloro w'ebarabo. Yaburugen gaiaba kyuanne. Yaburugen

gullawonne, ' injeo we '? Gaio kiallen ' Brisbane-gobullen.' Gaio

naienne nogumme kakaba. (Cannaby bikbullen. Cannaby ko-

wallen nogumme webanno — ' On the Logan, I saw them in the

camp (lit., at the fire). They were singing in the camp. One

came to me. One asked me where I Avas going. I replied,

' Going to Brisbane.' I saw dogs there. They w-ere liarking.

They called them into the camp.'

Miscellaneous.

Gaio nan cuan bowan, 'I will see (one who) will throw a
speai'.' Gaio nan cuan bow^alen, ' I will see a spear thrown.'
Gaio nan cuan bongunneban nobo, 'I will see (that) a .spear
shall be thrown to-morrow.' Gaio naienne yunbulela undu-
runne poiolgo, 'I saw somebody going up the hill.' Gaio nai-
enne kamy cuan warre bulenne, ' I saw him carrying .spears.'

TIIK MINYUXG DIALECT. 27

Gaio kunleoro kamy yerrubiloroby, ' I heard them siuging.
Gaio kunlan kamy mendie, 'I will hear them laughmg.' Gaio
kunlunne kamy minjenne, 'I heai'd them laughmg'; if the
act of laughing is finished, this sentence would be, gaio kun-
lunne minjeloroby. Q-aio kunlela wemullenyun, 'I hear
speaking there.' Graio naienne korenyun taicumme, ' I saw
children running away.' Q-aio kunloigerry yerriibil kamy, 'I
like to hear them sing.' Wog wia bunyarra, 'working is good
for you.' Waggo wia gowenyen, 'working is making you tired.'
Paigal wammullen wallenyun, 'the man working is gone.'

3. Mythology.

Berrugen korilhibo, gerrig Mommom, Yabiirog. — ' Bennig came
long long ago, with Mommom (and) Yaburog.'

Tims begins a Minyiiny Legend to the folloicing effect : —

Long ago, Bernig, with his two brothers, Mommom and Yabu-
rog, came to this land. They came with their -wdves and children
in a great canoe, from an island across the sea. As they came
near the shore, a woman on the land made a song that raised a
storm which broke the canoe in pieces, but all the occupants, after
battling with the waves, managed to swim ashore. This is how
' the men,' the paigal black race, came to this land. The pieces of
the canoe are to be seen to this day. If any one ^^ill throw a stone
and strike a piece of the canoe, a storm will arise, and the voices
of Berrug and his boys will be heard calling to one another,
amidst the roaring elements. The pieces of the canoe are certain
rocks in the sea. At Ballina, Berrug looked around and said,
nyugl and all the paigal about there say nyug to the present
day, that is, they speak the Nyug dialect. Going north to the
Brunswick, he said, minyug, and the Brunswick Eiver paigal
say minyug to the present day. On the Tweed he said, gando 1
and the Tweed paigal say gando to the present day. This is how
the blacks came to have different dialects. Berrug and his
brothers came back to the Brunswick River, where he made a
fire, and showed the paigal how to make fire. He taught them
their laws about the kippara, and about marriage and food. After
a time, a quarrel arose, and the brothers fought and separated,
Mommona going south, Yaburog west, and Berrug keeping along
the coast. This is how the paigal were separated into tribes.

Note. — Each brother has his own ' karabari,' for there is the
youara Berrugna, the girran Momm6mna, and the wogo-
yia Yaburogna).

28 AX AUSTRALIAN LAXGUAGE.

(B.)

[ADSrUACT.]

GRAMMAll

OF THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN I3Y

THE NAERINYEEI TEIBE IN S. AUSTRALIA.

(By the late Bei: G, 2\tplin, Ahorti/tnea' Mlidonary, Point MacJeay,
South Audralia.)

[This fJrammar of the NaiTinyeri dialect is to be fouuil in a hook en-
titled " The Folklore, Manners, Customs, and Languages of the South
Australiai^f^borigines ; Adelaide, 1879." I have re-arranged and condensed
the material of the Grannnar, and adapted the whole to the sj-stem fol-
lowed in this present volume. — Ed.]

The Narrinyeri aborigines occupy a portion of tlie coast of South
Australia, near Adelaide. Their territory includes the shores of
Encounter Bay, Lakes Alexandrina and Albert, and the country
to the east of the Murray, for about 20 miles from its mouth.
The first attempt to master and commit to writing the grammar
of this language was made in 1843 by the Rev. H. E. Meyer, a
Lutheran Missionary. His sketch of the grammar is not free
from blunders. Nor can the present efTort expect to be faultless,
but it is approximately correct, being founded on a practical ac-
quaintance with the language.

1. Letters.

The Narrinyeri have not the sounds of y, r, s, ;~, but they have
the sonant sound of tit, (here written cJh), as in the English words
'this,' 'thine,' 'breathe,' and the surd th, as in 'thin,' 'breath.'

2. General Principles.

There is no article, but the numeral 'one ' is used as a sort of
indefinite article. Nouns, pronouns, and adjectives are declined
Ijy the use of affixes, and have forms for the singular, dual, and
plural numbers.

Number is indicated by a cliange of termination ; for example : —

'Man,: ' 3Ia)i.'

'Eye:

' Lip: ' Ear:

Sing. INIay-u. Komi.
Dual May-ula. Korn-egk.
Flu. May-una. Korn-ar.

Min-a.

]Min-ula.

Min-una.

Muna. Yur-e.
Mun-agge. Yur-illa,

'Eye:

' Eyehroiv:

' Trouser:

Sing. Pil-i.
Dual Pil-agge.

Pi-cha^ge.
Pi-ko.

Yerkocin-a.
Y''erkoan-ula.

THE KAERINVERI DIALECT. 29

In the declension of nouns the affixes used as case-endings may
be regarded as post-positions. There is no distinction of gender
in nouns and adjectives, but, for some words, there is a change of
termination to indicate the feminine ; as, yuga, ' brother,' yugti-
ta, 'sister.' This dialect likes to end its words with a vowel, es-
pecially the short i, which is here represented by i/.

3. Nouns.

Their Dscleusioii.^There are two declensions of nouns, the one
used for words denoting human relationships, and the other for
all nouns else.

(a.) Common Nouns.

Their cases. — For common nouns, the case-endings of the singu-
lar number are : —

The Genitive takes the affix -aid meaning 'of,' but, with place-
names, 'at,' 'in,' 'upon.' This affix is also used as a separate
word, with the sense of 'belonging to.'

Tlie Dative 1. takes -amby, which may be translated 'for/ 'for
the purpose of,' ' for the use of.'

The Dative 2. takes -agk, ' to,' ' by,' and -ugai, ' on,' ' by '; but
these two terminations seem to be interchangeable. The English
for this case is, ' to,' ' with,' ' by,' ' on,' ' at ' — either locative or
instrumental.

The Ablative 1. has the affix -il ; as, kornil mempir napagk,
' the man struck his wife '; from korni, ' man,' mempin, ' strik-
ing,' napy, ' wife '. This case means ' by,' * through,' ' because of
— either instrumental or causative.

The Ablative 2., if used to signify 'place from,' takes -anmant;
as, guk perk-anmant, ' water from the well '; but, when it i elates
to persons or things, it takes -inend; as, gum-anyir-inend pil-i-
nend, ' from your eye.' The English for this case is ' from.'

Another case-ending in the singular is -anyir; this I shall call
Ablative 6. It denotes ' from,' expressing a cause and a result ;
but with pronominal adjectives, it stands for the Genitive form.

These are the prmcipal cases, but the number of them may be
multiplied indefinitely by the use of any of the following : —

4. Post-Positions.

Amby, 'for.' Moru, 'down.'

Gugkura, 'before.' Tara^k, 'between.'

Giirn-kwar, ' oiitside.' Tepagk, 'close to.'

Loru, 'up.' Tuntagk, 'between two.'

Mare-muntunt, 'beneath.' Tunti, ' in the middle.'

Ugul, ugunel, ugunai, ' in front of.'

Some of these, Avhen used as post-positions to nouns, are con-
stant ; others vary their form when affixed to the dual or the plural.

30

an australian language.
Paradigm of the Declension of Common Nouns.

Komi, ' a man.''

Sinrjidar.

Dual.

Plural.

Norn.

1.

* Ivorii-i

Korn-egk

Korn-ar

Gen.

Korn-akl

Korn-egk-al

Koru-an

Dat.

2.

C Korn-agk

Korn-iigegun

Korn-ugar

Ace.

Korn

Korn-egk

Korn-ar

Voc.

Korn-incla.

Korn-ula

Korn-una

AM.

1.

Korn-il

Korn-eggul

Korn-ar

2.

Korn-anmant

Korn-ugegun

Korn-ugar

6.

Korn-anyir

Korji-iigegun
Porly, 'acJul'I.'

Korn-an

iSiyigidar.

Dual

Plural.

Nom.

1.

* Porl-y

Porl-egk

Porl-ar

Gen.

Porl-ald

Porl-egk-al

Porl-an

Dot.

2

j Porl-agk
\ Porl-ugar

Porl-ugegun

Porl-ugar

Ace.

Porl-y.

Porl-egk

Porl-ar

Voc.

Porl-inda

Porl-ula

Porl-una

Abl.

1.

Porl-il

Porl-eggul.

Porl-ar

2_

Porl-inend

Porl-(en)egguland

Porl-anand

(6.) Nouns of Relationshi]).
For nouns of relationship, the case-endings are :•

Ace, Gen.

—

-yin.f

Dative 1.

' for '

-yin-amby.

Dative 2.

'to'

-yin-agk.

Catisative.

'by'

-yin-inda.

Ablative 6.

' from '

-yin-anyir.

fThat is, -in or -an preceded by the euphonic y.

For nouns of this kind there are also special terminations to
express the nature of the relationship, whether 'mine,' ' yours,' cr
' his '; thus : —

Nag-gai, 'father,' 'my father.'

Yiko-wally, 'his father.' Gai-uwy, ' your father.'
N a g - k u - 0 w y , ' mother, ' 'my mother. '

Nagku-wally, 'his mother.' Nagku-uwy, ' your mother.'
Kelan-owy, ' my (elder) brother.'

Kelan-wally, 'his brother.' Kelan-uwy, 'your In-other.'

*iSee foot note, p. 15 of appendix.

THE KARRINYERI DIALECT. 31

Naggai, ' my fatUev,' is tlius declined : — •
JS^om. Naggai, 'my father.'
Geii. I^Taggai-yin, 'of my father.'
Dot. 1. Naggai-yin-amby, 'for my father.'
Dat. 2. Naggai-yin-agk, 'to my father.'
Ace. Naggai-yin, 'my father.'
Cans. Naggai-yin-inda, ' by my father. '
Abl. 6. Naggai-yinanyir, ' from my father.'

All the other terms of relationship, with their possessive ad-
juncts, may be declined by adding these case-endings. But some-
times the Genitive of relationship puts the -aid of ordinary nouns
before its own ending ; as, tart-ald-an, ' of my (younger) brother.'

5. Derivatives from Nouns, itc.

Derivatives are formed from nouns by adding to them such
terminations as : —

1. - inyeri, 'belonging to'; as, kurl-inyeri, 'a hat,' from
kurly, 'head'; turn-inyeri, 'a boot,' from turny, 'foot';
kurr-inyer-egk, 'a pair of trousei"s,' from kurregk (dual) 'the
shins.' Such a derivative Avord, when declined, is treated as a
common noun, and the post-position is added to the adjective
termination; as, kurl-inyer-ald, 'of a hat,' kurr-inyer-egkal,
' of a pair of ti'ousers.'

2. -urumi or -urmi, which is added to the stem of a verb to
denote ' the instrument ' with which the action expressed by the
verb is done, or a thing which is used for some particular })ur-
pose ; as, tyety-urumi, 'oil, ointment,' from tyetyin, 'anoint-
ing'; kunk-urumi, 'pills,' from kunkun,' swallowing'; mutt-
urmi, 'a drink,' from muttun, 'drinking'; kalt-urmi, 'a spade,'
from k alt, ' to dig '; drek-urmi, 'a tomahawk,' from drek, 'to
cut or chip.' Here also the post-position is affixed to the form-
ative for the purposes of declension.

3. -amaldy, which is added to the stem of a verb, to denote
the agent or person who does the action; as, pett-amaldy, 'a
thief,' from pett, 'to steal'; yelpul-amaldy, 'a liar,' froui
yelpul, ' to tell a lie.' Here also the post-position is placed at
the end of the word.

■i. -watyeri means ' full of '; as, plogge-watyeri, ' posses.sed
of sorcery' ; tuni-watyeri, 'full of sand.'

5. "When yandy, 'old,' 'useless,' is vised with a noun, it
modifies the form of the noun, and attaches the case-ending to
itself; as, yandy orn fyb?* korn), 'an old man,' yant-ald orn
'of an old man'; yandy imin fyb>- miminy), 'an old woman,'
yant-ald mi n, 'of an old woman.'

32

AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE,

6. Peokouns.

(a.) Personal Pronouns.

The personal pronouns have two forms in the nominative, the
accusative, and the causative (Abh 1) cases, as shown in the para-
digm below ; the second form is used ordy as an affix to nouns, or
in rapid speaking. The third })ronoua is of all genders.

Paradigm of the Declension of the Personal Pronouns.

1st.

2nd.

3rd.

17 om
Gen.
Dat.

Ace.
Voc.
AU.

1.

1.
6,

Gape, ap
Gan-auwe*
, Gan-amby
, Gan-agk
Gan, an

Ginte, inde, ind
Gum-auwe
Gum-amby
Gum-agk
Gum, um
Ginta, inda
Ginte, inde
Gum-any ir

Kitye, itye, atye

Ivin-auwe

Kin-amby

Kin-agk

Kin, in, ityanian

Gaty, attyt
, Gan-anyir

Kil, il

Kin-anyir

1

1st.

-Dual

2nd.

3rd.

Norfi
Gen.
Dat.

Ace.
Voc.
All

1.

2.

1.

6.

Gel, agel
Lam-auwe*
Lam-amby
Lam-agk
Lam, alam

Gurl, ugurl
Lom auwe
Lom-amby
Lom-agk
Lom, olom
Gurla, ula
Gurl, ugurl
Lom-anyir

Kegk, egk
Keggun-auwe
Keggun-amby
Keggun-agk
Keg-gun, eg-gim

Gel, agelt
Lam-anyir

Kegk, egk
Keggun-anyir

Plural

1st.

2nd.

3rd.

Nom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.
Voc.
All.

1.

2.

1.
6.

Gum, arn
Nam-auwe*
Nam-amby
Nam-agk
Nam, anam

Gun, ugiin
Nom-auwe
Nom-amby
Nom-agk
Nom, onom
Guna, una
Gun, ugun
Nom-anyir

Kar, ar
Kan-auwe
Kan-amby
Kan-agk
Kan, an

Gui-n, arnf
Nam-anyir

Kar, ar
Kan-anyir

*A variant for the geniti

re form in -auwe

is -auwurle.

+ This is the case which our author calls the Cavmthr-Ahlatlve ; I
have entered it in the paradigms as Ahl. 1. ; it is equivalent to Threlkeld's
A tjent-Komi native (Xom. 2), for which see page 11. — Ed.

THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 33

An adjective oi' a possessive pronoun, when used as an attribute
to a noun, is declined vv^itli the noun, and has its own case-endings;
thus : —

Wuiuli kmauwe, ' Jus spear.' Winuli nung-gari, ' good sjnuj;'

Singular.

Nom. "Wundi kin-auwe (nuggari)

Gen. Wund-ahl kin-anyir-akl (nuggar-ald).

Dat. 2. Wund-agk kin-anyir-agk (nuggar-ugar).

Ace. Wund kin-auwe (nuggari).

Abl. 1. Wund-il kin-anyir-il (nuggar-il).

2. Wund-inend kin-anyir-inend.

Dual.

Kom, "Wund-egk keggun-auwurle (nuggar-egk).
(Jen- "Wund-eggal keggun-anyir-ahl (nuggar-egkal).
Dat. 2, Wund-ugegun Iceggun-anyir-agk (nuggar-ugegun).
Ace. "VVund-egk keggun-auwe (nuggar-egk).

Ahl. 1. Wund-eggul keggun-anyir-il (nuigar-ugegul).
2. Wund-ugegun keggun-anyir-inend.

Plural.

Nom. Wund-ar kan-auwe (nuggar-ar).

Gen. Wund-an kan-anyir-akl (nuggar-an).

Dat. 2. AVund-ugar kan-anyir-eggun (nuggar-ugar),

J^cc. Wund-ar kan-auwe (nuggar-ar).

Ahl. 1. Wund-ar kan-anyir-il (nuggar-ar).

2. Wund-ugar kan-anyir-inend.

Kornar ngruwar, ' many men.'

Plural.

Kom. Ivorn-ar gruwar. •
Gen. Korn-an grunt-ugo.r.
Dat. Korn-ugar gruut-ugar.
Ace. Ivorn-ar gruwar
Voc. Korn-vina gruwiin.
Ahl. 1. Korn-ar grunt-ar.

2. Korn-ugar grunt-inend.

Peculiarities in the syntax of the pronouns are shown in such
sentences as : — gaty mempir kin-anyir-agk {not kin-auwe)
kurly, ' I struck his head '; here apparently the object of a transi-
tive verb is in the dative case; kil plep])in keggun-auwe,
pilar, ' he touched ths eyes of these two '; but here the accusative
case is used.

34 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

(h.) Demonstrative and Interrofjat'we Pronouns.

The demonstrative pronouns are: — hik-kai, hik-ke, 'this';
hitye-katye, 'this one' (emphatic) ; and nai-ye, 'that.' They
are tlius declined : —

Intitcmt.

Proximate.

Uimofc.

Kom.

Gen.

Dat.

Ace.

AM.

Hikkai

Hin
Hi'l

Hitye-katye

Hityene katye
Dual

Kaiye
Orn-auwe
Orn-agk
Orne

iVom.

Heggegk

Heggene-kegk

Nakak

Ace.
AM.

Heggun
Heggul

Plural

Nam.

Ace.

AM.

Harar
Haran
Harar

Harnakar

Narar
Narai-

The interrogative pronouns are gagke, ' who'? minye, ' what 'i
They are thus declined : —

Ngang-ke, ' a-ho"! Minj^e, ' whaV.

Norn. Gagke Minye

Gen. Nauwe, nauwurle Mek

Dat. 1. Namby Mekimby
2. Nak (sing.)

jL^ak-an-agk (phi.)

AM. 1. Gande Mengye, 'how'?

Other forms of the interrogative minye are : — minyandai,
' how often ' (lit , ' what times '?) minyurti, ' what sort "? minyai
or minyarai, 'what number'? minde, ' why? for what reason'?
murel, ' with what intention '?

7. Vehus.

In the Narrinyeri dialect, the form of the verb is often parti-
cipial, and is closely allied to the adjective.

If we take the root-form lak, 'to spear,' as the example of a
transitive verb, the mootls and tenses with their meanings may Ije
shown thus : —

THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 35

Indicative Mood.

Tense. Meaning.

1. Present tense, I speai' him.

2. Fast tense, I speared him.

3. Remote jMst tense, I did spear him.
4 First {simple) future, I will spear him.

5. Second {intention) future, I will {i.e., intend to) spear him.

6. Third {lyredictive) future, I will spear him.

7. Repetitive tense. I spear again.

Reflexive Mood.

I speared myself.

Eeciprocal Mood.

Let us two spear each other.

Imperative Mood.

1. Simple imperative. Do thou spear.

2. Prohibitive imperative, Spear not.

3. Compulsory/ im2)erative. Thou must spear.

Optative Mood.

1. Present optative, I may spear him.

2. Imperfect ojytative. I could or would spear him.

Infinitive Mood.

To spear.

Participles.

Spearing ; speared.

Passive Voice.

I a;u speared.

DECLENSION of the VEEBS.

In the declension of the moods and tenses of the Transitive
and Intransitive "Verbs, five sets of modified forms of Personal
Pronouns are used as the subjects to the verb. They are : —

/. Thou.

He.

\"\'itli Transitive Verbs.

1.

2,

Gate (or gaty) kile
Atte {or atty) il

With Intransitive Verbs.

ginte
inde

3.
4.

5.

Ap inde
Ap inde
Gap gint

itye
itye
kity

36 AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

We {two).

You (two).
With Transitive Verbs.

Th'y (ttcoj.

1.

Gel

giivl

kej'gul

2.

Agel

ugurl
With Intransitive Verbs.

egul

3.

Gel

ugurl

egk

4.

Agel

ugurl

egk

5.

Gel

gurl

Plural

kegk

We.

' Ygu.
With Transitive Verbs.

They.

1.

Guru

gun

kar

2.

Ugurn

UgUll

With Intransitive Verbs.

;,i

3.

Ugurn

ugune

ar

4.

Aril

ugune

ar

5.

Gurn

gun

kar

DECLENSION OF A TRANSITIVE VERB.

*Lak, *to spear.'

Exam2)le of the Declension of a Transitive Verb in the

Present Tense oj the Indicative Mood.

Any Tense may be declined in full in the same manner.

T. 1. Sing. Gate* yan lakkin I spear him.

Ginte ,, ,, Thou spearest him.

Kile „ ,, He spears him.

Dual. Gel ,, ,, We two spear him.

Gurl „ ,, You two spear him.

Keggul „ „ They two spear him.

Plu. Gurn ,, ,, We spear him.

Gun • ,, ,, You spear him,

Kar ,, ,, They spear him.

[*NoTE. — Yan, 'him,' is for ityau, an accusative form of the pronoun
itye, kitye, ' he.' Instead of yan, any pronoun or noun in the accusative
case may be used as the direct ol>ject of the transitive verl) ; and to
decline the tenses of the Indicative and other Moods, five sets of pronouns
are used, as shown aliove ; the particular set which ought to be used with
each tense is indicated by the ' superior ' numeral put after the subject in
the following paradigm of declension. Also, T. I, 2, 3, &c. indicates the
Tenses as shown on the previous page. — Ed.]

the narrikyeui dialect. 37

Indicative mood.

T. 1. G-atc' yan lakkin. T. 4. Gate^ yan lak-kani.

2. Gate* yan lakkir. 5. Gate* lak-el ityan.

3. Gate* yan lak-emb. 6. Lakkin-el atte" ityan.

T. 7. Gate lak-uganye.
Otlicr forms of the future are : —
Giute el our ityan lak, ' tliou must spear liim.'

Lak amb el ityan, ' sliall I spear liim '?

Tarno lak amb ityan, ' shall I not spear liim'1

Reflexive.

T. 2. Gap' anagk laggelir.

Eeciprocal.

T. 1. Gel' anagk laggel-amb.

Optative or Potential Mood.

T. 1. Gate* in-anyura lakkin T. 2. Lak-ilde atte" ityan

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual and Plural.

T. 1. Lak war ind Gel* war lakkin

II war lak Gurn* war lakkin

T. 2. Lak e (ityan, 'him.') Tauo lak ityan.

T. 3. Laggel-el our (or war) ap^

Infinitive Mood.

Lak, ' to spear '; lak uramb, ' for the purpose of spearing.'

Participles.

Laggelin, ' spearing '; laggelir, ' speared.

Passive Voice.

Indicative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

T. 1. Gan lakkir Lam lakkir Nam lakkir

Gum lakkir Lom lakkir Nom lakkir

Kin lakkir Keggun lakkir Kan lakkir

[Note. — This is not a real Passive Voice, but only a substitute for it ;
see page 33 of this volume. The pronoun forms used with lakkir show
this, for they are in the accusative. — Ed.]

DECLENSION OE AN INTRANSITIVE VERB.

Ng-ai, * to come.'

Indicative Mood.
T. 1. Gai-in ap\ T. 2. Puntir ap*. T. 3. Gai-el ap*.

38 an australian language.

Imperative Mood.

Koh, ' come '; gai war, 'do come'; gai akhi, ' come here.'

Optative or Potential Mood.

T. 1. Gap^ inanye gai.

Infinitive Mood.

Gai, ' to come.'

Participles.

Puntin, ' coming '; puntani, ' about to come.'

8. Observations on the use of the Verbs.

1. Lakkin properly signifies 'pieixing'; gate lakkin itye
koye means 'I make a basket,' lit.^ 'I pierce that basket,' by
piercing through and through the rushes of which it is made ;
but the word is mostly used to mean the casting of any missile,
as a spear, a dart, a stone.

2. The intransitive verbs take the simple nominative form of
the pronouns as, their subject ; the transitive verlis take the
causative form.

3. There appear to be two conjugations for verbs in the
Narrinyeri language : — (1.) those in which the form for the
present indicative is the same as the present participle ; as,
merippin, 'cutting,' gate yan merippin, 'I cut it'; (2.) those
that have another form for the present participle ; as, dretulun,
'chipping,' gate yan dre kin, 'I chip it.' Of the former class
aremempin, ' sti'iking' ; pempin, 'giving'; morokkin,' seizing.'
To the latter belong pornun, 'die,' pornelin, 'dying'; nam-
jj u 1 u m , ' hide, ' n a m p u n d e 1 i n, ' hiding '; n y r i p p i n, ' wash, '
n y r i b b e 1 i n, ' washing. '

4. Some intransitive verbs become transitive by changing the
sonant g into the surd k, or by adding -undun to the root ; as,
pigkin ap, 'I fall,' piggen atte ityan, 'I throw it down';
yelkulum ap, ' I move,' yelkundun atte ityan, 'I move it ';
nampulun ap, 'I hide,' nampundun atte ityan, 'I hide it.'

5. A causative meaning is given to vei'bal adjectives by adding
-mindin to them; as, guldaraulun, 'tired,' guldamulmindin,
' causing to be tired,' ' making tired.'

6. The most common auxiliary verbs are wallin, 'being,' and
warin, 'making' or 'causing.' Examples of these are: — nug-
gari, 'good', nugga-wallin, 'being good,' nunga-warin, ma-
king good'; piltegi, 'strong,' pilteg-wallin, 'being strong,'
pilteg-warin, 'making strong'; wirrag-wallin, 'being l)ad "
wirrag-warin, 'making bad.'

7. Verbs may therefore be arranged in four classes : — (1.) the
simple verbs as, m em pin, ' striking'; takin, 'eating'; goppun,
'walking'; lulun, 'breaking'; mampulun, 'hiding'; (2.)
verbs ending in -wallin, 'existing'; as, tunku-wallin, 'play-

THE XARRIXYERI DIALECT. 39

ing'; yuntu-wallin, 'crowding; (3.) verbs ending in -warin,
'causing/ 'making'; as, nunku-warin, ' doing right '; wirrag-
warin, ' doing wrong '; wurtu-warin, 'saturating with water';
(4.) verbs ending in -mindin; as, kildei-mindin, 'fetching.'

8. The word ellin means 'being,' 'state of being,' and some-
times 'doing'; but ennin is the proper word for 'doing'; el
appears to mean 'intention or tendency towards'; as, luk ap
atye ellir, 'thus I it did,' ' I did so'; gate yan ellani, ' I (em-
phatic) will do it'; gate yan ennani, ' I will do it '; en al yan,
' do with it,' i.e., 'doit'; kunitye ellir, 'enough he has been,'
i.e., ' he is dead.' The following are the meanings which belong
to ellin and ennin: — ellin, 'doing'; ellir, 'done'; ellani,
' about to do '; ellin, 'having'; ellin, 'being'; ellir, ' has been ';
ennin, 'doing'; ennir, 'done'; ennani, ' will do.'

9. The stem of the word warin is used with the imperatives
and interrogations; as. kug war, 'do hear'; nak war, 'do see';
gai war, 'do come'; ginte wara, 'get out of the way,' lit,
'do thou'; gint war,' do thou '(sc, it); mant war, 'do slowly ';
murrumil war, 'make haste'; yelkul war, 'do more'; mint
war, 'give me a bit,' lit., 'do to me thou'; kakin wara, 'put
it here '; yag wari, ' where do you go.'

10. There are idiomatic expressions in which the words 'go'
and 'come ' are omitted ; as, loldu el itye, or loru el ityc, 'up
will he,' i.e., ' he will go '; mare el itye, ' down will he,' i.e., ' he
will come'; loldan an, 'up it,' i.e., 'fetch it'; moru an, 'down
him,' ■i.e., 'he has gone down'; mare itye, 'down he,' i.e., 'he
has come '; moru el ap, ' down will I,' i.e., 'I will go down.'

Loru and loldu both mean 'up '; mare and moru, ' down.'
9. Adjectives.

(1) Simple adjectives are nuggari, 'good'; wirragi, bad';
and others ; some of these are declined like nouns. (2) Verbal
adjectives; as, talin, ' heavy'; balpin, 'white'; kinemin, 'dirty';
kinpin, 'sweet'; prittyin, 'strong.' Some adjectives have
both forms; as, balpe, balpin, 'white.'

The mode of declining adjectives has already been shown in
connection with the nouns.

Adjectives have no degrees of comparison, but the diminutive
particle -ol — used both with adjectives and nouns — is sometimes
added to the positive; as, m'urralappi, 'small '; murralappi-ol,
'very small.'

The numeral adjectives are : — yammalai or yammalaitye,
'one'; niggegk, ' two ', neppaldar, 'three'; beyond that, all
numbers else are gruwar, 'many.' Grunkar means 'first.' Some
adjectives are formed from adverbs ; as, karlo-inyeri, 'of to-day,'
'new,' from karlo,' to-day '; kaldan-inyeri, ' old,' from kaldan,
' a. long time'; kogk-inyeri, 'alone/ ' by itself,' from kogk,
' away. '

40 an australian language.

10. Adverbs.
There are numerous adverbs in the language, but the most
common are : —

Adverhs of Time.

Grekkakl, ' to-morrow.' Palli, ' while,' ' by-and-by.'

Grurintand, 'often.' ilauwul, 'a long time ago.'

Hik, ' now.' Ugunuk, ' when ' (relative).

Kaldau, ' a long time.' Wataggrau, ' yesterday.'

Karlo, ' to-day.' Yaral, ' when ' (interrogative).

Yun, ' by-and-by.'
Adverhs of Negation.

Nowaiye, 'none.' Tarnalo, ' no more '; ' nevei'.'

Nowaiye ellin, 'no more.' Tarno, 'no'; 'not.'

Tarnalin, ' not yet.' Tauo, ' don't ' (imperative),

Tarno el, ' don't' (do it).

Adverhs of Place.

Aiau, ' by (at) that place.' Yak, yauo, ' where to.'

Akhi, alye, alyikke, 'here.' Yagi, 'where'?

Alyenik, ' this place here.' Yagalli, ' where is he'?

Kiuau, 'where' (relative). Yarnd, 'whence'?

Ku-un, 'far off.' Yarnd inde, 'whence thou'?

Ondu, ' over there.' Yarnd ande, 'whither thou'?

Exam2)les of the use of Adverhs.

Yak al inde tantani, ' where wall you sleep '; gurlug aiau,
' at-the-place-where the hill' (is); manti kiuau tantani ap,
' the hut where I shall sleep'; gap tagulun ku-un, 'I stand far
off'; kegk tagulun ku-u, 'they two stand far off'; kar
tagulun kuar-un, 'they stand far off.'

The word wunye, ' then,' usually coalesces wdth the pronoun
or verb-sign which follows it ; as, wunyap, 'then I'; wunyar,
' then they '; wunyel itye, ' then will he.'

The words uk, ukke, luk, lun, 'so,' 'thus,' denote resemhiance ;
as, luk war lun u, 'so,' 'thus'; luk itye yarnin, 'thus he speaks';
lun ellin, 'so being,' i.e., 'like'; luk ugge, 'like this one';
hikkai ukke, 'this way '; hil amb uk, 'for this way,' i.e., 'be-
ecause '; lun uk, ' thus '; go uk ap, ' I go so.'

The word amby may be translated either 'instead of (prepo-
sition) or 'because' (conjunction) ; as, kaldau amb, 'for a long
time'; hil amb uk, 'because'; pinyatowe aid amb anai pel-
berri means 'sugar for my tea.'

11. Notes on Syntax.
1. The form of the verb is constant in its mood and tenses ;
only the pronoun-subjects vary.

THE NARRIXYERI DIALECT.

41

2. The postpositional suffixes to pronouns arc always attached
to the accusative case ; as, kan-agk, 'to them.'

3. Pronominal adjectives are ahvays (declined vrith their nouns ;
as, kin-anyir-agk taldumand-agk, 'to his hou.se'; and so also
hikkai korn, 'this man,' harnakar kornar, 'these men';
ornagk nuggugai, ' in that day.'

4. The diminutive is placed after the case-ending of the noun ;
as, porl-ald-ol, ' of a little child '; porl-ar-ol, ' of little children.'

5. When an adjective and its noun are declined together, the
case-ending is attached only to the adjective; nuggai--ald korn,
' of a good man.'

6. The post-position -uramb, 'for the purpose of,' is ahvays
attached to any verb which is put in the infinitive by anotlier
verb ; as, pempir il anagk nakkari tak-uramb, 'he gave me
a cluck to eat.'

12. Formation of Y\'ords.

This is effected by adding on various tei'minations, some of which
have already been noticed : —

(1) -wallin, 'being'; as, pilgeru-wallin, 'greedy.'

(2) -warin, 'making'; as, kogk-u-warin, 'sending away from,'
from kogk, 'apart'; anagk-warin, 'prepa.ring,' 'getting ready'
{lit., 'making towards it'), from anagk, kanagk, ityanagk, the
dative of the pronoun itye. .

(3) -aty eri, ' belonging to '; as, lamm-aty eri, 'wood for a fire,'
from lammin, ' carrying on the back.'

13. List of Prepositions, Adverbs, kc.

The prepositions are used
in this list are preceded by

Above — kerau, kiath.

After — ug.

Again — kagulandai.

mu ganyi.

-uganyi.
Agent— -urmi, -amaldy.
Ago, long time— kaldau, kl
Ah ! — yakkai ! takami !
Almost — gak.
Alone — naityi, -knotyerai.
Also — inye, -inyin.
Always — kaldau-amp.
Apart — yinbaik ul un.
As— luk.
At — warre.

as post-positions ; those words which
a hyphen are used as affixes.

Away from here andek.

,, from anywhere kogk.

,, apart — kogkinyeri.
Be off — lorn, lolden, gopwar.
Because — marnd, hil-amb-uk.
Before (of time) — ugunai, ugul.

„ (in front of) — guguragk.

,, — gunkuiti. [wan.

Behind — yarewar, waiag, karlo-
Below— nioru.
Beneath — maremuntunt.
Between — taragk.
Besides — kamanye, -anye.
Bv itself — kogkinyeri.
By— il, ile.

42

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

By-ancl-l)y — yun, ])alli, yuwu-

nuk.

.Can inyiiva.

Close by thee — unig-gai.
Close (near to) — tapagk.
Day, ' this day ' — hikkai nugge.

,, after — kinagkurnngk.
Day before yesterday — kagulun

nugge.
Down (in) — morn, loldu.
Don't — tauo.
Down— wald, niu^'gau.
Eh !— ke ! keh !
Enough — kunye, yikkowun.
Ever — kaldau-amix
Far ofF — ku-utyuu.
Fast (quickly) — tiwi-warin.
First — kagulandai.
Five — kuk-kuk-ki, koyakki,

For amby, arumi, -urumi.

,, -iirumi (for-to).
,, them — an -anyiril.
For mei-ly — k al dau .
For — kuk, kuko.
From, out of nend.

,, (because) — mare, marnd.
(place) anmant.

,, (causative) anyii".

Gently — m ant.
Go away — thrugkun, taiyin.
Go [imjier. ) — gowalwar.
Half — galluk, narliik, mirimp.
Hark ! — kugwar.
Hence — - -andi, -nend. [hi.

Here — kalyan, alye, alyalle, ak-
Here (this here)— alyenik, hik-
kai alye.
Here (that here) — anailyalye.

,, (close by) — ak-in-ik.
Hereafter — pallai, yun.
How 1 — megye, yarild %
How often ? — minyandai ?
How many 1 — minyai, minyarai ?
If — ugun.
Immediately — hikkai, hik, karlo.

In ugai.

In that — muggan.

In there — muggar.

Into — agk.

Is— el.

It, that is it — anailyalye. [lo.

Just now — yikkigge, hikkai, kar-

Like — (.similar) luk, lun.

,, (similar to) glalin
Long time ago — rande, ramvul.
Long ago — gulli. [war.

Make haste — murrunmil, tyiwe-
Many times — gurintand,
Many (too many) — multu-wariu.
May (optative) — ur.

,, (verl)al affix), -inanytira.

,, (postfix) urmi, -uramb.

Might (po.stiix) ant.

Morrow (to-) — grekkald.
Much — gruAvar.
Much more — gruinyerar.
Much (too much) — multu-wariu.

Must war or -our.

Near — mu ggau.

Near thee — tapagk.

Near me — hik alye(-nik), hikak.

Never — tarnalo.

No — tarno.

No (imper. neg.) — tauo.

Not — tarno, tauo, nowaiye.

Once more — kagulandai.

One more — yammalel.

One — yammalaitye.

Only on, -ai.

On the other side — laremuntunt.
Out of the way — nent-wara.
Outside— gurukwar.
Over there — wara.

Perhaps ant.

Quick — murrunmilin, tyiwewar.

Round about — laldilald.

Second — wyag, karlowan.

Single — yammalaitye, -ai.

So — lun.

Still («f^i'.)— thortuld.

Thanks — an-ugune.

That there — naive uwe.

That way — gauwok.

Then — wanye, wunye.

THE NARRINYERI DIALECT.

43

Then one — inna.

Then two — yikkuk.

There (being down) — oldau.

,, (up there) — wakle, warre.

,, (over there) — naiyuAve.

„ (from there) — ondu.

,, (in there) — niuggar.

,, — naiye uwe, muggau.
This way (road) — hikkai-yarhik.
,, (manner) — hikkai-iikke.
Three — neppahlar.
Thus— luku.
Time, a long time ago — kaldau.

,, a short time ago — karlo.
To anto)— agk.
,, (towards) — ugai.
To-day — hikkai nugge.
To-morrow — grekkakl.
Too far in — tumutyun.

Together — yunt.
Truly— katyil.
Two — nigkaiegk, puUatye.
Up above — kerau.
Up — loru, war, mari.
Up there — erouke, naiyewarre.
Upside doAvn — laremuntunt.
Very — pek.
Very near — gake.
Well — golde, guide.
While — pallai.

Whither — yauo ande. [anyir.
Why 1 — megye, mind, mindin-
With (a material) — ugai, ugar.
,, (instrument) — in agk ai.
With — aid, al, ugai.
Within — maremuntunt.
Without — indau.
Yes (truly) — katyil.

THE DIYERI DIALECT.

The Diyeri tribe occupies the region about Cooper's Creek, in
the heart of South Australia, about 630 miles north of Adelaide.
For comparison, their system of pronouns may be given here, as
furnished by the Rev. E. Homann, Lutheran Missionary : —

Personal Pronouns.

1st

2nd.

3rd.

Masc. Fern.

Nom.

1.

Nani

Yidni

Nanya Nania

2.

Nato

Yundru

Nulia Nandruya

Gen.

Nakani

Yinkani

Nunkaiii Nankani

Bat.

Nakagu

Yinkagu

Nunkagu Nankagu

Ace.

Nana

Yidnana

Nanya Nania

Voc.

Perlaia
Dual—

Nom.

1.

Nali, naliena

Yudla

Pudlaia

2.

Naldra

Yudla

Pudlali

Gen.

Nalina,

naldrani

Yudlani

Pudlani

Bat.

•

Naliga,

naldragi

\ Yudlagu

Pudlagu

Ace.

Nalina,

naldrana Yudlana

Pudlanaia

Voc.

Yudla

Pudlaia

41

AN AUSTRALIAX LANGUAGE.

Nom. 1. Naiana, iiaiaui

Yura

Taiiaiia

2. Naiani

Yiira

Tauali

Gen. Kaianana

Yurani

Tanani

Dctt. Naiana^u

Yuragu

Tanagu

Ace. Naiaiiana

Yuraiia

Tanaiiaia

Yoc.

Yura

Tanani

The possessive pronouns, Avliich are the personal i»ronouns of
the genitive case, are declined also like substantives ; thus : —

Nom.\. — Nakani, 'my'; Nom. 2. — Nakanali ; Gen. — Na-
kanaia; Dat. — Nakanani; Ace. — Nakani; Voc. — JSTakanaia

]\Ir. Gason, -who is well acquainted with another portion of the
Diyeri tribe, gives their pronouns thus : —

Personal Pronouns.

First Proiioun.
Sinrjular,

N'om. 1. Althu
2. Athu
Ge7i. Ni
Dat. Akiiga
Ace. Ani

Second Pronoun.
Sin'jidar.

Kom. 2. Yondru
Ace. Ninna

riural

Kom. 1. Janana, uldra
Gen. Janani, uldrani
Ace. Ali

Plural.

Noin. 1. Yini
Gen. Yinkani

Third Pronoun.
Singular.

Masc.
JS'om. 1. ) -K-r T

Gen.
Dat.
Ace.

iia

, Fern. , Neut. Plural.

Naniya, nundroya Ninna Thana

Thanani
Wirri, wurra.
Thaniya, gundru

Nunkani Nankani

Nulu Nania, naudriiya

Other pronouns are : — Ninna, ninnea, 'this'; ninna* 'that';
thaniya, gundrn, 'those'; warana, 'who'? wurni, 'whose'? wur-
oga, ' whom '? whi, wodau^ ' what '?

THE XAERIKYERI DIALECT.

45

Nouxs.

Nouns cire declined, as usual, by affixes ; after the following
manner : —

Kintalo-Tjutu

Dog-with
Bu6ii-ali

Blind-of
Kurna - undru
Man relatinsc-to.

A pa - n - undru

Water relating-to.

Kurna - thulka

]Man relating-to.

Yinkani - kii

Yours-to.

The Verb.

The Diyeri verbs, as in other Australian languages, have their
tense-forms based on the forms of the imperative and the present
participle, as shown in the paradigm below. The numbers indi-
cate the tenses quoted, which are : — 1. Infinitive Present ; 2.
Participle Present ; 3. Participle Past ; 4. Participle Reciprocal ;
5. Indicative, Perfect Definite ; 6. Indicative, Pluperfect ; 7. Indi-
cative, Future ; 8. Imperative, Singular ; 9. Im2)ercdive, Plurcd.

' Groic:

Ask.'

', Strike.'

1.

Acami^"

Diami

2_

Bunk

una Acanr

„

Diuna

5."

Blink

anaorif Acanaori

Dinaori

6.

Blink

anawonthi Acanj:

■wonthi

Dinawonthi

7.

Bdnkanalauni

Dialauni

8.

Bunk

a Acea

9.

1.

' Cover, huvj/,'
aSTumpani

'See.'

Dimarau

2.

Numpuna

Niuna

s!

Numpathuruna

4.

Nurapamulluna

Niamulluna

5.

Numpanaorif

Nianaori

6.

Numpunawonthi

Nianawon

thi

7.

Numpalauni

«.

Nii or nil

i

9.

Niamaran

*The post-position mi means 'to.' fTo decline any tense,
prefix the causative form of the personal pronouns as the suliject.

Some adjectives are participal in their form ; as, miincuruna,
' sick '; mundathuruna, 'lazy'; kukutharkuna, ' unlevel'; kiin-
kuna, 'lame'; mull una, 'alike.'

Some adjectives seem to have forms of comparison ; as, wordu,
'short,' wordu-murla, 'shorter,' wordu-muthu, 'shortest';
umu, 'good, umu-murla, 'better'; nuru, 'quick,' nuru-pina,
'very quick'; moa, 'hungry,' moa-pina, 'very hungry.'

46

AN AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGE.

(From Ur. Moorhouse's Grammar.)
THE MURUNDI TRIBE.

From Manum to Overland Corner, on the River Murray, and
thirteen miles back from the river on each side ; Blanchetown is
their head-quarters.

Declension of Nouns.
Nguilpo, ' child. '
Dual.

Nom.

Gen.

Bat.

Singular.

G-uil-po

G-uil-yog

Guil-yanno

Gruil-pallarno

G-uil-po

Guil-pakul

Guil-yamakul

Giiil-yakullamann

Plural.

Guil-pa

Guil-yarago

Guil-yarumanno

Guil-pa

Guil-yara mainmudl

Ace. Guil-po Guil-yapakul

Abl. 2. Guil-yanmudl Guil-kakulla main

mudl

4. Guil-kulla manno Guil-yaramanno

6. Guil-yanna

Note. — AM. 2 means ' from'; Ahl. 4, ' at,' ' witli ' (a locative form) ; Ahl
6 is the Causative, and may be translated ' by.'

Declension of the Personal Pronouns.

iX 1 -\i / 1 1 1 1 n \*

^jLll'I'lflli

^

1st.

2nd.

3rd.

Nom.

Gape

Gurru

Ninni

Gen.

Gaiyo

Guri'ogo

Nunnago

Bat.

Ganne

Gurrunno

Ninnanno

Ace.

Gape

Gurru

ISTinni

Abl. 6.

Ganna

Gurra

Ninna

Bual

V

Nom.

Gedlu

.Gu})al

Dlano

Gen.

Gedlago

Gupalago

Dlanogo

Bat.

Gedlunno

Gujtalanno
Plural

Dlanunno

Nom.

Gennu

Gunnu

Nana

Gen.

Gennago

Gunnago

Nana go

Bat.

Genunno

Gununno

Nanunno

Note. — There are no abbreviated forms of the pronouns, and no gender
forms.

Declension of the A^erb.

The verbs p.arldkun, ' strike ' and terrin, ' stand,' may be ta-
ken as examples ; in form, both of these are Present Participles.

THE NARRINYERI DIALECT. 47

1.

Present.

Parldkun

Terrin

2.

Aorist 1.

Parldka

Terra

.3.

Aorist 2.

Parldkul

4.

Future

Pariaia

Terridla

o.

Imperative

Parlka

Terra

G.

Conditional

Parldkuiina

Terrinna

7.

Prohibitive

Parldkumoi

Terriimi

,s.

Preventive

f Parldkulmun-
i nainmudl

1 Terrulmun-
1 nainmudl

9.

Optative

Parldla

Terridla

10.
11.

Infinitive
Past Participle

Parldlappa
Parldkulmugko

Terrilap[)a
Terrulmugko

Note. — The meanings are: — No. 2, ' did strike '; No. 8, 'struck '; No. 6.,
'would strike'; No. 7, 'strike not'; No. 8, ' that... may not strike'; No.
9, ' may strike '; No. 10, ' for-to strike '; No. 11, 'having struck.' And
similarly for the verb terrin.

THE MAROUPvA TRIBE.

System of kinship found amongst the Maroura tribe.

The Maroura inhabit the country at the junction of the River
Darling with the River Murray, and a considerable distance up
the Darling.

In the names for relationship, there are diiferent terminations
for those that are ' mine,' ' yours,' ' hers '; e.g.,

Kambiya, ' my father.' Grammugiyi, ' my mother.'

Kambiyanna, 'your father.' Grammugammu, 'your mother.'

Kambiyanna, 'his father.' Kittha gammu, 'his mother.'

These Marouras are the tribe which descended the Daiding
between the years 1831 and 1836 {cf. "Mitchell's Expedition").
The Narrinyeri have a tradition that they came down the Darling
and then across the desert to the head of Lake Albert.

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN DIALECTS.
English. 1.* 2. 3. 4.

I Gaii g^P^i ^^V k^V^

We two Gadli gel ganal geli

We Gadlu gun nagan nagano

Thou Ninna ginte girit gii^t

You two Niwa gul gul gulo

You (phi,.) Ka gun gunnu gun

He, she, it Pa, padlo kitye kitye kitye

They two Purla kegge kegge kegge

They Purna kar kar kar

*NoTE. — The numbers indicate the localities where the words ai'e used ;
1. is the Adelaide dialect, 2. is Encounter Bay, 3. is Pomunda, 4. is the
dialect spoken to the west of Lake Alexandrina.

48

A^I ACSTRALIAX LANfil'AGE.

Head
Two lieads
Heads

0118

Two
Three

Four

1. 2. 3.

r^Iukarta kuli kuli

Mukartilla kuleg kuleg

Mukartanna kular kular

Kunna yammuli yammalaitye

Purlaitye neigeg ncigegi

Mankutye . niaalda luaalda
I Puriaitye-pur- ■( kukar4cukar | kiggarug or

\ laitye j \ kukar-kar

(C.)

[ABSTRACT.^

GEAMMAR

OF THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN BY

THE ABORIGINES OF YfESTERN AUSTRALIA.

[Tills short sketch of the Grammar of the language of Western Australia
is the only one that I can find anywhere. It is in " The Western Aus-
tralian Almanac for 1S42," and is printed there as an appendix, ' com-
piled by Chas. Symmons, Protector of the Aborigines, from material
furnished by Mr. Francis F. Armstrong, the native interpreter.' Some
portions of it are taken ' from the preface to Captain (Sir George) Grey's
vocabulary. ' I have al^ridged the material of the Grammar, and adapted
it to present uses. — Fd.]

1. Nouns.

The cases are indicated by inflections, thus : —

The Genitive takes the sulfix -ak, which means ' of ' or 'belonging
to '; some districts say -a g instead of -ak. Examples : — Kail a,
'fire,' kalla-r-ak, 'hot'j miki, 'moon,' mik-ag, 'moonlight ';
d t a, ' mouth,' d t a - 1 a g, ' tongue '; g a b b i, ' water, ' g a b b i -
lag, 'belonging to water'; budjor, 'ground,' budjor-lag,
'belonging to the ground'; mammarapak gidji, 'a man's
spear'; yagoak bokn, 'a woman's cloak.'

The Dative; its sign is -a 1, sometimes -ak; as, gadjo allija gulag-
al yogaga, 'I gave it to the child '; Pertli-ak bardiu, 'going
to Perth.'

The Accusative ends in -in; as, gadjo yan-gorin gan-gau bru,
' I do not see the kangaroo.'

The Ablative affixes -al to the nominative case; as, gadj o boat-al
Perth-ak bardaga, ' I went in a boat to Perth '; galata kai-
bra-al watto bardaga, ' we vrent away in a ship'; balgun-
al bumaga, 'she was killed by a gun '; durda cart-al bar-
duk bardaga, ' the dog went away with the cart.'

THE DIALECT OF W. ATJSTKALIA.

49

The Plural numbei' is indicated by adding the numerals, but all
beyond three are bula, ' much,' ' many.' The words for human
beings add -man, or -arra, or -garra to form the plural ; man
is an abbreviated form or man-da, 'altogether,' 'collectively.'
Woi'ds ending with a vowel take -man; those ending with a
consonant take -garra; as, kardo, 'a husband or wife,' j;/if.,
kardo-man; yago, 'a woman,' ^;?tt., yago-man; djuko,
' sister,' ^;Z^t., djuko-man; mammul, ' son,' ^;Zi6., mammul-
garra; gulag, ' a child,' ;;??(., gulag-garra.

Declexsiox of a ISToux.

Yago, 'a woman.'

Singular.

Plural.

Nom.

Yago

Yago-man

Gen.

Yago-ak

Yago-man-ak

Bat.

Yag-ol or Yago-al

Yago-man-al

Ace.

Yago-in

Yago-manin

Ahl.

Yago-dl

Yago-man-al

The Ablative means ' with,' ' by means of.'

Examples: — ^Yago maiak-al yugau bar dag a, 'a woman
came to the house'; n'y agga yago-ak wanna, ' that is a woman's
staff'; gadjo marain yago-al yogaga, 'I gave flour to a
woman'; gadjo yago-in djinnag-ga, ' Isaw a woman'; budjor
yago-al bianaga, ' the ground was dug by a woman.'

The commonest and most useful nouns are : —

Time, Weather, &c.

Cloud — m ar-gabbi.

Comet (meteor) — binnar.

Darkness — maiart.

Dawn — waulu.

Daylight — birait.

Lightning— babbag-win.

Mid-day — m aly a r u k .

Moon — raiki.

]Moonlight — mikag.

Rain — gabbi ; moko.

Sky — gudjait.

Stars — gan-gar.

Sun — gan-ga.

Sunshine — monak.

Thunder — raalgar.

To-day — aiyi.

To-morrow — morogoto ; binag.

Yesterday — mairh-ruk.

d

Elements.

Air (wind) — mar.
Earth — budj or.
Fire — kalla.
Water — gabbi.

Seasons.

Spring — jilba.
Summer — birok.
Autumn — burnuro.
Winter — ma g-goro.

Individuals.

A man — mammarap.

An old man — windo.

A young man — gulambiddi.

A woman — yago.

An old woman — Avindo.

A young woman-

50

AN AUSTEALIAK LANGUAGE.

A child — §ulag.
An infant — guclja.

Relations.

Ancestors — n'yettin-gal.
Aunt — miin-gat.
Brother — gundu.

„ (eldest) — guban;boran.
,, (middle) — kardijit.
„ (youngest) — guloain.
„ -in-law — deni.
Daughter — gwoairat.
Father — mamma n.

„ -in-law — kan-gun.
Husband, wife^kardo.
Mother — gan-gan.

„ -in-law — man-gat.
Nephew — maiur.
Niece — gambart.
Sister — djuko.

„ (eldest) — jindam.
,, (middle) — kauat.
,, (youngest) — giiloain.
,, (married) — mairak.
,, -in-law — deni.
Son — mammal.
Uncle — kan-gun.

Parts of the body.

Arm (upper) — wan-go.

,, (lower — marga.

,, (right) — gunman.

,, (left) — d'yu-ro.
Back — bogal.
Beard — gan-ga.
Blood — gubo.
Bone — kotye.
Bowels— kona g.
Breast (male)— mingo.

,, (female) — bibi.
Chin — gan-ga.

Countenance — dtamel ; minait.
Ear — ton-ka.
Elbow — nogait.
Excrement — kona g.
Eye — mel.
„ -brow — mimbat.

Eye-lash — mel-kambar.

,, -lids — mel-nalyak.
Elesh — ilain.
Foot— jina.
Forehead — bigaic.
Hair of head — kattamimgarra.
Hand^marhra.
Head — katta.
Heel — gardo.
Knee — bonnit.
Leg — matta.
Liver — maierri.
Mouth — dta.
Neck — wardo.
Nose — mulya.
Side— garril.
Stomach — kobbiilo.
Tear — mingalya.
Teeth — nalgo.

„ (upper)— gardak-yugauin.

,, (lower) — ii-a-yugauin.
Temples — yaba.
Thumb — marhra-gan-gan.
Tongue — dtalag.

Animals, Birds, kc.

Bat — bambi.
Bird (a) — jida.
Crow — wardag.
Dog — durda.
Flea, louse — kolo.
Fly — nurdo.
Lizard — jina-ara.
Pig — m a ggoro g.
Snake — wan- gal.

Miscellaneous.

Bark (of tree) — mabo.
Egg — nurdo.

Food (of all sorts) — dadja.
Grass — bobo.
Grave (a) — bogol.
Hill (a)— katta.
House (a)— maia.
Lake (large) — mulur.
,, (small) — gu-ra.
River — bilo.

THE DIALECT OF TV. AUSTRALIA. 51

Rock, stone — buyi. Tree — burnu.

Sand — goyarra. Water — gabbi.

Sea — odern. Water (fresh) — gabbi dji-kap.
Stick (wood) — garba. ,, (stream)— gabbi gurjait.

„ (fire-) — kalla-matta. Young (animal)— noba.

2. Adjectives.

The adjectives most commonly in use are: —

Alive — won-gin, doxxluk Hot — kallag.

Angry — garrag Like (similar) — mogin.

Arm (left) — n'yar'lo. Little — n'yu-map.

,, (right) — gun-man. Long, length — walaiadi.

Bad — djul. , • Low — gar-dak.

Big — gomon. Narrow — nulu.

Bitter — djallam. Near — barduk.

Black — moan. Old — windo.

Clear (as water) — karrail. Red — ^wilgilag.

Cold — nagga. Short — gorad (-da).

Dead — wonnaga. Sick — mendaik.

Dry (not wet) — ilar. Slow — dabbak.

Far away — urai". Soft — gunyak.

Fat — boain-gadak. Sweet — mulyit.

Fresh — milgar. Tall — urri.

Good — gwahha. Thin — kotyelarra.

Green — gerip-gerip. True — bundo.

Hard — murdoen. Wet — balyan.

Health (in) — barra-barra. White — wilban.

High — iragan. Wild — waii-waii.

A substantive acquires an adjective meaning by taking such
suffixes as -gadak, 'having, possessing,' -bru, 'without,' which
cori-esponds to the English suffix 'less'; as, jigala-gadak, 'having
horns,' 'a cow'; kardo-gadak, 'having a husband or wife,'
'married'; boka-bru, 'cloak-less'; gabbi-bru, 'without Avater.'

Comparison of Adjectives.

Some adjectives add jin for the comparative; as, from dabbak,
'slow,' dabbak-jin, 'slower'; gwidjir, 'shai'p,' gwidjir-jin
'sharper'; yerrak, ' high,' yerrak-j in, 'higher.' But usually a
reduplication makes the comparative, and -jil is added to the
base for the superlative; as, gwabba, 'good,' gwabba-gwabba,
' better'; gwabba-jil, ' best.' This intensive particle -j il, equiva-
lent to ' verily,' may be added to other parts of speech ; as,
kardo-jil, 'one who is in the direct line for marryiog with
another'; dadja-jil, 'it is certainly meat'; kannah-jil, 'is it
indeed so'? The English 'very' is rendered by a reduplication;
as, mulyit-mulyit, 'very sweet.'

AN AUSTEALIAN LANGUAGE.

Numerals.

' One,' gain ; 'two,' gudjal ; ' three,' warli-rag ; 'four,' gud-
jal-gudjal; 'five' is marh-jin bag a, 'half the hands'; 'ten'
is belli-belli marhjin baga, 'the hand on either side.'

In reckoning time tlie natives say ' sleeps ' for days, and
* summers and winters ' for years. There is no Article,

3. Proxouns.

The pronouns must be carefully used, for a very slight change
in the termination of any one of them will alter altogether the
force and meaning of a sentence.

The 2')erso7ial jjronouns avo : —

Singular. Plural.

G-adjo or ganya, 'I.' Gala-ta, 'we.'

N'yundo or ginni, 'thou.' N'yurag, 'ye.'

Bal, 'he, she, it.' Balgun, 'they.'

They are thus declined :-

Nam,

Gen.
Daf.
Accu.
Ahl.

1st.

I G-adjo

) Ganya
Gannalak
Ganna
Ganyain

Singular.

2nd.
N'yundo
Ginni
Nyunnolak

jSI'yunno
Ginnin

Plural.

3rd.

I Bal

Balak
Bah\k
Balin
Balal

Nom, Galata N'yurag Balgun

Gen, Gannilak N'yuragak Balgundk

Lat. Gannilak N'yuragal Balgunak

Ace. Gannil (-in) N'yuragin Balgunin

Ahl. Gannilal N'yuragal Balgunal

There are thus two forms for the Sing. Kom. of the first and
second pi'onouns ; gad jo and n'yundo seem to be used with an
active sense of the verb, but ganya and ginni with a passive
sense; for there is no passive /or?)i of the verb, and there is no
verb ' to be'; ganya and ginni are always used with a parti-
cii)le or an adjective; gadjo and n'yundo are never so used.
Examples of their use: — Gadjo djinnag, 'I see,' but ganya
bardin, 'I am going '; gadjo dtan, 'I pierce,' but ganya gan-
nauin, ' I am eating.'; gadjo burno dendagaga, ' I climbed a
tree,' but ganya waugalal bukkanaga, 'I was bitten by a
snake'; ganya windo, 'I am old'; ganya garrag, 'I am
angry.' Similarly for the second pronouns ; as, n'yundo kattidj,
'do you undei'stand "? but y an ginni wan-gauin, 'what are

THE DIALECT OF W, ATTSTKALIA. 53

you talking about'"? n'yundo naitjak gabbi ganna gagau-
bru, ' why cio you not fetch me water'? but ginni naitjak
balin bumawin,- 'why are you beating me'?; ginni cljul,
* you are wicked'; ginni goradda, ' you are short.'

1st. 2nd. 3rd.

Kom. 1. G-alli Nubal Bula

2. Galla lilubal Bulala

3. Grannik Nubin Bulen.
Another form of gannik is gannana.

The forms marked nom. 1 are used by brothers and sisters or
two friends closely related; nom. 2., by parent and child or by
nephew and uncle ; nom. 3., by husband and wife or by two
persons of different sexes affectionately attached, or (gannana)
by two brothers-in-law.

The Possessive Pronouns are : —

Gr a n n a, ' my, ' g a n n a 1 a k, ' mine '; n'y u n n a, ' thy, ' n'y u n-
nalak, n'yunnalag, 'thine'; balak, balalak, 'his, her, its/
gannilak, 'our or ours'; n'yuragak, 'your or yours'; balgunak,
' their o?" theirs.' The Demonstrative Pronouns are: — N'yagga,
'that,' 'those'; nidj a, ' this,' 'these.' Tl\ie Interrogative Pronouns
iire: — Ganni, 'who'? i.e., 'who are you'? gando, 'who"? i.e.,
' who did that '? gannog, * whose '?

4. Veres.

The verbs in most common use are : —

Arise — irabin Fight — bakadju

Beat — buma Fl_y — bardag

Become — abbin Go — bardo; watto

Bite — ^bakkan Go away — kolbardo

Break — takkan Hear — kattidj

Bring; carry off; take Pain — bakkan

away — barrag Pierce — dtan

Marry — kardo barrag See— djinnag; gan-gau

Burn (tire) — burrariip Sit — ginnau

Bury — bianan Speak — wan-gau

Carry — gagau Spear — gidjil

Cook — dukun Stand — yugau

Cry — mirag Take — gagau

Cry out — mirau Tear — jeran

Dig — bian Throw — gwardo

Eat, drink — ganno ; nalgo. Tie — yutarn

Fear — waien Understand — kattidj
Walk — ganna u.

54 AN AUSTRALIANS' LANGL'AGE,

Imperatives are : —

Come here — koAva-kowa, yual Leave it alone — bal or waiija

Go on — gatti Listen — nah-nah

Get np — irap Take care — garrodjin

Go away — watto Stay, remain — nannup

Tenses.

\. Indie, present. — For this, use either the infinitive or tlie form
of the present participle ; as, gadjo djinnag, 'I see'; but
ganya buraawin, *I am beating.'

2. Ijidic. preterite. — Use the past participle, or add -ga to the in-
finitive ; the relative distance of the past periods of time is
indicated by prefixing to the tense the words gori, 'just now,'
karamb, ' a short time since,' gorah, ' a long time ago.'

3. Indie, future. — Here the first and second personal pronouns
singular become gadjul and n'yundul, ' I will,' ' you wulL'
The distance of the future time is indicated by placing before
the verb the adverbs bur da, 'presently,' and mila for any
more remote time.

4. Imperative mood. — Lay emphasis on the last vowel of the
present indicative.

5. Participle jn-esent. — Add -in or -win to the infinitive.

,, past, — Add -ga to the infinitive.

6. Passive voice. — Here the form of the sentence is elliptical ;
therefore ganya, ginni are used with the past participle and
the ablative of the instrument or cause.

DECLENSION of a TRANSITIVE VERB.

Buma, * to beat,' ' kill,' * blow as a flower.'

Infinite — Buma. Part. pres. — Bumawin.

Part. past. — Bumaga.

Tense 1. *bumawin. 1\ 2. *gori bumaga. T. 3. fburda buma.

T. 4. buma.

These numbers indicate the Tenses as shown above.

*The pronouns to be used here are: — Sing, ganya, ginni,
bal; Plur. galata, n'yurag, balgun ; but instead of ganya
and ginni, T. 2. takes gadjo and nyundo ; there use the forms
gadjul, n'yundul.

Passive Voice. — ^For the passive voice, use the same tense-forms
as in the active voice, that is, buma for the pres. and the/ut.,
and bumaga for the past, but prefix to them the accusative cases
of the personal pronouns ; thus, ganya-in gori bumaga, 'I was

THE DIALECT OF "W. ArSTBALIA. 5o

beaten lately'; lit., ' (some one) beat me lately.' But the ablative
of the cause or instrument may also be used to form a passive
voice; thus, ganya gidjial d tan nag a, 'I am pierced by a
spear.'

The substantive verh. — There does not appear to be any
copula; it is certainly not used in such sentences as ganya
yulap, 'I am hungry'; ginni kotyelara, 'thou art thin'; bal
windo, 'he is old'; galata gwabba, 'we are good'; n'yurag
djul, 'you are wicked'; balgun mindait, 'they are sick.'

5. Adverbs.

The adverb is placed before the verb ; useful adverbs are : —

After (behind) — golan-ga Never — yuatjil

Again — garro No — yuada

Already — gori Not — bart ; bru ; yuada

Always — dowir Now — yaii

Before (in front) — gwaicagat Perhaps^gabbain

Close to ; near — barduk So — winnirak

Continually — kalyagal So many — winnir

Enough — belak That way — wunno

Formerly — karamb Tlien — garro

Here — n'yal There (j)rox.) — yellinya

How many — namman „ (remote) — boko ; bokoja

Immediately — gwaic; ilak Where — winji; winjal; yan

Thus — wanno-ic Yes — qua

More — gatti-gatti Yonder — bokoja

6. Prepositions.

These are few in number : —

After {clat.) — go